The Godling

Chronicles

Book one

“The Sword of Truth”

Written by Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

The Godling Chronicles (Book One) The Sword of Truth

By

Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

Copyright © Brian D. Anderson 2012

Published by Longfire Press

Names, characters and incidents depicted in this book are products of the author's imagination, or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events, locales, organizations, or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental and beyond the intent of the author or the publisher.

All rights reserved. No part of this book maybe reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means whatsoever, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher and/or author.

Contents

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Dedication

For my wife Eleni and my son, a creative genius, Jonathan.

Prologue

It was all the Dark Knight could do to keep his teeth from chattering. The chill mountain air was thick with a dense fog that soaked into his skin, making every movement of the wind like torture. The only sounds were the crunch and clatter of his horse’s hooves and his own labored breathing.

He could feel that he was drawing near to his destination, yet he could see nothing but dull gray fog and the gnarled and vicious shadows of long dead trees.

He steeled his wits and warily urged his steed onward. He knew what was to come, and it unnerved him. The prospect of death had never bothered him. He had faced it many times before, but this was something different. After today, everything would change. After today, the whole world would tremble. For the first time in his life, he was uncertain. Decades of struggle and planning were culminating into this one moment, this one action. He should have been excited, but for some reason was unable to shake his sense of foreboding.

His horse spotted the edge of the precipice just before they both would have plummeted to their deaths. It reared fiercely, nearly throwing him from the saddle onto the hard, jagged stone path. Calming his nervous steed, he dismounted and walked to the cliff’s edge. He strained his eyes, attempting to penetrate the fog, but could see nothing. Yet he knew what was out there. Reaching down, he picked up a small stone and tossed it over the cliff’s edge, but heard nothing.

‘The trial begins,’ he thought. He turned and retrieved his sword and scabbard from his saddle and fastened them to his belt. As he peered into the nothingness, his armor felt heavy and cumbersome. Feats of prowess in battle were far different from what he was about to do. Armor would certainly be a hindrance, but he dare not leave it behind. He backed away from the edge of the cliff and closed his eyes, his heart pounding in his ears. For a long moment, he stood motionless as stone.

Suddenly, the sinews of his thick, powerful legs burst into life, propelling him forward at amazing speed. In a flash, he was at the edge and jumped with a heavy grunt. Time stood still as he flew through the air. For a split-second, a flash of fear filled his chest as he felt himself begin to fall, but relief and triumph quickly replaced this as his boots struck solid rock. Somehow, with a huge effort, he managed to keep his footing and stumbled to a halt. As he slowly stepped forward, the fog lessened and he realized he had jumped atop the first in a series of immense natural rock pillars.

“At last,” he muttered.

Each pillar was about eight feet apart and could easily accommodate a dozen mounted men. He could make out twelve pillars, but beyond that the fog thickened again. Experience told him not to get too excited; nothing was ever as simple as it seemed. He could leap the distance easily enough, even with armor on. However, considering the prize that awaited him, something told him there was more to it than that.

Without warning, the ground began to shake violently. The Dark Knight could feel the rock starting to give way beneath his feet. With no time to think, he leapt to the next pillar, only to feel this also begin to crumble the second his boots landed. From pillar to pillar, he raced for his life. In seconds, he knew he would reach the fog again and be unable to see. As he reached the last column, he planted both feet hard on its edge and pushed with all his strength, propelling his body into the void.

His upper thigh struck hard against a lip of rock, flinging his head and torso forward. The sound of grinding metal tore through the dank air as his armor crashed against rough stone. He scrambled and clawed as he felt himself beginning to slip off the edge. Just as he was about to fall, his hand caught a crack in the rock and he pulled himself up. He lay there for a moment, taking stock of his hurts. Nothing serious. His thighs would be bruised, and the hilt of his sword had jammed into his kidney, but overall he was fine. He listened as the thunder of collapsing pillars echoed, then disappeared.

He rose to his feet, checked his sword and surveyed his surroundings. Before him lay a square courtyard of plain black granite. On either side were smooth, sheer walls one hundred feet high, and at the far end, carved into the living rock, a flight of steps leading up.

In the center of the courtyard stood a ten-foot obelisk of unadorned white marble. As the Dark Knight neared the obelisk he heard a low hum. His eyes narrowed and his muscles tensed as his hands slid to the hilt of his sword. The hum grew louder and deeper the closer he came, until his body shook with its intensity. He desperately covered his ears, but to no avail. He felt his knees begin to weaken; each step became agony as the loud hum grew to a deep roar. As he stepped directly beside the obelisk, he felt blood trickling from his nose.

‘Almost there,’ he thought, taking another step.

The moment he passed the obelisk, the hum stopped. It was then that his legs gave way and he collapsed, his chest heaving and ears ringing. After several minutes he lifted his head and looked toward the steps. Slowly he rose to his feet, wiped the blood from his nose, and began his climb.

In the distance, he could see a bright light that obscured his vision. As he finally reached the top, the light lessened and his eyes began to adjust, revealing an immense stone alcove, fifty feet high and nearly twice as wide. The stone was polished white marble, inlaid with veins of pure gold and precious jewels. Standing tall and proud at its center was a gold statue of an ancient warrior. It was ten feet tall and adorned with fine chain mail. Its grim features told of countless battles as its deeply set eyes stared - penetrating and unwavering - with a sense of keen understanding that gave it the distinct impression of life. Atop its brow sat a crown of opal laurels, each leaf veined with silver inlay. Its arms were outstretched with its palms held aloft, and there the Dark Knight saw it. The sword. Its gleaming steel glowed with an unnatural light that spilled down onto the marble floor like a ghostly mist. Its hilt was plain steel, with neither jewel nor marking to tell of its true worth, and the handle was wrapped in hard, unremarkable black leather.

The Dark Knight felt his pulse quicken as he slowly walked forward. It was his; the Sword of Truth was finally his. Closer and closer he came to his prize. With each step he drew nearer to the end of his quest. Then, from the corner of his eye, he saw a tall figure.

He was dressed in a pure white linen robe bound at the waist by a thin, white silk rope. A pair of simple calfskin boots could be seen beneath his robe, and he wore a circlet of silver on his brow. His face was smooth and ageless with a long, hawk-like nose and pronounced chin. His eyes were deep blue and full of sadness and pity. He held no weapon that the Dark Knight could see.

He turned to face the Man in White and unsheathed his sword. “I thought I’d find you here,” he said grimly. “Do you intend to fight me unarmed?”

A sad smile crept over the Man in White’s face. “I do not intend to fight you at all,” he replied.

The Dark Knight burst into laughter, “Some protector you are. You’re a coward, unworthy to bear the sword.”

“You’re right,” he said. “I’m not worthy. But neither are you.”

“Really?” the Dark Knight mocked, stepping forward menacingly. “We’ll see about that. With that sword, I will be able to break the bonds that have held us back for an eternity. We will finally be free! Can’t you see that?”

Regret washed over the face of the Man in White. “Free? You mean free to rule? Free to murder? Free to do evil with impunity?”

“No, you fool!” the Dark Knight shouted. “Free to show the world what we truly are. Free to take my...” His voice calmed. “Our rightful place in this cursed world.”

“What we truly are, my old friend, has nothing to do with what is in your heart,” he replied.

The Dark Knight scowled. “Whatever is in my heart was driven there by those you serve.” Slowly, his face softened. “Please, brother, why not join me? I could use your advice and companionship in the times ahead. Together we could shape the world into a paradise.”

Tears began to well in the Man in White’s eyes. “There was a time when I would not have hesitated. However, that time is long past. Now I know who you truly are. The paradise you speak of is no paradise at all; it is hell.”

“Hell, you say? What do you know of hell? I have seen hell. I have lived in it. Your masters sent me there, and it’s time the favor was returned.” The Dark Knight’s face darkened.

“You sent yourself there with your betrayal,” said the Man in White.

“I betrayed you?” the Dark Knight scoffed. “Fool! Your masters have poisoned your mind. Don’t you see that? Don’t you understand what I’m trying to do?”

The Man in White’s eyes narrowed. “I understand all too well. I understand that you will fail. No matter what happens this day, you will fail.”

“We shall see,” he said ominously. “It’s clear to me now that you cannot be reasoned with as I’d hoped.” The Dark Knight tensed. “And your blood will spill this day for your foolishness.”

In a flash the Dark Knight leapt forward, slashing his blade at the Man in White’s neck. But the Man in White dodged with an unnatural speed and the stroke passed harmlessly.

Again and again the Dark Knight pressed forward, his fury and frustration growing with each unsuccessful blow. Minutes passed, and the Dark Knight had gained no ground. He began to feel the weight of fatigue burning in his muscles. The Man in White did not attempt to strike; his lack of weapon and armor made it easy for him to avoid the onslaught, and his many years of training made his every step perfect. Slowly, the Dark Knight began to understand his peril. He could not keep this up indefinitely. Eventually his strength would be gone, and he would be virtually helpless.

Then, in a desperate gamble, the Dark Knight flung his sword at the left leg of his opponent, causing him to shift right and slightly back. Normally he would never intentionally disarm himself, but this time the gamble worked. With all his strength, he leapt forward, reaching in his belt, and pulling out a small dagger. His body slammed into the Man in White as he plunged it into his heart.

The Man in White gasped and threw his arms around his killer as both bodies crashed to the floor. The Dark Knight wrenched himself from the Man in White’s grasp, ripping the dagger free.  Blood soaked his robe and spilled onto the marble floor. The Man in White’s eyes grew dim as he watched the Dark Knight rise and walk to the statue that held the Sword.

This is the end, the Man in White thought as death overcame him, …the end of the world. I have failed.

The Dark Knight reached out and grabbed the hilt of the sword. Lightning flashed as he lifted it from its cradle and held it aloft.

“It’s mine!” he screamed. “It’s miiiiiiiine!”

Chapter 1

Gewey Stedding’s wagon rolled up the main avenue of the village of Sharpstone, heavy with its cargo of fall hay. Normally this would be neither exciting nor very important, but recent years had been hard, and the sight of commerce filled the villagers with hope. Fall hay meant food for the livestock, meat for the winter, and trade for the spring.

The streets were empty for this time of year. Usually merchants and travelers from up and down the Goodbranch River kept them busy, but over the last several years trade had slowed to a trickle. The few people who did pass through did not linger, and brought little coin. News of trouble and hardship came with each boat and wagon, regardless of where they came from. The world was in turmoil, and everyone could feel it.

In better times, Sharpstone would be readying for the Festival of Gerath, god of the earth and mountains. Gewey had eagerly looked forward to the festival each year since he was a boy. It was three days of games, music and some of the best food in the whole kingdom. It ended with the entire town parading to the market square to crown the King and Queen of the festival. As a child, Gewey had dreamed of being crowned King, but as things were, it didn’t look like that would ever happen. Last year, the Village Council cut the festival to one day - this year, with little to celebrate and no money to spare, the festival had been all but forgotten. Only a few elders had hung the traditional pumpkin vines above their door, and no one had decorated the statue of Gerath that stood in the village square.

Despite the hardships, the sight of Gewey’s wagon made the people smile. Gewey’s honest dealings and helpful nature made him very popular in the village. He was always ready to help those in need and never shied away from hard work, even when he worked for free - which lately, happened very frequently. Though only seventeen years old, he stood six feet two inches tall and had the shoulders of a blacksmith. With raven black hair, flawless skin, and chiseled features, it was little wonder that the young girls of the village swooned as he passed. The older women were already talking about who would be a good match for him. Luckily, he hadn’t turned eighteen - the time of his coming of age - and he could avoid certain uncomfortable conversations with the Village Mothers.

Called the ‘Village Hens’ by the men (though only when they couldn’t hear), the Village Mothers handled most of the day-to-day operations in Sharpstone. If there was a fire, they organized the reconstruction. If streets needed repair or the river docks rebuilding, the Village Mothers saw it done. The Village Council - headed by the mayor - controlled the finance and commerce, but without the Mothers, Sharpstone would come to a halt.

Gewey had been his own master since his father had died two years earlier of an illness that had swept through the village during an extremely harsh winter. His mother had passed when he was but three, from injuries she received falling from her horse. The memories he had of her were few, and colored by a child’s perception. He knew she was kind and beautiful. A painting of her hung above his fireplace. His father would look at it all night on the anniversary of her death and tell Gewey stories about her life and his love for her.

After his father’s death, the village council had approached Gewey about selling his farm and taking an apprenticeship with one of the local tradesmen. Gewey’s father had been the largest producer of hay in the area, and they had serious doubts as to whether a fifteen-year-old boy would be able to maintain a farm alone. The idea of losing such a resource was unthinkable, and though Gewey had not yet come of age, his father had left him all of his property. Short of petitioning the King, there was nothing they could do to make Gewey give up the land.

Gewey refused every offer, stating that his father wanted him to keep the farm going, and had told him so before he died. The Council was preparing to make one more effort to change his mind when he showed up at the market square with enough hay to supply the whole village for half the year. He had not only bundled and loaded it himself, but also turned a nice profit at market. From then on, Gewey was thought of by all as being the master of his own land; his coming of age was never mentioned again. He was treated as any other landowner and even consulted occasionally by the Council.

Gewey’s image of himself was somewhat different. He harvested hay as he had seen his father do a thousand times before. He bartered the way his father had taught him. He held onto the farm because his father would have wanted him to. Nevertheless, in his heart, he was not yet a man. He was merely a boy, still trying to make his father proud. His size and strength made others think him a man, but at night, when he was all alone, his mind was full of fear and doubt.

The village of Sharpstone was just south of the Sarlian Wastes, at the northern most part of the Kingdom of Megádos. Just to the north was a crossroads that joined the Pithian Highway, leading south to the western gate of the capital, Helenia, then on to the southern ports and the Far Run Road, which spanned the breadth of the entire continent. The land was flat and fertile, and the weather moderate and prone to early springs. The inhabitants, though not numerous, were kindly and welcomed strangers, so long as they did not cause trouble.

Though not a great producer of goods, the village thrived by being a stop-off point for commerce. They boasted some of the finest blacksmiths and liveries for a hundred miles, and provided a welcome respite for many a weary merchant or pilgrim. The inns were clean and comfortable, and frequented by traveling entertainers who often provided a lively nightlife. Overall, Sharpstone was a decent place. That is, until the dark times began.

It had been six years since what the villagers called the Long Freeze. The winter did not break, and the planting season came and went. Many villagers became ill and died. Gewey remembered the sadness in his father’s eyes each morning as they had stared out on the frozen fields during the first year. The thought of those long days of fruitless labor still made his belly ache with hunger. For an entire year, the ground stayed frozen. When spring finally came, the land was different. It seemed as if the life had been sucked right out of it. The crop was small, livestock suffered, and each year Gewey watched his father’s land shrink and dry up further.

The few villagers up and about at that time of the morning waved to Gewey’s wagon as he passed. Mostly, they wished him a good day. Others, however, had earnest business and called for him to set aside time for them. This always made Gewey feel uneasy. He was not interested in business. Despite his ability to turn a profit, he hated bartering and trade.

Before the Long Freeze, the avenue leading to the trading court would have been bustling with activity. However, in recent years shops opened later and later, and a few had even closed, the owners moving to the capital in hope of finding work. As he approached the market square, he could see that it was almost empty, aside from a few vendors who had only just arrived.

Suddenly a scream pierced the air, making Gewey jump in his seat.

He halted his wagon and saw Thad Marshall, the local baker, running from the square. He jumped down and grabbed the man as he passed. Thad was normally a calm fellow, but it was clear to Gewey that something had terrified him.

“What happened?” Gewey exclaimed.

It took a moment for Thad to steady himself enough to speak.

“My wife….” Thad said, “I just saw my wife.” He was shaking uncontrollably.

The baker’s wife had died the previous winter. The whole town had turned out for her funeral.

“Your wife?” asked Gewey, uncertain how to react.

“I know it sounds crazy, but I swear that I just saw her standing in the market. I saw her as clear as I see you now.”

“Are you sure it was her?” asked Gewey.

“There’s no mistake,” he cried. “I was with her for thirty-six years. I’d know her anywhere.”

Gewey looked thoughtfully at the man. “Well, Master Marshall, I don’t doubt your word. The ways of spirits are strange. Who can understand them?”

“You don’t understand,” the baker replied. “She looked decayed and rotten. It wasn’t her spirit I saw.”

“You mean you saw your dead wife’s body walking in the market?” exclaimed Gewey, surprised.

“That’s exactly what I’m saying,” Thad said, tears streaming down his face.

“Did anyone else see her?” he asked.

“No…m-maybe…I don’t know,” he stammered.

Gewey helped the baker into the wagon. “Come,” he said. “Let’s see if we can find out what’s going on.”

The baker nodded slowly and slumped down in the seat, tears still pouring down his face. Gewey urged the horse forward in the direction of the market. He didn’t think the baker would lie, and he wasn’t the unstable type, but a grieving man’s mind could sometimes play tricks.

Gewey guided his wagon across the square to the far end, near the entrance to the river dock, and halted. Thad doubled over with his face buried in his hands. Gewey hopped down from the wagon and put his hand gently on the baker’s arm.

“Come on, Master Marshall,” he said, using his most soothing voice. “Show me where you saw her.”

Slowly, Thad crept from the wagon and led Gewey to the corner of the market where he usually set up his stand.

“She was standing right there,” he said, pointing a few feet ahead of them. “At first I thought I was seeing things, but she looked right at me.”

Gewey examined the area, but could find nothing out of place.

“Wait here,” he said. “I’ll ask around and see if anyone else saw anything.”

Gewey questioned the few people there, but no one had seen anything other than the baker screaming as he ran out of the market.

“What could have scared old Thad so badly, I wonder?” asked Melton Fathing, a local artisan and town gossip. “I was just about to check on him.”

“It was nothing,” answered Gewey, quickly walking away. He certainly didn’t want to humiliate Thad, and Melton would already have started talk. Besides, he didn’t like Melton.

Gewey told Thad that no one else had seen his wife.

“I’m not making this up!” Thad exclaimed.

“I’m not saying you are,” replied Gewey, trying to calm the man down. “Why don’t you go home? I’ll keep an eye out and let you know if anything unusual happens.”

“Maybe you’re right,” said Thad. “Maybe I just need to rest. It’s been so hard this last year, losing my wife and all. Business hasn’t been the best, either.”

The rest of what Thad said trailed off into incoherent mumbling as he stumbled from the square. Gewey noticed Melton staring intently and forced a smile.  ‘Best to let it be,’ he thought to himself.

It took him only an hour to unload his wagon. He had always been good at physical labor. His father bragged that his son could outwork ten men. Though this was true, Gewey always held back when others were around. He didn’t want people to think he was odd or different, and if people knew how strong he really was, the talk would start.

The rest of the day was uneventful as he sold his hay, most of which went to the livery. Gewey did as he promised and kept watch for anything unusual, but thankfully saw nothing.

His wagon empty and his purse full, Gewey began the long trip back to his farm. He stopped by Thad Marshall’s house to check on him but there was no answer.  Probably sleeping, he thought.

As he turned toward his wagon, he noticed a shadowy figure approaching from the avenue. The evening shadows obscured his features, but Gewey knew right away who it was. His long strides and graceful motions gave him away.

“Hello, Lee,” called Gewey.

The man said nothing. Lee Starfinder was a strange sort. He was nearly as tall as Gewey, though not as wide in the shoulders. He had distinctly sharp, angular features and deep olive skin. He had moved to Sharpstone more than ten years ago, claiming to be a nobleman and scholar, from north of the Razor Edge Mountains, here to retire and live out his days quietly. Gewey, however, thought he had the look of the sea-people from the coast of the Western Abyss. He kept to himself and employed several local artisans, so the villagers made little fuss about the man’s oddities and reclusive nature.

Lee walked straight up to Gewey and pressed a letter into his hand.

“Wait until you get home to read it,” said Lee. “No questions, boy.”

Gewey stared at the man, his mouth gaping. Lee spun around and strode off, leaving Gewey baffled. He stared at the letter. It was old and yellow, but the seal was unbroken.

“Great,” muttered Gewey. “A long trip made even longer.”

Gewey continued on his way home, trying to think about anything other than what the letter might reveal.

Chapter 2

The ride home seemed to take forever. Gewey had put the letter in his pocket, but could hardly resist the urge to open it. He tried to push his horse to move faster, but it did no good; she was a workhorse, not a racehorse. By the time he reached his farm he could barely sit still. He put the wagon and horse away in record time, and almost pulled the front door off its hinges on his way inside. The house was dark and cold. Gewey frowned, realizing that the letter would have to wait until he’d tended to the fire and lit the lanterns. Once these tasks were completed, Gewey finally sat down in his father’s chair next to the hearth and retrieved the letter from his pocket. He stared at the seal for a moment, and then carefully opened it.

My son,

If you are reading this, my time on this world has passed. As I write, you are but two years old. Should I die before you are old enough to hear what I need to tell you, I will entrust this letter to Lord Starfinder. I have known him for many years, and he has said he plans to move here soon to retire. What I am going to tell you will not be easy for you to understand, but you must try.

I am not your real father.

Gewey nearly dropped the letter. He felt like a hammer had struck him between the eyes. He read the line again in disbelief, and then continued.

Believe me when I say that I could not love you more, even if you were my own flesh and blood. You were given to me to care for when you were an infant. A merchant who happened by our farm as he traveled south to Millhaven Springs had found you. He told us he had run across a small caravan that had been attacked by a band of marauders, and that he had found you in the rubble. He told us he could not care for you, and asked that we take you in. Your mother and I had no children of our own and did not question such a blessing from the gods. The moment I looked at you, I knew you were my son. I even managed to deceive the village elders as to your identity, but I suspect they wanted to be deceived.

Six months had passed when Lord Starfinder came to visit me. I knew him in my younger and more adventurous days. He told me he had come to purchase horses, but I believe he had other motives. We may have fine horses here, but the weeks of travel would have made such a journey unprofitable, and, at the very least, uncomfortable. I told him the truth about how you came to us, and he didn’t look surprised when he heard my story. The fact is, I believe you are the reason he came in the first place, and I believe you are the reason he moved here. He stayed for two weeks, buying up nearly every horse in the village - most of which he turned right around and sold again - and each night before sundown, he came to visit. He claimed that it was to enjoy simple hospitality and tell old tales, and at first his visits didn’t seem odd. Lee was always one for a good story and decent wine, but I began to suspect different reasons when he insisted on holding you every night until you went to sleep. He had never really cared for children, but when he held you, he smiled and ignored everything else until you were in your crib.

On his last visit, after he had rocked you to sleep and your mother left the room to put you down, he told me that you were special, and that the gods had blessed you with a great destiny. At first, I thought he was playing a joke, but the look in his eyes told me otherwise. When I asked him how he knew this, he waved me off and said that eventually it would be revealed. The man has always been somewhat of a mystery, but I believe he’s right. Even as a baby, I can see that you are special.

Son, you are destined for great things. Go see Lord Starfinder. He has knowledge of the world that you will one day need. He can be a little strange sometimes, but men like him always are.

Remember, son, I love you with all my heart, no matter what destiny has in store. Frankly, I hope Lee’s wrong, and that you stay with your mother and me until we’re old and gray. I would love nothing more than to look at my grandchildren as I look at you now.

All My Love,

Father

Gewey sat in silence. He felt as if his whole world had been stripped away. Why had his father never told him? This had been written when he was a baby, so surely there had been time. He felt confused and angry. None of it made sense. Why wait so long? Why the deception in the first place?

Gewey read the letter repeatedly, as if the words might change and his life would make sense again. But each time he found new unanswered questions. Finally, he stood up and ran out into the brisk night air. He felt dizzy and leaned against the porch. After a few minutes, he staggered back inside and went to bed. It would be several hours before sleep took him.

He went over his life in his mind, trying to remember some clue, some insight that might help him to understand, but came up with nothing. As far back as he could recall, his father had never been anything but that - his father. He tried to slow his mind and rid himself of his anger, remembering the love his father had always shown him, and the love Gewey felt for him in return.

Gewey fell asleep with one thought in his head: Lee Starfinder, he told himself. Tomorrow I’ll go see Lee Starfinder. Maybe he has answers.

That night, Gewey’s dreams were filled with horror. Visions of death and destruction swirled around him like a storm. Vast armies slaughtered each other, spilling oceans of blood. The sick and dying screamed out in agony. He tried not to look, but could not turn away. Trying to force himself awake only took him deeper into even more terrifying visions. Just when he thought he could no longer take it, the world exploded into a great ball of flame. Slowly it burned away until there was nothing but utter darkness, so complete that he could feel it. It wrapped around him, pressing in until he wanted to cry out in despair. It penetrated his mind and soul as if it sought to possess him completely. He fought desperately to get out, but there was nothing to fight against. The darkness yielded and contracted with every move he made. Just when he felt as if he would be overcome, a voice boomed out.

“Child,” it said. The sheer volume of the voice nearly split Gewey’s head in two. “Why do you resist?”

“Who are you?” asked Gewey. His own voice seemed weak and small.

“Who am I?” the voice shot back, almost mocking. “I am he who knows the answers to your questions. I am he who can give you what you seek.”

“I don’t understand,” said Gewey. “What questions?”

“I can tell you who you are, young one,” it replied. “The lies that surround you - the reason for your existence can be made clear. I can show you how to use your power to gain all you desire.”

Gewey’s mind reeled. He felt the malice and hatred in the voice, but was compelled to listen. He knew he shouldn’t, but he couldn’t help himself.

“You’re not real,” said Gewey finally. “You’re in my mind. I’m dreaming.”

“Of course you’re dreaming,” scoffed the voice. “But I am real. In your heart, you know it to be true. You’ve always known it. Didn’t you feel me watching you, protecting you?”

“Protecting me?” asked Gewey. “Protecting me from what?”

“It was I who brought you to safety so long ago,” it said. “It was I who has kept you secret from the world. But it is now time.” The voice paused. “Time for you to join me.”

Suddenly another voice burst into his mind. “He lies, Gewey! Don’t listen to him!”

Gewey felt as if a spell had been broken. “If you know me, then tell me who I am,” he said. “If you wish for me to join you, then send for me.”

“Of course,” answered the first voice. “Just tell me where you are, and you will be with me.”

“Don’t you know?” asked Gewey. “Aren’t you the one who brought me here?”

There was a long silence. Gewey felt the fury of the darkness press in.

“Tell me where you are, boy.” Its tone became threatening. “You cannot hide from me. I will find you.”

The darkness pressed harder and harder. Gewey wanted to run, but there was nowhere to go - no ground beneath his feet and no light to run to. His limbs felt heavy as panic set in.

“You cannot run,” the voice laughed. “You are mine.”

The darkness was crushing down on him. Gewey could no longer move or speak.

“Give in,” said the voice. “You fight me for nothing. I can help you. I can give you all that you desire.”

Gewey let out a final, desperate scream. The voice laughed, then faded away.

Gewey woke up drenched in sweat, his heart pounding like a drum. He could still feel the weight of the darkness on his chest, and the laughter of the voice echoed in his head. It took him a few minutes to calm down enough to get up and pour himself a cup of old wine. He barely tasted it as he quickly drained the cup. Just as he was about to pour another, he heard a horse galloping up to the house. Fear gripped him. He scanned the room for a weapon. The small knife he used for work was still in his pack in the barn, and his axe was in the shed on the side of the house. He spotted a carving knife on a shelf next to the cupboard and snatched it up. The hoof beats stopped, and at once there was a bang at the door.

“Gewey, open up.” It was Lee Starfinder.

Still gripping the knife, Gewey crept to the door and cautiously pulled it open. There stood Lee Starfinder, covered in sweat and still wearing his silk nightclothes. In his right hand he held a small sword. Gewey backed away from the door.

“Come with me,” commanded Lee. “We need to leave.”

Gewey stood in silence, unable to move.

“No time to lose your wits, boy,” said Lee, pushing past him. He scanned the house. “Nothing that can’t be left behind, I suppose.”

Gewey snapped out of his stupor. “Leave behind?” he cried. “What in blazes are you talking about?”

Lee looked impatient and on edge, not to mention odd in his nightclothes.

“Do you have a saddle?” asked Lee.

“A saddle?” Gewey repeated. “Why do I need a saddle?”

“Please don’t ask stupid questions.” Lee caught Gewey by the arm and pulled him toward the door. “If you have a saddle, get it. If not, I guess you’ll ride bareback. My horse can’t carry us both.”

Gewey snatched his arm away from Lee’s grasp. He leveled his eyes and straightened his shoulders, his fear replaced by anger. There was no way he was leaving without some sort of explanation. Lee noticed Gewey’s posture and grinned slightly.

“That’s the attitude we’ll need in the days to come,” said Lee. He motioned for Gewey to sit. “I hope you can appreciate that every minute we delay puts us both in greater danger. And if you hadn’t noticed, I am in a hurry.” Lee gestured to his own attire.

Gewey nodded and sat in a nearby chair. Lee closed the door but did not sit. Instead, he walked to the window and stared into the night.

“The dream you had tonight was real,” Lee began. “The voice you heard was that of the being that is casting the world into darkness. Now that he knows you exist, he’ll stop at nothing to find you.”

“Why me?” asked Gewey. “Who am I?”

“Don’t interrupt, boy,” scolded Lee. “Like I said, he’ll do anything to find you, but I won’t let that happen.”

“You’re not making any sense,” said Gewey. “How could you know about my dream?”

Lee sighed, turning away from the window. “What does it matter?” he said. “The very fact that I do know - that should be enough to stop your arguing. You must come with me now, before it’s too late. Something evil is coming for you, and if you don’t hurry, it will find you.”

Lee could see the confusion on Gewey’s face and softened his tone.

“Gewey, I know what was in the letter, and I know you probably have a million questions. I promise that when we’re safely away, I’ll answer as many as I can. Your father trusted me, and I would ask that you give me the same trust - at least for now.”

“He was not my father, and you know it,” said Gewey.

“Yes, he was,” said Lee. “He loved you, and that’s all you should care about. What difference should it make that you were not of his blood? It wasn’t blood that bound him to you. It was love, and trust me when I say, that means a lot more.”

Gewey felt ashamed. “I’m sorry,” he offered meekly. “It’s just that I don’t understand why he never told me.”

Lee walked over and placed his hand on Gewey’s shoulder. “I’m sure he had his reasons. And considering what happened tonight, I’m grateful that he didn’t.”

Gewey looked up at Lee questioningly.

“Please just get ready,” said Lee. “When the dawn comes, we’ll talk.”

Lee gently pulled Gewey to his feet.

“No need to pack,” said Lee. “I have clothes and provisions at my estate being readied as we speak. I need you to saddle your horse now.”

“I don’t have a saddle,” said Gewey. “Never needed one. Besides, my horse has never been ridden; she’s a bloody work horse.”

Lee pondered the situation, then spun around and headed to the door. “I guess you have time to pack a few things after all,” he said as he opened the door and headed in the direction of the barn. “But be quick.”

Gewey did as he was told. He got dressed and packed a few clothes, personal items, and the last loaf of bread in the house. Once packed, he looked around, doused the flames in the fireplace, and turned off the lanterns. He had just grabbed his wool jacket when Lee burst through the door.

“Good, you’re ready,” said Lee. “Let’s go. Don’t worry. If we need anything else, we can pick it up along the way. I’ve left word with my staff to take care of the farm while we’re gone, so don’t worry about that either.”

Gewey nodded curtly as they stepped outside. Apparently, Lee had been planning this for quite some time. Lee stowed his sword in the wagon and wrapped it in a blanket. Gewey’s horse, not accustomed to being handled by a stranger, stamped nervously. Lee’s own horse was now tied to the back of the wagon. It wore no saddle; Gewey suspected that Lee had been in too much of a rush to bother with one.

“I suppose it will look less conspicuous if both of us ride into town on your wagon rather than racing in on horseback. That is, if they don’t notice I’m wearing nightclothes,” said Lee. His tone was excited, and his movements were graceful and quick. Gewey marveled at how fast Lee could get things done. “Throw your pack on the wagon and let’s go.”

Gewey calmly obeyed. He still wasn’t satisfied with the reasons Lee had given for such a quick departure, but he did now know that, whatever else was happening, the dream had been real, and that thought made him afraid. Even just thinking about it made the weight of the darkness return.

“Stop thinking about it,” Lee scolded as he climbed up beside Gewey.

“What do you mean?” Gewey responded, startled. Surely Lee can’t read my mind, he thought.

“You know what I mean, boy,” said Lee. “If you think about him, he may be able to find you. Until we figure out how he located you in your dreams, we must be cautious.”

Gewey didn’t reply. Instead, he focused his thoughts on the sound of his breath and the movement of the wagon.

It was three miles to Lee’s estate, which was situated just north of the village, next to the river. It took them a little more than an hour to get there. Several roads had been built leading to Lee’s home; this was more than the village council deemed necessary, but since Lee had been willing to both pay for the construction himself, and use local labor, they’d raised few objections. It did, however, lead to rumors about his eccentricities. Some folks even said that he had built tunnels, but Gewey had always ignored such gossip.

Lee’s estate was built across fifty acres - a small property for a man of his apparent wealth. But the land was some of the finest in the area, with most of it dedicated to the keeping of his many horses. The house itself, adorned simply in northern fashion, looked modest from the outside. The single story dwelling had been built mostly of stained cedar with cherry inlay surrounding each window, and the roof was made from red tile imported from the north. Symbols of the Nine Gods were carved into the stone driveway that led from the main avenue to the front door. Although no blooms could currently be seen, a well-tended garden had once dominated the front yard; at its center stood a statue of Gerath, patron god of Sharpstone. Three horses waited in front of the house. Two of these were saddled, and one was packed full with supplies. The large oak door was already open and Millet, one of Lee’s servants, stood just inside. He was holding a small box wrapped in silk cloth.

Lee stopped the wagon and leapt down. He retrieved his sword from the cart and placed it in its scabbard, attaching this to his saddle. He walked up to Millet and took the box, whispering something in the servant’s ear as he did so. Millet disappeared into the house.

“Saddle up,” Lee said to Gewey. “I won’t be a moment.”

Lee turned and ran into the house while Gewey grabbed his belongings. He’d barely had a chance to stow his gear and mount his horse when Lee returned, dressed in a soft leather travel outfit and a black wool cloak. He carried a long sword sheathed in a plain brown scabbard. Lee walked up to Gewey’s horse and attached this sword to his saddle.

“I’d invite you in, but time is short,” said Lee, climbing onto his horse. “You’ll have the pack horse in tow for now. If we meet anyone we know along the way, we’ll say you’re accompanying me as I visit relatives in the north. People will get suspicious after a week or so, but Millet has instructions to keep the deception alive for as long as possible.”

“Where are we going?” Gewey asked.

“West,” answered Lee, pulling the hood over his head.

Gewey pressed the issue. “West where?”

“Save your questions for now,” he replied. “We’re too close to home, and I won’t risk drawing attention. Believe me, boy, what I have to tell you is worth waiting to hear.” Lee checked up and down the avenue, and seeing no one, urged his horse on, heading north.

“I thought we were going west,” said Gewey.

“Don’t be stupid,” replied Lee irritably. “If anyone sees us, they need to see us heading north. There’s a river crossing used by smugglers not far from here, but we can’t be seen making for it. It’s the long way around, but there’s no choice. Now be quiet, we have a lot of distance to cover before dawn.”

To Gewey’s relief, they met no one along the way. The cold night air kept him from dozing off. The moon was new, and there was not a cloud in the sky. Gewey looked up at the stars and searched out the constellations his father had taught him when he was small. Pósix, Goddess of the Dawn, shined brightly in the darkened sky, and Gewey thought about the nights that he and his father had spent stargazing.

“Gewey,” Lee said suddenly, shocking him to attention. “Dismount.”

Lee and Gewey led their horses into the woods on the west side of the road. The forest in this area was thick and treacherous. Gewey could barely see a thing, but Lee seemed to know exactly where he was. The ground was rough and uneven, and Gewey tried not to curse aloud as he tripped over roots and walked headlong into low hanging branches.

It was nearly dawn, but the thickness of the trees blocked out the light. The air was still and damp, and the only sound he heard was that of their footsteps and the heavy breathing of the horses.

“We’re here,” Lee said.

Gewey nearly ran into Lee’s horse. At first, he couldn’t see where ‘here’ was, but then he spotted a dim light shining ahead where the forest opened into a small clearing. As they entered this, Gewey noticed that the soft grass was drenched in morning dew and that it was, at most, half an hour past sunrise. Lee began unloading the pack horse and setting up camp.

“We travel at night and rest in the day for the time being,” said Lee. “It’ll take a couple of days to get used to, but I don’t want to risk being seen for now.”

Gewey found his own pack and pulled out the loaf of bread. He offered some to Lee, but he refused.

“At least we won’t need a fire,” Gewey joked, plopping down on a blanket.

Gewey munched on the bread, watching as Lee finished setting up camp and checking the horses. He’d thought of everything; they had blankets, pots, rope, food, and even a small tent in case of bad weather. Gewey wondered how Lee had prepared in such a short time.

When Lee finished his preparations, he pulled out a small sweet cracker from one of the bags and sat across from Gewey.

“Well…” Lee paused. “I guess it’s time to tell you want you want to know.”

Gewey leaned forward, determined not to miss a single word.

Chapter 3

“I guess the best way to start is by telling you a bit about my life, and how I came to live in Sharpstone,” Lee began. “Despite what I have told you, I was not born a northern lord. I was born in a small fishing village on the coast of the Western Abyss. My father was a fisherman and died at sea when I was eight. My mother was a beautiful woman, but full of spite and anger. She resented being a lowly fisherman’s wife, and hated my father for it. When he died, I think she hated him even more. After his death she joined the Temple of Saraf, God of the Sea, as a novice. Without a husband and burdened with a child, she was left with no other options.

“The Temple sent us both to the city of Hazrah, north of the Razor Mountains.  Though I think my mother would have preferred they hadn't, I was made an acolyte so that I could stay with her.

“For the first three years we lived in Hazrah, I hardly saw the city beyond the Temple doors. I hated it there and longed to leave. One day, Lord Dauvis Nal’Thain came to the Temple looking for a personal attendant. His last attendant had been killed while defending him from an assassination attempt. The High Priestess was reluctant to provide assistance but could not refuse a lord, especially one as powerful as Lord Dauvis. She told him that he could pick an acolyte, just as long as he agreed to pay all his wages and compensate the temple for the loss. She invited Lord Dauvis to stay the night so he could observe us at work during a banquet in his honor.

“None of the others wanted to be chosen, but I was eager. Temple life was dull and monotonous, with endless days of cleaning and scrubbing, and endless nights of prayer and fasting. At the banquet, I did everything I could to be noticed, but Lord Dauvis barely looked at me. I remember how upset I was that night. I just knew I’d be stuck at the temple forever.

“The next morning, to my great surprise, my mother woke me early and told me to pack my belongings. I had been chosen. I think that was the first time I had ever seen tears in her eyes. She helped me pack without a word, then led me to the office of the High Priestess.

“When I entered, Lord Dauvis was standing alone at the back of the room. He wasn’t a very tall man; I was only eleven years old, but already stood nearly as tall as he. What he lacked in height, however, he made up for in girth. Though the man must have weighed three hundred pounds, he moved with surprising agility.

“My mother put her hand on my shoulder, whispered ‘Farewell,’ and left the room. It was the last time I was to see her.

“Lord Dauvis looked me up and down and grunted. ‘I expected more,’ he said. I wasn’t sure if he was talking to me or to himself so I kept quiet.

“‘What’s your name, boy?’ he asked.

“‘Lee Starfinder,’ I replied. I did my best not to sound afraid.

“Lord Dauvis explained what my duties would be. Mostly, they consisted of running messages, doing chores, and seeing that his meals were ready on time.  All of that was fine by me. Anything was better than rotting away at the Temple, and from the sound of it, the work for Lord Dauvis would be a lot easier as well.

“The High Priestess was waiting for us at the entrance. She bowed to Lord Dauvis and asked that he send regular reports of me. He nodded, and thanked her for her hospitality. She gestured towards me and said, ‘Do not dishonor this temple boy, or I will know about it.’ I remember smiling with excitement as I walked out of the temple doors for the last time.

“Life with Lord Dauvis was harder than I had thought it would be. He was unmarried and had no children, so I spent every waking hour attending his needs. For five years I ran his errands, arranged his schedule, and saw to his meals. I don’t think I stopped moving for more than a minute, but to tell you the truth, I loved it. I was living life outside of the Temple. Hazrah was a bustling metropolis that breathed a life of its own, and my duties frequently had me traveling to nearby towns and villages. I learned more about the world in one month under the service of Lord Dauvis, than I had in my entire life. As I got older, he gave me more responsibilities. Eventually, I acted as his proxy during minor business deals and spoke in his stead at meetings with local politicians.

“I think I would have been happy to live out my life in service to Lord Dauvis, but the gods had other plans. When I was sixteen, the two of us were traveling to Pendleton - a village two days’ ride to the west - to mediate a labor dispute. Suddenly, our coach was attacked. Apparently, the mayor was afraid that he would be caught pocketing gold intended for village construction. His plan was to make it look as if bandits had robbed and killed us, stealing all the accounting records and making any investigation impossible.

“When they attacked, I tried my best to protect Lord Dauvis, but I had never been taught to fight and was quickly overcome. I was knocked to the ground and bleeding from a knife wound to my arm. A large man jumped onto my chest and was about to slit my throat. I braced myself, knowing I was about to die, when suddenly the man’s head separated from his shoulders and rolled to the ground beside me. I looked up and saw Lord Dauvis swinging his sword and fighting like a madman. He took on five bandits single handedly; one after the other fell to his sword, but in the end, it wasn’t enough. In desperation, one of the bandits flung a long knife at Lord Dauvis that pierced him through the belly. Ultimately, the attackers were all dead and Lord Dauvis lay dying. I remember how scared I was as I watched him pull out the knife. Blood soaked his waistcoat and spilled to the ground, but he bore the pain in silence.

“I helped him into the coach and hurried back to the manor. By the time the physician arrived, Lord Dauvis was near death. It took three servants to force me out of the room, and even then I didn’t wander more than a few feet from his chamber door. Hours seemed like days, and when the physician finally emerged he told me that Lord Dauvis was asking for me.

“He looked so pale and weak, laying there in his bed. No one was in the room but the two of us. He beckoned me to come closer and smiled.

“‘Lee’ he said, ‘I don’t have much time, so listen carefully.’ He reached up and took my hand. ‘It was no accident that you are in my service. A week before you came here, I was told by the Oracle of Manisalia that I was to take you into my home and protect you. She said you were important, and that one day you would help save the world. I wasn’t sure if I believed her, but I wasn’t about to take the chance. Now, I think that I do believe.’

“He called out for the housekeeper, who brought him a scroll sealed with the crest of his family.”

“‘I’m leaving you everything,’ he said. I was stunned. ‘My wealth and title will be passed to you. I’ve already made all the arrangements, so there will be no one who can dispute your claim.’

“I couldn’t believe what I was hearing. ‘Why?’ I cried. ‘Why would you do this?’

“‘Because of what else the Oracle told me,’ he answered, still smiling.

“‘What else did she tell you, My Lord?’ I asked. I could feel his grip loosen. He was slipping away.

“He pressed the scroll into my hands and said, ‘Promise me you will take care of my house and servants. You’re a Nal’Thain now.’

“Tears were streaming down my face. ‘I promise,’ I wept.

“Lord Dauvis closed his eyes and whispered his last words: ‘Go see the Oracle.’”

Lee paused and wiped his eyes.

“In the weeks that followed, I set about the business of learning to be a lord. I was now looked upon as Lee Nal’Thain, the son of Dauvis Nal’Thain.

“I sent for my mother at the temple, but learned that she had left the order shortly after I went to serve Lord Dauvis and had left no clue as to her whereabouts. I spent a small fortune trying to find her, but eventually gave up the search.

“It was almost a year before I went to see the Oracle. I was afraid of what she would tell me, so I kept putting it off. Millet was the one who finally convinced me to go. You’ve met him at my estate. He’s been with me a long time.

“It was a seven day journey to Manisalia. The town was quiet; it had a few shops, an inn, and a livery, but little else. I had pictured a city filled with pilgrims, and thought I’d be able to see the Temple towering from a mile away. But I didn’t. I actually had to ask for directions.

“The Temple of the Oracle turned out to be a small closed pavilion set upon a massive marble floor. The floor had been built on a foundation where you would expect a temple to be; according to legend, it was located on the very spot where the gods first breathed life into humankind. A short flight of alabaster steps covering the small distance from the ground to the ‘temple floor’ was the only other man-made structure. Later I learned that three temples had originally been built there.  All had collapsed one after the other, only days after they had been built, leaving only the foundation and the floor intact. Taking it as a sign from the gods and fearing for the safety of the Oracle, it was decided not to attempt building a fourth.

“I had planned on a long stay. I figured I would be one of many waiting to see her, but as soon as I walked up, a young girl dressed in white linen robes approached me.

“‘It’s about time you got here, Lord Starfinder,’ she said, using my given name. She took my hand. ‘Come, she’s waiting.’

“Needless to say, I was surprised. But I let her lead me up the stairs - past men and women who looked as if they’d been waiting for a long time - and straight into the pavilion. I looked around for a moment. A large green carpet covered the entire floor, and pillows lay scattered everywhere. A few uncomfortable looking chairs lined the walls, and a number of dim lanterns hung from ropes strung across the pavilion’s support beams. Whatever I expected, this wasn’t it, and for a moment, I thought someone was playing a joke on me. The pavilion’s sole occupant was sitting on the floor, legs crossed, holding a rag and playing tug-o-war with a puppy. She was wearing green cotton trousers and a brown tunic. Her feet were bare and she wore no jewelry; nothing about her indicated that she was indeed the famous Oracle of Manisalia. She ignored me at first, clearly enjoying herself, and I was just about to walk out when she finally spoke.

“‘Do you like dogs?’ she asked me. ‘Personally, I think they’re better than people. More loyal. Certainly smarter.’

“I just stood there, staring like an idiot. Here before me was the great Oracle of Manisalia. People spoke of her wisdom all over the world. Kings and lords bowed to her will. In fact, she was the very reason I was now a lord instead of wasting away back at the Temple of Saraf. The woman had the ear of the entire known world, and here she was, barefoot on the floor, playing with a mongrel puppy. It wasn’t exactly inspiring.”

Gewey grinned, trying to imagine the scene.

“She looked at me and smiled. Her skin was flawless, as if age could not touch her; but if the stories about her were true, then she must have been very old. Her jet-black hair was tied back in a loose braid, showing no hint of gray. Her eyes were sky blue and twinkled in the dim light. When she met my gaze, I felt small and insignificant - as though she had turned me into a child.

“‘I take it I’m not what you expected,’ she said. ‘Would you feel better if I have my assistant come in and chant in an ancient language? She knows one. She’s a very bright young girl.’ Clearly, the Oracle was having fun with me. ‘I guess you want to know what I told poor Dauvis about you.’

“I sat in front of her on one of the pillows and told her my story. She listened patiently, but I had the feeling that she knew what I was going to say before I said it. Still, it felt good to tell someone. When I finished, she stood up and got a bowl of figs from the corner and we sat in silence and ate. When we finished eating, she reached over and put her hand on my cheek.

“‘So young, yet so strong,’ she said, her voice soft and melodic. ‘You’ve been through a lot, but there is much more to come. First, it’s time you knew who you are, and why I told Dauvis to care for you.’

“I remember how nervous I was, but I thought I was ready to hear it.

“‘You are the son of Saraf, God of the Sea,’ she told me.

“I was speechless. I couldn’t believe what she was saying. I refused to. I wanted to leave, but the Oracle leaned forward and grabbed my wrist. Her strength was surprising.

“‘I know it’s hard to understand,’ she said, ‘but it’s true. Saraf seduced your mother eighteen years ago. How it happened and why he did it, I don’t know. Perhaps one day, if you see your mother again, she can tell you. But that part of the story hasn’t been revealed to me.’

“She released me and picked up the puppy that had been lying quietly beside her. ‘One day you will be given a great treasure, and you will have to leave your whole life behind to protect this treasure. If you refuse, or if you fail, darkness will consume the world. You have been chosen because of who and what you are. Your courage and wisdom will be put to the test, but if you face the challenge, you can save us all. What the treasure is, I do not know, but once you touch it for the first time, you will have no doubts. You will know what to do. The only question will be if you’re willing to do it. The cost will be great, and once paid, your life will never be the same. Until then, you must train your mind and body. As the son of Saraf, you can achieve things far beyond the abilities of normal men. You have power you’ve never dreamed of, and the time is coming when you’ll need it.’

“She lowered her eyes and stroked the sleeping puppy. I expected her to say something else, but she just sat there silently.

“‘Is that it?’ I asked, but she just continued petting that bloody puppy. Finally, I got up and left the pavilion, not sure what to believe. None of it made sense to me.

“For the next few years I tried to forget about what she told me, and lived the life of a Hazrahinian lord. But the more I tried to forget, the more miserable I became. I renewed the search for my mother, but once again came up empty-handed. I thought that if I found her, she could tell me it was all lies and I could feel normal again. Eventually I decided it was time to begin training for what was to come, even though I had no idea what exactly that was.

“It turned out that the Oracle was right. As I trained, I discovered that I was stronger and faster than other men. It took me mere weeks to learn new sword techniques that took other people years to master. My eyesight was sharper and my hearing keener. The more I trained, the more I came to believe the Oracle; but it wasn’t until I first saw you that I knew for a fact she had told me the truth.”

Lee stood up and stretched his legs. He walked over to where he had tied his horse and stroked its mane.

“My father said you first saw me when I was a baby,” said Gewey.  “He said you came down to buy horses, though he really didn’t believe that. He also said he thought I was the reason you moved to Sharpstone.”

Lee laughed softly. “Harman always was a bright one,” he said. “And he was right. Looking back, I wish I had confided in him more. But at the time, it seemed safer to keep him in the dark.” He walked back to the blanket and knelt down. “The truth is, it was I who had Millet bring you to your father. I knew I couldn’t keep you safe. A lord showing up out of nowhere with a child…it would draw too much attention. Millet disguised himself as a merchant and told your father he had found you in the wreckage of a raided caravan. I knew your father’s heart, and was sure he’d take you in.”

“If all this is true, then how did you end up with me in the first place?” asked Gewey. “How did my father come into this? And why has it all been such a secret?”

“I was just getting to that,” he replied. “Be patient and I’ll tell you.”

Gewey sighed and motioned for Lee to continue.

“I trained for years, preparing myself,” said Lee. “But for what, I still didn’t know. By the time I was twenty-eight I had learned everything the local masters had to teach, so I ventured out in search of anyone who could train me. It was on one of those trips that I met your father.

“He had left Sharpstone in search of his fortune. He was courting your mother at the time.  Your grandfather had left him little in the way of a living, so he left home hoping to find work as a man at arms. With what he saved, he hoped to buy a farm and earn the right to marry your mother. I think she would have married him regardless, but Harman was a proud man, and he couldn’t imagine taking a wife without the means to support her.

“When I first encountered your father I was making my way around the eastern end of the Razor Edge Mountains, on my way back to Hazrah. I had just finished studying under a sword master in Vallhavin, and had stopped for the night in a small village. What I didn’t know was that this particular village was home to a band of raiders and cutthroats that had been wreaking havoc in every town and village for a hundred miles. I was sitting in the common room of the inn, sharing a bottle of wine with Millet. He always came with me on these trips - he’s convinced that I can’t take care of myself - and to tell the truth, there were times I would have gone mad but for his company. Earlier I had heard talk of a sword-master and battle strategist somewhere in the northwest near the steppes; I was trying to decide whether to cancel my trip home and seek him out when I noticed two men huddled in the corner, staring at me.

“At once I knew their intentions. One of the abilities I had discovered was that I could sense when someone means harm. Sometimes, I can almost hear their thoughts. I immediately told Millet to go to our room and wait for me there.

“I didn’t have to wait long. As soon as Millet headed for the room, one of the men got up and followed him. I wasn’t wearing my sword, and, for all his accomplishments, Millet is no warrior. I stood up and pretended not to notice that the second man was still watching me as I walked towards the bar. As fast as I could, I grabbed a mug off a table and flung it at the man in the corner. It hit him squarely in the throat and he fell over gasping. I ran upstairs and was just in time to see the first man drawing a knife as he knocked at my door. I charged in, trying to get to him before Millet could answer, but the man saw me coming and ran down the hall to the back steps. Foolishly, I chased after him.

“By the time I caught up to him, he’d made it out of the back entrance and was heading across the street to a nearby house. I was just reaching out to grab for him when I felt a pain shoot through my left shoulder. It took a second for me to realize that I’d been struck by an arrow.  Three more men - one carrying a bow - jumped out from around the side of the house. I was unarmed, wounded, and out-numbered, and all I could think was that the bloody Oracle had been wrong after all.

“I thought I was about to die right there in the street. But suddenly, out of nowhere, your father stepped in front of me, swinging his sword wildly. I think it was the sheer ferocity of his attack that saved us, being that his skills with a blade were crude at best. Later, he told me his father had served the King as a soldier and had taught him basic sword fighting when he was a boy, but he had never learned much beyond that. The men turned and ran, and your father, being a much wiser man than I, did not chase after them. Instead, he helped me back to the inn where he and Millet tended my wounds. The innkeeper warned us about the raiders, saying that they would definitely return and that we should leave as soon possible. Millet fussed and complained about me traveling wounded, but there was no choice. Your father came with us, and I hired him as a bodyguard. I introduced myself to him as Lee Starfinder - not Nal’Thain. In those days I never traveled under the name of my crest.

“I decided not to return to Hazrah, and headed west to seek out the sword master. As it turned out, the attack did me some good. The wound took only two weeks to heal. I kept this from your father, of course, but it was more proof of my heritage.

“I eventually found the sword master and studied under him for a year. When my studies were done, your father told me he wanted to go home. He had saved enough money to buy a small farm and take his bride. He feared that if he waited any longer she might marry another. I’m sure your father told you, but she was quite beautiful; even so, I don’t think she would have married anyone else even if he’d stayed away for ten years. She truly loved him. I was sorry to see him go, but I knew from the look in his eyes that he was determined. I didn’t see him again for many years.

“I eventually returned home for good, or so I thought. I continued training myself, as there were no more masters left to teach me. Life went on as normal, and I found myself becoming forgetful of what the oracle had told me.

“It was the night of a massive blizzard when Millet woke me and told me a messenger from the Oracle was waiting in my study to see me. I went downstairs, and to my surprise, found the young girl who had once led me to the pavilion all those years ago. Though she was no longer a young girl, I recognized her right away. She looked frightened and was shivering from the cold. In her arms, she held a baby wrapped in linen.

“‘It’s time,’ she said.

“‘What do you mean?’ I asked, knowing perfectly well what she meant.

“She didn’t say another word. She just walked up, placed you in my arms, and ran out, disappearing into the storm.”

Gewey’s jaw tightened. “Let me get this straight,” he said. “I was dumped off during a storm in the middle of the night, and you decided I was the treasure, just like that. You then left me with my father, and moved hundreds of miles to Sharpstone to watch over me. And now, for whatever bizarre reason, some evil being is on our trail. Have I missed anything?”

“Don’t make light of this,” Lee scolded. “I have sacrificed much, and you will listen to what I have to say.”

“Fine,” said Gewey, raising no objection.

Lee continued. “Like I said, when the girl handed you to me I had no idea what was happening. I looked down at you sleeping in my arms and remembered what the Oracle had said: when the time came, I would know what to do. Well, I didn’t, at least not until I pulled back the blanket you were wrapped in and touched your face with my finger. It was then that I understood why you are so important.  The second I touched your skin, I knew what you really are.” Lee paused and leaned in, “You are a god, Gewey. In fact, you are the only child ever born from the union of two gods.”

Gewey burst into laughter. “You’re crazy!” he exclaimed, jumping to his feet. “And to think I was starting to believe you. I actually left my farm trusting that you might know something.”

Lee frowned. “There is one way to show you,” he said. He walked over to Gewey and reached out his hand.

“What’s this?” asked Gewey, clearly amused.

“Take my hand,” said Lee.

Gewey hesitated.

“Just do it,” said Lee. “If this doesn’t make you believe me, you can go home and forget everything I’ve said.”

Gewey shrugged. “Fine,” he said, taking Lee’s hand.

It was as if a bolt of lightning had struck him. Time stood still, and Gewey felt as if the whole universe had opened up. He could see straight into Lee’s mind, and in that moment he knew everything Lee had told him was true. He let go of Lee’s hand, shaking from the experience.

“The first time is the worst,” Lee said. “After a while, you’ll learn to control it. It’s how those of us carrying the blood of a god can recognize one another. There are others like me - half man, half god. I’ve met a few of them. But you’re different. You’re full blooded. One of a kind.”

Gewey still couldn’t speak. The idea was more than he could handle. His head began to spin faster and faster with the enormity of it all. After a few seconds he fell to the ground, unconscious.

He awoke with Lee kneeling over him, smiling broadly. “Boy, if you’re going to be any kind of god, we can’t have you passing out like this.” He began laughing.

Gewey managed to sit up, still feeling lightheaded and more than a bit embarrassed.

“How can this be?” asked Gewey. “I haven’t got the power of a god. I bleed, I sleep, and I eat. What kind of god does all that?”

“One who’s bound to the earth,” answered Lee. “I don’t have all the answers, but I have learned much. I’ve searched books all across the land looking for answers to the very questions you ask. Some I’ve found, but others are still a mystery. Like me, you’re stronger and faster than normal men; and like me, you can see and hear far better. But I’m only a half god. Some things I can teach you, but discovering your true power is something you’re going to have to do on your own.”

Gewey got to his feet. “Let’s say I believe you,” he said. “Why are we running? The voice in my dream…if I’m a god, why should I fear it?”

Lee’s eyes narrowed. “What do you know about the Dark Knight of Angrääl?” he asked in an ominous tone.

Gewey shrugged and said, “Rumors mostly. I’ve heard he’s a thousand years old, and that he slays children in the night. To be honest, I’ve always ignored such tales. I figured they were just stories meant to frighten children.”

“As far as being a thousand years old, I doubt it,” said Lee. “As far as killing children, I daresay he would without hesitation. Whatever you’ve heard, just remember this: he is real. He’s the reason we’ve been brought together.”

Lee looked at the sky. It was two hours past sunrise. “We need to rest. I’ll tell you more once we set out this evening. In the meantime, sleep close to me. I should be able to stop the Dark Knight from entering your dreams.”

With that, Lee lay on his blanket and closed his eyes. Gewey’s head was buzzing with questions, but he tried to follow Lee’s example. He began to feel fatigue seeping into his bones, and - god or no god - he needed rest like anyone else. He was about to ask Lee one final question, but heard him breathing deeply and steadily. Gewey couldn’t imagine how he could fall asleep so quickly, especially with all this excitement.

It took him more than two hours before sleep came, and thankfully, the dream didn’t return.

Chapter 4

Gewey awoke an hour before sunset. Lee was nearly finished breaking camp. Gewey packed his own gear and ate the rest of the bread he had brought. When they were ready to leave, Lee mounted his horse and motioned for Gewey to do the same.

“There’s a hunting trail a mile west of here that will lead us to the crossing,” Lee said. “We should get there just after dark.”

“I thought you were going to tell me about the Dark Knight,” said Gewey.

“We can talk along the way,” Lee replied. “I don’t want to be caught sitting in the open too long. It could be dangerous.”

Gewey nodded and mounted his horse. The forest had thinned, enabling them once again to ride, and it wasn’t long before they found the trail.

“You said you’d heard of the Dark Knight of Angrääl,” Lee began.  “That’s good. It’s because of him we’re doing this. He’s the reason darkness has spread throughout the land. You’re old enough to remember the Long Freeze.”

“I remember,” answered Gewey. “I almost starved.”

“It was a sign of the Dark Knight’s power growing,” Lee continued.  “I don’t know much about him, unfortunately, but I do know that he’s stolen the Sword of Truth. With it, he’s locked the door to heaven, and as he masters the use of his power, his corrupting influence changes the world.”

“The Sword of Truth?” said Gewey. “I’ve never heard of it.”

“I’m not surprised,” Lee replied. “Knowledge of the sword has been a closely guarded secret for thousands of years. Only a few people - members of certain temples, and perhaps a handful of scholars - know of its existence. I only stumbled upon it by accident when studying from a collection of rare books that Lord Dauvis had left me. Apparently, the sword was forged at the time of creation. It was meant to be a key to the door between heaven and earth. Why the gods would make such a thing, I don’t know. But whoever possesses it acquires great and terrible power - a power not meant for mortal men.”

“How did he get it?” asked Gewey. “You would think a thing like that would be protected.”

“How he got the sword isn’t so important as what he plans to do with it. I believe he’s locked the door to heaven so that he can find a way to rule as a god. With the door locked, the gods are powerless to stop him. If he succeeds, all of creation will be his to control.”

“None of this answers how I got here,” Gewey noted. “If I’m a god, why am I not locked away with the others?”

“Quite right,” Lee acknowledged. “It’s a question I’ve spent many years trying to answer. As near as I can tell, you were brought to the earth and given human form before the door to heaven was sealed. Maybe the gods saw this coming, maybe not. Regardless of how it happened, the fact is that you are here, and you’re the only one who can defeat the Dark Knight and reopen the door.”

“I still don’t understand,” said Gewey. “If I’m a god, then why do I seem so human?”

“Again, I’m not certain. But I think that when you were trapped on earth, it changed you, making you mortal. The gods can take human form. Perhaps you were locked in this form when the door to heaven closed. You still have your powers, but it seems you’re also mortal.”

“My powers?” Gewey said, sounding doubtful. “I know I’m pretty strong, but other than that, I’m just like everyone else.”

“There’s where you’re wrong,” Lee retorted. “You have abilities that you have yet to discover. Some I know of, and can teach you; others, I can only guess at. Many things you will only discover yourself through trial and error. You are the only one of your kind, so no one really knows the full potential of your abilities. The good news is that the Dark Knight doesn’t know either.”

“What is he?” asked Gewey. “Is he a god?”

“No,” answered Lee. “He’s a man, or at least he was. All I know is that he was part of an order charged with protecting the door to heaven. He betrayed them and took the Sword. The order was destroyed, and its temples abandoned.”

“How did he find me in my dreams?” asked Gewey. “And why now? Why not last year, or the year before?”

“You had just discovered that you weren’t who you thought you were,” said Lee. “Reading your father’s letter must have awakened something inside you that the Dark Knight could detect. I was lucky to have sensed him before he tricked you into revealing your exact location.”

“So that was you!” Gewey exclaimed. “You were the other voice.”

Lee nodded. “Yes, that was me. I’ve felt his presence once before and I was lucky to escape. He knows who I am, but I have managed to conceal my whereabouts. I knew that if he found you, he would move against you. The second his mind touched yours, he knew both what you are, and the threat that you pose. Unfortunately for us, he also knows that you don’t yet understand your powers, and he’ll try to kill you before you can discover them. That’s why we must hide for the time being, at least until you’re ready to face him. His power grows stronger each day. Poor Thad Marshall’s wife is all the proof I need of that.”

“You saw her?” Gewey asked.

“Yes,” Lee answered. “It was I who…disposed of her. Not a pleasant task, I might add. Melton Fathing would have discovered me if he hadn’t been busy gossiping about Thad’s outburst.  I was lucky to have seen her in time.  I can’t imagine how the people of Sharpstone would react to the living dead.”

“So she was alive?” asked Gewey. “How can that be?”

Lee shook his head. “I don’t know if alive is how I’d describe her.  It was as if her spirit had been forced back into her body. I don’t think she knew where she was, or why. What the Dark Knight has done to cause this is a mystery, but there’s no doubt that it was him.”

Gewey rubbed his temples in disbelief. “What did you do with her?”

Lee shot Gewey a look that said not to ask that question again.

“Say I buy all this,” said Gewey. “What do we do now? Where do we go?”

“For now our destination must be a secret,” Lee responded. “Even from you. I can protect your mind when you sleep, but if we’re separated and he finds you while you dream, he could force you to give yourself away. I was only barely able to intervene the last time. But the closer we are to each other, the more I can help. In the meantime, I’ll start training you to shield your mind.”

It was fully dark by now, and the stars were shining bright in the heavens as they neared the river. Two lights from the ferry could be seen in the distance. Gewey knew about the crossing, but he’d never used it before, and the thought of being on the water at night unnerved him.

“Wait here,” said Lee. “I’ll secure the ferry for us.”

Half an hour passed and Gewey began to get nervous. Finally, Lee returned with a scowl on his face.

“Let’s go,” Lee growled. “He’s agreed to take us across. And of course, he’s charging double to do it at night. The oarsmen want an extra copper each.”

“Can’t say I blame them,” said Gewey.

Lee shot Gewey an angry look. “Just be quiet and let me do all the talking,” he said. “Last thing I need is you saying something stupid and giving us away.”

Gewey wanted to respond, but held his tongue. He followed Lee to the waiting ferry, which was nothing more than a large wooden raft. The ferryman was making ready to cast off, grumbling and cursing about being wakened from his bed and muttering something about ‘good for nothing foreigners’.

“Well, come on you two,” said the ferryman. “The sooner we get across, the sooner I can get back to bed. Why you can’t wait ‘til mornin’, I don’t know.”

Gewey boarded as Lee secured the horses and helped the ferryman untie the raft. The crossing made Gewey nauseous, and he was relieved when they reached the opposite bank.

After they disembarked and settled their fee, Lee led them south along the western bank of the river for the next few hours until they came to Far Run Road.

“We’ll take the road for a while,” Lee explained. “When it gets close to dawn, we’ll find a spot to camp. The village of Terriston is about two nights’ ride, so we can travel the road until then.”

“Great,” Gewey said, clearly relieved. “By then, I’ll be looking forward to a soft bed.”

Lee laughed. “We won’t be visiting; we’ll be going around it. We’re still too close to home to risk being seen.”

Gewey’s heart sank. He hated sleeping outdoors, and he realized that the days of comfortable beds and hot meals were gone - at least for a while.

“You’re going to have to toughen up, boy,” Lee scolded. “Believe me, a few nights sleeping under the stars is nothing compared to what is in store for us.”

“Yeah,” Gewey replied, smirking. “But we sleep under the sun, don’t we?”

“Don’t get smart with me,” said Lee. “The last thing I need is for you to start acting your age.”

Gewey suddenly filled with rage. He hated being reminded of just how young he really was. It wasn’t his fault he looked like a grown man. He never wanted to be robbed of a childhood. He never wanted to be forced to live the life of someone ten years older. And he certainly never asked to be the savior of the world, or to be hunted down by an evil, sword-stealing knight.

Lee could seemingly feel Gewey’s mood change, even in the dark. “Calm yourself. You need to learn to control your anger.”

Gewey took a deep breath and let his anger subside. The rest of the night they traveled in silence, leaving the road before sunrise to make camp. Lee unpacked some bread and dried meat and gave some to Gewey, who ate it gratefully; they had only stopped a few times that night, and they hadn’t eaten at all until now. Belly full, Gewey lay on his blanket and enjoyed the remainder of the cool night.

“Tell me about my father,” Gewey said, finally.

Lee was laying a few feet away. “I’m not sure what to tell you. I didn’t know him that well. He was brave and honorable, that’s for sure. After I moved to Sharpstone, I tried to keep my distance. I didn’t want to interfere with him raising you.”

“You traveled together for a year,” Gewey pointed out. “You must have gotten to know him a bit in that time.”

Lee rolled over and faced Gewey.  “He was my bodyguard, and our interactions were based on that relationship. Besides, I was studying swordsmanship and battle strategy for most of that time. It left little room for bonding.”

“You sent me to be raised by him,” challenged Gewey. “And you’re telling me that you didn’t know him? I don’t believe you.” Gewey rolled over, sulking.

Lee sighed. “I had good reasons to send you to Harman. He saved my life without even knowing me, and in the year he was with me, I never heard a dishonest word pass his lips.”

Gewey closed his eyes and tried to picture his father’s face. “That can’t be the only reason.”

“No, it wasn’t,” Lee admitted. “One of the things you’ll discover is that if you try hard enough, you can look into people’s hearts and see them for who they really are. I looked into Harman’s heart and knew the man he was. Of all the people I’ve known, his heart was the most pure. When you were first brought to me, I knew there was only one man I could trust to protect you.”

This made Gewey smile. He suddenly felt whole again as he let the love for his father rush over him. Gradually, sleep began to take over.

The next evening passed uneventfully. Gewey’s heart felt light as Lee told him stories of his travels to pass the time. He asked Lee to retell the story of how he met his father, and Lee was happy to oblige, this time adding a few extra details about Harman’s heroism.

“We need to train you to close your mind,” said Lee, after they had made camp. “This won’t be easy, but you’ll have to trust me.” Lee motioned for Gewey to sit across from him.

Lee reached over and grabbed Gewey’s hands. Gewey felt the same shock of recognition the moment his hand touched Lee’s, but this time it was more intense. He felt the presence of Lee’s mind pressing in on his.

“Keep me out,” Lee instructed.

“How?” asked Gewey. Beads of sweat were forming on his forehead.

“Picture your mind as a gate that you have to keep closed,” he replied. “Keep me out.”

Gewey tried, but Lee’s will was too strong. Slowly, Lee forced his way into Gewey’s mind until he had complete control.

“Stop!” Gewey screamed.

Lee released his hold. “You’ll have to do better than that, boy. That’s just a taste of what’s to come.”

Gewey collapsed on his back, breathing heavily, his head pounding.

Lee helped him to his feet. “Steady,” he said. “It’s a shock when someone seizes your mind, but you must learn to keep me out.”

“I can’t,” Gewey gasped. “You’re too strong.”

Lee suddenly slapped Gewey’s face. “Never say ‘I can’t’ to me again. You can, and you will. Dig deep. Find the strength. You’re a god, so act like one.”

Gewey’s ears were ringing. “What was that for?” he yelled. Rage filled his chest.

“That was for weakness,” Lee replied as he sat back down. “Come, try again.”

Gewey fought the urge to strike back. He sat down and readied himself for another assault. It was midday before Lee allowed him to sleep. By then, Gewey was nearly blind from exhaustion, and was asleep almost before he rested his head.

They repeated the lesson the next night, but this time Gewey was able to keep Lee out a bit longer. Lee, however, showed no sign of being pleased at Gewey’s progress. He shouted and cursed each time Gewey failed. A few times, they nearly came to blows, but Gewey managed to check his anger and frustration.

The third night they made their way around the village of Terriston, being careful to avoid encountering anyone along the way. Being inconspicuous, Gewey discovered, meant a day without Lee’s harsh training; their lessons could get quite loud at times, and they couldn’t risk attracting attention.

It was well into the fourth night before they were back on the road again. Gewey wasn’t looking forward to camp and the subsequent lesson, but he had become determined to beat Lee. The previous night had been uneventful, but Lee still seemed on edge. He and Gewey had hardly spoken, and when they did, their interactions were short and unpleasant.

When they made camp, Lee unpacked only their blankets and a bit of bread and dried meat. That night’s lesson was the harshest yet. Gewey felt as if his mind would break, but in one instance he almost managed to keep Lee out. He lay down to sleep when it was over, but noticed Lee sitting upright, staring into the brush.

“What’s wrong?” asked Gewey. “You seem upset.”

“I’m not sure,” Lee replied. “I think we’re being followed.”

“Followed?” said Gewey, startled. “By who?”

Lee shook his head. “I don’t know, but I think we’ll stay off the road for a few days.”

Gewey nodded. The idea of being followed disturbed him; that Lee seemed worried disturbed him even more. Sleep came slowly, and he did not rest well. The next evening they packed up and headed deeper into the woods.

The Forest of Simon Bal was one of the largest in the world, spanning hundreds of miles in every direction. There were no trails, and it didn’t take long for Gewey to miss the comfort of the road. Lee changed direction so often that Gewey no longer knew where he was.

It was an hour before sunrise when Gewey heard it. It was the sound of a horse walking over uneven terrain. Lee drew his sword and motioned for Gewey to do the same. They waited for a time, trying not to make a sound. After a few minutes, the sound of the hoof beats faded.

“Who was that?” whispered Gewey.

“I don’t know,” said Lee. “But one thing’s for sure: whoever it was, it’s no accident they are traveling the same way that we are. I left a trail so confusing that only an experienced woodsman could follow it. We’ll stop here for now. Hopefully, it will seem like our trail has disappeared and our pursuer will be thrown off.”

Finding a nearby hill to wait out the coming day, they didn't bother to unpack the horses. Both of them kept their swords close.

Chapter 5

They slept very little the next day, and hardly spoke a word to each other. Lee waited until it was fully dark before they continued. They zigzagged through the forest for hours, stopping from time to time to listen for sounds of pursuit. Much to Gewey’s relief, there were none. After a time the flat ground transitioned into steep wooded hillsides, which made changing direction increasingly difficult.

“You do know where we are, don’t you?” Gewey asked, breaking the silence.

Lee scowled. “Would you rather guide us?” he replied irritably.

Gewey shook his head and kept quiet.

It was about two hours before sunrise when Lee brought them to a sudden halt and leapt from the saddle, drawing his sword. He motioned for Gewey to stay still, and disappeared into the night. Gewey’s heart was pounding and he drew his own sword, peering into the darkness. Ten minutes later, Lee reappeared.

“What’s going on?” asked Gewey.

“There’s an encampment just ahead,” Lee whispered. “Looks like bandits.”

“Bandits?” said Gewey. “What are they doing?”

Lee mounted his horse and urged them forward. “Not noticing us, apparently. It looks as if they’ve found some sport, so I doubt they’ll see us pass.”

“What kind of sport?” Gewey inquired.

“They’ve captured an elf,” Lee responded. “How that band of morons managed it, I don’t know, but I imagine they’ll be busy with her for a while.”

Gewey halted. “It’s a woman? What will they do to her?”

Lee turned. “It’s not a woman; it’s an elf. And you don’t want to know what they’re going to do.”

“You don’t mean to let them kill her, do you?” Gewey asked, appalled.

Lee reigned in his horse. “That’s exactly what I mean to do, boy. We don’t have time for heroics, and even if we did, she’s a bloody elf.”

Gewey got down from his horse. “I don’t care what she is,” he said determinedly. “I’m going to save her. You can help me, or you can sit here and do nothing. I don’t care either way.” Gewey began to creep off into the darkness to look for the bandits’ camp.

“Fool,” Lee grumbled. He dismounted and caught up to Gewey.

“You’re not ready for this, boy.” Lee grabbed his shoulder and pulled Gewey behind him. “Just stay in the brush and let me take care of it.”

Gewey followed behind Lee as quietly as he could. They had only walked a few yards when they heard the yells and curses of the bandit camp. The glow of the bandits’ fire became brighter as they approached.  Gewey could smell the stench of unwashed bodies mingling with scorched, burnt meat. When they got close enough, Gewey could make out six bandits, each with a long knife at his side. A few bedrolls were cast carelessly about, and a single bandit guarded six horses tied off several yards from the fire. The rest were gathered around what appeared to be a young woman. She was on her knees, gagged and bound, with her wrists tied behind her back. A man who seemed to be their leader was squatting in front of her, while the rest passed a large jug of wine around, laughing hideously.

“Well, well, well, me lovely,” the bandit leader chuckled. “Look what we ‘ave ‘ere, lads. Thought you could sneak up on ol’Durst, did ya?”

The elf glared defiantly at the bandit leader.

“Oy!!! Ain’t she a tough one?” a heavyset bandit joked. “I think she’s sweet on ya, cap’n.”

“Well, lads,” said the leader, flashing an evil grin. “I am quite the ladies’ man, after all.”

This brought gales of harsh laughter from the rest of the band. The leader stood up and grabbed the jug, draining it dry.

“Stay here,” whispered Lee, and silently moved around the camp to where the horses were being kept. With the lone guard’s attention focused on the elf, he neither noticed Lee's approach, nor his knife until it had plunged into the back his neck. Before the first guard hit the ground, Lee had already drawn his sword and was rushing in on the rest of the group. Gewey had never seen anyone move so fast. He killed two more bandits before the others even noticed he was there. The leader managed to unsheathe his long knife and lunge clumsily at Lee.  Lee easily dodged the blow and sent the man tumbling to the ground. The two remaining bandits tried to flee, but Lee quickly caught them and ran both of them through.

The bandit leader got to his feet. “I’ll not go alone!” he screamed, bolting toward the elf with his knife in hand.

Realizing Lee was too far away to do anything, Gewey sprang to his feet and rushed headlong toward the bandit leader. He threw himself at the bandit just before he was able to plunge his knife into the elf’s chest. The two of them went crashing to the ground with the bandit landing on top, pinning Gewey. The boy feared for his life as the bandit began hacking at him maniacally. He instinctively lifted his arms to defend himself, and felt pain shoot through his body as the knife found flesh. He could see blood splatter as one final blow struck home, deep in his chest. It was then that Lee reached them, thrusting his sword through the bandit leader’s back. Lee moved to Gewey’s side as the man gasped and fell to the ground.

“Fool,” he cursed as he tore open Gewey’s shirt. Blood poured from the gaping wounds covering his arms and chest. “I told you to stay put.”

“I’m sorry Lee,” he said weakly. “I guess I’m not much of a hero.”

Lee smiled. “Nonsense. Your father would have been very proud of you.”

Lee tore Gewey’s shirt into strips and pressed one of them to the wound in his chest; the rest he wrapped around the cuts on his arms. “I’ll be back. I have a salve that will stop the bleeding.”

Lee dashed off, leaving Gewey lying on the ground and wondering if this was the end for him. He turned his head and noticed the elf woman, still bound, staring at him.

“Don’t worry, Miss,” said Gewey. “I’ll have Lee untie you when he gets back.”

The elf woman gave no reaction. Gewey had never seen an elf before, and he’d heard very little about them. She looked almost human. She was thin - though clearly not frail - and her skin was dark bronze. Her long auburn hair fell loosely about her shoulders, and despite the bruises on her face, Gewey could tell that she was quite beautiful. He guessed she was about as tall as most human women; in fact, her narrow piercing eyes and her distinctly elfish ears were the only features that suggested she was anything else.

It was only a few minutes before Lee returned and began tending Gewey’s wounds.

“Stop,” said Gewey. “Untie her first.”

Lee shook his head, but he could see that Gewey was determined.

“Very well,” he sighed, walking over to the elf woman and cutting her bonds.

She got up and stared at Lee for a moment. Lee tensed, ready to draw his weapon. She backed away slowly until she reached the edge of the bandit camp, then turned and ran into the woods.

“You’re welcome,” Lee called after her.

Lee finished dressing Gewey’s wounds and pulled him close to the still burning fire.

“What now?” asked Gewey. His wounds were beginning to throb.

Lee was staring at the fire. “Now we have to risk going into town,” he said. “If you were human, I’d say we’ll sit here until you die. But thankfully, as a God, you’ll heal - one of the advantages, I suppose.”

Gewey tried to laugh, but the pain in his chest stopped him. “Couldn’t we just wait here until I heal?”

Lee shook his head. “No. We need medicine and clean bandages. You may heal on your own, but without proper treatment it could take months instead of weeks. Besides, our provisions won’t be enough to last that long. Eventually, we’ll run out of food and have to go into town anyway.”

Gewey felt guilty. If only he had known how to fight, they wouldn’t be in this mess. “Once I’m better, I want you to teach me the sword.”

“Believe me,” Lee replied, “you’ll learn to fight. I’ll see to that.”

“I never want this to happen to me again,” Gewey declared. “I want to be able to fight my own battles. I want to be more like you.”

Lee cocked his head and smiled. “You’ll be far better than I. Actually, I was impressed with how well you did this time.”

Gewey looked shocked. “What are you talking about? I was nearly killed.”

“Maybe, but you managed to fight an armed bandit alone and with no training. And let’s not forget, you saved the life of that elf.”

Gewey shrugged. “Why did she run off? We meant her no harm.”

“Elves are a strange lot,” Lee replied. “Not much is known about them. They tend to keep to themselves. I know they don’t like humans.”

“Why don’t they like humans?” asked Gewey, trying to keep his mind off the pain.

“Five hundred years ago, man and elf lived in peace,” Lee began. “They more or less stayed out of each other’s way. That is, until King Luthon IV of Maltona desecrated their most sacred temple. He was a greedy, selfish ruler. He’d made war on his neighbors for so long that he bankrupted his nation. The Temple of the Four Winds - the seat of elfish spiritual power - rested on the border of his kingdom and was rumored to hold vast treasures. For hundreds of years humans had left the Temple in the elves’ control, but Luthon decided to break tradition and claim it for himself. This, of course, sent the elves into a frenzy.

“At first the war was contained in Maltona, but as the elves closed in, Luthon convinced neighboring kingdoms that the elves wouldn’t stop once Maltona fell. Thus, the Great War between elf and man began. For twenty years it spread and raged, leaving the landscape in ruin. Eventually, both sides came to an uneasy truce and agreed to keep to their own lands, never to have dealings with one another again.”

“So man started it?” Gewey asked. “No wonder they hate us.”

“Yes, but that wasn’t the end of it,” Lee continued. “The war split the elven nations apart. Many didn’t want the truce, and they began raiding human villages. They slaughtered entire families, burning everything in sight. The other elven tribes, fearing a second war with man, turned on their own kin. For ten more years there was civil war, leaving the elves a scattered, broken people. After that, they receded into the shadows. Few have seen them since, and fewer still know much about them.”

Gewey pictured the elf woman in his mind - how proud and defiant she seemed, and how beautiful. He couldn’t imagine such a war.

“I’ve spoken too much,” said Lee. “You should rest. There’s a village ten miles from here, and I need to scout it before we go. You’ll have to wait here until I return.”

Gewey was already drifting off. “I’ll be fine,” he said sleepily. “But before you go, tell me one more thing. Why were you willing to leave her to die?”

“You have to understand, Gewey,” Lee replied. “The story I told you is from long ago, and there aren’t many who still know the tale. Men choose to forget the war, convincing themselves that the elves’ hatred of them is uncalled for, returning hate with more hate. Dealings with elves are dangerous at best. Their loathing runs deep, and their cunning is formidable. They live about five times longer than an average man, so there are elves still walking the earth who can remember what the war did to their people. They’ve become poisoned by their own memory, and in turn, they poison the minds of their children. They’re not the people they once were. Believe me when I tell you, releasing that elf has put us in more danger than we were in already. I’m still not sure she won’t come back and try to kill us.”

“But we saved her,” said Gewey. “Why would she want to kill us?”

“You’re human to her eyes,” Lee answered grimly. “And that’s reason enough. Now, you need to sleep.”

Gewey obeyed and let himself drift off. The face of the elf woman haunted his dreams.

The next morning, Gewey awoke to find that Lee had already left, but not before he’d taken the time to leave wafers and dried meat at Gewey’s bedside, along with his sword. His wounds still throbbed, but Gewey managed to sit up and eat. After he finished, he got to his feet and walked around for a bit. His legs felt weak at first, but the more he walked, the stronger he felt. After a while he became bored and decided to try to take a nap.

As Gewey lay there, he listened to the sounds of the forest. At first he heard only what anyone would hear, but as his mind stilled he was able to take in more and more. It was subtle to begin with - the sound of a robin making its nest, then the rustling of a grass snake slithering through the brush. Gradually, his awareness grew and grew until he felt as if he could hear the very growing of the trees. Though everything around him lived and breathed, it did not feel chaotic. Instead, it was like a chorus of life in perfect harmony. He lay there for hours listening to the music of the forest until he heard the sound of footsteps approaching in the distance.

He got up and grabbed his sword, wincing in pain. A few minutes later Lee arrived, frowning.

“Why are you on your feet?” he scolded.

Gewey told him what he had experienced.

“That’s very good,” said Lee. “But you need to rest for a bit longer. I don’t want you to reopen your wounds.” Lee instructed Gewey to take off his shirt so that he could check his bandages. As he removed the dressings, Lee stared in disbelief.

“And I thought I healed fast!” he said in amazement. “Your wounds have closed already. It will still take some time for you to heal completely, but I think we’ll be able to move on sooner than I thought.”

Gewey was pleased. “I do feel much better. In fact, I think I’m ready to leave now.”

“Not so fast,” Lee advised. “I’ve secured a room at an inn, and we’re not expected there until nightfall tomorrow. We’ll risk one more day here and move on in the afternoon. It’s ten miles to the village of Gath, so you’ll need to gather your strength.”

“If you say so,” Gewey sighed. “What do we do in the mean time?”

Lee grinned. “I suggest you lay back down and listen to the forest. It’s good practice.”

Gewey grumbled with discontent. He hated being idle; years of farm work had driven the laziness right out of him. At first he kept insisting that he was well enough to travel, but Lee wouldn’t budge.

Finally, after much argument, Gewey gave in and spent the rest of the day listening to the forest as he had been told to do.

It felt like he had lain there forever before it was time to leave. Gewey spent most of the night, and next morning, staring at the trees. Lee had given him an herbal tea to help him sleep, but it only made him light-headed and dizzy. Lee insisted that Gewey continue to rest while he packed. When he was done, he checked Gewey’s bandages once more and tossed him a fine linen shirt and expensive riding trousers.

“What’s this?” asked Gewey.

“Just get dressed,” Lee instructed.

Gewey dressed and mounted his horse. Pain shot through his body as he climbed up, but he was able to hide it from Lee.

“I would have helped you,” said Lee.

“No need,” Gewey insisted. “I can manage.”

The sun was just setting when they reached the road outside Gath. The village was much larger than Sharpstone, and the streets were busier than Gewey was used to seeing this late in the evening. Vendors were still pulling their carts about, looking for prime locations along the main avenue, and lights shone in every shop window.

The sound of a blacksmith’s hammer rang through the air, and the smell of the nearby stables made Gewey’s heart long for home. The street they traveled twisted and turned until he had trouble remembering which way they had come; Gewey thought he would certainly be lost if they had to make a quick getaway, but Lee seemed to know exactly where he was going.

“There, up ahead,” Lee directed, pointing to a sign that read The Fated Bandit. “I’ve instructed the innkeeper to have our meals brought to our room. I’ve told him that I’m a horse merchant traveling with my son. Don’t speak unless you must; your accent gives you away.”

Gewey frowned. “What do you mean?”

“I mean you sound like a farmer from Sharpstone. Your father may have educated you somewhat, but you don’t sound like the son of a wealthy merchant.”

Gewey’s face soured. “There’s nothing wrong with the way I sound,” he said, offended.

“Look, boy,” Lee said. “You’ll stay in the room and not come out. We need to keep you out of sight until you’re well enough to travel, so stick to the plan for now. The first person that hears your voice will immediately see through our story, so if you must speak, keep it short.”

They tied their horses to the hitching post and Lee went inside. Gewey stayed with the horses to watch their belongings. It wasn’t long before a young boy came from around the back of the building and began unpacking the horses. Gewey wanted to help, but he stopped himself; a spoiled merchant’s son wouldn’t offer to lend a hand. Lee walked outside and gave the lad a copper coin.

“See that our horses are well taken care of,” Lee ordered. He then turned to Gewey. “Let’s go. Our meal is waiting.”

The inn was as clean as the inns in Sharpstone, though a bit larger. The common room was filled with travelers of all sorts -merchants, pilgrims, and even a pair of lords from the south. To the delight of the gathered crowd, a flutist had taken up residence in the corner, playing a jaunty, well-known festival dance. Serving maids were running about as the innkeeper barked orders to a thin, blond-haired youth. Gewey breathed in the air and smiled. This was a welcome change from the woods and trails.

Lee led him up the stairs and down a hall to their room. It was small, but accommodating. Two beds lined opposite walls, and a brass washbasin, already filled with hot water, sat in the corner. On a small table were two plates piled high with roast mutton and spring peas. A loaf of hot bread steamed in the center, and a cup of honeyed wine sat beside each plate. Gewey’s mouth watered at the prospect of his first hot meal in days.

A few minutes later there was a knock at the door. It was the young blond lad from the common room. He had brought up their belongings, and he informed them that the other boy had seen to their horses. Lee thanked him and passed out yet another copper piece.

“Throwing quite a bit of money around,” Gewey observed. “Don’t you think that will draw attention?”

“It would be noticed more if I didn’t,” Lee replied. “Like I said, we’re supposed to be wealthy horse merchants. That type likes to show off.” Lee paused. “And don’t try to lecture me, boy. Of the two of us, I’m the one who has been more than twenty miles from Sharpstone.”

“I didn’t mean anything by it,” said Gewey. “I just…”

“You need to understand the danger we are in,” Lee interrupted. “Right now, we’re exposed. Until you’re healed, you must not question even the smallest thing I say.”

Gewey nodded, and then stripped off his clothes to wash up. To his embarrassment, Lee insisted on helping him and changing his bandages. After they were both washed, they sat down to eat. The food was still hot, and Gewey moaned with satisfaction as he took the first bite.

Gewey felt recharged after a wash and a hot meal, and he asked Lee if they could go down to the common room and listen to the music. Lee angrily repeated his earlier warning about the danger they were in. “Besides,” he said, “you still need to heal.”

“I don’t see how a few minutes of sitting in a corner and enjoying myself could put us in danger,” Gewey protested. “Anyway, I feel much stronger now. I promise I won’t say a word to anyone!”

Lee looked as if he was ready to strangle the boy. “There will be no further discussion,” he said through his teeth. “In the morning, I have to pretend to be interested in horse trading, and I expect you to stay in this room at all times. Understand?”

Gewey didn’t answer, instead easing himself down onto the bed and staring at the ceiling. Lee unpacked a few things, set his sword next to his bed, and went to sleep. Gewey stayed awake for a while, thinking about home.

The next morning he woke to find Lee already dressed and breakfast waiting on the table.

“I checked your wounds while you slept,” Lee said. “It looks as if you’ll be ready to travel in just a few days. You’re healing twice as fast as I’d hoped.”

“Great,” yawned Gewey. “I don’t want to be stuck in this place any longer than I have to.”

“In any case, I’ll be back by dark,” Lee said, clearly not looking forward to playing the role of a merchant. Lee’s discomfort made Gewey feel a little better.

“What should I do?” asked Gewey.

“Stay here and bloody heal,” Lee growled as he walked out the door.

The day passed slowly as Gewey tried to occupy himself. At first he tried listening to the sounds of the town, but unlike the harmony of the forest, the sounds of Gath were confused and chaotic. He wasn’t able to stand it for more than a few seconds.

When sunset came and Lee hadn’t returned, Gewey began to worry. After another hour passed, supper and hot water were brought to the room, but he was too anxious to eat. Just as Gewey had finally decided to go looking for Lee, he burst through the door, breathing heavily.

“What happened?” asked Gewey. “Where have you been?”

“It seems our presence has been noticed,” Lee answered. “I spotted someone following me through the streets, but I think I lost him.”

“Could you tell who it was?”

“No. Whoever it was moved so fast that I almost didn’t notice him until it was too late. It took more than an hour before I was sure I wouldn’t lead him back here.”

“What do we do?” asked Gewey.

“I’ve already sent for the horses,” said Lee. “I hate to have you travel before you’re healed, but I don’t see any other choice.”

Gewey looked at Lee reassuringly. “I’ll be fine. There’s barely any pain at all.”

“Still, I don’t want you doing too much too soon.” said Lee, sitting down at the table. “We have some time before the horses are ready, so we might as well eat before we go.”

They ate and packed, finishing just as the blond youth from the inn came to inform them that their horses were ready and waiting. They gathered their things and left. While Lee loaded the packhorse, Gewey couldn’t help but feel exposed and vulnerable. He kept expecting something to happen, but the night was quiet. They mounted their horses and slowly made their way west, out of town.

As they passed the last building within the town limits, Gewey could swear he saw a shadow moving behind him before ducking out of sight.

Chapter 6

“Aren’t we leaving the road?” Gewey asked after they had ridden a while.

“No,” said Lee. “We’re still being followed, and I plan to catch whoever it is.”

Gewey smiled. “Good, I hate running.”

Lee threw the hood of his cloak over his head. “Maybe so, but if I tell you to run, you do it.”

Gewey’s smile vanished. “I’m not running if it means leaving you behind,” he said with determination.

“You’ll do as I say,” Lee shot back. “If danger comes, I can handle it much better if I don’t have to watch you.”

“I don’t need watching,” Gewey protested.

“For now, you do,” said Lee. “Until I’ve had time to train you, you’re a liability in a fight. But don’t worry; your time will come soon enough.”

Gewey didn’t like being thought of as a liability, but he could hardly argue; the last time he fought, he’d been nearly killed.

They rode on until they found a decent spot to camp. Lee lit a fire and told Gewey to get some sleep.

“Aren’t we a bit out in the open?” asked Gewey.

Lee was changing into a black shirt and a set of black leather trousers. “Like I said, I intend to find out who’s following us. You try to get some rest. I’ll be nearby.” Lee disappeared into the darkness.

Sleeping in the day for so long had made it hard for Gewey to do so at night, so he stared at the small fire while listening to the crackle of the dry branches. Morning came and he still hadn’t slept. His wounds felt much better though. In fact, when he reached under the dressings, he could feel that they were almost completely healed. He wondered if there would be a scar. The wounds on his arms had already turned light pink, and the one to his chest had closed and was well on its way to being no more than a minor irritation.

Lee appeared out of the nearby brush looking stern and focused. He unpacked their breakfast and checked Gewey’s bandages.

“Amazing,” said Lee. “You seem to heal more quickly by the minute. I can’t wait to see how powerful you‘ll become.”

“Did you see anyone last night?” asked Gewey.

“Yes, but whoever it was moved off before I could catch him,” Lee said. He spat angrily. “From now on, we stay on our guard. This one is fast, and knows how to move without being seen.”

“Shouldn’t we get off the road?” Gewey asked. “Maybe we can lose him.”

Lee shook his head. “We won’t be able to lose him there; he’s too good, too fast. And though they don’t look like they’ll be a problem for much longer, your injuries will still slow us down. No, we need to catch him - and kill him.”

These final words sent a chill down Gewey’s spine. When he had watched Lee kill the bandits it was fast and furious; he hadn’t had the time to consider what was about to happen. This time they were planning to capture and kill someone. Somehow it felt different - calculated, vicious.

“How do you plan to catch him?” Gewey asked.

“I don’t know,” Lee admitted, squatting down to pick at the grass. “It’s four days until we reach the next town. I have until then to figure it out. That is, unless he attacks us first.”

The next two nights were the same. Lee set up camp, then scoured the area, hoping to get lucky in finding their pursuer. But he met with no success. Gewey could see the frustration on Lee’s face. He hadn’t slept, and the fatigue began to show in his eyes. Gewey urged him to rest for at least a few hours, but Lee ignored his advice.

On the third night, they set up camp and had just begun to eat their meal when Gewey saw Lee‘s neck stiffen and his hand move slowly to the knife in his belt.

“What is it?” Gewey whispered. Lee shook his head almost imperceptibly. Just as his hand reached the handle of his knife they heard a rustle in the bushes just beyond the light of their fire. Lee and Gewey both jumped to their feet and drew their weapons.

“Peace,” said a female voice. “I mean you no ill will.”

From out of the darkness came the elf woman they had saved from the bandits. She moved with such grace and precision that her footsteps seemed to glide over the ground. Gewey stared in awe. She was wearing a shirt and trousers made of fine cloth, which appeared to change color and hue as she passed through the fire light.

Her hair was now done in a series of tight braids, tied together by a thin leather strap. Over her shoulder she carried a short bow and a quiver of arrows. In her hand she held a long knife.

“So it’s you who’s been following us,” growled Lee.

“Yes,” she answered. “And with very little difficulty, I must say.” Her mouth turned to a sinister grin. “Your clumsy efforts to catch me have kept me quite entertained.”

“Those bandits didn’t seem to have much trouble catching you,” Lee shot back.

The elf woman’s jaw tightened. “There were twenty of them before they met me. The six you encountered were all that was left.”

“What do you want?” Lee asked. “Why are you following us?”

“What I want is none of your affair,” she answered. “I follow you because it pleases me to do so.”

“You play a dangerous game, elf,” said Lee. “You’re lucky I didn’t kill you the moment you stepped out of the shadows.”

The elf woman laughed. “Bold words, half-man.”

Lee’s back stiffened. “What did you call me?” he asked, his tone low and threatening.

“I know what you are,” she said. “I knew the moment I saw you. Only a half-man can move as you do.”

“If you know that, then you also know it won’t be easy to kill me,” said Lee.

“Maybe it will, maybe it won’t,” she said. “I’ve dealt with your kind before. But it’s not you that I’m interested in - it’s your young friend.” Her eyes set upon Gewey. “You’re no half-man, yet here you stand, when by all accounts you should be dead.”

“And that’s none of your affair,” Lee said before Gewey could answer. “Again I ask you, what do you want?”

The elf woman sheathed her blade. “For now, I want you to come with me. There’s something I need to show you.” She turned and began to walk away.

Gewey started to follow, but Lee grabbed his collar and pulled him back.

“You think I’m a fool?” Lee snapped. “You must, if you imagine I’ll follow you blindly into the night.”

The elf paused. “You may have strength, half-man, but I believe the instincts of your young companion are better. But, if you need assurance…” She turned to face them and got down on one knee. “I swear by the angels of the night and the guardian who watches the souls of my kin that I mean you no harm.” With that, she rose.

“I’m going with her,” said Gewey. “I don’t think she wants to hurt us.”

Lee grumbled and nodded. “Very well,” he said, putting away his weapon. “I know nothing about the oaths of an elf or what your people now hold sacred, but you’re right about one thing. I do trust his instincts. But know that if you betray us, it will be the last thing you do.”

“As you say,” the elf laughed, then led them north into the nearby woods.

Lee walked directly behind the elf, his hand never leaving the hilt of his sword. Gewey followed, trying to keep himself from gawking at the silhouetted figure of the elven woman moving through the forest. He thought back on the tale Lee had told him about the war and shook his head, wondering.

How could man make war on such beautiful people?

They walked for several minutes until they came to a steep hill. The elven woman stopped and turned.

“Before we go on, I must ask you a favor,” she said.

“What favor?” asked Lee.

“I wasn’t speaking to you, half-man,” she said.

Lee glared at the elf. “You will speak to…”

“What is it I can do for you?” Gewey asked, cutting Lee off.

Lee was furious.

The elf looked straight into Gewey’s eyes. “If what I have to show you is of value, I want you to allow me to accompany you.”

“Out of the question,” Lee asserted. “You have no business with us. If you feel in our debt for saving you, I release you from your obligation.”

“It is not for you to release me from anything,” she replied. “You know nothing of my motives, and I will tell you nothing except that I will not harm you. I will follow you with or without your permission. All I ask is that you let me do so openly.”

“It would be an honor to have you join us,” Gewey said, before Lee could stop him. “But I must warn you, our road is dangerous.”

“I have already guessed that,” she said. “And I thank you. Now come and see what the night has caught.”

She led them up the hill to where a small patch of thin pines grew.

Lying face down was a man - bound, gagged, and unconscious. A horse was tied to a tree, and the man’s belongings had been tossed on the ground next to him.

“He’s been following you,” she said. “I overheard him asking someone on the road about two men traveling west, one young, and one older. He described you perfectly. I thought you might want to question him before I slit his throat.”

Lee walked to the unconscious man and rolled him over. To his great surprise, it was Millet.

“Millet!” Lee shouted. “What have you done to him?”

“You know him?” asked the elf.

“He’s my servant, and my friend,” said Lee as he drew his knife and cut Millet’s bonds.

“Forgive me,” she said. “I didn’t know.”

Lee examined him. He had a few bruises, but otherwise looked unharmed. “Why is he unconscious?” asked Lee, cradling Millet in his arms.

“I forced him to drink jawas tea,” she answered. “He’ll be awake soon. In the mean time, I suggest you gather your things and bring them here. This is a much better location. I’ll watch over your servant until you return.”

Lee reluctantly agreed, leaving Gewey to keep watch on the hill. He didn’t want Millet to wake up only to see an armed elf at his side.

Millet was still unconscious when Lee returned. They built a small fire and Lee unpacked medicine to heal Millet’s bruises.

The elf woman sat far from the fire, her eyes closed. Gewey couldn’t keep his eyes off her. Finally, he shyly walked over and sat next to her.

“What’s your name?” he asked.

She slowly opened her eyes and looked at Gewey. “I am called Kaylia.” Her voice was soft and feminine, yet strong.

“I’m Gewey,” he said awkwardly. He looked over at Lee, who was tending to Millet. “He’s not so bad. If it wasn’t for him, I’d be dead right now.”

“Perhaps,” she said.

“Why do you want to come with us?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia closed her eyes again. “I have my reasons.”

Gewey stared at her in silence for a while.

“Why do you stare?” Kaylia asked. Her tone wasn’t judgmental or accusing, but it made Gewey blush all the same.

“I don’t know,” said Gewey. “I don’t seem to be able to help myself. I’m sorry.”

Kaylia smiled. “Most humans turn their eyes from my kind. Strange that you do not.”

“I’m just curious about you,” he said. “I never thought I’d meet an elf.”

“Did you want to?” she asked.

“I never gave it much thought,” he replied. “But now that you’re here, I’m glad that I’ve had the chance.”

Kaylia looked at him peculiarly. “You don’t fear me. Why?”

“Should I?” asked Gewey. “You said you didn’t want to hurt us.”

“I could be lying,” she replied.

Gewey shook his head. “Why would you? I’m not an expert in battle, but I think that if you’d wanted to hurt us, you could have picked us off with your bow.”

“True,” Kaylia agreed. “It’s just that I find it odd you’re so willing to take me as a companion. You’re clearly not like other humans.”

“You might be surprised, if you get to know a few,” he replied.

“Perhaps,” said Kaylia. “I have a feeling I’ll know soon enough.”

Millet began to stir by the fire. Lee was still cradling his head in his lap.

“My…My Lord?” Millet asked weakly.

“Yes my old friend,” said Lee, smiling down at him. “You’re safe.”

“An elf,” he said. “She attacked me on the road. How did you find me?”

“Don’t worry about it,” said Lee. “Rest for now. I’ll explain later.”

“Of course.” said Millet, lowering his eyes. “I’m sorry. I couldn’t let you go alone.”

“He is not alone,” said Kaylia.

Millet looked over and saw the elf woman “You!” he screamed, trying to get up. “My Lord, she’s the one. She’s the one who attacked me.”

Lee held him. “I know,” he said soothingly. “Don’t worry, she won’t do it again. Go back to sleep and I’ll explain everything in the morning.”

“If it’s all the same to you, My Lord,” he said, “I’ve slept quite enough.” He sat up and tried to stand, but his legs were still sore from his bindings, and his head still swam from being drugged.

“Easy, Millet,” Lee advised. “Take your time.”

“Perhaps I’ll just sit for a while,” Millet said. “At least until that blasted tea wears off. Strong stuff, that is.”

Millet was wearing a dark leather woodsman’s outfit. His round features and pale skin gave the impression that he was city born and ill-suited for life in the country, but the stories Lee had told of him painted a different picture. He may have seemed soft, but Gewey guessed that the man had a strength that wasn’t readily apparent. Lee had described him as crafty, resourceful, and - most of all - loyal. Gewey could tell that Lee was pleased to see him.

“If you don’t mind, I would like to know what I’ve missed,” said Millet, still glaring at Kaylia.

Lee recounted the events of the past days, leaving out any mention of Gewey’s heritage. Gewey figured this to be for Kaylia’s benefit. When he finished, Millet shook his head and sighed. “That explains how I lost you in the forest,” he said. “You must have been less than a stone’s throw away when I passed you.”

“That was you?” Gewey asked.

“Indeed,” Millet answered. “I was on your trail the day after you left. Don’t worry, Master Gewey, your farm is being well tended. I left instructions for the staff to say that the two of you will be away for many weeks, and that Lord Starfinder had made arrangements to tend your farm.”

“I’m sure everything is in order, Millet,” Lee said. “But you shouldn’t have come. This isn’t like our other journeys, old friend. I don’t know if we’ll ever return.”

“I know,” said Millet. “And if you think for one second that I’ll be left behind to rot, then you’re not nearly as bright as I thought. Besides, I’m tired of village life. It’s high time I had another adventure. One more before the end. Wouldn’t you say, My Lord?”

Lee slapped Millet on the shoulder. “Yes I would.”

Lee and Millet spent the rest of the night talking quietly by the fire, while Gewey and Kaylia sat in silence until dawn. After they packed the gear, Lee gathered everyone around.

“The village of Harvesting Shallows is one more day’s ride,” said Lee. “Kaylia will have to wait for us on the other side of the town. The last thing we need is to be seen traveling with an elf.”

Kaylia nodded in agreement.

“When we get there,” he continued, “we’ll trade our steeds in for a wagon and horses better suited to the job. From then on, we’ll act as pilgrims. I already have the proper clothing for us, so that won’t be an issue. Anyone looking for me and Gewey won’t be looking for four pilgrims, and that should make it easier to hide Kaylia’s identity.”

“Wise plan,” Kaylia said. “I’ll scout ahead for now. You won’t see me again until you leave Harvesting Shallows.” With that, she took off through the woods and disappeared.

“Elves are strange folk,” said Millet. “I’m not sure it’s a good idea to let her travel with us, My Lord.”

“I doubt we could have stopped her,” said Lee. “Besides, Gewey’s the one who agreed to let her come along.”

Millet glared disapprovingly at Gewey.

The day was uneventful. They passed a few people on the road, but no one took any special notice of the three travelers. When they arrived in Harvesting Shallows it was an hour after sunset. Lee and Gewey got a room at an inn while Millet stabled the horses. Once in the privacy of their room, Lee checked Gewey’s wounds.

“Your arms are completely healed,” said Lee with satisfaction. “And at this rate your chest will be healed in a few more days.”

Gewey had almost forgotten his injuries. The wound on his chest itched from time to time, but other than that, he felt fine.

When Millet arrived, they unpacked their things and headed down to the common room to eat. Gewey was thrilled to be allowed out of his room.

“I don’t want you talking to anyone,” warned Lee. “We’re still trying to go unnoticed.”

Gewey nodded his head enthusiastically. “Don’t worry, Lee. For the rest of the night, I’m a mute.”

Lee gave Gewey a sideways look. “Just keep your conversation confined to the three of us.”

Millet couldn’t help but smile. “He reminds me of you,” he whispered into Lee’s ear.

Lee chuckled softly.

The common room wasn’t as nice as the one in Gath, but there was a lovely young woman in the corner singing folk tunes, most of which Gewey knew. The crowd was also a bit more common than at the last inn, but that was fine by him. He didn’t like pretending to be rich and stuck up. In his mind, he was still just a simple farmer, though he hadn’t realized until that moment just how proud of this he was.

“Where do we go from here?” asked Gewey over a bowl of hot beef stew.

“We’ll keep to the west road for now,” said Lee. “The additional company has forced me to rethink the plan, but it looks like it’s going to turn out for best. We’ll move more slowly, but we’ll draw a lot less attention.”

Millet nodded in agreement. “Sir, if I may? Sooner or later our lady friend will get curious about the true nature of our trip. How do you plan to deal with certain…revelations?”

“What do you mean?” asked Gewey.

“What I mean is, although she may know the true nature of Lord Starfinder, yours is something quite different. From what I understand about her kind, it may become a problem.”

“I don’t follow,” said Gewey. “Why should my ‘nature’ be a problem for her?” Until then, Gewey hadn’t been sure how much Millet knew about him, but clearly Lee had confided everything.

“What Millet means,” said Lee, “is that your kind is not exactly held in high regard by hers. When she finds out, there’s no telling how she’ll react. It’s one of the reasons I didn’t want her with us.”

Gewey looked confused. “It would help if I knew what you are talking about.”

“When I told you about the war, I left out an important detail,” said Lee. “Man was losing until the gods intervened. They gave mankind the means to turn the tide; needless to say, this left a bad taste in the mouths of the elves where your kind is concerned.”

“I see your point,” Gewey said thoughtfully. “How do we handle it?”

“With great care, I would think,” said Millet. “She may be dangerous, but given her current choice of traveling companions, she may not take it as poorly as we fear. Frankly, I’m surprised she let me live.”

Lee contemplated the situation. “For now we need to keep things to ourselves,” he said, finally. “Short of killing her, there’s no way to be rid of her company. Besides, she may be of use in the days to come.”

“We’re not killing her,” Gewey snapped. “I gave my word.”

“Calm down, boy,” said Lee. “I have no intention of killing her, and if I did, I doubt it would be easy. She said she killed at least fourteen bandits before she was captured, and I believe her. I tried to catch her myself for two straight nights and couldn’t, and I’m not someone you can easily avoid. No…I think killing her is out of the question. Still, we need to be careful until we find out what she really wants.”

“Isn’t it obvious?” Gewey asked. “We saved her life, and she feels she owes us.”

“I don’t think it’s as simple as that,” Lee replied. “Traveling openly with our kind is risky enough considering the way humans feel about elves. However, should her people discover it, I don’t think they would be happy - and that’s putting it mildly. If she simply wanted to return the favor, she could follow us unseen and wait for an opportunity. No…I don’t think it’s a matter of a simple debt.”

“We could just ask her,” Gewey suggested. Lee and Millet both laughed.

“Yes, young master,” said Millet. “That may be the solution, but I doubt she would be very forthcoming.”

“Millet’s right,” said Lee. “She won’t tell you until she’s ready. But do ask if you feel the need. You never know, she might surprise us.”

The conversation steered toward more pleasant topics as the warm stew filled their bellies and lifted their spirits. When they were finished, they retired to the room. There were only two beds provided, so Millet insisted on sleeping on the floor. Gewey protested, but Millet wouldn’t listen.

“I may look soft, Master Gewey,” said Millet. “But let me assure you that I am not. Besides, you are still injured, and Lord Starfinder is far less able to deal with hardship than I.”

Lee smiled, rubbing his eyes. “Don’t try to argue with him, Gewey; the man will stay up all night badgering you if you try.” Lee stretched his arms and yawned. “If he says he’s sleeping on the floor, that’s what he’ll do, and there’s nothing on earth that can stop him. Believe me, I’ve tried to change his mind before, and you saw how well that went.”

Millet looked displeased. “If you’re referring to me following you and master Gewey, need I remind you that I had told you even before you left that I had no intention of letting you go off and getting yourself killed. I daresay that you are quite incapable of managing without me.”

“I wouldn’t presume to dispute you,” said Lee. Millet smiled. “Very wise, My Lord.” Gewey decided it was best to let Millet have his way and went to sleep. The morning came, and for once Gewey had risen before Lee.

However, Millet was nowhere to be seen.

“Wake up,” said Gewey, shaking Lee.

“What is it, boy?” he asked groggily.

“Millet’s gone.”

The door opened. “I’m not gone,” Millet said, carrying a platter with three bowls of porridge and three cups of fresh milk. “While the two of you have lazed around wasting the day, I procured us a wagon and two fine horses to pull it. And I’ve restocked our provisions and had them delivered to the inn.”

Lee rolled out of bed and took the milk and porridge. “You see, Gewey? The man’s a freak of nature. Who else could get all that done before breakfast?”

“Indeed,” said Millet, and offered Gewey his breakfast, which the boy accepted gratefully. While eating, Gewey noticed that their gear had been packed, and three sets of pilgrim’s robes had been laid out for them. He could see why Lee held Millet in such high esteem. The sun was barely up, and he had already done a day’s worth of work.

Millet was the first to finish his breakfast and put on his robes.

“I’ll remove the gear to the wagon,” he said. “Do hurry. We don’t want to keep our elf friend waiting.”

“Wow,” said Gewey as he watched Millet walk out the door with their gear over his back.

“You got that right,” said Lee. “He may look like a soft city dweller to you, but that man is as tough as a spring bull.”

Gewey nodded in agreement. “I can’t believe you wanted to leave him behind.”

“I fear for his safety,” Lee said, looking pained. “I don’t know what I would do if something were to happen to him.”

Gewey got up and put his hand on Lee’s shoulder. “We’ll protect him.”

“Until you’re ready, I’ll be doing the protecting,” said Lee.

Gewey frowned. “I just meant…”

“I know what you meant,” Lee interjected. “And don’t think I don’t appreciate it. But now I have two people to watch out for - not to mention an elf.”

“Don’t worry,” said Gewey. “I’ll be ready when the time comes.”

“I know you will,” Lee said, rising to his feet. “And speaking of being ready, it’s time we got going.”

They put on their robes and left the inn. Millet was waiting out front with the wagon, an impatient look on his face. The wagon was covered and had two benches, one running along either side of the interior. Gewey examined the new animals Millet had bought. They were of good stock - strong and solid, fit for the long journey ahead. Gewey climbed into the back of the wagon with the supplies as Lee sat up front next to Millet, who insisted on doing the driving.

When they reached the outskirts of the village they saw someone in pilgrim’s robes standing alongside the road.

“I see all went well.” It was Kaylia. She hopped into the back of the wagon across from Gewey without waiting for Millet to stop.

“I don’t remember you taking robes with you,” said Gewey. Kaylia gave a mischievous smile. “You should pay more attention, young one.”

“We’re headed to the city of Kaltinor,” said Lee. “At our pace, it should take us at least six days to get there. Remember, should anyone ask, we’re pilgrims from the Eastern Temple of Ayliazarah on our way west to worship at the Temple of the Far Sky.”

Gewey had heard of these places from the stories his father had told him when he was a child. Ayliazarah, the Goddess of Fertility and Love, was worshiped in almost every city and village. Even the towns too small to have a temple usually had a shrine or two in her honor. The Temple of the Far Sky was on the coast of the Western Abyss, atop the Cliffs of Heaven, where all of the nine gods were worshipped. It was by far the oldest temple in existence, and thousands of pilgrims journeyed there each year. As Gewey saw the disgust on Kaylia face, he remembered what Lee had told him about the way elves felt about the gods.

“Tell me about yourself,” Gewey said to Kaylia.

“You know all that you need to know about me for now,” she said brusquely.

“Fine, then tell me about the elves,” he pressed.

Kaylia looked at him darkly, her fierce eyes burning from underneath her hood. “You do not need to know anything about my people, other than to stay away from them.”

“If elves hate humans so much, why do you want to travel with us?”

“Save your questions,” said Kaylia. “I’m sure your friends told you that you would get no answers from me.” She pulled her robes close. “You should listen to them.”

For the rest of the day, Lee and Millet discussed possible routes west while Kaylia listened quietly, occasionally offering advice. Gewey dozed on and off, though he was still determined to question Kaylia again. He desperately wanted to learn more about the elves; they seemed magical, yet treacherous - like beautiful predators. Every movement Kaylia made flowed like water, and her voice was like soft music. Gewey caught himself staring at her over and over again, though she didn’t seem to notice - if she did, she ignored it. That night they set up camp just off the road. Kaylia disappeared as soon as they settled in.

“Where do you think she went?” asked Gewey.

“I don’t know,” said Lee. “But I’m sure she’ll be back by morning.”

“Do elves sleep?” he asked.

“I would think so,” said Lee. “But how often, I couldn’t say. Most of what I know about elves is from the few books I’ve read on the subject, and most of these were about the elves of old. Very little is written about what they are like now. Best not to worry about it.  Get some rest.”

Lee removed Gewey’s bandages and examined the wound on his chest. It had almost completely healed, so Lee decided a bandage was no longer necessary. The pink lines on his arms that told where his cuts had been had vanished completely.

The morning came, and just as Lee had said, Kaylia returned.  They climbed on the wagon and slowly moved on.

Chapter 7

The day was hot, and sitting in the back of the wagon in full robes was miserable. Kaylia, however, seemed unaffected.

“How old are you?” Gewey asked Kaylia, renewing his efforts to get information. “I hear your people live a long time.”

“I’m older than you,” she said without looking up.

Gewey was undeterred. “I’m just trying to get to know you.”

“There’s no need,” said Kaylia. “You already know everything you need to know.”

“But that’s practically nothing,” Gewey insisted. “If we’re going to travel together, don’t you think we should know more about each other?”

“I do not,” she replied. “At least not now.”

Gewey kept pressing, determined to learn more about her. “Do you have a last name, or are you just Kaylia?”

Kaylia reached in her robe, pulled out a flask, and drank deeply.

“What’s that?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia handed him the flask. He noticed a sweet smell as he lifted it to his mouth. Despite the heat, the liquid was cool, and it tasted like honeyed water.

“Thank you,” said Gewey, handing her back the flask.

Suddenly, he felt woozy and his vision blurred. The last thing Gewey saw as he dropped to the bottom of the wagon was Kaylia’s grinning face.

Lee turned and saw Gewey sprawled next to the supplies. “What happened?”

“The boy wanted to know more about elves,” said Kaylia. “So I introduced him to jawas tea.”

Lee laughed aloud. “A lesson he won’t soon forget, I imagine.

Wouldn’t you agree, Millet?”

Millet was not amused; his own experience with jawas tea still lingered in his memory. “I don’t think it’s a good idea to drug the boy,” he said sourly. “If we are attacked, it won’t do to have to carry him.”

“You’re right, of course,” Lee acknowledged. He turned to Kaylia. “In the future, please let the boy remain conscious.”

Kaylia shrugged. “If you say so.”

When Gewey awoke, the wagon had stopped. Millet was preparing the noon meal, while Kaylia and Lee were checking the horses.

“What happened?” Gewey asked. His vision was still fuzzy, and his head swam.

“Our elf friend happened,” said Millet. “She drugged you with jawas tea.”

Gewey rubbed his eyes. “Why did she do that?”

“I expect she wanted you to stop asking questions,” Millet replied. “In the future, I suggest that you refrain from accepting food or drink from a stranger, especially if that stranger is an elf.”

“I think you might be right,” said Gewey as he slowly climbed out of the wagon. At least I learned one thing, he thought. Jawas tea doesn’t affect elves.

Gewey ate his food as far away from Kaylia as he could, and when they were done he insisted on trading trade places with Lee in the wagon.

Once they were underway, Gewey turned to Millet. “You’ve been with Lee for a long time, right?”

Millet nodded. “A very long time.”

“What was he like when he was young?” asked Gewey.

“Rash,” Millet answered. “Very rash.”

Gewey paused, considering what he should ask about next. “Have you been to Kaltinor before?”

“Yes, but not for many years,” Millet replied. “I’m sure you’ll find it exciting. Compared to Sharpstone, it’s a very large city.”

Gewey tried to picture what it would be like. Gath was the largest town he’d seen so far. He’d heard stories about some of the great cities - their tall buildings reaching to the heavens, their wide brick streets large enough to accommodate twenty wagons at once. He wondered if Kaltinor would be like that.

“What’s the biggest city you’ve seen?” asked Gewey.

Millet thought it over for a moment. “That would have to be Baltria,” he said finally. “Though it wasn’t the most impressive city I’ve visited.”

For the next few hours Millet entertained Gewey with tales of the wonderful places he had seen. He didn’t mind the flood of questions, and answered each one with courtesy and patience.

“Stop the wagon,” Kaylia said suddenly. “Now!”

Millet stopped the wagon and Kaylia jumped out to scan the woods. After a few minutes, she got back in the wagon and told Millet to continue on.

“What did you see?” Lee asked, his hand on his sword.

“Hopefully nothing that need concern us,” Kaylia answered.

“I’m concerned, and I’m responsible for the lives of my friends,” Lee said. “So you need to tell me what you saw.”

“There’s a small group of elves traveling south of the road. If they ignore us, we’ll be fine. If not…” Kaylia trailed off, her eyes meeting Lee’s with a mutual understanding.

Lee closed his eyes and listened to the sounds of the woods. In the distance, he heard four elves matching their pace.

“They follow us,” Lee said warily. “Don’t say anything to Millet or Gewey yet.”

Kaylia nodded. “Agreed. If all goes well, it won’t be necessary. They may not know I’m here.”

“And if they do?” Lee asked.

“Then I will have to speak to them,” Kaylia replied, clearly troubled by the prospect.

The day passed slowly for Lee and Kaylia. Millet and Gewey realized something was wrong, but after a while they decided to ignore it. Millet continued to regale the boy with tales of his travels.

When night fell, they made camp. Gewey helped Millet build the fire and prepare the meal. Lee sat on a blanket, sharpening and oiling his sword, his eyes fixed on the surrounding forest. Kaylia was leaning against the wagon, her head bowed in thought.

Lee sheathed his sword and walked over to Kaylia.

“They’re still here,” he said.

“I know,” Kaylia responded. “I must speak to them. Wait here until I return.”

Lee sat next to the fire while Millet and Gewey ate, eyes closed, listening into the night.

“What are you doing?” asked Gewey.

“I’m listening,” Lee growled. “So be quiet.”

Gewey noticed Kaylia’s absence. “Where’s…?”

Lee’s eyes popped open, glaring at Gewey. Gewey tried to listen as he had done in Gath, but he couldn’t concentrate. Frustrated, he threw down his bowl and stormed over to his bedroll.

Suddenly, Kaylia reappeared and sat next to the fire.

“Where did you go?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia pushed back her hood; her face was stone and her eyes narrow slits. “I was speaking to my kin.”

Gewey leapt to his feet. “What?”

“Don’t worry,” she said. “We’re in no danger.”

Lee grunted and tossed a twig into the fire.

“That’s good news,” said Millet. “But it would have been nice to know that elves were nearby.”

“There was no need to tell you,” said Lee. “At least, not at the time.”

“How long have you known they were out there?” Gewey seethed.

“What difference does it make?” he answered. “You couldn’t have done anything about it other than worry. If they’d attacked, we’d all be dead anyway.”

This did little to calm Gewey. “I don’t care!” he yelled. “If my life’s in danger, I have a right to know!”

Kaylia fixed her gaze on Gewey. “Shut your mouth,” she said.

Her voice was steel. “What right do you have to question anything? Those around you are willing to sacrifice themselves to protect you. Isn’t that enough?” With that, she turned and headed off into the night.

Gewey started to follow her, but Lee stopped him.

“Leave her,” Lee advised.

Gewey pushed passed him and chased after her anyway.

“Rash,” said Millet. “Very rash. But I must say, he is handling his situation remarkably well, all things considered.”

Lee sat down. “How am I going to keep him alive long enough to get him ready? It’s been less than a month, and already he’s nearly been killed.”

“Yes,” Millet replied. “But he wasn’t killed, was he? The boy will learn, just as you did.”

“I almost failed,” Lee said. “When I attacked the bandit camp, I chased two of them down. That’s when Gewey got hurt. When I left him alone.”

Millet nodded. “That sounds familiar; you never could stand to let anyone escape.”

“It’s all too familiar,” Lee agreed. “It almost got Gewey killed. If I had just let them go, the boy would have never been injured. I keep making the same mistakes over and over again.”

Millet smiled softly and placed his hand on Lee’s shoulder.

“You’ve always expected too much of yourself, Lee Starfinder. Your job is one of a protector, but you are also a teacher. The boy survived, and learned from the experience. If you think he can learn without danger, you’re wrong. Even I know that. You can’t protect him from everything, and you shouldn’t try.” Millet stood up and walked over to his blanket. “I believe in you, and I believe in the boy,” he said as he lay down. “You should too.”

Lee remained by the fire, mulling Millet’s words over in his head.

Meanwhile, Gewey wandered aimlessly, hoping to find Kaylia.

“Kaylia,” he called out in a whisper. He repeated it several times, but there was no reply. He was about to give up and start back to the camp when he realized that he was hopelessly lost. After meandering for a bit longer, he decided there was nothing to do but sit and wait for daylight.

Gewey heard a voice from behind him. “You’re very foolish.

You know elves wander these woods, yet you venture off alone in the dark.”

Startled, Gewey got quickly got to his feet. Turning around, he was able to make out Kaylia’s features in the darkness. “I was looking for you,” he said. “And besides, you told us they wouldn’t attack.”

“You continue to take my word on its merit,” said Kaylia. “The word of an elf. How strange.” The elven woman sat on the ground and crossed her legs. “Sit.”

Gewey sat across from Kaylia. After looking him up and down for a moment, she began to speak. “You’re not like other humans, are you? And I don’t just mean your attitude towards my kind. There’s something else different about you. Something that your friends are afraid I’ll discover.”

“Yes, there is,” Gewey replied nervously. “And believe me, I would like nothing more than to tell you.”

“So why don’t you?”

“I can’t,” Gewey insisted. “I don’t think you’d like what you’d find out.”

“I’ll make you a deal,” Kaylia proposed. “We’ll sit here and talk for a while, and I’ll tell you about my people; after that, you can decide the wisdom of sharing your secret. That is what you want, isn’t it? To know more about elves, and our ways?”

“I would love to know more about your people,” Gewey agreed. “And you.”

“Then we have an agreement,” she said, pulling back her hood.

“You asked how old I am: I am one hundred and three years old. That is young for my kind, in fact not much older than you by our standards. We can live for well over five hundred years. My father, who fought in the Great War, died eighty years ago. I’ve wandered ever since.”

“Why are you wandering?” asked Gewey.

“I search for my destiny,” Kaylia answered. “I was given a task when my father died, and I seek to complete it.”

Gewey was intrigued. “What’s the task?”

“My father was great among my people, and had the power of foresight. As he lay dying, he told me that it was my task to find redemption for my people, and that I should never stop searching for it. He said that one day the elven people would be healed by my hand. Since then, I have sought the meaning of his words.”

“You’ve wandered for eighty years?”

“I have,” she replied. “I hope to one day fulfill my destiny and help my people become great - as they were before the Great War.”

“Lee told me your kind hate humans,” said Gewey. “But the war has been over for five hundred years. Certainly enough time has passed to move on.”

“You wouldn’t understand. The Great War changed us. You would have to know what we once were to comprehend how devastating it has been for us.”

“Then we should start there,” Gewey said enthusiastically. “Tell me about your people.”

“A tall order,” Kaylia responded. “And a tale longer than time will allow. But I will tell you enough to satisfy your curiosity.”

Kaylia got to her feet to look at the night sky. The stars twinkled like fireflies over a lake, and the half-moon lit her face, making her features soft and radiant.

“The story of my people begins with the creation,” she began.

“Unlike you humans, we believe that the world was created by a single god. In the very beginning, there were only elves and the earth. Our ancestors were charged as caretakers for all living things, and for thousands of years we lived in harmony with nature. God blessed us with dominion over all things, and the wisdom to keep the world in balance. But as time passed we became arrogant, and forgetful of our duties. As a result, the One God sent the many gods, and with them…man.

“We prayed and lamented in hope that God would take pity on us and forgive us our sins. But God heard our prayers and knew them to be prideful. The many gods were now the keepers of the world, and man was favored above us. God could see the anger behind our prayers and removed his blessings. We lost the ability to speak with the Father of All Things, and my people fell into despair. But then he took pity on us, and sent the spirits and angels down to carry our prayers to him. They watch over us and guard the souls of our kin until the day God returns to pass His judgment. On that day we will see the Father, and we will both answer for our sins and be rewarded for our good deeds.

“You are the first human in over five hundred years to hear these words,” Kaylia continued. “There are many stories about the time before the gods came, and I promise I will tell them all if you wish to hear them - but for now, you know enough to understand the faith of my people.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey. “I would love to hear as much as you can tell me.”

Kaylia smiled warmly. “If all humans were as open as you, I doubt the Great War would have ever happened.”

“Do you hate humans?” Gewey asked.

“No,” Kaylia answered. “But I pity them.”

“Why?”

“They put their hopes in gods that are selfish and cruel,” she explained. “The gods have enslaved man, and made them their dogs. They gave them the gift of victory over the elves and allowed them to become powerful, but then denied them the wisdom to use that power. Such beings are not worthy of worship. The gods saved the humans from annihilation that would have been caused by their own arrogance; then, instead of reigning in their destruction, they set them loose to burn the world - and destroy my people.”

“You’re talking about the Great War,” Gewey interjected. “Lee told me a little about that. He said that the gods intervened so that man could win.”

“They did more than you could know,” she said. “Long ago, my people were vast in number and bound together by strong nations. The gods cast fear and doubt into our hearts. Our armies splintered, and we turned on each other. Kin fought kin, and man took advantage of our weakness and destroyed us.”

Gewey looked perplexed. “But Lee told me that the elves fought each other after they made peace with man.”

“The half-man only knows what human lies have told,” Kaylia said. “Mankind was beaten. There were no more battles to be fought. His armies were smashed, and his cities in ruins. My people had but to march across the land and slaughter the few that remained, and man would have been gone forever. But instead, we took pity on the humans and left them in peace. It was then that the gods cursed us. We knew hatred for our own kind for the first time, and it consumed us. We prayed to the spirits for help, but the gods imprisoned them, holding them until we had lost all hope. The humans did not show us the pity we had shown them. Man waited until we had all but destroyed ourselves, then swept down on us like a plague. The few who escaped found refuge in the forests and mountains where humans seldom went. Since then, we have struggled to rebuild and free ourselves of the curse the gods put on us.”

“I’m sorry,” Gewey said. “I had no idea how much your people have suffered.”

“Don’t be,” Kaylia responded. “My people will rise again. The suffering of my kin will make us wise - worthy to face the Father.”

She sat back down. “Now you know about us. I have shared secrets known to no other human. Will you not share your secret with me?”

Gewey felt ashamed. It was his very own kind - the gods – who’d destroyed her people. How could he tell her what he was?

“Now that I’ve heard your story, I’m even more afraid to tell you,” he said.

“If what I’ve told you isn’t enough, then know this,” said Kaylia, her eyes on fire. “I travel with you humans. This I told my kin, and I bargained to save your lives. One day I will face judgment and probable death. In the eyes of my people, there is nothing worse I could do than have human companions. It is forbidden.”

Gewey gasped. “They’re going to kill you? When?”

“When my journey with you ends, I will return home to answer for my crime,” she replied. “That is how I prevented my kin from attacking. Knowing this, what could you possibly tell me that would alter the path I have chosen?”

Gewey made up his mind. “I’ll tell you, but please understand that I only found out myself a short time ago.” He took a deep breath and steeled his nerves. “You said that there is nothing worse than having a human as a companion. But there is. I’m worse.”

Kaylia looked confused. “You’re dancing around the issue,” she said. “Just be direct and let me be the judge.”

“The boy is a god,” said Lee from the darkness. He walked up slowly and stood beside Gewey. “I had a feeling you’d do something stupid, boy, so I came to find you.”

Kaylia laughed loudly. “You don’t say,” she teased, seemingly not surprised by Lee’s sudden appearance. “A god! A living, breathing god, here in my presence. You’re right. That would be worse than traveling with a human.”

“This is no joke, elf,” Lee warned. “The tale you told makes me even more certain that you should not know what the boy is. But now you do anyway. The only question is, what happens next?” Lee drifted in front of Gewey and slid his hand to the hilt of his sword.

Kaylia’s face shifted from amusement to rage as she realized Lee was serious. “You speak the truth!” Her hand touched her sword, but she did not grab it. “I must ponder this. Go back to camp. If you see me in the morning, I expect you to tell me all that you know.”

“And what if we don’t see you?” Gewey asked. “I can’t help what I am, and I didn’t ask for it. I would never do anything to harm you, or your people.”

Kaylia said nothing.

“Come,” Lee said, lifting Gewey to his feet. “Leave her be.” Lee guided them back to the camp where Millet sat by the fire waiting.

“How did it go?” asked Millet.

“Not as bad as it could have,” Lee answered. “We’ll know by morning.”

“Things will work out,” said Millet. “Don’t worry.”

“Lee...” Gewey started, but Lee immediately cut him off.

“Go to sleep,” he advised. “We’ll talk tomorrow.”

Gewey lay down, but was unable to stay asleep for more than a few minutes at a time. He kept hearing Kaylia’s story in his head, and seeing the rage on her face when she found out what he really was.

How could the gods do this to her people, he wondered. I’ve got to find a way to make it right.

Gewey was awake to see the dawn. Lee and Millet were still asleep. He hoped to see Kaylia, but she had not returned. He hated himself for telling her. He hated himself for what his kind had done.

Most of all, he hated the gods for creating this mess in the first place.

“I’ll hear your tale, young one.” It was Kaylia. She was standing by the wagon, her eyes fixed on Gewey.

Gewey got up and began to walk toward her.

“Stay where you are. I said I would hear your tale, not suffer your company.” She paused. “At least, not yet.”

Gewey looked at the others still sleeping soundly. If Kaylia decided to attack, there would be nothing to stop her.

Kaylia sensed his fear and said, “I have no intention of harming you. I gave you my word, and I’ll keep it. But know this. If my people find out about your existence, they will hunt you down until the end of creation. Whether or not I will tell them depends on you.”

Gewey nodded slowly and began telling his story, leaving out no detail. He told her about how he’d grown up, about his father, how he’d found out about his true nature, and, of course, about the Dark Knight. When he finished, Kaylia looked at him thoughtfully and walked over.

“I find no guilt in you. I will help you complete your task. I swear to this.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey, his relief clearly showing. “But why? Won’t your people kill you if they find out?”

Kaylia smiled. “They’re going to kill me anyway,” she said. “And I can only die once. Besides, from what you have told me, it is unlikely I will live to face their judgment.”

Gewey bowed his head and sighed with relief. He heard Millet stir.

Millet rose and turned toward Gewey, stretching the stiffness from his joints. “Up with the dawn, I see.” He noticed Kaylia standing there and smiled. “I see that you’ve decided to join us. Wonderful - absolutely wonderful.”

Lee was the last to rouse. He pretended not to notice Kaylia’s return, but Gewey suspected he had been awake to hear their whole conversation. After eating, they packed up and continued on their way to Kaltinor.

Chapter 8

Gewey returned to his seat in the back of the wagon with Kaylia. He kept the conversation light, telling her about his youth and life in Sharpstone.

To his surprise, she seemed to take great interested his past, asking questions about the way he lived and the people he knew. Gewey had never thought of village life as anything other than dull and common, but Kaylia seemed to enjoy hearing about it.

“It must have been difficult to leave such a wonderful life behind,” said Kaylia.

“Actually, I’ve just learned to appreciate what I’ve lost,” Gewey admitted. “Still, I don’t see how my life would impress you.”

Kaylia leaned back and explained, “A simple existence is what elves long for, though it doesn’t surprise me that humans find such a life common and unfulfilling. But then, you aren’t human, are you? Perhaps there is hope that you can learn to appreciate simple things.”

“The simple things will have to wait,” interjected Lee from up front. “He needs to learn to tap into his power. From now on, midday meal will be preceded by lessons, as will supper. Your training has been delayed for far too long, and we’ve got a lot of catching up to do now that you’re more or less healed.”

“I would be happy to assist,” Kaylia offered. “I may not be a half-man, but I am not without skills.”

“Your help will be welcome,” said Lee. “And you,” he said, turning to Gewey, “will do as I and Kaylia instruct. Do you understand?” Gewey nodded happily, beaming with anticipation.

“You may not be so excited when you find out what’s in store,” chuckled Lee.

Kaylia giggled almost girlishly, but with a sinister grin on her face.

“Elf training is hard, young one. Believe me when I tell you that if you were human, you would never survive it.”

“That settles it then,” Lee said. “We start today.” Gewey could hardly contain himself. Finally, he would learn to fight. He had grown tired of feeling as if he were weak and helpless. If danger came, he needed to be able to fight, and he was determined to prove himself. Whatever the future held, he would be ready.

When they stopped for a midday meal, Lee told Gewey to follow him into the woods. He was already out of the wagon when he remembered his sword and started back for it.

“You have your sword ready when I’m ready, or not at all,” yelled Lee, marching on into the woods.

Gewey obeyed and followed Lee, unarmed.

They soon found a clearing and Lee came to a halt. “Attack me,” he said.

Gewey stared but did nothing.

In a flash, Lee stepped forward. Moving his leg behind Gewey’s, and bringing his arm hard across the boy’s chest, he sent him crashing to the ground. “I said attack me,” he yelled again. “Or I swear you’ll wish you were never born.”

Gewey jumped up angrily and ran straight at Lee. With uncanny speed, Lee stepped aside, grabbed Gewey’s shoulder, and jerked the boy’s head and torso backwards. Gewey’s feet flew into the air, and he landed in the grass with a soft thud.

Lee looked down at Gewey, shaking his head. “Pathetic,” he growled. “You will not touch a sword until you throw me to the ground at least once.” He took several strides, and then turned to face his young pupil. “Again.”

Although still dazed, Gewey got to his feet. Again and again he came at Lee - again and again he was sent sprawling. This went on for the better part of an hour until Lee motioned for Gewey to halt.

“I hope you show Kaylia more than you’ve shown me,” Lee muttered.

When they returned to the wagon, Millet and Kaylia had already eaten and were waiting nearby. Millet had two plates of dried meat and a large piece of flatbread set aside for them.

“We’ll eat as we travel,” said Lee, taking the food from Millet.

Millet nodded curtly, handed Gewey his food, and climbed into the wagon. Gewey could feel the soreness sinking in from the dozens of falls he had taken at the hands of Lee, but he didn’t complain. He got in the wagon and went over in his mind each time Lee had thrown him, trying to work out his mistakes.

Kaylia smiled slightly and said, “That’s good. Think about what you did wrong. See it in your mind - each motion, every shift on your feet. Remember the feeling in your muscles. Feel the sensation when you lost your balance. What brought you to that point? When did you lose control? Most importantly, how could you have prevented it?”

Gewey looked at Kaylia. His face was stone with concentration. “I can see it now,” he said. “Why can’t I see it while it’s happening?”

“You will in time,” Kaylia replied, then handed him a flask.

“Drink this.”

“What’s in it?” he asked, eying the flask suspiciously.

“Jawas tea,” she answered.

“Are you crazy?” Gewey asked sharply, handing it back.

Kaylia refused to accept it, shaking her head. “Jawas tea has a strong effect on humans, but as you are not exactly human, you should be able to withstand its negative effects. If you can, you will find that it has amazing qualities.”

“But it put me out cold the last time,” Gewey protested.

“And you must prevent that,” she replied. “This time I want you to feel it inside you and stop it from taking control. You are not to fail, understand?”

“I’ll try,” said Gewey said, warily opening the flask.

“No,” Kaylia said sternly. “I said you are not to fail.”

Gewey nodded and put the flask to his lips. As the cold liquid poured down his throat he could feel the effects setting in immediately. But this time he was ready for it. He fought to keep his eyes open and retain feeling in his limbs, but after only a few seconds he knew he was losing the battle.

“Don’t think about the way you feel,” whispered Kaylia - or at least, it sounded like a whisper to him as his head swam. “Think about your body as a whole. Command it. You are in control. You will not allow the tea to win.”

For a moment, Gewey felt his strength returning, but it was short-lived. Eventually the jawas tea took over and he slumped down in his seat, unconsciousness.

Kaylia reached over and slid his body into the corner.

When he woke, it was already dark and the wagon had stopped. Gewey crawled out and knelt down groggily. Millet, Kaylia, and Lee were already eating.

“I guess we’ll get a late start,” said Kaylia, setting down her bowl.

She had removed her pilgrim’s robes and donned her shirt and trousers. She pulled out a small knife and threw it with a flick of her wrist. The knife stuck in the ground less than an inch from Gewey’s foot. “You’ll need that,” she said.

Kaylia led Gewey into the forest. The moon was out, providing the only source of light. Gewey’s heartbeat quickened the further they walked. He began to wonder when the training would start, and then suddenly he noticed - he was alone.

“Kaylia,” he called nervously, but there was no answer.

Gewey strained his eyes, hoping to catch sight of some movement or shadow. But the night played tricks. He began to see things in the shadows that weren’t there; shapes he thought might be Kaylia turned out to be nothing more than a bush or a stump.

“The night can be a weapon, young one,” Kaylia’s voice whispered from the darkness, seemingly from everywhere. “It plants fear in the heart of your enemies. It is a cloak and a dagger. It can serve you well until you are ready to strike.”

In the blink of an eye, Kaylia was behind him, her knife at his throat. “You’re dead,” she said, then lowered the knife. “You must learn to see through the curtain of darkness and use your foe’s ignorance against him.”

“I don’t understand,” said Gewey.

“Of course you don’t. We elves spend our lives moving in the shadows. Not even your half-man friend can match me in the dark. An elf can put an arrow through the eye of a buck from two hundred paces in total darkness. Take out your knife. It’s time you learned to defend yourself.”

“I’ve never fought with a knife,” said Gewey.

“I guessed,” Kaylia replied sarcastically. Then, in the blink of an eye she was on him, her blade slashing through the air like lightning.

Gewey felt the cold blade across the back of his hand. He dropped his weapon, clutching his hand and cursing loudly.

“You are uninjured,” Kaylia said. Gewey looked at his hand. There was no blood.

“My blade is dull,” she explained. “For now. Were you an elf, you would not be so fortunate.”

“I don’t want special treatment,” he complained. “I can take it.”

“Just like you were able to take the jawas tea,” she scoffed. “No, I think you need to learn more before your real training begins.”

Gewey sulked as he bent down to pick up his knife, but he didn’t say a word.

For the rest of the lesson, Kaylia instructed Gewey in the basics of knife fighting. Gewey felt as if it was a bit too basic, but he did as he was told.

“You move like a drunken ox,” she observed when they were finished.

“It’s my first time,” said Gewey. “Besides, all I did was thrust and slash at nothing for close to an hour.”

“And when you do so with purpose, we’ll move on,” she answered. “I hope you show more enthusiasm when the half-man trains you.” Gewey felt angry and embarrassed.

“Can you find your way back to camp?” asked Kaylia.

“Yes,” Gewey lied.

“Good,” she said, vanishing into the woods.

It took Gewey more than an hour to find his way back to camp.

Lee and Kaylia were talking quietly near the wagon, and Millet was sitting by the fire, poking it with a stick. Gewey walked over and sat across from Millet, his face twisted in anger.

“What’s wrong, young master?” asked Millet. “You look upset.”

“I don’t think I’m cut out for this,” said Gewey. “I thought I’d do so much better, but so far, I’ve failed at everything.”

Millet chucked.

“What’s so funny?” barked Gewey.

“Nothing lad,” said Millet. “I just remember Lord Starfinder speaking similar words a long time ago.”

“You’re just saying that to make me feel better,” said Gewey. He tossed a twig into the fire.

“I’m doing no such thing. I’m telling you the truth. When Lord Starfinder came home after his first day of training, he was quite literally in tears. In fact, he didn’t go back for a week; I had to convince him.”

The thought of Lee pouting and crying made Gewey smile.

“Don’t take too much pleasure from that,” scolded Millet. “He wasn’t hardened by years of farm work, and he is only half of what you are, if you catch my meaning. Yet look at him now: hard, strong and skilled beyond anything you could imagine.”

Gewey glanced over at Lee and thought about the fight with the bandits. He had never seen anyone move so fast. He must really be holding back with me, he thought.

“You’ve been with Lee for a long time, yet I notice you still call him ‘My Lord’,” Gewey observed.

“Of course I do,” said Millet, surprised. “He is my friend, yes; but he’s also my lord and master. My family has served the house Nal’Thain for generations, and I would not dishonor them by treating the master of the house with over-familiarity. We are friends, and my love for him goes far beyond that of servant and lord, but I can never let that distract me from my duty.”

Gewey looked puzzled. “But he’s not really a Nal’Thain. He told me he started as Dauvis Nal’Thain’s servant.”

“He told you correctly,” said Millet. “I remember when he arrived. I was very jealous that he had been picked to serve the master of the house and I had not. But after a time we became friends, and when he rose to be the master, I became his personal assistant.”

“What did you call him before he was made a lord?” asked Gewey.

“By his name, of course,” Millet answered. “But enough about that.” Millet got to his feet and went over to his blanket. “You need to eat and rest.”

“Thank you, Millet,” Gewey said gratefully. “Thank you for the talk. I feel better.”

“I’m happy to hear it,” said Millet as he lay down.

Gewey went to sleep that night feeling determined. He would not fail, and he would not give up.

For the next few days, Gewey trained harder and harder. On three occasions he nearly threw Lee to the ground, once he managed to find Kaylia in the shadows, and he even learned to stay awake after drinking jawas tea - though just barely. Neither Lee nor Kaylia openly showed that they were pleased, but Gewey could tell they were, and it filled him with pride.

As they neared Kaltinor, Gewey noticed the landscape changing. The forest became thinner, and the road was crisscrossed with little streams spanned with wooden bridges, some in desperate need of repair. They passed farms more frequently, but many looked abandoned, their fields untended and grown over with weeds. The air was becoming colder each day, and the sun rarely peeked out from the overcast sky.

“What’s happened here?” Gewey asked Lee, the day before they were to arrive in Kaltinor.

“The Dark Knight,” answered Lee. “As his power grows, you’ll see more of this. Even more reason for us to hurry. He’ll bring a hard winter, and bring it early.”

“I wish I knew where we’re going,” said Gewey.

“If I could tell you, I would,” Lee assured him. “But there is still a danger that the Dark Knight could enter your mind, and we’ve had to stop your mental training in favor of more practical things. If we did both, you’d collapse from exhaustion, and we need you strong.”

“This may not be a problem,” interjected Kaylia. “One of the benefits of jawas tea is that it strengthens an elf’s mental abilities.

Even the strongest mind could not enter uninvited. Though Gewey is not an elf, there is a chance it may give him the same advantage.”

Lee raised an eyebrow. “Really? I had no idea jawas had that power.”

Kaylia smirked. “There’s much I know that you don’t, half-man,” she said.

“Perhaps,” said Lee. “Still, I will test if it’s effective.”

That night after had Gewey finished his training with Kaylia, Lee beckoned him over. They repeated the exercise Lee had taught him, except this time Lee told Gewey not to try and keep the gate of his mind closed. Much to his amazement, Lee found himself completely unable to enter Gewey’s mind; the jawas tea seemed to work exactly as Kaylia had claimed it would.

“How long is it effective for?” Lee asked Kaylia, who was standing nearby.

“One dose will last for at least two days,” Kaylia answered. “But more importantly, it builds in your system. Among my people there are those who can journey inside the mind of another. We use jawas to strengthen that ability.”

“But from what I’ve just seen, it would block minds - not make it easier to enter them,” said Lee.

Kaylia’s mouth twisted in disgust. “If your intention is to invade a mind, you’re right, jawas prevents this from happening. But we do not enter uninvited as you might. With jawas, we can touch the thoughts of another with greater ease, and at greater distance.”

“That could prove quite useful,” said Lee, stroking his chin. “How much do you have?”

“Enough to last many weeks,” she answered. “At least six, I should think.”

“Is it hard to find?”

“Not in this area,” Kaylia replied. “I shall gather more for the journey while I wait for you to leave the city.”

“You’ll be coming with us into Kaltinor,” Lee said flatly. “It’s very important we gather information before we continue further west. The Dark Knight’s power grows, and we need to know what lies ahead. This may take a few days, and I might need you with me.”

Kaylia looked concerned. “And what if I’m discovered? That could prove to be a problem.”

“You won’t be discovered,” said Lee. “I have friends in Kaltinor that can hide you if need be, but I don’t think it will come to that. We’ll be staying in the Temple of Ayliazarah, so you can stay silent and hooded the entire time - like a good little pilgrim.”

It was obvious that Lee was trying to get under Kaylia’s skin. The two were constantly throwing thinly veiled insults at one another. This time, Lee had the advantage. Kaylia couldn’t conceal the fact that the idea of staying in a temple built to one of the gods made her uncomfortable.

“I will bow and stay silent,” she seethed, “but if you think I will pretend to worship…”

Lee doubled over with laughter, further fueling Kaylia’s anger.

“Calm yourself, elf,” he said, grinning widely. “Pilgrims do not usually pray until they reach their destination.”

This did little to calm Kaylia down. With her teeth clenched and back straight, she turned and strode off into the night. When she returned, she moved her blanket far away from the others.

The next day, Gewey noticed more travelers along the road.

Kaylia took special care to remain unseen, despite the fact that her hood completely covered her features. As they rode on past midday, the sheer volume of traffic told Gewey that the city was near.

The farms they passed were no longer abandoned, though the fields were empty from the harvest. Along the way they were stopped by a man driving a wagon loaded with bricks and masonry tools. Thinking them pilgrims from the east, he asked for news. Lee told him that times were dark and getting darker; the man replied that it was the same here, and continued on his unhappy way. This darkened Lee’s mood, and he hardly spoke for hours.

“I guess our ruse will be put to the test,” Millet said as the sun began to go down.

Gewey leaned forward and spotted an encampment ahead. “Who are they?”

“That, my boy, is a group of real monks,” Lee answered. “I can see ten of them from here.”

“Do we have to stop?” Gewey asked, nervously.

“If we don’t, they’ll wonder why,” Lee responded. “Besides, if we can’t fool them, there’s no way we’ll fool the temple.”

Lee pulled off the road to the edge of the encampment. A tall, hooded monk walked up to the wagon next to Millet.

“Welcome brothers…and sister,” he added, noticing Kaylia’s hooded figure in the back. Even through the robes it was impossible to hide her feminine shape. “I’m Brother Salvo. Please take your ease with us. We have plenty to share.”

“Thank you, Brother,” said Millet, taking the lead. “We will be pleased and grateful to share your fire. I’m Brother Milton, this is Brother Leston,” he said, pointing at Lee. “And in the wagon are Brother Gewton and Sister Kaymaya.”

Millet stepped from the wagon and stood in front of the man.

After exchanging a few words, Millet told the rest to climb down and see to the horses and gear. Lee jumped down while Kaylia and Gewey climbed from the back. Gewey was confused by the sudden role reversal, but Lee acted as if following Millet’s orders was second nature.

The encampment was a beehive of activity as the monks and pilgrims prepared supper. No one spoke to them at first, which pleased Gewey. Kaylia was doing everything she could not to get too close to anyone, but eventually Lee leaned over and whispered in her ear. Gewey saw her nod, then walk over and offer assistance to several monks who were preparing bedding for the group.

“This is not a time to avoid contact,” Lee whispered to Gewey as he passed. “That would be noticed.”

Gewey wondered how Kaylia would avoid giving herself away, but no one gave her a second look. Luckily, she was not the only female pilgrim in camp, and Gewey observed that the other women hardly ever removed their hoods or spoke. It seemed as though their ruse was intact, at least for now. By nightfall, several other groups had arrived at Brother Salvo’s encampment; by the time dinner was served, their number reached about thirty. Millet and the others gathered near the wagon to eat and talk privately.

“A dangerous game,” Kaylia grumbled under her breath.

“But necessary,” Lee insisted.

“I agree,” said Millet. “This is a good chance to test our deception.”

Kaylia clearly didn’t think so. “You had me working openly with these - these monks. If one of these oafs had bumped into me and discovered my identity, what then?”

“I’m counting on your elf dexterity to prevent that,” Lee replied. “If you had not behaved as a pilgrim should, it could have put us in danger. And please, don’t call them oafs. Men and women like these here do nothing but good works. Their lives are dedicated to it.”

Just then, Gewey saw the figure of Brother Salvo approaching.

“Brother Milton,” called the tall monk.

Millet stood and bowed low. “I thank you for sharing your meal,” he said. “As do my companions.” Gewey, Lee, and Kaylia bowed their heads in turn.

“We’re happy to have you among us,” said Brother Salvo. “Pilgrims on the road have become more and more rare these days. It’s good to see those willing to make the journey of faith.

May I sit with you?”

“Of course,” said Millet, offering his blanket. Millet sat next to Kaylia so that he could face Brother Salvo directly.

“Where do you come from?” Salvo asked.

“We are from the Temple of Ayliazarah in the eastern kingdom of Palinsali,” answered Millet. “We’re on our way to the Temple of the Far Sky.”

“Ahhh,” said Salvo. “Servants of sacred love. We haven’t seen many in these parts for some time. You have a long journey ahead. The Temple of the Far Sky is many weeks from here.”

“All the more reason to thank you for your hospitality,” Millet said graciously.

Brother Salvo pushed back his hood. He was older than he sounded, yet he was still quite handsome. The years showed in his eyes, but his blond hair and squared features suggested the type of maturity that Gewey had heard the women of Sharpstone speak of with admiration and desire. His skin had a golden hue that could only have been the result of years of hard work in the sun.

“You won’t find much generosity beyond this point,” Brother

Salvo lamented. “The world is being consumed by darkness. All the news we get here is filled with sadness.”

“Are you part of a temple?” asked Millet.

“No,” said Salvo. “I follow Saraf, but for the past few years I have maintained this encampment. We serve as a refuge for pilgrims and travelers, though lately there have only been a few. This is the largest group we’ve had in months.”

“I see,” Millet said thoughtfully. “But why do the pilgrims not take refuge in the city temples? It’s less than a day’s ride from here.”

Brother Salvo smiled feebly. “I see that things aren’t as bad in the east. Here, the temples are turning everyone away - and it’s the same in the western kingdoms. The High Priestess of the Temple of Ayliazarah in Kaltinor has actually turned out her own novices and acolytes.”

Millet looked mortified. “How could she? She has no right.”

“I agree,” said Salvo, “but there’s little that can be done.”

“What has caused this?” Kaylia asked suddenly.

Gewey felt Lee stiffen next to him.

“I don’t know, Sister,” Salvo replied. “But I’ve heard stories - terrible stories.”

“What kind of stories?” asked Millet before Kaylia could speak again.

“It is said that Angrääl is alive again, and that the dead are rising from their graves,” whispered Salvo. “Stories are spreading everywhere of an evil power bringing darkness across the land.”

“Angrääl?” said Gewey.

“Please, don’t speak that name too loudly,” Salvo warned, looking around to see if they had been heard. “You may be too young to know the story, but a thousand years ago Angrääl was a kingdom far to the north, well beyond the White Wilderness. Legend says that the Demon King Rätsterfel rose up to challenge the gods. The war raged for a hundred years. Eventually, he was destroyed in a battle with heaven itself - but not before he had laid waste to half the world. Some say he has returned to take his revenge.”

“Do you believe that?” asked Gewey.

Brother Salvo lowered his eyes. “I’m not sure what I believe any more,” he said. “But I do know that I’ve never seen such hardship in the world. There is something sinister behind it. I can feel it. Whether or not it’s the return of the Demon King is impossible to say, but there is a pestilence spreading, and it’s growing stronger. If it wasn’t for the help I get from passing pilgrims and the few nobles still dedicated to the gods, I wouldn’t be able to do what little I manage.” He sighed heavily and shook his head.

Millet reached over and put his hand on brother Salvo’s shoulder. “Have faith, Brother. Things will get better. What you do here is important; there’s nothing little about kindness.”

Brother Salvo looked up and smiled. “Thank you, Brother. It’s hard not to despair sometimes. Your words comfort me.” He rose to his feet. “Now, I must attend to my other duties. Please stay as long as you wish.”

“Thank you, Brother Salvo,” said Millet. “But we’ll be leaving at sunrise.”

“Then I hope you’ll stop here on your return journey,” he said, and walked back into the heart of the encampment.

“Surprising,” said Kaylia.

“Surprising, how?” Gewey asked.

“Such kindness in a human is to be admired,” she said. “My people would be very interested to see it.”

“It appears you have as much to learn about us, as we do about you,” said Millet.

“So it seems,” she replied.

“I’m worried,” said Lee. “I had intended for us to stay a few days at the temple in Kaltinor, but if what Brother Salvo says is true, we may have to make other plans.”

“That would be fine by me,” said Kaylia. “I never thought it to be a wise plan.”

“It’s a good thing you’re not in charge then,” Lee said, glancing at Kaylia. “We need information, and the temple is the best place to get it. Without it, we travel blind.”

“So what do you suggest - as the leader?” Kaylia asked sarcastically.

Lee smiled devilishly. “I could say we’ve killed an elf, and that we need somewhere to dispose of her body. They’d let us stay in the High Priestess’ apartment if we did that!”

Kaylia glared at Lee from underneath her hood. “You could try,” she hissed.

“Enough of this,” said Gewey. “Let’s just get there. Maybe they’ll simply let us stay.”

“The first intelligent thing I’ve heard all night,” Millet declared. “I, for one, am going to sleep. If you two wish to insult one another, be my guest. But please do it quietly.”

There was silence among the group. Though tension remained between Lee and Kaylia, they eventually decided Millet was right and lay down to sleep.

Chapter 9

In the morning they said their goodbyes to brother Salvo. Millet gave him two gold coins that Lee had provided, and promised to stop there again when they returned home. As they pulled away, Gewey wondered if they would be able to keep that promise. The more he learned, the more it seemed unlikely he would ever see his home again. Kaylia was deep in thought, her robes pulled tight around her.

“Are you alright?” asked Gewey.

“I’m fine,” answered Kaylia. “I was just thinking about the people at the encampment. They weren’t what I expected.”

“What did you expect?” Gewey asked.

“I don’t know,” Kaylia admitted. “I suppose I expected them to be more brutish. I didn’t expect to see the kindness they show to one another.”

“Millet’s right,” said Gewey. “You have a lot to learn about humans.”

Kaylia was silent.

“The story Brother Salvo told about the Demon King,” said Gewey. “Have you heard it before?”

“Yes,” said Kaylia “Though it’s told differently among my people. In our tales, he’s a hero.”

“How could someone called the Demon King be a hero?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia laughed and said, “We don’t call him the Demon King, we simply call him King Rätsterfel. In our stories, he stood up to the tyranny of the gods and tried to free the world.”

“I wonder which story is true?” Gewey said pensively.

“Perhaps neither,” Kaylia replied. “It was long ago, and storytelling among my people is not what it was. Much of our history was lost with the fall of our Nations."

“That must be hard,” said Gewey. “My people depend on their stories as a way to connect them to our ancestors. If we didn’t have them, we’d be lost.”

“You keep referring to the humans as ‘your’ people,” she said.

“Yet they are not. Being raised as a human does not make you human. If they found out what you are, do you think they would bow down and worship you, or would they run in fear and disgust? Though I admit the monks surprised me with their kindness and selflessness, I wonder how kind they would have been if they discovered what I am? What if they knew they had shared a meal with an elf? Do you think they would just ignore it and smile?”

“And what about your people?” interjected Lee, who had been listening from the front of the wagon. “They want to murder you just for traveling with humans. Are they any better?”

“You’re right, half-man,” Kaylia acknowledged. “The old hatreds run deep on both sides. I cannot claim differently. Perhaps on this journey we can find a way to change that.”

“Wouldn’t that be something,” Millet added. “Now that would be an adventure I would be proud to be part of.”

“I think you speak for us all, old friend,” said Lee.

For the rest of the morning, conversation between Kaylia and Lee was more civil than usual. They even exchanged a few stories while Gewey listened with a pleased grin.

It was just before noon when they reached the gates of Kaltinor. They had expected the gates to be open during the day, but instead they were shut tight and protected by four members of the city guard. Millet pulled up and halted the wagon.

“What’s your business?” the guard captain inquired. As the captain spoke with Millet, the other three guards moved to the back of the wagon and looked inside. Gewey and Kaylia bowed their heads and stayed quiet.

“We’re just pilgrims passing through,” said Millet.

“Pilgrims, you say?” said the captain. “I’m sure you saw the monks camped back the way you came, and I’m sure they told you the temples will not receive you. We have no room here for a bunch of poor pilgrims. Best you move on.”

“They did tell us,” Millet affirmed. “All the same, we are just passing through.” He reached down and handed something to the guard captain.

The captain looked at it for a moment, then quickly put it in his pocket. “Your stay here can be no longer than three days. Any longer and you’ll be arrested. Understand?”

Millet nodded. “Completely.”

The captain ordered his men to open the gates. Millet glanced over at Lee and sighed with relief. There was a loud screech of metal on metal as the gates slowly swung open. Millet urged the horses forward and passed through.

“We’ve managed to bribe our way through the gates with little problem,” said Lee. “Let’s see if our luck holds at the temple.” He glanced back at Gewey. “If you want, you can walk beside the wagon. I know you’ve never seen a city before, and you won’t see much of it from back there.” Gewey smiled with excitement and leapt from the wagon.

The streets of Kaltinor were thirty feet wide and paved with smooth stones. Most of the buildings along the main avenue were two stories tall; the bottom levels held shops of all kinds, while the upper floors held residences where Gewey could see people eating and talking on small balconies. In just a few minutes, he had counted at least five taverns and three inns - a far cry from what he’d grown up with in Sharpstone. People of all kinds surrounded him; commoners, lords, monks, and merchants all moved about at a pace that astounded him. In the distance, towering above it all, stood a large manor of deep gray stone. At four stories high, it was by far the largest building Gewey had ever seen.

“What do you think, young master?” Millet asked. Gewey could barely hear him over the noise of the city.

“It’s amazing,” he said breathlessly. “I can’t imagine what it would be like to live here.”

“Like living in a hornets’ nest,” muttered Kaylia, who had jumped down beside Gewey. “It’s unnatural.”

“I agree,” said Millet. “Over the years, I’ve come to appreciate living in the country.”

Lee laughed. “So I guess all that about hating the smell of horses and pigs, not to mention the constant complaining about not having proper shops and clothing, was nothing but hogwash.”

“Not hogwash, My Lord,” answered Millet. “I guess I’ve just changed more than I realized.”

“We’ve both changed,” said Lee, thoughtfully.

They wound their way west through the city’s temple district and approached the Temple of Ayliazarah. The temple was made from red granite and bore elaborate carvings of the goddess along the outer wall. At the front, a stone staircase led up to an arched entranceway with two large oak doors. Statues of Ayliazarah, each one holding a harp in one hand and the Moon in the other, stood on the either side of the door.

Millet stopped the wagon and they climbed down.

“Remember,” Millet advised. “Speak only when spoken to, and say nothing of what Brother Salvo told us.”

When they got to the door, Millet pounded it several times with his fist. It opened a few moments later, and there stood an old woman dressed in fine white linen robes embroidered with intricate interlacing gold patterns. Her head was covered in a thin gold silk scarf, and she carried a long white ash walking stick.

“What’s your business here?” the old woman asked.

“We’re pilgrims on our way to the Temple of the Far Sky,” replied Millet. “We thought we might stay the night and see the temple while we’re here.”

“You thought wrong,” said the woman. “We have no room for vagabonds. Be gone.” She started to close the door, but Millet’s hand shot out and stopped her.

“We are not vagabonds,” Millet said sternly. “As I said, we are pilgrims, and we demand entrance to the temple.”

“You demand?” the woman scoffed. “You will leave now, or I will call the city guards.”

“Who is it?” asked a woman’s voice from within the temple.

“What do they want?”

“It’s no one, Your Holiness,” the old woman replied, turning her head inside the door. “Riff-raff, nothing more.”

“Let them in,” said the voice. “Let me see this ‘riff-raff,’ if you please.”

The old woman glowered at Millet as she slowly opened the door.

Once inside, they saw a floor made from polished black marble that spanned an enormous room lined with gold columns. The walls were covered with tapestries and frescoes depicting the nine gods, and several immense glass chandeliers hung from the twenty-foot ceiling. In the center of the room stood a ten-foot statue of Ayliazarah, a perfect replica of those outside the door, except for the fact that this one was made of solid gold. At the far end were two spiral staircases leading to the upper level.

Just inside the door stood a woman dressed in white satin robes. She was holding a large, leather-bound book. She was younger than the woman who answered the door by at least twenty years, although her face looked careworn. Her light brown hair fell down over her shoulders in tight curls ornamented with tiny white flowers. She smiled brightly at Millet and the others as they entered.

“I don’t know, Maybell,” said the woman. “They look a bit scruffy, but I wouldn’t say they’re riff-raff.” Her voice was cheerful and kindly.

“Thank you for allowing us entrance, Your Holiness,” Millet said, bowing low.

The others bowed as well, but said nothing. Millet introduced them using the same names he had given to Brother Salvo.

“I’m Sister Salmitaya, High Priestess here in Kaltinor,” she said. “To what do I owe the pleasure of your visit?”

“We are but simple pilgrims on our way to the Temple of the Far Sky,” Millet replied. “We seek lodging and a short respite from our travels.”

“I tried to make them leave, Your Holiness,” said Maybell. “But they wouldn’t listen.”

“Nonsense,” laughed Salmitaya. “Times may be hard, but if these people managed to gain entry to the city, then who am I to turn them away? How did you get past the gate, by the way?”

“I’m ashamed to say, Your Holiness,” said Millet. “We bribed our way in.”

Salmitaya raised her eyebrows. “Is that so? It’s interesting that mere pilgrims would have money enough for bribes.”

“We have saved for many years to come on this pilgrimage,” answered Millet. “This temple is among those we planned to visit along the way.”

“I wish I had known,” she said. “I could have saved you the cost of a bribe.”

“Some pilgrims send word and money ahead,” said Millet, understanding her meaning. “But I think that takes away from the lesson one is supposed to learn along the way. We have not, however, come empty handed. We intend to make all proper contributions before we depart.”

Salmitaya laughed. “Please, Brother Milton. You don’t need to bother. It’s my pleasure to offer the hospitality of this temple. You may stay as long as you wish.”

“Thank you, Your Holiness,” said Millet, bowing low.

“Thank you, Brother,” she replied, bowing in return. “Sometimes it’s easy to forget that this is a place of worship and contemplation. In these dark times we have been all but driven to beg in the streets.”

“It pains me to hear that,” said Millet. “Is there anything we can do to help?”

“Sadly, there isn’t,” Salmitaya replied. “Our troubles go deeper than you can guess.” Her eyes became sorrowful. “But this is not a conversation we should have here and now.” She shook off her sadness and her smile returned. “Maybell will see to your needs. I hope you will join me for supper later.”

“We would be honored,” said Millet. “All but Sister Kaymaya, that is. She has taken the vow of the Sacred Word.”

“Then I will see to it that she is accommodated,” said Salmitaya. “Now, if you will excuse me, I have things to attend to.” She bowed her head.

Millet and the others bowed low and watched as the High Priestess hummed softly while she walked across the floor to the stairs.

“Do you wish for me to have someone see to your things?” asked Maybell, still glaring suspiciously.

“To the horses and wagon, yes,” answered Millet. “But we’ll see to our own things.”

“As you wish,” she said. “I’ll wait here.” The four of them returned to the wagon and gathered their personal gear, leaving the provisions in the wagon. When they walked back inside, Maybell was tapping her foot impatiently, her arms crossed.

“If you please,” she said sourly. “Follow me.” She led them to the far left corner of the enormous room where a large tapestry hung. As they approached, they saw that it covered an archway leading to the rear chambers. Maybell pulled back the tapestry and motioned for the group to enter. She then led them through a series of narrow hallways with evenly spaced doors and floors made from polished wood. The walls were made of rough brick and bore no decoration.

“As you can see,” said Maybell, “despite the beauty of the rest of the temple, we live a simple life.”

“I haven’t noticed any other novices or priestesses,” Millet observed. “Are they all praying?”

“There are only a few of us,” answered Maybell. “The rest have left.”

“Why?” Millet asked. “In times like these, you would think this place would be filled with the faithful.”

“It is,” she said, shooting an angry glance back at Millet. “The faithful are what we have here.”

Millet decided not to pursue the matter further.

“Here we are,” said Maybell, opening one of the doors. “You three will stay here, and you,” she said to Kaylia, “can follow me. We keep a private chamber ready for those who have taken the vow of the Sacred Word.”

Maybell led Kaylia down the hall to a door with a six-inch circle carved in the center. Inside the circle were carved three smaller, interwoven rings.

“This is where you will stay,” Maybell said as she opened the door. “Your vows will be respected while you remain within these walls, and I will have your meals and wash water brought to you.” Kaylia nodded and entered the room.

“I’ll tell your friends how to find you,” Maybell said as she left the room, closing the door behind her.

The room was drab. The plain brick walls were unadorned, and a worn rug covered part of the floor. A bed and a small table were the only furnishings. Kaylia sat cross-legged on the rug and waited.

The room the others shared was just as bare. Bunk beds lined opposite walls, and a table and bench sat at the rear. They had just begun to unpack when there was a knock at the door. Millet opened it to find Maybell, still bearing a sour expression.

“A basin and hot water will be brought for you,” she said curtly. “Afterwards, you are to make yourself ready for supper with Her Holiness. If you do not have clean robes, they will be provided.”

“Thank you,” said Millet. “Clean robes would be appreciated.”

“If you wish to see your companion, she is down the hall in the room bearing the symbol of the Sacred Word,” said Maybell. “Now, if you’ll excuse me, I have more important things to attend to.” She turned away and marched down the hall.

“I don’t think she likes us very much,” said Millet, closing the door.

“You can say that again,” Gewey agreed. “I didn’t think we were going to make it past the front door. Lucky for us the High Priestess was there.”

Lee looked worried “Yes. Very lucky.”

“I know that look, My Lord,” said Millet. “What are you thinking?”

“I’m not sure,” Lee replied. “Something’s not right here.”

“I agree,” said Millet. “The temple shouldn’t be this empty, regardless of how bad the times have become.”

Lee nodded. “It’s not just that. It’s a feeling I got when you were talking to the High Priestess. Something doesn’t fit. From what Brother Salvo told us, I expected a less hospitable welcome.”

“Quite right, My Lord,” said Millet. “If there is something amiss, I’ll wager we’ll find out about it soon enough. In the mean time, I’d better check on Kaylia and explain the vow of the Sacred Word.”

Lee smiled with amusement. “She’s going to love it. Don’t you think?”

“That’s not nice, My Lord,” scolded Millet. “Besides, it’s the only way I could think of to keep her isolated.”

“You did well, my friend,” said Lee. “Now go explain everything to Kaylia.”

“What is the vow of the Sacred Word?” asked Gewey once Millet had left.

“The vow of the Sacred Word, my young friend, is what only the most faithful swear before their pilgrimage,” Lee explained. “They don’t speak unless spoken to, their eyes must be lowered in submission, and they must keep their heads covered at all times. They eat alone, sleep alone, and must meditate for three hours a day. They maintain chastity and humility throughout their pilgrimage, and for one year after. Should they fail, they are required to present themselves to the High Priestess of their temple for penance. This usually means locking themselves in a small room for the remainder of their lives. Most go insane.”

“That sounds tough,” said Gewey. “Why do they do it?”

“To prove their faith,” he replied. “Why else?”

A few minutes later, Millet returned.

“How did she react?” asked Lee.

“Well enough, My Lord, but I should have told her before we arrived. She did agree that it was the best way to stay unnoticed, but she wasn’t happy about the three hours of meditation each day. Especially when I told her that it must be done in full view of the world rather than in the privacy of her room.”

Lee grinned mischievously. “She’ll be fine,” he said. “Showing a bit of humility is good for the soul.”

“Indeed, My Lord,” said Millet. “Perhaps we could all do with some.”

“I’ve been meaning to ask,” said Gewey. “Why is it Millet pretends to be our leader in public?”

Lee threw his head back, laughing loudly. “Because I am quite possibly the worst actor in the world,” he said. “Millet is much better at playing a role than I am, so we decided long ago that in cases like this, it’s best to let him take the lead.”

“You had no trouble pretending to be a lord from the north who wanted to live out his days in the country,” Gewey noted.

“First of all,” Lee replied, “I am a lord from the north, even though I wasn’t born one. Secondly, I was raised in a small village and understood quite well how to behave. Third, I intended to be as inconspicuous as possible when I moved there, and you’ve seen how well that worked out. I was a topic of conversation more often than the weather.”

“You did have a habit of causing tongues to wag,” said Gewey, smiling.

“My point exactly,” said Lee. “When it comes to blending in, Millet is the better man.”

Just then, a young lady in brown novice robes brought them water and clean robes.

“I’m Celandine,” she said. “Her Holiness asked me to tell you that supper will be ready in one hour. I will return then to escort you to her.”

“Can I ask you a question?” said Millet.

“Certainly,” she replied.

“How many people are at the temple? Counting you, I’ve only seen three.”

“Then you’ve seen us all,” Celandine stated.

Millet looked shocked. “Where did the others go?”

“That is a question best asked of Her Holiness,” she answered.

“Now, if you’ll excuse me.”

“Only three people in the whole temple,” Gewey said, once Celandine had left. “How is that possible?”

“Definitely a question I’ll be asking ‘Her Holiness’,” said Millet.

The three washed and dressed, and an hour later Celandine came to escort them to dinner. They were led back out into the main part of the temple and up the spiral stairs. The upper level halls were well decorated with art and sculptures, and the floor was covered with fine, hand-woven carpets. They walked to the end of a wide hall, where they stopped at a large polished oak door with gold inlay.

“You will be dining in Her Holiness’ private apartment,” said Celandine as she knocked gently on the door. After a moment, Maybell opened the door from within and gestured for them to enter.

The first room of the apartment was lavish beyond anything Gewey had ever seen. The walls were covered in beautiful tapestries, and gold lanterns hung from the ceiling. Glass cases displaying gold figurines lined the doorway leading to the next room, and a small marble statue of Ayliazarah stood in each corner. In the center of the room was a large rectangular table covered by a white silk tablecloth.

A large cushioned chair was at the head of the table, and two smaller chairs were placed on either side.

“Please sit,” Maybell instructed. “Her Holiness will be here shortly.”

They took their seats as Celandine left the room. A moment later, a young boy entered carrying a platter filled with cups of wine. He placed a cup in front of each of them, and one in front of both empty chairs.

Millet noticed Maybell had moved off into the corner and was surveying the group. “Will you be joining us?” he asked.

“She will,” said High Priestess Salmitaya as she entered from the next room.

The High Priestess took her cup and raised it high. “Let us drink to Ayliazarah, Goddess of Love and Fertility. May she cast down her blessing and lift the shadow that has descended on our poor city.”

Everyone lifted their cups and drank deeply. The wine was sweet and of excellent vintage.

“Tell me, Your Holiness,” said Millet. “Is it true there are only three of you?”

Salmitaya sighed heavily. “I fear it is so. This temple once housed over one hundred of the faithful, but those days are long gone.”

“How could such a thing happen?” asked Millet.

“We were a victim of our own arrogance and shortsightedness,” she explained. “My predecessors involved themselves in political maneuvering and were constantly at odds with the governors and local lords. They became more interested in their own ambitions than in the welfare of the temple. In time, they created some very powerful enemies.

“By the time I became High Priestess there was open hostility between the temple and the government. I tried to repair relations, but sadly, my skills as a politician leave much to be desired.”

“Couldn’t the other temples help?” Millet asked. “Surely they wouldn’t want to see a temple fail.”

Salmitaya smiled sadly. “The other temples were as bad - if not worse - than this one. The whole city became a battleground of government versus religion. As you can see, religion lost.”

“How could they hope to shut down a temple?” said Millet. “Didn’t the people of the city protest?”

“Why would they?” said Salmitaya. “Governor Mattlin passed laws denying the temples the ability to do good works within the city. Instead, they fed and clothed the people while we were forced to watch and could do nothing. And when we protested, we were threatened. Without good works to show, faith in the Temple quickly diminished.”

“Why not go to the King?” asked Millet. “Surely he could help.”

“King Grayling III is nothing more than a puppet,” she replied. “He does the bidding of our enemies.”

“That still doesn’t explain why there are only three of you,” Lee interjected.

“Good,” she said, laughing gently. “I was afraid the rest of you lacked the ability to speak.”

“Forgive me, your Holiness,” Lee said in his best rural accent.

“Me and my young friend are not accustomed to such distinguished company. I hope I didn’t offend you.”

“Not at all,” she said. “In fact, I insist that you feel free to speak your mind. To address what you said, we are all that is left after a long campaign by the governor to shut us down. Most of our novices, monks, and priestesses were from here in Kaltinor. The magistrate began to persecute anyone related to a member of any temple within the city walls. Those that didn’t leave out of fear for their loved ones were threatened with imprisonment. The few we had that came here from abroad eventually left to join other temples and missions. Only my remaining influence with the Council of Noble’s has prevented our complete demise.”

“What about temples in other cities?” asked Gewey. “Couldn’t they help?”

“I wish they could, child,” she said, her eyes fixed on Gewey. “But the world has become a dark place. They simply can’t spare any of what little resources they have. No - I’m afraid we’re on our own.”

“There’s an encampment not far to the east,” said Millet. “A man named Brother Salvo runs it. He is good and kind. Perhaps he could help?”

The High Priestess suddenly burst with laughter. “I know Brother Salvo,” she said. “It is I, along with what’s left of the other temples, that bribes the governor into helping him maintain his camp. He thinks we do nothing, and accuses us of turning people out. What he doesn’t understand is that at this point, even if we were left alone, we are nearly bankrupt. The King has taxed our coffers dry at the bidding of the lords. You saw for yourself what it takes for a pilgrim to enter the city. I could help a few get in, but we don’t have the means to feed or house them for more than a few weeks.”

Gewey was staring at the riches in the room around him.

“I can see your mind, young one,” she said. “You stare at the treasures in this room and only see how much food and shelter it could provide.”

“I wasn’t…” Gewey stammered.

“It’s alright,” said Salmitaya. “I take no offense, and you’re not wrong. What we have in the way of gold and other valuables could purchase much if we would actually be allowed to reap the profits. But keeping these things is the only way I can ensure that one day I might restore this place to its former glory. You see, if I sold off or traded our treasures, the tax levied on us would close our doors forever. Together, they are considered relics and can’t be taxed - at least, not yet. As things stand, I can barely feed the three of us. The boy who served you earlier puts himself in great danger when he comes here. His mother loved this place, and when she became ill the sisters and brothers cared for her until she passed. I’ve tried to stop him from coming, but he is very persistent.”

“This is all so unfair,” cried Gewey. “I don’t understand how someone could do this to a temple.”

“In a way, we brought it upon ourselves,” she explained. “If we had stayed faithful to our purpose and left politics alone, we might be having a much different conversation.”

Just then, Celandine entered the room, followed by the young boy. They carried trays filled with food and placed them on the

table. The boy ran off and returned with plates and silverware that he quickly put in front of the party.

“Wonderful,” said the High Priestess, “Enough of this sad talk. Let us enjoy the meal Sister Celandine has prepared.”

“Won’t she be joining us?” asked Millet.

“What a good idea!” Salmitaya replied. “You heard him, sister. Join us.” Celandine nodded her head and retrieved a chair from the next room.

“Don’t bother serving us, Sister,” said Salmitaya. “We’ll serve ourselves.” She turned back toward her guests and continued.

“Forgive the lack of formality. Celandine is our only cook these days, and it’s usually just three of us. She doubles as server on the rare occasions we have guests.”

“We are used to serving ourselves, Holiness,” said Millet. “Besides, we’re pilgrims - not lords.”

They passed the trays around until everyone’s plate was full. The food was good. Though not extravagant, it was better than anything Gewey had tasted in a long time. The conversation was light and cheerful. The High Priestess asked about their travels, and Millet mixed in truth with lies as he told their story. She seemed very interested in Gewey’s farm upbringing. They had told her that he was raised on a farm and had come to the temple after his father died.

“What do you think of the city, Brother Gewton?” asked Salmitaya. “I bet it’s much different than what you’re used to.”

“Yes, it is, Your Holiness,” answered Gewey.

“I have a meeting with the governor tomorrow,” said Salmitaya. “It’s pointless, but unfortunately I must attend. I was thinking you might come with me. Would you like that?”

“We would love to come, Holiness,” Millet answered quickly.

“I’m sorry, Brother Milton,” she said. “I could explain away one lonely young pilgrim, but a group may cause problems. I’m sure you won’t mind if the boy accompanies me. The governor wants me there at the crack of dawn, and he takes pleasure in making me wait. I could use the company, and Brother Gewton would get the chance to see the manor. It’s a beautiful house, actually.”

“Of course,” said Millet. “I’m sure Brother Gewton will be happy to accompany you, Your Holiness.”

Lee tried to hide the concern on his face. Gewey, on the other hand, looked excited. The chance to see inside the governor’s manor was something he would have hated to pass up.

“It’s settled, then,” she declared. “I will wake you in the morning and bring you with me. Expect to be away for most of the day. There’s no telling how long I’ll be made to wait.”

When they finished dinner, Maybell and Celandine cleared the table.

Salmitaya stood up. “While I would love to stay up and talk, I must now excuse myself. It’s rare that I have the pleasure of stimulating conversation, but the morning comes early and brings with it a trying day. If you will agree to linger for a few days, I would love to speak with you more. We don’t get much news from the world here.”

“We had indeed hoped to stay for a bit,” said Millet. “Thank you again for your hospitality, Holiness. Now, I think I could use some sleep myself.”

Salmitaya bowed. “Until tomorrow, then.”

They all bowed in turn and watched as the High Priestess and Maybell walked from the room. Celandine led them back to their chambers and bid them goodnight.

“I don’t like it,” Lee said, once Celandine had gone. “Something’s wrong. I don’t like that she’s taking such a strong interest in the boy.”

“It may be just as she says,” said Millet.

There was a knock at the door. It was Kaylia. She sat on one of the beds and they told her about the events of the evening.

“I agree with the half-man,” said Kaylia. “Something is wrong here. Her story is too perfect. It fits too well, if you believe her over Brother Salvo.”

“It’s not only that,” said Lee. “If Salmitaya is to be believed, then Brother Salvo may just be unaware of the true circumstances. He didn’t strike me as a liar. But, from the moment she invited us in, I got the feeling that she knew we were coming.”

“I think you’re all being ridiculous,” said Gewey. “If she wanted to hide something, why would she let us stay here in the first place? Why risk us finding out? You say her story fits too well. Would you rather that it didn’t fit?”

“I would rather not feel as though we were walking straight into a trap,” said Lee.

Kaylia nodded. “We should leave now, before the trap is sprung.”

“No,” said Lee. “At least, not yet. If there is something going on here, we need to know whether or not it involves us. Hopefully, things are as Salmitaya says and I’m just being paranoid. But, if she does have motives that could hinder us, we need to know.”

“And what about the boy?” Kaylia asked. “You don’t really intend to let him go off with that woman, do you?”

“I don’t see that we have a choice,” Millet answered. “If he refuses, it could raise suspicion. If we’re wrong, and the High Priestess is telling the truth, then we will have insulted her and ruined any chance we might have of gathering information during our stay.”

“I’m going,” Gewey said hotly. “I can make this decision for myself.”

“Indeed you can,” Millet said. “But you need to trust in our experience.”

“Listen to him,” Kaylia advised Gewey. “We are trying to out-maneuver a possible predator in her home territory. You need to watch and listen. One day it will be you making these decisions, and when the time comes, you will need to know how.”

“I’m not a child,” Gewey protested. “You act like I don’t know anything.”

“You don’t,” snapped Lee. “You are a child, regardless of how old you may look - and you’re too important for me to let you discover that fact on your own. Until you’re ready, you’ll do as you’re told.”

Gewey crossed his arms and glared furiously at Lee.

“I need you to pay attention tomorrow,” Lee instructed. “If Salmitaya is up to something, we need to know what.”

Kaylia handed Gewey a flask of jawas tea. “Drink this,” she said. “Now that it no longer knocks you out, you can use it to relax and help you sleep.”

Gewey took the flask and drank. Immediately, the tension left his body and he felt his troubles begin to lift away.

Kaylia returned to her room and Lee, Gewey, and Millet went to bed. Gewey, aided by the jawas tea, went right to sleep, but Lee and Millet stayed awake talking for a while longer.

“If I might be so bold, My Lord,” said Millet, “you should remember that the boy has been on his own, without a father, for more than two years. He may be still little more than a child, but he’s been treated as a man for quite some time.”

“What do you suggest?” asked Lee. “The boy must learn, and I don’t know how else to teach him.”

“I think that perhaps you should trust the boy’s instincts from time to time,” Millet responded. “The fact of the matter is that you intended to let him go with the High Priestess all along. I think all he wants is to be consulted.”

“Funny that you should talk about trusting his instincts,” Lee remarked. “When I first met Kaylia, I told her that it was the one thing I did trust. Still, he is inexperienced. Instincts are no substitute for good judgment. I hope mine is good enough.”

“You do show wisdom, My Lord,” yawned Millet. “Occasionally. But you should learn to accept that some things are beyond your control.”

Lee chuckled. “Anyway, we’d better get some rest. Goodnight, Millet,” said Lee.

“Pleasant dreams, My Lord,” he replied.

Chapter 10

Gewey woke up early and donned his robes. Millet and Lee were still sleeping. Not wanting to wake them, Gewey went to look around the temple. He wandered the narrow corridors for a while until he found his way back to the main hall. The dawn light shone dimly through small windows set high on the surrounding walls. The gold statue of Ayliazarah glowed eerily. As Gewey approached it, he felt a cold chill that made the hair on his arms stand up.

“I was just about to wake you,” said Salmitaya, appearing from the direction of the staircase. “We’ll leave in just a bit. Would you like breakfast before we go?”

“No, thank you,” Gewey replied.

“You should eat,” she insisted. “Please join me.” She motioned for Gewey to follow, and led him back to the same chamber in which they had eaten the night before. Waiting at the table were a bowl of porridge and a glass of apple juice.

“Good to see another morning person,” Salmitaya said with a smile. “Poor Celandine and Maybell simply hate an early rise.” She pointed to the food. “Please, Brother. I hope you don’t mind porridge? Last night’s fare was more lavish than we usually have. I’m afraid this is a bit more like what we’re accustomed to lately.”

Gewey nodded. “This is perfect, Holiness. I love porridge and juice.”

“Before these dark times plagued this place, I had good friends here,” she said. “In private, they called me Taya. I would have you do the same. Maybell refuses and Celandine, well…to get that girl to speak more than a few words would be a miracle.”

Gewey blushed. “I would be honored. What are we going to do today, Holi - Taya?” he asked after swallowing a large mouthful of porridge.

“The same thing I always do when I see Governor Mattlin,” she answered. “I’ll ask for the littlest thing, and he’ll act like I just told him that the city is on fire.” She suddenly looked dismayed. “How’s your porridge, Brother Gewton?”

“Delicious,” Gewey replied. But even as he said this, he began to feel dizzy. He tried to stand up, only to stumble into the wall.

Salmitaya made no move to help him. She smiled a sinister smile. “Is something the matter, my child?”

“You…” was all Gewey could manage to say before he collapsed in a heap on the floor.

Salmitaya got up and stood over Gewey. “Such an attractive boy,” she said, as two city guards entered the room. “Bind him, and take him to my carriage.” The guards nodded and dragged Gewey away.

“Such a pretty, pretty boy,” she said, and laughed softly.

When Gewey finally awoke, it was to utter darkness. He feared he had been blinded until he realized he’d simply been blindfolded.

He couldn’t initially remember what had happened to him, but then it suddenly came rushing back - Salmitaya! She must have drugged him. But why? His body was seated upright, and when he tried to move he found that both his hands and feet were shackled. He tested them, but they were too strong for him to break. As his head cleared, he could sense that he was in a wagon or carriage moving steadily along.

Gewey’s thoughts were interrupted by the sound of Salmitaya’s voice. “I see that the young prince has awakened. Wonderful! I was getting lonely.”

“What’s going on here?” Gewey asked angrily. “Why did you drug me?”

“Why, why, why. With youth, it’s always why,” she mocked. “It’s actually the how that’s more interesting to me. One bite of that porridge should have been enough to put you to sleep for twelve hours. But you, my pretty young friend, ate nearly the entire bowl - yet here you are, awake after only six hours. Do you know what that makes you?”

“What?” growled Gewey.

“A mystery,” she replied. “One that I intend to solve before I deliver you.”

“Deliver me to who?”

“All in good time,” said Salmitaya.

Six hours, Gewey thought. She has a six-hour head start. But that’s nothing for Lee. Then it hit him: They won’t expect me back until after nightfall. By then, who knows where we’ll be?

“I get the shackles, but why the blindfold?” asked Gewey. “What are you afraid of me seeing?”

“Afraid? I wouldn’t go so far as to say afraid. But given how much moonbane root it took to knock you out, you clearly warrant a little extra caution.”

“This won’t work, you know,” Gewey said. “Eventually, my friends will find me.”

Salmitaya snickered. “Your friends are dead. Lee Starfinder, Millet Gristall, and that wretched elf are all dead. They died the moment you were taken.”

Hearing the names of his friends and her knowledge of Kaylia’s true identity sent fear into his heart. Still, he was defiant. “You lie!” he shouted.

“Of course I’m not lying,” Salmitaya replied. “How do you think I know your true identities, Gewey?”

“How do you know who we are?” he asked, trying not to let the fear show in his voice.

“You keep asking the wrong questions.” she said. “The inexperience of youth is so delicious.”

Gewey recoiled as he felt her hand on his chest.

“Do I make you nervous?” she asked, laughing lightly as she withdrew her hand.

“You make me sick,” he said, his skin crawling. “You’re evil.”

“What does a farm boy know about evil?” she asked. “I’ve seen real evil, child. The elf you were traveling with - you know, the one the guards killed this morning.” Her tone was amused, yet filled with hatred. “She was evil.”

“Kaylia is not evil, you witch!” Gewey raged. “She is good and kind, and a thousand times better than you’ll ever be!”

Gewey’s ears rang as he felt the impact of Salmitaya’s hand across his face.

“Never compare me to an elf again,” she warned. “Or this trip will become very unpleasant.”

Gewey felt a touch of satisfaction at having made her lose control.

“How long will this trip take?” he asked.

“Finally,” said Salmitaya, her voice now calmer. “It appears I’ve knocked some sense into you. That is an excellent question. One your mentors would be proud that you asked. Gather information slowly, boy. Don’t ask the big questions like ‘Why are you doing this?’ or ‘Where are we going?’ right away. If you want to try and escape, it’s the little details that will help. Unfortunately for you, I already know this, so you won’t be getting any details from me.”

“It’s not like I can go anywhere,” Gewey said, shaking his shackles. “Why not tell me?”

“I’ll tell you what,” she replied arrogantly. “You get to ask one question, and one question only.”

Gewey thought hard, but he couldn’t come up anything he thought would help him. “Who are you taking me to?” he asked finally.

Salmitaya shook her head. “Disappointing. You ask a question you already know the answer to.”

“Tell me,” Gewey demanded.

“I would hate to deny him the pleasure of proper introductions,” said Salmitaya. “So instead, I’ll answer your question with a question: Who do you run from?”

Gewey could barely contain his terror as the realization washed over him. He found me, he thought.

Salmitaya instantly picked up on his fear. “That’s right, boy. And he’s very excited to meet you. The only thing I’m wondering is why the Great One would be so interested in a simple farm boy. The answer is obvious: you’re not just a simple farm boy, are you? What is it, I wonder?” She stroked Gewey’s cheek. “You are pretty. And you certainly have a strong constitution. But there’s more, isn’t there?”

Gewey smirked. “You ask the wrong questions,” he said. “You should take your own advice.”

Salmitaya laughed aloud. “And just what is the right question, child? Enlighten me.”

Gewey’s tone became dangerous. “How long will it take for you to die once I get loose from these chains?”

“Such fire,” said Salmitaya. “I wonder if you will be so brave when you face him. Somehow, I doubt it.”

“Why do you serve him?” Gewey asked. “You’re a High Priestess of Ayliazarah; how can you betray your faith?”

“You speak from ignorance,” she answered. “Long ago, I followed the teachings without question, but my faith was misplaced, as you will soon learn. For years, I watched as the world became a cesspool, riddled with corruption and plagued by despair. Did the gods intervene? Did they make their presence known? Of course they didn’t, because the truth about the gods is that they care nothing for us.”

“And your master does?” he scoffed.

“My master will set the human race free,” she said. “He will release us from servitude and pointless worship. At last humans will be free to become what they were meant to be: the true masters of this world. When that happens, I will be there to bathe in the glory of my master’s victory. And somehow, you’re connected to that end.”

“I have nothing to do with it,” Gewey bluffed. “I’m just a farmer.”

“I hope you’re better at farming than you are at lying,” said Salmitaya.

“I could take a lesson from you,” Gewey said, his voice dripping with contempt. “You’re the High Priestess of deception.”

Salmitaya chuckled. “Perhaps,” she allowed. “The secret is to mix truth and lies together, like your friend Millet did.”

Hearing Millet’s name infuriated Gewey, but he managed to keep the anger inside. “What’s the real reason the temple failed?” he asked.

“It’s just as I said,” she replied. “The only difference being that I was the one behind the persecution and threats. The governor was very happy to help, especially when he discovered how rich I would make him. Luckily, the king is a weakling and easily bought - much more easily than the governor, in fact.”

“I still don’t get why the other temples didn’t stop you,” said Gewey. Keep her talking, he thought. Maybe she’ll give something away.

“That’s the best part,” she said. “They are the ones that helped. A few couldn’t be corrupted and had to be dealt with, but for the most part they were all too happy to sell out.”

“I don’t believe you,” said Gewey.

“Really?” she mocked. “How do you think I knew to be at the door when you and your friends arrived? How do you think I knew you were coming?”

“You didn’t,” said Gewey, after thinking about it for a moment. “We had to bribe our way into the city. If you knew we were coming, you would have sent word to let us in.”

“Dear boy,” she said. “Had I cleared the path for you, your suspicions would have been raised. No, you had to believe it was your cunning that got you through the gates. Of course the guards informed me that you were here, and I had left them instructions to find a way to let you pass if your friends were too stupid to bribe the captain. But make no mistake - I’ve known every move you’ve made for quite a while.”

“You know what I think? I think you just got lucky,” Gewey said.

“No argument there,” she said. “I knew what to look for, but it wasn’t until you talked to my friend Brother Salvo that I knew you were here.”

Gewey couldn’t believe what he was hearing. “Brother Salvo works for you?”

“Not exactly,” said Salmitaya. “But there are those among him who are my eyes and ears outside of the city. I told them what to watch out for, and it was reported to me as soon as you were spotted. I must admit, it was more than fortunate that you pretended to be pilgrims of Ayliazarah - a deception that brought you right to my doorstep - though I could have arranged a meeting regardless.”

“I still don’t understand how you know our names,” said Gewey.

“You names were given to me over a week ago, foolish boy,” she replied. “Your name is known by all of His agents. There was never any chance you would escape.”

“How did you know about Kaylia?” Gewey asked. “She’s only been with us a short while.”

“You don’t really think I would provide rooms that would give you privacy do you?” she said, then paused for a long moment. “Smart boy. Keep me talking. But nothing I’ve said will do you any good.”

Gewey suddenly began laughing.

“I’m glad you find this amusing,” she said, her voice showing irritation. “Perhaps I’ll make you grovel a bit before the Great Master takes you.”

“You don’t understand,” Gewey said. “It’s not what you said.”

“What then?” she asked.

“Two things,” said Gewey. “One: I’d bet you didn’t see the bodies of my friends before you left.”

“And what’s the other thing?” For the first time, Salmitaya sounded uncertain.

“The second thing,” he said, “is that you actually thought that your plan to kill them would succeed. You have no idea what you’ve done. You’re in a lot more danger than I am.”

Gewey’s head flew back as she struck him.

“Guard!” shouted Salmitaya.

“Yes, Holiness,” a low, rough voice replied.

“Keep an eye on him,” she said. “I’ll ride up front for a while. If he speaks or tries to escape, make him regret it.”

“As you wish, Holiness,” the man replied.

The carriage stopped, and Gewey could hear the door opening and closing.

“You heard her, boy,” said the guard. “Not a sound out of you.”

Gewey remained silent. He hoped what he said was true. He had to believe that his friends still lived and were coming for him. He shifted in his seat and smiled slightly.

They’re coming, he thought.

Chapter 11

Millet woke to find that Gewey had already left. He could see by the dim light of the oil lantern that Lee was still sound asleep. Best to let him rest a bit more, he thought. He got up as quietly as he could and began to straighten up the room.

“Don’t bother being quiet,” said Lee. “I’m awake.”

“Good,” Millet said, smiling. “Then you won’t mind getting out of bed so I can make it.”

Lee smiled sleepily. “Did you see Gewey leave?”

“No, My Lord,” Millet replied. “He was already gone when I awoke.”

“I hope he doesn’t do anything stupid,” Lee muttered. “I don’t trust that woman.”

“Don’t worry. I’m sure the lad can handle himself,” said Millet.

Barely were the words out of his mouth when a series of loud thumps sounded from immediately outside the door. These were followed by a muffled scream. Lee jumped out of bed and grabbed the knife he had hidden under his pillow. Millet rushed to his pack, searching for a weapon, but before he could find one Lee threw open the door and ran out. Lying in the hall were four city guards, all dead, blood pouring from their multiple wounds. Kaylia stood over them, still dressed in her underclothes, her long knife at the ready.

“How you’ve stayed alive this long I can’t imagine,” she said. “I heard them coming from all the way down the hall.”

“Thank the gods for that,” Millet said from behind Lee. “My Lord, we need to find Gewey.”

Lee was still staring at the bodies and the half-naked elf standing over them. How did I miss this, he thought. I should have heard them.

“Pay attention, half-man,” Kaylia said sternly. “Get your things together. I’ll be right back.”

Kaylia ran down the hall to her room.

Millet grabbed Lee by the arms. “Are you alright, My Lord?”

“I’m fine,” answered Lee. “Gather our things. Don’t bother with the robes.”

A few minutes later Kaylia reappeared with her pack, still holding her knife. Instead of her pilgrim’s robe she wore a brown, waist-length hooded riding cloak over the same shirt and trousers she’d been wearing the day they’d met. “This should disguise me as well as the robes did,” she explained in response to Lee’s questioning look.

“I take it we’re no longer pilgrims,” said Millet.

“It seems like the pilgrim disguise didn’t work,” Lee admitted.

Once they’d gathered their gear, Lee led them down the hall to the entrance leading into the main temple. He peered out from behind the tapestry that covered the doorway and saw Maybell kneeling in front of the statue of Ayliazarah.

“Quickly,” Lee whispered.

Lee burst from behind the tapestry, sword in hand, and ran toward the praying woman. She looked up at him, eyes wide in shock, as he grabbed her roughly and pinned her to the floor.

“What’s the meaning of this?” she screamed, struggling in vain against Lee’s iron grip.

“Why don’t you ask the guards that you sent to kill us?” Lee asked harshly.

“I - I don’t know what you’re talking about!” Maybell stammered. “What guards?”

“Listen to me very carefully,” Lee said in a low, dangerous whisper. “You will answer my questions, or I’ll let my friend here deal with you.” He looked at Kaylia, who pulled back her hood.

“An elf!” Maybell cried out, terrified. “Ayliazarah protect me.”

“The gods can’t protect you from me, woman,” said Kaylia with a malevolent grin.

“What do you want?” Maybell pleaded.

“Nothing you can’t provide,” said Lee. “First, you will tell us where to find our wagon and horses. Then you will help us leave the city. Finally, you will tell us where our young friend is.”

“He’s with Her Holiness,” she said. “You already know that.”

“Let me question her,” Kaylia offered, stroking her blade.

Horror and fear took hold of the old woman. She started to weep uncontrollably. “Please, I’m begging you,” she said between her sobs. “I spent the night at the Temple of Islisema. Her Holiness sent me there last night after dinner. I just got back. I know nothing.”

“Millet,” said Lee. “Go upstairs and look around. See if that witch left any clues.”

Millet nodded and immediately ran up the stairs.

Lee looked directly into Maybell’s eyes. “I’ll ask you again,” he said. “Do you know what Salmitaya did to our friend?”

Maybell looked straight back at Lee. “I swear by the gods I do not! I don’t know what’s happening here!”

Lee sighed. “She tells the truth. She knows nothing.”

“How can you be sure?” asked Kaylia.

“I can tell,” Lee replied. “She doesn’t possess the skill to deceive me. Remember what I am; it takes a trained mind to hide the truth from me.”

“Perhaps she is trained,” said Kaylia.

“No,” said Lee. “If she were, I would know that too.”

Lee allowed the shaking, still terrified woman to get up. They waited in grim silence until Millet returned. He came running down the stairs.

“I found something,” he said, handing a letter to Lee.

Lee took the letter and read it aloud.

“Salmitaya,”

“You are to watch for three travelers. They will be disguised as pilgrims and will be using false names. Their real names are Lee Starfinder, Millet Gristall, and Gewey Stedding. Two are older, the other young. It is possible that they have picked up another companion along the way. The young one called Gewey is to be brought to me unharmed. The others are to be killed. Do not underestimate them, Salmitaya. And do not fail as you have in the past, or you shall find reward swiftly turns to punishment.”

It was signed simply “Y.”

“He knows who we are,” said Lee, clutching the letter angrily.

“Somehow he knows our names, and now he has the boy.”

Kaylia’s eyes shone with fierce determination. “There’s only one thing to do: find him, and get him back. But first, we must leave the city.”

“That shouldn’t be hard,” said Millet. “They’re trying to keep people out, not in. But unless you want to delay long enough to buy proper horses for riding, then we either leave behind our gear and run after them, or try to catch them riding in a wagon.”

“I suggest we do both,” said Kaylia. “Millet, you can take the wagon while Lee and I run ahead and catch them. They think us dead, so it’s unlikely they’ll be in much of a hurry. Once we’re outside of the city, all we need to do is find out if anyone has seen a carriage with an armed escort.”

“What makes you think that’s how they’ll travel?” asked Millet.

“The boy is strong, and won’t go willingly,” Kaylia reasoned. “They’ll need a wagon or carriage to carry him, and I can’t picture a high priestess in a wagon. The letter said to be cautious, so it’s likely she’ll bring an escort. Being that she ordered the attack on us earlier, she clearly has access to the city guard.”

“That’s a lie!” spat Maybell. “Her Holiness would never order the spilling of blood within her own temple.”

“Then explain the letter,” said Lee. “Does a High Priestess go about the business of murder? Does she abduct people? Once we’re gone, I suggest you look closely at what’s been happening here.” Maybell glared at Lee, hatred burning in her eyes.

“Did you see her receive this letter?” Millet asked Maybell.

“No,” the woman answered. “Why?”

“I wonder how she received word so quickly…” Millet began, stroking his chin. Suddenly, his eyes lit up. “Sister Maybell, does Salmitaya keep a messenger flock?”

“Of course she does,” Maybell replied, trying her best to keep her composure. “All temples do.”

“That explains part of it, at least,” said Lee. “Still, we have no idea how the sender of this letter got our names in the first place, or how he knew our cover story.”

“What’s a messenger flock?” Kaylia interrupted.

“Fauna birds,” answered Millet. “Generally there are cages on the roof to house them. Each bird flies between two homes. Tie a letter to their leg and release them, and they can carry a message in a single day that would normally take a week.”

Kaylia nodded slowly. “Caged birds,” she said, grimacing in disgust.

“Let’s stay focused,” Lee said. “Millet, you and Kaylia stay here while the good sister and I go get our things.”

“I’ll not help you if you intend to hurt Her Holiness,” Maybell said defiantly. “No matter what that elf may do to me.”

“I’ll make you a deal then,” said Lee. “If no harm has come to our friend, then no harm will come to Salmitaya. If she’s the woman you think she is, you should have nothing to worry about. But I daresay that if you are smart and do a bit of investigating, you may end up wishing we had not made this bargain.”

“Do I have your word?” Maybell asked.

“You do,” Lee replied.

“Then come with me,” she said. “The sooner you have your things, the sooner I’m rid of you.”

Maybell then pulled herself from Lee’s grasp and marched toward the door with a speed surprising for someone of her age. She didn’t even bother with her walking stick, and it took a concerted effort for Lee to catch up.

“The half-man risks much letting the old woman live,” said Kaylia.

Millet frowned. “If he says she knows nothing, than she knows nothing. Lord Starfinder will not kill the innocent.”

“There are no innocents,” Kaylia said darkly. “She could give us away.”

“I’ve thought of that,” said Millet. “You still have some of that jawas tea don’t you?”

Kaylia pulled back her cloak, revealing a flask tied to her belt.

“Good,” said Millet. “We’ll give her enough to put her out for at least twelve hours.”

“She still knows too much about us,” Kaylia insisted.

“That may be,” Millet replied. “But the fact is, we are not killing her. Do you understand?”

Kaylia looked hard into Millet’s eyes and said, “You have a good heart, Millet Gristall. But that will not save us from danger, nor will it change the fact that I am not bound by your master’s promises. I agreed to come with you, not take his orders.”

Millet stared hard at the elf, and the two waited in silence until Lee returned with Maybell at his side.

“Everything is ready,” said Lee. “Let’s get moving. One of the stable boys saw a carriage with an escort of city guards heading to the west gate.”

“I thought a bit of jawas tea might be in order,” said Millet, gesturing to Maybell.

“That won’t be necessary,” said Lee. “Sister Maybell will be coming with us.”

Kaylia shook her head with a scowl. “You get more foolish by the minute, half-man.”

“Don’t worry,” Lee assured her. “We had a chance to talk on our way to get the horses and wagon. She has agreed not to give us away, and she will see to it that we pass through the gate unhindered. In return, she wants to be the one to escort the High Priestess back to the temple when we catch them.”

“Not to be contrary, My Lord,” Millet began, “but won’t taking her with us slow us down?”

Lee smiled devilishly. “Us, no,” he said. “You, on the other hand…”

“That’s not funny,” Millet said sternly.

“It’s not meant to be,” said Lee. “Maybell will ride with you on the wagon, while Kaylia and I run ahead to catch up with Gewey and Salmitaya. Once we have them, we’ll bring them back, and Maybell will escort the priestess back to the temple.”

“I must agree with Millet,” said Kaylia. “We should drug her and leave her.”

“Maybe,” said Lee. “But that’s not what we’re going to do. You, my elf friend, can either help me free Gewey, or you can go your own way.”

“Very well,” she said, begrudgingly. “We’ll do as you say…for now.”

“My Lord,” Millet interrupted “Before we leave, we should find out where the other sister is.”

“She didn’t stay at the temple last night either,” answered Maybell. “But where she went, I don’t know.”

“Clever,” said Millet. “No witnesses.”

“I wish we were as clever,” Kaylia said, glaring at Maybell.

“However, being that we are not, we should leave before the guards are missed.”

“Agreed,” said Lee. “The west gate is not far. We need to get there quickly.”

They left the temple and got into the waiting wagon. Maybell rode in the front with Millet, while Lee and Kaylia rode in the back. When they reached the west gate they were stopped by the city guards. Lee tensed and gripped his sword, but Maybell was true to her word.

“I’m from the temple of Ayliazarah on business for High Priestess Salmitaya,” she told the guard. “These people are my escorts.” The guard nodded and opened the gate.

Lee turned to Kaylia and smirked. “I told you,” he said.

“A stupid gamble either way,” said Kaylia, unimpressed. “The woman can still betray us.”

“True,” Lee acknowledged, “but she can also give us valuable information. It’s clear that the Dark Knight knows who we are, and what we’re doing. She may be able to help us figure out how this happened.”

“If she’s truly innocent, why would she have any information we need?” Kaylia asked.

“I assure you, she wasn’t lying about her innocence,” Lee replied. “But she may still know things - things she may not think important, but that are valuable to us nonetheless.”

They rode for an hour before they thought it was safe enough to ask strangers if they had seen anything. It did not take long to find someone with good information.

“Aye,” said a man walking on the side of the road carrying a woodcutter’s axe. “I saw a carriage. Right grand sight it was. Must have been ten men guardin’ it. Have to be awful rich to afford ten guards.”

“Where were they going?” Millet inquired.

“Don’t rightly know where they were headed for,” said the man. “But they were on their way west when I seen ‘em.”

Millet thanked the man and tossed him a copper coin.

“That has to be them,” Lee said as he jumped out of the wagon.

He turned toward Millet. “You and Maybell stay on this road. There’s a crossroads a mile from here. When you reach it, head south until you get to the village of Fair Harvest. Get a room at the inn and wait for us there.”

Millet nodded and watched as Lee and Kaylia ran headlong down the road, quickly disappearing from sight. Maybell crossed her arms over her chest and frowned. “We will not be staying in the same room,” she stated flatly.

Millet groaned and urged the horses onward, wishing he were back in Sharpstone.

Chapter 12

Gewey sat in dark silence for hours as the carriage plodded along. When the temperature dropped, he figured it was getting close to nightfall. If they stopped, it might give him a chance to get his bearings. Maybe he’d even get a chance to escape. He was sure Lee would come for him. From Gewey’s perspective, a bunch like this wouldn’t stand a chance against a man like Lee Starfinder.

His thoughts were interrupted as he felt the carriage stop and heard the door open.

“Bring him,” he heard Salmitaya order from outside the door.

A guard grabbed Gewey by the front of his robe and pulled him roughly from the carriage. He felt himself falling before landing hard on the ground.

“Careful,” Salmitaya warned. “We don’t want him damaged. At least, not yet.”

The guard hoisted Gewey to his feet, gruffly instructing him to stay put. Gewey did as he was told and waited, listening to the sounds of the people around him. He could make out ten different voices, most likely guards. It sounded as if they were setting up camp, but Gewey couldn’t be sure. After half an hour, he was led away from the carriage and through the entrance of a nearby tent. The guard stopped and forced him to the ground. He lay there for a moment, and then struggled to his knees. He could hear a guard breathing heavily nearby.

“Leave us,” Salmitaya ordered.

Gewey felt cold hands on his face as Salmitaya removed his blindfold. He blinked at the bright lamplight filling the tent. When his eyes adjusted, he saw Salmitaya standing in front of him. She was no longer wearing her robes; instead, she wore a blue silk dress tied at the waist by a thin silver belt. Her braided hair fell neatly down her back, and her ears and neck were adorned with diamonds and gold.

“The clothes suit you,” said Gewey sarcastically. “It’s better than the costume you were wearing when I met you.”

Salmitaya smiled warmly, seemingly unaffected by Gewey’s jabs. “We were both in disguise, I think,” she said. “Are you hungry?”

“No,” he replied. “I’ve lost my appetite.”

“Don’t be silly,” she chided. “How on earth do you expect to escape if you don’t keep up your strength?”

“You don’t need to worry about my strength,” Gewey said confidently. “I’ll be free long before I starve.”

“Perhaps,” said Salmitaya. “Perhaps you’ll be free this very night.” She walked across the tent and sat in a waiting chair.

“What do you want?” asked Gewey.

Salmitaya laughed playfully. “What makes you think I want something?” she asked, trying to sound innocent.

“I may be young, but I’m not stupid,” said Gewey. “You never get something for nothing.”

“So true,” she said. “And as it turns out, you do have something I want. Give it to me, and I might just forget I ever found you.”

“I have nothing to give you,” said Gewey. “And even if I did, what makes you think I’d let you have it?”

“You’ll give it to me because it’s in your best interests to do so,” she replied. “And it’s such a little thing at that.”

“Get to the point,” he snapped.

“As you wish,” she said. “What I want is information. Why are you so important to the Great Master? Why do I have to risk exposure, traveling to the ends of the bloody earth, just to deliver one farm boy?”

“Like I said,” Gewey responded, “I have nothing to give you. I don’t know the things you want to know.”

“I think you do,” she said sweetly “And one way or another, you will tell me.”

At that moment, a guard came in carrying a bowl of stew and a cup of water. He placed the cup and bowl in front of Gewey, and then stood at the tent’s entrance.

“One more thing,” she said, turning to leave. “You will eat, or the guards will beat you until you do so. Your choice.”

Gewey looked at the food. He thought it was most likely drugged, but he took it and ate nonetheless. Immediately, he felt the drugs take hold much more strongly than the first time. Salmitaya had apparently learned her lesson well. He concentrated on keeping his wits about him in the same way he did with the jawas tea. He felt weak, but he was able to remain conscious. Deciding he might be to able take advantage of this, he fell over and pretended to be in a drug-induced sleep.

A short time later he heard Salmitaya enter the tent and felt her hand brush back his hair.

“What’s your secret?” she wondered aloud.

Gewey cracked open his eyes and watched Salmitaya as she left the tent. A guard stood just inside the entrance, watching him intently. He scanned the area as well as he could from his position, but the tent was bare and contained nothing he could use to his advantage. He could do little under the guard’s watchful gaze, so he decided to bide his time. If he was going to escape, he would first have to do something about the guard; how he would manage this while in shackles, he had no idea.

A couple of hours later, an opportunity presented itself. The guard briefly stepped out and returned with a small stool. The man promptly sat down, and it wasn’t long before Gewey heard him snoring.

Gewey tested his movements, but the rattle of the chains caused the guard to stir.

He was just about to try again when a hooded woman in novice robes walked into the tent. She looked at the sleeping guard and drew something from her sleeve. In a flash, her hand shot out and struck the guard’s neck. The man woke suddenly, clutching at the point of impact, then abruptly fell from the stool.

“We don’t have much time,” the woman said as she ran over to Gewey.

He instantly recognized the voice of Celandine, the novice from the temple in Kaltinor. “What are you doing here?”

“Saving your life,” she answered as she knelt down and began unshackling him. “Luckily, the governor didn’t send his best men along; I thought it would take longer to find a way to get you out.”

“Why are you helping me?” Gewey asked.

“Do you really think this the time for questions?” Celandine replied curtly. “We have a clear path to the woods behind the camp.”

She ran back over to the guard and took his knife and sword. “I hope you know how to use this,” she said, tossing the sword to Gewey.

Celandine used the knife to cut a hole in the back of the tent, and then motioned for Gewey to follow as she stepped into the night.

It was dark, but Gewey could make out the tree line twenty yards away. The camp was quiet, aside for the sound of sleeping men. Celandine led Gewey rapidly across the field, and they vanished into the trees.

They ran for about fifteen minutes before they stopped.

“Wait,” said Celandine. She took off her robe, revealing a plain shirt tucked into light tan pants. Her honey blond hair was wrapped tightly in a black scarf, and even in the dark Gewey could tell that she was beautiful. He wondered how he’d failed to notice this at the temple.

“I left some supplies under that bush,” she said, pointing to a nearby huckleberry bush and tossing her robe at Gewey. “Get the packs and put this inside.”

Gewey obeyed. Just as she said, there were two journey packs hidden under the bush. He picked them up and stuffed the robe inside as Celandine fastened the knife she had stolen to her belt.

“I’d guess we have about an hour before they discover you’re gone,” she said. “We need to move.”

They ran west until they reached a small stream, and then turned south. They followed the stream for an hour, crossing it several times in order to throw off pursuit. Gewey was impressed by her endurance.

“Are you able to continue?” Celandine asked as they ran.

“Yes,” said Gewey. “I can go on for quite a while.”

“Good. We don’t stop till dawn.”

True to her word, they ran south until the morning light shone through the trees. They stopped at the foot of a small hill and sat on the forest floor.

“You see well at night,” Gewey said, catching his breath. “You didn’t fall once.”

Celandine smiled faintly. “That comes from my mother’s side.”

They sat in awkward silence for a few minutes.

“You need to tell me what’s going on here,” said Gewey, when he could take the silence no longer.

“What’s going on is that Salmitaya is not the only one on a mission to deliver you,” she replied.

Gewey jumped to his feet. “What are you saying?”

“Calm yourself,” she said. “I have the same goals as your companions.”

“How would you know about our goals?” Gewey asked. “Who are you?”

“I’m one of the good guys,” she said. “I’m here to help you.”

“I’ve heard that before,” he noted. “Do you have proof?”

“You mean, other than the fact that I stopped you from being taken to Angrääl in chains?” she said sarcastically. “No, not really.”

Gewey was taken aback. “You know where they were taking me? How?”

“Unlike dear, trusting Maybell, I’ve been suspicious of Salmitaya for a while,” she answered. “Over time, I made a habit of secretly reading all the letters she received. It didn’t take long to figure out who the ‘High Priestess’ really serves.”

“But who do you serve?” asked Gewey. “You don’t seem like a novice.”

“Actually, I am a novice—just not the kind you would have heard about,” she replied. “My order isn’t widely known, but it’s very old. We once protected Heaven itself, and we still battle the darkness to this day. I came to Kaltinor two years ago to investigate the failure of temples throughout the city.”

“When you found out about the temples, why didn’t you do something?” Gewey asked accusingly. “It doesn’t look like you’ve done anything to help.”

“We’ve done more than you could know,” she shot back. “But there are more important things than rescuing a few temples.”

“Like what? What could be more important than that?”

“Like finding you and making sure you’re delivered safely,” she replied.

“Why should I be important?” he asked suspiciously.

“I don’t know,” said Celandine. “But, if the Dark One wants you captured, then it’s obvious that you are.”

“I’m not going anywhere unless you tell me where we’re going, and who exactly it is that wants me,” Gewey said stubbornly. “So you can save us both some time and just tell me.”

“West,” she said. “We’re going west. Beyond that, I really don’t know. There’s a temple where you’ll be safe, but I don’t know exactly where it is.”

Gewey laughed. “So we just head west and hope we find this so-called temple? Sounds like a great plan.”

Celandine’s eyes narrowed. “I said that I don’t know where it is - not that I couldn’t find it. The location is kept a secret that only a few of us know. I know where to make contact, and from there we’ll be taken to the temple.”

“What about my friends?” Gewey asked. “How will they know where to find me?”

“If they still live, they’re on their own,” she said bluntly. “We can’t risk going back to find them. If you’re captured again, your enemies won’t be so careless twice.”

“I’m not abandoning my friends,” Gewey protested. “They are alive, and they wouldn’t leave me behind.”

“I think they probably are alive,” she agreed. “I doubt the buffoons Salmitaya sent to kill them succeeded. But I’m no warrior, and neither are you. If we go after them, we will be caught, and then your friends will have risked their lives for nothing. Salmitaya is arrogant, but not stupid. If she gets her hands on you again, it will take an army to free you.”

“How did you know about Salmitaya’s plans in the first place?” Gewey asked. “How did you know to follow her?”

“She sent me away after dinner to spend the night at another temple,” she answered. “A habit of hers when she wants to do things unseen. She tells us that one of the other temples wants to ensure a blessing by having a follower of Ayliazarah under their roof. Maybell believed her, but that woman would believe anything. I, on the other hand, packed what I needed and hid outside the temple until morning.  I saw the guards arrive, then later drag you out and put you into the carriage. I knew they had left some men behind to deal with your friends, but unfortunately I had neither the time nor the means to help them. Instead, I followed Salmitaya, hoping for a chance to free you.”

Gewey was unsure. “Assuming I believe you, what should we do now?”

“We head west to Althetas,” she replied. “We need to find a way to get there unnoticed, and unfortunately I don’t have much in the way of supplies or money, so we’ll have to improvise.”

“Do you know where we are now?” he asked.

“We’re north of the Spirit Hills,” answered Celandine. “We have enough food to pass through, and there’s a town on the southwestern slopes where we should be able to re-supply. From there we can hopefully find a way further west.”

“I still don’t feel right about leaving my friends,” Gewey said.

“We’ll try to send word to them when we can,” she replied. “But we have to keep moving. I doubt the guards will be able to keep up with us, but Salmitaya won’t give up easily. She’ll send trackers.”

Celandine got to her feet and held out her hand. Gewey thought for a moment, then pursed his lips.

“I’ll go with you,” he said, taking her hand. “But don’t think that means I’ve given up on finding my friends. As soon as we’re safe, you must promise to find them.”

“You have my word,” she said, pulling Gewey to his feet.

“Then let’s go,” he said.

They crossed the stream, and headed south toward the hills.

Gewey still wanted to turn back and find Lee, but he knew Celandine was probably right. And if even she wasn’t, there was no other choice.

To turn back now would deliver him straight into the clutches of Salmitaya.

Chapter 13

Lee and Kaylia ran west along the road at a pace no normal human could match. Lee worried about being noticed, but he knew they had to risk it if they wanted to catch up with Salmitaya. Each time they came to a crossroads they were forced to stop and make sure their quarry hadn’t turned. Fortunately, a carriage with a ten-guard escort left an easy trail to follow.

As the hours passed, Lee worried that Kaylia’s strength would give out. He could run a full day without tiring, but he had no experience with the stamina of elves, and he couldn’t afford to leave her behind. With a good plan of attack, he was sure he could kill ten city guards, but it would only take one to get to Gewey and cut his throat.

He needed the elf to ensure that didn’t happen.

“Do you need to stop?” Lee asked at one of the crossroads.

“Elves are stronger than you know,” she replied. “We do not tire easily.”

Lee nodded and took off west. Just as the sun was going down, Kaylia grabbed Lee’s arm, stopping him.

“They’re one mile ahead,” said Kaylia. “I can smell them.”

They waited until it was fully dark before approaching the camp. Two tents had been erected in a small clearing twenty yards off the road. A carriage pulled by a team of six horses had been pulled just to the side. As they’d been told, ten guards were busy about the camp, building fires and cooking meals. They couldn’t see Gewey anywhere.

“Looks like they’ve been here for more than an hour,” Lee noted. “Gewey’s probably in one of the tents.”

“But which one?” Kaylia asked. “We shouldn’t move until we know.”

“Agreed,” he said. “I’ll keep watch from here. You go around through the woods and check from there. Be back here in an hour.”

Kaylia nodded and took off through brush.

Lee watched as Salmitaya wandered through the camp, her head held high as she shouted orders to her men. She walked in and out of both tents, but gave no indication as to where Gewey was being held.

An hour later, Kaylia returned.

“These guards should be easy to deal with,” she said. “They have no idea how to secure a camp; the entire perimeter is left unwatched. They’ll be bunched together near the fires in two groups. Once we know where Gewey is, we can take them out.”

Lee nodded, watching as a guard carried a bowl and cup into one of the tents. A little while later, Salmitaya emerged from that tent and went into the other.

“He’s in there,” said Lee, pointing to the tent Salmitaya had just exited. “I count nine men by the fires, so that leaves only one guarding Gewey.”

“We should wait until they’re sleeping before we strike,” Kaylia proposed. “If one of them raises the alarm, the guard in the tent could kill the boy before we can get to him.”

Lee nodded in agreement. They settled in, never taking their eyes off the camp. Lee watched as the guard inside the tent was relieved, careful to take note of the length of time it took for him to return to the fire. It was then they saw a woman in novice robes enter where Gewey was being held.

“How did she get here?” Lee asked anxiously. “Did you see her before?”

Kaylia shook her head. “I think we have a new player in this game. We’ll need to move soon.”

Lee went over the plan with Kaylia. She was to enter the tent holding Gewey and deal with the guard there, while Lee would take care of the guards by the fire nearest to the tent. If the alarm were raised, Lee would then fall back and join Kaylia and finish off the remaining guards as they approached. If there were no alarm, then Kaylia would wait with Gewey while Lee took out the rest of the guards on his own.

“The important thing is that once we have Gewey, we don’t lose sight of him,” said Lee. “They may be clumsy fools, but it only takes one to cause us to fail.”

“A good plan,” she said. “But you should be the one to free the boy. I can kill the other guards more quietly than you.”

“Probably,” Lee replied. “And it’s why you’ll be the first in the tent. Slaughtering city guards in their sleep may not be honorable, but it should be easy. If the tent guard is awake, I need him down fast.”

“I think you don’t like the idea of an elf killing humans in their sleep,” she said.

“And I think you like the idea far too much,” Lee retorted.

It was then they saw a guard rise from his bedroll and walk toward the tent holding a flask. Lee and Kaylia lay silent. A second later the man bolted out again, yelling at the top of his lungs. The camp instantly erupted into a beehive of activity. Salmitaya came out of her tent and sprinted to where they were holding Gewey.

“We should pull back before they see us,” Kaylia suggested.

“I can hide in shadows too,” said Lee, sounding insulted. “If they come near, we’ll move - but not until then.”

Salmitaya left the tent, while two guards carried a third man next to the fire and threw him roughly to the ground. The remaining guards gathered around the High Priestess to receive their orders. They then headed for the nearby forest in small groups, leaving only the two guards with Salmitaya.

“It would seem our young friend has escaped,” Kaylia observed. “And unless I’m wrong, the novice had something to do with it.”

“We’ll wait a few minutes, then go down and see for ourselves,” said Lee.“I’ll take the near guard; you take the one walking toward Salmitaya.”

The elf smiled ominously and sprung to her feet, rushing toward the camp. Lee chased after her, but it was too late. Kaylia had killed the first guard and had the second on the ground before he could get close. Lee turned toward Salmitaya, hoping to reach the woman before Kaylia did. He made it just in time.

“Enough,” said Lee, standing in front of the terrified woman. “I gave my word she would not be harmed.”

“I gave no such word,” Kaylia replied, holding her bloody knife.

“If you harm her, I’ll kill you,” warned Lee. “Please don’t make me do that.”

Kaylia walked over to the shaking woman. “She deserves to die, Lee. You know it.”

“Yes, she does,” he agreed. “Nonetheless, I ask you to preserve my honor, and let her live.”

Kaylia studied Lee for a long moment. “I would not want to dishonor you. And I would not want to kill you, either.” She locked eyes with Salmitaya, cleaning her knife on the High Priestess’ dress. “But should we meet again, woman, my blade will send you to the Father.”

Salmitaya collapsed to the ground, weeping.

“Check the tents,” Lee said. “See what you can find out.” Kaylia took one more look at Salmitaya and obeyed.

Lee turned to the High Priestess. “Calm yourself,” he snapped.

“That demon wants to kill me!” Salmitaya cried.

“True,” Lee acknowledged. “And I may yet let her if you’ve harmed my friend. Where is he?”

“I don’t know,” she answered. “He’s escaped.”

“I guessed as much. I wonder how Angrääl will reward your failure.”

“I don’t know what you’re talking about,” she lied. “I serve the temple.”

Lee reached down and helped Salmitaya to her feet. “My dear,” he said calmly, “it’s that kind of lie that will earn you some private time with my elf friend. I promised that you would not be harmed, but as you’ve seen, stopping Kaylia could prove to be quite difficult. And I’ve heard elven interrogation methods can be rather…unpleasant.”

“You wouldn’t,” she cried.

Lee’s tone turned dangerous. “You kidnapped my friend and tried to have me murdered,” he fumed. “It is all I can do, not to kill you myself.”

Kaylia returned holding a set of iron shackles. “Someone freed him and took him into the forest,” she said, throwing the shackles at Salmitaya’s feet. “I examined the guard. He was poisoned with a stylus needle.”

Lee raised an eyebrow. “Elf poison? Why would an elf want to save Gewey?”

“If it was the same girl we saw entering the tent, she was no elf,” Kaylia noted. “But clearly she’s familiar with elf tactics.”

“In that case, I hope she turns out to be on our side,” Lee said, his concern showing in his voice. “Do you think you can track them?”

“Perhaps,” she said. “The guards in the woods will slow me down, but I should be able to tell which direction they ran. That is, unless this girl hides like an elf as well.”

“I’ll gather three of their horses and meet you two miles east of here,” said Lee. “Find out what you can.” Kaylia started off towards the woods.

“Kaylia,” called Lee.

She paused, and turned her head slightly.

“Try not to kill all the guards,” he said.

Kaylia smiled and disappeared into the night.

“She’ll kill every one of them,” Salmitaya said, her words dripping with contempt. “Elves only understand blood.”

“And yet, you live,” Lee pointed out. He saddled three horses, then chased off the others so that the guards could not follow. He mounted one horse and signaled for Salmitaya to mount another.

“If you try to escape,” he warned, “I swear, I’ll hog tie you and carry you over my saddle.”

Salmitaya glared angrily.

They rode east for two miles before hiding in the woods next to the road. “Now that I have you alone,” said Lee, “you’ll answer a few more questions for me.”

Salmitaya lowered her eyes, looking defeated.

“How long have you served the Dark Knight?” he asked.

“The Dark Knight?” she scoffed. “I serve the power of Angrääl that seeks to release us from slavery. The Dark Knight is merely an instrument.”

“You’ll find that I’m not easily distracted,” said Lee. “How long?”

“Eight years,” she replied.

“How many others are there?” he asked.

Salmitaya laughed. “How should I know? We are not told the identity of others. No knowledge - no betrayal.”

Lee pressed the matter further. “Of course. But surely you’ve run into others from time to time.”

“I have,” she admitted. “But never the same person twice, and not for more than for a few moments. If you want me to give you names, I can’t. Torture me all you want, I don’t know.”

“Is there a way you recognize others like you?” asked Lee. “A signal, or some sort of clothing?”

“The only way I can tell is if a person bears the seal of the Great Lord himself,” she explained. “It’s a hand holding broken scales. I’ve seen it many times, but we all have orders to destroy it right away once received. That’s the only way I know.” She turned away and faced the darkness of the forest. “Ask me nothing more. I have no knowledge of plans or strategy. I know nothing that can help you.”

“Perhaps,” Lee said. “But you still have to convince one more person.”

“The bloody elf? She would cut my throat before listening to me.”

“It’s not the elf you need to convince,” Lee chuckled. “Your fate rests in the hands of Sister Maybell.”

Salmitaya’s eyes widened. “You brought her with you? Where is she?”

“She’s safe,” he answered. “Waiting for us to return this very moment, in fact.”

“She’s a fool,” spat Salmitaya. “A blind old fool.”

“I spared your life because of a promise I made to that blind old fool,” Lee warned. “You had better pray she holds me to it.”

Lee could sense her sudden fear.

Kaylia showed up with a look of concern and confusion on her face. Lee walked with her out of earshot of Salmitaya.

“Whoever this woman is, she’s clever, and moves with great speed,” Kaylia whispered. “It would take me two days to catch them if I persisted, so I doubt the guards have any chance at all.”

“That would be good news if we knew who she was,” Lee said.

“Could you tell where they’re going?”

“I think they’re heading into the Spirit Hills,” she replied. “Any other direction would take them back to the road. I doubt they’ll risk exposure until they’re well away from here.”

“There’s a village on the southwest slopes that they’ll likely stop at for supplies,” said Lee. “Even at a dead run, it would take them three days to make their way through such rough terrain.  On horseback, we can reach the village ahead of them if we take the road and go around.  Unless they sprout wings and learn to fly, we should be able to head them off.”

“What of the woman?” Kaylia asked. “You don’t intend to leave her here, do you?”

“We’ll ride to Fair Harvest first,” Lee responded. “I promised to deliver her to Sister Maybell. A delay, I know, but we should still be able to beat Gewey and this mystery woman by a full day.”

“Very well,” said Kaylia. “I don’t like delays, but I would like to see this reunion.” A sinister smile crept over her face.

Lee threw his head back in laughter. “No doubt Maybell will be quite put out.” He paused, struck by a sudden thought. “By the way, did you leave any of the guards alive?”

“Yes,” answered Kaylia. “But I doubt they’ll venture into the forest after dark again.”

Lee smiled. “We’re off, then.”

The three mounted their horses and headed east until they reached a crossroads, where they turned south toward Fair Harvest.

It took them until mid-morning to arrive, and by that time their horses were spent. Lee knew he would have to purchase replacements if they expected to catch Gewey.

Fair Harvest was little more than a large camp supported by a few local farmers and traders. The town had only one road, with a few small shops and dwellings scattered on either side; the inn at the southwest corner of the village was by far the largest building. Seeing the state of things, Lee grew concerned that he wouldn’t be able to find decent horses. They approached the inn, tied their mounts to the hitching post, and led Salmitaya inside.

The interior of the inn was even less impressive than the exterior. Three tables and a small bar was the grand sum of the common room.

Two locals sat in the corner drinking ale while the barmaid leaned against the wall, playing with her hair.

The innkeeper, who had been rummaging around behind the bar, rose to his feet as they approached. “Can I help you?” he asked, staring at the hooded figure of Kaylia.

“We have two friends staying here,” said Lee. “Could you tell someone to get them for me?”

“Indeed, sir,” said the innkeeper. “They’re here all right. You’ll be taking them along with you I trust?”

“Why do you ask?” Lee said warily. “Has there been trouble?”

“Not so much trouble,” he replied, “but I swear that woman could drive a nitfly mad. I mean, look around. Does this look like a palace to you?” The man gestured to the meager décor. “You’d think she was the Queen herself by the way she makes demands.”

Lee smiled. “Could you go get them please?” he asked, tossing the man a copper.

“Yes sir,” said the innkeeper. “Right away.” He disappeared up the stairs.

Seconds later, Millet came running downstairs and pulled Lee into a tight embrace. “Thank the gods you’re here; that woman is driving me mad.” Releasing his grip on Lee, Millet noticed Salmitaya.

“I see you have her, but what about the boy?”

“Let’s go upstairs where we can talk,” said Lee. “Where’s Maybell?”

“In her room,” said Millet sourly, leading them upstairs. “She refuses to come out until she gets a proper bath. The wash basin isn’t to her liking.”

“Well, she can get one back in Kaltinor if she wants,” Lee quipped, slapping Millet on the shoulder.

“Indeed,” Millet huffed.

“We’ll take care of this one first,” Lee instructed, holding Salmitaya by the arm. “Show us to Maybell’s room.”

Millet knocked on the old woman’s door.

“Unless you’re here with a proper bathtub and hot water, go away!” Maybell called from behind the door.

“Open up,” Lee said sternly.

They heard the woman scuffling around, and then the door swung open.

“We have someone here to see you,” Lee said, pushing Salmitaya inside.

Maybell immediately noticed the blood on Salmitaya’s dress. “You said she wouldn’t be harmed!”

“And she hasn’t been,” said Lee. “That’s not her blood.”

Maybell looked in horror at the bloodstained dress. “Then whose blood is it?”

“Before I get to that,” said Lee, looking at Salmitaya. “I think Her Holiness has a few things she’d like to tell you. The deal is that she lives so long as she tells the truth.”

Salmitaya glared at Lee. “Very well,” she said, then turned toward Maybell. “What I am going to tell you is the complete truth. Once you’ve heard it, you are to decide my fate. On the head of Ayliazarah and the essence of my soul, I swear that my words are not false.”

Salmitaya proceeded to tell Maybell how she had conspired with the governor to close the temples. She told her about the murders and deceptions she had been a part of. Maybell listened carefully, but her face betrayed no emotion - not even when Salmitaya confessed to serving Angrääl and kidnapping Gewey for the Dark Knight.

When she was finished, Maybell stood up tall and straight. She looked directly into Salmitaya’s eyes.

“I cast you out,” said Maybell, her voice quiet and calm. “The eyes of the temple will no longer see you. Your name will be stricken from the Book of the Eternal Light and shall not be spoken again. I give you your life, only so that you may see the day when you and your master suffer as you have made others suffer.” She paused, still locking eyes with Salmitaya. “Now, leave from my sight before I forget myself and kill you where you stand.”

“Put her in your room, Millet,” said Lee. He then looked over to Kaylia. “Give her some jawas tea and leave her there. She can make her way back to Kaltinor, or wherever else she wants to go, when she wakes up.”

As soon as the door closed, Maybell sat on the bed and wept.

“Millet will see that you get safely back to Kaltinor,” Lee said, placing his hand gently on Maybell’s shoulder. “If, of course, that’s where you want to go.”

Maybell wiped her tears and said, “I can’t go back. No matter what I said, that woman has power enough to keep herself safely locked away in the temple. She could crush an old woman like me.”

“Then where do you want to go?” Lee asked. Maybell opened her mouth to reply, but Kaylia and Millet returned before she could give her answer.

“Kaylia and I need to leave as soon as we’re able,” Lee explained. “Millet, you’ll take the wagon south to the Old Road of Santismal, then continue west. Whoever freed Gewey is likely to pass through Vine Run on the southwest slope of the Spirit Hills. Kaylia and I will try to cut them off while you follow behind.”

“You never told me what happened to Gewey,” said Millet. “Where is he?”

Lee related the events of the past day and explained their plan.

“I will see to the horses now,” said Millet. “You should eat and rest for a bit.”

“One more thing,” Lee said, turning toward Maybell. “Sister, if you wish, you can accompany Millet until you either reach another temple or figure out where it is you want to go.”

Millet froze. “But My Lord…” he began.

“Thank you,” Maybell interrupted. “That is very kind. I’m sure Millet and I will become fast friends.”

Millet looked pained as he turned and left. Kaylia said nothing, but Lee could tell she was not happy.

“If you’ll excuse us, Sister,” Lee said, motioning for Kaylia to join him in the hall.

“She will slow us down,” Kaylia asserted. “You should leave her.”

“You’re right,” Lee acknowledged. “But I won’t. She’s a lady of worth and honor, and I will not abandon such a person.”

“Answer me this, half-man,” she countered. “When you came upon me in the forest, was it you who decided to come to my aid?”

Lee had no answer.

“I see,” she said.

“The fact is, I was wrong and Gewey was right,” Lee said, finally. “Given the same choice again, I would help you.”

“You misunderstand,” she replied. “Helping me was foolish. You were right to want to leave me. And know this: given the same choice today, I would leave you.”

Lee chuckled.

“Something amuses you?” asked Kaylia.

“It’s just, that is the first thing I’ve heard you say that I don’t believe,” said Lee. “Come, let’s eat.”

Chapter 14

It was well into the afternoon when Gewey and Celandine reached the foot of the Spirit Hills. Though they had stopped running, Gewey was beginning to feel the fatigue in his legs as they walked onward.

“I don’t think we’re being followed,” said Celandine. “All the same, we should be well into the hills before we stop.”

“Where are you from?” Gewey asked, trying to make conversation.

“Baltria,” she answered. “But I haven’t been there since I was a child.”

“Do you remember what it was like?”

“Vaguely. Mostly just flashes of memory. I do remember the smell of the salt air coming in off the bay. My father would take me to see the ships, and that smell always told me when we were close. What about you? Where are you from?”

“Nowhere you would have heard of,” said Gewey, not wanting to give away too much about himself.

“Don’t worry,” she said, sensing his trepidation. “While I’d love to know why you’re deemed to be so important, I’m not going to force it out of you.”

“What do you know about me?” Gewey inquired.

“I was given your description and name, and was told that if I found you, I should keep you safe until you could be delivered to the temple.”

Gewey looked puzzled. “Why would your temple care about me?”

“We have spies among the Dark Knight’s followers, and when we learned that he was after you, we knew we had to get to you first,” Celandine answered. “Other than that, I don’t know much.”

“What’s your temple like?” Gewey asked.

“It’s a place of training and worship,” she explained. “Only a few of us are permitted to go there, and I must admit I’m curious why a farm boy is worth this journey.”

“Me too,” Gewey said.

Celandine laughed. Her laugh sounded like a song to Gewey, and it made him have thoughts that caused him to blush.

“How old are you?” she asked.

“Why?” Gewey replied. “How old do I look?”

“Your size says a grown man in his twenties,” she remarked. “But your eyes tell a different story.”

“I’m seventeen,” he announced. “But I’ve been my own man for two years.”

Celandine smiled sweetly and looked closely at him. “You are very young, but I have no doubt that you are your own man. I meant no offense.”

“It’s just that Lee and the others treat me like a child,” he admitted. “Back home, I have my own land and run a farm by myself. Here, I feel like I’m growing up all over again.”

“But when it comes to the world, you are,” Celandine replied.

“Your friends only want to protect you, as do I.”

“I don’t need protecting,” Gewey said bitterly. “I can take care of myself.”

“I could tell,” she teased. “Salmitaya must have been terrified.”

“I would have escaped sooner or later!” Gewey protested. “I didn’t need rescuing.”

“Be that as it may,” she said sternly, “I did rescue you, and I would think you would show a little appreciation.”

Gewey felt ashamed. “I’m sorry. I do appreciate your help, Celandine. I really do. I just get sick of feeling so bloody helpless.”

“I understand,” she said sympathetically. “I know what it’s like to feel helpless, but trust me, once you get to the temple, you’ll never have to feel that way again.”

“I hope you’re right,” Gewey replied, earnestly.

“One more thing,” said Celandine. “My friends call me Dina - or at least, they did when I had friends.”

Gewey smiled. “Dina, then.”

By the time the sun went down, they were well into the interior of the Spirit Hills. They built a small fire at the base of one of the hills and split a loaf of flatbread Dina had brought.

After they ate, Gewey lay down on the grass to rest, using his journey pack as a pillow. The stars were obscured by the constant overcast clouds, and he felt the chill of the damp night air creep into his clothing.

Lee’s words about the coming of a hard winter echoed in his head, and suddenly his mind went to thoughts of the villagers in Sharpstone. They had seen too many hard winters - too many deaths.

Somehow, he would find a way to make things right.

Dina was huddled close to the fire, already asleep. Gewey watched the firelight as it danced across her face. He wanted to go to her and feel the softness of her cheek against his hand. She stirred for a moment, and Gewey felt himself blush with embarrassment. He rolled over and tried to sleep, but he couldn’t take his mind off her.

Finally, he got up and walked off into the night, careful not to wake her. He closed his eyes and breathed the cold air into his lungs.

Remembering Kaylia’s lessons, he focused his mind on the darkness that surrounded him. The trees in this part of the hills were thick and numerous, so Gewey decided to practice moving through the shadows.

It wasn’t long before he had forgotten Dina and lost himself in his training. The darkness opened itself up to him, showing him where to hide, how to move, and where to strike.

“You move like an elf,” said a voice from behind him. Gewey spun around and saw a thin, old man dressed in animal skins and holding a gnarled tree branch as a walking stick. His long gray hair was tangled and unkempt, and his wiry beard fell down his chest. Gewey, realizing that he had left his sword back at the fire, took a quick step backwards.

“Who are you?” he stammered.

“The spirits tell me that you are something special,” the old man answered. “I wanted to see for myself.”

“Spirits?” Gewey asked. “What spirits?”

“They tell me you need my help,” he continued, as if Gewey hadn’t spoken. “Yes they do. They tell me things. Things you should know. Things you shouldn’t. They’re very clever.”

“Tell me who you are,” Gewey demanded. “What do you want?”

“He asks what we want, he does. What could we want? Nothing, that’s what. We have all we need. But you want something, don’t you? You want something very badly. Don’t worry. No, don’t you worry. You’ll have it. Yes indeed you will. I’ll give it.”

“What will you give me?” Gewey asked, confused.

“No, not yet,” said the old man. “Not now, but soon. Very soon.”

The old man turned and walked away, disappearing behind a nearby tree. Gewey chased after him, but he was nowhere to be found. He searched for over an hour, but to no avail. It was as if the old man had vanished like a puff of smoke.

When he went back to the camp, he woke Dina and told her what had happened.

“Did he say anything else?” she asked.

“Nothing,” he answered.

Dina thought for a while. “I don’t know,” she said finally. “The Spirit Hills are said to be an odd place - haunted even - but I’ve never heard of anything like this.”

“What should we do?” Gewey wondered.

“What can we do?” she replied. “I say we get some rest and see what happens. It doesn’t sound like whoever it was is finished with you, but I don’t see how we can do anything about that.”

The next day, Gewey and Dina hardly spoke a word. The Spirit Hills seemed to be living up to their name; Gewey held tight to his sword, ready to strike at every snap of a twig, while Dina continually looked back and forth over her shoulder as if expecting to see ghosts emerge from every shadow. As they moved deeper into the hills, Gewey could feel the air becoming thicker. By mid-afternoon he was struggling to breathe.

“We’re being watched,” Dina whispered.

“From where?” Gewey asked.

“Everywhere,” she replied. “I can feel their eyes on us.”

Suddenly, a voice came from behind them. “Eyes, you say?” Gewey’s heart nearly leapt out of his chest. It was the old man. He was sitting on the ground under a tree they had just passed.

“Not eyes,” said the old man. His voice was mirthful, and he was still wearing his animal skins. His walking stick lay across his lap. “No, not eyes. But they see you. Of course they do.”

“Who sees us?” asked Gewey. “Who’s out there?”

The old man laughed heartily. “A child of heaven you are,” said the old man to Gewey. “You walk the Spirit Hills. They see you. They love you. They want you to stay. But you mustn’t. No, no. They’ll keep you for themselves. But I’ll keep them away. Yes, I’ll threaten to leave them, I will. Leave them alone. No more old man Felsafell to talk to.”

“Is that your name?” Gewey asked. “Felsafell?”

“Yes, my name,” he answered. “I’m at your service. I’ll tell you what you seek to know. But first, you come. We sit and talk. So long since I’ve heard other voices. Welcome they are, to tired ears and blurry eyes.”

Felsafell grabbed his walking stick and hopped to his feet. He walked past Gewey and Dina, beckoning them to follow. They looked at each other, confused.

“You mustn’t fear,” Felsafell assured them. “I mean no harm. The spirits will obey. They’ll leave you be. Come along now, quickly. An old man must eat and rest.”

Reluctantly, Gewey and Dina followed. Felsafell led them through the hills and valleys for over an hour, until Gewey knew he was hopelessly lost. Finally, as they rounded one of the larger hills, they saw Felsafell’s house.

It looked as if it were built entirely of small twigs and grass. There were two windows covered by cloth curtains, but there was no glass.

Smoke rose from a chimney atop the steep thatched roof, and the air was filled with the scent of bread and meat. A small porch stretched from the front of the house, with three wicker chairs lined up beneath one of the windows.

“We’re here, my friends,” said Felsafell. “Come in. Take food and rest. The spirits are quiet now. They are indeed.”

Felsafell opened the door and showed them in. The interior was simple, much like Gewey’s own home. The walls were lined with tools and animal skins. In the fireplace was a spit where a wild pig slowly roasted. On the table were two large jugs and a loaf of fresh bread. Two beds sat in the corner of the room. A bedroll lay on the ground next to the fireplace.

“Sit and eat,” Felsafell instructed. “Time for talk when our bellies are full. Sit and rest.”

Gewey and Dina sat at the table while Felsafell ran to the corner and brought back three cups. He filled the cups with cider, then went to the roasting pig and began cutting off large slices and putting them on a platter.

“A simple meal of meat and bread,” said Felsafell as he brought the platter to the table and sat down. “No fancy things, you know. But I have all that is needed.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey graciously. “Roast pig and bread is most welcome.”

Felsafell smiled broadly, showing a mouthful of crooked teeth.

“Too kind,” he said. “I’ll try hard to speak as men do. So long with the ghosts and spirits. No voice but old Felsafell’s to keep me company.”

“How long have you been here?” asked Dina, tearing off a piece of bread.

“Questions later, dear friends,” Felsafell replied. “Questions after food and rest. An old man can travel far, but not forever. No he can’t.”

After they ate, Felsafell poured a cup of cherry wine from the second jug and passed it around. For a while he closed his eyes, humming softly and holding the cup in both hands. Gewey noticed the light through the window beginning to dim as evening drew near.

“Time for rest,” said Felsafell. “You take the beds. Old Felsafell sleeps by the fire. But don’t you worry. We will speak before the dawn.”

Dina and Gewey lay down in the beds, which were remarkably soft and comfortable. Felsafell lay down on the bedroll in front of the fire and was fast asleep in seconds.

“What do you think?” Gewey whispered. “Is he crazy?”

“Maybe,” Dina answered. “But I don’t think he’s dangerous. Still, we should be wary.”

Gewey nodded in agreement. He tried to stay awake, but it wasn’t long before a full stomach and a soft bed got the better of him.

“Rested enough my friend,” said Felsafell, shaking Gewey softly. “Time for questions. Time for answers.”

Felsafell walked across the room and opened the front door. “On the porch we’ll talk. All your answers are out here.”

Gewey heard Felsafell walk across the porch and sit in one of the chairs. He took a deep breath and got out of bed. Dina was still sleeping soundly. He approached the open door and peered outside. Felsafell was seated, smoking a pipe and gazing into the night.

“Time for answers, child of heaven,” he said.

Chapter 15

Gewey pulled out a chair across from Felsafell and sat down. The old man had a quirky smile. The pipe filled the night air with a sweet odor that reminded Gewey of his father, who had himself smoked a pipe on occasion. “It’s answers you seek,” Felsafell began. “Yet you don’t know all the questions.”

“Why did you call me ‘child of heaven’?” asked Gewey. “What do you know about me?”

“I know many things. The spirits are clever. They share with old Felsafell the things they know. Yes, they do indeed. They say the earthbound son of two shepherds comes to visit. They say he needs to know things. Things known by none.”

“What do I need to know?” Gewey asked impatiently.

“Your strength,” Felsafell replied. “You do not know it. From the earth it comes, and there you’ll find it. Your father left it there.”

“My father? Do you know who he is?”

Felsafell nodded. “A farmer, of course. Just like you. He left his land in your care. Search the earth and find your strength.”

“I don’t understand,” Gewey said. “Where exactly should I search?”

“Old Felsafell is not the source,” he answered. “The spirits are a tricky lot. What they say may not be what they mean. But more there is to tell before the dawn greets us. Though dawn is not what it used to be.”

“Tell me, then,” Gewey urged him.

Felsafell smiled. “Of course, the young are always full of haste.  But hurry you must, for the darkness comes. It closes the eyes and deafens the ears. The spirits fear it will be their end. They see as their doom approaches.”

“You’re talking about the Dark Knight. What do you know about him?”

“The Cold One in his castle,” Felsafell continued. “He wants you.  And he will have you. By his power you will fall. But fall you must, to open your eyes.”

“You mean I’m beaten?” Gewey cried out. “I lose?”

“Beaten, yes,” Felsafell affirmed.

Gewey’s face dropped in despair. “What’s the point of all this if I can’t win? Why even tell me?”

“Now you know,” said Felsafell. “You know what you didn’t. Will you stop? I think you will not. But more to tell before the dawn greets us. Would you hear it?”

Gewey sighed and looked up at the old man. “Yes, I’ll hear it.”

“Your friends are true,” he declared. “But be warned. One will leave this world. The one who is bravest will give all. This friend will save you with courage and love.”

“Who will die?” Gewey demanded. “Tell me.”

“I know not. If the spirits know, they refuse to say.”

“But they must,” Gewey said in anguish. “You have to make them.”

“I cannot,” he replied. “Love me they do indeed. I stay with them and talk to them when others flee. But I am not master here.”

“Is there anything I can do?” begged Gewey.

“There’s always something to be done,” he answered. “But change what is to be? I cannot say. The spirits are clever, but they only see. They do not push and pull the world as men and elves. But more there is to tell before dawn greets us. It comes soon, and as it comes, you must go.”

“Tell me then,” Gewey said, “do my friends still live?”

“Good news I have for you. Indeed they live, but be warned: the child of two worlds and the child of one. Their future is uncertain. By your words, you will see one live or die. You must see this approach before time runs out.”

“I don’t understand,” Gewey implored.

“You will when the time is right. Some secrets are not for me to tell. But soon enough you’ll see your friends. They wait for you.”

“Where are they?”

“They’re not far,” he said. “You need not search. They will find you. Take comfort.  There is one more thing to tell that you must hear. The dawn is saying hello, and your time with old Felsafell is at an end.”

Gewey leaned forward. “What is it?”

“Before the time when good and evil take up arms, you must decide. To seek the friendship of your mother’s child, or leave to fate that child’s future.”

“My mother?” Gewey exclaimed. “My mother didn’t have any other children. First, you tell me a friend will die saving me, and then you ramble on about my mother. You know what I think? I think you’re just a crazy old man.”

Gewey got up and stormed off the porch. He stopped after a few yards and gazed toward the forest. The dawn light was beginning to filter through the trees, revealing a light mist that covered the surrounding hills.

“Old, for sure,” Felsafell called out, laughing. “Crazy, yes. But that changes nothing. No, it does not. You know what I say is no lie. Deny it as you wish; it matters not to me. My time nears its end and old bones will rest at last. But come inside and take repast. You must go before the dawn turns to day.”

Gewey stifled his anger and followed Felsafell inside. Dina was just waking. Gewey thought she looked beautiful as she sat up and stretched her arms.

“Good morning,” she said. “You slept well, I hope?”

“Yes,” Gewey replied. “But we need to get moving soon. I think I’ve had enough of this place.”

Dina looked concerned. “Did something happen?”

“Nothing important,” Gewey answered. “But I want to get out of these hills by tomorrow.”

Felsafell had already laid out two bowls of porridge and cups of water. “Eat first,” he insisted. “But eat fast. You must go if you would see your friends.”

Gewey and Dina ate breakfast and gathered their packs. As they left the cottage, Felsafell handed each of them a loaf of bread and a few slices of roast pork wrapped in cloth. They thanked him, though Gewey was still clearly upset by their conversation.

“Head west from here,” Felsafell instructed. “The path you find will lead you safely away. Farewell.”

Gewey nodded but said nothing more before setting off in the direction Felsafell had told them. Dina followed close behind, humming sweetly.

“What’s that song?” asked Gewey. “It sounds familiar.”

“I doubt you know it,” she said. “My mother sang it to me when I was very young.”

“Where is she now?”

“She died when I was a small girl,” she said sadly. “I don’t remember much about her.”

“I’m sorry,” Gewey replied. “My mother died when I was young, too.”

“No sad talk this morning,” she said, smiling brightly. “Did the old man talk to you?”

“Yes,” Gewey said, shaking his head. “Turns out he was just a crazy old man.”

“Really? I’m not so sure. There’s something about him.”

“Did he speak to you?” Gewey asked.

Dina nodded. “He woke me up in the middle of the night while you were still sleeping. He knew things - things nobody else knows.”

“What did he say?”

“Nothing I want to tell right now,” she answered. “Some of his words were troubling, and I would prefer to have a pleasant morning.”

“I agree,” Gewey said. He tried to put it out of his mind, but he couldn’t stop thinking about what Felsafell had told him. He would fall to the power of the Dark Knight. Even worse, one of his friends would die. He swore he wouldn’t let that happen.

They found the trail Felsafell had told them about and headed south. The rest of the day was uneventful. Gewey kept their conversation light, saying nothing of his talk with the old man. The trail seemed to defy the rugged terrain, staying level and smooth, and by the evening they had managed to cover many miles. They decided not to camp and instead continued on; they were both still remarkably full of energy. Gewey attributed it to sleeping in a soft bed and eating a hearty breakfast, but Dina told him she thought it was the spirits urging them on.

“I think they’re trying to help us,” she remarked. “It’s almost like they’re giving me strength.”

“I don’t know,” said Gewey. “But I do feel rested.”

“At your age, you should always feel rested,” she teased.

“How old are you?” Gewey snapped. “You can’t be much older than I am.”

“You’d be surprised,” she laughed. “I’m older than I look.”

“That’s not an answer.”

“No it’s not,” she said with a wry smile. “But you never ask a lady her age.”

The night air was near freezing, but Gewey and Dina didn’t seem to notice. They walked cheerfully down the trail, talking and laughing.

Daybreak came and went, and still neither of them felt any hint of fatigue. They were nearing the southern end of the Spirit Hills, and Dina guessed that the road leading west to the hillside village of Vine Run was less than half a day away.

“Once we reach the road, it’s a straight shot to the village,” Dina explained. “If we hurry, we should get there by midday tomorrow.”

This lifted Gewey’s spirits. He hoped Lee would be waiting in the village so he could talk to him about what Felsafell had said.

By noon they had reached the road and headed west. The path was cut straight through the hills, and spanned as wide as thirty feet in some places. As they traveled, Gewey saw immense stone carvings of ancient kings lining the road. Some of these stood more than twenty feet high. They sat down to eat in the shadow of one of these massive carvings.

“Do you know who put them here?” Gewey asked.

“This is the Old Road of Santismal,” Dina stated. “Long ago this was the heart of a great kingdom, and this road cut right through the middle of it. It’s said that the Kingdom of Santismal was the richest and most powerful the world had ever seen.”

“What happened to it?” he asked, gazing at the weathered statue.

“Some say war, others say famine.” Dina shrugged. “No one really knows. All that’s left are a few scattered ruins and this road. Some parts are still paved in stone, but most of it has been washed away by time.”

Gewey marveled at the thought of a massive paved road and the work it must have taken to build it, not to mention the effort it would take to transport the statues.

“They must have been a great people.” said Gewey. “Have you seen the ruins?”

“Some,” Dina replied. “Even in ruins, the buildings stand taller than any today.”

“I hope I get to see them one day,” he said.

“I’m sure you will,” she affirmed.

When sunset came, their energy finally ran out and they made camp. They finished off the meat and bread Felsafell had given them and lay down on the soft grass. Two straight days of walking, with only very short stops, made sleep come quickly.

Gewey awoke to a bitter cold. The fire had died, and he could see that Dina was shivering in her sleep. He reached over and shook her awake. Dina rubbed her eyes and stretched.

“A bit chilly this morning,” she yawned.

“Winter’s coming early this year,” Gewey remarked.

“It’s only a few hours until we reach Vine Run,” said Dina.

“There’s an inn there where we can rest for a bit.”

The thought of a warm fire and blankets energized Gewey. He got some flatbread from his pack and split it with Dina. Shivering, the two ate next to the remains of their fire.

As they approached the village, Gewey could immediately tell why it was called Vine Run. The surrounding hills had been cleared and turned into massive vineyards that stretched on for hundreds of yards in all directions. It had clearly been beautiful once, but now the vines were bare and withered. The ground was a dull gray, matching the cloudy sky.

The village itself also showed signs of decay. The multicolored brick houses were cracked and in dire need of repair. Several of the wooden structures had burned to the ground, and the streets were practically abandoned. Only a few people walked about, and they all stared at Gewey and Dina as they passed.

When they reached the inn, Gewey was thankful to be away from such a depressing sight. Happily, the inn’s common room turned out to be a complete contrast to the rest of the desolate town. It was packed with at least thirty people, and a fire roared in the hearth, filling the room with warmth and cheer. A flute could be heard from the far corner, and the crowd was singing merrily along. Gewey and Dina pushed their way to the counter, where a short, round woman with a pleasant smile stood swaying to the music.

“Greetings to you, sir,” she said. “Just arrived?”

“Yes we have,” said Dina, before Gewey could speak. “We need a room and a hot meal.”

“That’s grand!” the woman exclaimed, clapping her hands together. “Always plenty of room here. As for the meal, you just missed the midday supper, but I can get you some bread and maybe a bit of lamb if those scoundrels in the back haven’t eaten it all.”

She reached to a shelf behind her and grabbed a large jug and two cups. “Maybe this will make it up to you,” she said. “The finest wine for a thousand miles. We make it right here, or at least, we did in the past. Vines aren’t what they used to be, you know. They’ll come back though, you just wait and see. In the mean time, we have plenty of spirits to go around.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey, taking the wine. “I’m looking for some friends who might have come through here.”

“If it’s friends you’re after, you’ll make plenty tonight,” said the bar matron. “Young Bartol Greenward turns eighteen today -half the town will be in and out of here. But don’t you worry - if it’s quiet you want, you won’t hear a peep from the back. Our walls are thick. But I hope you join us for while. It looks to be a grand party.”

“What about strangers?” Gewey asked. “Have any come through here in the past couple of days?”

The woman crinkled her nose in thought. “Can’t really tell,” she said. “Been out sick until this morning. Dreadful sick. Feeling better now though. Ready for the celebration.” An old man pushed his way behind the counter and whispered something into her ear.

“Yes I am, you old goat,” she said crossly. “I was just about to show them to their room, wasn’t I?” she asked, turning toward Gewey and Dina.

“Yes you were,” Gewey said, clearly amused by her reaction.

The bar matron turned back to the old man. “You see? Now go back to your wine and leave me be.”

The woman led Gewey and Dina through a door in the corner of the common room. Gewey scanned the crowd trying to catch sight of Lee, Millet, or Kaylia, but he didn’t see any of them.

“I forgot to ask,” said the woman. “How many rooms will you be needing?” Gewey froze, and could feel himself blushing.

“I…uh…” he stammered.

“Forgive my husband,” Dina said. “He sometimes forgets we’re no longer bound by our parents. One room will be fine.”

“That’s quite alright,” said the woman. “My old goat of a husband forgets we’re even married at all.” She unlocked the door and handed Dina the key. “You keep this, my love. Men can’t be trusted with anything. Now I must get back. The old goat will bring you some water for the basin. I’ll see your meal is brought in as well if you want.”

“Yes, thank you,” said Dina.

“Grand,” said the woman. “I’m Minnie, if you need anything. And my husband’s name…well, you can just call him old goat. He answers to that more than anything else.” With that, Minnie scurried off down the hall.

The room was simple but comfortable. The washbasin in the corner was large enough to stand in, and the small table and chairs were well made. But the thing that Gewey noticed most of all was the single bed.

“Husband?” he asked.

Dina smiled. “I suppose I could have said brother. But I was taken off guard, and we can’t afford two rooms.”

“You weren’t the only one taken off guard.”

“Don’t worry,” she said playfully. “Being my husband won’t be so bad.”

Gewey couldn’t meet her eyes for fear his embarrassment would show.

A little while later, Minnie’s husband brought their wash water. “I’ll bring your meal in half an hour,” he said sourly, before skulking out of the room.

“It’ll feel good to be clean,” said Dina. “I have fresh clothes for you in my pack.” She stood there staring at Gewey with eyebrows raised.

“What?” exclaimed Gewey.

“Turn around, if you don’t mind,” Dina instructed. “Unless you intend to watch me bathe.”

Gewey blushed for what felt like the hundredth time and turned to face the door. He felt his heart race as he heard Dina bathing behind him. By the time she was finished and dressed, he could hardly breathe.

“Your turn,” she said, drying her hair with a towel that had been placed on the bed. Gewey didn’t move.

“Come now,” she teased. “I’ll look away.” Gewey’s hands shook as he disrobed and began to wash.

“Very nice,” Dina said suggestively.

Gewey spun around, nearly knocking over the basin, but Dina was still facing the door.

“That’s not funny,” he fumed.

“I’m sorry,” Dina laughed. “I’ll be good. I promise.”

Gewey washed and dressed as fast as he could.

There was a knock at the door, and Minnie’s husband brought them their meal. It was far more than the bar matron had said there might be; clearly she’d gotten to the leftover lamb before anyone else.

As they ate, Gewey tried not to think about his earlier embarrassment, but he was still unable to look Dina in the eye.

“I think I’ll save the wine for the journey,” Dina said, holding up the jug Minnie had given them.

“Good idea.”

“I suppose we should see if your friends are anywhere about,” she said, finishing her last bite of lamb. Gewey nodded in agreement.

The common room was still bustling with partygoers. Several tables had been pushed aside and a dance contest had broken out in the center of the floor. It reminded Gewey of birthdays back home.

He scanned the room, hoping to catch a glimpse of his companions, but he couldn’t see much through the crowd. He forced his way to the far wall and stood on a chair. Without warning, he was lifted off his feet and thrown over a broad shoulder. Before he could do anything, he was being spun around. He struggled to free himself, but his assailant lifted him up and sat him down hard in a chair. It was Lee. Gewey saw Dina approaching from behind him with her knife drawn.

“Dina, stop!” Gewey cried. “I’ve found them.”

Dina put her knife back in her belt and covered it with her shirt.

“I see your taste in travel companions has improved,” said Lee, smiling widely.

“How did you find me?” Gewey asked.

“Luck, combined with a bit of skill,” Lee answered, laughing and slapping Gewey on the back. He turned to Dina. “So you’re the one who helped my young friend. Celandine, right?”

“Please, call me Dina,” she said. “And you’re Lee Starfinder.

Where are your companions?”

“I see you and your husband decided to join us,” said Minnie as she passed by with a tray of wine. “And found a friend I see!” She disappeared into the crowd.

“Husband?” Lee exclaimed, bursting into laughter. “You’ve been busy.”

“It’s not funny,” Gewey objected. “Anyway, where’s Kaylia and Millet?”

“Kaylia’s in her room,” Lee replied. “And Millet should be here by tomorrow. But I don’t think we should talk here.”

Lee led them to the room where Kaylia was staying. She smiled brightly when Gewey entered, but the smile vanished when Dina followed behind. She regarded the other woman with open suspicion.

“I see we have yet another traveler,” Kaylia noted. “I take it she’s the one we saw at Salmitaya’s camp?”

“You saw us escape?” Gewey asked, surprised.

“I think we need to slow down,” said Lee. He proceeded to tell Gewey and Dina the events of the past few days.

“I would have given anything to hear Sister Maybell cast out that witch,” Dina said once Lee had finished. “She was right not to return to Kaltinor, though. Salmitaya would have killed her.”

“Since we arrived, we’ve just been waiting,” Lee continued. “Kaylia hasn’t enjoyed it too much. I don’t think she’s ever stayed at an inn - too many humans for her taste.”

Kaylia looked at Dina. “You don’t seem surprised to discover that I’m an elf,” she said coolly. “I assume Gewey told you. It makes me wonder what else he’s told you.”

“There have been many surprises in the last few days,” Dina replied. “One more doesn’t shock me.”

“I told her nothing,” Gewey asserted. “Give me a little credit.”

“From the look of things, you have a story to tell as well,” Lee said.

“Yes,” Kaylia agreed, still eying Dina warily. “So it seems, and I would love hear it.”

Dina told her story up until the rescue of Gewey, at which point Gewey took over. Lee and Kaylia listened intently to every detail. When Gewey got to the part about Felsafell, Lee and

Kaylia both sat up straight, paying even closer attention. Gewey left out the details of what the old man had told him while sitting together on the porch, preferring to save that for a more private conversation with Lee. When he was finished, Lee got up, laughing.

“My boy,” he said. “You have had some adventure. Worthy of one of my tales.”

Kaylia wasn’t amused. Her eyes turned back to Dina. “I take it you intend to accompany us?”

“I intend to do what I set out to do,” Dina responded. “Nothing has changed. I will deliver Gewey to the temple as I was instructed.”

Abruptly, Lee’s tone became serious. “You may go where you wish,” he said. “But I have no intention of delivering Gewey into the hands of anyone unless I have a very good reason to do so. And so far, you’ve been rather vague as to who sent you.”

Dina lowered her head and took a deep breath. “I was sent by the High Lady of Valshara. I am a novice in the Order of Amon Dähl.”

Lee eyes widened. “That’s quite a claim. Do you intend to back it up?”

Dina reached inside her shirt and pulled out a thin silver chain with a small white medallion hanging on its end. Engraved on the medallion was a man in a hooded robe holding a dagger in one hand and a ring of laurels in the other.

“That could be a fake,” Lee said.

“The image could be faked,” Dina acknowledged, “but not the metal.”

Lee reached out and took the medallion in his hand. It was hot to the touch and burned his fingers, causing him to quickly withdraw in pain.

Dina smiled and held the medallion firmly in her hand. “Each of us is bonded to the Order by this symbol. No one can touch it unless they have received the blessing of Amon Dähl.”

Lee stared in wonder. “I thought your order was destroyed.”

“We haven’t survived for two thousand years because we’re fools,” Dina boasted. “The Beast of Angrääl tried to destroy us and many died, but we were able to escape with the Order intact.”

“How many are left?” Lee asked.

“Not many,” she answered sadly. “But we have never been dependant on numbers. When we get to Althetas, I’ll contact the

Order and they’ll take us to the temple. Once we get there, Gewey should be safe.”

“Althetas is four weeks on horseback,” said Kaylia. “Twice that, as we travel now. We should leave immediately and send Millet and Maybell somewhere safe.”

“I’m not abandoning them,” Lee shouted, his temper flaring.

“They’re known to our enemies, and I’ll not leave their safety to chance.”

Dina looked displeased. “You don’t understand,” she said. “Gewey must go with me, and me alone. I cannot bring anyone else.”

“My friends go with me or I don’t go at all,” Gewey stated with resolve. “That means all of them, and I don’t care if it takes us a year to get there.”

“Very well,” Dina said after a long moment. “You don’t leave me with much choice.”

“It’s settled then,” Gewey declared. “We leave as soon as Millet and Maybell arrive.” He touched Lee on the shoulder and whispered, “I need to speak to you in private.”

Lee nodded his head in agreement. “The boy and I must talk alone,” he said to the others. “Dina, I think your husband may feel more comfortable staying in my room tonight.”

Kaylia raised an eyebrow at Gewey, a slight smile on her face. “You told people you are married?”

“It was Dina’s idea,” Gewey muttered, feeling every bit as uncomfortable as he sounded.

Dina wore an amused grin. “It seemed like the thing to do at the time.”

“Well then,” Kaylia said. “We wouldn’t want people wondering why a husband and wife who came together didn’t stay together.”

“Good point,” Lee added, barely able to contain his amusement. “I’m sorry, Gewey. The life of a married man can be tough.”

“This is not funny,” Gewey growled.

“It’s not meant to be,” Lee replied. “Kaylia’s right, though. If you said you’re married, you have to keep up the ruse, at least until we’ve left here. Don’t worry, I have an extra blanket in my pack - assuming you’ll be sleeping on the floor, that is.”

Dina sauntered over to Gewey and slipped her arm around him.

“Yes, he will,” she teased.

Gewey turned bright red and pulled away from Dina. “That’s enough,” he protested, trying not to stutter. “Lee, I need to speak to you now.” He grabbed Lee’s arm and pulled him from the room.

Lee took Gewey to his room and locked the door.

“That was not funny,” Gewey hissed.

“It’s just one night,” Lee chuckled. “You’ve survived being kidnapped by agents of the Dark Knight; I’m sure you can survive one night alone in a room with a beautiful woman.”

“You mean to make me go through with this?” Gewey asked, incredulously.

“Amusing or not, Kaylia makes a good point. We don’t want to raise unwanted questions. Better for you to leave with people thinking that a young couple was just passing through. But that’s not what you wanted to talk to me about, is it?”

“No, it isn’t,” Gewey said. He proceeded to tell Lee about the details of their encounter with Felsafell, and what the old man had told him on the porch.

“He is a strange one,” Lee remarked.

“You’ve met him?”

“Many years ago,” Lee answered. “I had heard of a crazy old hermit who lived in the Spirit Hills. It was said that he could speak to the spirits and that they told him the future, so I sought him out. I must have wandered those hills for five days before I found him. Well, to be honest, he actually found me.”

“What did he tell you?”

“To get out of his hills and never come back,” Lee remembered. “Of course, he didn’t say it like that, but the message was the same. I approached him, but he vanished before I could get close. I tried to find him, but I ended up lost for days. He did leave behind some roast pork and bread for me though.”

Gewey laughed. “He gave us the same. But what do you make of his words to me?”

“I don’t know,” Lee admitted, frowning. “I need to think on it for a while.” He then slapped Gewey on the back, forcing a smile. “You shouldn’t worry about it for now. There’s a few hours before bed, so why don’t we join the others in the common room for a little entertainment?”

Gewey’s eyes brightened. “That sounds like a wonderful idea.”

“You should invite your wife to join us,” Lee quipped. “I’m sure she wouldn’t want her dear husband unattended.”

Gewey scowled. “I’ll see if Kaylia will come too.”

“Good luck,” said Lee. “I don’t think merry-making with a room full of humans is her cup of tea.”

As Lee predicted, Kaylia refused to join them, but Dina was more than happy to keep an eye on Gewey. They listened to the music and even joined in the dancing. Dina pulled Gewey onto the floor during one of more energetic tunes. Unfortunately for him, knowing how to dance was not one of the skills that came along with being a god. It was all he could do to keep from stepping on Dina’s feet, and he nearly fell over twice.

“One of your lessons is going to have to be how to dance with a woman,” Lee announced, doubling over with laughter.

Gewey was not amused. “I’m a farmer. When would I need to dance?” he said defensively.

“Your father was a farmer,” said Lee, “and he could dance very well. Let me show you.”

Lee walked over to Dina, who was laughing and talking with

Minnie. He extended his hand and Dina accepted, smiling as she bowed her head.

Gewey felt a tinge of jealousy as he watched Lee spin Dina around the room. When the song ended, Lee could see it in his eyes.

Lee put his hand on Gewey’s shoulder. “That’s why you should learn to dance, my boy.”

“I don’t know what you mean,” Gewey lied.

“Of course not,” he laughed.

They continued to make merry until the party started to wind down. Minnie was busy cleaning up, while her husband was helping those who had drunk too much wine to the door.

When they went upstairs, Lee gave Gewey a blanket and went to his own room. Gewey nervously followed Dina into their room and placed the blanket on the floor.

“Don’t worry,” Dina said reassuringly. “It’s no different to when we were in the Spirit Hills. Just get some sleep.”

Gewey gave her a tight smile and stretched out onto the floor. He knew she was right, but it felt like something had changed since then - at least in his mind. He wondered if it was the same for her, but he couldn’t build up the courage to ask. He closed his eyes and drifted off to sleep, wanting to sneak a look at her, but not daring to take the chance.

Chapter 16

It was two hours past midday when the covered wagon carrying Millet and Maybell pulled up in front of the inn. Millet was hunched over, looking very unhappy. Maybell was complaining about Millet’s driving, claiming that he was not fit to drive a plow horse, let alone a wagon or carriage. Even so, Millet helped her down from the wagon and opened the tavern door for her when they arrived at the Vine Run inn.

When they entered, Lee and Dina were talking casually at a table in the common room, while Gewey was sat in the corner receiving marital advice from Minnie. Lee saw them come in and motioned for Millet to join them. Gewey excused himself and hurried over to Millet, embracing him.

“It is good to see you too,” said Millet. “I see you’re unharmed.”

Gewey beamed at the sight of the man. “I’m glad you’re here,” he said. “So much has happened.” He led Millet over to the table where Lee and Dina waited. Maybell followed close behind.

“How was your journey?” asked Lee.

Millet scowled. “Interesting, My Lord,” he said delicately. “And long.”

“That’s an understatement,” Maybell huffed. Her eyes widened when she saw Dina. “Sister Celandine! I’m surprised to see you. You must be this mystery woman they spoke of.”

“Good to see you, Sister Maybell,” Dina said, bowing her head. “I am indeed the ‘mystery woman’.”

“I knew there was more to you than meets the eye,” Maybell remarked, “but I certainly didn’t expect this. Explain yourself.”

“I don’t think…” Millet began.

“Of course you don’t,” Maybell cut in. “I will hear the story.  There is no one here to spy on us.”

Indeed, the inn was empty with the exception of Minnie, who was well out of earshot and busy adding up the profits from the previous evening’s party. Lee nodded in agreement and began recounting the events of their travels. When his story was finished, Maybell began to chuckle softly.

“What’s so funny?” Lee asked.

“I thought my adventures were over,” she explained. “To think that an old woman like me gets to see the temple of Valshara. Is it true that the Knights of Amon Dähl are trained there?”

“It is,” Dina answered. “But this temple is not the original one. That was destroyed fifteen years ago by the Dark Knight. To my understanding, the current Temple of Valshara was once a monastery where members of the order went to retire. Only the elders knew its location, so we were able to keep it hidden. Even now, its location is only known to a few.”

“Even so,” Maybell said, “I’m excited to see it.”

“I really didn’t expect you to come that far with us,” said Lee.

“We’ll be passing by several temples where you would be much safer.”

“Nonsense,” she replied. “My years in this world are nearly done.  I would rather them spent making a difference. You may think me just a worthless old woman, but I am not without skills.”

“And what might those be?” Millet asked sourly.

Maybell shot Millet an angry glance. “For one, I know the laws and customs of every city and town from here to the abyss. For another, I have connections with temples everywhere and can gather information we will need.”

“Still, it’s a long journey,” Lee warned. “And conditions will be harsh.”

“I’m tougher than I look,” she countered. “I may have been locked away in a temple for many years, but I’m no stranger to hardship.”

Suddenly, her expression became desperate. “Please. Let me go with you. I need to go with you. I thought I would spend the rest of my days watching the decay of the temples. Now I have a chance to be useful again.”

Lee looked at Gewey and shrugged his shoulders. “I leave it up to you.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “I would be very happy if you accompanied us,” he declared.

Millet sighed loudly.

“You just mind your manners,” Maybell said to Millet. “Or I’ll teach you why novices fear my name in every temple from here to the northwestern steppes.”

Lee laughed loudly. “Millet my old friend, I think you may have finally met your match.”

“Indeed,” Millet grumbled.

“So, where to now?” Gewey asked.

“With such a large group, we might try to find a caravan headed west,” Lee suggested. “Delhammer is four days from here. It’s large enough for us to go unnoticed, and we might be able to hitch onto a caravan from there.”

Dina thought for a moment. “While we’re there, we should see what information might be found at the temples. Maybell, you can help there.”

“Won’t Salmitaya be expecting that? She might have sent word ahead,” Gewey noted.

“She has more pressing issues,” Maybell replied. “She may have been a High Priestess, but I have been in the Order since before she was born - certainly long enough to have my voice heard. If she were going to move against me, she would have done it in Kaltinor. Now that I’m out of her reach, she wouldn’t dare show her face in another temple.”

“Still, we should be cautious,” Lee advised. “Even if she can’t hinder us through the temples, she may have sent word to other agents of Angrääl.”

“I’ll be discreet,” Maybell assured him. “But that is something that can be discussed later. For now, I would like to clean up.”

Dina took Maybell to her room so that she could wash and change. This time, she did not complain about the lack of a proper bathtub.

Lee told Kaylia to gather her things, and had Gewey check the wagon.

It was nearly dark before they were all ready to go. Minnie scolded them for leaving at such a late hour and insisted that they eat before departing. She even packed each of them a meal for the road. Lee gave the woman five silvers, enough for them to have stayed for an entire week. Minnie thanked him and, despite Lee’s objections, gave him a case of their best wine.

“You seem like a man who can appreciate it,” she said as her husband loaded it into the wagon. “Most of the folks who pass through here wouldn’t know good wine from well water.”

Lee bowed graciously and climbed onto the back of the wagon.

Millet and Maybell took the front; should they run into any curious strangers, they would say that Millet was her younger brother and that they were headed west to resettle. Lee jokingly suggested that Gewey and Dina maintain the guise of a married couple, but Gewey fiercely refused.

They continued down the Old Road of Santismal through the night, stopping a few hours before dawn to make camp. Kaylia told Gewey it was time they continued with their lessons and took him into an area of tree-covered hills. By the end of the lesson he was able to find Kaylia in the shadows, and he even managed to avoid being found for more than five minutes. The lessons with the knife advanced to include more complicated tactics and maneuvers, which Gewey took to right away.

“You’ve improved,” Kaylia noted. “Soon you’ll be ready to start actual elven training.”

Gewey’s heart swelled with pride. “I practiced in the Spirit Hills.”

“Those hills are dangerous,” she warned. “As is the hermit who lives there.”

“He didn’t seem dangerous. A bit crazy maybe, but not dangerous.”

“He speaks to the spirits that live there,” she said. “And not all spirits are harmless. We elves have ventured there many times to speak to Felsafell and gain his knowledge, but we knew our peril.”

“What peril?”

“It is said Felsafell feels all that the spirits feel,” she answered. “Their joy, their fear, their anger, but mostly their loneliness. They yearn for the souls of man and elf to join them. Should you have stayed too long, they might have trapped you there forever.”

“Is that what happened to Felsafell?”

“No one really knows who or what he is. He’s very old though - some say older than the elves. Some say he’s really a spirit in human form. No one knows for sure, but what is known is that seeking his wisdom means risking being lost in the hills forever.”

Gewey shuddered at the thought that he had spent the night in the old man’s house, and eaten at his table.

“I wonder why he let me go,” Gewey said, almost inaudibly.

“I’ve never heard of anyone who has seen where he lives, save you. Whatever he had to tell you must have been important. But beware of his words. They aren’t always what they seem.”

Gewey nodded, thinking about what he had been told of his own death, and the death of a friend, hoping he had merely misinterpreted Felsafell’s words. “Believe me,” he said. “I hope I find more meanings than those I have at present.”

Kaylia took Gewey’s hands and looked into his eyes. “I know you value the council of the half-man,” she said sincerely. “You trust his judgment. But he is not all knowing, and cannot give you all the answers. I would help you if you let me. If you trust me with what you were told, I will help you decipher its meaning.”

Gewey thought for moment. “Yes, I would welcome it,” he said. “But not tonight. I’m too tired.”

Kaylia placed her hand on his cheek. “Of course,” she said softly. “When you’re ready, I will help if I can.”

Gewey felt more at ease when they returned to camp. For some reason, the thought of being able to confide in Kaylia made him feel as though a huge weight had been lifted from his shoulders. He noticed her watching him with a look of compassion as he lay down to sleep.

They only slept for a few hours before packing up camp and starting out again. Gewey was concerned that Maybell hadn’t rested enough, but she seemed full of energy and eager to get going.

The noon lesson with Lee was Gewey’s best showing thus far. He found himself using the moves he’d learned from Kaylia to slip through Lee’s grasp. On his third attempt, he sent Lee to the ground.

“Excellent!” Lee shouted enthusiastically. “Tomorrow we start teaching you the sword. I see that your lessons with the elf have done you good.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey. “Her lessons have been helpful.”

“I envy that you get to train with an elf. I’ve always wanted to learn their ways of combat and stealth.”

“I’m sure Kaylia would teach you, if you asked,” Gewey asserted. “It might be good if you spent some time with her.”

“I may do just that,” Lee acknowledged. “When we have time.” He looked thoughtfully at Gewey. “If you want to ask her about what Felsafell told you, you can.”

Gewey looked up at Lee, shocked. “Did she tell you about our conversation?”

“No,” Lee said, smiling. “But I noticed that she recognized his name when you told us about him, and I thought she might offer you her counsel. I would warn you to be careful though. It’s obvious she’s taken a keen interest in you. The only question is, what direction will that interest take?”

“What do you mean?”

“Nothing,” Lee answered, waving his hand dismissively. “Just be careful. She doesn’t appear to be the type that gives her affections lightly.”

“You don’t mean…” Gewey stammered. “You don’t think she…”

Lee burst out in laughter. “No,” he said. “But that would be a dilemma, considering the way you look at Dina.”

Gewey blushed. “I don’t know what you’re talking about,” he said, unable to look Lee in the eye.

Lee spotted a fallen tree and sat down. “Sit,” he said. “We should talk.”

Gewey sat next to Lee with his eyes fixed firmly on the ground.

“If things had been different, your father would be where I am now,” Lee explained. “But unfortunately, it’s left to me.”

Gewey was mortified. “If you’re about to have that talk with me, my father did have it…when I was ten.”

Lee shook his head, smiling. “Not that talk. You’re a young man now - a handsome one at that - and your body has far outpaced your maturity.” Gewey looked offended, but Lee raised his hand. “I don’t mean to say you’re immature. The entire village depended on you after you inherited the farm from your father, and you didn’t let them down even once. But dealing with women is much more difficult than running a farm. Your feelings for Dina are obvious. I’m sure she knows it, too.”

Gewey eyes shot wide.

“Don’t be embarrassed,” Lee said, putting his hand on Gewey’s shoulder. “I don’t think she takes it for anything more than boyish infatuation. But when you’re young, you never feel love just a little. It’s bigger and more powerful than any enemy you’ll face. You must understand something Gewey. You are a god bound to earth as a human, and you have a great task ahead of you. I would never tell you not to explore your feelings, but I would warn you of the dangers. If Dina doesn’t feel the same as you, the pain might be unbearable, and it could end up even worse if the feelings are mutual. All I ask is that you don’t push the issue. If things happen, so be it, but please take it slowly and speak to me when you don’t know what to do. Love for you will be a touchy thing. As a god, you can’t know where it will lead.” Lee chuckled to himself. “Even as a man, it’s like walking through the forest deaf and blind.”

“Have you ever loved?” Gewey asked.

Lee’s eyes suddenly became distant. “I told you that the Oracle said I would have to sacrifice everything,” he said. “I once had a wife and son.”

“What happened to them?”

“I left them behind,” Lee confessed. “My road would have put them in too much danger. I couldn’t have that.”

“Where are they now?”

“Safe in Hazrah,” Lee answered. “But it’s not something I enjoy talking about.”

“I’m sorry, I didn’t mean to…”

“It’s fine,” Lee assured him. “I made my choice. But I want you to promise to talk to me as things…progress.”

“I promise.”

Suddenly, Lee looked as if he had been struck by lightning.

“What is it?” Gewey asked impatiently.

“Bound to earth,” Lee mused. “You’re bound to earth.”

“You’re not making sense.”

“Felsafell said your strength was in the earth!” Lee said excitedly.  “I think I understand what he meant. You see, my father is Saraf, God of the Seas, so when I’m near the water I can listen to its heartbeat and gain strength. I have to sit and meditate to draw on this power, but maybe you can draw from it directly, as you fight.”

“How would I do that?” Gewey asked, puzzled.

“First you must learn to hear the earth. The sword can wait. Kaylia’s teaching you the knife. That will have to do for now. Tomorrow we will try to tap into your true power.”

That night, Kaylia seemed different during training. Gewey was able to find her in the shadow three out of four times, and he was able to avoid her for over twenty minutes. Finally, she told him the lesson was over and started back to camp.

“Wait,” Gewey said.

Kaylia stopped but didn’t turn around. “What is it?”

“You said you would help me to understand what Felsafell told me. I’m ready to tell you.”

“Perhaps you shouldn’t,” Kaylia advised.

“I don’t understand. Why not?”

“My judgment is compromised,” she replied. “I’m sorry.”

“Tell me what’s wrong,” Gewey pleaded. “Maybe I can help?”

Kaylia laughed softly. “It’s not something you would understand.”

“Is it because I’m so young?”

“Age is not something elves look at to determine ability,” she explained. “I’m old by human standards, but not much more than a child to my own people. The reason you wouldn’t understand is that you’re not an elf.”

“I could try. I might surprise you.”

“I think you might,” Kaylia agreed. “But I need to work this out my own. Don’t worry, I’ll be alright.”

That night, Kaylia slept far from the others. Gewey stopped wondering what was troubling her.  His thoughts wandered to what Lee had told him about elven feelings, but that only raised questions in his mind that made him laugh at himself. If Kaylia were human, he would take her words to mean something else; but she was right; he didn’t understand elves.

The next day, Kaylia sat in silence with her hood pulled far over her face as they rode in the wagon. Dina laughed merrily as Lee spun tales of his past adventures. Gewey loved Lee’s stories -especially the ones that included Gewey’s father - and he never tired of hearing them.

He tried to tell a few of his own, but every time Dina looked at him his tongue felt heavy and useless, and eventually he stopped trying.

“Kaylia,” Dina said, trying to make conversation. “Surely you have some adventures you could share to pass the time.”

Kaylia didn’t look up. “I have no desire to pass the time,” she said flatly.

Dina cleared her throat. “Okay, then. How’s your training going, Gewey?”

“You’d have to ask my teachers.”

“He needs to work harder,” Lee chimed in. “But I think he shows promise.”

“You should feel fortunate,” said Dina. “Not many people get to train with a man like Lee, let alone an elven warrior.”

“I’m no warrior,” Kaylia snapped. “There are no elven warriors.  You humans know nothing.”

“I’m sorry,” Dina said sincerely, reaching over to touch Kaylia’s knee. “I didn’t mean to offend you.”

Kaylia’s hand immediately shot out, grabbing Dina by the wrist. Her eyes fixed stonily on Dina’s. “Abomination,” she hissed. She reached down and drew her knife. Dina screamed and tried to climb over Lee to get away, but Kaylia was too fast. Before anyone could move, she had caught Dina and pulled her to the floor of the wagon, knife pressed to her throat.

“Abomination!” she repeated, louder than the first time.

Gewey was stunned. “Afisul Si Damon!” he shouted in desperation. The words spilled out of his mouth before he had even the slightest idea of what he was saying.

Kaylia stopped abruptly, her eyes wide. She stared at Gewey, utter amazement on her face. “How?” she cried. “How do you know these words?”

Without waiting for an answer, Kaylia leapt from the wagon and ran. Gewey tried to go after her, but she was out of sight before he could make it more than a few feet.

Millet and Maybell sat shocked, trying to piece together what had just happened. Lee reached down and helped Dina to her feet.

“What was that about?” he demanded. “Why did she attack you?”

Dina was shaking terribly. She tried to calm herself. “I was careless,” she said, “and Kaylia realized what I am.”

“And what is that?” Lee inquired.

“My father was a blacksmith from Baltria,” she told him quietly. “But my mother was an elf. That’s why she called me an abomination.”

The wagon fell silent. Everyone stared at Dina with a combination of wonder and confusion.

“How can that be?” Lee asked. “Such a thing is impossible.”

“No, not impossible. But as far as I know, I’m the first. And what I am puts me in danger from both worlds. I thought my human blood would mask my identity from Kaylia, but when her hand touched mine she could sense the elven blood in me.”

“But you look human,” Gewey remarked.

“Yes, I do,” she acknowledged. “But do you remember when you asked me how old I am?”

Gewey nodded.

“I’m thirty-eight years old,” she revealed. “But my elven blood makes me look like I’m barely out of my teens.”

“How did it happen?” Millet interjected. “With the hatred that exists between the races, it’s hard to imagine.”

“How does anything happen?” she replied. “My father came across my mother injured in the forest when he was out hunting. He told me that he knew he loved her from the moment he first saw her. She had been attacked by soldiers who’d heard of a large group of elves in the forest near to the city. But as it turned out, my mother was the only one. She had left her people on what my father described to me as a ‘soul quest’. She was attacked while she was meditating, so she didn’t hear them coming until they were already upon her. They left her for dead, and if my father hadn’t found her and cared for her, she certainly would have died.

“Once she had healed, she discovered that my father had moved her to a small village thirty miles north so he could care for her without raising suspicions. He’d sold everything he possessed to have enough money to keep her alive and away from other humans. Soon, she realized that she loved him as well.”

“How were they able to stay together?” Millet asked. “Eventually, they would have been discovered.”

“They were,” Dina said sadly. “My father did everything he could to keep her safe; at one point he moved to an even more secluded area so that they wouldn’t be found.”

“But they were found,” said Lee. “Weren’t they?”

“Yes,” said Dina. “But it was the elves that found them. I was only three when it happened. I remember my father embracing my mother and begging her to come with us, but she knew that was impossible. The elves didn’t know about me. They only knew that my mother loved a human. She knew they would kill me if they found out there was a child, so she sent my father and me away. I never saw her again.”

“I don’t understand why they would want you dead,” said Gewey. “You’re innocent in all this.”

“Elves see themselves as separate from humanity in every way you can imagine,” Dina explained. “The idea of a half elf, half human child shatters that belief. Frankly, it would be just as bad for me if humans found out. Thankfully, they have no way of knowing unless they discover my age or I tell them directly, as I’ve just told you.”

“What now, My Lord?” Millet asked.

“I’ll tell you what now,” Maybell cut in. “Someone needs to talk some sense into that elf. I don’t care what you are, Celandine. You’re a part of what’s going on here, and a good person to boot. If Kaylia can’t see that, then to blazes with her.”

Dina smiled appreciatively. “Thank you,” she said. “But I don’t see what could help.”

“You said something,” Lee said to Gewey. “Something that made her stop. What was it?”

“I don’t know,” Gewey answered. “It just came out. I have no idea where it came from.”

“You should go look for her then,” Lee suggested. “Perhaps she’ll listen to you.”

Gewey nodded and got out of the wagon. He hoped finding her in the daytime would be easier than it was at night. As it turned out, he didn’t have to look very hard at all. He found her a few hundred yards off the road, kneeling next to a tiny stream. Her eyes were closed and her knife was buried in the ground beside her.

“Kaylia,” Gewey said softly. “Are you alright?”

Kaylia didn’t move.

“Kaylia,” he repeated.

Still, she didn’t move.

Gewey sat on the grass behind her, not knowing what to do next. Twenty minutes passed before Kaylia spoke.

“Where did you learn those words?” she whispered.

“I don’t know,” he replied. “They just came out. What do they mean?”

“It’s a declaration. Literally translated, it means my spirit flies to yours.”

Gewey was taken aback. “I wasn’t trying to declare anything,” he said quickly. “I just wanted to stop you from killing Dina.”

“What you said to me is rare and sacred,” she said, continuing as though she hadn’t heard him. “It’s something that few elves have spoken since the Great War.”

“What do you mean by a declaration? Please, tell me what’s going on.”

Kaylia turned to Gewey and opened her eyes. “Do you love me?” she asked.

“I…” Gewey didn’t know what to say.

“If not, then you should never have spoken those words.”

“I don’t understand,” said Gewey. “I really don’t.”

“Then understand this,” she said. “The language you spoke is known only to the elves. It is the language of our ancestors, and even among my people, only a few know it entirely. What you said can only be spoken to someone that you love, and for only one reason.”

“What reason?” he asked nervously.

“It means that you wish to be joined with me.”

“Joined?” Gewey exclaimed. “You mean…”

“Yes,” she said. “That is exactly what I mean.”

“You can’t think I was asking you that, do you?”

“What then?” she snapped. “Why did you say it?”

“I don’t know,” he replied hastily. “I didn’t know what it meant. It just came out.”

“But it came from somewhere,” she insisted. “And it cannot be ignored.”

“I take it back then. Just pretend I didn’t say it.”

Anger flashed across Kaylia’s face. “Because you are not an elf, I will pretend you did not make that offer. Once you say the words of joining, they cannot be unsaid.”

“What do we do now?” he asked.

“I either accept you as my mate, or refuse.”

Gewey laughed with relief. “That’s easy then. Just refuse.”

“If I do, then I must leave you, never to be in your sight again. I am not prepared to do that just yet.”

“You mean we either get married or you have to leave? That’s ridiculous.”

“I’m sorry you think so,” Kaylia lamented. “But to my people it is very serious. However, I have one year to consider it. If at the end of that time I decide you are not a worthy mate, then I shall refuse.”

“And what happens in the mean time?” he asked, afraid to hear the answer.

“In the mean time, nothing. But be warned; elves are protective of their suitors. Careful you don’t let your eyes stray too far.”

Gewey immediately thought of Dina. “What do you intend to do about Celandine?” he asked anxiously.

Kaylia thought for a long moment. “It appears I can do nothing,” she said finally. “Your words have bound me. If you wish her unharmed, I will accept it.”

“Thank you,” Gewey said, relieved.

Kaylia smiled. “Send her to me. She and I should talk. Don’t worry, I won’t harm her.”

Gewey nodded and returned to the wagon.

“What happened?” asked Lee. “Did you find her?”

“She wants to speak to Dina alone,” Gewey said.

Dina looked worried.

“She swears she won’t attack you again,” he assured her.

Reluctantly, Dina went to join Kaylia.

“What happened?” Lee asked. “What did she say to you?”

“I don’t want to talk about it,” Gewey replied. “Not yet, at least.”

An hour later, Kaylia and Dina came walking back to the wagon.

“Kaylia has agreed to teach me about my elven heritage,” Dina said as they climbed in.

Kaylia nodded in affirmation.

“And that’s it?” Millet pressed. “No more attempts to kill her?”

“That depends,” Kaylia said.

“On what?” Lee asked.

Kaylia did not respond. She simply smiled a knowing smile as the wagon continued down the road.

Chapter 17

Gewey spent the day trying to avoid conversation with the others. Kaylia was sitting next to Dina, whispering in her ear. When Lee asked what they were talking about, Kaylia told him to mind his own business. Gewey was not looking forward to the midday lesson. He knew Lee would press him about what had happened with Kaylia. The fact was, he wasn’t quite sure himself. When the time came, Gewey followed Lee to a quiet spot off the road.

“Sit,” Lee instructed.

Gewey sat down on the grass and crossed his legs.

“Close your eyes and listen to the sound of the earth,” Lee continued. “Not the way you hear the forest. Stretch out with your thoughts and feel its rhythm, its heartbeat. Let it flow into you and give you strength.”

Gewey did as he was told. At first, he felt nothing. Then, like a sound heard from a great distance, it was there, pulsing steadily. The more he listened, the nearer it came, until it beat in his mind like a great drum. Beads of sweat formed on his forehead as the beat grew louder.

“You must let it in,” Lee urged him. “Let it pass into you.”

But Gewey couldn’t. The beat pounded against him until he thought it would tear him to ribbons. He let out a scream and collapsed.

When he came to, Lee was standing over him with a concerned look on his face. He put a water skin to Gewey’s mouth and poured. Gewey tried to drink, but he began to cough and splutter as the water stung his swollen throat.

“Easy, Gewey,” Lee soothed him. “You’ll be fine.”

“What happened?” asked Gewey, carefully trying to sit up. Lee put his hand on Gewey’s back and steadied him. “You’re much more powerful than I thought. I had you do too much, too soon. From now on, we take it slow.”

“No,” Gewey insisted. “We try again. Taking it slow won’t defeat the Dark Knight.”

“Neither will getting yourself killed,” Lee countered. “The amount of power you unleashed could have destroyed you. Look around.”

Gewey surveyed the area and saw that large sections of the ground had been completely torn apart.

“You see,” Lee said. “You must learn to control this power, otherwise, there’s no telling how much damage you could do to yourself and those around you.”

Gewey nodded slowly. “I see what you mean.”

“That’s enough for today,” said Lee, lifting Gewey to his feet.

“Now, if you wouldn’t mind, what in blazes happened between you and that elf?”

“Lee, I really don’t think...”

“Listen to me, and listen to me well,” said Lee, cutting him off.  “If it doesn’t affect what we have to do, then fine, keep it to yourself.  But you need to remember that I have more than just you to worry about. If there’s anything that could possibly jeopardize any of us, I need to know about it.”

Gewey sat back down on the grass and thought for a moment.

“I’m not sure if it will affect us. At least, not all of us. And maybe not for a while.”

Lee sat next him. “You can trust me Gewey. Whatever it is, I’ll understand.”

Gewey looked at Lee, then told him what had happened with Kaylia. When Gewey finished, Lee sat there with his mouth open for a minute, not knowing what to say.

“Now do you see why I didn’t want to talk about it?” Gewey asked, troubled.

“I do indeed,” Lee finally managed to say. “Do you intend to marry her?”

“Don’t be ridiculous. I’m not even of age, and besides, she’s an elf.”

“Yes,” said Lee. “And you’re a god. And it doesn’t appear that she cares if you’re of age or not. As I understand it, she is barely of age herself in the way elves measure years.” He shook his head. “I told you to be careful.”

“How was I supposed to know?” Gewey cried. “The words just came out. I didn’t know what they meant.”

“That was interesting,” Lee said pensively. “There must be some reason for this.”

“That’s what she said, too.” Gewey noted.

“I really don’t know what to tell you,” Lee said, laughing. “You certainly do get yourself into some tight spots. I suggest you try not to let your eyes wander to Dina too often. Heaven knows what kind of trouble that could cause.”

Gewey wanted to deny it, but he knew his attraction to Dina often caused his eyes to wander. “I’ll try,” he said.

“Two beautiful women,” Lee remarked. “I suppose there are worse things to happen to a young man. Then again…perhaps not.”

Lee hopped to his feet and pulled Gewey up. “Maybe your mother was Ayliazarah, Goddess of Love,” he quipped, slapping Gewey on the back.

Gewey was not amused.

They headed back to the wagon and continued on their way. Kaylia had her hood pulled back, allowing Gewey to look at her closely. There was no doubt that she was beautiful, but he had never imagined a romantic relationship could be possible with an elf. But then, of course, he wasn’t really a human. His head began to swim, so he decided to try to take a nap. At least if I’m asleep, I’ll escape for a bit, he thought.

He woke just as they were about to stop and make camp. Millet and Maybell were arguing about where the best spot would be. Lee, Kaylia, and Dina were all looking at him, trying not to laugh.

“What?” Gewey asked, trying to shake off the cobwebs in his head.

“The things you say,” said Dina. “Enough to make a lady blush.”

“What do mean?” Gewey asked. “What did I say?”

“More interesting,” said Kaylia, “is who were you talking to in your dreams?”

“I don’t know,” he said, flustered. “I was bloody dreaming. Can’t I dream in peace?”

“Don’t let them tease you,” laughed Lee. “They’re just having a bit of fun.”

Gewey rubbed his eyes. “Enough then,” he said irritably. “I’m not in the mood.” He was nervous about the lesson with Kaylia. He wasn’t sure how to talk to her any more. He didn’t know a thing about elves, and the thought of saying the wrong thing unnerved him. When the time came, however, Kaylia acted as if nothing had happened.

“Lee has told me you will not be learning the sword for a while,” she said. “So we need to step up your knife training. It’s not as brutish, but every bit as deadly.”

“Do elves ever use a sword?” Gewey asked.

“Sometimes,” she answered. “But it’s not something we prefer. The sword can be necessary in a full-on battle, but in the type of fighting we’re likely to encounter, I think you’ll find it very advantageous to have skill with a knife.”

Gewey was grateful that the conversation didn’t stray from the lesson on to more uncomfortable subjects. Kaylia pushed him hard throughout, showing him ways to keep an opponent blind and off-balance. He found it was very much like the way he had learned to hide in shadows.

When Kaylia attacked, she was never directly in front of an opponent, nor did she press an advantage.

“The sword is a direct assault,” she shouted to him in between strikes.  “Powerful, but slow and deliberate. The knife, on the other hand...”

She paused, deftly tossing her weapon from hand-to-hand, “The knife is an ambush!” Suddenly she was on him, striking quickly and mercilessly from nearly every conceivable angle. For an hour he tried to imitate her movements. He watched her body twist into seemingly impossible positions that he simply could not match.

“You must learn to be more flexible,” she said. “You must see as your opponent sees, move where he cannot reach, then strike where he cannot defend. It is no different to our other exercises, only that you are hiding in plain sight.”

“I think I understand,” he said. “I’ll do better next time.”

“You did well this time,” she replied.

Gewey raised an eyebrow. “A compliment?”

“The nature of our relationship requires that I be completely honest with you,” she explained. “As a teacher, I do not give praise easily, even when warranted. But as a suitor, you will receive my honesty in all things. I suggest you do not abuse that privilege.”

Gewey almost winced at the word ‘suitor.’ “Thank you,” he managed. “I won’t.”

When they returned to camp, Lee was sitting next to the fire talking with the others. A box wrapped in cloth was at his feet - the same one Gewey remembered Millet handing to him the night they had left Sharpstone.

“What’s in the box?” Gewey asked as they approached.

“I was hoping Kaylia might help me with that,” answered Lee.

Kaylia and Gewey sat by the fire as Lee unwrapped the box. It was made from dark, polished wood and had strange lettering carved on the lid.

“Do you recognize the language?” Lee asked Kaylia.

“Yes,” she said. “It’s the ancient language of my ancestors.”

“Can you read it?” he asked.

“I can try,” she said. “But I’m sorry to say I know very little. Only a few elven scholars know it well enough to read it fluently.”

Lee handed her the box. She looked at it intently for several minutes.

“The first line isn’t difficult,” she said. “It simply reads, ‘Unto the creator I sing’. That’s a common phrase used in many of our ceremonies. The second line is a bit more difficult. I think it says, ‘The time will come to receive your gifts’, but I may be wrong. The third line...and again, I’m not sure...seems to say, ‘This book I keep until the end of time.’”

“That’s it?” Lee asked, sounding disappointed. “Nothing more?”

“Like I said, I may be wrong,” Kaylia told him. “But I believe I’m close.”

“What is it, exactly?” asked Gewey.

“I don’t know,” Lee admitted. “I’ve never been able to open it.”

“What do you mean?” Gewey asked. “Just take a bloody axe and break it.”

Lee laughed. “I actually tried that once in a moment of frustration.  But as you can see, it didn’t even make a scratch. I tried for years to discover what it is, but I haven’t found anything written describing such an object.”

“I know what it is,” Maybell interjected.

“You do?” Kaylia and Lee asked simultaneously.

“Indeed I do,” said Maybell with a nod. “And you were close on the translation, elf.”

“I had no idea you could read ancient elfish,” Kaylia said, amused.

“I can’t,” she answered. “But I know that phrase well enough. And if I’m right, I know what’s inside that box.”

“Well, tell us then.” Lee said impatiently.

Maybell gave Lee a withering look, then continued. “It should say: ‘Unto the creator I sing, His gift to me I humbly receive. The end of days I fear not, for his book shall guide me.’”

“What does it mean?” asked Lee.

“It refers to a prophecy I first heard about when I was studying as a novice in the Great Library of Halmanteris,” she explained.

“Do you know the whole thing?” Lee asked.

“No,” she answered. “But I know someone who might. She’s a Sister living in the Temple of Ayliazarah in Gristol. I’ve known her for many years.  She is without a doubt the most learned Sister in the Order. It’s on our way to Althetas. Perhaps we should stop on the way?”

“We might,” said Lee. “Can you tell me anything about what’s inside the box?”

“I can only guess,” she said. “I think it might contain the Book of Souls. It is said that it was written at the time of creation and contains all the secrets of the gods.”

Kaylia’s eyes grew wide. “It couldn’t be.”

“Why not?” Lee asked. “What do you know about it?”

“The Book of Souls was kept by the elves until the time of the Great War,” she explained. “It was thought to have been lost forever.  If that is the book, then it rightfully belongs to the elves.”

“If that is the book, then it rightly belongs to everyone,” Maybell corrected her. “But you’re right; it was said that the elves guarded it for centuries. But let’s not jump to conclusions. We don’t even yet know if it is actually the book that’s in there.”

“Good point,” Millet agreed. “And being that we don’t know how to open it, this discussion is pointless.”

“Where did you get it?” asked Maybell.

“It was among Lord Dauvis’s possessions,” Lee replied. “I’ve always thought it was something important, but I could never figure what. Where he acquired it, I don’t know.”

“Lord Dauvis?” Maybell asked. “Of Hazrah? Then you must be Lee Nal’Thain. I’ve heard of you. You inherited his property and title when he died.”

Lee nodded. “I keep that name secret. I imagine news of my inheritance is well known throughout the temples, but I would ask that you keep this to yourself.”

“The death of Lord Dauvis was spoken of at the time,” Maybell acknowledged. “As was his successor. A lord of such wealth and influence is always of interest to us.  But now I have a more important question: Why do a Lord of Hazrah and an elf take so much care to keep the true identity of a farm boy a secret?  Not to mention the training you give to him. Dina here doesn’t seem to know much, but perhaps you could tell me.”

“These are things you’re better off not knowing,” said Lee.

“You think I might betray you?” she responded, sounding offended. “I know enough to do that already, if I so choose. Face the facts: I will either work it out on my own eventually, or I’ll learn the truth when we get to Valshara.”

“She’s right,” Gewey said. “Besides, I don’t want people risking their lives without knowing why.”

“Boy,” Lee snapped. “You need to listen to me and keep your mouth shut.”

Gewey looked at Kaylia. “What do you think?”

Kaylia took a deep breath. “I would keep this secret for as long as possible,” she said. “But you’re right; people should know why they risk their lives. And I think sister Maybell would figure it out on her own eventually.” Kaylia then looked at Dina. “But, there are two people here who know nothing. Would they both keep your secret?”

“If you would share it,” Dina affirmed, “I will keep it, even from my own order. Though I suspect what you have to say is the very reason I’m taking you to them in the first place.”

“If you need an oath from me,” Maybell said, “the best one I can give is my word. I will not betray you, and I will keep your secret with me until death.”

Gewey looked around the fire. All eyes were on him. “Lee, if I reveal myself, then I reveal you as well.”

“That doesn’t matter much,” said Lee. “I’m not the important one. Besides, the world has seen many of my kind, so it would be no great shock to see another.” He stared into the fire. “Do as you will.”

Gewey took a breath, then told them the story from beginning to end. When he was finished, Maybell and Dina were staring at him in amazement.

“Is this true?” Maybell whispered. “You are a god walking the earth?”

“I am,” said Gewey. “But trust me, I don’t feel like one. Until Lee proved it to me, I had no idea. It still doesn’t seem real sometimes.”

“Do you remember being in heaven?” asked Dina.

“I don’t know that I was ever in heaven,” he replied. “For all I know, I was born in this world. I have no memory beyond my childhood.”

The camp was quiet for a long time. Dina and Maybell just sat there staring at Gewey.

“Well now,” said Maybell, breaking the silence. “This is exciting.  I would say this calls for some of that wine we have in the wagon.”

She went over, retrieved one of the bottles, and passed it around.

“Do you know who your real mother and father are?” Dina asked, swallowing a mouthful of wine.

“No,” said Gewey. “Like I said, I didn’t even know I was a god until just recently. Whoever they are, they left me no clues.”

“I think it’s important that we find out what’s inside that box,” Maybell said to Lee. “If it is the Book of Souls, then it could hold the key to why the boy is here.”

“I agree,” said Kaylia. “But the book is said to be written in ancient elfish. Even if we open it, we have no way to read it.”

Lee looked thoughtfully at the box. “I do think we should open it and see what it contains, but it’s more important to get Gewey to a safe place where he can train. We can stop and see this woman in Gristol, but we can’t stay for long. If she can’t help, the book will have to wait.”

“I disagree,” Kaylia contended. “If that is the Book of Souls, then it’s the key to far more than Gewey’s power - it’s the key to victory. If we can open it and understand it, this will give us the knowledge we need to defeat the Dark Knight. Gewey may not even need to be put in danger at all.”

“What are you saying?” Lee asked.

“I’m saying that Gewey may not have to fight,” she answered.  “The book may show us another way.”

“This is all well and good,” said Lee. “But like you said, who can read it?”

“The elves can,” Gewey said suddenly, his eyes turning to Kaylia. “You’re thinking about taking it to your people, aren’t you?”

Kaylia smiled sweetly at Gewey and nodded. “That’s right.”

“You can’t,” Gewey protested. “You’ve already said that they’ll kill you.”

“I’ll face their judgment eventually,” she replied. “If it means victory without bloodshed, I’ll gladly take the risk.”

“I’m sorry,” Lee cut in. “But I’m not sending it to the elves. At least, not yet. First we’ll try Gristol and see if the box can be opened. It may not be the Book of Souls at all. For all we know, it could be a recipe for lamb stew. No, it stays with me for now.”

Gewey smiled with satisfaction, but Kaylia did not look pleased.

“Kaylia,” said Dina. “I would like hear more about the elves before I sleep.”

“Of course,” she replied, and led her away, out of earshot. When the wine was gone, they began settling into their blankets. For a while, Gewey lay watching Kaylia as she shared her elven heritage with Dina. Then, just as he felt himself beginning to drift off, they returned to the fire and lay down. He could feel the eyes of both women on him, so he rolled over onto his side to face away from them.

“You haven’t been taking your jawas tea,” Kaylia said quietly.

Gewey had not heard her approach and nearly rolled off his blanket in surprise. He took the flask from her hands and swallowed a large mouthful. He felt the familiar sensation of relaxation flowing through his limbs.

“Can I ask a favor of you?”

“Of course,” answered Gewey.

“Would you allow me to touch your mind? The jawas should make it easy, if you allow it.”

“Why?” Gewey asked, concerned.

“I want to see who you really are,” she said. “And you will see me. If you refuse, I will understand.”

“I…I’m not sure. How would you do it?”

“It’s not difficult,” Kaylia assured him. “When you are falling asleep, you will feel my mind touching yours. When you do,  just let me in.”

“What will happen?” he asked, nervous and unsure.

“That depends,” she replied gently. “Perhaps nothing. Perhaps everything. There’s really no way to know.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “I guess it would be alright.”

Kaylia nodded and returned to her blanket. Gewey allowed the jawas to take over, and began to drift off.

It was then that he felt Kaylia’s presence, like a gentle knock on the door to his mind. Instead of trying to keep it shut, as Lee had taught him, he allowed it to open. He felt a warm breeze enter and wrap itself around him. It was as if kindness itself had become tangible.

“I’m here.” It was Kaylia, but her voice sounded distant. “Can you see me?”

“Where are you?” asked Gewey. All he could see was a deep blue mist swirling everywhere. “I can’t see you.”

“Don’t look with your eyes,” she advised. Her voice was like a thousand tiny bells. “Just imagine what you want to see and then make it so.”

Gewey imagined the mist lifting. It cleared slowly, revealing a lush forest. He could smell the earth and trees around him. Standing next to a tall pine was Kaylia, dressed in a flowing white dress. Her auburn hair fell loosely down her back, and her skin glistened like the night sky.

“Can you see me now?” she asked, smiling.

He was completely awed by her stunning beauty. “Yes,” he answered. “You look…different.”

Kaylia’s laughter sounded almost childlike. “Here, we look as we are. I see you tall and straight, dressed in gold robes.”

Gewey tried to look at himself, but he appeared out of focus.

“Why can’t I see myself?”

Kaylia walked lightly across the forest floor until she was less than a foot in front of him.

“It takes time to learn to see yourself. But that’s not why we’re here. Come with me.” She took his hand. “Let me show you things you never dreamed of.”

“Where are we going?” he asked as he let himself be led away.

“Inside your mind,” she answered. “And inside mine. It’s doubtful you’ll remember what you’ve seen when you wake - at least, not until you’ve been properly trained. But the impressions will last.”

Gewey felt a tinge of disappointment. “Will you tell me about it tomorrow?”

“No, not unless I feel you need to know. But don’t worry, I swear I won’t force you to reveal anything you don’t want to.”

The last thing Gewey remembered was a sensation of flying, with Kaylia’s hand locked firmly in his. When he woke the next morning, Kaylia was still sleeping nearby.

There was a sweet smile on her face.

Chapter 18

Gewey was at first afraid that his experience with Kaylia would make things even more awkward than they already were, but he soon found the opposite to be true. For some reason, conversation with her the next day was much easier. He even told her some stories about his life back in Sharpstone. Dina was quiet, but her eyes kept wandering to Gewey. He pretended not to notice, but it was hard to ignore her.

He hoped Kaylia was unaware of Dina’s gaze, but he held little hope that anything would escape the elf’s attention. By the time they reached Delhammer, Gewey was quite ready for a change of scenery.

The city wasn’t as big as Kaltinor, but at least the gates, though guarded, were open. Millet stopped and asked one of the guards about the quality and location of the inns. The man was more than happy to help once he had been given a copper.

The streets were busy, but much cleaner than those in Kaltinor. It seemed that commerce had not been affected by hard times, and the people were cheerful and smiled as they passed by.

The inn they found was decent. The common room was filled with patrons enjoying the antics of a juggler and magician, something Gewey had never seen before. Lee paid for the rooms while Millet stabled the horses. Gewey shared a room with Lee, while Dina and Kaylia shared another. Millet and Maybell each got a room of their own, though both of them protested, arguing that they were perfectly willing to share, and even sleep on the floor if necessary.

Once they were settled, Maybell left in search of the temple district, insisting that Dina accompany her. Millet and Lee went looking for a caravan headed west. Gewey persuaded Kaylia to join him in the common room and watch the acrobat who, as it turned out, also played the lute and sang. Kaylia was uneasy at first, but she soon realized that no one was paying her any attention. As she grew more comfortable, she even laughed at some of the more silly songs.

Lee and Millet were the first to return. They joined them at the table. “I see your aversion to being seen in public has lessened,” Millet said cheerfully.

“I didn’t want Gewey to be left unprotected,” she answered unenthusiastically.  “And luckily, these people don’t seem so interested in the comings and goings of others. A hooded woman doesn’t seem so out of place here.”

“I think you’ll find that to be more and more the case, the further west we go,” Millet replied.

“Did you find a caravan?” asked Gewey, still watching the entertainment with glee.

“We did,” Lee confirmed “It doesn’t depart for two days.  Still, I think it’s the best way to travel unnoticed.”

“I think I could use a break anyway,” Gewey noted. “This seems like a fun place.”

“We can’t be reckless,” Lee said sternly. “And we can’t afford to expose ourselves too much.”

“If the entertainment here is as good at night as it is at midday, then I think I’ll be happy not leaving the inn,” said Gewey.

The acrobat was juggling six apples, taking a bite from each one as it passed, before making them disappear.

Seeing Gewey in such high spirits, Millet couldn’t help but smile affectionately. “I think the lad does need a bit of fun in his life right now, My Lord. Who knows when he’ll get another chance, given what the future may hold?”

Lee sighed. “You’re right, of course. I forget sometimes that he’s only seventeen.”

“He’s sitting right here,” Gewey said, waving his hand in front of Lee’s face. “And I just want to enjoy myself while we wait. Don’t you?”

“Good point,” said Lee, slamming his hands on the table. “I think we could all do with a bit of fun. Wait here.”

Lee got up and went to the bar. Gewey saw the barman nod enthusiastically as Lee whispered into his ear.

“What did you do?” asked Gewey when Lee returned.

“You’ll see tonight,” Lee said with a sly grin.

Kaylia shook her head, unimpressed. “I think I’ll be staying in my room tonight.”

“Not a chance,” Lee said, pulling out a red scarf from his pocket.

“This, my dear, is traditional attire in this region, and it should cover up your more…obvious attributes. Besides, Gewey needs looking after, and it seems like you’ve volunteered for the job.”

“Mind your tongue,” Kaylia fumed.

“I didn’t think you could blush,” Lee teased, paying no mind to Kaylia’s anger. “I guess I was wrong.”

Just then, Maybell and Dina returned.

“How are things at the temples?” asked Lee.

“Better than I expected,” Maybell replied. “I spoke to the High Priestesses at the temples of Gerath and Ayliazarah. They’ve been suspicious of Salmitaya for some time. Apparently the witch wasn’t as careful as she thought.”

“So why didn’t they move against her?” Lee inquired.

“It’s not as easy as you think to oust a High Priestess,” she answered. “Even a corrupt one. Besides, Salmitaya was well protected within Kaltinor - and still is, from what I’ve learned. We have no soldiers to simply march in and remove her. But I am pleased to say that if she is caught outside the city walls, she will spend the rest of her life in a temple prison.”

“What else did you find out?” Lee asked.

“Not much,” she admitted. “At least, nothing useful.”

Lee looked concerned. “I had hoped we could get an idea of what we might run into as we travel further west.”

“Communication between the temples has become spotty at best,” added Dina. “I spoke to a few of the Sisters, and from what they told me, suspicion between the temples has become a plague. They hear the rumors about the growing strength in the north, and even claim there are agents of Angrääl living openly in some cities, gathering followers.”

Lee scratched his chin. “I want you to go to the other temples tomorrow and see if you can find out anything else. For now, we should all keep our eyes and ears open.” Everyone nodded in agreement.

“But now, my friends, Millet and I have an errand to run and must leave you,” Lee said. “Be washed by sundown, Gewey; I have a surprise for you.”

Gewey looked confused as he watched Millet and Lee leave the inn. “A surprise? What could he possibly be up to?” he wondered aloud.

“With that one, who knows,” Maybell replied. “But if you don’t mind, I haven’t seen an acrobat in years.”

They all watched until the acrobat had finished, then retired to their rooms to wash and get ready for supper. The smell from the kitchen promised roast lamb and fresh bread. Gewey’s mouth watered at the thought.

Lee entered the room just as Gewey had finished bathing. He was carrying a bundle tied with twine. “Here,” Lee said, tossing him the bundle.

Gewey opened it. Inside were a set of new clothes and a pair of fine leather boots. The long tunic was gold silk with silver embroidery, and the pants were of the same design. A polished black leather belt completed the outfit. Gewey stared, not knowing what to say.

“Well?” Lee asked happily. “Are you going to try them on or not?”

“I don’t get it. Why did you give me this?”

“To wear at your coming of age celebration,” he said matter-of-factly.

“My what?” Gewey cried. “I’m only seventeen.”

“True,” Lee replied, smiling. “But the way I see it, the age of a god should be counted differently. Besides, who knows if you’ll have the chance to celebrate a real coming of age party?”

“True,” Gewey acknowledged, holding up the clothes in front of him. “We might be dead by then.”

Lee laughed heartily. “Not what I had in mind, but a good point,” he admitted. “Now get dressed. I’m going to Millet’s room to get ready. I’ll send him for you when it’s time.”

An hour later, Millet showed up at Gewey’s door dressed in fine blue linens, looking very much a city dweller. His face beamed with delight when he saw Gewey in his new finery.

“Now that’s proper dress,” Millet remarked. “You look very much the young lord.”

Gewey felt awkward. He had never worn anything fancier than festival robes before. He couldn’t stop pulling and tugging at the long tunic, and the heeled boots made him feel as if he would tip forward at any moment.

“You’ll get used to it,” Millet laughed. “One day, I suspect you may dress like this all the time.”

That idea didn’t please Gewey. He felt far more comfortable in his own clothes - the clothes of a farmer. He smiled anyway, and tried to stop fidgeting.

When Gewey entered the common room, everyone smiled cheerfully and clapped their hands with approval at the sight of him.  He saw that the others were dressed in fine attire as well. Lee was decked out in a bright red suit with gold buttons. Dina and Maybell both wore emerald green dresses with matching scarves wrapped tightly around their heads. Their hair, adorned with tiny white flowers, fell loosely from underneath the scarves. Dina’s eyes were painted, giving them an elfish quality that made Kaylia appear less obvious. Kaylia wore a similar dress, but hers was light blue and tied at the waist with a deep blue sash.

Minstrels were just arriving and tuning their instruments in the corner. The dozen or so patrons looked on, whispering, with smiles still on their faces.

“Now that’s more like it,” said Lee, as he threw his arm around Gewey’s shoulder and led him to the table. “First we feast, then we celebrate.” He jumped up on a chair and addressed the entire room. “You are all welcome to join us. Let everyone celebrate and be merry.” This was met with enthusiastic cheers and applause.

By the time the meal was served, the minstrels were already playing. The crowd in the common room swelled as word of the celebration got out. Before long, more than fifty people were gathered in the hall, all laughing and feasting.

“Not bad for a last minute arrangement,” Lee said as he surveyed the room. “Even if I do say so myself.”

“It’s wonderful,” Gewey agreed. “Thank you.”

“Not exactly discreet, My Lord,” Millet pointed out.

“You’re right about that,” Lee replied. “But sometimes the right thing isn’t necessarily the smart thing.”

Millet smiled. “Quite right, My Lord.” Lee smiled at Gewey and hopped up on his chair.

“Ladies and gentlemen,” he shouted above the crowd. He had to repeat this several times before everyone settled down and paid attention. “Tonight we celebrate the coming of age of a young man who I have come know and love. Through adversity and hardship he has shown himself to be a man of honor and respect, and is most deserving of our admiration.”

Voices yelling “Here, here!” and the beating of mugs on tables sounded throughout the room.

“In the years I’ve known him, I have never seen him falter or turn a blind eye to someone in need. I consider it a privilege to be here with him today, and to be part of this celebration.” Lee looked down at Gewey, his eyes showing a touch of sadness. “I only wish his father were here today to see him. He would have been so proud of the man I see before me. I look at you, and I see him. His bravery and loyalty live on.”

Gewey felt a lump in his throat and choked back his tears.

“So, without further ado,” Lee continued, “I present to you, Gewey Stedding!”

The crowd erupted in cheers and yells. The stomping of feet and slamming of mugs shook the room. Gewey stood and bowed low.

“Thank you,” he said, once the crowd had calmed down. “I’m not much for making speeches, but I do want to say this to my friends: I love you all. I am honored to have you with me, and I hope that we have more reasons to celebrate in the days ahead.”

He bowed again, then turned to embrace Lee. The room erupted once more.

“Thank you for this,” Gewey said, tightening their embrace.

Soon, the wine was flowing. The room became alive with music and dance. Gewey danced with Dina, careful not to step on her feet this time. It was during the second song that he felt a tap on his shoulder - it was Kaylia. Dina smiled and politely stepped aside.

To his great surprise, he found dancing with Kaylia was easy and natural; he was able to anticipate her every movement. They spun gracefully around the room like a top. Gewey found himself laughing out loud and full of joy.

Lee cut in for the third song, but by then Gewey was feeling dizzy and was ready to sit anyway.  He sat at the table and watched as Lee picked Kaylia up by the waist and spun her around.  The elf threw her head back with laughter.

Dina sat down beside Gewey. “You look every bit the man,” she said. “How do you feel?”

“Happy,” he answered. “Very happy.”

“Kaylia’s very beautiful,” she said, looking at the elf. “Don’t you think?”

Gewey felt himself blush, “Yes she is,” he said shyly, trying not to meet her eyes. “But so are you,” he added.

Dina placed her hand lightly over his. “Careful,” she said, giggling playfully. “You wouldn’t want two women competing for your favor, would you?”

Gewey tried to think of something to say, but was only able to manage a nervous grin. Dina squeezed his hand quickly, then asked Millet to dance. Millet was more than happy to oblige; Maybell had been bending his ear for most of the evening about etiquette and customs in the western cities.

The night wore on, but the party gave no indication of dying down. Gewey was sitting across from Kaylia when suddenly he saw her back stiffen and eyes narrow.

“What is it?” he whispered.

“An elf,” she said.

“Here?” Gewey asked, startled. “Where?”

Kaylia nodded subtly toward the door. Gewey scanned the room, and saw a tall, hooded figure standing alone in the corner.

“We need to tell Lee,” Gewey urged her.

“Not yet,” she said. “I doubt he’s here to fight. He wouldn’t risk it among so many humans.” With that, Kaylia got up and started to the back.

“Where are you going?” Gewey asked anxiously.

“To talk,” she replied.

“Then I’m coming with you,” he said, and moved to her side before she could protest.

Kaylia paused a moment, then proceeded to her room. It was only a few minutes before there was a soft knock at the door. Kaylia opened it, and the tall hooded figure stepped quickly inside. He looked at Gewey for a long moment before turning to lock the door.

“You wish for this human to be present?” the elf asked.

“He wishes it,” Kaylia replied gravely. “And I do not object.”

“Very well,” he said, pushing back his hood. His skin was much darker than Kaylia’s, but his sharp features and elven ears clearly stated his kinship to her. Gewey thought it must be wonderful to live among such people.

“I’m Linis, of the western tribes,” he announced. “I’ve come to warn you and give aid.”

Kaylia was taken aback. “Warn me? How would you even know me? It’s been many years since the western tribe have had dealings this far from their home.”

“You’ve been away from your people for a long time, Kaylia,” he replied. Kaylia was shocked to hear him use her name. “Much has changed.”

“Speak your intent,” Kaylia demanded. “Or leave.”

Linis sat down on the edge of the bed. “You are known to many of our kin. Word of your pending judgment has traveled fast and far.”

“What of it?” Kaylia asked defiantly. “How is this your concern?”

“You will not live to be judged,” he answered. “The elders have sent word that you are to be killed, and even now you are being hunted.”

“I gather from your words that you are not among the hunters,” she observed.

“No,” Linis replied. “I am not here to kill you, and I do not wish you judged at all.”

“But I have broken the law,” she countered. “And do not wish to avoid judgment.”

“Old laws for an old world,” Linis scoffed. “The elders are holding on to a life that no longer exists. The time for the old hatred is over. If we are to survive, we must learn to live with the humans. We cannot hide from the rest of the world forever. Eventually it will find us.”

“You speak of a second split!” Kaylia cried, outraged. “I will not be a part of it.”

“The choice is no longer yours,” he said. “The elders break with tradition by ordering your death without trial. They fear the words you may speak, and seek to silence you before you become a threat to their power. You are already a part of this, like it or not.”

“How did this happen?” she asked solemnly. Her face was pained with the thought of her people turning on each other once again.

“It started five years ago,” Linis began. “My tribe was approached by a man claiming to be from a stronghold in the north. He told us there were armies preparing to march on the kingdoms of the west. He offered to return our lands for us to rule, so long as we agreed to become their allies.

“We contacted the other tribes, only to find that they had been given similar offers. Many wanted to take the offer in hopes of achieving our former glory, but others knew it for what it was - a lie. My tribe sent scouts north to gather information. When they returned, they said that the land of Angrääl was alive again, and was indeed gathering strength.

“Our elders remembered the old stories and rejoiced, believing that Rätsterfel had returned once again to battle the gods. But some of us refused to believe this. Some of us had actually gone out to see the world while the elders locked themselves away, letting their hatred of humankind stew and fester.

“We tried to reason with them, but they threatened us with death or banishment, forbidding us to speak of it. It was then we made contact with the humans.”

Kaylia sat up straight. “You did what?”

Linis laughed. “Is it really so surprising?” he asked, motioning toward Gewey. “You travel with humans yourself. Have you not found that they are not the demons we’ve made them out to be?”

“Do the other tribes know?” Kaylia asked.

“Some,” he replied. “Most choose to do nothing as the world passes them by. But we will not be so foolish. Darkness is consuming the land, and if we do nothing to stop it, we shall be consumed along with it.”

“How do you move around?” she asked. “If you’re known to associate with humans, aren’t you hunted? I imagine you would at least be called forth for judgment.”

Linis held his head high and proud. “I will not face the judgment of fools,” he said determinedly. “As for being hunted, most choose to leave us alone for the time being. Those that have come after us have been turned back. We are more numerous than you can imagine. We even have a few locations in human cities where we can gather and walk about the city openly.”

Kaylia’s mouth gaped. “How did you accomplish this?” she asked skeptically.

“It took time, but we opened relations with a few of the lords. After a while we gained their trust. Many humans still view us as killers and assassins, but that attitude is slowly beginning to change.  It’s a thing never seen in a hundred lifetimes.”

“I’d like to see that,” Gewey said sincerely. “I think it would be wonderful for elf and human to live side by side.”

Linis nodded in approval. “You choose your companions wisely, I see. But we’re a long way from peaceful co-existence. For now, it’s our task to break down old ideas and replace them with new ones. Perhaps human and elf will one day live together, but we still have much work to do.”

“You said you were here to warn us,” Gewey reminded him.

“Yes, my young friend.” Linis turned back to Kaylia. “A small group of elves is waiting just outside the city with the intention of killing you, and any that travel with you. I’m here to make sure that doesn’t happen.”

“How?” asked Kaylia. “I travel with others that would make escape impossible. Unless you can grow wings and fly us away from here, they will catch us.”

“Don’t underestimate what a determined Seeker can do,” Linis advised.

“What’s a Seeker?” Gewey asked.

“In human terms, it would be woodsman or tracker,” he answered.  “It takes two hundred years to attain the rank of Seeker, and in the whole of the world we have no equal in the art of evasion.”

Gewey stared in wonder. He had thought Kaylia could never be surpassed in skill when it came to avoiding being seen, but she was only one hundred and three years old. Linis had trained for two hundred years. It was difficult for him to grasp the concept.

Kaylia saw the look on his face and smiled. “You see, Gewey, there is still much to learn. For both of us.”

Linis laughed. “You will find me to be a willing teacher. And from the way you move, it seems as though Kaylia has already given you some instruction. She has done well. You are fortunate to have such a graceful teacher.”

Upon hearing Linis speak well of Kaylia, a pang of jealousy suddenly struck Gewey’s chest.

“Five of my kin are waiting just outside the city walls,” Linis continued. “Tomorrow night we will escort you west, where you can be safe for a time. You should inform your companions of our intent and tell them to bring only what they can carry. I will return at dusk tomorrow. Be ready.” He rose from the bed and put his hands on Kaylia’s shoulders. “All will be well, Kaylia. I know I have given you much to think about, but you must trust me. There is no other way for you and your friends to escape.” With that, he left.

Gewey was still boiling with jealousy as Kaylia sat on the bed and looked up at him. “That’s quite enough,” she scolded.

“I don’t know what you mean,” Gewey lied. Somehow, though, he knew she could feel what he was feeling.

“You have no cause to be jealous,” she explained. “If he approached me with interest, he would have immediately sensed there is a suitor; unless he was prepared to challenge you, he would not interfere.”

“I’m not jealous,” he replied stubbornly.

“Of course you are,” she said. “It’s perfectly natural. It’s a consequence of touching the mind of someone you’ve spoken the declaration to. I told you those ancient words have meaning. But they also have power.”

“If you knew this would happen, why did you want to touch my mind to begin with?” he cried, suddenly feeling violated.

“I felt it was necessary to know you more…intimately,” she answered. “I suppose I should have warned you there might be some emotional repercussions.” Kaylia had the look of mischievous child. “Now, I think it’s time to rejoin the party. We can inform the others later.” She took hold of Gewey’s hand.

“No!” he yelled, jerking his hand away. “You told me you wouldn’t hold back, but it’s all you do.”

Kaylia lowered her eyes, “You’re right, of course. I should have warned you.” She held out her hand. “I will try to be more considerate.”

Gewey paused, allowing his anger to subside. “Thank you,” he finally said.

He took her hand and they returned to the common room where the others were still enjoying the celebration. Lee was dancing with Maybell, who was laughing like a young girl as he swept her across the dance floor, while Millet and Dina toasted to each other’s health for what was probably the tenth time. The rest of the room buzzed with merry making as the minstrels played on and on, each song livelier than the last.

When things finally died down around midnight, Kaylia had everyone join her in her room. She told them in detail about her conversation with Linis, and the ambush that awaited them when they left Delhammer.

“Do you trust him?” Lee asked.

“I probably would have been able to tell if he was lying,” Kaylia answered. “If he says there are elves waiting to kill us outside the city walls, then I think we should take it very seriously. Linis says he can help us avoid detection, and we should accept his help.”

“I agree,” Gewey added. “I think he was telling the truth.”

Lee looked intently at Kaylia. “Fine,” he said reluctantly. “We’ll trust your judgment.”

“Thank you,” Kaylia replied.

“I was talking to Gewey,” he said, rising to his feet. “Now, we should all get some rest. I have a feeling that we’re going to need it.”

Dina cleared her throat and tilted her head towards Maybell.  “Excuse me,” she said. “But aren’t you forgetting something?”

“Ahh,” Lee said, suddenly realizing what she meant. He turned to the old woman. “Maybell, from the sound of it, we’ll be walking for quite some time. You may want to take refuge here.”

“Young man,” she said indignantly. “I can walk you into the ground. Don’t let the age on my face make you think I’m feeble. I will not be left behind. I said I’m going to the temple of Valshara, and I mean to do just that.”

“Very well,” Lee conceded with a certain amount of admiration. “We’ll be leaving early tomorrow. Millet and I will divide the gear, and sell what we won’t need in the morning.”

“I fear that means the wine as well,” Millet lamented. “Such a pity.”

They said goodnight and retired to their rooms.

Gewey was so excited at the thought of meeting more elves, it took two large swallows of jawas to calm his mind enough to be able to sleep.

Chapter 19

When Gewey awoke the next morning, his things had been packed for him. Lee had already left, so he made his way down to the common room, following the smell of porridge and biscuits. Maybell was sitting at a table, sipping on a cup of apple juice.

“Good morning,” Gewey said, taking the seat across from her.

Maybell smiled warmly. “Well, if it isn’t the young man. Come to keep an old woman company?”

“Absolutely,” he said. “Have you eaten?”

“Not yet,” she replied. “I was waiting for the others to roll out of bed. But now that you’re here, I say to blazes with them.”

Gewey chuckled. “I agree.”

The two of them ate while Maybell told him stories about the different temples she had seen. Gewey marveled at her ability to remember every detail.

“Now that I have you to myself,” she said. “I must ask: What do you intend to do about the two women who now compete for your affections?”

Gewey was stunned. “I don’t…” he stammered.

“I may be old,” she said, cutting him off, “but I’m not blind. Both Kaylia and Celandine seem to be quite taken with you - not that I blame them. But that does present you with a difficult situation.”

“I don’t think Dina sees me that way,” Gewey countered.

“Perhaps not,” Maybell laughed. “But she has at least shown interest, and I don’t think Kaylia is very happy about it.”

“I haven’t noticed anything,” Gewey said. In truth, it seemed to him that Kaylia and Dina were getting along quite well.

“Of course you haven’t,” she chided. “You’re a man. I just want you to be careful. The last thing you need is to have a broken heart on your conscience.”

“What can I do?” he asked sincerely.

“Either choose one, or choose neither.” Maybell replied. “I do not envy you. Both Kaylia and Celandine are remarkable and beautiful young women. It’s an impossible choice. But it’s one I fear you’ll eventually have to make.”

Gewey’s head reeled at the idea. He wished he had stayed in bed.

“Good morning,” Dina said, as she and Kaylia entered the common room and sat down at the table. Kaylia was once again

wearing her hooded cloak. Gewey was unable to look either of them in the eye.

“Have you been teasing the young man, Sister?” Dina asked playfully.

“Not at all,” Maybell replied. “We were just talking about the choices a man who has come of age is faced with.”

“Is that so?” Kaylia asked. “I hope he listened.”

“I think he did,” Maybell said, reaching across the table and patting Gewey’s hand.

Lee and Millet returned a few hours later, each carrying a large sack filled with supplies. Lee spent the better part of an hour separating the goods into individual packs small enough for everyone to carry. Maybell insisted on carrying her own provisions, but eventually relented when Gewey pleaded with her.

By dusk, they had made all their preparations and waited in the common room. Eventually, Kaylia stood up and motioned for the others to do the same.

“Linis approaches,” Kaylia noted. “Everyone, gather your things.”

Lee raised an eyebrow. “How can you tell?” he asked skeptically.

“We elves can sense when others are near,” she revealed. “But we can discuss this later; right now, we must leave this place.”

Outside, they saw the elf, cloaked and hooded, waiting by the corner of the inn. Kaylia made the introductions, and Linis bowed to each in turn.

“Once we arrive at the gate, you must follow me very carefully,” Linis instructed. “My kinsmen are waiting for us about one mile south of the city. Those waiting to ambush you are three miles west.”

“If elves can tell when others are near, won’t they sense you moving?” Gewey asked.

“We have ways of masking our presence,” he answered. “If we are discovered, two of us will stay with you while the others try to distract them. Now we must hurry. I have paid the gate guard to be absent for the next twenty minutes, but after that, we may be questioned.”

Linis led them at a quick pace through the city streets. Gewey kept looking back to check on Maybell, but to his surprise, she seemed to have no trouble keeping up.

Just as Linis had assured them, the west gate was unguarded when they passed through.

“Follow me along the wall,” Linis whispered. “In three hundred yards there’s a path leading southwest. My people wait for us at its end.”

The path was barely visible in the fading daylight. The group tried to keep pace with Linis, but in minutes he was out of sight.

At first Gewey was nervous, but then Linis reappeared along with five other elves. They were all cloaked and hooded in the same dark brown.  Two had bows across their backs, and each carried a long knife at their side.  They stood in silence as the group approached.

“These are my kinsmen,” Linis told them. “All worthy Seekers.”

Gewey and the others bowed and introduced themselves. All except Kaylia.

The elves said nothing for a moment, and then one of them stepped forward. He was a bit taller than Linis, and broader in the shoulders. He pushed back his hood, revealing close-cropped black hair and the same defining sharp features Gewey had come to admire.

“I am Haltris,” he said. “My brethren are Sitrisa, Maltora, Santisos, and Prustos. We are honored to be of service.” He turned to Kaylia. “It is a special privilege to meet someone so distinguished among our kin.” They all bowed low.

Linis’ eyes lit up as he regarded Maybell. “You bring wisdom, I see. How wonderful! If we survive the night, I hope you will favor me with stories of your times and travels.”

“An elf of exceedingly good taste and intelligence, I see,” Maybell laughed. “I would be happy to share what I know with you. Though by your standards, I think I’m quite young.”

“Wisdom cannot be measured in years,” said Linis. “Nor can value. I look forward to speaking with you.”

“What’s your plan to avoid the other elves?” Lee asked, stepping forward. “From what I’ve seen of your people, it’s not going to be easy.”

“No, it won’t be,” Linis acknowledged. “Prustos and Maltora will try to lead them away so we can slip by unnoticed. Our people are not easily fooled, but your pursuers are not Seekers as we are.”

Prustos and Maltora nodded sharply at Linis, then disappeared into the forest.

“Don’t worry,” Linis assured them. “They have never failed. Even among Seekers, they are renowned for their skills. Now come, we have far to go before the dawn.”

Linis and Santisos lead the way, while Sitrisa guarded the rear. Lee dropped back and joined Sitrisa.

After a few hours, Linis called for a halt. “We rest,” he said.

“I hope it’s not on my account,” said Maybell. “I’m not tired just yet.”

“I would think you strong as any here,” Linis laughed. “And wise enough to know when you need to stop.”

“Then why do we rest now?” Lee asked.

“Because we’re being chased,” Linis replied. “A pursuer will assume you will run as fast and as hard as you can. A smart predator will bide its time and wait until you’re spent, then strike. If you remain strong, you can turn the predator into prey.”

“I see the wisdom,” Lee said, nodding respectfully. “I wish I had known long ago that elves such as you existed. I could have learned much.”

Linis smiled humbly. “Years ago, I would have killed you the second I saw you. I’m ashamed to say that my current attitude towards humans is a fairly recent development.”

“What changed your mind?” Lee asked.

Linis sat on the forest floor and motioned for Lee to join him.

“Many years ago, I was sent to find one of our kin. She had left her people on a Soul Quest. When she hadn’t returned after several years, her father asked me to find her. It took me three years, but I succeeded, only to find that she had taken a human man as a mate. I reported what I had found to her father, and he ordered her execution.”

Lee’s eyes shot over to Dina who was several yards away, tending to the meal. “Was there a child?”

“Strange you should ask,” Linis remarked. “In fact, there was a child. But its mother knew that I’d seen her, and she sent her mate and the child away to a human city. When I returned, she pleaded with me to spare her husband and child. She explained how the human had saved her and sacrificed everything to care for her. My heart was moved by her story.”

“What did you do?”

“I told her to run. She could never allow herself to be seen by another elf, and she could never let it be known that a child came from her union with a human.”

“You let her live?” Lee asked, shocked.

“I did,” he replied solemnly. “What became of her, I don’t know. After that, my perceptions began to change. If one of our kind could find love with a human, what did that say about our beliefs?”

Lee sat in silent thought for a moment. “What would you do if you found that child today?” he asked, finally.

“I would welcome her,” Linis replied. “She may very well be the future of all the people of the world.”

“You swear that she would not be harmed?” Lee pressed him.

“Of course,” said Linis. “But why do you ask?”

Lee eyes went to Dina. “That child is with you now.”

Linis followed Lee’s gaze. “She must not know,” he said. “At least, not now.”

“Why?” Lee replied indignantly. “She has the right to know.”

“And I will tell her,” Linis assured him. “I assume she thinks that her mother is dead, and if she learns what I have told you, she may try to seek her out. If she is the offspring of a human and an elf, then she may very well be the catalyst that unites our two races. But if she exposes herself too soon, she will not live long enough to fulfill that destiny.”

“I think you should leave that decision to her,” Lee suggested.  “She is not rash or foolhardy. If you speak to her and explain things, I know she’ll do the right thing.”

“I’ll consider your words,” he said thoughtfully. “Until then, I would ask you to keep silent about this.”

Lee nodded. “I’ll keep it to myself for the time being.”

Just then, Santisos walked over to where the two of them were sitting. “We should move on,” he advised. “I don’t think we are pursued as yet.”

Linis got to his feet and gathered the group together. They walked for another two hours, then rested again for a short time.

Lee watched to see if Linis approached Dina, but to his disappointment, the elf didn’t speak to her.

Dawn was just breaking when Prustos and Maltora returned.  Their faces were expressionless. Linis spoke privately with them for a few moments, then rejoined the group.

“Our pursuers have been led away,” Linis announced. An audible sigh of relief rippled through the party. “They will eventually discover they have been deceived, but we will be well away by then. We’ll rest here for a few hours, so try to sleep if you can.”

Linis walked over to Dina and motioned for her to follow him. Lee could see she was nervous; the last time she got too close to an elf, she nearly had her throat cut. She looked around and noticed Lee watching. He gave her a nod, hoping to offer some reassurance, and she returned the gesture before following Linis into the forest.

They returned an hour later. From his seat on a fallen tree, Lee could see that Dina looked both excited and terrified. Gewey, Millet, and Maybell had rolled out blankets and were sleeping under an oak, while Kaylia and the other elves stood nearby, speaking in whispers. Dina came over and sat next to him as Linis went to join the other elves.

“He told you?” Lee asked softy.

Dina nodded, her eyes staring into nothingness. “I don’t know what to do,” she said. Her voice trembled with emotion. “My mother may be alive. I never dared to dream such a thing was possible.”

“What will you do?” he asked. “Will you seek her out?”

“No,” she replied immediately. “At least, not yet. I have my duties, and I will not abandon them.”

Lee reached over and put his arm around her, pulling her close.  “When the time comes, I’ll help you find her.”

Dina put her head on Lee’s shoulder, allowing him to comfort her. “Thank you,” she whispered. Tears began to stream down her cheeks. “You’re a good friend.”

“Celandine,” Linis called. “Come, meet your brethren.”

Dina wiped her eyes and went over to the elves. They had all pulled back their hoods and were smiling warmly. Lee’s heart lifted at the scene. Each elf took her hands and then embraced her. Kaylia motioned for Lee to join them.

“Lee,” said Linis. “We have a favor to ask.”

“I’ll help if I can,” he replied.

Linis took Dina’s hand and looked into her eyes. “We ask that you watch over our sister and protect her,” he said. “Kaylia has told us that you are strong and honorable, and that your skill in battle is great. Celandine is the future of both our races, and she needs such a guardian.”

Lee smiled broadly. “You need not ask,” he said. “But I will swear to it.”

“Your friends are of great worth,” Linis told Dina. “Keep them close.”

Dina nodded and embraced him tightly.

When the others awoke, Dina told them excitedly what had happened. Maybell hugged her repeatedly, while Gewey and Millet looked on happily. They promised her that, they too, would help to find her mother when the time came.

“It’s like I have a family for the first time,” Dina told Gewey as they walked on. “All my life I’ve been afraid of being discovered. I still can’t be out in the open, but I have part of my heritage back.”

“I’m happy for you,” Gewey said. His words were sincere, but he couldn’t help but envy her newfound sense of belonging.

“We will take you as far as Gristol,” Linis announced when they stopped for a midday meal. “We have brethren there who will help you.”

“You won’t be joining us the whole way?” asked Gewey.

“Unfortunately, we have other tasks we can’t ignore,” Linis replied. “But we will be leaving you in good hands.”

“That will be perfect,” Maybell announced, tearing off a piece of flatbread. “Though I am sad to leave your company.”

“As am I,” said Linis. “You would honor me with your company as we walk. I refuse to pass up the opportunity to speak to a human who has seen as much of your world as you have.”

“Keep talking like that and you’ll have me driving you mad with my stories,” she said cheerfully.

“Nonsense,” he replied. “Most of the humans we know are too young to have seen the changing world. To us, you contain a wealth of knowledge that we would prefer not to do without. It is two weeks to Gristol, and you will find that I will not tire of your stories.”

“Don’t say that I didn’t warn you,” laughed Maybell.

Chapter 20

For the several days they followed Linis and his Seekers along little known trails and paths. The going was easy and everyone was in good spirits.

Dina spent most of her time among the elves, laughing and talking.  Linis offered to assist Kaylia with Gewey’s training. She gratefully accepted, though it made Gewey feel uneasy. Linis remarked on how much Gewey had learned, and how quickly he mastered difficult techniques, but to Gewey’s relief, the elf did not ask any awkward questions that would force him to lie.

True to her word, Maybell walked with Linis, regaling him with story after story about the life she had lived and the things she had seen. The elf listened attentively without ever seeming to tire of her tales, despite the woman’s apparent ability to speak for hours without pausing.

Millet spent much of his time with Prustos, who turned out to be an expert in herbal cures and remedies. He showed Millet several common plants and mosses with healing properties that could be used to save a life if one were injured in the wilderness.

Lee continued to work with Gewey on drawing power from the earth, but Gewey was careful to take it slowly. After four days, he was able to control the flow of the power, even allowing it to enter into his body. The feeling was amazing. He felt invulnerable. Lee warned him not to take in too much too quickly, but Gewey couldn’t stop himself from wanting more.

On the fifth day, Gewey completely opened himself to the strength and energy of the earth. At first, he felt invigorated, but eventually the power overwhelmed him, knocking him to the ground. Lee helped him to his feet, reprimanding him sharply for such irresponsible behavior; secretly, however, he was pleased with Gewey’s progress.

By the eighth day, Gewey was feeling as if he had no troubles at all. Linis was unbelievably adept at finding the easiest routes through the forest, making a full day’s march seem like a leisurely stroll down a well-paved road. Laughter and storytelling was a matter of course as they all sat next to the fire each evening.

It was just after noon on the tenth day - while Maybell was describing the Temple of the Far Sky to Linis - that things changed. Suddenly Linis stiffened and commanded everyone to halt and be silent. The other elves, including Kaylia, rushed to Linis’ side, hands on their knives. Lee drew his sword and motioned for Millet, Gewey, Dina, and Maybell to move behind him.

“What is it?” Lee whispered.

“An elf approaches,” Linis replied.

“Do you think the others caught up with us?” Gewey asked. He pulled out his own knife, holding it loosely as Linis had taught him.

“No,” Linis replied warily. “I would have known if they were on our trail. Whoever this is, he wants us to be aware of his presence.”

The tension grew as their eyes focused on the surrounding forest. A cloaked figure appeared from behind a young pine less than fifty feet away. His face was hidden beneath his hood, but Gewey could feel his gaze bearing down on them. He was shorter than Linis, and leaner, and he wore a short knife that peeked out from beneath his cloak.

“Berathis,” Linis said under his breath.

“Greetings, Linis,” said the figure. His voice was deep and menacing.

“How long have you been following us?” Linis asked.

“Quite some time,” Berathis answered.

“What do you want?” he asked.

“You know what I want. Give her to me, and I will spare the rest. I have no desire to see your blood flow.”

“Then leave us in peace,” said Linis.

Berathis pushed back his hood. His long white hair was pulled tight in a single braid that fell down his back. His face was smooth and ageless, but Gewey guessed he was much older than the other elves.

“You know I cannot,” Berathis said. “You must yield.”

Linis’ face twisted into a pained grimace. “You taught me well,” he said sadly. “I cannot yield my honor, even if it means I must face you.”

Berathis’ face showed both sorrow and pride as he looked at Linis. “You were always my best pupil. It saddens me to have to do this to you, Linis. It’s not too late; you can still return to us.”

“No,” Linis answered with resolve. “It is too late for that. Things must change. I must follow the path my heart has shown me.”

Berathis nodded and said, “I understand. I give you one hour. Then I shall return.”

Linis and the other elves bowed, and then watched silently as Berathis disappeared into the forest.

“Who was that?” Gewey asked. “And what happens in an hour?”

“Berathis is the greatest of all the Seekers,” Linis explained. “He comes for Kaylia.”

“He’s only one elf,” Gewey noted. “Surely we can stop him.”

Linis shook his head slowly. “Berathis has spared us until now. He could kill us all at any time, and we could do nothing to stop him.”

“What happens now?” asked Lee, sheathing his sword.

“He chooses to face us openly,” Linis told them. “One of us must fight him.”

“And what if he wins?” Millet asked.

Linis’ face turned grave. “Then we must turn Kaylia over to him.”

“No!” Gewey cried. “I don’t care what happens. He’s not taking Kaylia anywhere.”

“I appreciate your loyalty,” Kaylia said. “But if Berathis defeats our champion and I refuse to go with him, he will kill us all - one by one - until I comply.”

“She speaks the truth,” Linis agreed. “That he hasn’t moved against us is only because he knows I will honor my word. If we lose, Kaylia must go.”

Lee stepped forward. “I’ll fight him,” he volunteered.

Linis looked at Lee with admiration. “I cannot allow that. From what Kaylia has told me, you are an extremely skilled fighter. But Berathis is no human opponent; even among the elves his skills are feared. I’m afraid it must be one of us.”

Lee put his hand on Linis’ shoulder. “If he’s as dangerous as you say, then I’m the only one here who has a chance. I can’t match you in the forest, but there’s no elf alive that can defeat me in single combat. I’m what your people call a half-man, and I am the only hope we have to save Kaylia’s life.”

Linis stared at Lee in wonder. “Truly the world is full of surprises,” he remarked. “I never thought to meet a half-man. While I understand your reasons for keeping it secret, I wish I could have availed myself to your experiences along our way.”

“I thought it best to keep it to myself,” Lee explained. “I ask that you do not spread this knowledge should I survive.”

“You have my word,” Linis promised.

When an hour had passed, Berathis returned. “Who shall meet the challenge?” he asked, removing his cloak. His eyes filled with surprise when Lee stepped forward. “I ask that you reconsider. You are brave, human, but surely Linis has told you who you face.”

“He has told me,” Lee replied, his sword in hand. “I wish that there be no deception. I meet your challenge in full knowledge and understanding, so I give you the same: I am Lee Starfinder, son of Saraf. I am a half-man, and well beyond your skills in combat. I ask that you remove yourself and leave us be.”

“Half-man, eh?” Berathis said, intrigued. “Then today I rejoice. If death finds me, it will be at the hands of one who is great among men.” He drew his long knife and smiled. “Let us dance, Lee Starfinder, and let the fates decide.”

Lee crouched, leaning on his back leg and holding his sword low at his hip. The elf circled slowly to the right, his knife practically dangling from his hand. In a flash, Lee attacked high, forcing Berathis to duck and move away. Gewey had never seen anything move so fast. It was like watching two bolts of lightning do battle.

Over and over again, Lee forced Berathis back, making it impossible for the elf to counter. Seconds seemed like minutes, minutes like hours, and Berathis was clearly losing the advantage.

“You toy with me,” Berathis accused. “Why don’t you end this?”

“I only hoped you would see the futility of this fight,” Lee pleaded.  “You are by far the most skilled opponent I’ve ever faced. I have no desire to kill you.”

“You honor me,” the elf replied, “but you have no choice.”

Faster than the eye could see, Berathis lunged with deadly intent, but Lee was prepared. He spun and brought his sword around, slashing across the back of the elf’s hand, causing him to drop his knife to the ground. Berathis gripped his wound in pain, staring down at his fallen blade. Lee stepped forward, holding his sword in both hands, poised for the final blow.

Berathis laughed to himself and looked up at Lee. “The fight is yours,” he said. “This is a good death.”

“There is no need for you to die,” Lee insisted. “Yield and withdraw. Your honor is secure.”

“I wish you understood us better,” Berathis lamented. “My death is required.” He looked to Linis. “You know this.”

Linis nodded his head with sadness and regret.

“That may be your way,” Lee stated flatly, “but it is not mine. You fought with skill and courage, and I will not strike you down.”

Suddenly, Berathis charged toward Lee. Instinctively, Lee lowered his sword to fend off the attack, impaling the elf on the blade. Berathis’ arms flung around Lee’s back, then slowly he slid to the ground. Lee stepped back, horrified.

Berathis gasped as blood trickled from the corner of his mouth. Tears streamed down Linis’ face as he knelt down beside his former teacher and took hold of his hand.

“This is a good death,” Berathis said weakly as blood spilled from his wound. “I go to see the Father with my honor intact.”

“You shall be remembered,” Linis wept softly. “Your spirit lives on, and I shall join you soon. You will always be the greatest among us.”

Berathis reached up and touched Linis’ cheek. “No, it is you who is great. You can see the future, while the rest of us live on in darkness. You are on the right path, brother. Walk it with honor.” Slowly his hand fell and his eyes closed.

Lee walked away and sat by himself against a young oak. Kaylia came over and sat beside him.

“It had to be this way,” she assured him. “You honored him by allowing him to die by your hand.”

Lee said nothing, but his eyes flamed with anger.

Kaylia touched his hand and raised herself up. “You may not understand us, and perhaps his death was senseless to your eyes. But that does not mean you did wrong. He wanted it so. If you had left him injured and defeated, he would have ended his own life in dishonor.”

“Lee,” Linis called over to him. “Will you join us as we lay our kin to rest?”

The elves were standing in a circle around Berathis’ body. Lee got to his feet and approached them.

Gewey watched as the elves prepared a funeral pyre and torches. They placed Berathis’ body atop the pyre and began the ritual. For hours they sang songs in the ancient language, swaying back and forth around their fallen kinsman. Lee stood beside them with his head bowed low. Gewey and the others stood further back, watching quietly.

When the songs were over, Linis handed a torch to Lee and stepped aside. Lee lit the pyre and said a silent prayer. The elves backed away and got to their knees, watching as the fire blazed, consuming the remains of Berathis.

When the fire finally died and the body had turned to ashes, the elves solemnly rose to their feet and retrieved their packs.

“We must go,” Linis declared. “I will not rest here.”

The others followed without a word. They walked until dawn, and then decided to rest through both day and night until the following morning.

“My heart is too heavy to continue,” said Linis. “Come, Lee. Let me tell you stories of Berathis so that you may know him, and understand how happy he was that you provided the death he had always wished for.”

Lee nodded and sat with the elf. He listened to stories of Berathis’ deeds until it was close to dusk.

“Thank you,” Lee said, once Linis had finished. “I still have much to learn of your kind. And though it still pains me to have ended the life of such a valiant person, I am grateful to have heard his tale.”

“It is I who am grateful,” Linis replied. “Because of you, I was spared the agony of fighting my teacher and mentor - though I doubt I would have prevailed.”

“Why is it so important that Kaylia be killed?” Lee asked.

Linis sighed heavily. “There is a second split among the elves.  I fear much blood will be spilled before it is over. Kaylia has a rich and noble heritage among our people; it would be a serious blow to the elders’ cause if it were revealed that she has broken tradition and befriended humans. They cannot allow her to be heard and possibly sway the advantage away from them. As it stands, those who would see elf and human reconciled are greatly outnumbered, and we pose little threat to their power. But as our numbers grow, so does our influence. We’ve been able to avoid bloodshed so far, but the stronger our position gets, the more likely that is to change, and none of us want that.”

“How do you hope to change the Elders’ minds?” Lee asked. “I know elves are different from humans in many ways, but there is no doubt they share the same stubbornness.”

“True,” Linis agreed. “Our progress with humans has been slow, but it is progress.  If we can only show our kin the possibilities and benefits of such a world, that might sway enough of my people to our cause and force the elders to relent.”

“I fear that you will find resistance on all sides, my friend,” Lee said with regret. “Humans don’t tend to welcome change, and they hold tightly to their fears. But I wish you luck.”

Linis laughed softly and put his hand on Lee’s shoulder. “Two bullheaded races on a collision course with destiny. It is definitely luck that we will need.”

Agreed on this, Lee and Linis moved their separate ways to rest for the next leg of the journey.

As they prepared to set off the next morning, Prustos ran ahead and disappeared into the forest.

“We arrive in Gristol in three days,” Linis told the assembled group. “Prustos is scouting ahead to inform our friends of your arrival.”

“I can’t wait to meet these friends of yours,” said Millet. “Are they elves or humans?”

“Both,” he answered. “They are dependable and trustworthy. From there, they will see you the rest of the way. But for now, let us enjoy the time we have left together.”

The rest of their journey was filled with merriment and song. It was almost enough to make Gewey forget the duel between Lee and Berathis, and the funeral that followed.

Each evening Linis continued Gewey’s instruction in the arts of stealth and survival. He showed him ways to avoid leaving even the slightest trail, and how to read the forest in the dark when tracking prey.

Added to this, Lee allowed Gewey to push his limits a little further each day as he continued to practice drawing energy and strength from the earth. By the final day of their journey, Gewey was able to let the power flow fully into him. When he opened his eyes, it was as if he could see every detail of the world around him. His arms and legs felt stronger than they had ever felt before, and he could sense everything.

“Very good,” Lee remarked. “Now you must learn to do this without meditation. Once you can do that, your physical strength will be unmatched.”

Gewey could still feel the power coursing through his veins as he walked back to where the others waited.

“By the Creator!” Linis gasped as he saw Gewey approach. “You look as if all the power of heaven is inside you. What manner of creature are you?”

Linis’ words set off a moment of panic in Gewey. All of the energy he had stored inside him was instantly released. The ground beneath the elf suddenly exploded, sending him flying through the air. He landed hard, and for a moment he lay still. Lee rushed to the elf’s side, but to his relief, Linis was uninjured. Linis began to laugh loudly as he struggled to his feet, while the others stepped away from Gewey, frightened.

“I’m sorry,” Gewey stammered. “I didn’t mean to…”

“I see now why your training is so important,” Linis laughed, brushing the dirt from his cloak. “You are a mystery, young one. I hope one day to know just what kind.”

Lee looked nervous. “I cannot answer questions regarding the boy,” he said apprehensively. “I’m sorry, but you’re better off not knowing.”

“I’m just glad to know he’s on our side,” Linis replied. “But don’t worry. I will keep my questions for another time. I do hope to one day have them answered.”

Gewey was shaking at the thought of what he had just done. What if he had accidentally killed Linis - or any of the others for that matter? Gewey swore to himself that he would learn to control his power. He would not cause the death of a friend through ignorance.

Linis could see how upset Gewey was. “Calm yourself,” he soothed. “I am not hurt. But if you would allow me, I think I might be able to help.”

Gewey looked at the elf in confusion. “Help? How?”

“Come with me,” Linis instructed, leading Gewey away from the others. “There are those among my people who can feel the energy of the earth and forest. In ancient times, it is said some could even use that energy to change the earth according to their will. Seekers use a similar technique, though we can only harness very small amounts of it compared to what I saw in you. We can channel it to give us great stamina and strength.”

“I can feel it,” Gewey confided. “Even now. But I can’t control it.”

Linis smiled. “Do not try,” he stated simply. “When you feel the flow enter you, do not try to channel it or direct it. Instead, picture it as a stream filling your soul. Once filled, let the rest pour over you and flow around you. Do not try to hold it in. Instead, simply replace it with more. Your body should become part of the energy flow, not a receptacle built to contain it. What happened earlier was caused by you holding on, when all you had to do was allow the power of the earth to continuously flow through you.”

“How do I do that?” Gewey asked.

“By forgetting to try,” he answered. “Do not think about it. When you hear the pulse of the earth, know that it was always there. Let your mind wander, and it will take its own course.”

“I think I understand,” said Gewey, nodding slowly in comprehension.  “Thank you.”

Linis slapped Gewey on the back. “What a Seeker you would make,” he said. “One day, when our quests are done, I hope you will allow me to instruct you further.”

“I would like nothing more,” Gewey replied earnestly.

When they were about three miles from Gristol, Prustos returned. He spoke briefly to Linis and handed him a piece of parchment. Linis looked at it and smiled.

“Prustos has informed our people of your arrival,” Linis announced. “They will meet you at the Bean and Broth tavern, and then escort you to a house where you will be safe.”

“How will we know them?” Lee asked.

“Prustos has given them your descriptions,” he answered. “They will speak my name so that you know them to be true. The road leading to the city is one mile north, and the gates are unguarded during the daylight hours. You should have no trouble.”

“We can’t thank you enough for all you’ve done for us,” Lee said. “I am honored to have met you and your kin.”

“The honor is ours,” Linis replied.

Gewey and the others traded heartfelt goodbyes with the elves, and then watched as they vanished into the forest.

Once the elves had gone, Millet turned to Kaylia. “What an extraordinary people you are,” he remarked.

“Thank you,” she replied. “I am pleased to have encountered them. I thought I would never speak to one of my kind in friendship again.”

Lee started north toward the road, and the others followed close behind. Without their elven friends, the march to the city gate felt dull and dreary. Gewey found himself missing their familiar laughter.

As Linis had said, the city gates were open and unguarded. The people of Gristol were far more accommodating than those they had encountered in other towns and villages, so they had no trouble getting directions to the Bean and Broth tavern. The tavern itself was nice, as taverns go. At first Gewey worried that such a diverse group would stick out and raise suspicions, but none of the patrons seemed to take notice. They found a table and ordered ale and wine. They’d hardly had time to take a single sip when they were approached by a man wearing a long, worn, brown leather coat and tan shirt and pants. He had salt and pepper hair and fair skin. He smiled cheerfully as he scanned the group.

“Friends of Linis, I presume?” the man asked.

“We are,” Lee responded, apprehensively.

“I’m Broín,” he said, taking a seat. “You’ll be my guests while you’re here.”

“We’re pleased to meet you,” Lee said, relaxing a bit.

Just then, the barmaid walked up to their table. “Good to see you, Lord Broín. The usual?”

“Yes indeed,” he answered, before returning his attention to Lee and his friends. “I’ve looked far and wide, and have yet to find a plum brandy to equal that of the Bean and Broth. In fact...”

Struck with a sudden idea, he hopped up and whispered in the barmaid’s ear.

“We’re grateful for your assistance, Lord Broín,” said Lee. “Our mutual friends speak highly of you.”

“Thank you,” he replied. “But you can drop the ‘Lord’ part; I’m not really a lord. About ten years ago there was a massive fire here in the city, and I helped with the rebuilding. Since then, everyone started calling me Lord Broín. I’m actually just a merchant.”

Lee gave a knowing smile to Millet. “Lordship is earned,” Lee countered. “And clearly you have earned it if that’s the title the people have given to you.”

“I know,” he said. “But I still find it a bit…pretentious. I don’t dress like a lord, and I certainly don’t live like one.”

“I don’t know,” Millet commented. “You look much like some lords I’ve encountered. Not all wear silk and satin.”

“You sound like a man of experience,” Broín complimented him, laughing heartily as the barmaid returned. She carried a tray full of small glasses filled with pungent plum brandy.

“Please enjoy,” said Broín. “I would not have you visit our fine city without sampling what I consider to be its finest attribute.” Everyone took their brandy and raised their glasses.

“To new friends,” Broín toasted loudly, and they all took a sip. Gewey winced at the sweetness, but found the aftertaste to be quite pleasant.

“When you’re ready, we’ll go to my home,” Broín said, holding the glass under his nose. “I’ve had baths prepared. I know how time in the wilderness can take its toll.”

“That would be marvelous!” Maybell beamed. “You must forgive my rude companions for not introducing themselves. I’m Sister Maybell.”

“I’m pleased to know you, Sister,” he replied, nodding his head. “While you’re here, I’ll have someone escort you to the Temple District if you wish.”

“That would be perfect,” she said graciously.

Embarrassed by Maybell’s words, each introduced themselves in turn.

“What a unique band of friends,” said Broín, his eyes fixed on Kaylia. “But enough of this. We should go, so you can wash off the dirt and grime of your long journey.”

Lord Broín led them to his home. It was a modest two-story structure, but it appeared well built with sturdy red brick and hard pine. It had a small white balcony overlooking the street, and a flower garden surrounded the entire house. Inside the foyer, a staircase led to the upstairs bedrooms; doors on either side of the stairs led to the dining room, study, and parlor.

“I must apologize in advance,” Broín said. “I have only three spare rooms, but there are ample beds.” A series of clanks and rattles could be heard coming from the back of the house. “From the sound of it, Angus is preparing dinner.”

Broín led them to the bedrooms, where tubs of steaming water waited for them. Maybell took a room for herself, insistent that she be able to bathe in private. Kaylia and Dina shared the next room, while Lee, Gewey, and Millet split the third.

“When you’ve washed, please join me in the parlor,” Broín said with a bow, leaving them to it.

“What do you think, My Lord?” Millet asked, once they were alone.

“I trust Linis,” Lee answered. “But all the same, be alert.”

Chapter 21

When all had washed and dressed they went downstairs to join Lord Broín. The door to the parlor was open, and voices could be heard speaking softly from within. The parlor was sparsely decorated, with just a few paintings and some silver lanterns lining the walls. A cherry wood table holding a crystal decanter and a dozen brandy glasses stood in the corner. Three well-cushioned couches atop a thick woven rug formed a semi-circle in the center of the room, and at the far end a small fire burned cheerfully in the fireplace.

Lord Broín was sitting on the middle couch holding a spirited conversation with two unfamiliar figures. On his left hand side was sat a young looking man wearing a red silk jacket and a black-buttoned shirt with black trousers. He had dark curly hair. To Broín’s right sat a blond elf dressed in common brown woodsman’s attire.

“Ahh,” Broín said as he saw them enter. “Please, join us.” The man and the elf rose to their feet and bowed low.

“Let me introduce my friends,” Broín said. “The young man here is Lord Ganflin from Althetas, and this is Malstisos.”

Gewey and the rest introduced themselves in turn. Lord Ganflin turned to Kaylia, who was still wearing her hood.

“Please, my dear. You don’t need to hide here,” he said.

Kaylia nodded and removed her hood, although she didn’t fully remove her cloak.

“Linis told us there would be both elves and humans,” Lee remarked. “Still, it’s odd to see.” Broín laughed. “I know what you mean. I’ve been friends with Malstisos here for over a year, and it still shocks me when he removes his hood. A good lot, though - the elves, I mean. Once you convince them not to kill you.”

“I only tried it that one time,” Malstisos joked as he turned to the others. He smiled. “I’m sure Linis told you of our efforts to build relations with humans. As you surely know, it has not been well received by the elders. People like Lord Broín and Lord Ganflin provide a safe place where we can talk and plan. The elders may wish to stop us, but even they wouldn’t dare assault us in a human city.”

“In Althetas,” Lord Ganflin added, “there are even elves walking openly in the streets.”

Kaylia marveled at the idea. “I imagine that took a while to accomplish.”

“Not as long as you might think,” Ganflin replied. “You’d be surprised how quickly people can get used to something, though I admit there are still some who are opposed to the idea.”

“Prustos left word that you would need passage further west,” Broín interjected. “Where is it you need to go?”

“Actually,” Dina answered, “we’re headed for Althetas.”

“Then you shall travel with me,” Ganflin declared. “I will be here for two more days, and then I depart for home. I can delay if you need more time.”

Lee looked at Maybell, who nodded in response.

“Two days should be plenty of time,” said Lee. “We have some business here to attend to, but that should be completed by tomorrow.”

“It’s settled then,” Broín said as he stood up and opened the decanter on the table. The air filled with the scent of plum brandy. “Until then, you shall stay here as my guests. My house is yours.” He proceeded to pass around glasses of brandy to the entire table.

Dinner was pleasant. The dining room was large and could have easily accommodated twice their number, but the dark wood paneling and pastel drawings on the walls made it feel cozy. Angus, Lord Broín’s servant, served the meal unaided with a speed and precision that impressed even Millet.

Conversation was light, focusing mainly on trade and merchant affairs. Malstisos spoke to Kaylia and Dina, telling them tales of Linis and his band. They had apparently traveled more than any other elves in history - or so it sounded the way Malstisos told it.

As they finished eating, Broín instructed Angus to see that there were enough chairs in the study to accommodate their guests. “I trust you’ve all had your fill?” he asked, wiping his hands with a napkin.

“Indeed,” Lee replied. “I haven’t eaten that well in quite a while.”

“Then if you will join me in the study, we have matters to discuss,” Broín said, pushing back his chair.

Broín led them from the dining room, across the foyer, and into the study. A large mahogany desk sat at the far end of the room next to a fireplace that glowed dimly as a small fire crackled and popped. Bookshelves lined the walls, and cushioned chairs had been placed in front of the desk. The lanterns in the corners had been dimmed, giving the room a very relaxed atmosphere. When they were all seated, Angus entered the room and gave them each a crystal glass filled with cider.

“My friends,” Broín began. “As you all know, darkness is covering the land. In the north, Angrääl is gathering its strength and preparing to march. We’ve tried to warn the western nobles, but they refuse to listen. In fact, Angrääl already has representatives engaging in open negotiations with other northern kingdoms.”

“Do you have word of Hazrah?” Lee asked anxiously.

“Not specifically, no,” he answered. “But Hazrah is most certainly in danger. If you have friends or family there, you should get them out before it’s too late.”

Lee lowered his eyes in thought.

“I don’t know what causes your flight west,” Broín continued.  “But I can guess you are not unaware of the things I speak of.”

“We are aware,” said Lee. “But I cannot tell you the reason for our flight. All I can say is that we have similar goals, and by helping us, you help protect your lands and homes.”

“I thought as much,” Broín said with a knowing smile. “You have the trust of Linis, so I won’t press you to tell me things you think you shouldn’t. But if you know anything about what we face, I hope you will share it.”

Lee took a sip from his cup and looked at the tense face of Lord Broín.

“The power you face in Angrääl,” Lee said, “is known as the Dark Knight, though some call him by other names. He is far more dangerous than you might have guessed. He has stolen a powerful weapon not meant to be wielded by mortal men. With it, he has locked the door to Heaven, and if he isn’t stopped, he’ll reshape the world into a living hell.”

“You speak of the Sword of Truth,” said Ganflin. “I’ve read about it, but I thought it was just a myth.”

“I wish it were,” Lee said solemnly. “The one who stole it is the power behind the trouble in the north. He seeks to destroy the gods, and with the sword, he might just find a way. He hasn’t yet reached his full strength, but the longer he possesses the sword, the more powerful he becomes.”

“How can he be stopped?” asked Broín. “I have heard of the Sword of Truth as well, and if the legends are true, then he now holds the power of a god.”

“He may have their power, but he is not a god,” Lee asserted. “He can be killed.”

“Among the elves, hatred of the gods runs deep.  There are many who would side with this Dark Knight,” Malstisos noted. “If he is as powerful as you say, we will need to convince them to do otherwise.”

“For that, we must count on you and your brethren,” Lee said. “I’ll aid you in any way that I can, but I doubt my interference in this particular matter would help.”

“Hers might,” Malstisos said, nodding toward Kaylia.

“They want me dead,” Kaylia retorted. “They are even willing to ignore tradition to see it done. I doubt I can say anything to sway them.”

“There is at least one elder who doesn’t seek your death,” he countered. “It may be that he is our only hope.”

“He wants nothing to do with me,” Kaylia replied coldly. “That my own kin has been sent to kill me tells me that.”

“Who are you talking about?” asked Gewey.

“My uncle,” Kaylia answered in a whisper. “He fought in the Great War alongside my father - his brother. After my father died, he raised me as his own. But that was long ago.”

“Still, it might be worth the attempt,” Malstisos argued. “He is not as stubborn as the other elders. He may listen to reason.”

“He will not,” Kaylia said firmly. Her tone was full of hate and anger. “My people could not have been sent to kill me without his consent. You would be better off if you told him you had murdered me yourself.”

“I think you underestimate him,” Malstisos said, his voice softening.  “But as you wish, I will press you no more.”

Kaylia got up and stood by the fireplace.

“In any case, we have further matters to discuss,” Broín said. “There are rumors that the dead walk the earth. At first I thought them nothing more than nonsense, but now I’m not so sure.”

“They’re not nonsense,” said Lee. He told Broín what had happened with the baker’s wife in Sharpstone, though he left out the name of the town.

“How is such a thing possible?” Broín asked, horrified.

“When the Dark Knight locked the door to Heaven, he trapped the souls of the living on Earth,” Lee explained. “As his power has grown, there have been certain…side effects. I believe it may be a result of his growing power. Whatever the case, it’s effective in spreading fear, and that’s his greatest weapon.”

Broín took a deep breath and sighed. “Be straightforward with me,” he said. Lee could hear the desperation in his voice. “Is there a way to fight him?”

“Yes,” Lee answered with conviction. “He is not all powerful - at least, not yet. Keep doing what you’re already doing for now. Before it’s over, we will need allies anywhere we can find them. It may not come to all-out war, but if it does, we’ll need to be united and ready.  My friends and I are journeying to a place that may reveal a way to end this without bloodshed, but there is no guarantee of success.”

“Then we will aid you in any way you wish,” Broín said with resolve. “Simply tell me what it is you need.”

“There is only one thing I would ask,” Lee replied. “It is a personal request, but one of great importance to me.”

“Ask,” Broín invited. “I will help if I can.”

“There are people dear to me in Hazrah,” he said. “I cannot abandon the things I must do, so I will send my friend and companion in my stead.”

Millet’s eyes went wide. “You don’t mean to send me away!” he cried.

“Please,” Lee begged. “You must see my wife and child safely away from Hazrah. I can trust no one else, and they will believe you when they see you.”

Millet nodded his head and put his hand on Lee’s shoulder. “I will do everything in my power to make sure nothing happens to them.”

Lee turned to Broín. “I would not have him go alone, so I ask that you send someone to help him as he needs. I can pay all of the expenses, and whoever goes will be well rewarded.”

“I will go,” Malstisos volunteered. “But do not insult me with promise of reward. You are a friend to my kin, and that is enough.” He smiled at Millet. “We leave when you are ready.”

“Thank you,” said Lee. “I hope one day to return the favor. Now, if you all don’t mind, we’ve had a long journey, and I’m sure my companions are longing to spend some time in a warm bed.”

“I agree,” said Broín. “We can talk more tomorrow.”

They all rose up from their chairs and bid one another goodnight.

Gewey went straight to bed, while Millet and Lee discussed the rescue of Lee’s family. Kaylia stopped in to give Gewey his nightly dose of jawas tea, a routine he had come to look forward to.

“She certainly does take good care of you,” Millet observed. “A thing not to be taken for granted.”

Normally such teasing would have embarrassed Gewey, but tonight he just smiled and let the jawas take him away.

Chapter 22

Gewey was the first to rise the next day. He got dressed and wandered downstairs, following the smell of sausage. Angus was setting up the table when he spotted him at the door.

“Please sit,” Angus urged him, pulling out a chair. “It’s good to see an early riser around here.”

Gewey thought about waiting for the others, but dismissed the thought when Angus placed a plate filled with sausage, eggs and fresh biscuits in front of him. To top it off, there was even fresh orange juice. In Sharpstone, orange juice was rare; the only times he’d had it before were when his father had taken him to visit Lee as a child.

The sun was shining through the windows and Gewey could hear the bustle of a new day beginning outside.

“It’s been some time since the sun has broken through,” Angus observed, pleased.

“Let’s take it for a good omen,” Broín said as he strode into the room.

Gewey felt embarrassed for not waiting to eat, but Broín didn’t seem to mind. In fact, Angus brought him a plate and some juice and he immediately started in himself.

“You said very little last night, my young friend,” Broín noted.  “What are your thoughts on what goes on in the world?”

Gewey had to wash down a mouthful of sausage before answering.  “Honestly, it’s hard to make heads or tails of it. Compared with what I’m used to, things have been moving very fast.”

Lord Broín nodded with understanding. “Yes, indeed. Things feel out of control, even for those of us who are more accustomed to dealing with the fast pace of the world. But I’m curious, how did you become involved in all of this to begin with?”

Gewey was unsure how to answer. Broín could see his unease and waved his hand.

“Forget I asked,” he said. “Let’s talk about your companions instead. I’ve noticed you seem quite comfortable traveling with elves. Have you always been so accepting?”

“I think the elves are a wonderful people,” Gewey replied earnestly. “After being around them, it’s hard to imagine why they aren’t welcome among us. They may be terrible and dangerous when they want to be, but they are also wise and full of joy. I’ve never seen anyone who loves his brother so selflessly, or defends his honor so passionately. Of course, my experience is limited to the few I’ve met.”

“You are wise beyond your years,” Broín told him. “Now, if you would allow me, I would give you something.”

“Please,” Gewey protested. “Your hospitality is more than enough.”

“But I insist,” he said, leaving the table. A few minutes later he returned carrying a long sword sheathed in a black leather scabbard. There were symbols running down the length of the scabbard in silver inlay, and to Gewey’s eye, they appeared to be the same type of ancient writing that decorated Lee’s box. Broín attached the scabbard to a studded leather belt, and then handed it to Gewey. “This sword was given to me by the King of Gol’Giatha for saving the life of his son when I was a young man. I want you to have it.”

Gewey stared at the weapon, stunned. “This is too much. I can’t possibly accept this.”

“You can, and you will,” Broín said sternly. “Whatever quest your friends are on, I would have to be a blind fool not to realize that you are a big part of it. If I wanted to guess, I would say you’re probably the most important part.”

“Why would you say that?” Gewey asked nervously.

“You’re not a servant,” he replied. “You’re not a warrior either. And your friends take special care when anything to do with you comes up.”

He leaned back in his chair, evaluating Gewey. “You’re young - too young to be on such a dangerous journey by all accounts, and yet you carry yourself as a man ten years your senior. Whatever your reason for being here, I would have you as well protected as I can make possible. This sword will never break nor dull, and it has never been drawn from its scabbard; once drawn, only the person who has done this will be able to wield it, and no other. More than that I do not know, but it is certainly a most special weapon. But for myself, I’ve always used the sword passed down to me by my father. I have no use for another.”

“I can’t thank you enough,” said Gewey, looking the sword up and down.

“Now that’s a kingly gift,” Lee remarked as he and the others walked in. “May I see it?”

“Please do not unsheathe it,” Broín requested. “As I told your young friend, once drawn, it will only serve one master - or so I was told.”

Lee raised an eyebrow. “Interesting. Then by all means, Gewey, draw your sword.”

Gewey hesitated only for a moment before doing as instructed. The sword slid easily from its scabbard, as if it had only just been oiled. The blade glimmered brightly, touched by the light coming in through the windows. Suddenly he felt his hand grow warm and the hilt began to throb. He wanted to throw the sword down, but he found himself unable to let it go. He gasped in shock, nearly knocking over the chair beside him. Then, as quickly as the sensation began, it was gone.

“What happened?” Gewey exclaimed. “Why did it do that?”

“Do what?” Lee asked, concerned. “What did you feel?”  Gewey described what had happened.

“I know what you experienced,” Dina announced, stepping forward. “Hand Lee the sword, but be careful not to lose your own grip on it.”

Gewey held out the sword, holding the tip of the hilt in one hand and cradling the blade in the other. Lee touched the flat side of the blade and instantly drew back, wincing in pain.

“You’ve seen such a thing before,” Dina said, referring to her medallion.  “But I’ve never heard of a sword being forged like this.”

“So what the King told me was true,” Broín said, satisfied. “The Order of Amon Dähl would love to see this.” Dina froze and stared at him.

“My dear,” he chuckled. “I suspected at least one of you must be of the Order the moment I heard Lee’s story last night. I guess now I know which one.”

“Does anyone else suspect?” she whispered.

“Not likely,” he replied. “Your lot is pretty secretive, and not too many people read as much as I do - no one I can think of, in fact.  But every time I’ve ever run across stories about the Sword of Truth, the name Amon Dähl follows right behind. To tell you the truth, I wasn’t certain until just now. Only someone of that order, or maybe an elf, would have seen a material like this being used. But don’t fret; it’s just another in a long line of secrets that will keep me company when I die.”

He smiled pleasantly at Dina, and then turned to Maybell. “But enough chit-chat. Angus will take you to the Temple District whenever you’re ready, Sister.”

“Thank you,” she said, sitting down to eat.

“I’ll be accompanying her as well,” Lee added.

“Of course,” he replied. “As for the rest of you, I assume you don’t want to be spotted by unfriendly eyes, so please tell me if there is anything you need and I will see that you have it.”

“A lifetime supply of orange juice,” Gewey blurted, before he could stop himself.

Broín chuckled loudly, nearly doubling over with his laughter. “A lifetime supply might be more than I can provide, but you will not want for it while you’re here. It’s a favorite of mine too, so I keep plenty.”

Gewey turned red and thanked him.

Once everyone had finished breakfast, Angus showed Maybell and Lee to a waiting carriage and climbed up with the driver. Gewey and Kaylia sat in the parlor with Lord Ganflin as he showed them a popular card game from Althetas. An entire pitcher of orange juice sat on the table beside Gewey.

Millet busied himself with preparations for his journey. After a short but fierce debate with Lee the night before, Millet decided to venture out alone to purchase horses and provisions for the ride to Hazrah. Broín offered to accompany him, but Millet insisted he would rather be alone.

Dina, Malstisos, and Broín went to the study. Dina had planned to reveal her heritage to the elf, but apparently, Prustos had already done so. Malstisos offered to explain the elven code of honor to her, and Broín insisted on joining them, not wanting to miss an opportunity to expand his knowledge.

After lunch they all gathered together in the parlor to exchange tales and sing songs. Gewey noticed that many of the stories were just slightly different versions of those he had heard back home. The names and places were different, but the themes were the same. He had no voice for song, so he left the singing to Dina and Kaylia, who he thought had far more beautiful voices than his own.

Broín and Ganflin recited poems, but when it came to Gewey’s turn, he could think of nothing to share.

“Come now,” Broín encouraged him. “Surely you know a song from your home, or at least a story told to you as a child.”

“Yes,” Malstisos said, grinning merrily. “I weary of these lofty tales spun by men of learning. I would rather hear a simple tale told by simple folk.” Everyone cheered him on until it was clear they would not be satisfied until Gewey took a turn.

Gewey took a deep breath and tried not to be too aware of all the eyes looking at him. “Long ago,” he began, “there were two brothers named Bernard and Kyle who were the sons of a farmer. The farmer owned two large pieces of land: one in the fertile lowlands, and one in the rocky hills. When he passed away, he left the brothers all his land and possessions. Bernard loved his brother very much, so when Kyle came to him and asked to be given the rich lowlands so that he would have the means to marry his love, Bernard agreed, even though this meant he couldn’t afford to start a family of his own. Kyle swore that one day he would buy Bernard a farm next to his and share all that he had with his brother.

“Years passed, and Bernard waited as his brother took his wife and had three fine sons. He hoped that his brother would honor their agreement, but as the time wore on, he never did. Finally, Bernard became too old and weak to work his land, and because of his brother’s betrayal, he had no sons to work in his stead. Kyle had become rich and bought up all of the lowland farms in the county, but because he was selfish, he never did anything to help his poor brother.

“One day, a great storm came and the rivers overflowed. With nowhere else to go, Kyle went to the high hills with his family to take refuge. But because he was ashamed, he did not go to his brother for shelter. Instead, he sat with his family in the pouring rain atop a high hill and watched as all of their crops were swept away by the flood.

“The next day, the youngest of Kyle’s sons became very ill, and in his desperation he took the boy to his brother’s house.

“Bernard greeted his brother with joy and helped him nurse his son back to health. ‘Why do you help me?’ Kyle asked. ‘I have wronged you and broken my promise, and because of that you have no sons.’

“‘Yes, you have wronged me, brother,’ Bernard replied. ‘You have left me alone here on this rocky hill. Your shame has kept you from me. But that does not change that I love you. And though I have no sons, what has been worse is having no brother.’

“Bernard’s words held no hatred: instead, he wept with joy at the sight of the brother he had missed so much. Kyle vowed that when the water receded, Bernard could come live with him and his family.

“The farmer’s heart swelled with joy, and when the land dried, they all headed down the rocky hill together. On their way down, they saw that the rains had uncovered gold that ran from Bernard’s house, all the way to the basin. Kyle offered to have his sons collect the gold for Bernard, but Bernard insisted that they share it amongst themselves; as long as he was with his family, he had all that he wanted.

“The younger brother refused, and sent his sons to bury the gold, making them promise not to dig it back up until the two brothers were both dead. Together they went back to the lowlands, where they happily spent the remainder of their days.

“When the brothers died, the sons went to find the gold, but it was all gone except for two interlacing veins. Try as they might, they could not remove this gold from the ground. It was then the sons knew that the spirits of their father and his brother rested there, so they left it buried for all time.”

“Now there is a story for elf ears,” Malstisos cheered. “Your father told you this?”

“Yes,” Gewey answered. “When I was a small boy, he made sure to tell me a story every night. He even traded with the merchants for storybooks when he had told me all that he could remember.”

“He sounds like he was a good father,” Broín said.

“He was,” Gewey agreed, suddenly missing him very much.

There was a loud knock at the front door. Broín went to answer it, and moments later he returned holding a letter. Concern showed on his face.

“What is it?” Lord Ganflin inquired.

“A letter has arrived for Gewey,” Broín said, handing it to the boy.

“For me?” Gewey asked, startled. He opened the letter and read it. “You must find Lee right away.” His voice sounded frightened.

“I will go to the Temple District and find him immediately,” said Broín. “Do you know what temple he and Maybell would have gone to?”

“Ayliazarah,” Gewey answered. Broín nodded and flew out of the door.

“What does it say?” Kaylia asked anxiously.

Gewey handed her the letter. His own name was written just above the broken seal.

‘To Gewey Stedding of Sharpstone’

‘I wish to speak to you on behalf of my master. I mean you no harm and will be awaiting your presence at the Bean and Broth tavern. Bring who you wish, but I will be alone and unarmed. Do not flee. All of your movements are being watched, and it would be unfortunate if you did not hear what I have to say. I will wait for one hour.’

It was signed ‘Saylis Fernmen’.

“I will go with you,” Kaylia said firmly.

At first Gewey was going to tell her ‘no’ - that he didn’t want to put her in danger. But one look at her face told him there would be no argument.

“The rest of you must stay here,” he said. Gales of protest came from the remainder of the group, but Gewey was determined. “We can’t all be in the same place if this turns out to be a trap. The rest must stay here until I return.”

“Do you plan to wait for Lee?” Dina asked.

“For as long as I can,” he replied. “But if he is not back in time, then I must go without him.”

Gewey went upstairs to retrieve the sword Broín had given him. While still in his bedroom, he drew it. The blade sang as it slid from its scabbard. He stared at it for a long moment, and then sheathed it again.

“I hope you won’t need it,” Kaylia said from the doorway. “But all the same, it is good to be prepared.”

She tapped her finger on the hilt of her long knife and smiled wickedly.

Chapter 23

It took the carriage thirty minutes to get to the Temple District. Lee had the box wrapped and stuffed inside a cloth sack. He hoped the Sister they were going to see would be able to help, but he wasn’t optimistic. Maybell, on the other hand, was excited to see the woman, and told Lee many times along the way about her unparalleled knowledge in lore.

“She is by far the most learned Sister in the order,” she said. “If anyone can help us, it’s her.”

“No doubt,” said Lee, smiling patiently. “And I’m sure she’ll be happy to see you.”

“We were novices together,” she told him for the fifth time. “And best friends.” Maybell had the excited look of a young girl seeing a temple for the first time. The carriage stopped in front of the Temple of Ayliazarah, and Angus hopped down to open the door for them.

“We may be quite a while,” said Lee. “Feel free to leave. I’m sure you have other things that you’d rather be doing.” He reached into his pocket and tossed Angus a silver coin.

Angus looked at the coin as if Lee had insulted him, and then passed it to the driver, who was more than happy to accept. “My instructions are to be at your disposal,” he said. “I shall be here when you are ready to leave.”

Lee could barely contain his laughter. He bowed to the man and walked Maybell up the stairs to the temple.

The interior looked much like the temple in Kaltinor, except that smaller statues of the other eight gods surrounded the large statue of Ayliazarah in the center of the entrance hall. In the corners of the hall, several plush chairs were set up in small circles, and a short brass table with a thick glass top stood in the middle. At least a dozen novices buzzed about their business, and nearly all of the chairs were filled with men and women reading and talking.

Maybell stopped a passing monk. “Is Sister Ruthisa here?” she asked him.

“She would most likely be in the archives,” he answered courteously.  “Do you need directions?”

Maybell smiled. “No, thank you, brother; I know the way.”

Maybell led Lee up a flight of stairs and down a narrow hall to a marked door. Inside, tall shelves filled with hundreds upon hundreds of ancient-looking books lined the room.

“Ruthy,” Maybell called out as she poked her head down each row of shelves.

“Here,” an old woman responded, exiting one of the rows at the far end of the room.

Though Maybell had told Lee that she and the Sister were the same age, the woman he saw looked much older. She wore light blue and white robes, and her silver hair was wrapped in a thin silk scarf.

She was bent with age, and her stride was little more than a slow shuffle. In her arms she held a thick leather book that was nearly half as big as herself. She looked up though a pair of thick spectacles and smiled widely

“My word,” said Ruthy, feigning irritation. “I thought you’d forgotten about me, you witch!”

“Don’t just stand there,” Maybell chided Lee. “Help her with that large and probably very boring book.”

Lee suddenly felt like a guilty child, and he rushed to take the book from Ruthy’s arms.

Ruthy looked at him firmly. “Don’t let that old hag boss you around,” she scolded. “The day I can’t carry a bloody book on my own, I’ll just go ahead and die.”

The two women burst out laughing as Lee stood there, unsure of what to do. Ruthy handed him the book, then went over to embrace Maybell.

“By the gods, it’s good to see you,” Maybell said. Tears began streaming down her cheeks.

Ruthy stood back with her arms extended, still holding Maybell. “I’m so happy to see you, Bell. We heard about Kaltinor. I was afraid that demon of a woman might have done you in.”

“She wishes she had,” Maybell replied. “But alas, I live to fight another day.”

“Will you be staying?” Ruthy asked hopefully.

“Not quite yet,” she answered. “I’m only here until tomorrow. I have something for you see though.”

Lee removed the box and handed it to Maybell. Ruthy’s eyes grew wide as Maybell held it out.

“How did you get your hands on this?” she asked in a whisper. She trembled as she took the box and slowly ran her hands across the lid. “Do you know what this is?”

Maybell nodded. “The Book of Souls.”

“Quite right,” Ruthy replied as she traced the elven letters with her finger. “I assume you have been unable to open it?”

“That’s why we’re here,” Maybell explained.

“And I thought you had come to see me,” she teased.

“Don’t be cute,” said Maybell.

Ruthy grinned mischievously. “This is better than a visit. Besides, you promised me you’d retire here, and it certainly doesn’t look like you’re ready for that just yet.”

“Not quite,” she replied. “Can you help us?”

“To open the Book of Souls? Not a chance. It can only be opened by one with the power of heaven, or so the legends say. The elves kept it for centuries, but that part you probably know. It was stolen in the Great War, and was thought to be lost forever.”

“What is it, exactly?” Lee asked.

“It’s the very words written by the gods, is what it is,” she replied as she turned the box over and over, examining every detail. “In their own hand. It is said that if a being with the power of heaven were to read from its pages, creation itself could be undone.”

“No wonder the elves protected it,” Lee said in awe. “Such a thing in the wrong hands could doom the world.”

“Indeed,” Ruthy agreed. “But I don’t think there’s much danger of that. Even if someone who possessed it intended to destroy the world, they wouldn’t be able to get it open. The box itself is indestructible.”

“I found that out the hard way,” Lee admitted.

“The best thing you can do is return it to wherever you found it and leave it alone,” Ruthy advised. “The mere thought of wielding such power is enough to drive men mad. Even if they couldn’t get the box open, there’s no telling what they’d do to possess it in the hope that they one day could.”

Lee heard the door open behind them, followed by the sound of metal and leather. Suddenly the hairs on the back of his neck stood up. He spun around and drew the short dagger he had brought with him, silently cursing himself for leaving his sword at Lord Broín’s house. As he turned, he saw three men in studded leather standing just inside the door. Two carried crossbows, and the one in the middle held a short sword in one hand and a dagger in the other. Their faces were grim and weathered, and bore the scars of battle.

“What fortune,” said the man in the center. “I was only supposed to see that you remained here and out of the way, but now I find that you’ve brought a great treasure with you.”

Lee glanced down at the box as he slid it in front of Ruthy. “Leave now and I’ll allow you to live,” he said threateningly.

“My dear Lord Nal’Thain,” the man said with an evil smile. “Or do you prefer Lord Starfinder? I have no doubt you could kill every one of us. But if you don’t do exactly as I say, I shall see that these two lovely ladies precede us to the afterlife.”

Lee’s muscles tensed as he tried to think of a way to kill the soldiers while saving Maybell and Ruthy, but the man was right. The soldiers on either side of him had their crossbows trained directly on the Sisters. There was no way to save them if he attacked.

“I’ll give you nothing,” Ruthy said defiantly, holding the box tightly to her chest. “Kill them. I’ve lived long enough.”

“As have I,” Maybell said, her head held high.

The man chuckled, still wearing a sinister grin. “Such courage,” he said mockingly. “But I doubt Lord Starfinder wants the blood of two women on his hands. Isn’t that right?”

Lee seethed with rage. He could not let the Book of Souls fall into the hands of the Dark Knight; with the Sword of Truth at his disposal, the Dark Knight might actually be able to open it. If that happened, all was lost.

“If I give you the book, you will leave my friends in peace and depart this city immediately,” he demanded. “If you don’t, I will make you pray for death.”

“You are in no position to give commands,” the man replied. “You’ll give me the book, and I will keep you here as I was instructed to. After that, you’ll find the reason for your quest no longer exists, so I suggest you return home and hope my master forgets all about you.”

Lee felt a cold knot form in the pit of his stomach. It was clear they meant to keep him here until they had dealt with Gewey. He knew what had to be done. He readied himself to attack.

Just then, the soldier on the left yelped in pain as blood spewed from his mouth. The other two turned to look at their comrade, momentarily stunned. A moment was all Lee needed. In a flurry of motion, he sprang forward and slashed his dagger across the throat of the other bowman. Blood shot from the wound, spraying onto Lee’s face. The remaining soldier tried to flee, but was met by the sword of Lord Broín. He thrust his blade through the man’s heart, watching as the soldier gasped and fell to the floor.

“Looks like I arrived just in time,” Broín observed as he wiped his blade on the soldier’s trousers.

Lee nodded to Broín, then turned to Maybell. “Wait here. I’ll send word later.”

Before she could argue, Lee was gone, with Broín following behind.

Lee raced through the streets of Gristol as fast as his legs could carry him, his dagger still in his hand. Broín could not keep up and soon fell far behind. The instant Lee reached the house he flung the door wide open. Dina was stood just inside, looking upset.

“Where’s Gewey?” Lee demanded urgently. She recounted what had happened. “He left a little while ago for the Bean and Broth.”

“Fool,” he roared, running to his room to retrieve his sword.

“Where’s Millet?” he asked Dina as he fastened the blade to his belt.

“He still has not returned,” she replied nervously.

“When he does, tell him he leaves immediately,” he ordered.  “The rest of you get your things together. I’ll return as soon as I have Gewey and Kaylia.” With that, he took off towards the tavern.

Broín arrived a short while later, out of breath and holding his side. “By the Gods, that man is fast,” he said, gasping for air. Dina told him what Lee had said and explained that Malstisos had been guarding the others.

“Tell him to keep vigilant. I’ll be back soon.” He caught his breath and shook his head. “Wonderful,” he muttered to himself as he took off after Lee. “More running.”

Chapter 24

Gewey and Kaylia paused as they approached the door to The Bean and Broth. He had waited as long as he could for Lee, but the time had come when he could wait no longer. Malstisos had offered to accompany them, but Gewey refused this. When Malstisos insisted, Ganflin helped a bit in convincing him to stay behind.

“I’m rubbish with a sword,” he said to the elf. “Someone who can fight needs to be here.”

Reluctantly, Malstisos had relented, allowing Gewey and Kaylia to leave for the tavern alone.

Gewey stared at the door and checked his sword for the hundredth time. “If anything happens, I want you to promise me you’ll run,” he said gravely.

Kaylia reached up, pulled his face to hers, and kissed him softly. Gewey stood stunned, momentarily forgetting the danger. “You will never get such a promise,” she said firmly, but with a sweet smile. “I do not abandon my friends, and I certainly do not leave a suitor undefended.” Gewey smiled back, and they entered the tavern.

It took a second for his eyes to adjust to the dim light of the room, and he could hear nothing but the sound of the barman cleaning mugs and glasses. He rubbed his eyes and looked around. The tavern was empty save for the barman and a lone figure sitting in a corner, facing away from them. The barman looked up at Gewey and motioned toward the figure. Gewey and Kaylia walked up to the table and stood behind the man. He had blond, shoulder-length hair that was tied in a short ponytail and wore a simple maroon tunic and pants.

“Unless you intend to stab me in the back, I suggest you sit down,” he offered, sounding amused.

Gewey and Kaylia looked at one another for a moment and then took seats across from the man. To Gewey’s surprise, he didn’t look but maybe a few years older than himself.

“You’re Saylis Fernmen, I presume?” Gewey asked. His hand had not left the hilt of his sword.

“And you are Gewey Stedding,” he answered. “I see you have brought the lovely Kaylia with you - understandable, if unnecessary. I have come as I promised, alone and unarmed.”

“Good,” said Kaylia. Her tone was dangerous.

Saylis laughed confidently. “I didn’t mean to imply that I am unprotected. But for the purpose of our conversation, I thought a show of force might be…distracting.”

“What do you want?” demanded Gewey.

“Me?” he replied. “Nothing. Nothing at all. But my master on the other hand…” He motioned to the barman, who brought him a glass of wine. He looked over to Gewey and Kaylia “Would you join me?”

Gewey glared in silence.

“That will be all,” Saylis told the barman, tossing him a copper. “Now then, as I was saying, my master would very much like for you to come to Angrääl. There is no reason for you to run. He means you no harm and only wants your friendship.”

Kaylia laughed. “You must think us fools,” she sneered. “If that’s all you have to say, then you’ve wasted your breath.”

“Ah, the fury of an elf,” he mocked. “Such passion. The fact is, he has no need of you, my dear. If young Gewey wishes it, you can accompany him, but my orders say nothing about you except that I should be careful regarding your temper.” He leaned back and sipped his wine. “Oh yes, and if you should ask, I’m to inform you that your uncle has ordered your assassination.”

Kaylia forced a smile. “You seem to know much,” she allowed. “But if you think I’m not already aware of this, and your intent is to upset me and throw me off balance, you’ve misjudged me.”

“Not at all,” he replied. “I wish this encounter to be pleasant.”

“If that is all you have to say, then I have an answer for you,” said Gewey.

Saylis held up his hand. “Before you answer, you should hear the rest.” He paused a moment before continuing. “You seek to destroy my master. He knows this, but doesn’t blame you. You have been deceived. He only wishes that you understand the truth and perhaps aid him in his cause. By now you have discovered what you are, but you have no idea how you got here, or even how to use your power. My master can help. All he asks in return is that you stop this foolish quest for his destruction.”

“I’ve heard your master’s lies before.”

“Pure misunderstanding,” Saylis said dismissively. “His reaction was…unfortunate. Moreover, he wants me to convey his apologies. The truth is, he was shocked to discover of your existence, and he knows he acted unwisely. But now he is hopeful. That you have been abandoned on earth can be turned into a great boon for the whole world. If you join him, there is nothing that can’t be achieved.”

“It is your master’s desire for power that caused me to be here in the first place,” barked Gewey. “And I’m sick of listening to your lies.”

“Careful,” Saylis warned. His tone became dark and threatening. “Consider your words. If you refuse to listen to reason, you will not live to see the Temple of Valshara. But before you die, you will watch as your friends are tortured until they beg for death. Think about this. You can save yourself and your friends. All you have to do is come with me now. Bring the elf woman if it pleases you. I promise that the rest of your companions will be left in peace.”

“For how long?” boomed a voice as the tavern door was flung open. It was Lee. His sword was in his hand and his face was spattered with blood and sweat.

“I see I should have picked better men,” Saylis noted calmly. “I didn’t expect you, but please, join us.”

“No thank you,” Lee snapped as he strode over to the table. “We’re leaving.”

“Don’t you want to hear my proposal first?”

Lee reached down and grabbed Saylis by his hair, jerking his head back. “I’ll give you a proposal,” he hissed. “Tell your master that if he returns what he has stolen, he will receive a painless death. And as for you, if you are ever stupid enough to hinder me or my friends again, I will remove your eyes, cut off your hands, and set you loose in the wilderness.” He slammed Saylis’ head into the table, knocking him unconscious. “Let’s go.”

Gewey and Kaylia were stunned by Lee’s outburst, but they stood and followed him to the door. Broín ran up just as they were leaving.

“If you think I’m running any more, you’re wrong,” Broín told them, breathing heavily. Lee didn’t say a word as he stalked away with Kaylia and Gewey trailing behind.

“Don’t worry about me,” Broín called after them. “I’m fine.” He bent over and rested his hands on his knees. “I need a brandy,” he muttered before setting off at a run again to catch up.

When they reached Broín’s house, Millet was sitting on the stoop. “Good to see that you’re unhurt, My Lord,” he said. “I see you’ve retrieved Gewey and Kaylia.”

“Is everything ready?” asked Lee.

“I was only waiting for your return,” he replied. “Malstisos is with the horses at the back. Everything is packed and ready. All that’s missing is Sister Maybell.”

“I’m not missing,” said Maybell as she walked through the gate. She held the Book of Souls in her arms. “I’ll be ready to leave presently.”

“You’ll not be coming,” said Lee flatly.

“We’ve been over this before,” replied Maybell. “I’ll not be left behind, and that’s that.”

“I have no time to debate,” growled Lee. “We ride hard and fast, and if you can’t keep up you’ll be left behind.”

“My Lord,” interrupted Millet. “I only purchased two horses.”

“I have enough horses for you stabled nearby,” Broín offered. “I’ll send for them now.” He nodded to Angus, who immediately headed off.

Lee turned and looked at Gewey furiously as they entered the house. “Fool,” he yelled. “Have you lost your mind? What were you thinking?”

“What did you expect me to do?” Gewey shot back.

“I expected you to wait for me,’ said Lee. “You could have been killed. Then where would we be?”

“I don’t care what you say,” said Gewey. “I did the right thing. Besides, I didn’t go alone.”

Lee took a deep breath and rubbed his temples. “You still should have waited,” he said, calming himself. “I can’t allow you to be killed. You don’t understand how dangerous these people are. If it weren’t for Lord Broín, Maybell and her friend would most likely be dead right now. If they have the chance, they’ll kill us all. As it is, they set a trap that I walked right into.”

“What happened?” asked Gewey as they walked up the steps to their room.

Lee recounted the events at the temple. “And that stubborn woman refuses to stay here,” he complained, clenching his fists.

“Maybe she’ll listen to you.”

“I don’t think she will,” answered Gewey. “She believes all this is part of her destiny. Or at least, that’s what she says. I must admit, she hasn’t slowed us down yet.”

“Yes,” he agreed, “but she’ll push herself to death before she’ll admit she can’t keep up.”

Gewey thought for a minute. “Why not send her with Millet?” he suggested. “How could she refuse? There should be considerably less danger, and she might be a lot of help.”

A huge smile slowly grew on Lee’s face. “Now that’s a great idea,” he said and tore off down the stairs.

Kaylia came in a second later. “Are you alright?”

Gewey blushed, thinking about the kiss in front of the tavern.

“I’m fine,” he replied shyly. “Lee just overreacted, but we settled it. He’s going to ask Maybell to help Millet get his family out of Hazrah.”

“I heard,” she said, sitting on the bed. “That’s not what I mean. I’m talking about the scum in the tavern. Are you alright?”

Gewey smiled. “Actually, I feel better than I did before. My enemy seems more human now. He may have been trying to sound powerful, but to me he just sounded desperate. It gives me hope for victory.”

“Good,” she said and stood up. She placed her hand on his shoulder and squeezed almost imperceptibly.  Gewey felt a pleasant chill run down his spine. Kaylia smiled back at him. “I think the Dark Knight should be very afraid,” she said, and then left the room.

Gewey picked up his pack and headed downstairs, just in time to see Maybell storm past and slam her door shut. Lee was standing at the bottom of the stairs with a satisfied grin. Millet, on the other hand, wore a look of desperation.

“Please, My Lord,” begged Millet. “Don’t do this.”

“It’s done,” said Lee unyieldingly. Millet lowered his head and skulked away, muttering angrily.

Gewey couldn’t help laughing at the scene. “I take it that all went as you expected?”

“They leave as soon as Maybell is ready,” Lee replied.

Lord Ganflin came out from the study and handed a sealed letter to Lee. “When you get to Althetas, give this letter to Harlondo. He manages my affairs when I’m away. He will provide you with anything you need. You’ll probably beat me there by several days, so you may also wish to visit the innkeeper at the Frog’s Wishbone. That’s where the humans and elves meet most of the time. Do not open the letter; Harlondo is not the trusting sort and may give you a problem if the seal has already been broken. But now you must excuse me. All this excitement has made me forget that I am overdue to meet the mayor for dinner. I detest the man, but I must maintain certain relationships. It was a great pleasure to meet you all.”

“My thanks,” said Lee. “I hope to see you again under better circumstances.”

Lord Ganflin bowed low and departed into a waiting coach.

An hour later, Broín returned with three stable boys leading five magnificent horses. Lee stared at the animals in wonder.

“I see that you appreciate a good horse when you see one,” Broín noted with pride. “These are the finest animals for a thousand miles. If those who pursue you want to catch you, they’ll need to grow wings.”

“Where on earth did you get such animals?” asked Lee.

“They’re bred on the northwestern steppes by the nomadic tribes that dwell there. It wasn’t easy to get them to part with these; I’m proud to say that I’m the only man to ever leave with so many.”

“If our mission wasn’t so urgent, I could never accept,” Lee admitted.  “You must at least allow me to pay you - though I don’t know that I have enough money.”

“You misunderstand,” said Broín. “I have no intention of giving up my horses. I expect you to return them when all this is over and the Dark Knight has been defeated. But until then, they are yours to do with as you please.”

Lee smiled, overcome with the thought of such a generous gesture. “I shall take care of them until then,” he promised. “I hope one day I can talk you into taking another journey to the steppes with me, if only to see if I can pick one out for myself.”

“It would be a trip I would love to take.”

Millet readied one of the horses for Maybell. When the three were mounted, Lee handed Millet a small bundle of letters and nodded as if asking a silent question.

Millet reached down and took Lee’s hand. “All will be well,” he said reassuringly. “I’ll send word of our success.”

Malstisos rode up beside Lee. “I will look after your family. They will have my protection until I deliver them to your care.”

“Thank you,” said Lee, trying to force back tears of worry. “I am deeply in your debt.”

“You had better keep your word,” said Maybell as she admired her mount. “I will see the Temple of Valshara once this is done.”

“You don’t need to worry,” replied Lee. “You’ll see it, even if I have to carry you there on my back.”

Maybell tried to look angry, but seeing the worry on Lee’s face, she said instead, “I swear that I will not step foot in Valshara until your family is safe.”

Lee smiled and bowed. “Thank you, Sister. That means a lot to me.” He realized what a good idea it was to send Maybell.  She would lay down her life if necessary to protect his family, and her knowledge of the cities and temples could be invaluable.

Gewey and the rest bid them farewell and watched as they rode toward the east gate. Once they were out of sight, Lee called everyone into the parlor.

“Thanks to Lord Broín’s generous loan,” Lee began, “we should be able to make it to Althetas in less than seven days. We’ll be moving fast. We have enough food and water for the whole journey, so we won’t need to stop for supplies along the way. Once we arrive, Dina will make contact with her order, and from there on we should be safe.” His eyes focused on Gewey. “If anything happens and we’re separated, we’ll meet at the Frog’s Wishbone in Althetas. Wait there until I, or someone from Dina’s order, gets there.”

Dina stepped forward and pulled out her medallion so that Gewey could see it clearly. “If you are approached by anyone claiming to be in my order, make them show you this. Be sure to touch it. It should burn you. If it doesn’t, then that person is an imposter.”

“We need to be out of the city before sundown,” Lee continued.  “It’s certain they’ll see us leave, so we must move fast once we’re beyond the gates.”

“I’ll send word ahead,” said Broín. “I have a messenger flock on the roof. I’ll instruct my friends in Althetas to aid you.”

“Thank you,” Lee replied. “That would be helpful.”

“The horses have been saddled and packed,” said Angus, sticking his head through the door.

Lee and the others went outside and double-checked their belongings. Once mounted, Lee looked at Lord Broín and nodded respectfully.

“Until we meet again,” said Broín. “Angus is watching the gate and will tell me if you are followed.” He stood just outside his door and watched as Lee and the others slowly made their way down the street.

The ride to the gate was tense, and no one spoke a word. As they approached the gate’s heavy metal doors they saw Saylis Fernmen waiting for them. His head was bandaged, and his eyes were swollen and bruised.

Lee motioned for everyone to stop as he and Kaylia began scanning the alleys and rooftops for further trouble. Gewey put his hand on his sword, and Dina pulled out a small dagger.

“I thought I’d see you off,” called Saylis. Despite his words, his face was grim. “I want you to know that I’ll be there in the end, Starfinder. Mine will be the last face you ever see.” He shot Lee an angry look, then ducked down a nearby alley.

“He won’t try anything until we’re outside the gates,” Lee guessed, hoping he was right. “He may have set up an ambush. If that’s the case, I’ll handle it. The rest of you keep going and I’ll catch up. That means you, boy.” He looked straight at Gewey and didn’t look away until the boy nodded in agreement. “Don’t worry, I’ve had more capable men than this idiot think they could kill me. I’ll burn before I’ll let scum like him be the end of me.”

They urged their horses on and passed through the west gate.

“Are you ready?” Lee asked the others. They nodded. “Then let’s go.”

Lee booted his mount, sending the horse into a gallop. Gewey and the others did the same, and they were off like bolts of lightning. Gewey had never ridden so fast. He could feel the sheer power of the animal beneath him, and it thrilled him. He smiled at the thought of anyone thinking they could catch them.

Chapter 25

Salmitaya tossed and turned in her bed. The dreams had gotten worse in the past few days. Since her return to Kaltinor, things had become troubled. The other temples had shunned her, even those that had once secretly aided her. She still had the governor and lords on her side, but their loyalty was bought. Should Angrääl get word of her failure, she would lose everything; it was their gold that kept her in power.

“Maudina!” she yelled. A young girl scurried into the room, rubbing her eyes and trying not to yawn. Salmitaya had hired her to replace Celandine the day after she got back. She didn’t know what had happened to Celandine, but swore to flay the girl if she ever returned.

“Yes, Your Holiness?” Maudina said meekly.

“I want some hot tea,” she ordered, sitting up in bed.

“Right away,” the girl replied, dashing off. Salmitaya got up and put on her slippers and a soft cotton robe. She hated the temple at night. The emptiness made her uneasy. The book she had been reading lay open on a small table next to a plush chair. Her thoughts kept returning to Gewey as she distractedly fingered through its pages.

Damn that boy, she thought. If it’s the last thing I do, I’ll see him beg and scream.

Several minutes passed and Maudina still had not brought the tea. “Blasted girl,” she muttered. “What’s taking so long?”

“You’ll not be needing a servant, my love,” came a deep voice from just outside the open door leading to the next room.

Salmitaya shot out of her chair. “Who are you?” she demanded. “Show yourself.”

In stepped a tall, lean man dressed in a black shirt and pants with polished silver buttons. These were paired with an exquisite jacket with impossibly intricate white embroidery. A fearsome curved sword hung from a belt that sat loosely around his thin waist. His face looked young, and his brown curly hair fell to his shoulders. In his hands was a tray with two cups of hot tea. He placed the tray on her bedside table and handed her one of the steaming cups.

“Sit down, my love,” he instructed as he pulled himself a chair from the corner. “We have much to discuss.”

Salmitaya was terrified as she sat back down. “Who are you?”

“You may call me Yanti,” he answered, smiling.

“Well, Yanti,” she said, trying her best to sound unafraid. “You have trespassed in the Temple of Ayliazarah. Leave now, or I’ll see you whipped and hanged.”

Yanti looked amused as he blew on his tea. “That’s not very hospitable of you considering I’m here to save your life.”

“What do you mean? Speak sense.”

“You didn’t think your failure would go unnoticed, did you?” he asked in a level tone.

“I – I...” she stammered with sudden realization. “I was going to report it. I swear.”

“Of course you were. That’s exactly what I told the master. I told him that you would never try to deceive him - especially knowing what would happen if you did.”

“I’m sorry I failed,” she said, desperately trying to hold in her sobs. “I was betrayed. Someone helped the boy escape. There’s no way I could have known.”

“Calm yourself, my love,” Yanti soothed her, holding up his hand. “We already know what happened, and it’s being dealt with. I’m here to offer you a chance to redeem yourself. You’d like that, wouldn’t you?”

“I’ll do anything,” she vowed. Tears began to fall down her cheeks.

“I know you will, my love.” He leaned back in his chair, stirring his tea with the tip of his finger. “The master does not doubt your loyalty, only your judgment. Normally that’s enough to warrant… discipline, especially considering the trust and responsibility that you’ve been given. But I’ve convinced him that you deserve a second chance.”

Salmitaya slid from her chair and dropped to her knees. “Thank you!” she groveled. “Tell me what I must do. I swear I will not fail again.”

Yanti sat his teacup on the arm of the chair and stood up. “There’s no need for such a display,” he said, helping Salmitaya to her feet. He lifted her chin and tenderly wiped the tears from her face with a handkerchief he’d produced from his jacket pocket. “I’ve left you instructions on the table in your study. You should open them right away, my love.”

Salmitaya nodded her head slowly. Yanti smiled and turned to leave. “One more thing,” he said, glancing back toward her. “It would be unfortunate if you failed again. I don’t think I’d be able to intervene twice.” Salmitaya watched silently as he left.

As soon as she heard the door to the main hall close she ran to her study. Just as Yanti had told her, there was a sealed letter on the table. She opened it and read its contents. By the time she finished, she was weeping again. She looked around the room as if hoping someone might come to save her, and then collapsed in a heap. Eventually, she gathered her wits and went to bed.

The dreams she had that night were the most terrifying yet.

Chapter 26

Lee marveled at how hard the horses could be pushed, and promised himself to make good on the trip to the northwestern steppes with Lord Broín. They had been riding full speed for more than twenty minutes, and so far he’d seen no sign of an ambush. If they didn’t run into one by sundown, he thought it unlikely they would run into one at all. They’d entered the Great Faldon Plains that stretched all the way to the Abyss; though not impossible, concealing an ambush here would be difficult. The tall grass could easily cover a man’s presence, but horses would have to be moved far enough away from the road so as not to be seen. The Plains were sparsely populated, dotted with ranches and farms. The few small towns were little more than trading posts frequented by drovers and travelers on their way west. A few shallow rivers and streams were the only real interruptions in the vast, flat landscape.

By the time they finally stopped to rest their mounts they had already covered many miles. Lee looked behind them, pleased with their progress. A series of wells lined the road to Althetas, placed roughly every twenty-five miles to aid thirsty travelers. Lee knew some of them to be dry from his previous travels, but most made good spots to rest and water their horses.

“It doesn’t look like anyone’s waiting for us,” Gewey observed as his horse drank from a small trough next to the well.

“So far,” Lee acknowledged warily. “But I’d say we need to pass two more of these wells before we’re far enough away to be sure. They may still be waiting for us. Hopefully, they’re not clever enough to let us pass, then attack us by night.”

“If they’re foolish enough to attack an elf in the dark, then let them,” Kaylia said, grinning. “It will be their last mistake.”

“Actually, I think it more likely they’ll ambush us with bows,” Lee replied. “I doubt they’ll want to risk getting too close unless they have to. It’s what I would do.”

The sun was going down, and Lee told them they would be riding through the night. It was fully dark by the time they approached the next well. Kaylia got off her horse, and she and Lee prepared to scout the area. Gewey wanted to join her, but Lee stopped him.

“Protect Dina if something happens,” Lee instructed.

“I don’t need protecting,” Dina argued.

“We all need protecting,” Lee replied. “But until we get to your people, you are our only means of making contact. So you will be protected.”

Dina growled, but held her tongue.

“Keep quiet,” Kaylia scolded them. “I’ll go alone. Lee can stay here and Dina…you can protect Lee,” she said mockingly. She checked her knife and crept into the darkness.

When Kaylia returned, she motioned for everyone to get down and stay quiet. “There are men about,” she whispered.

“Where and how many?” Lee asked, quickly drawing his sword.

“One hundred yards south of the well,” she answered. “About a dozen.”

“Could you tell who they are?”

“No, I didn’t get close enough. We should move the horses back, then take a closer look.”

“You two wait here,” Lee told Gewey and Dina. “Kaylia and I are going to see what we can find out.”

“I should go,” Gewey asserted. “I’ve trained to hide in the shadows. They won’t see me.”

“He’s right,” Kaylia agreed. “You may be fierce in a fight, but you can’t match him in stealth any longer.”

Lee thought for a second, then looked at Gewey. “Observe only,” he said firmly. “Nothing else.”

Gewey nodded and removed his sword. “Take care of this for me,” he said, handing it to Dina. She was careful to touch only the scabbard.

Gewey retrieved his knife and put it in his belt. He and Kaylia had only taken a few steps before they vanished from Lee and Dina’s sight, as if by magic. Lee smiled with pride.

“He’s learned much,” Dina remarked.

“No doubt,” Lee replied. “It’s hard to see the boy who left the farm in the man who now travels with us.”

Gewey followed closely behind Kaylia. There were no trees to hide behind, but still he could see how the night changed and shifted ahead of him. The shadows were subtle, but they were there.

He allowed his eyes to penetrate and then eliminate the darkness, marveling at how much his training had changed his perceptions.

Gewey was able to see the men from about fifty yards away. They were knelt down in the tall grass looking toward the well, though he was certain there was no way they could see it in the dark from where they were. He figured they were listening for the sound of approaching horses. He made out fourteen men, all carrying swords and wearing studded leather armor. Kaylia motioned for him to stay where he was, then circled around to look from the other side. Her graceful movements made it difficult not to watch her as she left. She returned a few minutes later, and together they headed back.

“Well?” Lee asked anxiously.

“They’re not alone,” Kaylia told him. “Another group of ten bowmen is waiting less than fifty yards west of the first group.”

“Bait,” Lee said. “They want us to engage close up; if we discover the first group waiting for us and attack them, the bowmen will rain down arrows killing everyone, including their own men. A clever plan, actually.”

“Can’t we just go around and avoid them altogether?” Dina asked.

“We could,” Lee replied. “And if we were on foot, we would. But if they have any other men about that we haven’t yet seen, they could alert the rest. And frankly, I don’t want to face two-dozen men head-on. As it stands, they don’t know we’re here yet.”

“So what’s the plan?” Gewey asked.

Lee scratched his chin in thought. “They’ve set a trap, so we’ll let them think it has worked. I’ll sneak up and engage them from the north. The first group will be listening for horses to approach the well, so when I attack they’ll think we’ve spotted them and decided on a full frontal attack. Gewey, you and Kaylia will move in behind the bowmen. They’ll hear the fight and think the trap is sprung. Once they’ve let loose their arrows on the first position, take them out. Don’t give them a chance for a second shot. After the first volley, I’ll move to your position and help you finish them off. Any survivors from the first group should be confused and scattered. If any are left, we’ll take care of them last.”

“And what about me?” Dina asked, not wanting to be left out.

“You stay with the horses,” he answered. “If we’re killed or captured, ride back to Gristol and tell Lord Broín what happened.”

“I’ll not stand by like a helpless child while the rest of you go headlong into danger,” she said stubbornly.

“I have no time to argue with you, woman,” Lee snapped. “You are capable, but you are not a warrior. You could get someone killed.”

“How would you know what kind of warrior I am?” she challenged. “My order trains us in weapons. Some of us are among of the best swordsmen that ever lived.”

“Are you one of them?” Lee asked sarcastically. “If so, then by all means, ready your weapon. If not, we face two dozen men, and one weak link could get us all killed.”

Dina glared at Lee for a moment, then threw Gewey his sword.

Satisfied, Lee turned to Gewey. “Listen carefully,” he said. His tone was grave. “I know you’ve never killed before. But you cannot hesitate once the fighting begins. If you don’t kill them, they will kill you.”

Gewey nodded solemnly, “I understand.” He had never really thought about what it would be like to kill a man, but now he was faced with that likelihood. He steeled his nerves and put on his sword. “But I have a question: When they fire their arrows, where will you be?”

“Hoping not to get hit,” Lee replied. “Don’t worry, I’ll keep the soldiers between me and the bowmen. It’s a risk, but one we have to take. If I am hit, don’t stop fighting until they’re all down. Understood?”

Gewey didn’t like it, but he knew Lee was right. It was the only way to make it work.

“Let’s go,” Lee said. “I’ll wait fifteen minutes for you to get into position. Remember; don’t attack until they’ve fired.”

Gewey and Kaylia moved silently around to where the bowmen waited. As soon as they were in position, they drew their weapons. Although more accustomed to fighting with a knife, for some reason the sword now felt perfectly natural in his hand - probably because of the bonding that had occurred when he’d first drawn it, he imagined. He could sense the thumping heartbeat of the earth, and the sword was warm to his touch. Kaylia pointed to the left, motioning for Gewey to attack there first. She would go to the right.

A short time later, the night erupted into chaos. He could hear screams from the first group, and orders being barked out in the confusion as Lee wreaked havoc upon them. Gewey gritted his teeth, forcing himself to wait. Just as Lee had predicted, he heard the commander order the bowmen to make ready. His muscles tensed and his heart pounded in his ears.

Then, it happened. The bowmen lined up in a single row and notched their arrows.

“Loose!” yelled the commander.

Kaylia burst from their hiding place just as Gewey heard the twang of the bows being fired. He flew out immediately after her, giving the soldiers no time to see them until it was too late. Kaylia slashed two across the throat and gutted a third. Gewey focused on a man standing on the far left of the row. He swung hard, and the sword passed clean through the man’s leather armor. Gewey heard a scream as the man clutched his chest. A second soldier rushed at Gewey from his right, but Gewey stepped aside and brought his blade down across his attacker’s bare neck, sending his head rolling across the ground. Suddenly, time slowed, and his sword struck home over and over again. The fever of battle overcame him as he continued to seek out new adversaries.

At last, the screams of the dying men became silent. He wasn’t sure how much time had passed, or even how many men he had faced. His sword felt alive in his hand.

“Gewey,” a voice called. It sounded distant and faint. “Stop.”

He didn’t want to stop.

“Gewey,” it called again. This time the voice was louder.

He felt the thump, thump of the earth coursing through his veins. He looked for someone else to fight, but there was no one.

“Gewey!” This time, the voice broke through. It was Kaylia.

He shook his head as the world crashed in. He expected to see the dead bowmen lying all around him, but he found he wasn’t where he thought he would be. Instead, he was standing fifty yards away, among the first group of men. Lee and Kaylia were standing nearby, staring at him in awe.

“They’re all dead,” said Kaylia. She slowly walked over to him and put her hand on his sword arm.

“How did I get here?” Gewey asked, bewildered.

“You don’t remember?” Lee countered.

“Not really,” he replied, trying to make sense of what had just happened. “I mean…I do, but it’s like I saw it through someone else’s eyes. What did I do?”

It was then he noticed the carnage around his feet. The dead were scattered everywhere, their limbs severed cleanly, as if cut off by a razor instead of a sword. He heard the sickly squish of blood and earth as he shifted his feet.

“I watched you kill over a dozen men as if they were ants,” Lee said. “Some of them you cut completely in half.

“I had just finished causing confusion in the first group when the arrows began to fall; only one or two of the men were struck, and none of them fatally. I was actually worried that this might not work when I saw you charging in. I didn’t even have a chance to raise my sword again before you took out half of them. In all my days, I’ve never seen anything like it.”

Gewey looked down at his sword. It dripped with blood. He couldn’t believe what he had done, nor did he know how to feel about it. In a daze, he reached down, tore some cloth from one of the dead soldiers, and cleaned his sword.

“We should leave,” Kaylia suggested. “I don’t want to see what the dawn brings here.”

“Agreed.” Lee looked at Gewey with concern. “Are you alright?”

“I will be,” he replied. “Eventually.”

“I know how hard it is the first time you are forced to kill,” Lee reassured him. “But you’ll get through it. I’ll help you.”

“That’s just it,” Gewey replied. “It isn’t the killing that bothers me, even though I know it should.”

“What is it then?”

“It’s the feeling,” Gewey said coldly. “It was like something inside me took over…and it felt…good. I never understood what power is until that moment.” He turned his back to Lee. “I don’t think I can wield it. It’s too much...too tempting.”

Lee smiled and put his hand on Gewey’s shoulder. “That’s why you can,” he said softly. “Understanding the danger of power is the only way to wield it wisely and with compassion. I’m sorry you had to learn it this way, but I am pleased that you understand the dangers. That gives me hope - for all of us.”

Gewey looked over his shoulder and nodded. “Thank you. I’ll be fine in a while. It’s just that so much has happened so quickly. It’s a bit overwhelming.”

“I understand,” said Lee. “I really do. But we need to leave now. We’ll talk more when we stop again.”

Dina was waiting with the horses when she saw them approach, covered in blood. The far away stare on Gewey’s face filled her with concern. She wanted to ask if he was all right, but he didn’t even look up at her. He climbed in the saddle and sat there motionless.

“What happened?” Dina asked.

“They’re all dead,” Lee told her. “We should have no more trouble - at least until we get to Althetas.”

They rode on until daybreak, giving Gewey time to think on what had happened. A flood of regret and anxiety filled his heart, and suddenly the faces of the men he had killed became clear. He could see the horror in their eyes as his sword cut through them. By the time he dismounted, he was weeping uncontrollably.

“I know, Gewey,” Lee said comfortingly. “Most people who are forced to kill aren’t put into a situation like that. I’d like to say it gets easier, but it doesn’t.”

“It doesn’t seem to bother you or Kaylia,” he sobbed. “I’ve seen you both kill. Sometimes you even look like you enjoy it.”

“I never enjoy killing,” Lee replied. “I feel it every time. It’s just that I’ve come to terms with it. And I was much older the first time I took a life.”

“It is right that you weep,” Kaylia interjected. “As the elves say, you have become a bringer of death.”

“That’s enough,” Lee snapped.

“No,” Gewey said, “Let her speak. I want to hear it.”

“You are not a human,” Kaylia continued. “But nor are you an elf. You are a power in this world, and death will follow you wherever you go. But you must learn that without it, there can be no victory. Those men you killed tonight stood against all that you love and honor. Suppose you found a way to let them live. Do you think they would thank you, return to their homes, and raise crops? No! You would find yourself facing them again and again.

“You should weep because you have left a part of yourself behind that is innocent. Mourn the loss, but rejoice that you have gained the strength to protect those that you love from the evils of this world. We elves do not take a life lightly, but once done, it cannot be undone. We gain strength in the knowledge that each person we kill is set free and cleansed of all evil. To meet the creator, purified, is the greatest gift one can bestow.”

“Are you saying you believe that a person can only be forgiven if they are killed in battle?” Gewey asked.

“Not at all,” she replied. “We believe that all spirits are pure. Only in life is someone evil. We do not believe that the sins of this life continue to the afterlife. How could we? Atonement would be impossible, and we would be doomed for all eternity.”

“I just wish the pain would go away,” said Gewey. “At first it was different…I felt almost numb. But then it all came rushing in. I know I must cope with this, but I think it will take time to learn how.”

“There are no easy answers,” Lee acknowledged. “But the fact that you’re asking questions tells me that you’re on the right path. In time, you’ll find a way to deal with the pain. But I don’t think you’ll ever forget it; I know I haven’t.”

Gewey lowered his head in thought. “I wish I understood what happened. It was as if the sword came alive in my hand. I could feel the power of the earth like never before. It was intoxicating.”

“I think I might know what happened,” Dina chimed in, approaching the trio. “I think it had something to do with the bond between you and your sword.”

“My sword?”

“It’s made from the same material as my medallion. It’s more than just a way we identify one another. We also use it to focus our energy when we meditate. The more talented among us can use it to project their spirit and see other places without physically being there. I think your sword may have amplified your abilities in some way. I’m not sure how, but perhaps someone at the temple could tell you when we get there.”

“If that’s the case, you should be careful until we understand it better,” Lee advised.

Gewey nodded. It made sense. He thought about the heat of the sword and the pulse of the earth coursing through his body; it was as if he and the energy were one. He would definitely have to take care. They ate a quick meal of dried figs and water, then continued on. The remainder of their trip was less than comfortable; Lee refused to allow a fire, and the nights were cold. Kaylia huddled next to him on several occasions. At first he felt uneasy, but by the third night he looked forward to it. Their speed had them just outside of Althetas in only six days.

The few towns along the way were easy enough to avoid. Gewey marveled at the endurance of their mounts; even after a hard ride they acted as though they were ready to run some more. It was little wonder the people of the steppes guarded their animals so jealously - just one would be worth a dozen of any other horse he had ever seen. He promised himself to return to Sharpstone with one of his own. The whole village would be envious of him. He smiled at the thought.

When they were ten miles from the city, Lee told them to make camp. He and Kaylia would scout ahead, just in case there were any more surprises waiting for them. Gewey told him that he wanted to join them, but Lee stubbornly refused.

“I’ll not have you captured or killed just before we reach our destination,” said Lee. “Besides, I need you to guard the horses.” He was careful not to say that he also needed Gewey to protect Dina. He wasn’t in the mood for that argument again.

To Gewey and Dina’s delight, Lee decided it would be all right to risk a small fire.

“At least we won’t be sitting here in the dark while they’re off having fun,” Dina said, after Lee and Kaylia had departed.

“I was getting a bit tired of sitting in the dark too,” he admitted.

Dina got some dried meat and flat bread from her pack and split it with Gewey.

“I have a surprise,” she said impishly, then pulled a small flask from inside her saddlebag. When she opened it, the smell of plum brandy filled the air. “Broín gave it to me just before we left.” She took a sip, then passed it to Gewey.

Gewey hadn’t really been a big fan of plum brandy, but he took it anyway. The far-too-sweet taste made it hard to swallow. “Thanks,” he said, forcing a smile.

Dina laughed. “I see how much you enjoy plum brandy,” she teased. “Still, I refuse to drink alone.” She grabbed the flask and took a sizable mouthful. “I’ve noticed that you and Kaylia have become rather…close?”

“What do you mean?” Gewey asked, suddenly embarrassed. “We’re friends.”

“Is that how you feel about her?” she replied with a slight grin.

Gewey became painfully aware of Dina’s eyes on him, and noticed that she had moved closer. “Of…of course,” he stuttered. “What else would I feel?”

“That’s not for me to say,” she said, handing him the flask again. “But I see how she looks at you.”

“How’s that?” Gewey asked, not really wanting to hear the answer.

“Like one who is in love.” Her eyes twinkled in the firelight and her voice was playful. “Don’t pretend you don’t know what I’m talking about. I’ve seen the way you look at her too.”

“I…I didn’t mean to…I wasn’t...” He couldn’t find the right words. His heart was beating so fast, he felt as if it would burst from his chest.

Dina draped her arm around his shoulders and met his eyes. “It seems like you are in quite a dilemma, wouldn’t you say?” Suddenly she jumped up, spun on her toes, and danced around the fire. “Don’t worry. These things have a way of sorting themselves out.”

Gewey wasn’t sure if the whole thing was just a cruel joke or not. For the next few hours he tried to avoid conversation, but Dina kept at him until he finally stormed off and pretended to check his horse.

When Lee returned with Kaylia, Gewey could barely look up at her. He was afraid she would see him blushing, and he’d had quite enough embarrassment for one night.

“Everything looks fine all the way to the city gate,” Lee told them as he retrieved his blanket from his saddlebag. He sniffed the air. “Is that plum brandy I smell?”

“It is indeed,” Dina answered cheerfully, throwing him the flask. “I saved you some.” Lee nodded gratefully and took a sip.

Kaylia noticed Gewey was out of sorts. “What’s wrong?”

“Nothing,” Gewey lied. “I’m fine. I’m just tired.”

“We should try to get a good night’s sleep,” Lee said. “Tomorrow should be a telling day.”

They all rolled out their blankets and settled down. Gewey tried to place himself as far from Dina and Kaylia as he could, but he somehow ended up between them in spite of his efforts.

Sleep did not come easily, even after a larger than normal swallow of jawas tea.

Chapter 27

Gewey couldn’t help but be excited as they approached the gates of Althetas. From more than a mile away he could see the buildings rising above the city wall. Some looked to be over five stories tall.

“Is the whole city like that?” Gewey asked.

Lee laughed lightheartedly. “A good portion of it. Althetas is the largest city on the Western Abyss. All the cities and towns for hundreds of miles come here for trade.”

“How far are we from the Abyss?”

“Not far,” Lee replied. “Less than thirty miles, I should say.”

“Why not build it on the shore? Wouldn’t it be easier for shipping?”

“Long ago, Althetas was on the shore,” Lee explained. “But a great storm nearly destroyed it, so they moved it here. Most towns along the shore now are small ports and fishing villages. The storms of the Western Abyss are enormous. They don’t hit often, but when they do, everything is destroyed.”

Gewey nodded, wondering what it would be like to see such a storm up close.

The walls of the city were twenty feet high and ten feet thick, made from gigantic blocks of black granite. As they approached, the guards waved them to a halt.

“State your business,” called the guard, seemingly bored.

“Trade,” Lee replied.

“How long will you be staying?”

“Three days.”

The guard gave their party a quick once over. “If your stay lasts longer than one week, you’ll have to register at the clerk’s office. Welcome to Althetas.” He waved them on without enthusiasm, and then went back to his post where a chair and a jug of ale awaited him.

As they passed the gates, Gewey stared at the sights of the city, unable to believe his eyes. The streets were jammed shoulder to shoulder with people - some selling wares, others trading, and even some who were standing on boxes shouting quotes from various scriptures at the crowds. Most of the taller buildings had balconies on each floor where people were eating and drinking far above the hustle and bustle. Gewey stared, wishing he could see the city from their vantage point.

Lee noticed Gewey staring at the balconies. “Impressive, isn’t it? Millet loves Althetas. He and I once stayed here for six months. There used to be a great sword master that lived here, and his home was in one of the taller buildings. While we’re here, I’ll see if I can arrange for us to visit one. On the north end of the city there used to be some taverns on the top floors; I’m sure some of them are still there.”

Gewey beamed with excitement. “Do you think Lord Ganflin’s house is anything like this?”

Lee laughed. “Certainly not. From the directions he gave me, his manor is in the southern garden district where they prefer traditional, two-floor houses. The aristocrats consider the rest of the city to be somewhat tacky.”

Gewey looked at Lee in amazement. He couldn't imagine anyone thinking such wondrous buildings to be tacky. “The lords here must be a bunch of idiots.”

“I’ll tell Ganflin you said so,” Lee teased. “I’m sure he’ll agree.”

“Maybe that’s not such a good idea,” Gewey said with a smile. “Considering we’re staying at his house.”

Just then, Gewey noticed something he didn’t expect: an elf. He was standing in front of the door to an inn, talking to a short human. Kaylia noticed too.

“I know they told us that elves walk freely in this city,” said Kaylia, “but to actually see it…”

“You should remove your hood,” Gewey suggested.

Kaylia paused for a moment, and then did just that. Her auburn hair flowed free, and she closed her eyes, letting the sun shine on to her face. With her bronze skin glowing in the sunlight, Gewey thought she looked beautiful. He scanned the crowd to see if anyone had noticed. A few people cast a quick glance in their direction, but for the most part they were ignored.

“How does it feel?” he asked.

“Strange,” she replied. “But good. I hate hiding.”

“You shouldn’t have to hide,” Dina said. “None of us should.”

Kaylia nodded in agreement. “Maybe one day we won’t have to.”

Lee led them through the crowded streets to the southern garden district. Just as Lee had said, the houses in this area were single and two-story dwellings, their brick walls covered in ivy and protected by wrought iron gates. The streets were clean and far less crowded than the rest of the city. Fine coaches driven by haughty men in red and gold jackets and pulled by horses nearly as well adorned as the drivers navigated the wide avenues. Lords and ladies in elegant attire strolled down the broad sidewalks.

Lee stopped in front of an immense manor and dismounted. The double-gated wall was at least ten feet high. A man in a gold silk suit and waistcoat stood at the gateway.

“Is Harlondo in?” Lee asked politely.

“He is,” the gatekeeper responded. “Might I tell him who calls?”

Lee pulled the letter Lord Ganflin had given him from his pocket. “I have a message from Lord Ganflin.”

“I see. Please wait here.” The man passed through the gate and disappeared inside the manor.

Gewey was amazed by the size of the estate; it was bigger than most temples. The entire structure was made from polished white granite and sat upon at least three acres of land. The vestibule was lined with stone columns supporting a veranda that spanned the entire front of the house. The driveway was almost as wide as the avenue, and the well-manicured lawn and gardens held plants and flowers of so many varieties that it would take someone an entire spring just to name them all. He recognized flowers such as roses and tulips from back home, but others looked as though they belonged in a fairytale. Low lying lavender blooms sprinkled with deep yellow swirls followed a stone path leading to a white, ivy-wrapped gazebo.

At the center of the yard was a marble fountain created in the likeness of Althetas Mol, the Goddess of Wisdom and Compassion, the patron goddess and namesake of the city. Beautiful carved wooden benches faced the fountain at six-foot intervals, and a small table had been placed beside each of them.

When the gatekeeper returned he was accompanied by a short man in a gray-buttoned shirt and trousers, together with a thin black jacket. His hair was jet black and slicked back with oils. He wore silver reading glasses and was carrying a leather binder under his arm.

“You have a message from Lord Ganflin,” Harlondo said by way of greeting. His voice was high and almost feminine.

Lee handed him the letter and waited as he broke the seal and read.

“I see,” said Harlondo, putting the letter into his pocket. “Greetings My Lords and Ladies. Welcome to the house of Lord Ganflin. I have instructions to treat you as I would Lord Ganflin himself. Clearly he holds you in high regard.” He gave a loud whistle, and four young boys ran from the house. “Your horses will be well-tended and your belongings brought to your rooms. Will you be sleeping separately, or shall I have couple’s suites prepared?”

“Individually will be fine,” Lee answered.

Harlondo raised an eyebrow. “Excellent. Please, come with me.”

“You didn’t want a couple’s suite did you?” Lee whispered to Gewey, trying to hide a smile. Gewey clenched his jaw and shot him a dirty look.

The inside of the manor was even more impressive than the outside. On either side of the large foyer sat marble basins full of perfumed water that gave the air a pleasing scent of lavender. Beyond the foyer, an alabaster staircase rose majestically before splitting into two spirals that led to opposite sides of the house. The polished marble walls were covered with elaborate tapestries and fine oil paintings depicting members of the Ganflin family in various heroic acts. To the far left were large double doors that led to the formal dining room, and in the corner was a smaller wooden door that provided access to the rear chambers. On the right hand side were three separate doors leading to the studies and offices. Directly behind the stairs, a huge archway opened up to a ballroom, where an exquisite crystal chandelier hung from the vaulted ceiling. Though the room was currently unused, it was well lit, and the lights beamed and reflected from around the steps to sparkle against the pink marble floor.

“We have hot showers in each room,” Harlondo informed them. “However, a bath can be prepared if you prefer.”

“A shower?” Gewey asked. “What...?”

“Showers will be fine,” Lee said, cutting him off.

“Martin will show you to your rooms,” Harlondo continued, motioning to a tall, silver-haired man in a straight cut, blood red suit and jacket. “I have business to attend to, but I’ll be joining you for dinner this evening. I can see you’ve traveled light, so a change of clothing will be brought up directly.”

“Thank you, Harlondo,” Lee said graciously. “That would be much appreciated.”

Harlondo bowed and took his leave. Gewey smiled, thinking that Lee was right at home in this environment.

Martin led them upstairs and to the left. At the end of the hall they turned right and were shown to their rooms in turn. Gewey couldn’t believe his eyes when he entered his own suite; it was as big as the common room of most inns. An oak feather bed - large enough for three grown men - sat flush against the back wall, and to its left was a glass dressing table and mirror. To the right was a small, round breakfast table with two chairs, and beyond that stood a tall, carved mahogany wardrobe with polished brass handles.

In the near left corner was by far the most interesting feature: a round curtain hung from the ceiling above a section of black tiles. Gewey pulled back the curtain and saw three copper pipes protruding from the ceiling. The first of the pipes hung about a foot below the eight-foot ceiling. At the end of this pipe was a cone-shaped attachment with tiny holes drilled into the solid facing. The other two pipes ran down to his chest level, each one fitted with a small brass handle. Attached to each handle was a tray; one held a small bar of soap, and the other a square piece of pink coral. He knew what the soap was for, but had no idea what purpose the coral might serve. Curious, Gewey grabbed one of the handles and turned. Water sprayed down from the pipe above and poured over his head. It was hot - scalding hot. He screamed in shock and leapt away. He watched the water spill onto the tiles and swirl down a recessed drain in the center.

Gewey heard Lee laughing behind him. “I was just coming to show you how to use that. I guess I’m a bit late.”

“This must be a shower,” he said as water dripped down his face. He wasn’t looking at Lee at all. “What a marvel!”

“I thought you’d like it,” Lee said. “Dina’s showing Kaylia how to use hers right now.”

Lee showed Gewey how to adjust the water temperature by manipulating the handles and explained that the coral was used to scrub off dead skin.

“Be careful with it though,” Lee warned. “Scrub too hard and you’ll peel your skin right off.”

Gewey relished his first shower. He had never felt anything like it, and he swore that when he finally returned home, he would build one for himself.

Martin came in during his shower and announced that he had placed Gewey’s belongings next to the wardrobe and laid out fresh clothing on the bed.

“Your friends will join you in the parlor,” Martin told him. “This is to the left from your room, at the end of the hall.”

When Gewey stepped out of the shower he felt refreshed - even more so than after a good night’s sleep. The clothing Martin had supplied was every bit as fine as the suit Lee had bought him for his coming of age party, which he’d sadly had to leave behind in Gristol. His fresh attire was a cream silk shirt with gold buttons and gold stitching, along with a pair of shiny black trousers. A short black jacket, soft leather shoes, and a belt with a gold buckle completed the ensemble. Gewey quickly dressed, but as he was about to head to the parlor there was a knock on his door. Gewey gaped as a young woman wearing a baby blue housedress stood smiling in the doorway, a small basket propped against her hip.

“Lord Starfinder said that you were in need of grooming,” she said, scrutinizing Gewey. “I can see he was correct. Please sit down.” She motioned toward the chair in front of the dressing table.

Gewey wasn’t sure what to do, so he complied. “How long will this take?” he asked.” My friends are waiting in the parlor for me.”

“Your friends are being tended to as well,” she assured him. “To think of beautiful young women in such a state. Your elf friend - what was her name?”

“Kaylia.”

“Yes, Kaylia,” she continued, brushing the knots from his curls. “Such a lovely girl. Elsa couldn’t wait to get her hands on that one. Elves have such natural beauty. But when Elsa’s finished with her, she’ll be a goddess. The other one too. Celandine. That one is less accustomed to dirt and grime, if you ask me. Such a gorgeous complexion on her. Well-tended skin and hair. It’s nice to see a woman who knows how to take care of herself. Don’t get me wrong, elves take care of themselves too, but it’s just different.” For the next hour, the woman talked and talked as she worked.

Gewey chuckled at the thought of Kaylia being fussed over and made-up.

After a while, he found the process wasn’t so bad. The girl shaved him, then rubbed a sweet smelling cream on his face, letting it dry as she trimmed his hair. When she wiped the cream off with a warm towel his skin felt alive, as if it had never felt the air before. So this is how a lord lives, he thought. No wonder they always look so healthy and clean.

He had never spent much effort before in grooming, and by the time she was done he almost didn’t recognize himself. He cut his own hair most of the time. Occasionally, one of the women of the village would do it instead, but none had ever made him look so…lord-like. Refreshed and filled with a new confidence, he thanked the woman and headed down the hall to the parlor. Lee was already there, sitting in a large cushioned chair and sipping a glass of brandy. He was wearing a navy blue suit and jacket, and an ash walking stick with a silver knob was leaning on the side of his chair.

Lee smiled as Gewey entered. “Now you look presentable. I almost didn’t recognize you.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey. “It feels different.”

“We still have plenty of daylight,” Lee observed. “I thought we should see if Dina can make contact with her people. I also think we should make contact with Lord Ganflin’s friends at the Frog’s Wishbone.”

“Don’t you two look handsome,” Dina remarked as she walked in. Kaylia followed close behind.

Gewey’s jaw dropped when he saw them. Dina was wearing a dark blue satin dress that hugged her figure lightly. Her hair was lifted away from her face and tied with a silver band, allowing it to fall loosely down her back. Kaylia wore a smooth silver dress with a small diamond cut in the midriff. Her hair had been left down, but Elsa had added shining gold strands that caught the light when she moved.

“By the gods…” Gewey gasped.

“I’ll take that as a compliment,” Dina teased. She did a little twirl, causing the skirt of her dress to swish and spin around her.

Kaylia, on the other hand, looked very displeased. “I refuse to go out in public wearing this,” she growled. “How am I expected to fight in such clothes if something happens?”

“Don’t worry,” Lee assured her. “You’ll be back in your old clothes before you know it. I admit it’s a bit early for such attire, but they probably assumed we intended to stay in until the evening.”

“Actually, I think we should do just that,” Dina suggested. “My people are hard to find in the daytime, but I know where to find them after dark. We should wait until then.”

“Excellent,” Lee said. “I asked Martin about the Frog’s Wishbone, and he said it’s a very nice establishment. It turns out that Lord Ganflin bought it a few years back and completely remodeled the place.”

“He should have changed the name, if you ask me,” Dina said. “It sounds like a low-class tavern.”

“Maybe, but from what I’ve been told, it’s anything but,” Lee replied. “The good news is that we can keep wearing these fine clothes a while longer.”

“Wonderful,” Kaylia grumbled.

Just then, Martin walked in, followed by three men carrying a lute, a harp, and a flute. He served everyone a glass of honeyed wine as the musicians began playing softly. Gewey took a seat and allowed the music take him. The songs were sweet and intricate - much different from the music he had heard at the taverns, or even at the festival of Gerath. When the first song was over, he actually sighed.

“There’s so much left for you to experience,” Lee said to Gewey, noticing the boy’s expression. “When all this is over, I promise to show you as much as you want to see.”

“That would be great. But right now, I wonder if I’ll ever see home again, much less the rest of the world.”

“You’ll see your village again,” Kaylia vowed. She had been listening to the music as well, but now a fire lit her eyes. “That I promise you.” Gewey smiled, but he was saddened with thoughts of home.

They talked until dusk, keeping the conversation lighthearted. When Lee noticed the fading daylight, he called for Martin.

“Will you be dining here tonight?” Martin asked.

“No,” Lee answered. “Please inform Harlondo we will be at the Frog’s Wishbone.”

“I shall send for the coach, My Lord,” he said, backing out of the room.

“We’ll stop by the tavern first and make certain all is well,” Lee told them. “Then Dina and I will make contact with her people.”

“Shouldn’t we all go?” Kaylia asked.

“I didn’t really want to take Lee,” Dina admitted. “The order is very secretive and distrustful of outsiders. For me to bring one person may be a problem; if they see me with three others, things could get…complicated.”

“You two will wait for us to return to the tavern, assuming all is well there,” Lee instructed. “Then we’ll come back here to regroup.” They all agreed, though Kaylia still wanted to change her clothes.

Martin returned shortly after to inform them that the coach awaited them downstairs. They thanked him and left.

Lee told Gewey to make certain that he wore his sword. “It’s fashionable here,” Lee said as he dropped by his room to get his own. “As for the ladies…”

“I’m armed,’’ Kaylia assured him. “As is Dina.” Gewey tried not to think about where they had hidden their knives.

“We’re off then,” said Lee, and they all walked down to the waiting coach.

Chapter 28

When they arrived at the Frog’s Wishbone, Gewey was surprised to see that there were a dozen fine coaches parked out front. The building had clearly been renovated, though Lord Ganflin had allowed the old, faded sign depicting a frog with a wishbone in its mouth to remain. Before they had a chance to exit the coach, the door flung wide to reveal Harlondo smiling in at them.

“I was just about to head back to the manor to join you for dinner,” he said. “But I see that you’ve decided to join me instead.”

“Lord Ganflin recommended this place to us,” Lee replied as they stepped from the coach. “And since Martin informed us that he owns it, we thought we should see it while we’re here.”

“His Lordship finds it to be prudent to have a place where old prejudices aren’t allowed,” Harlondo told them, glancing at Kaylia. “You’ll find that everyone is welcome here.”

Harlondo walked them inside and instructed the barmaid to find them a good table. The tavern was by far the most elegant Gewey had ever seen, though of course, he was no expert. Still, the floors were laid with solid stone tiles, and the sturdy wooden tables would have made anyone in Sharpstone proud. Fine lanterns hung from the ceiling, and the walls were decorated with beautiful oil paintings.

A marble fireplace had been built at the far end of the hall, and leather couches had been placed on either side of this. A lutist strummed lightly from the near corner, enthralling the small crowd gathered by him. Looking around the room, they found they were by no means over-dressed; lords and ladies in fine dress were everywhere, and scattered among them were at least a half-dozen elves. The barmaid showed them to their seats, and Harlondo ordered a bottle of wine for the table. Lee spotted a man he assumed to be the innkeeper talking to a group of three elves near the fireplace.

“The food here is excellent,” Harlondo declared after the wine arrived. “Lord Ganflin is very particular when it comes to cuisine.” He looked at Kaylia and smiled. “They even serve elven dishes, if you’d like.”

Kaylia looked surprised. “Really? I haven’t had mint roast lamb in a while. I wonder if they have it.”

“They do indeed,” he answered cheerfully. “It’s a favorite here. In fact, if your friends have never tried it, I must insist they join you.”

“Unfortunately, Dina and I must leave shortly,” Lee replied. “But I would appreciate it if you would have some sent to the manor for us.”

Harlondo looked a bit disappointed. “I am sorry you won’t be able to join us. But I will see to it that you both have a dish awaiting you. Might I ask why you must leave? The nights are quite entertaining here, especially when the elves start singing -such magnificent voices they have.”

“Nothing of consequence,” Lee answered dismissively. “But I must attend to it before morning - a nuisance really.”

“I understand.”

Lee excused himself and spoke briefly to the innkeeper before returning to the table. “We must go,” he said. “We’ll be back soon.”

“Take your time,” Gewey told him. “I think I’ll have a fine time right here.”

“If you’re delayed, I’ll see them back to the manor,” Harlondo promised. “I have a carriage outside.”

Lee nodded in thanks, and he and Dina took their leave.

Harlondo took the liberty of ordering for the group, and they listened to the lutist as they waited for their meal.

“Greetings, sister,” said a tall elf who had seen them from the fireplace. He was dressed in a green ruffled shirt and pants with black buttons and had a long knife at his side. “I’m Drantolis. I hope I’m not disturbing you.”

“Not at all,” Kaylia replied. “I’m Kaylia. This is Gewey and Harlondo.”

“Harlondo I know,” he said. “But you say you’re Kaylia? It is truly an honor to meet you.” He bowed low. “We have anticipated your arrival. Lord Broín says that Linis speaks very highly of you.”

“Is Linis here?” Gewey asked.

“No, I’m afraid not. He wanders the land, as Seekers do. We rarely see him. But Lord Broín sent word that you and the lovely Kaylia would likely come here. But where are your other companions?”

“Attending to some business,” Kaylia replied. She sounded uneasy.

Drantolis gave her a knowing look. “It’s strange the first time, speaking openly among humans. I still find it hard not to cloak myself. And the clothes are a bit difficult to get used to.”

Kaylia was suddenly aware of her all too human attire and blushed. “It is strange,” she agreed. “Especially the clothing.”

The elf scrutinized Kaylia for a moment. “They certainly know how bring out the beauty in a woman though,” he said with admiration. “Please, join us once you’ve eaten. The rest of my kin will be excited to meet you.”

Kaylia nodded, and the elf politely excused himself. Gewey felt a familiar twinge of jealousy that Kaylia immediately picked up on.

“At least something good has come from this evening so far,” she observed.

“And what’s that?” Gewey asked, trying not to sound upset.

“You get to feel as I have during our trip,” she replied, looking satisfied.

Gewey looked confused. “I don’t know what you mean.”

“Don’t try to understand the fair sex, My Lord,” laughed Harlondo. “It will only cause you grief. Just accept that they know more than you, and try to keep up as best you can.”

“Wise words,” Kaylia agreed with a smile.

The meal was very good. The mint lamb had a uniquely wholesome flavor that made Gewey think of spring.

More and more elves filed in as they ate, and he could tell by the wandering eyes that they had become a topic of discussion among both humans and elves alike.

When they had finished, Gewey was stuffed. He leaned back in his chair and sighed heavily.

“So what did you think of it?” Harlondo asked.

“As good as I’ve ever tasted,” Kaylia said, wiping the sides of her mouth with a napkin. “Thank you.”

Gewey only nodded and smiled with satisfaction.

“Wonderful,” Harlondo replied. “But if you will excuse me, I must attend to some business while I’m here. Looking after Lord Ganflin’s affairs takes constant vigilance. Might I suggest you join master Drantolis and his friends near the fireplace?” He rose to his feet. “I shall return shortly.”

Kaylia and Gewey went over by the fireplace where Drantolis and two other elf men were sat on the couches talking.

“Good of you to join us,” said Drantolis as they all rose. “This is Pilianos and Salmitoris.” The elves nodded in turn. They were dressed much like Drantolis, and each wore a long knife at his hip. “It’s good of you to join us.”

“It’s our pleasure,” Gewey said. Suddenly, he felt two small hands at his lower back.

“You didn’t think you could keep the new arrivals all to yourself, did you?” came a woman’s voice.

“Allow me to introduce Lady Fritzina,” Drantolis said, gesturing toward the woman.

“Charmed,” she laughed as she slipped around Gewey and took his hand. “I hear you’re friends of Linis and his band. How exciting! He’s like some hero right out of a legend, wouldn’t you say?”

Lady Fritzina wore a fire-red gown that twirled easily around her feminine figure as she moved. Her red hair and silk gloves made Gewey think of the sirens his father had told him about as a boy. The stories of sailors being lured to their deaths by the sirens’ song always frightened him.

“Kaylia and Gewey are highly regarded by Linis,” Drantolis told her. “No doubt they are heroes in their own right if they traveled with such a worthy Seeker.”

Lady Fritzina looked intrigued. “Is that so?” she said, eyeing Gewey with interest. “By all means, do tell us of your exploits. On the rare occasions Linis comes here, I have to ply him with drink all night before I can get a peep out of him. Perhaps you’ll be more forthcoming?”

Gewey gave her an embarrassed smile. “There’s really nothing to tell, Lady Fritzina. Most of my life has been spent on a farm.”

“Oh, do call me Zina,” she insisted. “Everyone does. You’re a commoner, you say? How delightful. Please sit next to me and tell me of life on the farm.” She sat on the couch and patted the spot next to her. “I’m always cooped up here in the city. I think it would be lovely to breathe fresh air for a change.”

Gewey timidly sat next to her. Kaylia looked none too happy as they all took a seat.

“Tell me, Lady Fritzina,” Kaylia began, purposefully using her full name. “How do you feel about the elves in your city?”

“I think it’s the best thing to ever happen to Althetas,” she replied. “Hopefully we can be an example to other cities.” She slid closer to Gewey. “Tell me, Gewey, how have you enjoyed our city so far?”

“It’s big,” Gewey blurted, nervously. “I mean, it’s very nice.”

“A man of action, not words,” Zina teased, wearing a mischievous smile. “I like that.”

“Leave the boy alone,” the innkeeper scolded as he brought their wine. “He’s a guest of Lord Ganflin. I don’t think he would appreciate you embarrassing the boy.”

Zina laughed. “I was only trying to make him feel welcome. But being that you’re an honored guest of Lord Ganflin, I think I need to try harder.”

Kaylia seethed and leaned forward. “What do you know of elven courtship, Lady Fritzina?” she asked, forcing a smile.

“Nothing, I’m afraid. But I’m eager to learn. Please tell me.”

“It can be perilous at best,” Kaylia said darkly. “When a man declares himself as a suitor, the woman takes the responsibility to guard him from potential rivals - sometimes with deadly consequence.”

“Has someone made such a declaration to you, my dear?” Zina asked as she slowly edged closer to Gewey.

“Perhaps. But I believe that would be a bit too personal to speak of around strangers.”

“Nonsense, we’re all friends here,” Zina replied. “Now, take young Gewey, for example.” She seemed unconcerned in the face of Kaylia’s growing anger. “For the sake of argument, suppose he had made this ‘declaration’ to you. How would you protect him from a rival?”

“If I felt it was warranted, I would challenge that rival to single combat,” she answered, feigning an innocent grin. “To the death.”

“I see,” Zina said, smirking. “It’s a good thing we don’t do that here in Althetas. There would be duels in the street on a daily basis.”

“Such a declaration made by anyone other than an elf would be a first,” Drantolis noted, very interested. “If that were to happen, it should be kept secret - even from the more enlightened of us.”

“Relax, Drantolis,” Zina laughed. “We’re just speaking hypothetically. Isn’t that right, dear?”

Kaylia nodded and smiled sweetly. “Of course,” she replied, staring into the woman’s eyes. “But you’re right, Drantolis - such a thing would need to be kept secret.”

“What would be the repercussions if such a union were discovered?” Gewey asked.

“There was only ever one union between human and elf that we know of,” Drantolis told him. “It was not well received by our people. Linis recently sent word that he’d discovered of a child that came from this union.”

“Really?” Zina exclaimed. “I wonder what the child looks like? And more to the point: I wonder how the other elves will react?”

Gewey and Kaylia shot a glance at one another.

“Those that have been with us from the beginning will not think it anything but a natural result of our interaction with humans,” Drantolis explained. “But there are those among us that still struggle with certain ideas. Elves such as Linis, who is revered among our people, must help them to understand.”

The other two elves nodded in agreement as Drantolis continued. “Linis’ word holds great weight with us and our kin. Of course, there are also many elves who would kill the offspring of such a union on sight.”

“Then let us hope this child meets you first,” Zina said, holding up her glass.

“Yes,” Drantolis agreed, tipping his glass against Zina’s in a toast. “Linis believes she represents hope for the future, and I, for one, agree.”

Zina turned toward Kaylia. “My dear, I would speak to you alone, away from these fine gentlemen.”

“Regarding what?” Kaylia asked suspiciously.

“Certainly not to fight to the death,” she teased. Kaylia was not amused. “Please, let me make up for my earlier behavior. I know something you may want to hear.” She got up and held out her slender, gloved hand. “We won’t be but a moment.”

Kaylia took Zina’s hand and allowed herself to be led through the crowded tavern.

Once they had left, Drantolis leaned closely toward Gewey. “You play a dangerous game, young one,” he whispered. “If you court an elf without full knowledge of our ways, you put both her and yourself in danger - especially if what I suspect is true. Did you say the words?”

Gewey was afraid to speak as the three elves stared at him intently.

“You have nothing to fear,” the elf assured him. “We have been here from the beginning and are not offended by your courtship. But please, do not insult us with lies. The ancient words of declaration have definitely been spoken to Kaylia; we can see it in her eyes, and in her behavior. And, unless I’ve missed the mark, I think it was you who spoke them. If you did, you need to hear what I have to say.”

Gewey took a deep breath. “I spoke the words.”

The elves looked at one another gravely. “Then you have done a thing that even elves have not done since the time of the Great War. You have made the bond of courtship. It’s a prelude to the joining.”

“I don’t understand,” Gewey said. “When I spoke them, I didn’t even know what I was saying. I know the traditions of your people can’t be ignored, and I accept that, but I doubt she really intends to marry me.”

Drantolis burst into laughter. “Tradition? Tradition has nothing to do with it. Has she told you nothing? My young friend, the words are meaningless unless spoken from the heart. That you spoke them without knowledge of their meaning tells me that the bond between you is unbreakable, and possibly dangerous. Have you not noticed how things have changed between you? You can feel what the other feels - joy, fear, pain: all are shared until the time of the joining.”

“Then what happens?” Gewey asked.

“Then your spirits become one in the same, until you both leave this life.”

“She told me she has one year to accept,” said Gewey. “And that if she rejects me, we’re to never see one another again.”

“What she told you is only part of it,” Drantolis replied. “When you spoke the declaration, her spirit attached itself to yours, bonding you together.”

“You mean I forced this on her?” Gewey cried.

“Absolutely not. She wanted it, even if she didn’t know it at the time.” He chuckled and shook his head. “If not, the bonding would have failed. As young as she is, I’m sure it came as a great shock.”

Gewey remembered the terrified expression on Kaylia’s face when he had spoken the words.

“After a year, the bond will break if the joining is not made,” Drantolis continued. “But it is disastrous when the bond is broken – even more so when the bond is as strong as yours seems to be. If the joining is not made, you will lose a part of your spirit. She wouldn’t be able to look upon you because it would tear her apart. But should you complete the joining, you would be bound together forever - even in death.”

“What!” Gewey exclaimed. “You mean…?”

“I mean if one should die, the other would soon follow,” Drantolis told him somberly. “This is why the bonding is no longer done; the Great War caused many deaths, and their mates died along with them, leaving thousands of orphans. What troubles me is that when the bond is too strong and the joining not completed it can tear the spirit to shreds, leaving one empty and desolate. For an elf, such a fate is worse than death.”

Gewey put his head in his hands, his mind spinning. Drantolis reached over and squeezed his shoulder. “Take heart,” he said. “She is a fine elf, beautiful and fierce. Anyone, elf or human, would be fortunate to have such a mate.”

Just then, Harlondo rejoined them by the fire. “Are you alright?” he asked Gewey.

“I’m fine,” he replied weakly.

“Come then,” Harlondo beckoned. “I have something you must see.”

“If you will excuse me,” Gewey said, rising from the couch.

“Return soon, young human,” said Drantolis. “I have enjoyed your company.”

“I will,” Gewey promised, then followed Harlondo through the crowd to the corner of the room.

“A man gave me this a moment ago, with instruction to give it to you,” Harlondo said, handing Gewey an envelope. “Who knows you’re here?”

Gewey felt a chill. “No one,” he said as he opened it and removed a small note from within.

‘I have your elf woman. Meet me one mile south of the city wall.

There is a path. Follow it until you see a clearing. I will be waiting.

Come alone, or the last thing she will feel is my knife sliding across her throat.’

“Kaylia!” Gewey gasped.

“I saw her leave with Lady Fritzina a little while ago,” Harlondo said. “She seemed well at the time, though not very happy.”

“Did you see what direction they went?” Gewey cried, grabbing him roughly by the shoulders.

“I’m sorry. I only saw that they walked out together.”

Gewey ran to the door, sending unwary patrons flying as he passed. The street was busy as Gewey searched the crowd, hoping to see Kaylia.

“What has happened?” It was Drantolis’ voice, coming from behind. He stood with his two companions, long knifes drawn. ”Where’s Kaylia?”

Gewey knew he had to think fast. The note had said to come alone, and he wouldn’t risk the elves insisting on coming with him. “She left with Lady Zina,” he said, trying to sound calm. “I think I upset her earlier.” Drantolis looked hard at Gewey, and then sheathed his blade.

“Find her then. There is nothing worse than an angry elven woman.” The others laughed heartily and turned back to the tavern.

Gewey sighed with relief. He checked his sword and bolted toward the city gate.

Chapter 29

Lee and Dina’s coach had just entered City Square when Dina called for the driver to stop.

“Wait here,” she told Lee. “One of my people is near.”

“How can you tell?”

“When we bond to the medallion, it gives us the ability to sense others of the order when they’re close by - so long as they’re also wearing their medallion,” she answered. “Give me a few minutes.”

Lee waited, watching the people of Althetas through the coach window.

It pleased him to see that the darkness had not spread so far as to kill the spirit of such a great a city. He thought of his childhood, and of when his father had brought him here for the first time. His home village was only a five-day ride to the south. Once a year, his father made the journey to Althetas to attend the annual meeting of the Fisherman’s Guild. It was the month before he died when he took Lee along. His mother had said she wasn’t up to the trip, and at first he’d been afraid he wouldn’t be allowed to go without her. But his father had looked at him and said, “A promise is a promise. Just you be sure to do as you’re told.” Lee could remember how excited he’d been - just him and his dad for the first time.

His father had taken him on a walking tour of the city, even talking their way into one of the tall buildings so that they could look out on the city from the balcony. He’d asked his father if they could come live in the city.  His father had simply smiled and mussed his hair. It was the best time Lee could remember.

Lee’s musings were interrupted as the door to the coach opened and Dina got in. She was followed by a gray-haired man in a plain tan shirt and trousers.

“This is Ertik,” Dina said in introduction. “One of my Order. He needs to speak with you.”

Lee held out his hand, but Ertik simply scowled and sniffed.

“We know who you are, Starfinder,” he said briskly. “And your presence is unwanted.”

“That may be,” Lee replied, withdrawing his hand. “But it’s necessary. The Dark One moves, and I have with me the only hope for victory.”

“You think that being the child of Saraf will save us?” he scoffed.

Lee was taken aback.

“Yes,” Ertik laughed. “We know all about you. We’ve followed your progress for years.”

“Then why haven’t you contacted me?” Lee asked with irritation. “Angrääl is on the move. I would think you would gather allies where you can.”

“I suppose you think that being a half-god would be a boon to us, but you put us in danger simply by being here; the Dark Knight can sense your kind. If I bring you to the temple it would endanger the lives of more than a hundred men and women, not to mention risk the destruction of the one safe haven we still have.”

“Safe haven?” Lee retorted. “There are no safe havens any more. The evil is spreading as his power grows. He already has agents openly dwelling in the northern kingdoms, and it won’t be long before they come under his rule. The dead rise from the earth, their souls forced into decaying bodies. His agents and soldiers assaulted us less than seven days east of here. All this, and you dare speak of safe havens? How long do you think it will be before he finds your precious Valshara?”

“We know all of this,” Ertik replied calmly. “If you think we have been idle, you’re wrong. We haven’t the power to face him openly. If you expose us too soon, then the last hope of regaining the sword will die with our destruction.”

“You are not the last hope,” Lee countered. “I have brought the last hope. And he is the only reason I have sought you out.”

“Not another half-god,” Ertik sneered. “Even a thousand of your kind would not be able to defeat the Dark Knight; you truly don’t understand the power he wields.”

“No, not another half-god,” Lee replied sarcastically. He glanced at Dina, who nodded slowly. “I have brought the only child born from the union of two gods.”

Ertik laughed at first, then stopped. “You’re not serious. There is no such creature. We would have known.”

“We did know,” Dina said. “Or at least, we knew there was something the Dark Knight was after - something he would do anything to get his hands on. Why else would the High Lady have sent word to be on the lookout for them?”

“She has her reasons, I’m sure,” Ertik maintained. “But if you expect me to believe that you travel with a god…”

He hesitated. “You have proof of this?”

“I have all the proof I need,” Lee answered. “My kind can recognize each other by touch. I know what he is.”

“Do you think the Dark Knight would go to all this trouble just to kill a half-god and his companions?” Dina asked flatly. “The Dark One is aware this god exists, and if he succeeds in killing him, then all hope is truly lost.”

“If he is a god...” Ertik began, “and I’m not saying he is...but if he is, then death cannot touch him.”

“He was bound to earth when he was a baby,” Lee revealed. “How and why is still unknown, but it makes him very human in many ways. He is only now discovering his power. If The Dark Knight finds him before he’s ready, then he’ll kill him - or worse, capture him and break his mind.”

Ertik looked hard at Lee, then got out of the coach.

“Is that how you expected it to go?” Lee asked.

“I was hoping for a bit better,” Dina admitted, forcing a smile.

A moment later, Ertik returned. “Take me to him,” he demanded.

Lee told the driver to take them back to the Frog’s Wishbone.

“How did you discover all this?” Ertik inquired. Lee recounted the events leading up to the night when the Oracle’s messenger entrusted him with Gewey as an infant. He also told Ertik about his subsequent move to Sharpstone, and Gewey’s upbringing in the Stedding household.

“I assume you’ve been training the lad?”

“I have,” Lee replied. “Along with Kaylia.”

“Kaylia?”

“An elf woman we are traveling with,” Dina explained.

Ertik rolled his eyes. “Just how many of you are there?”

“Four now,” she answered. “There were six when we began, but two are off on an important errand. They will be joining us as soon as they are able.”

“You assume that anyone but the boy will be coming,” Ertik said.

Lee leaned forward. “You will find that the boy’s companions will not abandon him. If your intention is to separate us, then you may as well get out now.”

“Then you would sacrifice the fate of the world for your own selfish desires.”

“Think what you will,” Lee retorted. “But so far you’ve given me no reason to leave the only hope this world has in your hands. All I’ve seen is arrogance and an unwarranted self-important attitude that makes me think coming to you may have been a big mistake.”

Ertik glared at Lee. The tension was palpable.

“Ertik,” Dina soothed, trying to calm things down. “Lee has watched over Gewey for seventeen years, sacrificing everything in the process. You can’t think he would just leave him and move on. Besides, I doubt Gewey will go anywhere without his friends; he can be very stubborn.”

Ertik pursed his lips and grunted. “I suppose the elf will want to come as well. That should be interesting.”

“I would watch what you say when you meet Kaylia,” Lee warned. “She has something of a temper.”

“I’m not surprised,” Ertik replied under his breath.

When they arrived at the Frog’s Wishbone, Lee told Ertik and Dina to wait in the carriage while he went inside to look for Gewey. The tavern was still crowded as Lee pushed his way through the throngs.  He could see no trace of either Gewey or Kaylia. Finally, he tracked down the barmaid who had served them during dinner and asked her if she’d seen Gewey.

“Oh yes,” she told him. “He and the elf woman were talking to Drantolis, last I saw.” She pointed over to where Drantolis and his two friends were still sitting near to the fireplace. Lee thanked her for her help and made his way over to the elf.

“Yes,” Drantolis replied when Lee asked him about Gewey. “Kaylia left with Lady Fritzina. The boy seemed to think she was upset with him and went after her. I haven’t seen them since.”

“Do you know Harlondo?” Lee asked him.

“Yes. He left about the same time as the boy.”

Probably went back to the manor, Lee thought as he returned to the carriage.

Once back at Lord Ganflin’s manor, Lee and Dina scoured the house, but Gewey was nowhere to be found. Martin informed them that no one had returned since they had all left together.

“Where do you think they are?” Dina asked Lee.

“Harlondo probably offered to show them a bit of the city,” he guessed. “We’ll give them some time before we start to worry.”

“I can see how well protected he is,” Ertik sneered.

“Watch it,” Lee warned. “I’m not beyond throwing you into the street. He may be young, but the boy is very capable.”

Dina frowned, placing her hands on her hips. “I refuse to listen to the two of you squabble,” she said. “Unless you intend to start scouring the city, we have no choice other than to wait. But if you refuse to be civil, you can both wait in separate rooms - at least that way I won’t have to listen to your childish bickering.”

Lee and Ertik looked like two scolded children.

“Of course, you’re right Sister,” Ertik offered, holding out his hand to Lee. “I apologize.”

“As do I,” Lee said, taking the man’s hand. “Now let’s put this behind us and wait in the parlor. I’ll have Martin bring us some wine.”

Dina showed Ertik upstairs to the parlor. Lee joined them a few minutes later, followed by Martin, who carried a tray of glasses and a bottle of good wine.

“Tell me about Gewey,” Ertik requested. “How old is he?”

“Seventeen,” Lee replied. “But you’d never know that by looking at him.”

“Seventeen,” Ertik repeated softly. “So young.”

“Yes, but he has shown great maturity,” Dina pointed out. “It’s easy to forget how young he really is.”

“He has shown discipline during his training as well,” Lee added. “That comes from his father, I suspect. The man who raised him was an exceptional person. That’s why I chose him.”

“Do you know who his real father is?” Ertik asked.

“I have my suspicions,” Lee said. “He draws massive strength from the earth, so I think his father must be Gareth, but I can’t be certain. As for his mother, I don’t have a clue. Maybe someone at your temple will have a way to find out for sure.”

Ertik scratched his chin. “Possibly. It would certainly be helpful if we knew. It’s still hard to imagine...a god, here on Earth.”

“I know,” Lee agreed. “But once you get to know him, you’ll see that he’s in fact very human.”

Ertik opened his mouth to reply, but suddenly, the whole house began to shake violently, as if struck by an earthquake. Pictures fell from the wall, and the sound of breaking glass echoed through the halls. Lee grabbed Dina, protecting her body with his. After a few seconds, the shaking stopped.

“What was that?” Ertik cried.

Lee ran downstairs and out of the front door. Dina and Ertik followed closely behind. People on the streets were screaming and crying with fear. The front gate had come loose from its hinges, and the gatekeeper was still crouched down on the walkway.

“It’s Gewey,” Lee said, his voice filled with fear. “I know it. He’s the only one who could cause this.”

“We must find him before he brings down the whole city,” Ertik said in a panic.

“Can you tell where it came from?” Dina asked.

“No,” Lee replied. “But if it’s inside the walls he will be easy to find. Wait here until I return.”

Lee ran off as fast as his legs could carry him. As anxious as he was to find Gewey, he was also very afraid of what he might find when he did.

If Gewey had let loose that kind of power inside the city, the devastation would be unimaginable.

Chapter 30

Gewey found the trail just south of the city wall. The trees were sparse and thin, but the light of the full moon offered ample shadows in which to hide. He unsheathed his sword and made his way south, keeping a few yards off the trail. He tried to stretch out his senses, but the roar of the nearby city drowned everything out. The trail itself provided little help; it was too frequently traveled for him to make out any distinct tracks. As he approached the clearing, he could see the light of several torches burning brightly.

No way to approach unseen, he thought. Whoever this is, they either know I’ve been trained, or they got lucky.

The clearing was about one hundred feet in diameter, and torches had been placed around its edge in six-foot intervals. In the center, he saw Kaylia, gagged and on her knees, bound at the wrists and ankles. Lady Fritzina stood next to her with a vicious looking dagger in her hand.

“What’s the meaning of this?” Gewey yelled, stepping into the clearing. Kaylia looked unhurt, though anger burned in her eyes.

“So fierce,” Fritzina laughed. “No wonder the master wants you… taken care of.”

“Release her and I will let you live,” he offered, taking a step forward with his sword still drawn.

“Stop there, my handsome peasant,” she warned, holding her dagger close to Kaylia’s throat. “Or I might just have to bleed this… elf.” She looked down at Kaylia with contempt. “She loves you, you know.”

“What is it you want?” Gewey asked through his teeth.

“Don’t you want to tell her you love her too?” Fritzina replied, ignoring Gewey’s question. “Just once, before you watch her die?”

“If you hurt her, I swear you’ll beg me to kill you,” he roared. “You don’t think you can run from me, do you?”

“Run?” she repeated, amused. “It is you who should have run.” She pressed the blade against Kaylia’s throat. Gewey saw a trickle of blood fall down her neck.

“Wait,” Gewey cried. “Just tell me what you want.”

“Lady Fritzina,” came a voice from just beyond the clearing. “Enough.”

Gewey turned toward the voice. “You?” he said, his voice a mixture of confusion and rage.

Harlondo stepped from the shadows. His voice was now deep and menacing, rather than high and feminine. He held a curved saber on his hand.

“Take the elf just outside the clearing,” he commanded Lady Fritzina. “Do nothing until this is over. Then,” he said, waving his hand carelessly, “you may do whatever you like with her.”

Lady Fritzina grinned fiendishly. She grabbed Kaylia by her hair and pulled her across the clearing to its edge. Gewey jumped forward in response, but the dagger in the woman’s hand held him at bay. He couldn’t risk it - at least, not yet.

“I see you’re every bit as stupid as I’d hoped,” Harlondo said. “It’s a marvel you’ve made it this far, even with that idiot Starfinder helping you.”

“Why are you doing this?” Gewey asked.  Gripping his sword tightly, he could feel it starting to come alive in his hand, drawing in the power of the earth around him.

“Why?” he replied scornfully. “Because you weren’t wise enough to join the master when you had the chance - not that I ever thought it was a good idea to let you join us in the first place.”

“Let Kaylia go, and I’ll come with you.”

Harlondo laughed. “It’s far too late for that. Besides, I’d rather you were dead; the last thing I want is more competition. We don’t need your help to win. The master is nearly at his full strength, and with you gone, there will be no one else nearly powerful enough to challenge us.”

“If you hurt her, I swear you’ll pay for it with your life,” Gewey warned, his tone dark. “You have no idea what you’re getting yourself into.”

“She will not be harmed until after I’ve killed you,” Harlondo promised. “Actually, you have Lady Fritzina to thank for that. She wants her to watch you die.”

Gewey grinned wickedly as the power of the earth flowing through him increased. “I look forward to gutting you. Then her. Then Lord Ganflin, just for good measure.”

“Ganflin?” Harlondo chuckled. “That fool knows nothing about this. We have agents in key positions everywhere, even in your beloved Sharpstone. Ganflin provides access for me, nothing more. He’s too damned thick to serve the master. In fact, I think I may make him my slave as a reward for killing you.”

He stepped forward menacingly. “Speaking of which.”

Harlondo’s left hand shot out. Gewey barely had time to react as a small knife whizzed past his head.

“Not bad,” Harlondo said with approval. “I was afraid this would be too easy to be proud of.”

By now, the power of the earth flowing through Gewey was like a raging river. Time began to slow, just as it had done when he’d fought the soldiers. He leapt forward, slashing down at Harlondo’s head, but the man moved easily away. Gewey stared at him in shock for a moment, then attacked again. Over and over, his sword found empty air as Harlondo countered with virtually no effort. Gewey had seen only one man move like that.

“You’re a…”

“Yes,” Harlondo interrupted, smiling. “You didn’t think Lee Starfinder was the only one, did you? But it’s worse than that, boy. The master has empowered me with energy from the Sword of Truth itself.”

Gewey felt his confidence drain.

“Don’t feel too bad, you’re not the first to underestimate me. Once I’m finished with you, I’ll find the rest of your friends and make sure you’re not the last.”

Gewey filled with rage at the thought of his friends falling to this demon. He ran headlong at Harlondo, thrusting his sword at his opponent’s belly. But Harlondo merely twisted and stepped away before bringing his own sword down. Gewey felt searing pain as the blade cut deep across the back of his shoulder. He spun around, sword extended. Harlondo ducked, and again his blade found Gewey’s flesh, this time slashing open his upper thigh. Gewey backed away as Harlondo pressed the attack. He tried to block the onslaught, but Harlondo was too fast. Again and again, Harlondo’s sword cut deep, opening new wounds. Blood soaked Gewey’s clothes, and the wounds on his arms and shoulder made his sword feel heavy and awkward. His legs throbbed and shook with pain. He felt weak with blood loss and could hardly hold onto his sword as Harlondo came in for another attack. This time, Gewey was barely able to duck quickly enough to keep his head on his shoulders. The blade sliced the top of his scalp, sending him tumbling to the ground. He rolled back, then stumbled to his feet.

“Why prolong the inevitable?” Harlondo asked. “You have fought well. Let me end your pain.”

Gewey glared at Harlondo and squared his shoulders. He looked to the edge of the clearing and saw Kaylia, tears streaming down her face. ‘I’m sorry,’ he thought. Kaylia eyes filled with sadness, as though she had heard him.

“Still some fight in you, eh?” Harlondo laughed. “Good.”

In a flash, he was on Gewey again. This time Gewey was able to fend off the blade, but Harlondo closed in and smashed the hilt into the side of Gewey’s head. Gewey fell to the ground, dazed and with blood pouring into his eyes and mouth. His surroundings began to feel dull and distant. He wondered if this could really be the end. He attempted to stand up, but Harlondo merely laughed and kicked him back to the ground.

Harlondo stood over him with a satisfied smile. “And so ends the only child of heaven,” he mocked. “I’ll send your regards to your friends, starting with that one over there.”

‘Don’t give up.’ Gewey could suddenly hear Kaylia’s voice. It was as clear as day in his mind. ‘Please don’t make me watch you die.’ Pain and desperation filled Gewey’s heart as Harlondo raised his sword for the final stroke.

But the final stroke never came. Suddenly, the earth rumbled and the ground began to shake violently. A moment later Harlondo’s eyes shot wide as the forest floor beneath his feet literally exploded. Both men were sent flying. The last thing Gewey saw before darkness took him was the ravaged body of his enemy lying next to him. Gewey smiled with relief. This is a good death, he thought, as the world around him faded to black.

Lady Fritzina struggled to her feet. In front of her was a crater ten feet wide and three feet deep. The mangled body of Harlondo lay only a short distance away from her, alongside a pale and lifeless Gewey. She stared at the scene in horror. Kaylia lay on the ground next to her, struggling against her bonds. She picked up her dagger and pulled Kaylia to her knees.

“I could kill you,” Fritzina warned. Her voice trembled with fear and shock. “But if you promise that your friends will leave me alone, I will let you live.” She pulled off Kaylia’s gag. “Swear to it!”

“I swear none of my companions will touch you,” she said, her voice dripping with malice.

Lady Fritzina slowly backed away, then took off into the night.

Kaylia struggled to her feet and hopped over to where Gewey’s sword lay. By working the rope that held her against its razor sharp blade, her bonds were quickly cut. She then ran to Gewey. She put her hands on his face and closed her eyes. His life force was faint and fading. Replacing his sword in its sheath, she attached it to her belt, ignoring the searing pain as it touched her skin. Tears fell down her cheeks as she pulled his body upright. Using all of her strength, she threw him over her shoulder. The mile-long walk back to the city gate seemed to take a lifetime; she could feel Gewey getting weaker by the minute. By the time she arrived, he was barely breathing.

The city was in turmoil. The guard post was empty and the gate had been left open. Kaylia found an abandoned wagon and put Gewey in the back. Panic in the streets made it difficult to maneuver, but eventually she arrived at Lord Ganflin’s manor. The gatekeeper was trying to fix the broken gate when Kaylia jumped from the wagon.

“Help me!” she commanded.

The gatekeeper looked in the wagon and gasped. “Was he hurt in the earthquake?”

“Are you deaf?” she screamed. “I said help me.” The gatekeeper flinched, but obeyed.

They hadn’t gone more than a few feet when Dina and Ertik came running from the house. They gingerly lifted Gewey from the wagon and rushed him inside. As soon as Martin saw what they were doing, he directed them to a nearby study where they laid Gewey down on a couch. Kaylia knelt down beside him, holding his hand.

“Get me something to make bandages,” she cried. “I must stop the bleeding.”

Martin went to a closet and retrieved a linen sheet. Kaylia tore it into strips and began binding Gewey’s wounds.

“I’ll fetch a healer right away,” Martin said, bolting from the room.

“What happened?” Dina asked. “Who did this?”

“It was Harlondo,” Kaylia told her. “He is an agent of the Dark Knight.”

“Where is he now?”

“Dead,” Kaylia answered.

“Are you sure?” Ertik asked.

Kaylia shot to her feet, suddenly noticing the new face among them. “Who are you?’ she demanded.

“It’s alright,” Dina assured her. “He’s a member of my order. He’s here to help.”

Kaylia looked at him for a moment. “Do you have skills as a healer?”

“No. But if we can get him to Valshara, there are those that can help him. We have the best healers that have ever lived.”

“How far is it?” Kaylia asked as she knelt back down beside Gewey.

“We can be there in two days,” Ertik replied.

“We leave as soon as the local healer arrives. Go get the carriage ready.”

“We should wait until he’s been treated,” Ertik advised. “That will take time.”

“No need,” Kaylia replied. “Whoever Martin brings will be coming with us.” She brushed back Gewey’s hair. “She can treat him on the way.”

“Kaylia,” Dina said. “We should...”

“I said get the carriage ready,” Kaylia yelled, cutting her off. “Now.”

Dina nodded and left the room. Ertik followed.

A few minutes later, Lee came running in. He saw Kaylia kneeling down at Gewey’s side, her eyes closed. “How is he?” he asked softly.

“He lives,” Kaylia answered. “But not for long if he doesn’t get help.”

“Dina said a healer is coming. She also told me you plan to take him to Valshara tonight.”

Kaylia nodded.

Lee stood there for a long moment, considering. “You need to tell me exactly what happened. I’m sorry, but I need to know before we leave.”

Kaylia recounted what happened. She was unable to hold back her tears when she told him of the fight between Gewey and Harlondo.

“Then I should make ready,” Lee said, once she had finished. “Harlondo may be dead, but there’s no guarantee he’s alone. I’ll gather your things as well. Don’t worry, he’s strong. He’ll make it.”

“Thank you,” Kaylia said, wiping her tears.

When the healer arrived, she told everyone to get out. Kaylia resisted, but Lee assured her it was for the best.

“I need to treat his wounds before he is moved,” the healer explained. “Otherwise, the wounds may open on the road and he’ll bleed to death. How he’s alive now, I have no idea, but don’t worry - I won’t leave him until he is stable.”

“Then you will accompany us,” Kaylia said flatly. “We leave in two hours.”

“You’re joking of course,” she said, not amused.

Lee reached into his belt and pulled out a pouch. “This should compensate you adequately,” he said, handing her four gold coins.

The woman stared at Lee and then the gold. “Well then. My name is Ezmerial, from the temple of Helenasia, goddess of Healing and Knowledge, and I am at your service.” She bowed. “Now get out.”

Lee, Dina, and Kaylia waited just outside while Ezmerial went to work. Ertik left for his home to gather his belongings.

“It must have taken great strength to carry him to the city gates,” Lee remarked. “Let me find you a chair, you must be exhausted.”

“I don’t need to sit,” Kaylia said, as she anxiously paced back and forth.

“Please,” Dina said, grabbing Kaylia’s hands. Kaylia winced in pain. Dina saw the burns made by Gewey’s sword.

“It’s nothing,” Kaylia said sharply, shaking herself free of Dina’s grip “I’ll be fine.”

“It’s not nothing,” Dina replied, then turned toward Martin. “Please, bring us some water so that we can get her cleaned up.”

Lee brought a chair from the next room, and Dina sat Kaylia down to clean the dirt and grime from her burns.

“How will you be traveling, My Lord?” Martin inquired. “Should I ready your horses?”

Lee thought for a moment, then nodded. “Yes. Gewey, Sister Ezmerial and I will ride in the carriage. Ertik can take my horse for now. The one remaining will stay here until it can be sent back to Lord Broín.”

Martin nodded quickly and left.

“How were you captured?” Lee asked Kaylia.

Kaylia scowled. “She must have had something on her gloves; she took my hand just before she led me outside. By the time I got to the door I could barely stand. The next thing I remember is lying on the ground, bound and gagged in that clearing.”

Lee nodded and put his hand on her shoulder. “It’s not your fault. It could have easily been Dina or me. You couldn’t have seen this coming.”

“I should have,” she spat, shrugging off his hand. “The bond between Gewey and myself has blinded me.”

“That bond is what gave you the strength to save him,” Lee said. “While I don’t understand elf ways, I do know that with injuries like those, Gewey should be dead right now. And if it wasn’t for you, he wouldn’t have made it.”

“If it wasn’t for me, he would never have been there in the first place,” Kaylia shot back. “They used me to get to him.”

“Don’t be foolish,” Lee scolded. “They would have found another way. We are lucky that you were there to help him. If he had been alone, he would still be out there - probably dead by now.”

Kaylia looked up. “It won’t happen again,” she said with determination. “He will never have to fight alone, ever again.”

“I understand,” Lee said. “But still you must not blame yourself for what happened. What’s done is done. All we can do now is hope he’ll recover.”

Dina finished cleaning Kaylia’s wounds. “Please, don’t get up. We need you strong if we’re leaving tonight.”

“No doubt,” Lee agreed. “If Harlondo wasn’t alone, we may have another fight ahead of us.”

Hours ticked by as Ezmerial tended to Gewey. Kaylia checked on her progress several times, but the woman kept telling her to leave her alone to work.

Finally, the door opened. The healer stood in the doorway and sighed heavily.

“How he still lives, I can’t imagine,” she said. “I’ve never seen a man as injured as that who didn’t bleed to death.”

“Will he live?” asked Lee.

“I don’t think so,” she replied somberly. “He’s beyond my skills to heal. I would say that I’ve managed to stop the bleeding, but I don’t see how he has any blood left. I’m sorry.”

“We’re moving him to the carriage,” Kaylia instructed. “Now! You will ride with him, healer.”

“My dear,” Ezmerial said gently. “There is no hope. It’s just a matter of time now.”

Kaylia stepped menacingly toward the woman. “I said now.”

“As you wish,” the healer replied. “I will try my best to help him.”

“Is Ertik back?” Lee asked.

“I am,” Ertik replied as he walked in. “I was just getting the horses ready. All of our things are packed.”

Lee gave Martin a letter. “Give this to Lord Ganflin,” he said. “It will explain everything. I will send his carriage back as soon as possible.”

Martin nodded and put the letter in his pocket. “May the gods keep you - especially your young friend.” They carefully lifted Gewey and brought him to the waiting carriage. His skin was pale, and he looked as though life had already left him. Lee climbed into the driver’s seat and took the reins.

“If anything happens, stay close,” Lee advised the group. “We will not stop until morning. Ertik will take the lead once we’re outside the gates.”

Without another word, Lee snapped the reigns and the horses bolted forward.

The gate was still open when they approached. They ignored the guards who were motioning them to halt, nearly running them down as they passed. Screams of alarm faded as Ertik led them west toward the Abyss.

“By the gods!” screamed Ezmerial. “You’ll get us killed.”

Lee ignored her and pushed the horses to move faster. Time was running out. Somehow, he could feel it. If they didn’t get to Valshara soon, all would be lost.

Chapter 31

The landscape flew by in a blur as they raced into the night. Ertik led them west for ten miles, then south along a less traveled road. They kept going until an hour before dawn, when Lee called for a halt.

“Why are we stopping?” Kaylia demanded.

“The horse you ride could keep running for much longer, but if the ones pulling the carriage give out, we’re in trouble,” Lee answered. “We need to rest them for a while.”

“And I need to check the boy’s wounds,” added Ezmerial. “I can’t do that when he’s being jostled about.”

Kaylia grumbled angrily. “One hour. Then we move on.”

“You heard her,” Lee told the group. “One hour. So rest while you can.”

“Kaylia, my dear,” said Ezmerial. “I need your assistance.”

Kaylia jumped into the carriage without hesitation. The healer told her to hand her dressings and a sweet-smelling salve. “This should help keep the wounds closed,” she explained. “If you would, I could use your help whenever we stop. I don’t know what’s keeping him alive, but I believe that the power of love and prayer heals. It’s obvious you care deeply for him; I see it in the way you look at him. Your love for him is giving him strength somehow.”

Kaylia stared down at Gewey’s ghostly face. He looked peaceful, as if merely resting. Ezmerial touched Kaylia’s hand.

“I’m sorry for not giving you more hope back at the manor, but I spoke truth. Now, I’m starting to believe you won’t allow him to die. Take comfort and stay strong… for him.”

“You are kind,” Kaylia said. “But you were right not to give false hope. I am bonded to Gewey in a way I am too inexperienced to fully understand, and I feel him fading.”

“Bonded how?” she asked in a whisper. “Tell me, my dear. I will keep it to myself.”

“He spoke the ancient words of my ancestors to me, and my spirit reached out and joined with his. He is a part of me in a way you couldn’t understand; even I don’t fully comprehend it.”

“Then perhaps your bond is helping him to hold on,” said Ezmerial. “I have no other way to explain it, but you should be grateful for it.”

Kaylia squeezed the woman’s hand. “I pray you’re right. Thank you.”

By the time they had finished tending Gewey’s wounds it was time to move on again.

“We are heading north until we reach the Stone of the Tower,” Ertik told them as he mounted his horse. “Once we get there, stay close.  The road that leads to the temple is hidden and winds through a labyrinth of jagged rocks.”

They hurried on, only stopping when they needed to rest the horses. Kaylia rode close to the carriage and assisted Ezmerial at every stop.

“You should try and sleep, Sister,” Lee told the healer. “There’s room in the carriage for you to lie down.”

“Not until we reach this temple of yours,” Ezmerial replied stubbornly. “Is it really the Temple of Valshara?”

“It is,” Lee assured her.

“It’s said that within the Order of Amon Dähl there is knowledge of healing unknown to anyone else. To think, I may get the chance to watch them and learn.”

“You keep him alive, and I’ll see to it that you will,” Ertik promised. “Perhaps I can even arrange for you to stay on for a while.”

Her eyes brightened. “That would be a dream come true,” she replied. “The things I could learn there, the knowledge I could pass on to my order...”

Ezmerial worked with renewed vigor. “Don’t worry; if it means I have to stay awake for a week, he’ll be alive when we get there.”

It was dusk when they saw the silhouette of the Stone of the Tower in the distance. It was flat at the top and stood fifty feet tall. The sides were smooth and round, as if they had been carved by a stone worker of unimaginable skill.

“What a strange sight to see on the plains,” Ezmerial remarked as they came near.

“Legend says it was carved by Hephisolis, the God of Fire, as a present for his wife, Islisema,” said Lee. “It was once covered in gold and jewels, but Dantenos, God of the Dead, coveted Islisema and told his followers to strip it bare. Only the stone remains.”

Ertik smiled. “Your knowledge of lore is impressive, Starfinder.”

“My library is extensive,” Lee replied. “And life in a small village gives me a lot of time to read.”

When they reached the Stone, Ertik called for a halt and began searching for the trail. “It’s been some time since I was here, and this way is rarely used.”

He returned after about ten minutes and led them around the far side of the tower toward what appeared to be nothing more than a pile of loose rocks. As they approached, they could see that the rocks staggered and turned, revealing a well-disguised trail.

“We’ll need to lead our horses for a while,” Ertik instructed. “About two miles from here the path gets easier. We should be at the temple by dawn.”

When they finally arrived at Valshara, they came upon a natural stone archway that served as the entrance to the temple. Two men in black robes stood at the threshold, each wearing a sword. Ertik halted and got off his horse.

“Stay here until I call you over,” he told them. “We are unaccustomed to visitors.”

He walked over to the men and talked to them for several minutes. Finally, he motioned for the rest to approach.

“You must leave your weapons,” said one of the robed men. Lee and Kaylia removed their weapons and handed them over.

Dina retrieved Gewey’s sword and kept it with her. “I must show this to the High Lady,” she explained.

“Then Ertik must carry it, Novice,” the man growled. “And you must surrender your arms as well.”

Dina nodded and handed the sword to Ertik, then removed her dagger. The man motioned for them to continue.

Once past the entrance, a broad stone path led up an incline to a large wooden door. The walls of the temple were plain gray stone and twenty feet tall, extending for several hundred yards in either direction. Ertik pulled a rope that hung from the top of the door, and a bell echoed loudly in response. Moments later, the doors slowly swung open, revealing a massive courtyard.

Multicolored slate formed a walkway around the outer edge of the yard, enclosing an inner yard of well-manicured grass. In the center stood an eight-foot tall golden sword, its point buried deep into a marble slab. On either side of the courtyard were covered walkways that led deeper into the temple grounds, and at the rear was another double door, nearly as large the first.

There were at least a dozen men and women walking about the yard. None of them wore ceremonial dress or anything else that might indicate they were part of a temple, and all of them stopped and stared at the newcomers suspiciously. From the far left corner, a young woman began walking rapidly toward them. She went directly to the coach without saying a word to anyone else and looked carefully at Gewey.

“You’re a healer?” she asked Ezmerial.

“I am,” Ezmerial replied.

“You two,” the woman said, pointing to Ertik and Lee. “When the stretcher arrives, bring him to the healing chamber. You do remember the way, don’t you, Ertik?”

Ertik nodded, trying to hide his embarrassment. “I haven’t been away that long,”

The woman harrumphed, unimpressed.

A few moments later a young boy came running across the yard with a stretcher on his back. Lee and Ertik carefully placed Gewey on the stretcher and followed as the woman strode off. It only took a few seconds for them to lose sight of her, but Ertik did in fact know the way.

“How did she know about the boy?” asked Ezmerial. “She walked straight to him.”

“Many of our healers can feel when someone is sick or injured,” Ertik replied. “Wileminia is extremely sensitive. I’m sure she has had them preparing from the moment we got to the archway.”

“Amazing,” she whispered.

Ertik led them through a series of stone hallways to an open door. Inside was a bed, several tables with various bottles and plants, and a stone basin in the center.

Three women were busy at the tables preparing medicine, while Wileminia waited by the bed.

“Lay him down,” she directed. “Then Ertik will show you to your quarters. The Sister that has been tending the boy will stay and help.”

Lee and Ertik put Gewey on the bed and began to leave, but Kaylia refused to go.

“I will not leave him,” she said defiantly.

“My dear, you must,” Wileminia said with a much softer tone. “The High Lady of Valshara herself will be here in a moment to personally tend to him. She has commanded that you all be removed until it’s over. He could not be in better care anywhere in the world, I promise.”

Kaylia stood silent for a moment looking at Gewey’s nearly lifeless body, and then lowered her head. “Please tell me the moment you know something,” she pleaded.

“You shall be the first,” Wileminia promised, placing her hand over her heart.

Lee stepped forward. “Before you attempt to heal him, there’s something you must know. Gewey isn’t an ordinary human. In fact, he’s not really human at all. He’s a god.”

Wileminia looked at him, her eyes skeptical and slightly amused. “If you mean he’s like you, then you needn’t worry; treating a half-god is no different than treating a typical human.”

“That’s not what I’m saying,” Lee insisted. “He isn’t half anything.”

The realization of what Lee was saying struck her. “I see. Are you certain?”

“I am,” Lee replied. “There is no doubt.”

Wileminia looked thoughtful for a moment, then said, “I will inform the High Lady. Now if you would please go, we have work to do.”

Ertik led them to a large but empty den with several couches and chairs angled around a lit fireplace. “Please, sit and rest while I attend to your quarters.” They sat in silence until a young woman in a blue housedress entered, giving them each a cup of honeyed water.

“No one wears robes here?” Lee asked once the girl had left.

“Only during certain ceremonies,” Dina replied. “Our order is very informal when it comes to things like that. Only the guards wear robes at all times.”

“The High Priestess,” Kaylia said pensively. “She is a skilled healer?”

“She is most skilled among us,” Dina replied. “However, you should refer to her as High Lady. We have no priests or priestesses. The order does not center on rank as much as others do. After you advance past novice, you become either a cleric or a knight, but there’s nothing above that, save for the High Lady.”

She took a sip of honeyed water before continuing. “A knight trains as a guardian of the order; they are among the finest warriors in the world. If you achieve the rank of cleric, you choose a focus of study that you spend the rest of your days trying to perfect. For example, I intend to become a temple historian.”

“What does a historian do here?” Lee inquired.

“They travel to different cities, towns or temples to observe and record events as they unfold,”

“Sounds like an enjoyable life,” Lee said with approval.

“Yes,” she agreed, a touch of sadness entering her voice. “But with the way things have turned out, I doubt it will ever be.”

“Why would you say that?” Kaylia asked, trying to keep her mind off Gewey. “You are a part of one of the greatest stories in known history. Who better to record and tell about it?”

“When Gewey and I met Felsafell and stayed in his house, he woke me in the middle of the night and told me a different story,” Dina said. “He said that as a child of two worlds, I would have to sacrifice myself to make the world whole again. Of course, he said it in his odd little way - but there was no mistaking the intent.”

“Mind his words,” Kaylia advised. “They do not always mean what they seem to. As I told Gewey... ” She paused, wincing slightly upon saying his name. “As I told him, Felsafell is dangerous, and you risk great peril if you take his words at face value. You may yet have the life you want.”

Dina smiled. “Thank you, Kaylia. I hope we all get the life that we want.”

When Ertik returned, he escorted them down the hall and showed them each to their rooms. The rooms were plainly furnished with a bed, a small table, and a chair. A washbasin with hot water sat in one corner of the room, and their belongings had been placed in another.

“Once you’ve rested and washed you may wander freely - with the exception of the healing chamber,” Ertik told them. “If you need me, I’ll be in the den awaiting word of Gewey.”

“I think we’ll all be joining you there shortly,” Lee informed him. Dina and Kaylia nodded in agreement.

Lee was the first to return to the den. Ertik was sitting in a chair by the fire, thumbing through a leather bound book, humming to himself. When he saw Lee, he sat the book on the arm of the chair and gestured for Lee to sit across from him.

“You look…cleaner,” Ertik noted. “Though I’d wager you must be exhausted.”

“My kind doesn’t tire very easily,” Lee replied.

“Yes, I forgot,” Ertik said thoughtfully. “It must be quite a burden.”

“Why would you think that?”

“Such strength and power breeds jealousy. Hiding who one is all the time can’t be easy.”

“It can be tiresome,” Lee admitted. “But I have Millet. He’s been with me a long time, and he shares my secret. It makes it easier to have someone like him with me.”

“He sounds like a good friend. Where is he now?”

“On his way to Hazrah to take my wife and child out of the city,” Lee answered. “With the Dark Knight on the move, I couldn’t risk leaving them so close to his borders.”

“Hazrah?” Ertik repeated, suddenly looking troubled. “How long ago did he leave?”

“More than a week now. He should be there in about two more weeks. Why? Do you know something?”

“I got word that Angrääl now has dominion in Hazrah. Whether the city was sacked or they simply surrendered, I don’t know - but your friend is walking straight into the heart of the Dark Knight’s power.”

Lee closed his eyes tight, trying to still his mind. “Can you send word to Hazrah?” asked Lee. His voice was unsteady. “Do you have a messenger flock that travels there?”

“I’m sorry,” Ertik replied regretfully, “your friend will arrive well ahead of any message I could send. Still, I will try.”

“Thank you. I need to have Lady Nal’Thain and her son evacuated from Hazrah and taken to the city of Dantory. It’s a small oasis in the eastern desert. Tell them to mention Millet if she questions the truth of the message. I will pay anything it costs, ten times over, if they are brought safely there.”

“Payment is not necessary,” Ertik assured him. “I will send the message now. There are no messenger flocks between here and Hazrah, so the message will have to be carried much of the way by members of the order. Still, I shall see to it at once.” Ertik got up and hurried away.

Lee sat there, holding his head in his hands, as Kaylia and Dina entered.

“What’s wrong?” Kaylia asked as she took a seat next to Lee. Dina followed close behind.

Lee told them what Ertik had said.

“Millet will get them out,” Dina said, confident. “I know he will.”

“I hope you’re right,” he replied.

“Millet is wise and capable,” Kaylia added. “Much more than any other human I’ve met thus far. Even if there is an army guarding their door, he will find a way to get past them.”

“You’re right, of course,” he agreed. “It’s just the feeling of helplessness I can’t stand.”

“Believe me, I understand,” said Kaylia. Lee looked at her and nodded knowingly.

After an hour, Ertik returned. “I sent your message. I also sent word to Dantory to be on the lookout for them.”

“I’m in your debt,” Lee said graciously.

“Not at all,” Ertik replied. “You have done us quite a service.”

”There’s something else you should know,” Lee said. “I believe I have the Book of Souls in my possession.”

Ertik froze. “Where is it?”

“In my room. I was hoping someone here would know what to do with it.”

“Are you sure that’s what it is?” he asked.

“Not completely,” Lee answered. “But from what we’ve learned, we’re as certain as we can be.”

Ertik clapped his hands. “That is news. We must tell the High Lady when she is finished with your friend. She will be overjoyed.”

“If she can heal Gewey, she can have it,” said Lee.

“It will be some time before we know if he will heal,” said a voice from the doorway. It was Wileminia. They all stood up.

“What’s happening?” Kaylia asked anxiously. “Will he live?”

Wileminia sighed heavily. “He has been struck by the power of the Sword of Truth. If it had been the Sword itself, it would have destroyed him. Thankfully though, it was not. We have removed the energy that prevented his body from healing, but it has left him near death. He may not recover.”

“He’s a god,” Kaylia cried. “He will not die.”

Wileminia stared at Kaylia for a moment. “God or no, he is in mortal form. But he is strong - stronger than any I’ve seen. Now that the bite of the Sword’s power has been removed, his body may heal on its own. But I’m more concerned with his spirit.”

“What do you mean?” Lee asked.

“His spirit wanders,” she answered. “And it has not found its way back.”

“Can’t you help him?” Kaylia asked desperately.

“We are trying,” Wileminia assured her. “But if he’s a god as you say, it explains our inability to reach him. His spirit would be different from our own, and we have no way to call out to him. Even if we did, we wouldn’t know how to guide him back. The places he goes, we have never been.”

“I can find him,” Kaylia said firmly.

“I know you think that,” she said softly. “And I know as an elf you have tremendous strength of spirit; it’s a wonderful trait of your kind. But he is not an elf. It seems his spirit travels in realms where mortals cannot go.”

“My spirit is bound to his,” she contended. “Even now I feel him. If he needs a guide, then I am the only one.”

“She speaks the truth,” Lee affirmed. “They were bound together by words in the ancient language. I have no doubt she is his only hope.”

Wileminia thought for a moment. “Come with me then. I will take you to him. You may sit next to him and reach out as you can.”

Kaylia nodded and followed her to the healing chamber.

Ertik stretched his arms and yawned. “I need rest,” he said reluctantly. “I hate sleeping before nightfall, but I think tonight I’ll manage to sleep until dawn.” He slowly rose, grunting with each movement, and walked out.

As Ertik made his exit, a young girl entered. “Lord Starfinder?” she asked. “The High Lady would like to speak with you before you retire.”

Lee looked to Dina.

“I’ll be fine,” Dina told him. “I think I’ll walk around for a bit and maybe get something to eat.”

Lee nodded and followed the young girl out of the room and down the hallway. He was amazed by the sheer size of the place. He remembered Ertik saying there were about a hundred people here, but from the look of it, five times that number could live comfortably. They passed at least three dining halls and several libraries as they walked, also a variety of recreation and training areas. Most of the walls were bare, aside from a few elaborate tapestries and etchings near to the libraries.

At the end of a long hall, the girl stopped in front of a plain wooden door. “Please go right in. She’s waiting.”

Lee thanked the girl and opened the door. Inside he saw a small study with a nicely carved wooden desk that had papers scattered about it. There were a few shelves and cabinets along the wall, and brass lanterns hung in the corners; all in all, there was almost nothing to indicate that this office belonged to a leader of one of the most ancient orders in existence.

The chair at the desk was facing away from the door, but Lee could tell someone was sitting there.

“High Lady,” Lee said. “You asked to speak to me.” There was a long pause.

“I’ve often wondered what I would say to you when the time came,” said the High Lady, still facing the wall. Her voice sounded strangely familiar. “Now that you’re here…I just don’t know.”

Lee was both puzzled and troubled by the High Lady’s words. Trying not to let this confusion show in his voice, he said: “I would like to thank you for what you are doing for Gewey, and for the rest of us. I am deeply grateful.”

“Are you?” she asked. “If I were you I would not be so quick to give me your gratitude.”

The High Lady then stood and faced Lee. He staggered back in shock.  She was older and grayed, but there was no mistaking her.

“You…” he whispered. “How are you here? I spent years looking for you, and you were here the whole time?”

“Not the whole time, son,” she said, smiling sadly. “But most of it, yes.”

“But why?” Lee asked, trying to slow his racing mind. “Why now? Surely you could have let me know where you were before now.”

“Please sit,” she said. “I swear I’ll tell you everything. I will hold nothing back.”

Still dazed by her appearance, Lee pulled up a chair and sat down, unable to take his eyes off his mother’s face.

Chapter 32

“I know you must have a million questions,” Selena began. “But please wait until I tell you my story. Otherwise, I don’t know if I can get through this.”

Lee slowly nodded, but said nothing.

“When I was a young girl, before I met your father, my parents sent me to Althetas to study at the Temple of Saraf. My father was a blacksmith, and did well enough to be able to support my studies at the temple. They hoped I would become a priestess some day, and I probably would have if not for your father.”

“I’m warning you now,” Lee interrupted. “I’ll not hear you speak ill of my father.”

“Why would I speak ill of him?” she asked. “I loved him…I still love him.”

Her voice trailed off for a moment, then she regained her composure. “I met him in Althetas during my studies at the temple. I was in the market square the first time I saw him; he had come to the city to meet with the Fisherman’s Guild. Your grandfather had died a few months before, and your father had taken ownership of his boat. He was supporting both himself, and your grandmother.

“I had just bought some spices and herbs when a young rogue snatched my purse right off my belt. It was all the money I had. My father was not rich, so the money he sent me each month had to last. Without it, I had no way to feed myself and would have had to return home. I chased after the thief, but he was too fast. Then, out of nowhere, your father tackled him and took back my money. He looked so handsome and dashing, I think I must have fallen in love with him right then and there.”

Lee grumbled with disbelief.

“I know you think I might have felt differently,” she said. “But you only see things from a child’s perspective. I know you are a man now, but your memories are that of a child. I did love him. I was only fourteen at the time, but still I knew what I felt. He gave me my purse and offered to buy me a sweet apple.” She started laughing.

“I was so angry at that. A sweet apple? I wanted a candlelit dinner or a moonlight walk, and here he was buying me a bloody sweet apple as if I were a child. However, he was twenty at the time, and to him I was a child. He walked me back to the temple holding my hand. I was so excited; this handsome hero was holding my hand. We talked the whole way there, and I made him promise to write me, which he did of course. I didn’t see him again for a year.

“But just as he’d promised, he wrote to me once a month. As soon as the letters arrived, I’d eagerly run back to my room at the temple to read them. He wrote mostly of his day-to-day life and the goings on in the fishing village, but to me, each letter might just as well have been a love sonnet. I wrote back to him, careful not to be too forward and scare him away. Even then, I knew he was the man I would marry.

“The next year he came to Althetas again to meet with the Fisherman’s Guild. You could have told me the gods themselves were coming and I would not have been more thrilled; I must have spent three hours getting ready, determined to look perfect for the man I loved. We met in the same square where my purse had been snatched. This time, I was determined not to get a sweet apple.

“He was as kind and thoughtful as I’d dreamed he’d be. He took me to lunch, and we walked all over the city. At the time, it was the best day of my life. I nearly cried when it was over. I made your father promise to show me his village when I was old enough to travel on my own. He confessed to me later that it made him nervous to think of me realizing how poor he really was.

“I wept for three days when he left.

“A few months later I was chosen to be one of the attendants accompanying our High Priestess on her journey to Manisalia to see the Oracle. I had never traveled so far, and the thought of it frightened me. The trip was long and hard, but as it turned out, I had a grand time. The High Priestess was young, cheerful, and played games with us at night. She even told us old tales of the world before the Great War. I felt lucky to have been chosen.

“When we got to Manisalia I waited outside the pavilion with the rest of the attendants while the High Priestess went inside. She was only inside for a few minutes when she came out and told me that the Oracle wanted to see me. I was terrified.

“When I went inside, she was sitting on a pillow, tossing nuts in the air and catching them in her mouth - not really what I expected, to say the least.”

Lee chuckled, in spite of himself. “No puppy?” he asked. “She played tug-o-war with a puppy when I went to see her.”

His mother smiled. “No puppy. Still, as you know, she is not what one expects when you think of the Great Oracle of Manisalia. She asked me to sit and offered me some water.

“She told me she’d been expecting me, and that she regretted having to give such ominous news to a child.  I hated being called a child, but I was too nervous to say anything in return. She reached over and took my hands. She told me she could see I was in love, and I turned so red I probably glowed. But then, she told me that I mustn’t marry - that if I did, it would end in tragedy.

“I jerked my hands away and stood up. Her words scared me, and my fear became anger. I told her that your father didn’t want to marry me, and if he did, I would wed him in an instant, no matter what she said.

“She looked at me with a sympathetic smile. She told me that your father loved me even then, and was waiting for me to come of age. But she warned again that I mustn’t marry him; if I did, he would die, and I would hate myself for the rest of my life.

“I sat back down, but I did not hold her hands. Hesitantly, I asked her how he would die.

“She admitted that she didn’t know, but told me I was part of an important destiny, that my child - a child not fathered by the man I loved - would help to save the world.

“I laughed so hard that I almost fell over. I’d bear a child with the man I loved and no other, and I told her as much.

“She insisted that I would have a child, and that one day I would have to let him go. She told me that he would one day be called to serve a northern lord, and that I should not interfere with this.” Selena paused, her eyes guilty and troubled. “And once he was gone, she said I was not to contact him again. She said my son would find me one day when there was a great upheaval in the world, but I could not allow him to find me before then or he would surely die.

“The Oracle could tell that I didn’t believe her. ‘It seems you will marry your handsome fisherman anyway,’ she said. ‘But upon his death, remember my words.’ I left angrier than I had ever been in my life.”

“I take it you ignored her,” Lee said.

“To my everlasting regret,” Selena replied. “Your father and I kept writing to one another, and each year he made sure to attend the annual fisherman’s meeting in Althetas. When I came of age and was old enough to leave the temple, we married. My family was furious. They wanted me to continue my education and become a novice, but I refused. As a result, my family ostracized me. I never saw any of them again.

“Your father always regretted that I had to sacrifice so much for him, but as long as we were together I didn’t care. For a time, we were very happy. I had all but forgotten what the Oracle had told me. Fishing was good in those days, and though we didn’t have much, we had enough to get by.

“Then, in a flash, it all changed. I was walking along the shore, collecting shells for a basket I was making as a present for one of our neighbors. I heard a clap of thunder over the water, and I looked to see the ocean boiling. Steam rose and became a hot mist. It was then that I saw him, walking across the waves toward me and smiling. It was Saraf, the God of the Sea. Somehow, I knew who he was instantly, and he was the most beautiful thing I had ever beheld. I nearly fainted at the sight of him.”

“What did he look like?” Lee asked.

“It’s impossible to describe,” she answered. “Not like a man, but not unlike one either. Even now, all I can remember is the sheer beauty of his presence. He took me in his arms and loved me. I could not help myself. It was as if a spell was cast over me. Once in Saraf’s embrace, I didn’t care about anything else - not even your father.

“He left me on the shore, and I watched as he faded into the ocean. It wasn’t until he had gone that the realization of what had happened set in. I was wracked with guilt and self-hatred. I had betrayed the man I loved, and I could not live with it. I knew I had to tell him, but I was afraid he wouldn’t believe me. I sat on the beach and cried for hours.

“The sun had already gone down when your father found me. I told him what had happened and begged for his forgiveness. He said that a water spirit had warned him that Saraf would come to me that very day. He said the spirit was a vile thing, and that it told him he should kill me for such a betrayal.

“I told him that the spirit was right, and he should do just as it said. But instead, your father looked at me tenderly and held me close. He said he didn’t blame me, that the fault was with Saraf.

“I wanted him to blame me, though. I wanted to be punished for what I had done, and after a time I grew resentful of your father’s forgiveness. I hated myself and wanted him to hate me too.

“Then, I found out I was with child.

“I remember the look on his face when I told him. Both of us knew who the father was, but he told me it didn’t matter, that he would love you all the same. I should have been grateful, but I wasn’t. I was angry - angry at him, angry at myself, and angry at Saraf.

“I know you must have thought I didn’t love you or your father, but that isn’t true. Once you were born, all I could think about was what the Oracle had told me. It was coming true, and I knew what would happen next.

“The day your father died, Saraf returned to me. I was outside gathering wood when I heard a voice call my name. I looked up, and there he was. This time he appeared as a shimmering light, but his voice was sad and full of remorse. He knew my husband was dead, and he told me he was sorry. I stared at him in disbelief. I screamed at him, calling him a liar.

“He moved closer and told me it was the spirits of the water that caused my husband’s boat to sink. They were jealous that Saraf had loved me. When they failed to convince my husband to kill me, Saraf had hoped they would let go of their envy and move on. Instead, they waited. They waited until they thought Saraf had forgotten, and then they struck. They knew that an attempt on my life would be more than he could forgive, so instead, they took my husband. They knew it would hurt Saraf to see me in pain.

“I couldn’t believe it. I wept, unable to understand why the spirits would do such a thing.

“Saraf told me that the spirits could not bear to share their love with another; they wanted it all to themselves. He told me again that he was sorry. He tried to stop them, but he was too late. By the time he realized what they had planned, it was over.

“I ran at him then, intent on killing him, but I passed right through him as if he wasn’t there. I told him he knew nothing of love, cursing him as I fell to the ground, weeping. Saraf vanished, and I never saw him again.

“It was then I knew what I would have to do. I returned to the temple and made sure we were sent north. When Lord Dauvis took you in, I fled and eventually found this place. At the time it was a place of retirement for the Order of Amon Dähl. I told them my story and they allowed me to join the order and remain. When the Dark Knight destroyed the original Valshara, we reformed the Order from here. I sent people to Hazrah to keep an eye on you, but I was afraid to make contact because of the Oracle’s words. I would not see you die because of my own foolishness. I’m sorry I was not there for you, Lee. I’m sorry that I caused you pain. I never wanted this, I swear.”

Selena’s tears welled as gazed into her son’s eyes. Lee stood and walked around the desk. “For years I was angry with you,” he said, his voice trembling with emotion. “But I see now why you did what you did.”

“Can you forgive me?” she asked, rising to her feet.

“Mother,” Lee said tenderly. “I am alive because of your sacrifice. There is nothing to forgive.” He reached out and embraced her tightly, and they both wept joyful tears.

Chapter 33

Lee and Selena talked for hours, catching up on years of lost time. They stopped only when Lee noticed the fatigue in his mother’s eyes.

“We can speak more tomorrow,” he said. “You need to rest.”

“I know there are important things we need to discuss,” she said, embracing him again. “But I’ve wanted to just sit and talk with you for so long. I’m afraid I’ll wake up and this will all have been a dream.”

“I’ll be here when you wake up,” he promised. “And there’s time enough to discuss everything. For now, I just want you to sleep and regain your strength.”

He left his mother and made his way back to the healing chamber where he found Kaylia sitting in a chair next to Gewey’s bed. She was holding his hand. Her eyes were shut, and she swayed back and forth slowly. Gewey’s face was still pale and covered in bruises. Bandages had been wrapped over nearly his entire body. Lee marveled at the fact that he was alive at all. He had seen many wounded men, but never anyone who had taken this much punishment and still drew breath. He placed his hands on Kaylia’s shoulders.

“How is he?” he asked quietly.

Kaylia gradually opened her eyes. “He is lost. The healer was right; he is in a place no mortal has been. I can hear him, but it’s like trying to hear a voice in a storm.”

“Do you think he knows you’re there?”

“I don’t know,” she replied somberly. “But I do know that I am the only one who has a chance of bringing him back. I sense his struggle, but I can’t see what he struggles against.”

“Perhaps you should rest,” Lee suggested. “You can try again later.”

“I swore to never let him fight alone again,” Kaylia said, her resolve absolute. “Whatever danger he now faces, I will face it as well. I will not leave his side.”

Lee heaved a sigh. “At least let me get you some food.”

Kaylia nodded reluctantly.

“I’ll return shortly,” he said as he set off to look for the kitchen. While still searching, he ran across Ezmerial, who was on her way back from one of the dining halls.

“This place is wonderful,” she said. “They’ve offered to let me stay for a while and study their healing techniques. I’m so grateful that I came with you - not that Kaylia gave me very much choice in the matter. But still, I must remember to thank her.”

She reached in her pocket and pulled out the four gold coins Lee had given to her.

“I wouldn’t feel right keeping this. I had planned to give it to the temple, but as I won’t be returning for some time...”

Lee shook his head. “Keep it. When you do return, use it to buy what you need to teach others what you have learned here.”

Ezmerial bowed, then kissed him lightly on the cheek. “You’re a good man, Lee Starfinder. May the gods keep you safe.” Lee watched as she walked away, humming happily.

When Lee found the kitchen, he had the cook prepare a plate of roast beef and corn for Kaylia. The cook took one look at Lee and insisted that he take a plate for himself as well. Lee hadn’t realized how hungry he was until that moment.

“One of these wouldn’t be for that lovely elf woman, would it?” asked the cook.

Lee nodded.

“Then you eat this in the dining hall, while I cook up something special for your friend,” she said, handing him the plate. “The moment I heard there was an elf here, I got out my old recipe book and found an authentic elf dish. I’ve been waiting ages for an excuse to use it. Please, the hall is just through that door. It won’t take me but a few minutes.”

“I’m sure she’d appreciate it,” Lee said before passing through the door shown to him.

The hall was almost empty of diners. The afternoon meal had already been served, and several young men and women were busy cleaning.

He sat down, and his mouth began to water as he drew in the smell of hot beef and corn. One of the men cleaning asked him if he wanted any wine.

“That would be excellent,” he said, forking a large bite of beef into his mouth.

He was only halfway through his meal when he heard his name being shouted from outside the dining hall. He jumped up and ran out to see who was calling. A young girl saw him as he exited. She hurried over, out of breath.

“Lord Starfinder,” said the girl. “It’s the elf. Something’s wrong. You need to come quickly.”

Lee bolted down the hall and back to the healing chamber. Two women were holding Kaylia in their laps. His mother had her eyes closed and her hand on Kaylia's head

“What happened?” he cried.

His mother opened her eyes and rose to her feet. “I don’t know - at least, not for sure. I came to check on the boy before going to bed and found her lying on the floor unconscious.”

“Can you help her?”

“I think she has managed to reach Gewey,” Selena said. “If that’s so, then there is nothing we can do but hope they both find their way back together.”

Lee walked over to Kaylia and knelt down beside her. She was drenched in sweat, and her body twitched every few seconds. He brushed back her hair and kissed her forehead.

“She is with him,” Lee said somberly. “She fights alongside his spirit, just as she said she would.”

Selena immediately ordered a bed be brought in for Kaylia. The bed was set directly next to Gewey’s, and they gently placed Kaylia’s limp body on the mattress. Lee sat next to them, staring into nothingness, barely noticing when Dina pulled up a chair next to his.

“Lee,” Dina called gently.

Lee looked up with a blank expression. Without a word, he wrapped his arm around her. Dina put her head on his shoulder. They sat like this for hours, saying nothing.

Despite her obvious fatigue, Lee’s mother checked in on them from time to time. She had water brought for them to drink, but neither he nor Dina touched it. Night turned into dawn, and still neither Gewey nor Kaylia had moved. Selena came in and sat on the edge of the bed to examine their two fallen friends.

“Ertik told me you have brought the Book of Souls,” she said as she checked Gewey’s bandages. “Is that true?”

“We think so,” answered Lee. “The box is unbreakable, so there’s no way to know for sure.”

“You must give it to me,” she said. “If I can find a way to open it, there may be something within the pages that can help your friends.”

Lee nodded and got to his feet. “I’ll bring it here now,” he said, quickly leaving to retrieve the book from his room.

“Do you really think you can open it?” Dina asked.

“I don’t know,” Selena replied. “But it’s either that, or simply wait and do nothing.”

Lee returned with the box and handed it to his mother. She looked at the lid intently, then turned it over.

“This is the Book of Souls,” she said finally, and sat it gently on the bed.

“Can you open it?” Lee asked, hopeful.

“I don’t know. I will try, but it will take time. I need to contact Althetas; there’s an elven sage named Theopolou who might be able to help. I’ll need to send word to him. Of course, when he finds out we have the Book of Souls he might very well try to kill us and take it for himself. The elves have been looking for it since the Great War. How did you come by it?”

“Dauvis Nal’Thain had it,” Lee explained. “It was among his possessions when I claimed my inheritance.”

“You took his name then?” she asked.

“I did,” Lee admitted. “He was good to me. When he died, he left me his title and position.”

For a second her eyes misted over. “Lee Nal’Thain,” she whispered herself.

The moment of reflection quickly vanished. She cleared her throat and wiped her eyes. “Well then, I need to get word to my contacts in Althetas right away. They will know how to find Theopolou. It will probably take him many days - if not weeks - to get here, so please make yourselves at home. Explore the temple if you wish. Dina, am I correct in remembering that you wish to become a historian in the order?”

“Yes, High Lady,” Dina replied earnestly. “Very much so.”

“Then you shall be. As of now you are a cleric of Amon Dähl, but the formal ceremony will have to wait.”

Dina’s eyes shot wide. “I…I don’t know what to say.”

Selena smiled warmly. “Say that you will be truthful in all your accounts. You live in historic - though terrifying - times, and an honest account will be important. You travel with my son and he trusts you; that is enough for me to know your worth. I hereby welcome you, young cleric.”

“Your son?” Dina exclaimed in shock.

Selena smiled. “I’m sure Lee will tell you all about it. For now, I think both of you should get some rest.”

“We will, Mother,” Lee said. “But I think I’d like to sit here for just a while longer.”

“I’ll stay with you,” Dina offered.

“You can tell a person’s value by their friends,” Selena remarked. “You, my son, have great value from what I can see.”

Lee smiled, and Dina bowed low.

“I’ll see you tomorrow, son,” she said as she left.

“Your mother?” Dina said incredulously. “Why didn’t you say so earlier?”

“I only just found out,” he replied.

Dina looked at him in wonder. “You are full of surprises,” she said. “I must say, meeting you has been an experience of a lifetime.”

Suddenly, Kaylia shook violently. Lee reached out to grab her, but she stopped shaking just as he touched her arm.

“I hope this Theopolou can help,” Dina said as Lee wiped the sweat from Kaylia’s brow.

“So do I,” he replied gravely. “So do I.”

End Book One

Special Thanks

Brian and Jonathan would like to thank: George Panagos, Gerald

and Donna Anderson, Jacob Bunton, Jennie Bunton, The DiBattista

family (especially Kyle who was one of the first to read it), The Ramos

family, the Gnyp family, Sean and Jess, Bob Brandt, Hammza (Jon’s

best friend), Tara Ramirez, Vincentine Williams, Hunter and Sarah

Anderson, Vicki McManus, Bryan Lee, Jen Couch, Clarisse Castro,

Ariis Lopez, Czupacabra Czeslovski, Calib Rains, Leigh Riddle,

Antonios Seif, Tyler Jensen, Adaria Welborn, Tracy Baggett, Kira

Melamed, Greg Peacock, Natasha and Rob Cousens, Veronica Dread,

Mike Bailey, Shannon Bilbrey, Karen Cooper, Onna Layton, Mitchel

Lee, John Cooper, Angie Barlow, Jeff Bradey, Missy Mcanally, Chris

Hergenroder, Raymond and Nadia Awika, Daniel Jones, Andrea

Adams, Giulia Iuppa (the world traveler), Sharone Purer, Russell

Lehmann, Raven Moore, Moe Yabdayoui (the ladies’ man), Tracy

Duarte, Shelbie Jones, Jared Larkin, Amanda Shiver, Lee Conleen,

Keith Parker, Jeff Knapp, Amamda Phillips, Rachel Heeter, Denise

Cruz, Andrea Klumpp, Gilberto Quinonez, Stephanie Iturrino, John

Bange, Caby Nedvarda, Anne Yeates, Doris Watson, Faith Nyou,

Tyson Lee, Regina Beaty, Jeanie Nash, Ismael Robles, Robyn Underwood,

Edsan Caliso, Athena Papadatos (world’s greatest second grade

teacher), Christina Tettonis (a true educational innovator), The New

York Public School System.

Authors Brian D. Anderson and Jonathan Anderson

ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Brian D. Anderson was born in 1971, and grew up in the small town of Spanish Fort, AL. He attended Fairhope High, then later Springhill College, where his love for fantasy grew into a lifelong obsession. His hobbies include chess, history, and spending time with his son.

Jonathan Anderson was born in March of 2003. His creative spirit became evident by the age of three when he told his first original story. In 2010 he came up with the concept for The Godling Chronicles. It grew into an exciting collaboration between father and son. Jonathan enjoys sports, chess, music, games, and of course, telling stories.

The Godling

Chronicles

Book two

“Of Gods and Elves”

Written by Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

The Godling Chronicles (Book Two) Of Gods and Elves

By

Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

Copyright © Brian D. Anderson 2012

Cover Design by Mike Gauss

Names, characters and incidents depicted in this book are products of the author's imagination, or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events, locales, organizations, or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental and beyond the intent of the author or the publisher.

All rights reserved. No part of this book maybe reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means whatsoever, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher and/or author.

Contents

Contents

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Dedication

In loving memory of Magdaline Panagos (1923-2006)

Prologue

Gewey felt cold, smooth stone pressed against his face, and a terrible wind roared in his ears. He opened his eyes. Nothing but pitch-blackness surrounded him. He remembered his fight with Harlondo. He felt his body, searching for the wounds that the half-man had inflicted. No injuries!

“We have healed you,” said a voice from the darkness. It was soft and musical, but neither male nor female.

Gewey tried to tell where the voice originated from, but it was as if it came from everywhere. “Where am I?” He got to his feet as his voice echoed. “Who are you?”

“You are home,” said the voice. “You are with us. We have been waiting so very long.”

“You haven’t answered my question.”

“There is plenty of time for questions. For now you must take your ease.”

A light appeared several yards away, piercing the darkness. He was stood on a raised stone walkway surrounded by pure nothingness that went on forever. The only other thing he could see was a silver door at the end of the path. Gewey crept forward, careful not to step too close to the edge. When he was only a few feet away the door opened and the light dimmed.

“What’s in there?” he asked, but received no reply.

He stepped inside the door and found himself in his own house. A fire burned cheerfully, and a hot plate of roast lamb and honey-split bread was on the table. Harman Stedding, his father, sat at the far end of the table smiling at him.

“Finally,” said Harman. “Did you have a good day?”

Gewey turned pale and tried to back out of the door, but it was no longer there.

“What's wrong, son?” Harman asked.

His father was just as he remembered him, tall and lean with salt and pepper hair. Gewey had always thought he looked more like a teacher than a farmer. He wore the same green linen shirt and trousers that he’d always worn in the evenings after the day’s work.

“Who are you?” Gewey demanded. He reached for his sword, but it was no longer at his side.

Harman looked concerned and tried to walk over to him, but Gewey ran to the other end of the table looking for something to use as a weapon.

Harman sighed, shaking his head. “He told me this might happen. Gewey let me explain.”

“Explain what? You’re not my father. My father is dead.”

Harman backed away. “Son, please. You’ve been through a terrible ordeal. Let me help you.”

“Liar! Get away from me.” He found a knife on the table and snatched it up.

Fear struck Harman’s face. “If you’ll just let me speak to you for one second.”

Gewey tried to calm himself and focus. “Speak,” he growled. “But if you come near me, I swear I’ll kill you.”

Harman slowly pulled up a chair and motioned for Gewey to sit as well, but Gewey backed away and put himself near the front door.

“You’ve been ill,” said Harman. “Very ill. Lord Starfinder took you to Gath for treatment. You’ve been back for three days now.”

“Gath, eh,” said Gewey. “I was in Gath with Lee, and so far that's the only true thing you’ve said.”

“I’m not lying, son. This is the third time you’ve lost your memory since you’ve been back. It’s the medicine they gave you. Lee told me that the healer said this might happen.”

“You expect me to believe that?” Gewey snorted. “You’ve been dead for two years. I buried you myself.”

“Your fever is causing you to hallucinate,” said Harman. “Last time you lost your memory you thought you were a god. You even told me I wasn’t really your father.”

Gewey glared. “This won’t work. Tell me the truth, or I'll gut you right now.”

Harman bowed his head. “You’re not going to make this easy, are you? We really hoped that being here, and seeing your father alive and happy, would be enough for you just to accept this.”

Gewey raised his knife and readied himself to attack. “What are you?”

“I’m here to care for you,” he answered. “You are with us now. Your body has been left behind.”

“My body? What have you done to my body?”

“Your body was destroyed. Only your spirit remains. However, you shouldn’t fear; we love you, and we will care for you. Anything you want is yours.”

“You still haven’t told me who you are.”

“We are the first,” he replied. “We are the lovers of the gods. We have been waiting for you. We love you.”

“Return me to my body now,” Gewey demanded. “You can’t keep me here. You don’t have the right.”

“I cannot return you,” said Harman. “Please don’t worry. Soon you will forget about the troubles of that other world. Here, you can be anything you wish. All we ask is that you love us as your kin had once done.”

“My kin? You mean the gods? What do you know about them?”

“We were favored by them, above all others. When the Dark One trapped them, we were left all alone. We had you once and should not have let you go. But we were betrayed.”

“You’re not making sense,” said Gewey. “Who betrayed you?”

“Felsafell,” he said bitterly. “He convinced us to let you go. Then he left us too.”

“You’re spirits. That’s what you are. What do you want from me? I have nothing to give you.”

“We only desire your love,” he said. “It is everything to us. We need it. We are so lonely.”

“I cannot stay with you,” said Gewey as he moved to the door. “I don’t belong here.”

“You cannot leave,” cried Harman. “There is nowhere to run. Soon you will forget. Soon you will love us as we love you.”

Gewey couldn’t help but feel pity for the creature, but he knew he had to get away. He opened the door and ran from the house. The figure of his father appeared in front of him.

“Get away from me,” screamed Gewey. “Let me go.” He pushed his way past the spirit and ran in the direction of town.

“You are with us.” The voice of the spirit carried on the wind, following him as he ran.

Gewey ran until his legs burned. When he reached the village all the familiar faces he knew as a child were there to greet him, but he ignored them and made his way toward Lee’s house.

The trees and brush whizzed by as he ran at full speed down one of the many roads Lee had built. Gewey stumbled to a halt. He couldn’t remember why he was running, or where he was going.

“Wait up.” His father ran up from behind. “I’m too old to keep up with you any more.”

Gewey stood there scratching his head. “What happened?” he asked. “Why was I running?”

“We’re going fishing,” Harman replied. “Don’t you remember?”

It was then Gewey realized he was holding a fishing pole in his right hand. Harman carried one as well, along with a bucket of bait in the other.

“Yes,” said Gewey after a long pause. “Of course I do. I’m sorry, I was just confused.”

Harman smiled warmly and threw his arm around Gewey’s shoulder. “That’s alright, son.” He laughed. “It happens to everybody.”

Gewey and his father walked for about three miles to a spot along the Goodbranch River where they had fished since he was a small boy. The sun shone brightly and the birds chirped merrily as father and son sat on the bank near a large oak and fished throughout the day.

Gewey landed three nice sized trout, and Harman four others. His father always had better luck at fishing. As the sun began to sink closer to the horizon, Gewey lay back on the grass and took a deep breath of the fresh spring air.

“Are you happy, son?” his father asked.

Gewey looked at Harman, mildly surprised. “Of course, I am. Why wouldn’t I be?”

“I’m glad.” He stretched his arms with a satisfied moan. “I think it’s time for us to go home and eat some fish.”

It was nearly dark when they arrived back at the farm. Gewey cleaned the fish on a wooden table next to the house, while his father prepared the stove and wash water inside. After they had both cleaned up and cooked dinner they sat down to eat. The fish tasted better than any Gewey could remember.

“I have a surprise,” said Harman, getting up and bringing a pitcher down from the cabinet. Gewey could smell orange juice as his father placed it on the table.

“Where did you get that?” asked Gewey.

Harman just smiled and poured Gewey a cup. “My little secret.” He winked and returned to the chair.

There was a knock at the door. Harman sprung up and looked out of the window.

“Who is it?” asked Gewey.

“It’s no one. No one at all.”

“No one? Someone knocked.” He got up and started to the door. Harman rushed in front of him, barring Gewey’s way.

“I told you, it was no one,” said Harman, this time with more force. Again, there was a knock.

“What’s wrong with you?” said Gewey. “Why won’t you open the door?” Gewey tried to push his way around his father, but Harman shoved him hard, sending him flying across the room and crashing into the wall.

“I said leave it!”

Gewey stared in horror as his father changed and distorted, until he became a creature of quivering mass and swirling colors. “What are you?”

“She doesn’t belong here,” cried the creature. Its voice echoed loudly. “She must leave.”

Gewey felt panic grip him as the creature closed in. He bolted around the table and tried to get to the door, but the creature got there first. “You must stay. We love you.”

Gewey slowly backed away until he was stood next to the window. With thinking any further, he propelled his body through the glass and onto the porch.

“Gewey,” a familiar voice called out.

Gewey tried to focus, but the world around him blurred. “Who’s there?” he cried, as he tried to regain his feet amongst the shattered pieces of glass. A figure stood in front of him, but he couldn’t tell who or what it was.

“It’s me, Kaylia.”

As soon as he heard her name, it all came rushing back to him. The figure cleared, revealing Kaylia dressed in the same shirt and trousers she’d been wearing when he’d first met her in the forest. “Kaylia,” he cried, his voice filled with relief and joy.

She took his hand and pulled him from the porch. “Hurry,” she ordered. “We must get out of here.”

The door to the house shattered, sending splinters flying. Gewey and Kaylia ran as fast as they could, paying no attention to where they were going.

“You must not leave!” the creature screamed as it pursued them. It appeared to float just above the ground.

“Where are we going?” asked Gewey while they ran.

“How should I know? Anywhere but here.”

Gewey nodded in agreement as they continued heading down the road east, away from town. After a few minutes he glanced over his shoulder, but he couldn’t see any sign of pursuit. “Hold on,” he said, grabbing Kaylia’s arm and bringing them to a halt.

“We need to keep going.”

“But where to? I don’t even know where we are, let alone where we should go.”

“We’re in the spirit realm.” Kaylia looked around for signs of the creature. “You became trapped here after your battle with Harlondo.”

“The spirit realm?” said Gewey frowning. “Then how are you here?”

“We took you to Valshara to be healed. But your spirit was lost. I used our bond to find you.”

“Valshara,” whispered Gewey. “How long have I been here?”

“Not long,” she said. “Two days. But time may not flow the same here. For all I know we’ve both been here for weeks, maybe even months.”

“How do we get out?”

“You don’t,” called a voice from behind them. They turned and saw the form of Gewey’s father smiling at them.

“Who are you?” Gewey demanded. “And why are you keeping us here?”

“We did not bring her,” said Harman, looking at Kaylia. “We only want you. She does not belong here. She must leave.”

“We will both be leaving,” said Gewey. “Release us.”

“I cannot,” he replied. “We need you here. We have been so alone.”

“What are you?” asked Kaylia.

“We will not speak with you,” said Harman. His hand flashed from his side, and a dagger flew through the air straight at Kaylia’s heart.

Gewey shoved her out of the way just in time. Instead of finding its target, the dagger buried itself deep into his arm. Pain shot through him as he fell to his knees. Kaylia rushed over and pulled out the blade. Blood soaked his sleeve and dripped from the ends of his fingers.

“That was foolish,” scolded Harman. “But no matter.” He waved his hand, and the wound was gone. “You will come to no harm, but she must be destroyed. You cannot stop this.”

Gewey stared in amazement at where the dagger had struck. “If you hurt her, I’ll kill you all.” He got to his feet and squared his shoulders.

Harman looked amused. “You cannot kill us. The dead cannot die.” He stepped toward Kaylia menacingly.

Without warning, there was a blinding flash of light. When Gewey’s eyes adjusted, he gasped. Felsafell stood between Harman and Kaylia. He was dressed in his animal skins and carried his walking stick.

“Leave her be,” Felsafell commanded.

Harman’s face twisted in anger. “Traitor!” he shouted. “Leave this place!”

Gewey looked into Kaylia's eyes and smiled. “Are you okay?”

Kaylia nodded, still staring at the scene.

“Your heart is rotten,” said Felsafell. “It’s rotten and cold. You take what is not yours. You seal your own doom. Yes, you do.”

“You left us,” said Harman. “You broke your promise.”

“There was no promise,” Felsafell replied. “Oh, no. You are doomed and foul. I no longer care for your words. Our people are gone, and I will join you soon enough.”

“We will not let him go.” Harman clenched his jaw. “You can’t make us.”

Felsafell shook his head slowly. “I can’t make you. But I’ll tell him not to love you. Yes, I will. You’ll still be alone. Alone forever. Unloved and alone.”

“I will never love you,” cried Gewey. “Not if you hurt Kaylia.”

Harman shifted his eyes to Gewey. “You will love us,” he said. “Your father and mother loved us. So will you.”

“You’re wrong,” said Gewey. “But I will release my mother and father. Then you can be with them again.”

“You see,” said Felsafell. “You are a fool. The fool of fools. You keep the one who can give you love, but if you do, he will never love you.”

Harman turned his back and lowered his head. “Will you return to us, brother?” he asked.

Felsafell walked up and placed his withered hand on Harman’s shoulder. “I cannot. I must help free the fathers and mothers. And more there is to do for me. But I will join you soon enough.”

Gewey watched as Harman faded and disappeared. ”What happened?” he asked. “Is he gone?”

“Gone?” Felsafell replied. “No, not gone. Just far away.”

“Thank you,” said Kaylia. “I owe you a debt.”

Felsafell smiled. “You will repay,” he said. “Oh, yes. Then I can rest my old bones and tired head.”

Chapter 1

Millet, Maybell and Malstisos made their way toward Hazrah. The first snows began to fall just as they had rounded the western end of the Razor Edge Mountains. Luckily, the snow was light and didn’t bar their way, but Millet feared for Maybell’s health nonetheless. As strong as she was, he knew the long days of travel and the cold weather took a toll on her aging body. He and Malstisos kept a close eye on her and did their best to lighten her burden, though she didn’t make it easy for them. Maybell had an annoying habit of taking on extra work, especially if they tried to do anything she saw as her duties.

Aside from the dropping temperatures and light snow, travel was pleasant. Malstisos was open, friendly, and free with his humor. Millet couldn’t help but being pleased to have him along, and his skill as a hunter came in handy, as did his ability to know when harsh weather was coming.

They had done well avoiding other travelers, and only once had they been forced to seek shelter at a village inn. Malstisos insisted on accompanying them, stating his desire to see humans from other parts of the world. At first Millet and Maybell objected, but soon realized that he could remain unnoticed even in a crowded tavern.

They were three days outside of Hazrah when they encountered the first indication that things had changed in the north since Millet had last been there. Malstisos stopped abruptly and led Millet and Maybell into the nearby brush.

“Wait here and keep silent,” he whispered, then disappeared into the woods parallel to the road.

Maybell and Millet did their best to stay hidden and keep the horses calm, but as the minutes passed the cold set in. Maybell began to shiver uncontrollably. Millet held her close in an attempt to keep her warm. At first she tried to shake him off, but eventually relented. Thirty minutes later Malstisos returned, his expression grave.

“Five soldiers are camped three hundred yards down the road,” he said. “They bear a standard I’m unfamiliar with, though admittedly I know little of human nations in the north.”

“What did it look like?” asked Millet.

“Red with a gray background, and it bore the image of broken scales.”

Millet and Maybell looked at each other. “That’s the standard of Angrääl,” grumbled Millet. “We must not let them see us.”

“We should go around then,” said Malstisos. He turned to Maybell, “I’m sorry, but we cannot rest yet.”

“I’ll be fine,” said Maybell. “It’s not riding that bothers me, it’s standing still that chills old bones. Lead on.”

Malstisos led them northeast, away from the road and through forest. Millet could feel the wind picking up as it howled through the bare limbs of the trees. They rode for two hours before Malstisos finally called for a halt and built a small fire.

“Rest here,” said Malstisos. “I’ll scout ahead.” He pulled a small flask from his pack and handed it to Maybell. “Drink this. It will help you stay warm.”

“What is it?” she asked. “Not jawas tea I hope.”

Malstisos smiled warmly. “It’s elf brandy,” he said. “A small sip should take the chill away. I’ll return before dawn.” He strode off into the woods.

Millet watched Maybell’s hands trembling with the cold as she lifted the flask to her lips. The concern showed on his face.

“I’m fine,” said Maybell. “Quit looking at me like that.”

“I’m sorry,” he said. “But please understand I’m only thinking of your well-being. Even a young man couldn’t stand this cold for very long.”

“Then worry about yourself,” she said. The warm rush of brandy filled her, putting color back into her cheeks. “I may be an old woman. But you’re no spring chicken either.”

Millet laughed as Maybell passed him the flask. “Point taken.”

Neither of them was able to sleep. The fire and the brandy kept them warm, but soon the howl of wolves mixed with the howl of the wind.

“How close do you think they are?” asked Maybell, trying her best to hide her fear.

“Not far from the sound of it,” he answered. “But don’t worry. Wolves rarely trouble travelers, and they won’t come near the fire.”

Malstisos returned just as the sun was breaking the horizon. “There is a garrison due east of here bearing the same standard as the other soldiers,” he said. “But I have found a way around that should keep us out of sight.”

“If they have built a garrison this close to Hazrah, then it’s likely they’ve already taken the city itself,” said Millet. “The king would never allow a foreign army to go unchallenged so near to the capital.” He turned to Maybell. “There is a mining village a day’s ride from here. I have a friend there who can shelter us while we gather information and form a plan. I don’t want to march headlong into the sights of Angrääl unless there is no other choice.”

“If Hazrah has fallen, this trip may have been for naught,” said Malstisos. “The garrison is organized, and they are well prepared. Whoever leads them is no fool. Entering the city unnoticed may be impossible.”

“If getting into the city unnoticed isn’t an option then we’ll hide in plain sight,” Millet replied. “This is not my first dangerous mission.”

“I may be able to help,” said Maybell. “If your friend can get word to the Hazrah temple, then perhaps they can find us a way in.”

“There may not be a temple to contact,” said Millet. “Remember what Salmitaya did to the temples in Kaltinor?”

Maybell’s heart ached at the thought. “I should have killed her when I had the chance.”

“Don’t second guess yourself,” replied Millet. “Your actions were correct and merciful. I, for one, am glad you spared her. Once her masters discover her failure, I’m sure they will be less than pleased. I doubt that her comfortable life in Kaltinor will last for much longer.”

“I hope you’re right.” Maybell wiped a tear from her cheek.

Millet explained to Malstisos their position relative to the mining village so that he could scout ahead for patrols. As it turned out, they were forced to change direction three times to avoid detection. When they eventually reached the edge of the village, they hid behind some bushes and watched for a time. No soldiers came into sight, so Millet told Maybell and Malstisos to wait while he entered and made contact with his friend.

“I don’t like you going alone,” said Maybell.

“Until we know what’s going on, we can’t risk being taken together,” he replied. “I'll need to talk to Markus and make sure it’s safe.”

“Don’t worry, Maybell,” said Malstisos. “If he is taken, I will free him.”

“Fine,” said Maybell, scowling. “Who is this Markus person anyway?”

“He’s the foreman of the Kessel copper mine,” said Millet. “He and I were good friends when we were young.”

“How do you know you can still trust him?” she asked.

“I don’t. But when we were young he was the most honest and dependable man I knew. Besides, it’s either this, or we ride blindly into danger. I’d rather try to escape from here than from the city gates.”

“If you are captured, be certain to make enough noise so that I know to come get you,” said Malstisos.

“Absolutely,” Millet agreed.

Millet scanned the area one final time to make certain he wasn’t being watched, and then hurried to the nearby street. Malstisos handed Maybell the flask of elf brandy, which she gratefully accepted. An hour later, Millet returned.

“I spoke to Markus,” he said. “He offers us food and shelter.”

“What news of Hazrah?” asked Malstisos.

“It’s not good,” he replied. “We can discuss it at Markus’ house. Keep your hood on until we’re inside. Markus knows you’re with me, so there will be no reason to hide your identity once we get there.”

Millet led them into the village. It was typical of a mining town, mostly single-story wooden buildings built for utility rather than aesthetics. The streets were empty aside from a few workers on their way home from the mines.

Being the mine foreman, Markus lived in one of the larger houses. Even so, it was still not much bigger than the average farmhouse. Millet tied the horses to a nearby hitching post, then walked straight up to the door and opened it. The interior was modest yet comfortable. A sturdy dining table was already set for the evening meal at the far end of the great room, and a fire crackled in the fireplace just inside the door. A balding, stocky man with deep-set eyes and a weathered face stood next to the table slicing a loaf of fresh bread. He looked up and smiled as the party entered.

“Welcome,” said Markus. “Please have a seat. Supper will be ready shortly.”

“Thank you, old friend,” said Millet. “This is Maybell and Malstisos.”

Markus walked over and took Maybell’s hand. “My lady, you are most welcome. A Priestess of Ayliazarah is sorely needed here.”

Maybell curtsied. “I cannot tell you how grateful we are for your hospitality.”

“It’s my pleasure,” he replied and turned to Malstisos. “And you must be the elf Millet told me of. Truly the world is changing.”

Malstisos smiled and bowed low. “I am at your service and in your debt.”

Markus smiled broadly. “Not at all. Millet is an old friend, and his friends are mine.”

They sat at the table while Markus passed around the bread and retrieved a small pot of beef stew from the stove. “I’m sorry that there’s not more, but this is considered a feast in these dark times.”

Millet reached in his purse and brought out a gold coin. “Take this.” He pushed the coin to Markus.

Markus pushed the coin back, shaking his head. “I don’t need the money, my friend. It's food we lack here. Most of what we have is sent north to feed the armies of Angrääl. I’m one of the lucky ones. As foreman, I’m given extra provisions.”

“So the Dark Knight has taken Hazrah,” said Malstisos.

Markus stared down at the table. “He has. And he’s brought misery with him. Of course, they call him the Reborn King, and not the Dark Knight.”

“How long ago did his armies arrive?” asked Malstisos.

“Three months ago. But his agents were here long before that. They negotiated our surrender. We didn’t even put up a fight.”

“Why not?” asked Millet. “The King’s army could have held out for years. The city walls have never been breached.”

“I don’t know,” said Markus. “Those kinds of questions land you in prison these days. As far as the King’s army is concerned, most have been sent north to Angrääl. Some have returned carrying the banner of our conquerors. It’s like The Dark One is trying to eat the world and we're the appetizer.”

“What of Lady Nal’Thain?” asked Millet. “Is she well?”

“If that’s why you’ve come, you’ve wasted your time,” replied Markus. “No one has seen or heard from the house of Nal’Thain for weeks. The rumor is that the Lady has been sent north, but I don’t know how much truth there is in that.”

Millet lowered his head. “What of her son?”

“I’m afraid that I have no news of Jacob’s whereabouts. There are whispers that he was the one who convinced the King to surrender. After that, he seems to have vanished.”

“I don’t believe it,” cried Millet. “The son of Lee Nal’Thain would not betray his people.”

“I only know what I hear,” said Markus. “Whether there is truth in this - who knows?”

“We must find them,” said Millet. “Can you get us inside the city?”

“I doubt it. They check everyone coming in or going out. But I may be able to help. I make monthly production reports to the city clerk, and the next one is due in two days’ time. I could try and contact them for you.”

“What about the temples?” asked Maybell. “I could claim to be sent from Baltria. Certainly they wouldn’t stop a priestess?”

“I hate to be the one to tell you this,” said Markus, unable to meet Maybell's eyes. “But the temples have been shut down. They house Angrääl’s soldiers now.”

“What?” she cried. “Foul beasts!”

“I’m sorry,” said Markus. “Worship of the gods is forbidden now. Most of the priestesses and monks were sent north for re-education a week after the soldiers arrived.”

“I still can’t believe that the King has done nothing to stop this!” said Millet.

“The time is long past for the King to take action,” said Markus.

“Is there no resistance?” asked Malstisos.

“There was at first. But Angrääl crushed it. I know you won’t want to hear this, Millet, but it was Jacob Nal’Thain who helped them rout out the resistance. This I saw with my own eyes.”

Millet shook his head, rubbing his temples. “It doesn’t matter,” he finally said. “I was sent to retrieve My Lord’s family, and I will do as he has commanded me.”

Markus sighed. “Very well. Tonight you and your friends will sleep in the basement. I will leave in the morning. But I cannot promise that I will succeed.”

“I thank you for your help, old friend,” said Millet. “I know how much you’re risking by aiding us. You can come with us if you wish. We can offer you sanctuary.”

“My place is here with my men. I cannot abandon them.”

“I understand,” said Millet.

After their meal, Millet retrieved their packs from the horses, which were then put in a small stable behind the house. Markus gave each of them extra bedding and led them into the basement. “Please keep as quiet as possible,” he said. “The soldiers rarely check my house, but a little extra caution won’t hurt.” He walked up the stairs and closed the door. The clank of the latch echoed throughout the basement.

“I don’t like being trapped,” said Malstisos. “If we are discovered, there is only one way out.”

“I don’t like it either,” agreed Maybell.

“What choice is there?” said Millet. “We are asking Markus to take a huge risk. If he says we should stay here, I must trust him.”

“I hope your trust is justified,” remarked Malstisos. “Hardship can do strange things to a person’s loyalty.”

“I don’t like what you’re implying,” said Millet. “I’ve known Markus for more than forty years. He is as solid and honest a man as I’ve ever known.”

“We shall see,” said Malstisos.

They set up their bedding and went to sleep. Bad dreams troubled Millet, causing him to wake up several times. Eventually he decided to forgo sleep completely and spent the rest of the night huddled in a corner. After a few hours, he heard the door slowly creak open. Malstisos woke immediately and drew his knife. Maybell stood up and moved behind him.

“What?” Millet asked in dismay.

“There are a dozen soldiers upstairs,” Markus announced as he descended the steps. “If you don’t disarm, they’ll burn you alive down here.”

“Traitor,” shouted Millet. His fist shot out, landing solidly on Markus’ jaw. Markus stumbled back and fell to the ground.

“It’s not my fault,” said Markus, still sitting on the ground and rubbing his jaw. “You were seen coming in here by one of their spies. Please understand, if I didn’t do this they would have killed me, and half of my men as well.”

Malstisos glared furiously at the door. “I say we fight our way out.”

“No,” said Millet. “Let me speak to them first.” He looked down at Markus. “Lead me upstairs.”

Without a word, Markus got to his feet and led Millet up the stairs and through the door. He entered the main part of the house and immediately saw twelve soldiers in full armor, swords drawn.

With them was a man in a dark blue velvet suit, carrying a white ash walking stick. He had long, dark blond hair and fair skin. He smiled as Millet entered.

“You must be Millet,” he said. “My name is Brandis. I am here to escort you and your companions to Hazrah if you wish.”

“We will not be used as hostages,” said Millet. “If that is your intent you might as well kill us now.”

Brandis laughed. “No, no, no, you are not my captives, you’re my guests.”

“And if I decide not to accept your hospitality,” said Millet. “What then?”

“Leave if you wish,” he said. “But I believe you are here at the direction of the former Lord Nal’Thain. Is this not so?”

Millet remained expressionless and silent.

“No need to answer,” said Brandis. “I already know. Markus was kind enough to fill me in. It’s a good thing he did. Otherwise you may have been foolish enough to attempt sneaking into the city. Naturally, you would have been caught. Heaven knows what may have happened before I could get to you.”

“What do you want with us?” Millet demanded.

“To help. You’re here to retrieve the Nal’Thain family, and I’m here to see that you accomplish your task.”

Millet looked warily at Brandis. “So we can simply take them and leave?”

“Certainly,” he said. “Jacob Nal’Thain is a troublemaker we would be happy to be rid of. As for Lady Penelope, you have a choice.”

“What might that be?” asked Millet.

“She has traveled north to the court of the Reborn King,” said Brandis. “It will take several weeks for her to return. You may wait, or you may take young Jacob and leave immediately.”

“If you are being truthful, then have Jacob brought here,” said Millet. “Now.”

“I see your suspicions abound.” Brandis chuckled. “As you wish. But I must ask that you remain here until he can be brought.” He turned to leave. “Oh, I nearly forgot. You must surrender your weapons first, of course.”

Millet made no move to comply.

“Come now,” said Brandis. “They will be returned when you leave. A small thing to ask, all things considered.”

Millet nodded and went back down to the basement. Malstisos was still standing in front of Maybell with his knife drawn.

“I could hear your conversation,” said Malstisos. He handed Millet his knife. “We have little choice.”

“I’m sorry for this,” said Millet. “Clearly Markus is no longer the man I knew.”

“You are not at fault,” he replied. “There was no way for you to know.”

“If you would all join me,” called Brandis from upstairs.

Millet led Maybell and Malstisos up and handed their weapons to him.

“Thank you,” said Brandis. “Very wise choice.”

“What happens now?” asked Millet.

“Now we wait,” he answered. “One of my men is on his way to bring young Jacob. Then you may leave. That is, unless you choose to wait for the Lady Nal’Thain.”

“If she still lives?” said Millet.

“As I told you,” said Brandis. “She is at the court of Angrääl. I have no reason to lie.” He looked at Malstisos. “I am honored to have an elf among us.”

Malstisos said nothing.

“No reason for apprehension,” continued Brandis. “My Lord holds your kind in high regard. Certainly you know of our offer of friendship.”

“I know of the lies your master has told,” said Malstisos. “Empty promises of glory made to a generation that still clings to the past. You will find that I am not so easily swayed as some.”

“Not empty promises,” replied Brandis. “Soon we will spread our message of hope throughout the land. And when that happens, those who have seen the wisdom of our cause will benefit the most.”

“Your cause?” snapped Maybell. “You’ve destroyed temples and murdered their followers.”

“Ah, the priestess.” Brandis sneered. “I had almost forgotten about you.”

Malstisos moved his body between Maybell and Brandis.

“There’s no reason to be alarmed. I have no intention of harming any of you.”

Maybell seethed with rage. “You've killed innocent priestesses and monks. You are an abomination.”

Brandis laughed and shook his head. “I haven’t murdered anyone. Your own people betrayed you. Not me, and not my master. All we have done is told people the truth.”

“And what truth is that?” asked Millet.

“That the gods are as corrupt as the people who serve them. Your elf friend will certainly agree with this. They have caused nothing but harm to man and elf. They are greedy and petty, and now thanks to the Reborn King, they are gone.”

“You assume that all elves believe the old tales,” said Malstisos. “Not all of us blame the gods for the split.”

“You are wise,” said Brandis. “You do not take what you are told at face value. Sadly, in this case, you are wrong. It was the gods that cursed the elves. But what you do not understand is that they cursed man as well. They turned us into slaves. We were sent on a path of endless destruction without guidance. However, that horrible chapter of history is coming to an end. Soon the world will be at peace, and both elf and human will be able to live as they were meant to - in peace.”

Maybell sneered. “You speak of peace and freedom, and yet here you stand, conquerors and invaders.”

Brandis laughed. “We have taken Hazrah without spilling blood. When before in history has that happened? We allow you and your friends to leave in peace, even though you have sworn to destroy us. We give you Lee Nal’Thain’s family as a token of goodwill, and still you accuse.”

“You tried to have us killed,” replied Millet. “You’ve destroyed temples, and only the gods know what you’ve done to the clergy. Whatever your motivations are for letting us go, I suspect they are part of some grander design. You allow us to leave because it serves your needs to do so, though I don’t yet know what those needs are.”

“The attempts on the lives of you and your friends were unfortunate,” he said. “The people responsible have been dealt with. Of course, I don’t expect you to believe that. And frankly, it doesn’t matter. You will think my master is your enemy until the very end. But when that end comes, you will see the truth.”

“I see the truth now,” Millet shot back. “And unless you force me to do so, I will hear no more of your lies.”

“As you wish,” said Brandis. “My soldiers and I will wait outside.” He spun on his heels and left the house. Markus and the soldiers followed close behind.

“Do you think they actually intend to let us just walk out of here?” asked Maybell.

“Millet was correct,” said Malstisos. “If it serves their objectives, they will. This may well be a deception, but I cannot divine the purpose. If they want us, they have us.”

“We’ll know soon enough,” said Millet.

Two hours later the door opened and Brandis entered. Behind him was a tall, thin youth, aged no more than twenty, with light brown hair that fell in loose curls to his shoulders. He was dressed in tan leathers and boots, and carried a pack over his shoulders. Apart from being a bit more rounded at the chin and having eyes that were deep green and wider set, his face was strikingly like Lee’s.

“I give you Jacob Nal’Thain,” said Brandis.

Millet looked Jacob over for several moments. “How do we know this is Jacob?”

“Who else would I be?” Jacob sneered. “And who are you?”

“I am Millet Gristall, the personal assistant to Lee Nal’Thain.”

“My father?” said Jacob. “So this is what you brought me here for? You drag me from my cell for this?”

Millet cocked his head. “Your cell?”

“Young Jacob has been somewhat of a troublemaker,” Brandis explained. “We have had to lock him away for the good of the city.”

“I see,” said Millet. He turned to Jacob. “Where is your mother?”

Jacob glared. “This dog knows where she is. In Angrääl, where they took her.”

“How many times must you be told?” said Brandis. “She went there of her own free will.”

“I’ll never believe that. And if you expect me to go willingly with these people just so they can kill me when we're out of sight, then you’re mistaken. Kill me now, for all to see.”

Brandis sighed. “For the last time, if we wanted to kill you we would have done so long before now. You will either go with these people or leave on your own. Either way, I tire of you and will no longer tolerate your presence.”

“You will come with us,” said Millet. “I was sent to retrieve you and your mother. Being that your mother is not here, I will at least retrieve you.”

“Why should I believe you?” asked Jacob. “What’s to prevent you from killing me the moment we’re out of sight?”

“As much as I hate to admit it,” replied Millet, “Brandis is correct. If they wanted you dead, they wouldn’t need such an elaborate deception. In fact, we are in more danger from you, than you are from us.”

Jacob thought for a moment. “Very well, I will go with you. For now.”

“Good decision,” said Brandis. “I’ll leave you to it then.” He started to the door. “Please tell Lord Nal’Thain that we will allow him to see his wife any time he wishes. And as for Gewey Stedding, the Reborn King still wants his friendship. Please convey the message to both of them, if you would.”

“I’ll tell them,” replied Millet.

“Good,” he said. “You will not be hindered when you leave. I’ll wait outside until you’re ready.” He turned and left.

“I’m not sure what your game is,” said Jacob. “But if you wish me harm, even your friend the elf may find that difficult.”

Malstisos stepped forward. “If I wanted you dead, I would have killed you the second that door closed. It is not we who need prove our intentions.”

“I agree,” said Millet. “You look like my lord, but I have no way of knowing for sure.”

“What do we do?” said Maybell. “Certainly we cannot trust that this is not a deception.”

“We won’t,” said Millet. “There is one way of finding the truth. But in order to do so I must contact Lord Starfinder.”

“I’ve heard that name before,” said Jacob.

“Of course you have,” he replied. “That was the name of your father before you were born, and it is the name he goes by now. I’m sure your mother has mentioned it.”

“No,” he said. “I heard it when I was in prison. The Dark One wants him. They mean to kill him.”

“They’ve already tried,” said Millet with a wicked smile. “So far they’ve failed miserably.”

“Enough talk,” said Malstisos. “We need to leave while we still can.”

“Agreed,” said Millet. “We’ll head west for now.”

“Then what?” asked Maybell. “We can’t bring him back with us. At least, not until we know with certainty that he is who he claims to be.”

“I have no intention of being taken anywhere,” said Jacob. “As soon as I’m able, I’ll be going my own way.”

Millet looked irritably at the boy. “I suggest you accept our company for the time being. At least until we’re away from here.”

Jacob looked disgusted and walked to the door. “I’ll be outside when you’re ready.” He slammed the door behind him.

Chapter 2

Millet, Maybell and Malstisos gathered their gear and left the house. Jacob was sat on the front steps fiddling with a small knife. Their horses were ready and waiting. Brandis stood a few feet away along with two guards.

“Here are your weapons,” said Brandis. He motioned to one of the guards who handed them over. “I trust you will not need them any time soon. And we have provided young Jacob with a sword as well as a mount. If you wish an escort, one can be provided. But I suspect you do not.”

“No escort is necessary,” replied Millet. “We know the way.”

“In that case, I wish you a safe journey,” said Brandis. He nodded to the guards, who followed him as he headed off down the street.

Millet led them through the village to the west road. The street was conspicuously empty.

“Do you think they plan to ambush us?” asked Maybell as they mounted their horses.

“I doubt it,” answered Millet. “They could have killed us already if they wanted to. Malstisos is the only one who might have escaped. No, whatever their plan is, it involves us removing Jacob from Hazrah.” He looked suspiciously at the boy.

They continued until dusk and made camp along the road. While on their way earlier they had passed a patrol, but the soldiers simply ignored them.

“It would seem that Brandis intends to let us leave without incident,” said Malstisos.

Millet stared at the fire and rubbed his hands together. “So it would seem.” He watched as Jacob checked his horse and unpacked his gear. “We must find a way to contact Lee without giving away his location. Until then, I’m afraid we have no way to trust the lad.”

“I have exceptional hearing,” said Jacob. “From my father’s side of the family, I assume. Contact him if you must. As for me, I’m headed for Baltria once we’re safely away from here.”

“You intend to abandon your mother?” asked Millet.

Jacob glowered. “There’s nothing I can do for her.” He placed his blanket near the fire. “They won’t send for her, I don’t care what they told you. I doubt she’s even alive.”

“They let you live, didn’t they?” said Malstisos.

“That may be. But I’m in Hazrah, and my mother is not. The house Nal’Thain still has a good name among the people. To kill me without scandal or reprisal, they would need to do it away from the city.”

“We were told that you helped Angrääl take control,” said Maybell, huddled close to the fire and sipping elf brandy.

“That’s a lie,” spat Jacob. “I did everything I could to stop them.”

“That may be,” said Maybell. “But if the people believe it, I doubt your death would cause much of a scandal.”

Jacob pulled his blanket close and stared into the fire.

“What did happen?” asked Malstisos. “From what we have seen, it didn’t take much of an effort for Angrääl to seize control.”

Jacob scowled. “It was the King,” he muttered in disgust. “He sold us out.”

“You’re not making sense,” said Millet. “Even the King couldn’t simply hand over control of the land to a foreign power without resistance from the nobles.”

“That’s not what happened,” replied Jacob. “They were far more subtle than that. A year ago an ambassador arrived at court with a message of friendship. He said he was from a kingdom in the north and desired to establish relations and trade. Naturally, the lords were skeptical. All the old tales of the northern kingdoms are of terror and war, but the ambassador assured us of his good intentions and suggested that we send an envoy to meet with his lord. After much deliberation, the King agreed. I wanted to be the one to go, but mother wouldn’t allow it.”

“Wise woman,” said Millet.

“In this case, she was.” Jacob nodded in agreement. “The King sent his second cousin to gauge the truth of matters. Sadly, though loved dearly by the King, he has no skill with diplomacy. He returned two months later accompanied by a full entourage of representatives from Angrääl, enough to occupy a proper diplomatic embassy. At first the King protested, but his cousin convinced him that relations and trade would be in the best interest for the kingdom. Before long they had bought a building close to the palace and had established themselves as the embassy of the “Reborn King of Angrääl.”

“Didn’t that send up warning flags?” asked Millet. “The ‘Reborn King’ can only be referring to the Demon King, Rätsterfel. Surely the temples intervened when they heard this?” He retrieved a loaf of bread and dried meat from his pack and passed it around.

“I believe the temples had been infiltrated long before the arrival of the ambassador,” replied Jacob.

“Why would you think that?” asked Maybell, trying to contain her irritation.

“From the moment they arrived they showed their contempt for the gods. They refused to have their embassy blessed, and turned away any offer of friendship the temples made. On the streets they openly mocked the gods, and said that anyone who trusted in them was a fool. A few of the temples were even vandalized. Everyone knew who did it, but there was no proof. More than that, the temples did little to stop it.”

“All this, and the King still did nothing?” said Millet.

“There was nothing to do,” said Jacob. “The temples made no complaint. Not to the King, nor anyone else. In fact, it was widely known that many of the high priestesses and senior monks had dealings with them on a regular basis. I myself saw the chief librarian of the Temple of Gerath riding with the ambassador, talking and laughing as friends.”

“That means nothing,” said Maybell. “You can’t know why they were speaking.”

“True,” he answered. “But the next day the library was robbed and nearly every important text stolen. The culprits were never found, despite the fact that I told the magistrate what I had seen. Naturally, after that life became more difficult for my mother and me. Several of our trade caravans were attacked, and our interests in the copper mine were suddenly audited. I went to the magistrate to complain, but I fear he had already been bought. The chief finance minister manufactured reasons for our mining assets to be stripped away. Of course, they were sold to an unknown party - and by unknown, I mean Angrääl.”

“Was anyone else attacked like this?” asked Millet.

“Oh, yes, I was not the only Lord of Hazrah with the courage to stand up to these interlopers. But our resistance was short lived. With the King and the temples against us, we were reduced to simple acts of defiance and petty acts of vandalism. Unfortunately, in my case they found my weakness.”

“And what might that have been?” asked Malstisos.

“My mother. As I became more brazen in my resistance, they threatened to kill her if I didn’t fall in line. My first reaction was to send her away. We have friends in Baltria, and I thought she’d be safe there. But they got to her before I could make the arrangements. I was told that she had volunteered to attend court in Angrääl as the personal representative of the King, but the truth is they were using her as leverage against me. It was a week after she left when the first Angrääl troops arrived. The King announced that there was a growing threat from the southern kingdoms, and that they were only there to assist in our defense. But it was soon clear that it was an occupation.”

“It’s difficult to imagine all this,” said Millet. “The people of Hazrah would have risen up and fought in my day.”

“Some tried,” he said. “But any who actually took up arms were slaughtered and called a traitor to the throne. Most were arrested and sent north before they could organize properly.”

“Is that how you ended up in prison?” asked Maybell.

Jacob nodded slowly. “At first they said I was being held for questioning about a raid on a grain shipment. There was, of course, no such raid. It was clear I was framed to get me out of the way. They made it seem as if I was cooperating in order to coerce me into furthering their goals, but I refused. I think the only reason I’ve kept my head is that my mother has agreed to work with them.”

“I can’t believe Lady Nal’Thain would side with the Dark Knight over her own people,” said Millet. “She would rather die.”

“You’re right,” said Jacob. “But it was my life, and not her own, that she was protecting. That’s what they do. They use the people you care for against you.”

“How long have you been in prison?” asked Maybell.

“Six months,” he replied. “I was released once, but immediately rearrested. When I was jailed for the first time their troops were just arriving. Now they are at least two thousand strong.”

“What do you intend to do?” asked Millet. “If you go back you’ll be imprisoned - or worse.”

“What I told you earlier,” said Jacob, “was not entirely truthful. I will most certainly not abandon my mother. I do believe she still lives. But I am indeed going to Baltria. I have friends there who can help me. Then I’m going to get her out of Angrääl.”

Millet thought for a moment. “In that case, I’ll go with you.” He turned to Malstisos. “You and Maybell go back and tell Lord Starfinder what has happened.”

“I don’t need you slowing me down,” said Jacob.

Millet laughed. “If you are who you say you are, then you will need my help. I traveled with your father for many years and am far more capable than you might think.”

Malstisos smiled. “You should listen to your elders, young one. Millet is far more traveled than you. Besides, I doubt they left you with any coin. How do you intend to eat and lodge?”

“I can hunt,” said Jacob stubbornly. “I’ve learned to survive on my own.”

“That may be,” said Millet. “But I serve the house Nal’Thain and have an obligation to see to your well-being.”

Jacob met Millet’s eyes. “You serve my father, not the house Nal’Thain. He gave up his right to use that name when he abandoned us.”

“You speak from ignorance,” said Millet. “But now is not the time for me to enlighten you.” Millet straightened out his bedroll. “I am going with you.” He then turned to the others. “We’ll take the road east to Manisalia. There is a crossroads a few days from the city. We’ll split up there.”

Maybell’s eyes lit up. “Perhaps we should see the Oracle?”

“You can try,” said Millet. “But I would not tarry long. If she will not see you right away you should move on.”

“I too would relish the chance to see the Oracle,” said Malstisos. “She is well known to my people.”

“I think you will be disappointed,” said Jacob. “The rumor is she has left Manisalia to escape the armies of Angrääl. I even heard that she is dead.”

“I hope you’re wrong,” said Maybell, settling into her blanket. “It would be a great loss to the world. Her wisdom has helped guide the world away from destruction for many decades.”

“Decades?” said Malstisos. “My people have tales of her that go back to before the Great War. I have always assumed her to be more than one person, the title passed down, but perhaps not.”

“You think she is that old?” asked Maybell. “She is human, after all.”

“Are you so certain of that? Our stories always describe the same person, always looking the same way. That in itself means nothing, but I’ve also heard human tales of her. Recent ones. They are too similar in her description to think it a coincidence. At least, it seems that way to me.”

“Maybe you can ask her if she is still there.” Millet pulled his blanket over his chest and yawned. “We still have a long journey ahead. We can continue this discussion tomorrow.”

Chapter 3

The next day they rode in silence. At midday they stopped to eat and rest the horses. Several groups of soldiers and a few local farmers passed, but all of them ignored their presence. The temperature had dropped substantially, and a strong north wind cut straight through the group’s clothing. Soon they were underway once again, but it quickly became clear that they would need to risk a town and an inn.

“No need for us to hide at this point.” Millet’s voice trembled from the cold. “Whatever their plan, it’s obvious they do not intend to hinder our departure.”

“I agree,” said Malstisos. He glanced over at Maybell who was riding in silence, her eyes down. He couldn’t help but worry. Despite remarkable resilience for a woman of her advanced years, he knew the elements must be taking their toll. “In fact, I intend to remain in plain sight for as long as possible,” he added.

Jacob chuckled and slowly shook his head. “It would do no good to run. They have trackers from Angrääl following us even now. Of that, I have no doubt. Where we go, they will follow.”

Millet grunted with displeasure. “When we split up they may have a harder time of it. I have a feeling it is you and I who they will be following, and my skills in evasion should not be underestimated.”

Jacob sniggered.

“You should not let your eyes always be your judge, child,” scolded Malstisos. “Your father has great confidence in Millet. And thus far he has shown his worth more than once since I've traveled with him. I daresay his skills and usefulness outweigh yours.”

Jacob suddenly halted his horse, his face twisted in anger. “Mind your tongue, elf.” His hand slid to his sword.

“Don’t be foolish.” Malstisos’ voice became low and dangerous. “I will not be threatened, no matter who your father might be.”

The two stared at each other intensely for what seemed like an eternity.

“Enough of this!” Maybell’s voice echoed over the trees. The ferocity of the woman’s tone startled the others.

Malstisos bowed his head. “I am deeply sorry, sister. I know you must be cold and tired.” He turned to Jacob. “I’m certain we can conduct ourselves with better manners.”

Jacob continued to fume, but nodded sharply. “For now,” he grumbled.

Maybell snorted in disgust at the scene. “How much farther to the next village?” she asked Millet.

“Two days,” he replied. “But there’s a hostel we could reach before sundown if we keep our next rest short.”

“Good,” said Maybell, trying to hide her relief.

Abruptly, Malstisos’ back stiffened. He drew his long knife.

“What is it?” whispered Millet.

“Something follows.” The elf dismounted.

“I told you” scoffed Jacob. “They have sent trackers. Weren’t you paying attention?”

Malstisos shook his head. “This is no tracker. Whatever it is, it smells wrong.” He closed his eyes for a moment and sniffed the air. “Stay here.” He placed his hand on Millet's shoulder. “If I do not return in one hour, flee as fast as you can.”

“Where should we go?” asked Millet, alarmed.

“Stick with your plan,” the elf replied, then turned to Maybell and smiled. “Don't worry. I may only be chasing shadows.” He disappeared into the nearby trees, leaving the group behind.

Many minutes passed before anyone dared to move. Finally, Millet reached into his pack to retrieve a loaf of bread and passed it out to the others. Maybell reluctantly took a piece, then found a spot a few yards from Millet and Jacob to sit alone and nibble.

“What do we do if he doesn't return?” asked Jacob through a mouthful of bread.

Millet met Jacobs’s eyes. “We'll do as Malstisos said and continue to Baltria. There I will contact your father. Now, if you don't mind, I would rather not speak until Malstisos returns.”

“If he returns,” muttered Jacob.

Millet shot a furious glance and stormed away.

Minutes seemed like hours as the group stared into the surrounding forest, hoping to see Malstisos return. Finally, just as Millet was about to tell the others it was time to leave, he caught sight of the elf, head bowed low, holding what appeared to be a severed head in one hand and his long knife in the other. Maybell gasped. Millet and Jacob stared in horror as the elf tossed the head to the ground beside the horses. The elf's knife and hands were covered with thick, black ooze, and the stench of rotting flesh filled the air. The head resembled a human man, but its features were distorted and grotesque, as if burned by fire, its hair tangled, stringy, and covered in filth.

“What is that thing?” whispered Maybell with a shudder.

Malstisos looked at Jacob. “I was hoping our young friend here might be able to enlighten us.”

Jacob’s eyes went wide. “Me? How should I know? I've never seen such a creature.”

Malstisos studied Jacob, then looked down at the remains. “I found it about half a mile behind us. It was clearly following our trail. I tried to approach unseen, but it must have had a keen sense of smell because it knew I was there the moment I saw it. I am no seeker, but no human I have ever encountered, save perhaps Lord Starfinder, could have heard my approach. When I knew I was discovered, I decided to withdraw, but the thing was on me in an instant. It moved as quickly as any elf, though not as graceful. It struck at me with bare hands, but with power beyond human strength. As it was unarmed, I had the advantage and buried my knife in its heart.”

“Then why cut off its head?” interrupted Jacob. “And why bring this disgusting thing here?”

“Like I said,” Malstisos replied in a low tone, “I was hoping you could help to identify it. You have been here throughout the entire occupation. Have you never heard of such a creature?”

He reached into his saddlebag to retrieve a flask and small cloth and began cleaning his hands and knife. “But that's not the only reason I bring it with me. I have the creature’s head because it was the only way I could kill it. My blow through its heart served only to enrage the beast. As I pulled my blade loose, it charged in yet again with a ferocity I have never before encountered. Again and again it charged. I was barely able to avoid its blows. I slashed away at every part of it, and watched in horror as my strikes had no effect. It wasn't long before I knew I had to either kill this beast or flee, so I waited for it to charge one last time. Then I brought my blade across its neck. To my great relief my stroke fell true and the creature died.”

“What should we do now?” asked Millet. “If there are more of these things around we don't stand a chance.”

Malstisos dried his hands and wiped his knife with oil. “If there are more, then we are in mortal danger.” He checked his pack and sheathed his knife. “I cannot protect everyone at once. Still, I don't see that we have any other choice but to continue with our plan. If we are lucky, there will be no more of these things about. If there are, then I'll do my best to kill them before they are upon us. Now that I know how to kill it, one will pose me little danger. And with only Maybell at my side, I should be able to keep her safe.”

“It's settled.” Millet mounted his horse. “The crossroads, then we will part ways. By then we should know if there are more of these...creatures.”

The party rode on through the rest of the day in silence, and it was nearly sunset when they arrived at the hospice. This was little more than a small cabin with a small adjoining stable, but the smoke from the chimney and the aroma of roast pork filled their hearts with joy. Millet dismounted and motioned for the others to wait. “I'll see to our accommodations,” he said. “I won't be but a moment.”

The interior was as he expected. The single room was large enough to hold a dozen beds and a roughly made dining table. A fire crackling in the hearth was the sole source of light, giving it a comfortable, albeit dim, atmosphere. A thin young man sat at the table carving a piece of roast pork. His blond hair and fine features indicated that he had not seen many winters. He looked up as Millet opened the door and frowned.

“If you're here to rob me, I have nothing to take but some roast pork and a half bottle of wine.”

Millet stopped and bowed low. “I am not here to rob you, young man. My companions and I seek a bed for the night.” He scanned the room for signs of other people, but saw none. “Are you master here?”

“I am,” the boy replied. “At least, until my uncle returns.” The boy stood, wiping his hands on his trousers. “I'm Gerald. And you are welcome here, though I have little to offer.” He walked to the hearth and stirred the fire. “How many are you?”

“Four,” Millet replied. “And we ask only for a bed and perhaps a bite to eat.” He fished three coppers from his pocket and placed them on the table. “This should cover our expense.”

Gerald’s eyes widened as he retrieved the coins, clutching them tightly. “In that case, you are very welcome.”

Millet smiled warmly. “If you would allow me to stable my horses.”

“Of course,” said Gerald. “I'll do it for you if you’d like.” He headed toward the door, still clutching the coins.

Millet grabbed the boy gently by the arm. “That won't be necessary. But I would be grateful if you could prepare us a meal.”

“Yes, yes,” said Gerald. “It will be waiting.”

Millet thanked the boy and returned to the party. After they’d unpacked and stabled the horses, they entered. Four plates and cups had been placed around the table. Malstisos was careful to hide his features beneath his hood.

Gerald whistled merrily as he placed blankets on the beds. The roast pork, though a bit plain, was well received, and soon they were laughing and talking as if they hadn't a care in the world.

“Hostels in this area are usually filled to bursting this time of year,” said Millet once his belly was full. “Why are you so empty?”

Gerald's face twisted in anger. “Angrääl,” he spat. “It's because of those damn soldiers. Most people are too afraid to travel, and the few that do are agents and officials of the invaders. They take what they want and leave us to starve.” His hands trembled as he drank from his cup. “This hostel has been in my family for three generations. We’ve never had much, but donations from the temples and travelers kept us fed and clothed. We were able to help hundreds of people who might have otherwise perished on the road. I always took great pride in the work my family has done here. Now I can barely survive.”

“You mentioned your uncle,” said Millet, his voice filled with compassion. “Where is he?”

“Hunting,” replied Gerald, regaining his composure. “We can't afford to buy food most times, so my uncle hunts for what we need.” He nodded to the leftover pork. “Without it we'd starve.”

Maybell reached over, took Gerald’s hand and said softly: “You're very brave to stay here alone.”

Gerald managed a weak smile. “It's my uncle that's brave. The forests are riddled with bandits and thieves. So far he's avoided them, but it's only a matter of time before I fear his luck runs out.”

“I'll pray for you,” said Maybell, tears welling in her eyes.

Gerald jerked his hand away. “Save your prayers,” he uttered sharply. “The gods care nothing for me.” He stood up and faced the wall. “I'm sorry.” His voice cracked as he forced back his tears. “I know you mean well. It's just that it has been so long since hope has been in this land. I've prayed and prayed, but I think the gods have abandoned us.”

“Perhaps not,” said Millet. “Perhaps help is on the way.”

Gerald turned and sighed. “I hope you're right.”

They soon retired for the night. The earlier cheer was overcome by sadness, and none slept peacefully.

Chapter 4

Lee sat by the fireplace in the main library of Valshara, reading quietly. Over the past eight days it had become his favorite way to pass the time, and the only thing that took his mind off his wife and son, not to mention Gewey and Kaylia. He had always been proud of his own collection of rare books, but Valshara held treasures beyond his imagination.

When he wasn't in the library, he spent time with his mother. She told him of her life in the temple and recalled memories of his father. It soon became clear to him the love she held for the man, and the pain she felt after his death. He found it difficult at times to fight off feelings of guilt for the anger he had felt toward her for so long.

Gewey and Kaylia had shown no signs of reviving. Lee visited them at least twice a day, but was only allowed to be in the room for a few minutes at a time. The healers clearly thought any intrusion an imposition, and Lee was not inclined to argue. Besides, there was nothing he could do, and he did not enjoy feeling helpless.

Dina spent her time recounting her experiences in her journal. Selena had held a small ceremony signifying her elevation to full cleric and then set her to task. Lee had scarcely seen her except for when they happened to run into each other on their way to check on Gewey and Kaylia.

Word had come that Linis was seeking out Theopolou, and that he hoped to have the sage there soon. He’d arrived in Althetas two days after the battle between Gewey and Harlando and had been contacted by Valsharan agents. Lee took comfort in this. He knew if anyone could hasten the arrival of Theopolou, it was Linis.

The door to the library opened. Lee looked up and saw Ertik. His face was grave, and he was dressed in white ceremonial robes, something Lee had only seen at Dina's elevation to cleric. Lee placed his book on the table beside his chair and rose to his feet as Ertik strode over.

Ertik bowed. “Lee,” he said in a respectful tone.

Lee smiled warmly. “Why so formal today?” He reached out and shook Ertik's hand.

“Theopolou has arrived,” he replied. “The High Lady asked me to tell you that we will be meeting with him this evening in the main receiving hall. Appropriate clothing has already been brought to your room.”

“I see,” said Lee, noting Ertik's demeanor. “How many are with him?”

“He has brought an escort of a ten elves. Linis is also with them.”

Lee nodded. “I'll be there.”

“Mind what you say. These elves are not like others you have encountered. They do not enjoy the company of humans. That we possess the Book of Souls is the only reason they've agreed to come.” Ertik lowered his voice to a whisper. “This may not go well. Be prepared.” With that, he bowed and left.

Lee stood for a long moment, his brow furled with worry. He knew the elves thought the Book of Souls was rightfully theirs, but his experience with more enlightened elves left out the possibility that they may try to take it by force. Since he had arrived, he had counted maybe a dozen men that belonged to the Knights of Amon Dähl. Though he knew their reputation, he alone had actually fought an elf. Lee doubted very much that he and twelve men would fare well against ten trained elf fighters. If Theopolou was as great among his people as he was told, he was likely to have brought elves of great skill.

It was midday. With several hours until the meeting, Lee decided to check on Gewey and Kaylia again. He wound his way through the stone hallways, nodding and smiling at the passers- by. Word had spread quickly that he was the son of the High Lady; at first, he had become a bit of a celebrity. People practically tripped over themselves to shake his hand or help him find his way around. After a few days however, the excitement died down and most of the temple simply became a bit more cheerful when they saw him.

The door to the healing chamber was usually unattended, but to his surprise he now saw a tall elf standing guard on either side of the entrance. Both had light bronze skin and shoulder length black hair tied neatly into a small ponytail. They wore well-oiled, studded leather mail over emerald green shirts and trousers. Their feet were clad in soft buckskin boots adorned with tiny beads that formed multiple interlacing patterns. Vicious looking curved swords hung from their belts. Lee found this curious. From what he had learned, elves preferred to use a long knife or dagger, though Kaylia had mentioned that they did use swords when in pitched battles. This thought put his nerves on edge.

Lee stopped a few feet away. The elf guards did not look at him, though clearly they knew he was there.

“Excuse me,” said Lee. “I would like to pass.”

Both elves now turned their gaze on him. The one nearest to Lee took a single step forward and bowed his head slightly.

“You cannot enter at this time,” he said. His voice was deep and masculine. “I would ask that you return later.”

“I will not return later,” Lee insisted. “Two of my friends are inside, and I will see that they are all right.”

“I cannot allow you to enter,” the elf insisted.

Lee could see the elf's muscles tense. He didn't want a confrontation, but neither could he leave until he knew that Gewey and Kaylia were unharmed.

“Who is in there?” Lee demanded.

“That is none of your affair,” the elf replied. The other guard stepped forward, and both of their hands crept to their swords.

“It is my affair,” Lee countered. “And I will see to my friends.” He also stepped forward, positioning himself less than a foot away from the first elf. He knew that, should things turn violent, he needed to be close. He was unarmed, and swords were awkward in tight quarters.

The door to the chamber flew open and Lee's mother stepped quickly into the hall. “It's alright, Lee.” She pushed him back and placed herself between her son and the elves. “Gewey and Kaylia are fine.”

“Why am I being kept out?” growled Lee.

“Theopolou is in there with them,” she replied. “He has asked not to be disturbed, and I have agreed.” Selena placed her hands on Lee’s chest. “Please, son. I give you my word they are safe.”

Reluctantly Lee yielded. “Very well.” He slowly backed away and headed for the parlor.

When he arrived, he found Dina sitting on the couch next to Linis. Linis beamed as Lee entered the room. He sprang to his feet and grasped Lee's shoulders tightly. Lee returned the gesture.

“It's good to see you, my friend.” Linis laughed. “Though I wish it were under better circumstances.”

“It's good to see you too,” said Lee, giving Linis' shoulders one final fond squeeze before releasing him.

They took a seat on the couch across from Dina. She was in her formal robes, just as Ertik had been, and her hair was wrapped in a tight bun.

“Dina was telling me details of your travels since we last parted,” Linis said. “It would seem I have missed much.”

“Indeed,” Lee replied. “Much that I wish I had avoided.”

“I understand,” said Linis. “But often we are beset with hardship in order to prepare for greater challenges ahead.”

Dina laughed. “I don't think I want to know what those challenges are, if this is what it takes to prepare.”

“No doubt,” Lee agreed. “But I fear this is but a taste of what's to come. Angrääl is on the move, and if Gewey doesn't recover...”

“Do not despair, my friend,” said Linis. “If the boy fought a half-man and was victorious, as I have heard, then I am certain that he has the strength to overcome this. His true nature is still a mystery to me, but I do believe that his part in what is to come has not yet been played out.”

Lee realized that Linis was still unaware of just what Gewey was, and made the decision to tell him.

“I know how the elves feel about the gods,” said Lee, once he had recounted the tale. “And I hope you can see beyond old hatreds, as you have in the past.”

Linis was stunned. He rose and moved slowly to the fireplace. He stood in silence for several minutes.

“It is good that you have kept this secret from me until now,” said Linis finally. “And I am honored that you have chosen to share it. Had I found out about this before I had come to know the boy, I am unsure how I would have reacted.”

“I think you would have been fine,” said Dina. “When you found out about me....”

“You are different,” said Linis. “You are the natural result of two people sharing the same world. Gewey’s nature, on the other hand, stirs feelings even in me of the old hatreds. It is a thing no elf would ever expect to be faced with.” He turned to Lee. “You must keep this from Theopolou and the others.”

“I only tell you because of our friendship,” said Lee. “The presence of your brethren is causing me great concern, and not only because of Gewey.”

“The Book of Souls,” whispered Linis. “To think I traveled with both The Book of Souls and a god at the same time.” He burst into laughter. “A thing worthy of a tale, wouldn't you say?”

Lee joined his laughter. “No doubt it will be told for ages to come.” Lee motioned for Linis to rejoin him on the couch. “Tell me about Theopolou.”

Linis’ eyes shifted back and forth from Lee to Dina for a moment. “He is great among my people,” he began. “And his knowledge vast. His family had been the keepers of the Book of Souls for generations until its disappearance.”

“How does he feel about what you and the others are trying to do?” Dina asked.

“You are referring to our contact with humans.” Linis breathed deeply. “He is of the old way of thinking, but so far has done nothing to hinder our efforts. Some elders distrust him for that very reason. They imagine that he secretly aids our cause. That is untrue, of course, though his presence here will not help to quell the rumors.”

“Surely they understand that he comes because of the Book?” said Dina.

“None of the others know,” Linis replied. “Aside from his personal guard, I am the only elf that knows of his reasons.”

“Why?” asked Lee. “Wouldn't it be to his benefit to allow the other elders to understand why he is here?”

“Yes,” said Linis. “But there is another complication. As you know, Kaylia is to be killed should she be found.”

“I know,” growled Lee. “I went to see her and Gewey just before I came here. I was stopped at the door by two elf guards. Theopolou was inside, though I didn't see him.”

“You needn't worry about Kaylia,” said Linis. “She is the reason he is here, not the Book. He is her uncle.”

Dina straightened in her seat and gasped. “Her uncle? I thought her uncle was one of the elders who want her dead?”

“No,” replied Linis. “He cannot support her publicly, but he was strongly opposed to having her killed before judgment could be passed. Understand that, after the death of her father, he took her for his own daughter. Theopolou may be set in his ways, but he loves Kaylia. He could not abide her assassination. Especially when such an act breaks our traditions.”

“I see,” said Lee thoughtfully. “Then he is here to do what? Heal her? Take her to be judged? What exactly?”

“To be honest, I'm not sure.” Linis shrugged. “He knows I will not allow her to be taken. I’ve told him as much.”

“I hate to point this out,” said Lee. “But he has ten guards with him. There are maybe a dozen knights in Valshara, and most of them are either too young to have seen battle, or too old to be effective against a trained elf warrior.”

“I don't think it will come to that,” said Linis. “But still, I have sent word to the other seekers. They'll be here soon. I've instructed them to guard the way from Valshara. If Theopolou or any of his guards try to take Kaylia, they will be stopped.”

“That is good,” said Lee. “Still, I am concerned. If this meeting goes badly....”

“If that happens,” Linis interrupted, “I will give you time to get Dina and your mother out of danger. My brethren will be reluctant to fight me, and that should give you enough time to escape.”

Lee nodded. “Though I hate the idea of leaving you to fight alone, it seems the best option.”

“I don't like this discussion,” said Dina. “Nothing is going to happen, and talk of killing and escaping upsets my stomach. If it goes wrong, we'll deal with it then.”

“Quite right.” A smile returned to Linus’s face. “We have so little time for good company and pleasant talk. It would be a pity to waste what we have been given.”

The conversation was light for the next few hours. Linis told them that he had sent his band of seekers along the coast of the Western Abyss to open relations with the coastal villages, while he had made contact with several small groups of elves in an attempt to sway them to his cause. But this had so far met with only marginal success.

After a time they decided to take their afternoon meal and then retire to their quarters in order to prepare for the meeting with Theopolou.

“I would caution you,” Linis warned Lee as they parted. “Theopolou is soft spoken but dangerous. He may not want to see his niece come to harm, but I doubt that sentiment extends to you or the rest of the people here. If you notice his escort becoming agitated, get ready to make your escape.”

Lee nodded grimly and went to his room.

A fine white linen shirt and trousers embroidered with gold runes, along with a pair of black leather boots and matching belt, lay neatly on his bed. Steam rose from the hot water filling a large washtub in the corner. Lee smiled. He enjoyed a long soak, allowing the tension to flow from his body as he meditated on the situation.

Once clean and dry he got dressed, careful not to wrinkle the linen, and attached his sword to the belt. It wasn't long before a light tap sounded on his door. Lee opened it. Dina was stood there dressed in her best ceremonial robes, smiling sweetly.

“I take it you're my escort,” said Lee.

“Indeed I am. Your mother and the elves have just entered the main receiving hall. They will begin as soon as we arrive.”

Dina led Lee though the passages of the temple to the western wing and down a long arched hallway. A large oak door stood at the end. Dina entered first.

The main receiving hall was one hundred foot long and nearly twice as wide. The walls were lined with paintings and tapestries depicting monks, priests, and priestesses involved in various acts of charity and bravery. Four immense brass chandeliers hung from the ceiling, illuminating the hall. At the rear of the room, a cushioned mahogany chair stood on a small crimson rug. There sat Lee's mother, dressed in the same white robes that Dina wore, but with a deep blue sash tied loosely about her waist.

A long wooden table was positioned in front of the high priestess. The elves were standing, backs to the door, next to their chairs. They had discarded their armor in favor of multicolored shirts and trousers made from a material that caught the light and made them shimmer. Each had a long knife attached to their belts. The fact that they wore no swords somehow made Lee feel better. The elf in the middle, though dressed similarly to the others, had a long silver ponytail tied tightly by a black cloth and wore no weapon.

A chair had been placed on either side of Selena. Dina motioned for Lee to occupy the one to her right. As he passed in front of the table, he glanced over to the elves. Their faces were grim as they watched Lee stand next to his seat. Theopolou was clearly the eldest.

His skin was pale compared with the others, and the tiny lines around his eyes and the corners of his mouth spoke of many winters and many worries, though only Lee's keen eyesight would have noticed this. Dina stood next to the opposite chair. Lee scanned the room for Linis, but could not see him anywhere. In fact, there were no temple guards of any kind present. This made Lee nervous. The only way out was the way he’d come in. Should the meeting go poorly, it would not be easy for him to get his mother and Dina to safety.

Selena stood and addressed the room. “I bid you welcome. I am Selena Starfinder, High Lady of Valshara and leader of the Order of Amon Dähl. This is Sister Celandine, a historian of our order, and this is my son....”

“We know of the half-man,” said Theopolou, his voice was deep and stern, but tempered. “And as you and I are acquainted, we should forgo introductions. My companions prefer not to be named at this moment. Time is short, and we have much to discuss.”

Selena nodded and took her seat. The rest followed suit.

“I would have Linis here,” said Lee. “It is because of his efforts that we are together today.”

Theopolou furled his brow. “You speak out of turn, half-man. Your presence here is only allowed out of courtesy.”

Lee leveled his gaze. “My presence is not an option,” he corrected. “You would do well to remember that.”

The other elves shifted in their seats, but Theopolou shot them a glance and they settled down.

“Son, please,” whispered Selena. “Mind your temper.” Lee ignored her. His eyes never left Theopolou's.

“You are bold,” said Theopolou. “I was told as much. I was also told you ended the life of Berathis.”

Lee’s expression did not change. “I did. He died with honor facing me in single combat. His passing weighs heavy on my heart.”

The elves whispered to each other, but Theopolou only nodded somberly. “If you are concerned for the safety of your mother, you needn't fear. I gave my word to Linis just before we entered this hall that we will commit no violence within these walls. It was the only way to keep him out.”

“Why would you want to keep him out?” asked Lee.

“That is between Linis and me,” the old elf replied. “But rest assured he is not far. I can have him summoned if he is needed.” His eyes fixed on Selena. “I assume you have brought it with you.”

Selena reached beneath her chair and pulled forth the box containing the Book of Souls. An audible gasp came from the elves as the High Lady held it aloft.

“As I promised, it is here,” she said.

“That belongs to the elves,” blurted out a young elf sitting at the end of the table.

“Silence,” commanded Theopolou.

The young elf lowered his eyes in obedience. “May I approach, High Lady?” Theopolou asked.

Selena nodded, and he rose to his feet and walked over to her chair. She handed him the box. Theopolou gently ran his fingers across the ancient letters.

“It is the Book of Souls.” He handed the box back to Selena. “How did you come by this?”

“It was in my possession,” said Lee. “I inherited it from my former lord and master, Dauvis Nal’Thain.”

“I see,” Theopolou muttered. He returned to his seat. “The Nal’Thain family is known to me. They were fierce adversaries during the Great War. It is likely that it was they who stole the book in the first place.”

“Some may say it was stolen,” said Lee. “Some might call it the spoils of war.”

“Some might,” said Theopolou. “It matters little. What concerns my people is what is to become of it now. We were the keepers of the Book of Souls for generations and believe it best left in our care.”

“I don't understand,” said Lee. “From what I've learned, the Book of Souls was written by the gods. Unless I'm mistaken, you and your people don't exactly hold the gods in high regard.”

“You are not mistaken. But we do not believe it was written by the gods alone. We believe it was written by the hand of the Creator, then passed into our care. We were charged with its keeping until the time of the ‘Coming of the Emancipator’. The Emancipator will free us from the curse that took away our understanding of The All Father. Without the Book of Souls, we will be forever lost.”

“I understand why you would want it so badly,” said Selena. “But we believe it may hold the key to our own salvation as well.”

“You refer to the power that grows in the north,” said Theopolou. “We are aware of the one you call the Dark Knight, and know that he seeks your destruction, as well as the destruction of the gods.”

“And we are aware that he has contacted your people,” said Selena. “And that many believe him to be the reincarnation of the Demon King Rätsterfel.”

“You know much,” said Theopolou. “Then you must also know that we have not agreed to join his cause.” His tone darkened. “At least - not yet.”

“A threat?” asked Selena.

“No, High Lady. A fact. There are many who feel that should Angrääl march, we should join them. But we have not decided to do so. We are still uncertain of his true intentions.”

“I'll tell you what his intentions are,” roared Lee. “He wants to destroy everything and reshape the world in his own image. If he is not stopped, blood will cover the land.”

Selena placed her hand on Lee's forearm to calm him. “Do you truly believe that there will be a place for your people in his new world?”

“It is that question that has caused much debate.” Theopolou kept his eyes on Selena, ignoring Lee's agitation. “And also why it is important that you return the Book to us.”

“If the Book of Souls was in your possession,” said Lee, “what's to stop you from giving it to the Dark One?”

“How dare you!” Theopolou’s age melted away, and suddenly he looked very much an elf warrior. The other elves jumped to their feet, shouting curses, but none reached for their weapons.

“It's a fair question,” said Selena calmly. “Should we hand over the Book, what is to say that it will not be used against us later? It is said that it only can be opened by one who possesses the power of heaven. The Dark Knight has the Sword of Truth. He may be able to use it to open the Book.”

“We would never give it to him.” Theopolou settled back down. “This I swear.”

“Yet it may be taken from you if he knows you have it,” said Lee. “It was taken once before.”

“It may be taken from you as well,” Theopolou shot back. “From what I have seen of your defenses, that could easily happen.”

“Aside from you, your escort, and a few others,” replied Selena, “none know the location of this temple. And though you may not think so, we have the means to defend ourselves.”

“This location is not as secret as you think. My people have known of it since it was first built. It would not be difficult for the spies of Angrääl to find it, if they have not already done so.”

“You assume the Book would be kept here,” said Selena with a wry smile.

“I assume you have summoned me to return it.”

“Let's not play games. You know why I summoned you here.”

“I saw Kaylia and her young friend,” said Theopolou. “I told you there is nothing I can do for them. They are beyond my reach.”

“We had hoped that you would know a way to open the Book,” said Selena. “Perhaps within its pages we could find a way to help them?”

Theopolou shook his head. “I cannot. My family has been the Book’s keeper and guardian, but we have no knowledge of how to open it, or what is truly inside. Even if I knew, I wouldn't. It is not meant for me, or any but the Emancipator.”

“Perhaps not,” said Lee. “But the thought of handing over a potential weapon to a people who have such deep hatred of humans does not sit well with me.”

“I understand,” Theopolou replied thoughtfully. “As I have given my word, we will not take it by force. But you must know that once word of this reaches my people, they will not suffer you or anyone else to possess it. They will come for it.”

“Any attempt to attack this temple will fail,” warned Lee. “And many will die in the attempt.”

“All the more reason for you to return it,” he replied. “I have no desire for bloodshed, but I cannot prevent it from happening. My kin will take back the Book of Souls. Of this I am certain.”

“As the High Lady of Valshara, I will tell you this.” Selena’s voice was commanding and firm. “Any attempt to take the Book of Souls by force will fail. You may know of the location of this temple, but you do not know its secrets. Even should you succeed to breach our walls, you will never find the Book. It will be lost forever.” She slowly rose to her feet. “I promise you that the moment a single elf steps inside without invitation, this will be the last moment the Book of Souls will see the light of the sun. I will cast it where no one will ever find it again.”

“This is getting us nowhere.” Theopolou’s frustration bled through in his voice. “What will make you see reason?”

The door to the hall flew open and Sister Wileminia ran straight to the High Lady. As she whispered in her ear, Selena's eyes widened.

“We must resume this later,” Selena announced. “Lee, Dina and Lord Theopolou, I need you to come with me at once.”

“What's happened?” asked Dina.

“Gewey and Kaylia are awake. Sister Wileminia, will you see that Theopolou's companions are fed?”

Wileminia gave a quick nod and Selena rushed out of the room. Lee, Theopolou, and Dina followed closely behind.

Chapter 5

When they arrived at the healing chamber they found it nearly empty. A single healer was mixing herbs with a stone pestle in the corner, and Gewey and Kaylia were sitting up in their beds talking quietly to each other. Their faces lit up when they saw Lee and Dina, but Kaylia's expression quickly changed to concern when Theopolou entered.

“It's about time you two woke up.” Lee laughed.

“It's good to see you, too,” said Gewey. His voice was weak and cracked.

“They mustn't speak too much,” said Selena. “At least, not until they've had a few days to regain their strength. We've kept them alive with herbal mixtures, but that's not a replacement for a good hot meal.”

“We're both fine,” said Gewey. “Although I wouldn't turn down a bit of food.”

“I've already sent word to the kitchen, High Lady,” said the healer in the corner. “It should be here shortly.”

Theopolou moved next to Kaylia's bed, ignoring the others. “It is good to see you well.”

Kaylia nodded. “I am pleased to see you, uncle. I am confused though. How did you come to be here?”

“Your...friends sent for me. They hoped I could heal you.” He motioned, indicating Gewey. “And this one too. But it seems this was unnecessary.”

“Healing me cannot be the only reason you have come,” said Kaylia. “I am to be killed on sight. Am I not?”

“That is not of my doing,” replied Theopolou. “I have opposed it from the beginning. I despise what you are doing, but I would never see you put to death without judgment.”

“But you would see me put to death,” she shot back.

“Have you not broken the law? Are you not in the company of humans? Have you not chosen to travel with them openly?”

“And why should that be a crime?”

“You should know better than most.”

Kaylia fumed, but Gewey reached out and took her hand.

“I thank you for coming,” said Gewey. “But as you can see, neither of us is in need of help.”

Theopolou stared at Gewey holding the hand of his niece for a long moment. “I see,” he said finally. “Then you have committed yourself to treason, and there is nothing more I can do for you.”

“Treason?” Kaylia scoffed. “Then what have the elders who sent assassins to hunt me down committed?”

“I agree,” said Theopolou. “But that changes nothing. If you come home now, then I might just be able to persuade the elders to let you live. However, the look in your eyes tells me that this will not happen.”

“You're wrong, uncle. I have given my word that I will face judgment, and I will do so. But not until my task is finished.”

“And what task is that? What business could you have with these people?”

“That is not for me to say. At least, not yet.”

Theopolou sighed heavily. “Then if you no longer are in need of aid, that only leaves one final matter.” He looked over to Selena. “The Book of Souls.”

“That can wait,” said Lee. “I would speak to Gewey and Kaylia first. There is much I have to tell them and much I would like to know.”

“Very well,” said Theopolou. “I too, would hear their account. They have journeyed where no elf has gone. How this could have happened has weighed on my mind.”

“Forgive me,” said Gewey to Theopolou. “But there are things you cannot know.”

“Then please omit any details you feel necessary,” he replied. “I already know that you are not what you appear to be. That your spirit traveled beyond my reach or understanding tells me as much. And that Kaylia was able to join you tells me even more.”

Gewey looked at Lee, who just shook his head and shrugged. “Fine,” said Gewey. “But only if Kaylia allows it.”

Kaylia stared hard at her uncle. “He is wise and will learn the truth if he stays, no matter what you leave out.”

“You know me well,” stated Theopolou with a hint of pride. “But I already know that you have bonded your soul to the boy. That is clear. And the places his spirit has traveled say that he is either one of Felsafell's race or something...else.”

Silence fell over the room for a moment. Hearing Felsafell's name caused Gewey's chest to tighten.

“What do you know about him?” asked Gewey.

“I know that he is neither human nor elf. And that he is ancient. His people were here before humans walked the earth. Some believe that they were here even before the elves, but there is no way to know. Perhaps you could ask Felsafell, if he allows you to find him. I know that his race was able to project themselves into places unreachable by any, save the gods. ”

“I have met him,” admitted Gewey. “I spent the night in his home, and I saw him again just before I woke.”

Theopolou looked at Gewey in wonder. “Then I think I would hear your tale now.”

Gewey nodded and recounted the experience he and Kaylia had had in the spirit world.

When he had finished Lee doubled over in laughter. “You are a wonder. Just when I think I’ve heard everything, you tell us this.”

“You are a wonder indeed,” agreed Theopolou. “And the only one of your kind, unless I am mistaken.”

Lee tensed. “Whatever you may think, I'm sure you are mistaken.”

Theopolou raised his eyebrow and smirked. “I see that you believe I shall reveal his secret. Perhaps I would if circumstances were different. But, as my niece has bonded with him, I will not. Besides, if I did, I would be put to judgment for not killing a god when given the chance. Even my own guards would turn on me.”

Hearing Gewey's true nature said aloud brought a wave of anxiety throughout the room.

“How long have you known?” asked Selena.

“I suspected from the moment I discovered where his spirit had traveled,” he replied. “But when I heard about your experience with Felsafell there was no question in my mind. And it does explain Angrääl's sudden mobilization in the north, and their pursuit of a young boy.”

“What do you mean?” asked Lee. His thoughts turned to his wife and son.

“Our seekers tell us that his armies gather. He will be ready to march by spring at the latest.”

“When did you learn this?” asked Lee.

“Just before I came here. The information can be no more than a week old.”

“How is it we have heard nothing of this?” Selena’s eyes flashed with anger.

“If you have sent spies north, they would not likely have made it far enough to have seen anything,” replied Theopolou. “The way is well guarded. Even my people have difficulty moving undetected.”

“We need to start building alliances here,” said Lee. “As the elves will not join us, we should finish our business and move on.”

“Quite right,” Theopolou agreed. “But as we are at an impasse, I do not see what there is left to say.”

“What business?” asked Gewey.

Lee told Gewey about the meeting. Gewey sat up straight in bed and rubbed his chin. “I would like to speak to Kaylia and Theopolou alone.”

Lee and the others paused for a moment before obeying.

“What do you suppose they're talking about?” wondered Dina as they waited outside the chamber.

Lee shook his head. “If I know Gewey, he's doing something foolish.”

“Give him some credit,” said Dina. “He's managed to do pretty well so far.” Lee grunted and crossed his arms.

Selena placed her hand lightly on Lee's shoulder. “It will be fine,” she said softly. “If what you've told me about the boy is true, his heart will guide him well.”

For over an hour they waited, the only interruption being a healer who brought Gewey and Kaylia a bowl of stew and some apple juice. Lee was just about to lose his patience when Theopolou came to the door and invited them inside.

“We have come to an agreement,” said Gewey. “But I don't think you're going to like it.”

“No doubt,” remarked Lee.

“Don't worry,” interjected Theopolou. “It's conditional on the approval the High Lady. And you, of course.”

What is it?” asked Selena.

“I have agreed to allow Theopolou to possess the Book of Souls,” said Gewey. “In return, he will help me persuade the elves to join us.”

“Assuming I agree,” said Selena. “How do you propose to do that?”

“I will open the Book of Souls.”

“You'll what?” exclaimed Lee. “How?”

“If the boy truly is a god, then he possesses the power of heaven,” Theopolou explained. “With that power, there is a possibility that he may be able to open the Book. If he can, that will go a long way toward swaying my people, if not into joining you, at least into not opposing you.”

“And when they find out what he is?” argued Lee. “What then? Even elves that befriend humans hold no love for the gods.”

“Nor do I,” said Theopolou. “But I do not subscribe to the notion that it was the gods that caused the Split. I was there.” He turned to Kaylia. “As was your father. I saw no evidence of divine intervention.”

“Then what do you think really happened?” asked Lee.

“That is not a thing I would discuss here. It is the business of the elves. I only say this much to set your mind at ease regarding my intentions toward Gewey. I may not wish to befriend humans, but as Gewey is not human, I bear him no ill will.”

“I wish you could let go of the old hatred, uncle,” said Kaylia. “They’re not as we have been told. At least, not the ones I call friends.”

“You did not suffer through the Great War, or the Split. I watched the humans take advantage of our weakness and decimate our people. I could never trust them, and without trust, there can be no friendship. If I can help Gewey convince my people to help your cause, it is only to fight a greater threat. I do not believe the promises made by the Dark One. Once he has defeated his human enemies, he will turn on us and destroy us too.”

“I'm still concerned about the Book falling into the hands of our enemies,” said Selena. “How does this agreement prevent that?” She walked to the bed and sat beside Gewey.

“If I fail to help sway my kin, I will take the Book and hide it away where it will never be found,” Theopolou replied. “You have my solemn vow on this.”

“And just how do you propose to sway them?” asked Lee.

“Gewey and Kaylia will accompany me to my home. There the elders will meet and decide.”

“Hold on a minute,” said Lee “Do you really think we would allow Gewey and Kaylia to simply leave with you and deliver themselves into the hands of people who want nothing more than their deaths?”

“They will be under my protection,” replied Theopolou. “No elf will harm them while I give them sanctuary. That I return with the Book of Souls will also go far in aiding our cause.”

“If you do this, I will go with you.” Lee planted his fists on his hips.

“No, Lee,” said Gewey. “It can only be Kaylia and me. If we have any hope of bringing the elves to our side, we must show them we can be trusted.”

“You will not be welcome among us, half-man,” said Theopolou. “If you come, our efforts will surely fail.”

“Find a way to make them bear my presence if you are so bloody wise.” Lee could barely contain his frustration.

“Insults are not called for. I have given my word that the boy and Kaylia will not be harmed.”

“And what of Kaylia?” Dina was careful not to come to close to Theopolou, afraid he might discover her heritage. “What if they decide to judge her?”

“Kaylia will face judgment,” he replied. “But not at this time. I have granted her my protection, and my people will honor it.”

“Let us think on this,” said Selena. “I will give you my answer tomorrow. In any event, they cannot travel until they are stronger.”

“I would like Dina and Lee to stay a while,” said Gewey. “They've heard my story, and now I'd like to hear theirs.”

Selena smiled. “Only for a short while. You must regain your strength.” She turned to Theopolou. “I'll have rooms made ready for you and your escort.”

Theopolou nodded. “Thank you, High Lady. If you can provide us with rooms that are, how shall I put this - secluded? That would make our stay more pleasant for everyone.”

“That can be arranged.” She showed no sign of being insulted. “I can have your meals brought to you as well if you wish.”

“That would be fine.”

“Then, if you will follow me,” she said, leading Theopolou from the room.

“You certainly wasted no time in causing me trouble,” said Lee once the door had closed.

“I'm sorry,” said Gewey. “But there is no other way.”

“I didn't say you were wrong. I just don't like it.”

“Enough.” said Kaylia. “I want to know what has happened while I was asleep.”

“Yes,” agreed Gewey. “So would I.”

“Fine.” Lee sighed.

Lee recounted the events up until that day. Gewey smiled when he heard about the meeting between Lee and his mother.

“It's hard to believe,” said Gewey once Lee had finished. “All this time, and she was living right here.”

“Yes.” Lee chuckled. “The world is full of surprises.” His eyes grew sad, “Now, if only I had word from Millet.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “I think I may be able to find them - with Kaylia's help.”

“How would you do that?” asked Lee, unable to contain his excitement.

“I believe I can touch the mind of Malstisos. With a healthy dose of jawas tea and Kaylia lending me her strength, it may just be possible.”

Lee looked at Gewey doubtfully. “They're hundreds of miles away. How could you do such a thing?”

Gewey smiled wide. “One thing I realized when I was with the spirits is that time and distance don't amount to much there. Now that I know the way, I can return.”

Dina became alarmed. “But won't you risk being trapped again?”

“Not likely. The spirits will leave me alone now, and they are the ones who trapped me in the first place. Without them in my way, I should be able to come and go as I please. With Kaylia there to help me find him, I think I can reach Malstisos no matter how far away he is.”

“I still can't ask you to risk it.” Lee shook his head. “If you're wrong...”

“He is not wrong,” said Kaylia. “Reaching out and returning is not the challenge. Finding one particular mind is. We have an advantage in that Malstisos will probably be the only elf in the area, so it will be easier to single him out. That's where I come in. Our bond allows me to travel with Gewey, and my familiarity with an elf’s mind should increase our chances.”

“When you say travel...” said Dina.

“I mean it literally,” replied Kaylia. “It's different to when one touches the mind of another, the way you or I would do. The world where we go is as real as this one in a way.”

“I am familiar with this sort of contact, as you know,” said Lee. “But it's still difficult to understand.”

“As much as I'd like to show you, I'm not sure what the risks would be,” explained Gewey. “Just imagine yourself in a dream where anything is possible, only you’re wide awake.”

“Sounds wonderful,” said Dina.

“It is.” Gewey nodded. “But it can be terrible too. If it wasn't for Felsafell saving us, we'd probably still be trapped.”

“That's probably the most confusing thing about your tale,” remarked Lee. “Little is known about him, and if Theopolou is right about his being a part of some ancient race, then his motives are a mystery. I don't like mysteries.”

“Whatever he's after, it doesn't seem he means to harm me,” said Gewey. “Until I can see him again, that will have to be enough.”

“But he was the one who freed you,” said Lee. “What if the spirits decide to keep you there again?”

“They won't,” said Gewey. “Even if they did, I think I could escape them if I needed to.”

“And you really think you can contact Malstisos?” asked Dina.

“I do,” Gewey nodded. “Tonight, I will try.”

Lee nodded reluctantly.

With that settled, Kaylia turned to Dina. “I see you are in full dress.”

“Indeed I am. While you and Gewey slept, I was elevated to full cleric. I'm a temple historian now.”

“That is wonderful,” said Kaylia. “I know you'll do well.”

“I'm going to try. The High Lady has put a great deal of trust in me.”

“You won't disappoint her,” said Gewey. “I know it.”

Dina smiled and her cheeks flushed. “I hope you're right. It's everything I've hoped for. I just didn't think it would happen so quickly.” She choked back tears of happiness. “But enough of that. Do you really think you can open the Book of Souls?”

“I'm not sure,” Gewey admitted. “I do believe it's the only way to bring the elves over to our side.”

“I agree that we need them,” said Lee. “But I'm not sure this is the best way to go about it. Why not leave it to Linis and the others to sway them?”

“Do we have that kind of time?” asked Gewey. “If the Dark Knight moved on us today, what would happen? Could we fight him?”

“Then perhaps if I can't go with you, Linis can,” suggested Lee. “We could insist upon it.”

“We could request,” corrected Kaylia. “But Linis is an outlaw as well. It may prove difficult. But, I agree that it's worth a try. Outlaw or no, he is among the greatest of all the seekers, and his presence carries weight.”

The door open and Selena returned. Lee told her about their idea of Linis accompanying them.

“I like it,” said Selena thoughtfully. “I think if I agree to allow the Book of Souls to return to the elves, Theopolou will agree also. I'll approach the subject in the morning.” She took a long look at Gewey and Kaylia. “I think it's time you two rested. We can talk more in the morning.”

Gewey protested, but Selena stopped him with one stern look. Lee and Dina embraced them tightly and bid them goodnight.

“I'll wake you if I'm successful,” Gewey called to Lee as he was leaving. Lee nodded and shut the door.

Chapter 6

Malstisos felt a cool breeze caress his cheeks as he walked between the massive redwoods. The noon sun shone through the leaves, making the grass sparkle like a million tiny emeralds. The forest was familiar, but like a distant memory from childhood. He reached over and touched the almost black bark of a nearby tree. It should have been hard and coarse, but it wasn't. It was soft and smooth, and yielded to his touch. He withdrew his hand in amazement. He reached out again and gently moved his hand over the bark. Light rippled up the length of the tree and back down again. Malstisos stood transfixed by the sight.

“This can't be real,” he whispered.

“It's real,” a voice called from behind.

Malstisos spun around, but there was no one there. “Who are you?” There was no answer. He reached for his knife and found that it was no longer at his side. “Show yourself.”

“I am here.” This time the voice was softer and clearly feminine.

“Why can't I see you?” he asked, straining his eyes. The forest began to blur and shift. “What's happening?”

“Don't be afraid. We are friends.”

“We?” he said. “Who are you, and what do you want?”

“It's Kaylia. I'm here with Gewey.”

“Kaylia? Why can't I see you? What is this place?”

“You are at the edge of the spirit realm. Why you can't see me, I do not know. I suspect that you would in time. But time is not a luxury we have. We have guided you here, though I do not know how long you can remain.”

“How do I know you are who you say you are?” he challenged. “How do I know this isn't just a vivid dream?”

“Does it feel like a dream?”

“Yes - and no,” he said. “I feel awake, but all this…”

He looked around as the forest ebbed and flowed like a green tide. “It can't be real.”

“It is real,” said Kaylia. “At least, in the sense that this is a real place. This is only our second time here, but I think that it changes with your thoughts and emotions. I do know that the dangers here are very real.”

“Dangers,” said Malstisos. “What dangers?”

“There is no time to explain. Gewey is struggling to keep you in this world. Did you succeed in saving Lee’s wife and son?”

“His son is with us,” he replied. “But I'm sad to say that his wife has been taken north to Angrääl. Millet is taking the boy to Baltria, while I escort Maybell to Althetas.”

“I see.” She paused. “Stick to your plan. Lee will find Millet in Baltria. Gewey and I have our own task, but you will be met in Althetas. Go to the Frog’s Wishbone when you arrive. An agent from Valshara will contact you there.”

“How am I to know....?” Malstisos began, but he was already losing contact. The forest turned into a swirl of light and color. He felt as if he were falling. Then blackness.

Malstisos awoke drenched in sweat, his heart pounding. For a moment, he didn't know where he was. As his mind cleared, he heard the sound of Millet, Jacob, and Maybell's deep, regular breathing. He reached over and shook Millet.

“What's wrong?” asked Millet groggily. Malstisos recounted his experience.

“Do you believe it was them?” Millet asked.

“I do. How they accomplished it I can't imagine, but I sensed no deception.”

“Then we should keep to our plan,” said Millet. “It's several hours until dawn, so we should try and sleep. Maybell can be told of this in the morning.”

Malstisos nodded in agreement and drew his blanket tightly around him. Sleep came slowly and his dreams were troubled.

The morning brought the smell of crisp bacon and fresh bread. Gerald was busy setting the table and humming.

Millet was first to rise and helped with breakfast. At first Gerald protested, but soon realized Millet wasn't one to be deterred. The duo had the table prepared a full ten minutes before Malstisos and Maybell stirred. Jacob was last to awaken.

“Things are in order from the smell of it.” Maybell yawned and stretched. She looked over to Malstisos, who was just waking up. “I always imagined elves to be early risers.”

“My sleep was troubled - and eventful,” he replied. “But we'll discuss that after breakfast.”

About halfway through their meal Gerald excused himself and left them alone at the table. Malstisos informed Maybell and Jacob of his dream experience.

“Amazing,” remarked Maybell. “Well, I'm happy that you'll be met in Baltria.”

“I'm not,” Jacob growled. “I have no need of my father, and have no intention of seeing him.”

“If you intend to go to Baltria, you won't have much of a choice,” stated Millet. “According to Malstisos he will certainly be there, so you had better get used to the idea.”

Jacob folded his arms. “He had better stay out of my way.”

“Calm yourself,” said Malstisos. “First you must arrive at your destination, and that may not be easy.”

“We'll get there,” said Jacob. “If I have to kill every soldier I see on the way.”

“Young man, you would do well to take Millet's lead,” said Maybell. “He has seen much more of the world than you. If getting to Baltria means saving your mother, then you'd do well to keep your mouth shut, and your eyes and ears open.”

Jacob glared at Maybell, but could find no words to reply.

“I do not think you should take time to speak to the Oracle when we arrive in Manisalia,” said Malstisos.

Millet nodded. “I agree. In fact, I would have you avoid the city entirely if it's possible.”

“I'm sure I can find a way around if need be,” said Malstisos. “But, seeing as how I intend to leave you with the remainder of the provisions, Sister Maybell and I will need to resupply once you're departed. There is no way we can avoid the city, at least for a few hours.”

“Good,” said Maybell. “And I most surely would like to consult the Oracle - if she's still there.”

The front door opened and Gerald entered, smiling. “I see you've nearly finished breakfast. I hope you enjoyed it.”

“Very much.” Maybell returned the smile. The rest nodded in agreement.

“I've readied your horses,” said the boy. “I'll bring them 'round front whenever you'd like.”

“We'll be leaving shortly,” said Millet. “You can bring them now.” Gerald nodded and dashed off.

They gathered their belongings and filed out of the front door. As promised, Gerald had saddled their horses and had them lined up a few feet away. He bowed to each in turn, handing them a cloth wrapped around a piece of roast lamb and a loaf of bread, thanking them for their kind donation. Maybell embraced the lad tightly and whispered into his ear. Gerald smiled sadly, turned and entered the hospice.

Travel that day was slow and miserable. By noon, the wind howled through the trees and the sky filled with clouds that promised snow.

Malstisos stopped periodically to check for signs of pursuit but found none.

“I think perhaps whatever that creature was, he must have been alone,” said Malstisos during one of their stops. “That is not to say that more are not waiting for us ahead.”

Millet shivered at the thought. The monster’s distorted features still burned in his mind.

“Let them come,” boasted Jacob, “I don't fear them.”

Malstisos snorted loudly. “Then you're a fool. Fear may keep you alive. You are no warrior. That I can clearly see. If you encounter one of them, you should run if you can.”

Jacob leaped from his horse and drew his sword. “I have had enough of your insults, elf.”

Malstisos stared down at the boy for a moment, then casually slipped out of the saddle. “Come then,” he said. “Let us see what you're made of.” He didn't bother to draw his blade.

Jacob's mouth twisted into a malevolent grin. He lashed out at the elf, his blade seeking flesh, but it found only cold, winter air. Though Jacob moved with uncanny speed, he was no match for Malstisos.

“Come now, boy,” Malstisos taunted. “Certainly you can do better than that.”

Now thoroughly infuriated, Jacob ran headlong at the elf, slashing maniacally. Malstisos ducked quickly, spun around, and brought his heel into the back of the boy’s knee. Jacob’s leg collapsed, and he fell hard on to his back. Malstisos stepped on Jacob's blade, trapping it. Jacob struggled to pull the blade free, but Malstisos bent down, pressing his knee on Jacob’s throat.

“You have passion,” said Malstisos. “But no discipline.”

Jacob bucked and twisted, but Malstisos only pressed harder. Slowly, Jacob stopped struggling and relaxed. After a moment, Malstisos released him and held out his hand, but Jacob only glared, his eyes filled with hate and anger.

“Take my hand, young one,” said the elf. “The fight is done. You have lost, but there is no shame. You did well considering your lack of training.”

Jacob reached up, took Malstisos' hand, and allowed the elf to pull him to his feet. He brushed himself off and retrieved his sword.

“Now, if we are done with all this foolishness,” said Maybell. “We have distance to cover.”

“That we do,” agreed Millet. “If we quicken our pace, you and Malstisos should be able to reach Manisalia in three days.”

“As we are no longer followed, that should be easy,” added Malstisos. He took another look at Jacob, who was mounting his horse. “It appears you are uninjured.”

“I'm fine,” Jacob grumbled. “It takes more than that to hurt me.”

“I do not doubt your toughness,” said Malstisos. “But mind your pride and your anger. It will be your undoing if you are not careful.”

“That comes from his father,” said Millet. “He was the same way.”

“I'm nothing like him,” said Jacob.

Millet shook his head sadly. “I know you must think he abandoned you and your mother. But he only left to protect you. One day you'll understand.”

“Then explain it to me,” said Jacob in disgust.

“It is not my place,” said Millet. “Your father is the only one who can reveal his motives. For me to do so would be a betrayal.”

Jacob sniffed and turned his horse. The others followed close behind.

The rest of the day the group traveled without speaking, and when they made camp Jacob chose to sleep far away from the others. Millet tried to convince him to come closer to the fire, but he was met with cold silence.

The next morning snow began to fall. Gently at first, but by midday it was well on its way to becoming a full-blown blizzard.

Millet shivered. “If this gets much worse, I'm afraid we will freeze to death long before we reach Manisalia.”

Malstisos nodded in agreement and glanced back at Maybell. She was slumped in her saddle with her coat and a blanket wrapped tightly around her.

They trudged on for several hours until they were virtually frozen. About an hour before dark, Malstisos motioned for everyone to stop.

“There is a large group of humans ahead,” he said. “They have many horses and wagons.”

“Could be a merchant caravan,” suggested Millet.

“Or soldiers,” said Jacob.

Malstisos slid out of his saddle. “Wait here.” With that, he disappeared into the brush.

“I'm hoping for merchants,” said Maybell, rubbing her arms. “We can barter for a place by a fire.”

Millet nodded in agreement.

By the time Malstisos returned, the snow was coming down in earnest. “Merchants,” he announced. “Ten wagons strong. And something else...” His face wore a strange expression.

“What is it?” asked Millet.

“There are elves among them. I didn't notice their presence until I was nearly upon them, but there is no mistake.”

“What difference does that make?” asked Jacob. “At least you don't have to hide.”

“You don't understand,” said Malstisos. “In the west there are places where we have dealings with humans. But as far as I know, no such alliances exist here.”

“Did they know you were there?” asked Millet.

“I don't think so. But I cannot be certain.”

“What should we do?” asked Maybell.

Malstisos shrugged. “What choice do we have? Winter has come early, and we are not prepared for this type of weather. If we don't seek shelter we will freeze to death.”

Millet sighed heavily and urged his horse forward. The caravan was camped a quarter of a mile away in a large clearing on the north side of the road. Several large canvas tents stood in a semi-circle, and a half dozen cooking fires flickered in the center. At least three dozen men and women, all wrapped in thick coats, were busy preparing the evening meal. As they came closer, two cloaked figures walked toward them. They were tall, lean, and wrapped in heavy wool blankets.

“Elves,” said Malstisos under his breath, and looked to Jacob. “Do not speak until we know why they are here.”

Jacob scowled. “I'm not stupid.”

“I did not say you were.”

The elf turned his attention to his approaching kin. He jumped down from his horse and raised his right hand in greeting. The other two elves returned the gesture.

“Greetings brother,” said the elf on the left. His voice was deep and rough, unlike the elf voices Millet and Maybell had heard before. “I am Grentos, and this is Vadnaltis.”

Malstisos took a step forward. “Greetings.”

The two pushed back the blankets from her heads, revealing their features. Both had honey blond hair, pulled tight in a long braid that disappeared into the folds of the wool. Their skin was ivory pale and flawless.

“I see you are from the Northwestern Steppes,” remarked Malstisos. “I have not seen those of your tribe in many years. I am Malstisos of the Finsoulos clan. What brings you here?”

“It has been long since we have had dealings with our southern kin,” said Grentos. “And what brings us to this frozen land is a discussion to be had over a hot meal and good wine. You must be near death in this frigid cold.”

“We were hoping to take shelter with the caravan,” admitted Malstisos. “But I did not expect to find elves among humans.”

“Nor did we expect to see the same.” Grentos smiled broadly. “But you need not fear. The humans here are from the shores of the Abyss. Elves are not unknown to them, nor do they fear us. A tent has been erected to shelter the horses near the tree line. Vadnaltis will show you the way. I'll prepare a meal and a place for you and your friends to rest.”

Malstisos bowed low. “I thank you.” He motioned for the others to dismount. They followed Vadnaltis around the outskirts of the camp to the horse tent. Two boys sat next to a fire near the entrance. They sprang to their feet and took the visitors’ mounts. Millet gave both boys a copper and their eyes lit up.

“I promise they'll be well tended sir,” said the older boy, a dark haired, scraggly youth, barely eleven years old.

Once they’d removed their packs, Vadnaltis led them through the heart of the camp. A few people turned to glance at the newcomers, but most ignored them. They stopped at the far end of a large, red tent with smoke rising from a small opening in the top. Vadnaltis held open the tent flap, allowing Malstisos and the others to enter.

The interior of the tent was simple. Six bedrolls surrounded a small fire in the center. A lantern in each corner combined with the firelight to give the tent a cheery glow. Grentos was at the far end, pouring hot stew from a large pot into six bowls.

“Please, choose a place to sleep,” said Vadnaltis. His voice was even rougher than his comrade’s, and just as deep. “It matters not where.”

Grentos passed out the bowls and retrieved a large jug of wine and some cups from his pack. “First we eat,” he announced. “Then we talk.”

Malstisos and the others gratefully accepted the food and wine, but as Grentos and Vadnaltis did not speak while they ate, the others remained silent as well. The stew was unlike anything Millet, Maybell, or Jacob had ever tasted. Each smiled with delight after their first bite. Malstisos seemed to be more accustomed to the taste and gave no reaction other than a slight nod of approval. Once their meal was complete, Vadnaltis collected the dishes and left the tent. The cold air chilled them when the flap opened, and a wisp of snow blew inside to remind them of how close to death they had come.

“I hope you are satisfied with our poor fare,” said Grentos.

“It was the best stew I've ever tasted,” said Millet.

Maybell and Jacob agreed enthusiastically.

Grentos smiled and bowed his head. “You are too kind. But now that we have eaten, I believe you have questions - as do we.”

“Should we wait for Vadnaltis?” asked Maybell.

“That will not be necessary,” Grentos replied. “As your host, I will have you ask of me what you will. I expect he shall return before you are finished.”

“In that case, I'll be direct,” Malstisos began. “How is it you are here, and in the company of humans? I was not aware your tribe had started relations with them.”

“Only a few of us have,” said Grentos. “We have heard of the progress made in the coastal cities with elf/human relations, and it has inspired some of us to do the same. We realize the world is getting smaller. We need to learn to live in this world alongside mankind or face destruction. The old hatreds must be left in the past.”

“I agree,” said Malstisos thoughtfully. “But that does not explain your presence here.”

“We came to gain intelligence on the gathering power in Angrääl,” said Grentos. “Unfortunately, we were only able to get as far as Hazrah. We were unable to find a clear way further north, at least, not one where we could pass unnoticed. They have every inch of ground well guarded. We gained passage with this caravan in Althetas so that we might travel without drawing attention.”

“So you are returning home?” asked Malstisos.

“Yes,” he replied. “We will stay with the humans until we reach the Western Abyss. Then we head north back to our people.”

“Have you learned anything?” asked Millet.

“Sadly, no.” Grentos sighed. “At least, nothing we didn't already know. The armies of the north are gathering. For what purpose, we can only guess.”

“Don't be a fool,” said Jacob. “You know why they gather.”

“Young one,” said Grentos. “I can see you are of this land, and dismayed that it has been conquered, so I will overlook your insult. But you know nothing.” He reached over and took the jug of wine. “Armies gather. Still, motives may not be known. We have no way to be certain that they intend to march further. They may not have the strength for such a campaign.”

“I think they have the strength,” said Millet. “And I think they intend to keep marching. It's when that troubles me.”

“You may be right, Millet,” said Malstisos. “But I know my brethren. They will not come to arms easily. Without proof of a threat, they will be content to do nothing.”

Grentos nodded. “Without proof, I can do nothing to persuade them.”

Jacob jumped to his feet. “Proof?” he shouted. “They've invaded the north and practically enslaved my people. What more do you need?”

“Calm yourself,” said Grentos. “I did not say that I disagreed with you, only that I cannot convince my people without more evidence.”

Jacob glared at the elf for several moments, then marched out of the tent into the bitter cold.

“That one needs to govern his passions.” Grentos took a long drink from the jug.

“He's young,” said Millet. “And his land is invaded. I share his frustration. I too am from here, and it pains me to see what has become of my home.”

“I am sorry,” said Grentos. “I will try to be a bit more - delicate.”

“Perhaps we should address more practical issues,” suggested Malstisos. “The road splits about twenty miles west. If you are headed for the Western Abyss, I assume you will be taking the northwestern road through Manisalia.”

“Indeed,” Grentos affirmed. “It’s the best way.”

“Millet and Jacob will be taking the southwestern road,” said Malstisos. “But Sister Maybell and I would like to accompany you, at least through Manisalia, once they leave us.”

Grentos smiled broadly. “We would be pleased to have your company. You may stay with us as long as you wish.”

Malstisos nodded. “Thank you, brother. I am grateful.”

“As am I,” Maybell added.

“It is I who am grateful,” said Grentos. “This journey will allow us to strengthen bonds long neglected.”

They spent the rest of the evening in cheerful conversation. The wine flowed freely, and soon the tent was filled with laughter. Jacob returned after a time and proceeded to sulk on his bedroll, despite Grentos' efforts to make amends. By the time the wine was gone, they had all but forgotten their troubles and fell into a deep peaceful sleep.

Chapter 7

Lee was woken by the gentle, feminine voice of one of the young healers who had attended Gewey. It had taken him quite some time to fall asleep. Despite his cool demeanor, he was excited by the prospect of Gewey finding out what had become of his wife and son, not to mention Millet, Maybell, and Malstisos.

“What is it?” asked Lee, groggily.

“I’m sorry, but Master Gewey wishes to speak with you. I told him to wait until morning, but he insisted.”

“Don't be sorry,” he said, trying not to knock the girl down as he sprang from his bed and headed swiftly to the healing chamber.

When he arrived, Gewey was sitting up and sipping a cup of hot tea. Kaylia was still fast asleep in the bed next to his. He looked tired and worn, but managed a thin smile.

“We did it,” said Gewey.

Lee was stunned. He had prepared himself for bad news. “Are they safe?”

“From what I was able to tell they're all just fine,” he answered weakly. “They're a few days from Hazrah. Your son is with Millet, and he is escorting him to Baltria.”

Lee sighed with relief. “And my wife?”

Gewey's eyes fell and his face clouded over. “She isn't with them. She’s been taken north to Angrääl. There was no time for Malstisos to tell us anything more than that.”

Lee's heart froze. “To Angrääl,” he repeated. “Why would they take her there? Unless...”

While Gewey remained silent, Lee began pacing, rubbing his temple. They must have taken her there as some kind of hostage, he told himself. It was the only logical explanation. If the Dark Knight had wanted his mother killed, that could have been done easily enough without dragging her all the way to Angrääl. For a moment blind rage clouded his judgment and he had to battle against a wild impulse to set off on a one-man rescue mission immediately. Gradually though, the red mist of anger began to dissolve and common sense took over.

If she were a hostage, then she was obviously being kept alive for a purpose, and unlikely to be in any immediate danger. On the other hand, for him to go rushing off to Angrääl with no knowledge of his wife’s situation or exact whereabouts could change everything and place her in great peril.

Lee thought some more. Maybe his son was planning a rescue mission of his own! From what he had heard, Jacob was hot headed enough to do just that.  Yes, of course, that was why he was heading to Baltria. Jacob and his mother had friends there who would most likely be willing enough to help him in such a mission. But his son was still a mere child, with no experience whatsoever of such things. For him to make such a rescue attempt would be suicide. With a rush, Lee could see the truth and knew what he had to do.

“I must go to Baltria.” He looked up at Gewey. “I'm sorry, but I must.”

“I know you must. Besides, there is nothing you can do here. The elves won't allow you to go with me anyway.”

“I'll leave after you've gone,” Lee said. “I should still be able to beat them there easily enough.” Gewey nodded, clearly exhausted. Lee frowned. “Are you alright?”

“I'm fine,” Gewey replied. “It took a lot of effort to reach Malstisos. I wasn't ready for it,  that’s all.”

“And Kaylia?”

“She'll be okay after a good night’s rest.”

“I'll let you both sleep then. I can't thank you enough for this.” Gewey nodded slowly and sunk back into his bed.

Lee returned to his room, but sleep took a long time coming. Thoughts of his wife trapped in Angrääl were bad enough. But even more important at this stage was for him to reach Baltria. If Jacob were to set out on such a foolhardy rescue mission before he got there, his son’s chances of survival were almost nil. Even worse, a bungled attempt may well bring about the death of the boy’s mother as well.

Much as these thoughts troubled him, Lee finally accepted that it was pointless dwelling on them. There was nothing he could do until he reached Baltria, and he had others to think of as well. Having accepted this, sleep at last came.

The next morning, Lee joined Gewey and Kaylia for breakfast in the healing chamber. The healers insisted that they rest for at least one more day. A small table had been set up, and Dina and Selena soon joined them. Conversation was light, much to Lee's relief. He never enjoyed serious talk over a meal.

“Theopolou has agreed to allow Linis to accompany you,” said Selena after the table was cleared. “But I fear you may be forced to leave before you are fully recovered.”

“We could leave now if necessary,” stated Kaylia. “I am rested and not accustomed to being idle.”

Selena's eyes wandered to Gewey.

“I'm fine, too,” said Gewey. “Besides, it’s no good for a farmer to be lazy.”

Selena smiled warmly. “Don't worry. Neither of you will be idle for long.” She turned to her son. “I did try to convince Theopolou to let you go...”

Lee stopped her short and told her about Gewey's contact with Malstisos.

“I'll do my best to find out what has become of your wife,” she said. “In the meantime, I'll have preparations made for your journey. We have friends in Baltria. You will have whatever help you require.” She reached over and took Lee's hand. “Don't worry, son. I will do what I must to ensure their safety.”

Lee gave her hand a tight squeeze. “Thank you, Mother.”

“I'll go with you,” said Dina.

Lee smiled. “I appreciate it. But I won't put you in unnecessary danger.”

“Don't be a fool, Lee. You can't go alone, and I grew up in Baltria. You may need me.”

“I think it's a great idea,” said Selena. “I'd feel better knowing you had someone I trusted along with you, and as a temple historian, it’s her duty.”

Lee sighed heavily. “Very well. Meet me in my chambers after the noon meal to discuss our plans.”

Dina grinned with satisfaction.

“When does Theopolou want to leave?” asked Kaylia.

“In two days,” said Selena. “He has already sent word to the other elders. They should be there upon your arrival.”

“I don't like it,” said Lee. “I'd rather Gewey and Kaylia arrived first. Less chance for a trap to be set.”

“Linis agrees,” said Selena. “That's why he's sending his people ahead, just in case.”

Linis opened the door, his face grave. His hand gripped the handle of his long knife so hard his knuckles had turned white.

“What is it?” asked Lee.

“I just received a report that the roads are being watched.”

“That's not surprising,” said Selena. “We know that the elves are aware of this place.”

“It is not elves,” said Linis.

“Men?” asked Kaylia.

“No. We do not know what they are. But they're fast and cunning. My seekers have only been able to catch a glimpse of them before they disappear. But there is little doubt that they are stalking the routes away from here.”

“If the Dark One has discovered the location of this temple, then you must evacuate,” said Lee.

Selena lowered her head. “We will hold if attacked. Our walls are strong, and the Dark One has no army here.”

“Don't be foolish,” said Lee. “You have few men here that can fight or mount a defense. To cover the walls you would need a hundred soldiers, at least.”

“A hundred we shall have,” said Selena. “What you see here is not the entire strength of the Order. I shall send word for all of the knights to gather here. That will be enough to hold this temple indefinitely.”

“How long will this take?” asked Linis.

“I can double my strength in a week,” answered Selena, her hands firmly on her hips. “In three, I can defend this place against any attacker.”

“Then I shall stay until your men arrive,” said Lee.

“No! You will protect my grandson.”

Lee sat back in his chair, stunned by his mother’s sudden anger.

Selena's face softened. “You must protect your family, as I could not. Don't worry about me. If these walls are breached I can escape. There are secrets here that only I know. I will not be captured.”

Lee took his mother’s hands and pulled her close. “Swear it!”

Selena smiled. “I swear,” she said tenderly. “We will not lose each other again.”

Lee lowered his head and sighed heavily.

“We should leave right away, Gewey,” said Linis. “Tonight, if you are able.” He turned to Selena. “You said there are ways out of here that wouldn’t be noticed?”

“Yes.” She wiped her eyes. “I can get you and the others out of the temple unseen.”

“Good. I'll inform Theopolou.” Linus nodded curtly and left.

Lee rose from his chair and looked at Dina. “Prepare to leave,” he commanded. “I want to be gone ahead of Gewey. Perhaps we may draw off any pursuit.”

“Of course.” Dina rushed off to pack.

For the rest of the morning the temple was a beehive of activity. Lee and Dina were ready to leave by midday. Selena provided them with gear and enough provisions to last more than a week, along with three strong horses. Lee had decided to leave Lord Ganflin's steeds behind, and made his mother promise to ride one to safety if the need came.

Gewey and Kaylia had been informed by Theopolou that they would be traveling on foot, which pleased Gewey. He had not been looking forward to saddle sores and preferred to travel light. Linis spent the morning going over the plans with Theopolou and his guards. Theopolou was troubled when he heard the roads were being watched, but agreed that there was little to do but move forward with their plan. The healers made the loudest protests, insisting that Gewey and Kaylia were not ready to be out of bed, let alone travel. However, neither one of them was showing any ill effects from their ordeal, and the insistence of Selena was eventually sufficient to quieten the healer’s opposition.

Just before one o'clock, Lee and Dina made their way to the front gate. The entire temple had gathered in the courtyard to see them off. Selena, Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis stood by the large oak doors, each one trying to hide the concern in their heart.

“Be careful, son,” said Selena as she embraced him. “And you,” she said to Dina with a smile, “keep yourself safe at all times. I won't have my most valued historian getting herself killed.” She embraced Dina tightly.

Linis handed Lee and Dina a small flask each. “Keep this with you,” he told them. “Should you find yourself lacking food and drink, it will keep you strong for several days. Only a mouthful is needed.”

They received their gifts gratefully and bowed in turn.

“Thank you, my friend,” said Lee.

Linis took Dina's hand. “I look forward to our next meeting.”

Dina blushed and smiled. “As do I.”

Kaylia embraced Lee and then turned to Dina. Dina laughed as Kaylia whispered something into her ear.

Gewey hugged Dina before looking at Lee. “Be safe, and bring your son home.”

Lee placed his hands on Gewey's shoulders and studied him for a moment. “You have grown up so much in such a short time. Still, listen to what Linis says, and be careful whom you trust. I don't like the idea of delivering you into the hands of the elves, but I think you’re right. It is the only way.”

“I'll be careful,” said Gewey.

Lee smiled, and then he and Dina mounted their horses.

As they rode through the doors they could hear the farewells of the temple calling after them. Nonetheless, Lee's mind was immediately focused on their journey the moment he heard the boom of the doors closing behind them. They hadn’t ridden a hundred yards when the hairs on the back of his neck stood up. They were being watched. He knew it. But from where exactly, he couldn't tell. The rocky terrain made it impossible for him to spot anyone, and if whoever it was could evade the elf seekers, then he had very little chance of catching him.

Lee turned to Dina, who was looking around nervously. “I feel it too,” she whispered.

“Be ready,” warned Lee.

Dina's hand slid to the knife in her belt. By the time they reached the end of the path her nerves were frazzled. Lee, however, seemed calm and alert.

“We should head in the direction of Althetas,” he said. “If we are still being followed by nightfall, we'll continue on to the city and try to throw them off. If not, we'll start west. There's a road about a day’s ride that will take us to Idelia. From there we can make our way to the southern coast.”

By the time the sun began to set, Lee no longer thought they were being followed. He and Dina found a small clearing and made camp.

“It seems we are not worthy of further attention,” Lee said as he laid out his bedroll. “Which means Gewey and the elves are the likely targets.” His eyes scanned the nearby brush. “Still, I should scout the area. Wait here.”

He disappeared into the fading light, leaving Dina to munch on a piece of bread and some dried fruit. About an hour later, he reappeared.

“Whoever or whatever it was is gone,” Lee said. “For now we aren't the objects of their interest.”

“I hope they feel the same way about Gewey and Kaylia,” said Dina.

Lee nodded slowly, lay down on his bedroll and stared at the night sky.

Chapter 8

Gewey, Kaylia, Selena, and Linis joined Theopolou and his companions in the receiving chamber shortly after Lee and Dina's departure. Their gear lay next to Selena's chair at the far end of the hall.

“Follow me,” said Selena. She walked to the far left corner of the room where a tapestry depicting the symbols of the nine Gods hung. She reached behind it and a loud clack echoed throughout the chamber. A hidden trapdoor in front of her fell open, revealing a ladder leading down into a dark hallway.

“Follow the passage below for about one thousand feet. There you'll find a small iron door.” She handed Gewey a key. “This will unlock it. The passage will let you out along the western wall of the temple. From there, follow the trail west until you reach the Sintil Sans Road.”

Gewey nodded and put the key into his pocket. “Thank you, High Lady.”

They gathered their gear and readied themselves to climb down the narrow ladder. Selena had packed the Book of Souls in Gewey’s satchel.

Theopolou and the other elves thanked Selena for her hospitality. Linis bowed low and held out a small silver dagger sheathed in an ivory scabbard. The handle was wrapped in soft leather, and it was crowned with a large blood ruby. “Take this as a reminder of our friendship,” he said.

Selena smiled and took the dagger. “Thank you, seeker. You and your kin are always welcome here.”

Kaylia took Selena's hand in hers. “I can never repay you for your kindness, High Lady.”

“Nonsense,” she replied. “Your bravery has saved us all. Without you, the only hope we have for survival would still be lying helpless in the healing chamber.”

Kaylia lowered her eyes and smiled.

“As for you,” she said to Gewey. “I charge you with keeping yourself alive and well.”

“I'll do my best,” Gewey replied with a smile, then made his way to the ladder.

Gewey went first, followed closely by Kaylia, Linis, and the others. The narrow hallway was pitch black, and it took a few moments for Gewey's eyes to adjust. The air was stale, and the rough stone walls echoed to their footsteps. Just as Selena had said, the passage sloped gently up for about one thousand feet. There at the end, he could make out the outline of small door. After retrieving the key he had been given, Gewey felt around until he found the keyhole. The lock was old and rusted, and for a moment he feared the key would break; but then, to his relief, he heard the sound of grating metal as the lock gave way. Gewey pushed hard with his shoulder and the door screeched open.

He breathed deeply, allowing the welcome fresh air to fill his lungs. The sun was still high in the sky, and for a moment he was blinded.

“I should take the lead for now,” said Linis.

Theopolou nodded his approval.

They followed the trail west for a few miles before Linis ordered a halt. “I assume you have no intention of traveling the main roads?” he asked.

“Correct,” said Theopolou. “Once this path ends, I will lead the way.”

They continued for several hours. The terrain became less and less rocky, replaced by thinly spaced oaks and pines. The long grass bent and shifted as a constant breeze blew in from the west. What struck Gewey as odd was the utter silence. With the exception of their footfalls and the sound of the wind, nothing, not even birds could be heard. The elves also appeared to notice this oddity, and Gewey could see that it was making them uneasy.

“Something foul is near,” whispered Linis.

“What do you mean?” asked Gewey.

“I'm not sure. But I intend to find out.”

Linis motioned for a halt and disappeared into the thin brush. A while later he returned, muscles tensed and eyes wide.

“We are being followed,” said Linis. “But by whom or what, I can't say.”

“How?” said Gewey. “I thought this way was secret.”

“So did I. It would seem the High Lady was mistaken. I tried to spot our pursuer, but it is as crafty as my seekers reported, assuming that what they saw is the same thing that hounds us now.”

“We should try and capture it,” said Theopolou. “I would know who this is, and why they risk following elves.”

“Whatever it is, it’s neither human nor elf,” said Linis.

“How do you know that?” asked Gewey.

“No human alive could avoid me. Not even a half-man could manage it. As for it being an elf - no elf feels like this creature. Life flees from it. Not even the birds come near.”

Theopolou looked troubled as his brow furled and eyes surveyed the area. “Take as many from my escort as you need.”

“I should need no more than three,” said Linis. He turned to the other elves. “Who among you have had seeker training?”

Stintos and Haldrontis, two tall blond elves, stepped forward. “And I make three,” announced Gewey.

Linis looked at Gewey skeptically. “I know you have training, but I do not think Lee would approve of this.”

“Lee is not here,” said Gewey. “And if he were, I am still the best choice.”

Linis' mouth tightened, then he sighed. “Very well. But you must do exactly as you are told.”

Kaylia grabbed Gewey's arm. “You should let me go instead.”

Gewey squeezed her hand. This drew uneasy stares from the elves. “Don't worry. I won't do anything too stupid.”

Linis motioned for the volunteers to follow him into the brush. They walked north for about one hundred yards, then he told them to halt.

“You two split up east and west. See to it that you make enough noise to announce your presence. I will move north while Gewey follows slowly behind.” His eyes met with Gewey's. “Make sure you are at least three hundred paces behind me at all times. The thing that follows us fell back north as I approached. Ahead is a clearing. The creature will likely try to avoid being exposed, which means it will double back and try to sneak by me. When it does, we will close the trap.” He looked hard at the entire group. “If you encounter whatever this is, do not take it on alone.”

Everyone nodded in agreement. Gewey began to feel the pulse of the earth flowing through his limbs. The world around him opened up, and he could sense everything around him. He closed his eyes, listening for their prey.

“It’s one hundred yards north,” he quickly announced. “And you're right. It's neither human nor elf.”

“How is it you know this?” asked Stintos.

“Never you mind,” shot Linis. “If Gewey says the creature is there, then you can count on it.” He turned to Gewey. “Do you know what it is?”

Gewey shook his head. “No. But I think it knows we're coming.”

“All the more reason to be mindful,” said Linis.

Stintos and Haldrontis drew their long knives and headed in opposite directions. Linis gave Gewey a final glance and set off north. Once he was out of sight, Gewey crept slowly forward. With his heightened senses, he could hear the movements of the creature ahead. Slowly he slid his sword from its scabbard; it felt warm as it throbbed in his hand. Energy rushed through him like a torrent. He could feel the sinews of his arms and legs pulsing and growing stronger.

Gewey heard Linis as the elf neared the creature. Linis had not yet spotted it, but Gewey was certain he would very soon. How could he not? He was practically on top of it. Even so, it quickly became clear that he had missed it entirely. Linis continued past the creature without showing any sign whatsoever  he had noticed it. With a rush, Gewey realized that the hunters had become the hunted.

From the east, Gewey heard two more of the creatures moving, closing in on Stintos’ position. He knew he had to decide quickly what to do.

“Linis, it's a trap!” Gewey yelled at the top of his lungs. His legs burst to life as he sped toward Stintos.

The creatures revealed themselves just as Stintos came into Gewey’s view. Their figures were that of a man, but this was the only thing they had in common. They wore tattered clothes, blackened with grime and decay. Their faces were burnt, misshapen, and covered with deep scars, as if they had been assembled from the rotting corpses of a dozen dead men. But despite their outward appearance, their movements were unearthly - their speed unmatched by any Gewey had seen, save for Lee.

They were on Stintos before he knew they were there. Each beast held a cruel dagger in hand, and with these they slashed at the elf’s throat. Stintos only just avoided death by falling back onto the ground. But this put him at a greater disadvantage. One of the creatures moved to plunge his dagger into the elf’s chest, but Gewey got there just before the fatal blow could be struck. He removed the creature’s head with one swift stroke. Thick, black blood poured from the beast's neck as the body fell.

Gewey turned his attention to the second creature, which was already in striking distance. The creature struck at Gewey's heart, but the power that flowed through him allowed him to easily avoid the attack. He brought his sword down across the creature’s chest, splitting it open and sending it tumbling to the ground. But to Gewey’s dismay, this did not end the battle.

No sooner had the creature landed than it sprung to its feet and charged again, this time at the elf. The creature slashed at the left arm of Stintos, who deftly moved aside and spun around, bringing his long knife across its back. But this did nothing to slow it down either. The creature also spun, swinging its own knife wildly. This time the blade struck home and slashed across the elf's ribs. Stintos groaned and staggered back.

Gewey knew this must end now. Linis was alone with one of these creatures, and he knew he must hurry to his aid. The head, he thought, aiming his sword at the creature’s neck. The blade found its mark and the beast fell.

“Go back to the others,” Gewey commanded Stintos before tearing off in the direction of Linis.

He found the elf three hundred paces north, kneeling beside the dismembered body of the third creature - dismembered, except for the head.

“Are you injured?” cried Gewey, relieved to see his friend alive.

“I will live.” Linis panted. “But as for this...thing, it has seen better days.”

Gewey moved closer. His eyes shot wide as he realized the beast still lived. The ground was covered with the creature’s thick, black blood, and its limbs were hacked and scattered about the ground. Still the thing snarled and growled, its eyes fixed on Linis. Linis stared in return.

Gewey touched Linis' shoulder. The elf looked up at Gewey and forced a smile. Blood soaked Linis’ shirt - elf blood.

“We must tend to your wounds,” said Gewey. “Stintos was hurt as well.”

“Is he seriously injured?” asked Linis.

“I don't think so. He was on his feet when I left him.”

“Good.” Linis sighed. “As for me, I am fine. Thanks to your warning it is only a scratch.”

Gewey's eyes turned to the creature. “How does it still live?”

“I don't know,” said Linis in a whisper. “How do you live, beast!” His voice boomed, startling Gewey.

“I was never alive,” hissed the creature. Its voice was like the wheezing of a dying man, sick and labored.

“It speaks,” gasped Gewey.

“So it does,” remarked Linis.

“You shall all fall by the hands of my brothers,” spat the creature. “The master will see that it is so.”

“You mean the Dark Knight, don't you?” said Gewey.

The creature let out a gurgling laugh. “I know you. The god who will die like a man. The master will see to you soon enough.”

“What manner of beast are you?” demanded Linis.

“We are the Vrykol. We are the instruments of your demise.”

Linis gripped his long knife so hard that his knuckles turned white. “We shall see.” His blade flew down, cutting off the Vrykol's head.

“Are you alright?” called Kaylia’s voice from behind.

Gewey turned to see Kaylia, Theopolou, Haldrontis, and three other elves running up with weapons in hand. They stopped short when they saw the mangled body of the Vrykol strewn about the ground.

“What is this...thing?” gasped Kaylia in horror.

“It's a creature of Angrääl,” said Linis. “It called itself a Vrykol.” He turned to Theopolou. “Have you heard of them?”

“I have. But they are supposed to exist only in legend. They are said to be damned souls, forced from paradise to walk the earth. But I have never heard of them as physical beings, only spirits.”

“They're physical beings for sure,” said Gewey. “They almost killed us.”

“So you spoke to it before it died,” said Kaylia. “What did it say?”

Linis described his encounter and the short conversation with the Vrykol.

“You should have waited until I had a chance to interrogate it,” said Theopolou.

“It wouldn't have told you anything,” said Gewey.

Theopolou shot a glance at Gewey. “You know very little, young one. I may have been able to discover more than you could guess.” He paused. “But there is no use belaboring the point. As it stands, we know they are intelligent and resilient. Whether or not they are in fact Vrykol, or just use the name, matters not. They are on our trail.”

“How fares Stintos?” asked Linis.

“His wounds are being tended,” Theopolou answered. “But he will slow us considerably. I'm sending him back to Valshara with Haldrontis until he can travel.” Theopolou noticed Linis’ wound. “Are you able to travel?”

“I am,” replied Linis, seeming to just notice the wound on his arm. “Thanks to Gewey's warning, the Vrykol's blade did not bite deeply.”

“Still, it needs to be dressed,” said Kaylia. “Come. I have salve and bandages in my pack.”

The group started toward to the trail, but Theopolou paused. “Bring the head,” said the old elf.

Linis nodded and picked up the head by its grimy hair. A wave of nausea washed over Gewey as more of the black blood poured onto the ground.

When they got back to the trail, Linis immediately unpacked a spare cloak and wrapped the Vrykol's head inside. Stintos was there, leaning against a tree while two elves treated the wound on his ribs. He noticed Gewey's approach and motioned for him to come near. Gewey reluctantly obeyed.

“You saved my life, human,” said Stintos. He winced as an elf rubbed salve into the deep cut. “I owe you a debt.”

“Forget it,” said Gewey. “I didn't do anything you wouldn't have done in my place, I'm sure.”

Stintos smiled. “That you think an elf would come to your aid is remarkable, and speaks to your character. However, I don't understand how you knew to come. I was far out of sight and earshot. Only an elf seeker could have heard them coming, and even a seeker would have had difficulty.”

Gewey was unsure what to say. “I...I,” he stammered at first, before adding: “Kaylia and Linis have been instructing me.”

Stintos looked at Gewey skeptically. “I see. Then their training has heightened your senses. I was not aware that humans could gain such abilities.” His eyes fixed on the boy, then his smile returned. “It matters not. You saved my life, and for that you have gained my friendship.”

“I value it,” said Gewey, bowing his head.

“Gewey,” called Linis.

Gewey turned to see Linis standing near the packs. Kaylia was dressing the cut on his left arm. He took his leave from Stintos.

“We leave at once,” said Linis. “Theopolou says we should arrive at his home in six days if we press our pace, but I disagree with moving at too great a speed. With these so-called Vrykol about, I would not risk being taken by surprise. I would ask you to remain extra vigilant. You can hear what I cannot, it would seem.”

“I'll do my best,” said Gewey. “But I heard the Vrykol because I channeled the power of the earth. I've never done it for more than a few minutes at a time. To do it for six days...”

“You must try,” said Linis. “Our lives may depend on it.”

Gewey’s stomach knotted at the thought of so many lives depending on him.

“I will not have him put his life at risk,” said Kaylia, fiercely.

“I doubt it will harm him,” said Linis. “Seekers use the same power at times. I have used the flow, as we call it, for two straight days and it did me no harm.”

“He's not an elf,” countered Kaylia. “Or have you forgotten?”

“I have not forgotten,” Linis shot back. “But we also both know what he really is, don't we?”

“Mind your tongue,” hissed Kaylia, looking around for prying ears. “Would you have Gewey exposed?” She jerked tight Linis’ bandage, causing him to wince. “I thought Lee confiding in you might be a mistake.”

“It was not a mistake, child,” chided Linis. “Lord Starfinder thought I should know what is at stake. He confided in me out of friendship and trust. I will not expose Gewey, and I will not be scolded by you. I am a seeker.”

Gewey had never heard anyone speak to Kaylia as if she were a mere child. He could see the fury in her eyes, but she managed to contain her rage.

“You are correct, of course,” growled Kaylia. “My apologies - seeker.”

Linis' face softened. “I know you love him. But remember, I have named him friend and care for him as kin. I only ask of him what I must.”

“I know,” replied Kaylia weakly. “I just want to keep him safe. The bond we share can be maddening at times.”

“You are young to have done such a thing,” said Linis. “But it seems to have been the right thing to do.” He bent and flexed his arm as Kayla finished dressing the wound. “Gewey, if you feel any ill effects from the flow, release it at once and consult me.”

“I will,” said Gewey.

Theopolou approached, his pack already on his back. “We must depart. Gather your things.”

Once everyone had donned their gear, they said farewell to Haldrontis and Stintos and continued down the trail. Gewey allowed the flow of the earth to saturate his body, taking great care to listen for anything out of the ordinary.

After an hour they left the trail and headed south across country. The ground was level and the trees still sparse. Gewey was relieved to hear the return of the birds and small animals. The flow was difficult to maintain at first, but after an hour or so it felt more natural. By the time they halted to make camp, he couldn't imagine what it would feel like to be without it. Kaylia and Linis had been keeping a close eye on him, constantly asking how he was. Kaylia was clearly relieved that he had shown no sign that it was hurting him. Linis, on the other hand, maintained a look of deep concern.

Once they made camp, Theopolou sat next to Gewey and handed him a cup of honeyed wine and a small loaf of bread.

“How much rest do you need?” asked Theopolou.

“None,” answered Gewey. “I am ready now, if you'd like.”

Theopolou raised an eyebrow. “Is that so? Well, you must at least appear to rest. The flow has made you strong, but it would raise suspicions among my guard if you didn't look a bit fatigued. I would have them in the dark for now.” He looked more closely as Gewey. “Why do you still use the power? There is no danger near.”

Gewey’s features were hard and determined. “So I'll know if it approaches.”

“Linis has asked you to do this, I take it.” Theopolou shook his head. “You should not. Even a seeker such as Linis cannot hold on to it indefinitely. It can be dangerous.”

“What do you mean?” Gewey's eye wandered to Kaylia, who was a few yards away changing Linis’ bandages.

“Linis is a worthy seeker, likely the best that still lives, but he does not know all. Seekers learn to use the flow from a very young age, but they are too busy with other training to learn the nature of the power that fuels them.”

“And you know these things?” asked Gewey.

Theopolou laughed softly. “More than most. I know that to hold the power of the earth for too long can break the mind. Seekers are taught to use it when they must, and rarely hold it for more than a day so they are in no danger.”

“In danger of what?” Gewey demanded. “Linis said he has held it for two days and he was fine.”

“Linis is strong,” Theopolou replied. “His mind and spirit are resilient. He is counting on your...heritage, to keep you safe. But I’m not as certain. I would not see you possessed.”

“Possessed?” laughed Gewey. “Possessed by what? The earth?”

“Precisely. The power you use can become addictive. In time you will not be able to release it without great pain.”

Gewey shrugged. “So what? I'm stronger - faster. I can hear and see better, and more importantly, I'm better able to keep those I love safe.”

“All true,” said the elf. “But in time it will burn your mind and drive you mad. You will endanger everyone near to you. Even the ones you love.”

“Has this ever happened to an elf?” asked Gewey.

“Long ago. It is why elves are taught to use it sparingly. And there's something else. You are able to use many times more of the flow than any elf. It may accelerate any adverse effects.”

“It doesn't change the fact that we need to know if more of those creatures are about,” insisted Gewey.

“True,” admitted Theopolou. “But I will not have a mad godling roaming the earth. Be mindful.”

“I will,” said Gewey, aware of Theopolou's implied threat.

Theopolou got to his feet. “We will rest for two hours. That should be enough time to eliminate any suspicions about you.” With that, he walked away toward three of his guards who were talking near the fire.

Kaylia and Linis sat next to Gewey a few moments later. “What did he say?” asked Kaylia.

“Nothing important. He just wanted to know if I was tired.”

“I see,” said Kaylia, clearly not believing him. “I would rather you say nothing at all than tell me a lie. Even if it is to spare me worry or hurt.”

“I'm sorry.” Gewey sighed. “I sometimes forget I cannot fool you.”

“I think I know what Theopolou wanted,” said Linis. “He was concerned about you using your power for too long. Am I right?”

Gewey nodded. “He said it could drive me insane.”

“Unlikely,” said Linis. “I've heard the same tales of caution, but as wise as Theopolou is, he has no real experience with this matter. It would take many weeks of constant use to have any lasting effect.”

“He said that, because I can use so much more of the flow than any elf, that it might take less time,” said Gewey.

“He may have a point,” admitted Linis. “How do you feel now?”

“Good,” Gewey replied. “In fact, better than good. I've never felt so strong in my life. I think I could run for days without stopping.”

Linis thought for a moment. “Tomorrow I want you to release the flow when we rest. I and the others should be able to keep watch well enough.”

“Okay,” said Gewey, smiling, though the thought of releasing the power of the earth made his heart ache. Kaylia at once picked up on this feeling.

“I'll see to it,” she said.

Linis threw his head back in laughter. “Then I have no need to worry. I am sure all will be well so long as you are keeping watch over our young man.” He moved to his bedroll. “Don't forget, you must at least pretend to rest, Gewey.”

Gewey lay on his blanket and closed his eyes. He could hear the forest’s sweet song as the wind caressed the trees and moved across the grass. Nocturnal predators stalked their prey, and high above an eagle soared in the direction of the sea. It was now so much more natural than the first time he has done this. In fact, he couldn't imagine a time when his ears were deaf to such marvels.

Sleep was not a possibility.

Chapter 9

When the elves broke camp, Gewey was bursting with energy. His mind raced with the thoughts of the coming days. The elves seemed satisfied that Gewey had had enough rest and took little notice of his energetic behavior.

In the hours before sunrise they covered many miles. Gewey was astounded by the pace the elves maintained. His original journey from Sharpstone would have taken half the time had they been able to move at this speed. He was certain Lee could match it, but doubted he would have been able to at the time.

When the sun broke the horizon, Linis called for a halt, though no one put down their packs. Each helped another to retrieve bread and a flask from their gear and they continued, eating and drinking along the way.

By midday the sun was blazing, but the elves did not appear affected by this as the party increased its pace. Gewey, still using the power of the earth, was as strong as he'd been when they left. In fact, with each hour that passed he felt stronger.

“Does the human need rest?” asked Akakios, a short, stocky elf with sandy blond hair.

“The human has a name,” said Gewey irritably.

Akakios laughed and slapped Gewey on the back. “I meant no offense, young one. Come. Walk beside me and perhaps you can instruct me on human manners and customs.”

Gewey allowed his irritation to subside and gave the elf a friendly smile. “I'd be happy to, if you can call me Gewey.”

Akakios bowed his head. “Agreed.”

Akakios and Gewey walked together until the light of the day began to fade. Gewey told him stories of his home and his upbringing, and he found Akakios to be an elf of good humor. Just as Kaylia had first done when hearing of his old life and upbringing, Akakios also told Gewey that he and many other elves also longed to live in such a way.

“To live a simple existence is the desire of many of my people,” said Akakios. “Perhaps when all of this nonsense that plagues the world is done, we can.”

“Do you hate humans?” asked Gewey, then realized the rudeness of his question. “I only ask because...”

“I know why you ask,” Akakios said. “The answer is no. Though I have no love for them either. Hatred is a useless emotion. Though I would not choose to live among your kind, I see no cause to dwell in the past. The world is big enough for all to live within it.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “So are you against what Linis and others like him are doing?”

“I am,” Akakios admitted. “They invite the destruction of our culture. The result of living side by side with humanity would be a mixing of the races. I would not see the blood of our people corrupted.” He lowered his head. “I hope I have not offended you, but it is how I feel.”

Gewey's thoughts turned to Dina. “I'm not offended. I don't agree, but you have the right to feel any way you wish. But then why spend the day in my company?”

“You have shown yourself to have great strength and courage. I would know the man behind it. I am not close-minded. I realize that virtue does not live within my people alone, and your company does not cause me discomfort.”

“I'm glad,” said Gewey. “Maybe in time I can change your mind even more.”

“One can never know the future,” said Akakios. “You're welcome to try.”

When they had made camp, Theopolou informed Gewey that they would be resting until the morning. Gewey insisted that he could continue, but Theopolou would not be dissuaded.

“Your stamina is already causing talk,” said Theopolou. “Besides, as I understand, you will be releasing the flow tonight. You may find that your body needs to recover.”

A chill shot through Gewey's body. He had all but forgotten that he would be spending time without the power of the earth inside him.

Gewey was sat on his bedroll, staring at the fire, when Linis approached.

“It's time,” said Linis. “Release it.”

Anger swelled in Gewey’s chest. “I'd rather not.”

Linis studied him for a few minutes. “I was not certain before, but I am now. You must release the flow, now.”

“I will not,” he growled. “There is no reason to. I'm fine.”

“You are not fine,” shot Linis. “If you were, you would have no trouble doing as I request. I can see that you should not hold it for so long.”

Gewey jumped to his feet, rage swelling inside him. His eyes focused on Linis, and his hand felt the urge to slide to his sword.

“Gewey,” called Kaylia. Her voice came from just outside the light of the fire. “Come here - now!”

Gewey’s mind snapped to attention. It was then he realized that the entire camp was staring at him. He lowered his head and started toward Kaylia.

She was stood with her eyes fixed on him. Once he was beside her, she took his hand and led him away from the camp.

“You must release the power,” she said softly. “And you must do it quickly before you lose yourself.”

Gewey pulled away, his anger returning. “Why? Why must I become weak again?”

“Do not call yourself weak,” she said. “You insult me. My spirit would not bind itself to the weak. Your strength, your true strength, does not come from the flow. It comes from within.” She placed her hand on his chest. “Do this for me.”

His heart raced at her touch. He lowered his head, allowing the power to drain away. Gewey felt weakness and fatigue wash over his entire body, and he fell to his knees, weeping. The absence of the flow made him feel hollow and afraid. The sounds and smells he had found so enthralling were gone, and he was left in silence. It was like the world had been ripped away.

Kaylia knelt down in front of him, pulling his head to her shoulder. “It will pass.” She stroked his raven hair. “I am here.”

After a few minutes, Gewey regained his composure. He wiped his face and his eyes. “It's dark,” were the only words he could manage.

Kaylia smiled sweetly and kissed his cheek. “And it will get darker still. But not tonight.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey, weakly. “You were right. I must not hold the power for that long again. I nearly lost myself.”

“But you have returned to us, I trust,” came the voice of Linis from a few yards away. He walked into view, Theopolou at his side.

Gewey rose to his feet. “I'm back to normal. I'm sorry for what I did at the camp. It won't happen again.”

“No apologies needed,” said Linis. “The fault was mine. I should never have asked you to hold the flow for so long without knowing what it would do to you.”

“Indeed you should not have, seeker,” said Theopolou. “I hope you will heed my advice from here on.”

“In matters such as this, I will,” said Linis.

“What about the others?” asked Gewey. “I'm sure they noticed what happened.”

“They believe you pushed yourself too far and your human body affected your mind,” replied Theopolou. “A fiction I am not inclined to correct at this time.”

“If you are able, we should get back,” said Linis. “You need to rest.”

Gewey nodded and followed the others back to camp. The elves all watched him closely as he made his way to his bedroll. Embarrassment welled up inside. He rolled onto his stomach and hid his face.

“All is well?” It was Akakios.

Gewey turned over to see the elf smiling down at him. “I'm fine. Just tired.”

“I must admit I was amazed that you kept pace with us with so little rest,” said Akakios. “Don't feel bad. We may not show it, but we are tired as well. If it were not for the demons that attacked us at Valshara, we would not be moving at this speed.”

“I appreciate your words,” said Gewey, forcing a smile. “I'll be better once I've had some sleep.”

“I will leave you to it then.” Akakios walked away to join a group of elves gathered on the other side of the fire.

It didn't take long for sleep to take him, and his fatigue held off any dreams. Kaylia woke Gewey just as the sun breached the horizon.

“Theopolou has said we will stop at the home of Kephalos.” Kaylia handed Gewey a piece of bread and some dried meat. She huddled close.

“Why?” asked Gewey. “I thought we were in a hurry.”

“Theopolou wants to show him the head of the Vrykol,” she replied. “Kephalos is very knowledgeable in ancient lore and may be able to give us information we need.”

The thought of seeing an elf dwelling excited Gewey. “When will we arrive?”

“We should be there by sundown tomorrow.”

Gewey smiled with satisfaction. Having Kaylia next to him seemed more natural than before, though the others stared with disapproval. The next day he woke before dawn, ready for a new march. By midday, the trees began to thicken and the ground was covered by dense, moist grass that made walking at speed difficult. The heat of the sun made the air like earthy steam, and sweat beaded on Gewey's forehead.

“How is it so hot this close to winter?” Gewey asked Linis.

“We are near the fire hills.”

“I've heard of them,” said Gewey. “My father said it's like summer all year there, and that great plumes of steam erupt from the ground. I had no idea we were so close.”

“Your father was correct,” said Linis. “But we will only be just outside the hills. Not within them. One day, if you wish, I will show them to you properly. They are truly a wonder.”

“I'd like that,” said Gewey.

By late afternoon they had found a narrow trail that wound through the forest. Here, Theopolou called a halt and asked Gewey to speak to him privately. He led him into a small clearing about one hundred yards east of the trail. Kaylia tried to follow, but Theopolou stopped her.

“When we arrive at the home of Kephalos, it is important that you do not speak unless spoken to,” Theopolou warned Gewey once they were alone. “He is a kind elf, and not prone to violence, but he fought in the Great War for many years and feels the same way as I do regarding human and elf living together.”

Gewey had almost forgotten that Theopolou was not really on his side. If not for The Dark One and his bond to Kaylia, Theopolou would never suffer the company of a human, let alone a god.

“I'll keep quiet,” said Gewey. “I don't want any trouble. At least, not until it’s time for it.”

“And that time will come soon enough,” Theopolou added. “If I can, I will convince Kaphalos to come with us. If he agrees, you may be forced to travel in silence for the remainder of the journey. I tell you this because I would not have you feel it is an insult from my guard or me. Once we arrive at my home you are under my protection and may speak as you wish.”

Gewey almost laughed, but managed not to. “I won't be insulted. I understand that this Kaphalos might hold hatred for me, and I don't want to make things more difficult than they have to be.”

“One other thing,” said Theopolou with a sigh. “You must refrain from speaking to Kaylia in his presence.”

This irritated Gewey, but he nodded slowly. “If he comes, I won't speak to her – at least, not until we get there.”

“You must convince her of this as well,” said the old elf with a hint of embarrassment that amused Gewey. “She is strong willed, and has never been one to take orders well.”

“You're not kidding.” Gewey chuckled. “I'll speak to her.”

“Thank you.” Theopolou held out his arm, motioning Gewey to return to camp. “I advise you speak to her before we arrive.”

When they got back to the others, Gewey told Kaylia what Theopolou had said.

Kaylia was enraged. “If he thinks I’ll pretend to be some close minded, human-hating fool, he has lost his senses.” Her voice rose with each word.

“I understand,” said Gewey trying to calm her. “But until we reach Theopolou's home, I think we should listen to him.”

“You would have this?” she demanded.

Gewey could feel her fury through their bond. “As it is, we are deceiving the others. They don't know what has happened between us. What does it matter if we keep it up a bit longer?”

“It’s one thing to hide a spirit bond,” she countered. “It’s quite another to pretend we do not know each other. That is what he is asking.”

“I don’t like it either. But if it keeps things calm until we get there, then I think it’s best.”

“Fine,” she huffed. “But once we arrive, I plan to reveal the bond between us to every one of those closed minded morons.” With that she stormed off, staring daggers at Theopolou.

Linis came up to Gewey and slapped him on the back. “That went better than we thought.”

“She's right,” said Gewey. “I entered into a bond with Kaylia by means I didn't understand, but I am not ashamed of it. I don’t like hiding it any more than she does.”

“You won’t have to hide it for very long. In fact, I doubt you will be able to.”

“It's time,” called Theopolou.

They continued for another hour until they came upon a smooth stone path leading east. Either side of this was dotted with tiny white flowers and waist high shrubbery that had been meticulously manicured. The scent of lavender and magnolia wafted through the air, bringing a smile to Gewey’s face. The path wound on through the forest for about half a mile, ending with an elegantly carved wooden gate bearing ancient elfish symbols etched along the outer braces. Beyond this gate, the forest ended and the land opened up revealing lush grass similar to that which Gewey had seen when they’d drawn close to the fire hills. But this grass was much thicker, and was covered with beads of dew.

As the house came into view, Gewey was both surprised and disappointed. It appeared rather like a human dwelling. It was a single story, wooden structure with a white tiled roof. The windows were small and round, and a well-kept flower garden surrounded the entire building. In Gewey’s eyes it looked like a house he might expect to find in any human town.

“What's wrong?” asked Linis.

“Nothing,” Gewey replied. “I just imagined something, well...different.”

“Really? Like what?”

Gewey shrugged. “I don't know. I always thought that elves lived in different kind of houses to humans.” He waved a hand. “You know. More tree-like.”

“Tree-like?” Linis laughed. “Do you think us birds or squirrels? We live in houses, my friend. Though I must admit, I was expecting something a bit grander from an elf of Kaphalos’ stature and reputation.”

They were about fifty feet from the front door when it flew open. A tall elf stood in the doorway, dressed in a gray robe made from a fabric Gewey had never seen before. It looked heavy, but it flowed like silk. His hair was silver and tied in a ponytail that fell loosely down his back and shoulders. His face was wrinkled and looked ancient. This was another shock for Gewey. The elves he had seen so far did not show the ravages of time as a human did. Theopolou was old, Gewey guessed him to be well over five hundred, yet he could pass for a human in his forties.

The elf looked over the group and shook his head. “What do you bring to my door, Theopolou?” His voice was deep and menacing.

“I wish to speak to you, old friend,” Theopolou replied.

“You bring a human to my door and expect my welcome?”

“I am an elder and your friend,” said Theopolou. “So I do indeed expect your welcome.”

“And who else is this I see?” said Kaphalos, looking at Kaylia. “Is it the elf who comes to judgment? Or does she still defy her kin?”

Kaylia stepped forward to speak, but Theopolou held out his hand to silence her. “She is under my protection,” he announced. “As is the human.”

“Times have surely changed when the great Theopolou harbors a filthy human and a fugitive elf,” Kaphalos sneered. “I would know why. Enter.” He disappeared inside.

Chapter 10

Theopolou gave Gewey a quick glance before leading the group inside.

The interior of the house was a bit more as Gewey might have imagined. The main hall just beyond the doorway was roughly fifty feet wide and equal in length. The walls were built from a material, the like of which he had never encountered. Though rough in texture, it shone and sparkled with countless tiny, semi-precious stones, causing the entire room to change hue from moment to moment. The floor was covered with a thick carpet that resembled the grass outside. It even looked as if it bore the same beads of dew, though it was not slippery. Opaque glass orbs hung from each corner of the room, giving off a soft and pleasing light that mixed perfectly with the sparkle of the walls. No pictures or tapestries hung, but on the far wall, carved into the stone and inlaid with pure gold, was the perfect likeness of an ancient willow. The room itself was devoid of furniture apart from a round oak table that stood only one foot off the ground.

The elves knelt around the table. Theopolou motioned for Gewey to sit beside him. Kaphalos placed himself directly across from Theopolou and stared intensely.

“Tell me, Theopolou,” said Kaphalos. “When did you begin befriending humans and traitors?”

“I am no traitor,” Kaylia blurted.

“Silence, girl,” Theopolou scolded.

Kaphalos sneered. “I was referring to the seeker.”

Linis glared. “You dare name me traitor? I should take your life for that insult.”

“I would expect as much,” said Kaphalos. “You would kill your own kind while saving a human animal. But be warned, I am not unprotected. If you strike me down, you will not leave these woods alive. My kin are nearby and know that you are here.”

“That is enough,” commanded Theopolou. “From everybody. I did not come here to fight. Nor did Linis.”

“Then why did you come?” asked Kaphalos.

“To ask you to accompany us to my home,” Theopolou replied. “Surely you have received my invitation.”

“I have,” said Kaphalos dismissively. “I have no desire to listen to the elders bicker. I am content to remain here.”

Theopolou nodded to Linis, who brought forth the cloak containing the Vrykol head. Kaphalos stared, stunned, as the cloak was opened. “What is this abomination?” he gasped.

“We hoped you would know,” Theopolou replied. “It claimed to be a Vrykol.”

“Vrykol?” Kaphalos whispered. “Certainly not. That is impossible.” He reached across the table and pulled the cloak in front of him.

“I thought the Vrykol were merely a legend,” said Theopolou.

“In a way, they are,” said Kaphalos. “Their true nature has been lost to all but a few. Most stories you hear today are but myths with not an inkling of fact.”

“What are they then?” asked Linis.

“The damned,” replied Kaphalos. “They are spirits forced to serve the gods within the decaying remains of mortals.”

“The gods created these beasts?” asked Linis. “Why?”

“To punish those who dared to defy them,” said Kaphalos. “They were cursed assassins, roaming the earth. How is it you came by this?”

Theopolou told of the encounter.

“You say this human killed two Vrykol?” Kaphalos laughed. “Are you certain? Or is this merely what he told you.”

“He saved the life of one of my guards in the process,” said Theopolou. “You may doubt the word of a human, but surely not that of an elf.”

Kaphalos glared at Kaylia “Depends on the elf.”

Kaylia glared back furiously.

“In any case,” Theopolou continued. “It was not the gods who created these creatures.”

Kaphalos threw his head back in harsh laughter. “The Lord of Angrääl has seen to that, hasn't he?” He rose to his feet, turning his back on the table. “You think I am ignorant to the goings on in the human world? I know what you would have our people do, and I will have no part in it.”

“Then you would sit idle while the fate of our people hangs in the balance?” Theopolou challenged.

“The fate of our people was sealed the moment the human plague set foot on this world,” said Kaphalos. “The Great War was only the end result.”

“But it does not have to be the end,” Linis cried. “Can't you see that?”

Kaphalos spun around. “I see more than you know, seeker.” His eyes fixed on Gewey. “I see what you have brought among us. You think he will save us? Don’t you?”

Gewey's heart raced. Did he know?

“You're wrong,” said Theopolou. “Our people may still rise again. But we must not succumb to our own stubborn nature. We need the humans if we are to resist Angrääl.”

“Resist?” Kaphalos scoffed. “What resistance can you offer? The humans will scatter before the might of the army that now gathers. Once they are gone, we will be annihilated.”

“There is something you do not know,” said Theopolou. “We have recovered the Book of Souls.”

Kaphalos raised an eyebrow. “Have you? How nice. But even if you can open it, and even if it tells you how to defeat your enemies, what then? Do you not see what will happen?”

“I see that we will survive,” said Theopolou.

“Survive, yes,” Kaphalos retorted. “But to what purpose? The humans will not suffer those unlike themselves. Our people will be absorbed, and our race will cease to exist. I have already heard rumors that one half-breed walks the earth even now.”

Gewey tensed. This did not go unnoticed by Kaphalos.

“Human,” said Kaphalos to Gewey. “If that is even what I should call you. Somehow I think not.” His face was one of disgust. “Theopolou wisely instructed you not to speak. But I would know your thoughts. Would you have human and elf live as one?”

Gewey took a deep breath, trying to steady his nerves. “Yes, I would.” There was a long pause.

“That's all you have to say? Surely you have more than that.”

“I don't know what you want of me,” said Gewey. “I know you are wise, and I know that you believe you are of a right mind.” He chose his next words carefully. “I would not presume to debate with you in matters that are beyond my understanding. So I don't see what I can offer you.”

“You offer nothing,” agreed Kaphalos. “At least nothing I would have from you. Still, I am interested in your reasons for trying to deceive me.”

Gewey was aghast and suddenly afraid. Kaylia shot him a glance, feeling his dismay through their bond.

Kaphalos let out a malicious laugh. “You have not told them that you have bonded yourself to an elf woman?” This caused the elves to stir. “Theopolou has kept this a secret as well, I see.” He shook his head slowly. “Did you really think I wouldn't know? I knew the moment I saw them.”

“I don't see what that has to do with anything,” Gewey growled with irritation.

“You wouldn't,” said Kaphalos. “But it just confirms what I have already said. You are the first, but you will not be the last.”

“Is this true?” Akakios asked Theopolou, appalled.

“It is,” said Theopolou. “Gewey and Kaylia have bonded their spirits.”

“Why keep this from us?” he demanded.

“It was not for me to reveal,” Theopolou replied. “The bonding is a personal matter and not to be spoken of lightly. I made my choice. You do not have to agree with it.”

The elves were clearly upset, but calmed themselves and continued to listen.

“I am bonded to Kaylia,” announced Gewey in a clear strong voice. “I know this may anger you, but it was not my intent to do so. But know that I'm in no way ashamed.”

“Nor am I,” added Kaylia.

“It matters not,” Kaphalos said. “It is unlikely either of you will live long enough to regret it. Angrääl will march soon and slaughter us all.”

“Is there nothing I can say to convince you to come?” asked Theopolou.

“You know there is not,” Kaphalos replied. “But you needn't fear. I will not hinder you. There would be no point.”

Theopolou bowed his head. “Then we will take our leave.” Linis gathered the Vrykol head.

“Farewell,” said Kaphalos. “Perhaps we will meet again before we rejoin the creator. If not, know that I hold you in high regard, even though we do not see eye to eye.”

“As do I,” said Theopolou.

They left the house and filed back down the walkway. Once they had reached the beginning of the trail leading to Kaphalos’ house, Akakios halted.

“My Lord Theopolou,” said Akakios. “We must speak...all of us.” The other elves nodded in agreement.

“And what would you speak about?” Theopolou asked.

“I think you know,” replied Akakios. “I have never questioned you before. But to knowingly protect someone who has...”

He could hardly bring himself to speak the final words. “Bonded with a human,” he finally said.

Theopolou crossed his arms. “So you would have me kill her here and now, I suppose? You would have me break my word? You ask if I would dishonor myself?”

“No!” Akakios was clearly uncomfortable. “But you help her to avoid judgment by offering your protection.”

“I am doing nothing of the kind,” said Theopolou. “Kaylia has agreed to face judgment according to our laws upon the completion of her task, and not before. She entered into this bargain in good faith. You should know that, despite our laws, her life is sought even now by the very elders with whom we are going to meet.”

“Before judgment?” gasped Akakios. “Why?”

“They feel as Kaphalos,” Theopolou explained. “They harbor hatred from the Great War, and they fear a mixing of the races will be the end of our kind. I share some of these fears. But I will not turn my back on our traditions because I lack the courage to do what is right.”

Akakios bowed his head “You are right, of course. Forgive me.”

Theopolou smiled kindly. “There is nothing to forgive. But you should know that there are other things I hold as secret and have not told you. I will tell you now if you feel you must know.” His eyes scanned his guard. They looked embarrassed to have questioned their master’s motives.

Gewey snapped to attention. “You cannot,” pleaded Kaylia.

“I can,” corrected Theopolou. “And I will if I must.”

“Lord,” said Akakios. “If you feel we should not know, it is enough.”

Theopolou thought for a long moment. “No,” he said. “You deserve to know what is so important that I would hide things from my most trusted companions.” He turned to Gewey. “Step forward.”

Gewey obeyed, keenly aware that Kaylia was at his right side fingering her knife. Linis slid to his left.

“You may have wondered how Gewey was able to kill two Vrykol so easily,” Theopolou began. “Some may have guessed that he is a half-man.” A few of the elves nodded. “You are only half right. Before you stands the only being ever born from the union of two gods. Before you stands a god who walks the earth as a human.”

There was dead silence as all eyes fell on Gewey. Akakios was the first to speak. “This is true?”

“It is,” Gewey affirmed “But I only found out a few weeks ago. I've lived my entire life as a human. Until Lee proved what I am to me, I didn't know anything.”

“That is why he is here,” said Theopolou. “We hope he will be able to open the Book of Souls.”

“Why would he need it?” asked Akakios. “Could he not simply go and defeat the Lord of Angrääl? If he is a god, does he not possess such power?”

“I don't know much about my power, or what I can or can't do,” admitted Gewey. “I am only now discovering my abilities.”

“But you're a god?” countered Akakios. “A god!”

“True,” interjected Linis. “But he is not all-powerful. He can be injured - maybe even killed. It would be foolish to send him to confront The Dark One until he is ready.”

“Angrääl is not what concerns me,” said Akakios. “It was the gods that split our people. It is our lives I worry about.”

“I would never harm you or your people,” said Gewey. “I swear it. If my kind have hurt you, I am sorry. But I am not them.”

“Even so,” said Akakios. “You are one of them.”

“I would ask that you trust my judgment in this matter,” said Theopolou. “Gewey is not to be harmed in any way. We need him.”

“I beg that you give us a few moments to consider what you have revealed,” said Akakios.

Theopolou nodded his consent. Gewey, Kaylia, Linis and Theopolou watched as the others gathered in a tight circle, speaking in hushed tones. Minutes ticked by as Gewey's nerves began to unravel. Kaylia gave his hand a light squeeze and smiled. This calmed him.

After several more minutes the elves finally broke their circle and slowly advanced toward Gewey. “You have done me no harm,” said Akakios. “And I trust my Lord. We will do nothing against you as long as Theopolou commands it. That you have bonded with one of our kind is troubling, but I see nothing that can be done, short of killing you both. And as you are not subject to our laws, I see no call for that.”

“I thank you,” said Gewey bowing low. “But understand that should Kaylia face judgment, I will stand with her.”

“As her mate, that is your right,” said Akakios.

“We have yet to complete the bonding,” interjected Kaylia. “And should I be sentenced to death, I will not.”

Gewey turned to Kaylia. “What do you mean?”

Kaylia locked eyes with him. “If the bond is sealed and I die, you die as well. I will not have that.”

“You would doom his soul?” asked Theopolou.

“What do you mean?” asked Kaylia. “I would save his life.”

“You know as well as I what happens when the bond is left unsealed for too long,” said Theopolou. “It is the same if you die. His soul will be torn apart.”

“Is there nothing to be done?” she asked.

“To my knowledge, no,” he answered. “You should have considered this beforehand.”

“It wasn't her fault,” said Gewey. “It wasn't something either of us planned.”

“I see,” the old elf muttered. “Then there is only one thing to be done. You must seal the bond between you. If your souls reached out without prior knowledge, then there can be no other choice.”

Kaylia stared in disbelief. “You would have me complete the bond? But I...”

“You should think more, and act less,” said Theopolou. “I have no desire to see you, or any elf, bonded to anyone other than another elf. But that does not change the facts. Keep in mind that I advise you as your uncle, not as an elder. As an elder, I would see you judged.”

“I understand, uncle,” said Kaylia. “Thank you.”

“We should depart,” said Linis. “There is a clearing about two hours’ march ahead where we can make camp.”

“Agreed,” said Theopolou. “We have tarried long enough.”

Chapter 11

Travel for the next two days was uneventful. At first, the elves kept their distance from Gewey, but by the morning of the second day their curiosity had got the better of them. Gewey tried to answer their questions as best he could, but soon it became apparent that he didn't have the information they wanted. He knew nothing about heaven, the Creator or immortality.

The day before they arrived at Theopolou's home, Theopolou asked to speak with Gewey and Kaylia alone. They walked a few yards from their evening camp and sat on a large fallen dogwood.

“When we arrive tomorrow,” Theopolou began. “I will ask that you keep to your quarters until you are summoned.” He looked at them disapprovingly. “And you will be housed separately.”

“We do not share quarters,” said Gewey, turning bright red.

“Good,” said Theopolou. “Until you have completed your bond you should not.”

“I may not share your opinions on humans,” said Kaylia. “But I am no scortus.”

“What’s a scortus?” asked Gewey.

“A woman of ill repute,” Kaylia replied.

“I was not implying that you are,” said Theopolou. “But I'm still your uncle and am protective of your honor.”

“I would not dishonor Kaylia,” said Gewey, with all the sincerity he could muster through his embarrassment.

Theopolou cracked a smile. “I believe you.” Then his smile faded. “Now listen to me, both of you. You must keep out of sight until I call for you.”

“How long will we have to wait?” asked Gewey.

Theopolou shrugged. “An hour. A day. There is no way to know. But you must stay put no matter what. Each of you will have a guard outside your door.”

Kaylia's eyes narrowed. ”Do you expect treachery?”

“No,” Theopolou replied. “But I will be prepared nonetheless. Timing will be crucial, and I will get us every advantage I can. Since I opposed your assassination I have lost support. I still hold position and influence, but not as much as before. You must do exactly as I tell you.”

Gewey and Kaylia both nodded in agreement.

“Good,” said Theopolou, satisfied. “Now we must rest. Tomorrow we will arrive. I can only hope that we get there before the others.”

They slept for only a few hours and were on their way once again long before daybreak. By midday, the forest grew thicker until it was nearly impenetrable. Gewey snagged his clothes countless times on thorns and brambles - insects swarmed around him making a feast of his flesh. The elves seemed unaffected by the conditions, deftly hopping between the trees and thick brush, avoiding thorns and low hanging branches as if they weren't there.

Linis noticed Gewey's difficulty. “Stay just behind me,” he said. “Do as I do.” Gewey tried his best to follow Linis' every move, and as a result was able to lessen his hurts considerably. Even so, he still managed to inflict a few extra scrapes on himself before the forest thinned.

“How can he stand to live in such a place?” Gewey asked.

“A bit much to get through for anyone other than an elf.” Linis chuckled. “It is why we choose such places. Most of our dwellings are not easily accessible, even our towns. Some you could never find unless you knew exactly where to look.”

Gewey tried to imagine what an elf town would look like. Majesty and magic must be everywhere. Then he dismissed the notion. So far, he had been way off the mark. Kaphalos lived in a house, and though it was well built and beautiful, it was nothing like he had pictured.

The forest thinned even more, and soon Gewey found himself walking along a colorful cobblestone street. It was wide enough that the party could comfortably walk four abreast.

Theopolou turned back to Gewey. “Once we reach the end of the road, Akakios will guide you and Kaylia to your quarters. You should be able to get there unseen. The servants will be preparing the house, and we are the first party to arrive.”

“How can you tell?” asked Gewey.

“It's my house,” replied Theopolou. “I know when someone is about. Not even Linis could enter my land without my notice.”

The road ended at an immense gateway, twenty feet high and solid as steel. It shone like silver, and bore long, carved ivory handles. A polished granite wall spanned east and west farther than Gewey's eyes could see. He stared in wonder. Even the walls of a human city weren't so well constructed, and the gate looked as if nothing could bring it down.

The rest of the party halted while Theopolou approached the gate. He placed his hand upon one of the handles. Suddenly, the handle hissed and glowed with a pale, white light. Then, as if by command, the gate swung outward without a sound.

“Magic,” whispered Gewey as they moved closer.

Theopolou sniffed. “It is not magic.” His eyes fell on Kaylia. “If he is to be yours, then you should teach him properly.”

Gewey could feel Kaylia's embarrassment. “I'm sorry,” he apologized to her. “I shouldn't have said anything.”

“It is not your fault.” Kaylia lowered her eyes. “I have not told you enough about us. I should have instructed you more about our ways the moment we were bonded.”

Gewey was on the point of trying to console her, but Theopolou held out his palm. Akakios moved in front of Gewey and Kaylia.

“Wait for the rest to enter,” said Akakios. “Then follow me to your quarters.”

Once Theopolou and the others were about fifty feet ahead, Akakios led them through the gate. Gewey sucked in his breath.

A solid, polished white marble path lay before him. Each stone was etched with an intricate golden inlay of elf ruins. The grounds were dotted with ancient willows and strong oaks, and wild flowers covered the area like a glorious carpet of color and splendor. Directly ahead stood a ten-foot tall, solid crystal statue of an elf maiden. Her right arm held aloft an orb surrounded by tiny vines of ivy. As the sunlight struck the orb it sparkled and split, causing rainbows of light to dance playfully. The craftsmanship was far beyond anything Gewey had ever imagined possible.

But what impressed Gewey most of all was the house - if such a structure could indeed be called a house. The entire building was constructed from pure white marble, and it stood three stories high, rising to an apex. Elaborate carvings of horses, wolves, bobcats, and many other animals Gewey did not recognize, decorated the facing. Not a speck of dirt blemished its beauty, and it showed no sign whatsoever of weathering. A massive flight of stairs, as wide as the entire house, led to broad double doors made from the same gleaming metal as the gates. Lining the front and supporting the lip of the high ceiling stood six massive columns, ten feet apart and as big in circumference as a mature oak.

As Theopolou and the others passed by the crystal statue, each stopped in turn and bowed their heads.

“Come,” Akakios commanded.

He led Gewey and Kaylia to the west side of the house where three small, round buildings stood in a line separate to the main dwelling. They were crafted from smooth white stones, and the roofs glittered with quartz tiles. The doors were blond maple with a silver doorknocker in the center.

“All of the rooms are identical,” said Akakios. “Each is equipped with a shower. Food and fresh clothing will be brought to you right away.”

They thanked Akakios. Kaylia took the room nearest to the main house, and Gewey the one next to her.

When opening the door, Gewey immediately felt the welcome relief of cool air. The room was large enough for four people, and was well lit by the same strange orbs he had seen at the home of Kaphalos. Four of these orbs hung from a silver chain near to the wall. To his right was a single bed with fine linen sheets and a plump, comfortable-looking round pillow. On his left stood a small circular oak table with four chairs. A plush couch with a brass table at each end had been placed at the far side of the room. But what really caught Gewey's eye was the area between the table and the couch - the shower.

Gewey nearly forgot to close the room door behind him before throwing down his pack and stripping off his clothes. Apart from slightly more elaborate fixtures and a small marble table provided for the soaps and bathing implements, this shower looked much like the one he had previously used in Lord Ganflin's manor.

Once inside, he pulled the curtain around. Remembering the shock of the water from his first experience, he twisted the knobs carefully on this occasion. Soon he lost himself in the glorious feeling of steaming hot water pouring over his body. When he finished, he grabbed a towel hanging on the wall and stepped out. To his amazement a fresh set of clothes lay neatly on the bed and a bowl of hot stew and fresh bread had been placed on the table. He had not heard the slightest sound of anyone entering or moving about.

He dried off and donned the clothes that had been provided. They were simple tan pants with a thin leather belt and shirt of the same color. The fabric was comfortable, fitted nicely, and was highly durable. A pair of calfskin moccasins and cotton socks completed the ensemble. Gewey was sat at the table and had begun to eat when the door swung open. It was Linis.

“You look very much the elf in those clothes,” remarked Linis, smiling.

“This is what elves wear? I've never seen an elf dressed this way.”

“Of course not.” Linis laughed. “This is what we wear at home while relaxing. Do you find it comfortable?”

“Very.” In fact, the longer Gewey wore the clothes the more he noticed they had certain properties. His skin felt cool and alive, and the moccasins hugged his feet to the point that he barely noticed he was wearing them. “I'd love to know how they're made. The tailors back home would go crazy for this. The cobblers, too.”

“I am sure they would,” said Linis. “But you may find it is easier to sway the minds of the elf elders than to pry the secrets from our craftsmen. They are very protective of their art.” He sat across from Gewey. “It may be some time before you can leave this room. Do you need anything? I can have it brought.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “Some books would be nice. About the elves, if possible.”

“I'm sure that can be arranged.”

“Have you seen Kaylia?”

Linis shook his head. “Not yet. I am going to see her after I leave here. Do you have a message?”

Gewey hated that he couldn't speak to her when she was just yards away. “No. I'll deliver it myself.”

Linis frowned. “You must not leave this room. Give it to me and I'll convey it.”

Gewey flashed a mischievous grin. “I don't need to leave this room to deliver my message. I agreed to stay here, and I will. But where my spirit travels is my business.”

Linis burst out laughing. “I sometimes forget what you are, and what you're capable of. Mind that you keep this ability to yourself for now. Once the elders are told of your heritage, many are likely to fear you. Give them no more reasons than necessary to do so.”

“I was wondering,” said Gewey. “The gate. How did it open?”

“By the same means you gain strength when you use the power of the earth,” Linis replied. “We can create tools and objects that can harness the flow just as you do. It is said that in ancient times the elves created things of such power that they could upend the very earth, moving entire mountains.”

Gewey’s eyes widened at the thought. “Incredible. Have you ever seen such a device?”

Linis shook his head as sadness washed over him. “No, I have not. No one has in many generations. The wisdom and knowledge of our forefathers was said to rival that of the gods. But I fear we will never regain what we have lost.”

“Maybe together we can rediscover the secret.”

Linis forced a smile. “Perhaps. I fear I will not live to see such a thing.”

“Don't say that,” said Gewey. “We're all going to make it through this alive. I swear.”

Linis furled his brow. “Never make a promise you cannot keep. Besides, I have no fear of death. It comes to us all - except perhaps to you.”

“I may be a god, but I am not immortal. Whatever I am, I'm part of this world, just as you are.” He stood and turned his back. “What bothers me is that, if I am bound to earth as a human, I may have a human lifespan. Kaylia could live for four or five hundred more years.”

Realization washed over Linis. “You're afraid that if you complete your bond she will only live a human lifetime.”

Gewey nodded and lowered his head.

“Your fears are justified,” said Linis. “But certainly that should compel you to value the time together you will have.” He stood and placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “Do not dwell on it. You and she are the first to have such a bond. It could be that if you have a human life, it may be extended to that of an elf. There is also the possibility that you may not die at all, and that the two of you will be able to live together forever. Whatever the case, there is nothing to be done.”

“You’re right.” Gewey sighed. “But sometimes it's hard not to think about it.”

Linis gave Gewey's shoulder a light squeeze. “I'll have the books sent. Perhaps they can occupy your thoughts.”

Gewey turned and smiled. “I'd appreciate that.”

After Linis left, Gewey lay on the bed and closed his eyes. He reached out with his mind, hoping to touch Kaylia's, but found this to be more difficult than expected. It felt as if something was blocking him. He looked inside his pack, retrieved a small flask of jawas tea, and took a long draught. He could feel its effects at once. His body and mind relaxed and his breathing deepened. He reached out again, but even now he was unable to make contact. It seemed as though a brick wall was barring his way. He tried a few more times, but always with the same result. Frustrated, he got up and began pacing the room.

The desire to leave the room and ask Kaylia if she was experiencing the same thing was nearly unbearable. But he knew to do so would cause serious trouble. Instead, he busied himself by first unpacking his things, and then by polishing and oiling his sword while sitting on the edge of the bed. The weapon never seemed to need such care, but he enjoyed the task anyway. Simply by holding it, he could feel the throbbing pulse of the earth.

He closed his eyes, allowing the flow to move through him. More and more he opened himself until every fiber of his being was saturated.

“Stop this!” cried a loud, deep voice. Theopolou was standing at the doorway, fury in his eyes.

Gewey released the power. Immediately, he longed to hold it once more.

“You must not do that again,” Theopolou told him, slamming the door behind him.

“Why?” asked Gewey. “What can it hurt?”

“Fool,” the elf grumbled. “You expose yourself when you draw that much power.”

Gewey got to his feet. “I don't understand.”

“Then understand this. Should an elder be nearby when you draw that much of the flow, you will not need to tell anyone what you are.” Theopolou sat at the table and motioned for Gewey to do the same.

Gewey, irritated by his inability to contact Kaylia, resisted. “I'll stand.”

“You tried to contact Kaylia through your bond,” said Theopolou. “Did you not?”

Shocked, Gewey sat. “How did you...?”

“I know everything that happens within these walls,” he said. “And though another elder may not be as sensitive as I am within my house, they will know that you are not as you seem if you do that again. You are fortunate that no one has arrived yet.”

Gewey nodded, but still felt angered. “Why can't I contact Kaylia? It's as if I'm being blocked. And why is it that you can feel when I use the power, but your guards do not?”

Theopolou's mouth tightened. “I am not inclined to be your instructor, but I suppose on this occasion I must be.” He folded his hands on the table and leaned forward. “As far as your inability to spirit travel is concerned, I prevented it. I cannot risk you accidentally ruining my plans. And as for why I can feel you using the flow, it is a trait of my race. As we age, we become more sensitive. Seekers develop this ability, which is why Linis can feel it, but it would come naturally with time anyway.”

Theopolou stood. “That is all you need know. Any further instruction will be from Kaylia, or perhaps Linis.” He walked to the door. “Do not be a fool and try that again, or we will be undone.”

Left alone to feel like an ignorant child, Gewey sat in silence. When first departing from home with Lee he’d been rebuked many times, but Theopolou’s words had struck home keenly. He had thought his experiences had matured him, but now he was forced to question himself and his worth. There was still so much he didn't know.

The door opened and Akakios entered, carrying an armload of books. “Linis sent these.” He placed them on the table. “Mostly children’s stories, but Linis thought it best for you to learn our culture from the beginning.”

“Thank you.” Gewey picked up a leather-bound book with the title ‘Songs of Lilith’ embroidered on the cover.

“Something troubles you?” Akakios asked.

“It's only that sometimes I realize I have much to learn.”

Akakios smiled warmly. “It is good to know that about yourself. Even the very wise are not all knowing, though some may think so. I take it Theopolou had harsh words for you?”

Gewey shrugged. “He didn't say anything I didn't deserve. It's just that for a while I was starting to feel like I was my own man, and then I'm reminded of how young and inexperienced I really am.”

“Then take comfort from the fact that you are the first being, other than an elf, to grace the home of Theopolou or his family in more than five hundred years. That is an honor that you, and you alone, can boast. If it is experience you desire, this is certainly a good start.”

His words lifted Gewey's spirits. “Thank you. I guess I was just feeling a bit out of place and alone.”

“Think nothing of it.” Akakios turned and opened the door to leave. “I'll be guarding your door. I will see if Theopolou will grant me permission to keep you company. Linis may be tied up with the meeting of elders.”

“I'd like that,” said Gewey.

He spent the next few hours reading The Songs of Lilith. The book was a collection of stories about a young elf girl named Lilith who was kidnapped by a spirit and taken to the other side of the world. Each short tale recounted her quest to return home and ended with a moral lesson.

By the time Gewey had read the fifth story his eyes were growing heavy and he decided to go to bed. He examined the glowing orbs, but could find no way of dimming them. Finally, still with all of his clothes on, he lay down and covered his eyes with a shirt from his pack. He thought it best not to undress, just in case he had to move quickly.

His dreams were filled with visions of Lilith and her struggle to return to her family.

Chapter 12

Gewey awoke to find the lights dimmed and Linis sitting quietly on the couch flipping through one of the books he had sent over.

“Good morning,” yawned Gewey. “Assuming it is morning.”

Linis placed the book on the end table. “It is indeed. The elders began to show up late last night. Theopolou is hoping they will all be here today.”

A breakfast of bacon, eggs and juice sat on the table. Gewey stretched and walked over, his mouth watering.

“I noticed you were reading The Songs of Lilith,” remarked Linis. He joined Gewey at the table. “It was a favorite of mine as a child. I hope you are enjoying it.”

“Very much. Though the symbolism is hard to understand at times.” He picked up his plate and breathed in the aroma.

“I thought you should start at the beginning. It will help you to know elf ways better if you understand us from childhood. These books are some of the first lessons we are taught.”

Gewey swallowed a healthy portion of eggs. “They’re certainly different from the stories I heard as a child. My father would have loved them. So would Lee, I bet.”

“I'm sure he would.” Linis’ face grew concerned.

“What's wrong?” asked Gewey.

“The elders are taking a long time to gather. Theopolou was worried that we would arrive after the others were already here. But instead, it is we who wait.”

“Maybe some of them were delayed,” offered Gewey.

Linis shrugged. “Perhaps. But too many have yet to arrive. I fear they conspire against Theopolou.”

“Conspire? To do what?”

“I do not know,” Linis admitted. “Many who have yet to come are those who are openly against him. When and how they arrive will tell me much.”

“Do you think they'd try something here?” asked Gewey.

Linis shook his head. “Within these walls - no. They would never break our customs to such a degree. To do violence in the home of another elf is one our greatest crimes. We consider the home a sacred place. Besides, Theopolou controls the flow here. Even if they did the unthinkable, they'd be slaughtered.” Linis stood and paced around in thought. “No. If they do intend to kill Theopolou, they'll first need to remove him from this place.”

“Easy,” said Gewey. “We just make sure he doesn't leave.”

“I wish it were so simple,” said Linis. “If there is a plot, it will be subtle. They will not simply threaten or force Theopolou to expose himself. They will dress it in a manner so that he will have no choice but to comply.”

“How would they do that?” asked Gewey.

“I wish I knew. I am not as wise as Theopolou, nor as versed in the nuances of politics.”

“What can we do?” asked Gewey, suddenly losing his appetite.

“Wait and see,” said Linis. “I may be seeing intrigues where none exist. I hope so.” He walked to the door. “I must leave you. I'm sorry that I cannot stay longer, but I have much to do before the meeting begins. Kaylia says to pay attention to the tenth story of Lilith.” A smile crept over his face. “She is quite an elf.”

Gewey laughed. “Yes, she is.” He then remembered something. “Oh, one more thing before you go, Linis. How did you dim the lights?”

The elf laughed softly. “Rub your hand up the side of the glass to brighten, and down to dim.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey.

Linis nodded and left. Gewey immediately tried out the light. Just as Linis had said, it became brighter as he moved his hand up the side. He marveled at the skill it must have taken to make such a wondrous device.

Gewey spent the next few hours reading. He made it to the ninth story in The Songs of Lilith when there was a knock at the door. Gewey opened it to find Akakios standing there, a broad grin on his face.

“Theopolou granted me permission to keep you company,” said Akakios.

“Then please come in,” Gewey responded, happy to have someone to talk to.

Akakio sat down at the table and gestured to the book Gewey held. “What do you think?”

“I'm loving it,” said Gewey as he sat across from the elf. “Do you know who wrote it?”

Akakios raised an eyebrow and chuckled. “You think you might know the author?” He picked up the book and thumbed through the pages. “Anyway, if I told you, you wouldn't believe me.”

“Try me.”

“Legend says it was written by Lilith herself, thousands of years ago.”

Gewey's eyes widened. “You mean these are true stories?”

“Perhaps. But I think not.” He leaned back and crossed his legs. “More likely Lilith was just the one who invented the stories.”

“Of course.” Gewey felt foolish. “Has the meeting begun?”

“Yes,” Akakios replied. “About an hour ago. The last of the elders arrived just before they were going start without him.”

“How is it going so far?”

Akakios shrugged. “I would not know. The only non-elder allowed inside is Linis. I'm sure he'll fill you in later. In the meantime...”

He pulled a set of eight-sided dice from his pocket. “How would you like to learn an elf game?”

Gewey beamed. “I'd love to. But I must warn you, I'm not a very good gambler. And I really don't have much money.”

Akakios leaned back in his chair and gave Gewey a devilish grin. “Don't worry. We can play for fun - for now.”

Gewey fetched the few coins he had with him: three coppers and a silver, plus one gold coin that Lee had given to him. He tossed these onto the table. “That won’t be necessary.”

“Don't worry,” joked Akakios when he saw Gewey's money. “I'll give you a loan if you need one.”

The game was similar to others played at the tavern in Sharpstone, and though Gewey had not been one to visit the place at night very often, he caught on to this new game quickly. Soon, he had nearly doubled his money.

“Not a gambler you tell me?” teased Akakios as he fiddled with his dwindling pile of coins.

“Is that what I said?” said Gewey, feigning innocence.

Linis entered looking very unhappy. Akakios quickly gathered his remaining coins and excused himself.

“From the look on your face, things aren't going too well,” said Gewey as they took a seat on the couch.

Linis lowered his head and rubbed his neck. “That is putting it mildly. Things are turning sour, and fast.”

“What happened?”

To begin with,” started Linis. “They knew you were here.” “How?” asked Gewey.

Linis shook his head slowly. “I don't know. But somehow they discovered in advance that both you and Kaylia are here. Some of the elders are calling for Theopolou to face judgment for treason, and for harboring a fugitive.”

Gewey shifted nervously. Without Theopolou's protection, he wasn't sure what could happen. “They can do that?”

“It's doubtful. It's just a prelude to another move.” Linis looked disgusted. “Even if they can get enough support to call Theopolou to judgment, they would never be able to convict him.”

“Then why do it?”

“To force him to expose himself,” said Linis. “If he is called to judgment, he will have to go to the Chamber of the Maker.”

“What's that?” asked Gewey.

“It's where all judgments are made, and where the council meets during times of war.” Linis stood up and began pacing. “If he leaves these walls he is vulnerable.”

“You don't really think they'd try to kill him - do you?”

Linis sighed heavily. “If you had asked me that question a year ago, I would have said no. But now...”

Gewey thought for a moment. He needed to speak to the elders and convince them to join him against Angrääl. If Theopolou were brought to judgment, he didn't know if there would be another chance.

“There's more,” said Linis. “They want to speak to you - and Kaylia.”

This sent a chill throughout his entire body. “Together?”

“Yes,” Linis replied. “They know about your bonding. Needless to say, they are not pleased.”

Gewey shot to his feet. “What will they do?”

Linis grabbed Gewey's shoulders, trying to calm him. “They can do nothing so long as you are under Theopolou's protection. If they tried, the elves who are undecided in this matter would move against them. And don't forget, this is the house of an elf sage and council elder. Only a great fool would attack him here. He controls the flow within these walls.”

“But if we are forced to leave?”

“Then you have the greatest living seeker to fight at your side,” Linis assured him. “Even the elders will pause at that.”

“But that will put you at war with your own people.” Gewey shook his head. “I won't have that.”

“I'm already at war.” Linis held a deep sadness in his eyes. “I've been called to judgment.”

Gewey's eyes shot wide. “What? What are you going to do?”

Linis forced a weak smile. “I've refused to recognize their authority. Once I leave these walls I am to be considered a fugitive and a traitor.”

“I'm so sorry,” said Gewey

“Don't be. I knew this would happen. It was just a matter of time.” He squared his shoulders. “I have made my choices, and I do not regret what I have done.”

The door opened and Theopolou entered, dressed in a long white robe. He looked weary.

“I imagine Linis has filled you in,” said Theopolou. Gewey nodded.

“The council wishes to extend you an invitation to join them at the Chamber of the Maker,” said Theopolou in a clear even tone. “Do you accept?”

“Why?” asked Gewey. “Why do they want me to go there?”

“They feel that your presence has jeopardized the gathering,” Theopolou replied without conviction. “They fear you may have led others here.”

“That is a lie and you know it,” Linis roared. “They are luring you into a trap. You must see that. Once you're outside of these walls they will kill you - and Gewey.”

“I pray that you are wrong, seeker,” said Theopolou. “But if you are not, you must take the Book of Souls and keep it safe. I'll entrust it to you before I leave. Keep it hidden.”

“No need,” said Linis flatly. “I'll be going too.”

Theopolou nodded. “Very well.”

“What about Kaylia?” asked Gewey.

“She will be accompanying us,” Theopolou answered.

“I won't let you march her to her death.”

“She is not to be judged,” said Theopolou. “At least, not yet. She has been called to bear witness and give testimony.”

“Testimony?” said Gewey “What kind of testimony?”

“Against me,” Theopolou replied. “I have been called to judgment.”

“You cannot do this,” said Linis. “Your enemies know that you will not be found guilty. It can only mean they intend to move against you once you are away from the safety of your home.”

“If so,” said Theopolou. “I shall count on you to come to my aid.”

“My seekers should come as well,” Linis told him.

“No,” said Theopolou. “If you insist on coming, they must not. It will be taken as a sign of aggression. You must help me to keep the Book - and Gewey - safe. ”

“So I won't be opening it here?” asked Gewey.

“I do not think that would be wise,” Theopolou replied. “It would cause more trouble than I care to handle at this point. The council is aware that I have re-acquired the Book, and that has gained me some support. But introducing a god into the situation this soon would be most unwise. Linis is right. I will not be found guilty. Once that happens, we can move on from there. I will gather the council once more after I am found guiltless, and then you will open it.”

“Is Gewey still to meet with the council before we depart?” asked Linis.

“Yes,” Theopolou replied. “Though his petition to have the elves join his cause must wait.”

Gewey’s heart sank. “Isn't there any way for me to speak to them about this before we reach the Chamber of the Maker?”

“It would be a foolish risk,” said Theopolou. “Beyond the grounds of my house I cannot protect you. Certain revelations may cause my kin to react poorly.”

“I have to risk it,” said Gewey. “Every day wasted brings the Dark Knight closer to our doors. I need to do what I came here to do.”

Theopolou sighed. “If you must, I cannot stop you. But I think you would do better to listen to my council.” He turned to Linis. “The road ahead may hold danger. Prepare.”

Linis nodded. “I may not be able to bring my seekers, but I can see to it that they are not far away.” He shot a stare at Theopolou before he could argue. “I insist.”

“They must say out of sight,” said Theopolou reluctantly.

“They are seekers,” said Linis. “The finest the tribe of Melanctha has ever produced. That bumbling group of fools could not spot my elves if they were standing on top of them.”

“I know you are angered by them naming you traitor,” scolded Theopolou. “But they are not fools. If your seekers are not careful they will be discovered.”

“They will not be discovered,” said Linis. “But I must take my leave now to inform them.”

Theopolou nodded curtly as Linis left the room. “What happens now?” asked Gewey.

“Now you will speak briefly with the elders.” Theopolou looked Gewey up and down. “You may keep your present attire.”

“And Kaylia?” asked Gewey.

“She awaits us.”

Theopolou led Gewey out of the door and around to the front of the main house. The opportunity to see the interior of such a magnificent building excited him, and his sense of anticipation grew further when the great metal doors automatically swung open as they approached.

What Gewey saw as they stepped inside made even the exterior of the house seem trite and common. The immense receiving hall was brightly lit by the same type of orbs that were in his room, only these were much smaller and vast in number. The floors were of deep emerald green marble, polished to a bright shine and veined with ivory. The walls, made from the same gleaming silver metal as the door and gate, were etched with elf letters and symbols of such artistry that it brought tears to Gewey’s eyes.

Above him, running along the entire length and breadth of the hall, was a green marble balcony. Darkly stained wooden doors lined the wall leading to various rooms and chambers.

In the center of the hall a crystal statue, similar to the one outside, was holding a book. Gewey immediately thought of the Book of Souls. Theopolou's family had guarded this for generations. It must have pained the elf over the years to look upon the statue and know that it no longer held the same meaning that it once had.

At the rear of the room, a broad staircase led up to the next level. There was a set of double doors positioned on either side of the stair base, with another matching set of doors at the top. Gewey stared, mouth agape as he passed the statue. He could hardly wait to see the rest of the house. While cresting the staircase, Gewey caught sight of Kaylia. She was dressed in the same type of white robe as Theopolou, and her hair hung loosely down her back. She smiled when she saw Gewey, and he could feel her relief through their bond.

Kaylia appraised his elven garb. “You look good dressed this way.”

Gewey blushed. “It's very comfortable, but I feel underdressed to meet elf elders.” He decided not to mention that he had also slept in them.

“Are you ready?” asked Theopolou. Gewey and Kaylia both nodded.

Theopolou clapped his hands loudly and the doors swung silently open. As they followed the elf inside, Gewey took a deep breath, hoping that this trip had not been a huge mistake.

Chapter 13

The High Lady of Valshara paced the halls of the temple, immersed in thought. She had hardly been able to sleep ever since Linis had reported the presence of possible agents from Angrääl watching them. Then, two of her scouts had disappeared three nights ago. On top of that, the temple watch had reported seeing shadowy figures lurking just beyond the walls. Their location was compromised, and she felt sure that an attack would come soon.

The few knights she had available were not enough to hold off an attack should the walls be breached. They had attempted to convince her to escape, but she’d refused. The High Lady of Valshara would not scurry away in the night, and she would not leave her people behind. If evacuation became necessary, everyone would go. Of course, if their enemies had found the hidden exit, then they would all die.

Her mind wandered to thoughts of her son. She yearned to speak to him one more time. Their reunion had been all too brief, though she was thankful that she had at least been able to see him before the end.

“My Lady.” It was Ertik.

Selena forced a smile. “Brother Ertik, how are the preparations coming?”

“They go well, My Lady,” he replied, though not convincingly. “If the walls are breached, the knights will be able to slow any invaders long enough for everyone to get out.”

“I want you to spread the word,” commanded Selena. “Gather all packs and gear and place them in the receiving hall at once. If it comes to that, I want nothing to hinder our escape.”

“Yes, High Lady.” Ertik bowed and left.

Selena busied herself by inspecting the provisions and defenses. The knights tried once more to convince her to leave, but she would not be moved. When it was time for the evening meal, fatigue was setting in. Her feet had swelled and her legs ached. However, even after a hearty meal and hot bath, she still could not bring herself to sleep.

After lying in bed for an hour, she decided to read. She sent for some hot tea and settled into her favorite chair, curling up with one of her favorite comedies. She needed a laugh. But she had barely got beyond the first paragraph when a loud knock sounded at the door. It then burst open before she could even respond. Jericho, the captain of the knights, stepped inside the chamber. He held his sword tightly.

“We are besieged, High Lady,” said the captain. “We must evacuate.”

“I heard no alarm raised.” Selena reached for her coat. She was thankful that she had begun the habit of dressing in clothes suitable for travel rather than her cotton nightgown. “Have they breached the defenses already?” She slipped into a pair of short leather boots.

“I don't know how it was done,” Jericho admitted. “But they killed three knights before we even knew they were there. Whatever they are, they're neither human nor elf.”

A cold knot twisted in her stomach. “How many are there?”

“We can’t be sure,” said the captain. “But they fight as if possessed. We cannot hold. You must leave now.”

Selena squared her shoulders, standing straight and tall. “Begin the evacuation. Then, and only then, will I leave.”

Jericho lowered his eyes but made no move to obey. “My Lady, if you do not come with me willingly, I regret that I must take you by force.”

“You wouldn't dare!” she hissed.

“It is my duty to protect this Order.” He took a small step forward, but did not lift his eyes or place his hands on her. “You are not only our leader, you also symbolize what we are. Should you die, we die with you. The knights are falling back as we speak to aid in your escape. Every second you delay, more of us meet our end.”

Selena boiled with anger, but she had no other choice. She nodded sharply and allowed Jericho to lead her though the temple to the receiving hall. Screams echoed everywhere as the enemy found new victims, but Jericho wouldn't allow her to pause. Tears streamed down her face. Her people were being slaughtered, and she was helpless to do a thing about it.

She hoped desperately that the gathering in the receiving hall would be large. But as they entered, those hopes were dashed; just three knights, Ertik, and two novices were waiting there.

“So few,” Selena whispered in horror. She felt her legs begin to give way, but Jericho caught her.

“Come High Lady,” said the captain softly. He led her to the tunnel entrance. “Others may yet follow.”

Selena tried to fight back her tears.

“I will stay behind and help others get out,” said Ertik.

“No!” Selena shouted. “You will escape now.”

Ertik bowed and helped Selena to the ladder once Jericho had descended. When they reached the door, Jericho motioned for them to wait before creeping outside into the cool night.

“All clear,” whispered the captain. “My Lady, stay close behind me.”

Jericho led the group down the trail, sword in hand. The others followed as closely as they could without tripping on each other.

They had walked for about half a mile when they suddenly heard footsteps approaching from out of the darkness. Jericho crouched and the rest followed suit. As the footsteps grew louder, the lights from three torches came into view.

“Off the path,” whispered Jericho.

They scampered into the nearby brush, trying to stay quiet. Soon the torches were right next to them. Selena's heart raced, her breaths short and swift. Then the torches halted. From where they were behind a small bush, she couldn't see who it was.

“Come out,” hissed a foul, unearthly voice. “I can smell you, hiding like scared rabbits.”

Selena was the first to stand. “Who are you?” she shouted. “Why have you attacked the sacred Temple of Valshara?” She stepped onto the path. The others quickly jumped up and followed. The knights stood at her side, while the others stayed close behind. Ertik had drawn a small dagger.

What she saw shocked and revolted her senses. Two soldiers stood in full chain mail, each one bearing a vicious looking curved scimitar in one hand, and a rope attached to a bound and blindfolded elf in the other. Selena recognized the elves as being part of Theopolou's guard. They had been badly beaten, but there was no mistaking who they were. Standing in the center was a creature she had never seen. Even in the dim torchlight she knew it wasn't human. Hunched over and swaying from side to side, it was wrapped in a long, flowing, black cloak, and wore heavy boots of leather and iron. Though its face was hidden behind the drawn hood, she could feel its eyes on her. It took a step forward and drew a long, jagged sword. The creature’s movement was unimaginably quick and fluid. Jericho and the knights leaped in front of the High Lady.

“Stay back, demon,” commanded the captain.

“The Vrykol bid you greetings, High Lady,” said the creature. “You will come with us - or all of your companions will die.”

“You will not lay your foul hands on the High Lady of Valshara,” growled Jericho.

The Vrykol hissed a laugh. “Brave words, human. I think I'll kill you slowly.”

“You will harm no one,” said Selena. In a flash, she reached inside her sleeve and threw a small glass phial straight at the Vrykol's head. The sound of breaking glass was followed by another foul laugh.

“Holy water has no effect on me, foolish woman,” said the Vrykol. “Your gods have no power in this world.”

Selena smiled fiendishly as smoke began to rise from the Vrykol's hood. A second later it burst into intense, blue flames. The two soldiers standing beside the Vrykol stepped quickly back as the creature desperately tried to beat out the flames eating away at it. It was no use. The fire grew larger and hotter until the light was blinding. The creature dropped to its knees and let out a short series of unearthly screams. The sound caused Selena to wince and cover her ears. Then, abruptly, the noise stopped. The smoldering remains of the Vrykol crumbled to the ground.

The two human soldiers immediately dropped the ropes they were holding and ran off into the night. Jericho started after them, but Selena ordered him back.

“We can't waste time chasing them,” said Selena. “We must move quickly.”

They untied the elves and examined their wounds.

“You are Theopolou's guard, are you not?” asked Selena.

The elves nodded. “I am Stintos, and this is Haldrontis. We owe you our lives, High Lady.”

Selena smiled. “We are happy to aid you. How did this happen?”

Stintos explained how they had been attacked by the Vrykol, and how Gewey and Linis had slain them. “We were to return to the temple until I was able to travel, but we were ambushed and held captive.” Anger raged in his voice. “They tried to get us to turn spy, but I would not dishonor myself, or my kin, with treachery. They are devils. And they have elf allies. Now that we are free, I must get this information to Theopolou.”

“He will be told,” assured Selena. “But your wounds must be tended. We go to Althetas, and the two of you are coming with us. I will send word the moment we get there.” Stintos opened his mouth to protest, but Selena shot him a stern look that told him there would be no argument.

“Can you travel?” asked Jericho.

“Yes.” Haldrontis spoke with fierce determination. “And we will fight if need be.”

Jericho turned to one of the knights. “Give him a dagger.” The knight obeyed, while Jericho gave Stintos a dagger from his own belt. “I wish I could arm you better...”

“This will be fine,” said Stintos. “An elf with a dagger is a thing to be feared.”

The elves struggled to their feet.

“What was that thing?” asked Selena. “It called itself a Vrykol.”

“I'm not certain,” Haldrontis replied. “But they fight like they are possessed. And the only way I know to kill one is to remove its head.” He glanced at the smoking corpse. “And it would seem they do not like fire either.”

The entire group erupted into uneasy laughter.

“Let us go,” said Selena, still chuckling. “It's many miles to Althetas.”

Despite their injuries, the elves easily kept pace. By the time dawn pierced the darkness they had traveled many miles.

To everyone’s relief, there was no sign of pursuit.

Chapter 14

Several days had passed since Millet and Jacob had parted with Malstisos, Maybell, and the caravan. Once they arrived in Manisalia, Maybell discovered that the Oracle had fled more than a year before, and no one knew where she had gone.

Malstisos arranged for Maybell to have her own tent, and they purchased enough provisions to last the rest of their journey.

Though it was bitter cold, the blizzard had not reached the far west and the roads were clear enough to allow travel after only a few days. The nights brought cheer and laughter as Maybell and Malstisos made friends among the merchants. Maybell instructed the men in manners, and the women in how to keep a man in his place. Soon she became viewed as a sort of caravan elder, settling disputes and advising the merchant leaders.

Malstisos spent a great deal of his time with Grentos and Vadnaltis, exchanging stories and news from their tribes. Maybell checked in on them from time to time, but her new-found duties kept her busy.

On the eighth night, Maybell was preparing for bed when Malstisos came to her tent. He looked worried and anxious.

“What is it?” asked Maybell.

Malstisos' lips pressed tight and his brow furled. “I fear my kinsmen are not what they seem.”

Maybell's back stiffened. “How do you mean?”

Malstisos knelt down near to the entrance of the tent and peered outside before speaking. “First of all, they are seekers.”

Maybell looked confused. “Why is that odd?”

“Because seekers do not hide who they are,” he explained. “And they have attempted to mask what they are from me.”

“Is that all?” asked Maybell. “There could be any number of reasons for that.”

“Perhaps,” he agreed. “And if it were only that, I wouldn't be so concerned. Seekers can be an odd bunch, and the ways of my kin in the steppes are different. But these two have been probing me for information - the kind that can only be for one purpose. And they have underestimated me. I am not a seeker, but I am a worthy diplomat. Much more so than either of them. I know when I am being manipulated.”

Maybell tensed. She knew how vulnerable they were. “What do they want to know?” she whispered, suddenly afraid that they were being spied on.

“The identity of allies who are hiding their sympathies, the location of Valshara and its strength - things of that nature.” He fingered the knife on his belt. “The thing is, if they had asked me directly, I wouldn't have become suspicious. But they hide their questions behind other, seemingly innocent questions. Their poor attempt at subterfuge has made it clear to me that they are not what they seem.”

“Should we run?”

Malstisos shook his head. “No. We are better off remaining with the caravan for now. I do not think the humans are aware of their deception, and I doubt my kinsmen will want to draw attention to themselves so far from home. If we run, we are vulnerable. They are seekers. They will hunt us down and kill us both.”

Maybell's eyes brightened. “I know what to do.” She stood and began to pace the tent. “We will be near Farmington in two days’ time. I have friends there who will give us shelter. We should say that we need to pick up extra supplies, then take refuge.”

“Good plan,” said Malstisos, nodding in agreement. “It is unlikely they will openly attack us in a human village. Until then, behave normally. I will quietly gather what we can carry without being noticed.”

“Good,” said Maybell, satisfied. “Then if you'll excuse me. An old woman needs to sleep. Especially if we're going to be running for our lives in two days’ time.”

Malstisos bowed and left the tent. He took a deep breath and returned to the fire where the humans were laughing and singing. He knew that he should join Grentos and Vadnaltis so as not to raise their suspicions, but he needed time before he could face them. The thought of being deceived by his kin caused his blood to boil, and if they were to escape he needed them to believe he knew nothing. He just hoped that the place of refuge Maybell had in mind would be secure enough to stop two seekers.

After a couple of hours of socializing and singing with the merchants, Malstisos finally steeled his emotions sufficiently to join Grentos and Vadnaltis in their tent. The talk was light and cheerful, and for once they didn't try to gather any information from him. Around midnight they all went to sleep, though Malstisos found it nearly unbearable to stay in the same tent as the treacherous seekers. He slept light and woke several times.

He decided he would find a reason to stay with Maybell in her tent the following night.

Chapter 15

Salmitaya cursed as she slapped a horsefly stinging the back of her neck. Her plain wool dress was stained with mud and grime, and her brow was beaded with sweat. She was not accustomed to humid climates, or the way she was now being forced to live.

For two weeks she and Yanti had been in Baltria, and for two weeks she had worked for him as a slave. The home they stayed in was a modest, single story dwelling, though well decorated and comfortable. Located on the northern outskirts of the city populated mostly by merchants and store owners, it had a decent yard and a small flower garden in the back – a garden well tended by her own backbreaking efforts.

There had been two servants at the house when they’d arrived, but Yanti promptly dismissed them both.

“You are all I need, my love,” he’d told her in his melodic tone. “I wouldn't want you to feel useless.”

He’d then made a list of her daily duties, though they changed from moment to moment on his whim. The first day had nearly killed her. She’d been forced to rearrange all of the furniture, tend the garden, prepare the meals, and then go to the market to pick up a week’s worth of food and supplies. After she completed each task, Yanti would inspect her work.

“You must do better, my love,” he would say. “Otherwise you will never leave my service.”

Angrääl had forced her to give up her position and wealth, and had indentured her to Yanti until he felt she had earned the right to regain her status. She had gone from a powerful High Priestess to a lowly servant overnight. At first she had hoped it wouldn't be so bad, but it didn't take long to realize that despite Yanti's smooth and cultured demeanor, he was in truth a vicious and cruel monster.

She had attempted to escape during the very first week, only to be caught less than an hour into her flight. She still cringed at the thought of the beating he had given her, and at his promise that, should she try to do the same thing again, then he would most certainly kill her – very slowly.

Today, her duties consisted mostly of scrubbing the house clean from a black mold that seemed to cover everything in Baltria. Yanti had commanded that she be finished by midday because he had other errands for her to run later on. She looked up. The sun was high in the sky, and she was still only halfway done. Her back ached and her hands were blistered from constant scrubbing.

“Taya, my love,” called Yanti from behind her.

She jumped. Yanti moved silently and was constantly sneaking up on her. “Yes?” She tried to hide her hatred by averting her eyes.

“I need you to check the inns again. See if your friends have arrived yet.” He turned and strode away. Just as he reached the corner of the house, he paused. “Later this evening we'll discuss the fact that you weren't able to finish your work on time again. Perhaps we can find new ways to motivate you.”

Salmitaya shuddered as she watched him disappear around the corner. She dusted herself off, put away the bucket and brush, and headed to the tavern district. The streets of Baltria were filthy by Kaltinor standards. Though well paved and maintained, you could actually hear the mud and grime crunch beneath your feet. The city was situated in the very center of the largest delta in the world. The soil was rich and black, and the humid climate meant that the ground was wet for most of the time. It was nearly impossible not to track mud wherever you walked. Frequent rain helped to wash away the buildup before it could get out of hand, but it left a strong musty odor to which Salmitaya swore she could never grow accustomed.

The houses were mostly single story, bricks and mortar structures, even those owned by the nobles. However, as she drew closer to the docks she began to notice the many houses and shops built on tall pylons in order to avoid the occasional extreme high tides.

One of the largest cities in the world, Baltria was known mostly for its massive ports and market places that were as big as some towns.  A colossal variety of goods were shipped both into and away from the Goodbranch River, and from there spreading to all points near and far.

Salmitaya despised the tavern district. Yanti had her coming here every two or three days to check the local gossip and pay his informants. At first, she feared she might be spotted by someone from the temples. Word of her betrayal had certainly traveled this far by now, and if she were caught then she would be doomed to spending the rest of her life in a dark temple prison cell. However, it soon became clear that, in her present state of filth and dishevelment, no one was likely to recognize her. Twice before she had seen sisters and brothers who she had known quite well, but they simply walked right past without so much as a second glance. After that, she removed the mirrors from her room.

Snow would be falling at this time of year in Kaltinor, but here it was unbearably hot. Her heavy clothing made the heat feel like a torture, and the humidity made the countless patches of filth on her skin cling like leeches.

“Taya,” called the raspy, uncouth voice of Saul Milspend.

Salmitaya clinched her jaw and stepped up her pace. Saul was a fish merchant and one of Yanti's local informants. His bald head, short round frame, and smile that was missing several teeth caused her to recoil every time she saw the man. Worse, he was constantly trying to touch her on the hand or shoulder in a clumsy attempt at flirting.

“Taya!” he called out louder.

Salmitaya dropped her head and stopped. She could hear Saul's lumbering footsteps running up behind her.

Saul seized her by the shoulder. “I am glad I caught you.”

Salmitaya recoiled. “What is it Saul?” The stench of rotten fish caught in her nostrils.

“The innkeeper at the Malt and Mane said you should come by. He said to make sure you come through the back.” He held out his hand and gave her a toothless smile.

Salmitaya reached into the small pouch that hung from her belt and gave him a copper. Saul tried to thank her, but she walked quickly away in the direction of the inn.

The streets were crowded with city dwellers and merchants, both local and foreign. Fashions from the farthest reach of the world could be seen everywhere. Salmitaya was particularly fond of the silk wraps and colorful dresses of the eastern desert, though every time she saw one, it reminded her painfully of her own poor appearance.

It took her the better part of an hour to wind her way through the city to the tavern district.

The Malt and Mane was typical of the many inns in Baltria. Not particularly nice, but not a flophouse either. Still, as a lady of culture and dignity, it was not a place she wanted to be. That she was instructed to enter from the rear was as much of an insult as she could bear, but she dare not ignore it. Yanti had intrigues everywhere and was constantly gathering information. Salmitaya reckoned he had dirt on every influential person in the city, and he made sure they knew it.

She was still thinking about this as she rounded the corner leading directly to the inn. Suddenly, she froze. Not twenty feet away stood Celandine. She was talking to a fruit merchant. Salmitaya immediately spun around and returned quickly the way she had come, pressing her back flat against the building on the corner.

Slowly she peered around the edge of the building, taking care not to be seen. Celandine was wearing a tan linen dress rather than her novice robes, and her hair flowed loosely about her shoulders. Even so, there was no mistaking who it was. Salmitaya watched her until she entered the Malt and Mane, then sped off back to the house, unsure what she was going tell Yanti.

By the time she reached the house she was drenched in sweat and her legs were burning. She paused, composed herself, and entered. It took a moment for her eyes to adjust to the gloom. A small lamp in the living room to her right was the only source of light. Yanti sat cross-legged in a plush chair, dressed in a white cotton shirt and trousers, reading a small, leather-bound book. How he could see to read, Salmitaya couldn't imagine.

Yanti looked up and smiled, closing the book. “Well, my love.” His voice was honey. “I see that you're back quickly. A bit too quickly.”

Salmitaya tried to meet his eyes but couldn't. “I saw Celandine in front of the Malt and Mane.”

“Celandine?” he remarked, raising and eyebrow.

“She was a novice...”

Yanti raised his hand, silencing her. “I know who she is.” He rose from his chair. “Interesting choice.”

“I don't understand,” said Salmitaya. “You…”

Yanti shot her a glance and drew close. “My love, there is much I know that you don't. The sooner you accept that, the easier your life will be.” He reached out and held her chin, lifting her head to meet his gaze. “You should stay out of sight for the time being. I wouldn't want you to come to harm. At least, not yet.”

She began to tremble. Whatever his plans were, she knew she was disposable to him. She needed to prove her value in order to stay alive. “Let me help you,” she begged. “I can watch her without being seen.”

“I am pleased with your enthusiasm,” he replied, sounding almost sincere. “And I'm certain you could do a wonderful job. But I have enough eyes. No. I will restrict your movements to inside this house for the moment.” He released her. “You should be happy. It will be a respite from your normal duties.”

“Thank you,” she said in her most submissive voice. Yanti laughed softly. “Get yourself cleaned and rested.” Salmitaya bowed her head and turned to leave.

“I don't want you to worry,” Yanti called after her. “I will have much for you to do, soon enough.”

A chill ran down Salmitaya’s spine. Tears welled in her eyes. Whatever he had in mind, she knew it wouldn't be good.

Chapter 16

Dina entered the Malt and Mane carrying a basket of fresh strawberries. She let the scent fill her nostrils. As a child, her father would often take her into the forest to go strawberry picking. Most of the time they would eat half of them before they even got home. Dina hadn't thought of this in many years, and a small smile crept across her face.

“You look far away,” remarked Lee, sitting at the table next to the kitchen door.

The inn was typical for the area. There were two large common rooms, one on either side of the entrance. The room on the left was furnished with a dozen tables, each large enough to accommodate six people. The room on the right offered customers a bar on the far side, with tables scattered along all the walls; it also featured a raised platform in the middle for entertainment purposes. Just next to the bar were two doors, one leading to the kitchen, and the other to the guest rooms. Brass lamps hung from the ceiling, and two small fireplaces were in opposite corners.

Dina joined Lee at the table and handed him a strawberry, which he took gratefully. “I was just thinking about when I was a child,” said Dina, still with a faraway look on her face.

“Is your father still alive?” asked Lee.

“No,” she replied. “As you know, I'm older than I look. And I was very young when I found the Order.”

“I'm sorry.”

“It's fine,” she said, shaking off her melancholy. “It’s just that I haven't been home in a very long time. I'm still rather tired as well.”

Lee and Dina had only just arrived the previous night. Their trip was uneventful, but their rapid pace had pushed her limits. Lee figured that Millet and his son would make their way to the Goodbranch River and sail down. That would certainly cut down on their travel time, and he had wanted to be sure of arriving ahead of them.

“Perhaps you should rest,” Lee suggested.

“I think I will.” Dina picked out a large strawberry. “But not before I enjoy a few of these.” She popped the fruit into her mouth and sighed with pleasure as she bit down.

“Good,” said Lee. “In the meantime, I'll check with my contacts here. I should like to get the feel of things.”

Dina nodded in agreement. “I can check the temples this evening,” she said, still chewing.

“I don't want you going off by yourself. I’m certain there are agents of the north about. Probably informants among the locals as well.”

“How would they know who we are, or what we're doing?” she asked, swallowing the remains of the berry.

Lee lowered his voice to a whisper. “They knew about us from the moment we left Sharpstone. And we were followed, at least for a time, out of Valshara. Clearly they have a more efficient system for gathering intelligence than we do.” He scowled. “I intend to change that situation.”

“How do you plan to do that?” She picked up another strawberry.

“I am very wealthy, my dear,” he stated. “And so are many of the people we have met, such as Lord Broin and Lord Ganflin. Information is nothing more than a commodity. If you have the coin, it's yours.”

“But won't the informants have already been bought?”

“Almost certainly,” he affirmed, smiling. “But the one dependable thing about scum is that they will always serve as many masters as can pay. But I won't be contacting the street dregs directly. I have friends among the nobility. I'll make my inquiries through them.”

Dina furled her brow. “And what happens if your friends have been bought as well - or worse, joined our enemies?”

He shrugged. “Then that will tell me what I need to know. But I doubt they'd betray me openly. Most know me from my days studying under local sword masters. I had a reputation as a very skilled swordsman.” He chuckled and shook his head. “The nobles aren't what you would call courageous, at least, not in the way a soldier is courageous. They wouldn't risk my wrath unless they were certain they could get away with it.”

Dina recalled watching Lee battle the elf seeker, Berathis. “I don't imagine any of them would want to upset you.”

Lee grinned fiendishly. “Not unless they want me to pay them more than a social call. But I know one lord I can trust. I saved his life.”

“Really, how?”

“He made the mistake of drinking and gambling at the wrong tavern,” Lee replied. “And he tends to flash his money when he's had too much wine. Not something you want to do in Baltria after dark. I stopped three thieves from killing him for his foolishness.”

“Well, I certainly hope that would buy you a bit of loyalty,” said Dina. She yawned and blinked her eyes. “And on that note, I need to rest for a bit. Wake me before sunset.”

Lee nodded. “Just don't leave here until I return.”

“And you remember that you are not invulnerable,” she said as she got up from her seat, making sure not to forget her remaining strawberries.

Lee laughed, sprung up, and snatched a berry for himself. “I'll be fine.” He made his way to the door and ventured out into the city streets.

The sun was still high in the sky, and the heat reminded Lee of how far removed from Sharpstone he was. He had sent a messenger to his friend early that morning, asking that they meet near to the docks. He couldn't risk being noticed. Dina was right to think that the nobility could have been bought off. Their entire world revolved around the acquisition of wealth; in some ways they were no better than bandits. Then there was the real possibility that they had sided with Angrääl, which would be worse still. Bought loyalty could be changed, but a true believer...

It wasn't long before the houses transitioned from typical Baltria dwellings into the structures that had been built on tall pylons. Lee had been in the city during a particularly bad flood year when the water had risen sufficiently to cover even the high porches. He’d wondered that the entire city hadn’t been drowned, but then discovered that Baltria was equipped with a system of drains and manual pumps that could be used to keep the majority of the city reasonably dry.

The mold stench of the docks filled the air as Lee neared. Sailors in brightly colored shirts and hats stumbled drunkenly through the streets, while merchants enthusiastically shouted their wares to passers-by. It wasn't long before he could see the tall masts of the ships peeking over the rooftops, and hear the sounds of orders being barked and bells ringing. A minute or so later the massive dock came into view. It stretched out from east to west as far as the eye could see. When he had first come here, many years ago, there had been hundreds of ships coming and going, loading and unloading. But now there were less than fifty ships in all.

He frowned. The dark times have struck everywhere.

The Plank Walker’s Café, where he was to meet his friend, was located only a few yards from the docks. Mostly patronized by officers and merchants, Lee knew the place well. It boasted the best seafood stew in the known world, a claim well supported by popular opinion. Lee had once tried to get the owner to give him the recipe, but to no avail.

Lee climbed the stairs to the deck where a short, plump, young woman greeted him. She smiled warmly and showed Lee to a table.

“And what'll you be havin' today, sir?” she asked cheerfully, with a thick Baltrian accent.

“Seafood stew, of course,” Lee replied.

“Right away.” She spun around, heading for the kitchen.

A few moments later a young, dark haired boy brought him some bread and a bottle of wine.

“Careful, Starfinder,” said a voice from the steps. “That isn't weak northern wine you're drinking.”

“Lanson Brimm.” Lee laughed. “I don't think it's my drinking that needs to be monitored.”

Lanson was a tall, slender, middle-aged man. His fine, sandy blond hair blew carelessly in the sea breeze. He wore a blue cotton shirt and trousers with white silk embroidery. A silver-handled short sword hung from his black leather belt.

Lee stood and embraced the man tightly. “It's good to see you.” He offered him a chair. “Are you eating?”

“I'm sorry, my friend,” said Lanson. “I must leave you soon. Frankly, I was surprised to receive your invitation.”

“Why is that?” asked Lee.

Lanson shook his head and wagged his finger. “You've made some powerful enemies. Every noble in the city has been paid for information on you, and the gods only know how many street vermin are on the lookout.”

Lee straightened. “Paid by whom?”

“Don't be naïve, Starfinder.” He reached over and took a piece of bread. “The ambassador from Angrääl started making inquiries months ago.”

“Ambassador?” Lee exclaimed. “In Baltria?”

“I'm afraid so,” said Lanson. “He and his attendants have set up residence inside the governor’s mansion.”

Lee suddenly felt exposed. “The King allowed that?”

“Allowed?” laughed Lanson. “He gave it to him.”

“And the governor?” Lee asked.

“He moved into his own private home, claiming it was his decision.” He bit off a piece of bread. “I personally think the man is no longer running the city in any capacity.”

“Why would you think that?” asked Lee.

Lanson shrugged. “Because crime is down, and in spite of the empty docks, profits have never been better. Governor Greenly is a moron. He couldn't even manage the city in good times. If he wasn't the King's nephew, he would never have been appointed in the first place. No, Angrääl is in charge around here. They're pumping gold on top of gold into the economy.”

Lee was appalled. “So you want them here?”

Lanson nodded indifferently. “Sure. They're good for the city. So long as they don't send an army our way, I don't mind.” He could see Lee's apprehension. “Don't worry. I'm not one of the faithful. Those people are lunatics.”

“The faithful?” said Lee. “What in the name of Dantenos are the faithful?”

Lanson cocked his head. “You have been gone a long time, old friend. The faithful follow The Reborn King of Angrääl. They claim he's the reincarnation of King Rätsterfel, and spend most of their time causing trouble for the temples. Lately it's become fashionable to become one of them if you're nobility. But if you ask me, it's a bunch of hogwash. None of them really believe it. They just like the idea of their purses getting ever fatter.”

“What are the temples doing to stop them?” asked Lee.

“What can they do?” Lanson replied. “King Talminian doesn't seem to care what the faithful do, just so long as the gold keeps flowing into his coffers. As for me - I have found it wise to stay out of it.”

“Talminian has always been a fool,” Lee grumbled. “And weak.”

“Dangerous words,” said Lanson. “But as you're already in danger, I suppose it doesn't matter. Speaking of which...”

He reached in his pocket, pulled out a small key, and pushed it across the table. “I assume you'll not heed my words and leave the city at once. So, in that case, you remember my rental house?”

Lee nodded.

“It's vacant,” continued Lanson. “I want you to hole up there until your business here is finished. Which brings me to the next question. What is it you need me to do?”

“I need you to tell me when Millet arrives in Baltria,” he answered. “And if I'm found out, give me warning.”

“You didn't drag poor Millet into your adventures again, did you?” he scolded. “But I already know the answer to that, don't I? Even if you tried to leave him behind, he wouldn't let you.”

Both men burst into laughter. Just then the server arrived with Lee's meal. Lanson stood from the table. “I must leave you to eat alone I’m afraid. I'll make inquiries regarding Millet. But please, stay out of sight. The gods only know what will happen if you're discovered.”

Lee smiled warmly. “I'll be careful, my friend.”

Lanson twisted his mouth and shook his head. “I doubt that very much. But at least I can say that I warned you.”

Lee watched as Lanson turned and walked away. Alone, he felt even more exposed. He ate quickly and headed back to the inn. His paranoia grew with each step. He knew he couldn't leave the city until Millet and Jacob arrived, but should the servants of the Dark One realize his presence, that could get them all killed. He briefly considered sending Dina away, but dismissed the idea. If they were aware of him, they would most likely be aware of her as well. She would need his protection.

When he arrived at the inn, Dina was still in her room sleeping. Lee regretted waking her, but considering what Lanson had told him, he felt he had no choice. She came to the door, yawning and wrapped in a blanket.

“Get your things together and meet me in the common room,” Lee ordered.

Before Dina could ask questions, Lee moved off down the hall to his own room and began packing his gear. Twenty minutes later they were both in the common room. Lee had the horses brought from the stables and walked with Dina to the door.

“What's going on, Lee?” she asked.

He recounted his conversation with Lanson as they secured their gear onto their mounts. “At least your friend didn't betray you,” said Dina.

Lee nodded. “He's a good man. But I still hate that he goes along with what's happening here.”

Dina mounted her horse. “What would you have him do? Besides, from what you said, Angrääl isn't acting aggressively. He has no reason to suspect their true intentions.”

“That's just it,” Lee countered. “They're not a bunch of uneducated fools. They know what's going on. Some even welcome it. So long as they stay rich, they'll go along with anything.”

“But you thought that might be the case,” said Dina. “Why are you so angry?”

“I'm angry because we have been lazy,” said Lee. “We've allowed The Dark One to spread his lies unchallenged. Now, who knows if he can be dislodged? He'll conquer the world one city at a time before even one battle is fought.”

“What can we do?”

“We can play his game better. The moment I've secured Millet and my son, Valshara must be told what is happening here. In fact, when you visit the temples tonight, I'll have you send a message to Althetas.”

They wound their way through the streets to Lanson's rental house. Lee remembered Lanson using it to rendezvous with his mistresses in years past. The man had had a bit of a wild side and a reputation with the ladies. But it seemed his friend must have settled down these days if he was now renting the house out. It was a modest, single story dwelling typical of the merchant class. Its solid brick walls and tan tile roof were well built and suited for the climate. The yard was small but well kept, and a wrought iron fence surrounded the property.

Lee led them to the rear of the house and put the horses in a small stable at the back. They entered through the back door and he set about lighting lamps. The interior was well decorated and deceptively spacious. The main living room was equipped with a small fireplace, a plush suede couch, and two matching chairs. With the local hot climate usually preventing any need for a fire, the fireplace was more for decoration than anything else. Elsewhere in the house, the three bedrooms were each big enough to accommodate a married couple comfortably, and the beds had thick, goose down mattresses.

There was a bathing room that had running water and a tub heated by coals placed in a compartment beneath its base. Lee and Dina each picked a bedroom and washed and changed in turn. Once dressed, they relaxed in the living room.

“I'll go out later for food and drink,” said Lee. “There's an eatery a few blocks from here that serves wonderful mince pies.”

Dina smiled, trying to hide her apprehension. “I should go with you,” she said. “I don't think I like the idea of either of us venturing out alone.”

Lee nodded. “I'll walk you to the temple and we'll pick something up on the way back.”

There was a knock at the door. Lee drew his dagger and peered out of the window. Lanson stood uneasily outside. Lee opened and let him in.

“I see you're prepared,” said Lanson, glancing at the dagger. “Good.”

“Has something happened?” asked Lee.

Lanson eyed Dina. “Such matters can wait until after we've made proper introductions.” Dina smiled and got to her feet.

“Lanson,” said Lee. “This is my dear friend Celandine....”

He paused and looked at Dina, embarrassed. “I'm afraid I don't know your last name.”

“Such things have not come up,” Dina replied. “Lord Lanson Brimm I presume.” She curtsied, elegantly. “I am Celandine Selborne.”

Lanson took her hand and kissed it lightly. “My dear, it is an honor.” He tilted his head. “Do I detect a Baltrian accent?”

“I lived here in my youth,” she said. “That is to say, when I was a little girl.”

“Indeed,” said Lanson. “Well, our city has certainly missed your beauty.”

Lee slapped him on the shoulder. “And here I was thinking that you've settled down.”

“Me?” Lanson smiled mischievously. “Never.” He made his way to the couch and sat down while Lee and Dina took the chairs. “I thought you might want to know that I was told to be on the lookout for you just after we parted company.”

“By whom?” asked Lee, leaning forward.

“One of those blasted faithful,” he replied. “I think they must know you're in the city. And it's no secret that we are friends.”

“Isn't it dangerous for you to come here?” asked Dina.

Lanson smiled. “It will be after today. I had only walked a few blocks from the cafe before they stopped me. I'm afraid I can't risk returning here until you've left Baltria.”

“Did anyone see us together?” asked Lee.

“I don't think so,” said Lanson. “I followed them after they spoke to me, and they gave me no indication that they knew anything. They spoke to three other nobles, then went to the governor’s mansion.” He held up his hand. “And before you ask, I wasn't followed.”

“We should leave,” said Dina. “I wouldn't want to put you in danger.”

“My dear,” Lanson replied. “I may not be the hero that Lee is. But I do not abandon a friend - especially one who has saved my life. Besides, no one will think to look here, even if they suspect me of helping you. As far as anyone knows, this house is still occupied. The last tenants only moved away a week ago.” His face was grim with resolve. “I'm having food and supplies brought for you within the hour.”

“We had planned to visit the temples,” said Dina.

“Don't,” Lanson objected. “All the temples are being watched by the faithful. They like to know who comes and goes. There's no way for you to enter unnoticed.”

Dina crossed her arms in disappointment.

“How will you communicate with us?” asked Lee.

“Do you remember my servant Jansi?”

Lee nodded.

“He'll bring you any word of Millet.” Lanson stood up. “I wish I could say I'll see you soon but...”

Lee and Dina got to their feet. Lee embraced Lanson tightly. “Thank you,” he said, smiling. “I think we're even now.”

Lanson laughed and turned to Dina. “My dear, I only wish I could behold your loveliness once more - but alas.”

Dina kissed Lanson's cheek. “Thank you for your kindness.”

Lanson put his hand over his heart and walked to the door. He turned just before he crossed the threshold. “I know you were upset by my attitude regarding Angrääl. But I think that attitude is changing.” He bowed and left.

Soon after his departure, a young boy showed up with a wagonload of food, wine, and other essentials. Dina and Lee busied themselves putting things away, then prepared the evening meal. Dina tried to convince Lee they should attempt to get into the temples, despite Lanson's warning, but Lee wouldn't allow it.

That night Lee slept in one of the chairs in the living room, his sword across his lap.

Chapter 17

Millet and Jacob disembarked from the river craft. The heat in Baltria was causing no small amount of discomfort, and both were sweating profusely.

“I'll never understand how people live in this wretched heat,” said Jacob.

Millet had never been around anyone so contrary and bad tempered in his life. Even though he’d tried to be understanding over the boy's situation – that his mother was in captivity, and that his entire life had been stripped away from him - Millet still couldn't help but be irritated by his behavior. On more than one occasion he marveled at how this ill-mannered youth could possibly be the son of Lee Nal’Thain.

“You had better be grateful that they do,” remarked Millet. “Most trade goods in Hazrah arrive through here. Without Baltria and its port, most of the world would starve.”

“Hazrah is starving,” snapped Jacob.

Just for once, Millet felt as Jacob did. The thought of Hazrah’s people suffering caused anger to swell inside him. He quickly changed the subject. “You said you have friends here?”

“Yes,” Jacob replied. “But I'll need to visit them alone. They do not enjoy meeting new people.”

“I assure you that I can fit in,” said Millet. He didn't like the idea of Jacob venturing into Baltria alone. “I know this city very well. I think you'd be better off...”

“I said I'm going alone,” he growled. “Besides, don't you need to find my father?” The word ‘father’ dripped with hatred.

“Your father will find us,” said Millet. “You can count on that.”

“If you say so.” Jacob shrugged, trying to appear indifferent. “I don't care. You wait for him, and I'll do what I have to do.”

Millet led them through the city into the tavern district, and then directly to the Green Barnacle Inn. He knew that Lee had stayed at the Green Barnacle for a month when they’d first come to Baltria many years ago, and he would often return there to see the jugglers or musicians and relax. Lee had always enjoyed less sophisticated company. Millet also considered the Malt and Mane, another of Lee's old haunts, but Millet had never cared much for the place. If Lee were staying there instead, he would know to look out for them at the Green Barnacle too.

Millet was carrying a considerable amount of money on him. He had plenty left over from the trip, and more still from the sale of their horses. His clothes were dirty and worn from travel, so he decided to spend out on some new attire after they had checked in. He smiled, thinking of the many trips and hardships he had endured in his travels with Lee, and, despite the boy’s ill temper, he was pleased to have had this experience with his son.

Millet and Jacob stowed their belongings in their rooms, and then took time to eat a modest meal of roast pork and wine. As they ate, Millet remembered the seafood stew at the Plank Walker's Cafe and began to regret filling his stomach. If Lee were already in Baltria, he would have made that place one of his first stops.

Once he was finished, Jacob stood from the table and moved toward the door. “When should I expect you to return?” asked Millet.

“When my business is done,” he shot back, without turning around. With that, he left.

Millet spent the next few hours wandering the city, buying the new set of clothes he had promised himself, plus a few other odds and ends. Once finished, he had a messenger deliver his goods to the inn and headed off to the Malt and Mane.

As he sat listening to a bard spin a tale to the music of a lute, he scanned the common room for signs of Lee. Disappointingly, there were none. He knew there was the possibility that he had arrived ahead of his master; the river was swift and the vessel had only made two stops before arriving in Baltria, and those had only been for a brief time to offload a small portion of their cargo and take on fresh water.

Just as he was about to give up and head back, the barmaid handed him a folded slip of parchment. He glanced around, but couldn't see anything out of the ordinary. Slowly he opened the paper. Meet me for the best seafood stew you've ever tasted. There was no signature.

Millet left the inn and made his way to The Plank Walker’s Café. Once there, he scanned the dining area for a familiar face but could see none. He took a table near to the edge of the deck so that he could see people as they approached and ordered a bowl of seafood stew.

After a few minutes had passed by, a tall, slender man with dark, shoulder-length curls that fell about his shoulders approached Millet’s table. His sharp, angular features and soft, white cotton outfit spoke of wealth and breeding. A small dagger sheathed in a jeweled scabbard hung from his belt, and he was carrying a bottle of wine and two glasses.

“Millet, I presume,” said the man. His voice was deep and masculine, yet smooth and pleasing. “May I join you?”

Millet tensed but held out his hand, motioning for him to sit. “And you are?”

“You may call me Yanti,” he replied, bowing his head. “It was I who sent you the note at the Malt and Mane.”

“How do you know me?” Millet shifted in his seat.

Yanti smiled “My good man. I'm the enemy, so to speak.”

Millet started to rise.

“Don't fret,” said Yanti. “You are in no danger just yet. But that could change should you leave before I've had a conversation with you.”

Millet slowly sat back down. “What do you want?”

“From you, nothing,” said Yanti. “From Lord Starfinder, however - from him I want a great deal.”

“You waste your breath, Yanti,” said Millet. “I have no idea where he is. And even if I did, I would not tell you.”

Yanti covered his mouth, laughing quietly. “My good man. I would not presume to think you would betray your master. No. I only want to convey my deepest respect and admiration in the hope that we can come to an agreement.”

Millet's face hardened. “If you think Lee Starfinder will come to terms with you, or any servant of the Dark One, you're mistaken.”

“That may be,” said Yanti. “But I would have you deliver my message nonetheless. And to show you my goodwill, I will make no move against you, or his son - Jacob, I believe his name is.”

His final words sent a chill down Millet's spine. “If I were you, I would leave Lord Starfinder and his family alone.”

“I know how formidable Starfinder is,” Yanti responded, with a tinge of amusement. “But rest assured, I mean his family no harm. In fact, I wish to reunite them if only he can be reasonable.”

“Then deliver your message and be gone,” said Millet, his fear turning into anger.

Yanti laughed softly, unimpressed with Millet's display. “Simply tell him that, should he decide that his wife and son are more important to him than a race of gods that have long since abandoned this world, he can leave this conflict behind. We promise to allow him and his family to live in peace. They can even return to his home in Hazrah, if that's what he would like. In fact, we can ensure that his remaining years are quite rewarding.”

“Is that all?” asked Millet.

“One more thing,” Yanti continued. “Should he consider an unwise course, remind him that his wife resides in the court of the Reborn King.”

“I will see to it that he receives your message,” said Millet. He tossed a couple of coppers on the table and rose to his feet. “You'll pardon me. I've lost my appetite.”

Yanti smiled and nodded. “It was a pleasure.”

Millet's face was stone as he turned and headed back toward the inn.

Yanti watched him disappear into the distance. He waved for the serving girl to bring more wine. As he waited for this to come, Salmitaya walked up and took a seat.

“Did it go as you hoped?” she asked.

“It went as I expected,” Yanti replied. “And I expect you to do your part as instructed, my love.”

“You can depend on me, My Lord,” she replied.

“Considering the dangers involved, you seem remarkably at ease. You aren't thinking about betrayal, are you?” His eyes darkened.

“I will do exactly as you have told me,” she said. “You have no need to worry about my loyalty to you, or my commitment to our cause.”

“That's good to hear. I would hate to think of you sharing the fate of Lord Starfinder.”

“What fate is that?” she asked.

Yanti flashed an angry look. “You know perfectly well not to ask such questions.”

Salmitaya lowered her eyes.

Chapter 18

Millet struggled not to break into a dead run. His conversation with Yanti unnerved him to the core. All of their attempts to go unnoticed had failed. It seemed that no matter where they went, The Dark One wasn't far behind. In fact, most of the time it was as if he were ahead of them - waiting.

He was hoping to find Jacob already back at the inn, but was disappointed to find that the boy had not yet returned. Millet decided there was nothing he could do but hope Lee would contact him soon. He sat in the common room, staring at the door, waiting for Jacob's return. If this Yanti fellow was as smart as he suspected, he was unlikely to make a move on Jacob until he’d first of all found Lee. And so far, it seemed as if he hadn't managed to do this. Or, if Yanti had, he obviously didn't want Millet to know about it. But Millet couldn't think of any reason at all why Yanti would bother pretending such a thing in view of the message he was asking him to deliver.

The door opened and Millet straightened, hoping to see Jacob. Instead, he saw another familiar face. It was Jansi, long time servant of Lord Lanson Brimm. Jansi scanned the room until he spotted Millet, then strode over to the table.

Jansi was of medium build and average height, with pale skin and short cropped gray hair. He wore a light green cotton shirt and trousers. Millet noticed how much he had aged since he had last seen him. He stood up, smiling, and embraced the man warmly.

“It is certainly good to see you, Jansi.”

“And you, Millet,” Jansi replied. “Though I wish it were in more pleasant circumstances.”

“Then you know what I'm doing in Baltria?” asked Millet, trying to hide his anxiety.

“My Lord filled me in,” he said. “At least to the extent I need to know. He wants you informed that Lord Starfinder is in Baltria. He and a young woman named Celandine are staying at his property near the merchant district.”

Millet nodded. He was familiar with the house. “I require your help. My presence is known to our enemies. I was approached by an agent of Angrääl earlier, and they know where and who I am.”

Jansi's eyes widened. “Do they know where Lord Starfinder is?” he asked.

“No,” replied Millet. “As least he didn't seem to. He asked me to give him a message when I find him.”

“Good.” Jansi sighed. “It would not do for Lord Lanson to get mixed up with those people.”

Millet looked confused. “What people?”

Jansi lowered his voice. “The ones from Angrääl. They're everywhere these days - you didn't know?”

Millet shook his head. “I have only just arrived in the city.”

“I see.” He took a deep breath and proceeded to inform Millet about the faithful and the Angrääl ambassador, along with recent events regarding the assaults on the temples.

Millet was dumbfounded. “You must take me to Lord Starfinder. But I must get there without being seen.”

“I have a carriage waiting just outside,” said Jansi. “If you leave through the kitchen you can get to it through the alley. I'll meet you there.”

Millet nodded and got to his feet. “I'll be there in a moment.”

As soon as Jansi had departed, he made his way to the kitchen. He slipped the innkeeper a gold coin and instructed him to tell anyone who might ask that he was feeling unwell and had retired to his room. Also, to tell Jacob on his return to stay there and wait for him.

He was relieved to find no one at the rear entrance as he made his way around the back of the inn, and then along the alleyway. He could see the carriage. Jansi was in the driver’s seat and the door was open. Millet raced inside and slammed the door shut.

Jansi expertly navigated the streets until they reached their destination. The sun was sinking over the horizon when Millet looked out of the windows for signs of pursuit. To his great relief only a few people were about, and none seemed to be taking any notice of them. He jumped from the carriage and moved rapidly to the front entrance.

Lee opened the door just as Millet was about to knock. He pulled him inside. Jansi quickly followed.

Lee embraced Millet so tightly he could hardly breathe. “It’s so good to see you, my old friend.”

“It's good to see you too, My Lord,” Millet grunted through the embrace.

Lee released him and together they walked to the living room. Dina awaited them on the couch, a cup of wine in her hand. She was wearing her wool traveling clothes. When she saw Millet she sprang from her seat and flung her arms around him.

“I knew you'd make it,” she said.

“Indeed,” said Millet, smiling. “And I'm pleased your trip was uneventful.”

“We moved too quickly to have any adventures.” Dina laughed. “People scarcely knew we had passed.”

Millet's face turned grave. “They know now, I'm afraid.”

“Sit,” said Lee. “We can tell our tales later. First, I must know where my son is.”

Millet and Dina took their seats, Millet just beside Lee. Jansi excused himself and went outside to the carriage.

“Your son is safe,” said Millet. “By now he's probably back at the inn. But now that I've found you, we should leave the city immediately.” He recounted the conversation with Yanti.

Lee lowered his head, deep in thought. “I want you to take Jacob to Dantary in the eastern desert,” he said finally. “He'll be safe there.”

“That might be a problem, My Lord,” replied Millet. “Why is that?” asked Lee.

Millet took a deep breath before he spoke. “Your son is a bit...stubborn. I don't think you will be able to talk him into leaving. He's quite determined to rescue his mother.”

Lee nodded with understanding. His suppositions about his wife’s temporary safety and the boy’s intentions had both been proved correct. And he knew full well what Millet meant by Jacob being stubborn.

“Then I'll have to convince him,” he said. “I'm sure he holds no love for me, but I'll not have him die needlessly.”

Lee got to his feet. “If this Yanti person knows you're here, he may very well know where I am too. If so, it's likely he's waiting until we're all it the same place at the same time before striking.” He walked to the window and peered out.

“If that's the case,” said Dina. “We should split up and leave the city in different directions.”

Lee shook his head. “I'll not let any of you out of my sight.” There was no hint of compromise in his tone. His hand slid to the hilt of his sword, his knuckles white. “If the Dark One thinks I'll bend to his will, then he's a bigger fool than I thought. And as for this Yanti - if he's stupid enough to hinder us, I'll make him regret the day he was born.”

“What about these people who call themselves the faithful?” asked Millet. “Even you cannot fight a hundred men at once.”

“We'll move with speed,” said Lee. “We won't give them a chance to do anything about it. It takes time to organize enough men to stop the likes of me, and if Yanti has the same intelligence as Harlando, then he'll know what I am.”

“But what if he's like you,” said Dina. “You know, a half-man.”

Lee flashed an evil grin. “Then I'll kill him first and slaughter his followers last. It's more than my blood that makes me formidable. I have trained under the greatest warriors the world has ever known. Unless he has done likewise, it is he that should fear me.”

“Still, it may not be so easy to convince Jacob to leave Baltria,” said Millet. “His dislike for you is quite strong. I think we should overcome that obstacle first, don't you?”

“No doubt,” Lee agreed. “Go back to the inn and bring him here. If you're not back within an hour, I'll know something is wrong.”

“You don't mean to send Millet out alone, do you?” Dina protested.

“If they wanted to harm Millet, they would have already done so,” said Lee. “No. It's me they want.” He turned to Millet. “Still, be careful all the same.”

Millet nodded and left. The streets were busy and it took Jansi nearly twenty minutes to get back to the inn. Millet didn't bother trying hiding his presence. If they see me, they see me, he thought. As soon as he was inside he spotted Jacob sitting at a long table. The boy was playing dice with two other patrons and draining a large jug of wine. Millet walked straight up to him and pulled him by the arm.

“What do you think you're doing?” Jacob protested.

“We need to leave,” said Millet as quietly as he could manage. “Now.”

Jacob pulled himself free from Millet's grasp. “Let me go, old man,” he bellowed. “I've only just arrived. And I've yet to have my fill.”

Millet leaned down and whispered into the boy's ear. “You will have your fill when agents from Angrääl get here. Now get up and gather your things.”

Jacob glared at Millet, but eventually relented. “I’m sorry, fellows,” he announced. “I must be off.” Jeers and boos sounded as he rose to his feet and followed Millet to their rooms.

“There's a carriage out front,” said Millet when they stood at Jacob's door. “Meet me there.”

“Wait,” said Jacob, catching Millet's wrist. “Where are we going?”

Millet twisted himself loose and simply said, “Where it is safe.” He turned and entered his own room.

Minutes later, he waited at the carriage. Jacob followed shortly after carrying his gear and looking none too happy. Millet opened the door and the boy entered, tossing his pack carelessly aside.

“Now tell me what's going on,” Jacob demanded once they were underway.

Millet explained his encounter with Yanti, but said nothing of the message the man wanted passing on to Lee.

Jacob's face twisted. “I take it you plan for us to run like cowards.”

Millet remained silent. He didn't want to mention Lee until they arrived at Lanson's house.

“Well?” pressed Jacob. “Is that it, or not?” He sniffed with disgust. “I'm not running. I'm not finished with my business, so you should let me out right here.”

Millet sighed. “If you're worried that your mother will be left in the hands of the Dark One, let me assure you, she will not be.”

“What? Are you going to rescue her? You joke, of course.”

Realization then washed over Jacob’s face. “Oh I see now. My father - that's where we're going. You’ve found him and thought to bring me to him without my knowledge. And I suppose he intends to save her.”

Millet's mouth tightened. “He has not told me what he is planning. But I would wager that is part of his plan.”

“Don't worry, old man.” Jacob laughed. “I'll speak to the dog. But don't think that this will change anything.”

“I wouldn't presume,” Millet muttered.

Lee was waiting at the door when the carriage arrived. Millet could see the nervousness in Lee’s posture as he shifted uncharacteristically from side to side.

Jacob leaped from the carriage first, striding straight past his father and into the house without so much as a word. Millet shrugged at Lee and helped Jansi with the gear. Lee went inside and found that Jacob had already taken a seat in the living room. Dina was on the couch, her eyes moving from Lee to Jacob. Lee dragged the other chair directly in front of the boy and sat down. Millet put the packs and other gear near to the door and asked Jansi to wait outside.

“So you're Lee Nal’Thain,” said Jacob. “I hope you're not expecting a warm reunion.”

Lee rubbed his hands together. “I know you must not think much of me,” he began.

“I don't think about you at all father,” said Jacob, anger seeping into his voice. “As far as I'm concerned I have no reason to think anything - or feel anything either.”

Lee lowered his eyes. “I truly am sorry for what I had to do. But please understand, it had to be this way. I was trying to protect you and your mother.”

“Good job,” he spat. “I've been forced to leave my home, and my mother is imprisoned in Angrääl. We're so lucky you were watching out for us.”

“You may not believe this, son,” said Lee. “But if I had stayed, things would have been much worse. The Dark Knight would already have what he wants, and he’d have no further need to keep you or your mother alive.”

“And just what does he want?” Jacob leaned back in his chair. “What is it that is more important than your family? I would really like to know.”

“I can't tell you,” Lee replied. “At least, not yet. But know that it was the only thing that could force me to make such a choice. And know that you and your mother never left my thoughts - not for a minute.”

Jacob's mouth tightened. “I see. You abandon your family, start a new life, and when I ask you why, you can't tell me? I listened to my mother cry herself to sleep for years, and you can't tell me why? I watched as my home was invaded and my people murdered, and you can't tell me why?”

“I'm sorry,” said Lee. “I will tell you soon. I promise.”

“Keep your promises,” he growled. “I don't need them - or you.” He moved to get up, but Lee caught his shoulder.

“You do need me,” said Lee sternly. “That is, if you expect to free your mother.”

Jacob tried to free himself from Lee's grasp, but Lee held him firmly. “I know you think you can find a way to do this alone,” Lee continued. “But you can't.”

Jacob ceased resisting and reluctantly sat back down. “And you can? Just because you have the blood of Saraf coursing through your veins, you think you can take on the armies of Angrääl by yourself? At least I did not inherit your stupidity.”

“You have a plan then?” Lee asked.

Jacob hesitated. “No. But I'm forming one. I have friends in the city, and I've already contacted some of them.”

“Then you've almost certainly let the agents of Angrääl know that you plan to save your mother,” said Lee. “They have eyes and ears everywhere in Baltria. Even among the nobility.”

“Then what do you think you can do?” asked Jacob.

“First, I can keep you safe. I want to you go with Millet to the oasis of Dantary.”

This time Lee was unable to stop Jacob from rising. “You don't tell me what to do,” his son shouted. “I'll not be shipped off to the desert.”

Lee heaved a sigh. “I need to know that you're safe if I'm to save your mother. As long as you're in danger, I can't focus on what needs to be done. I must protect you first.”

“It's too late to start trying to protect me now,” said Jacob. “And forgive me if I don't trust that you'll follow through with anything you promise. No. I think I'll do things my own way.”

“Listen to me,” said Lee. His tone was dark and intimidating. “If you ever want to see your mother alive again, you'll forget your hatred for me and do as I tell you.”

Jacob opened his mouth to speak, but no words came.

“If I may, My Lord,” interjected Millet. Lee nodded his approval. “Jacob, let me take you to Dantary. I promise that I will reveal everything once we get there. I have been with your father through it all. There is nothing he could tell you that I don't already know.”

“And if I fail,” Lee added. “Then you are free to do as you will.”

Jacob glared at Lee, then at Millet. “I'll do as you ask. But know that if you fail, I will kill you.”

“If I fail,” Lee replied. “I will be dead already.” He held out his hand, but Jacob turned his back.

“I need to check my gear,” Jacob said, and walked toward the front door.

Millet placed his hand on Lee's shoulder. “I'll watch over him. I swear it.”

Lee bowed his head. “I don't blame him for hating me. I hate myself for leaving him.”

“You did what you had to do,” said Millet. “You did not choose this.”

Lee pretended not to hear. “Do you have mounts?” he asked.

“No, my lord,” Millet replied. “We sold them.”

Lee reached in his pouch, retrieved several gold coins, and handed them to Millet. “Have Jansi purchase horses and saddles for you and Jacob.”

He began to walk toward his room. “We leave as soon as he returns.”

Chapter 19

Maybell had inconspicuously made ready their gear for a quick getaway - they would be in Farmington in less than an hour. Meanwhile, she was doing her best to remain calm. She had spoken to Malstisos several times about their exact route and timetable, but she knew how dangerous the two other elves could be. One mistake might cost both of them their lives. Right now, Malstisos was out scouting the surrounding area with Grentos and Vadnaltis. Maybell feared that the seeker elves would suspect that they were on to them, but so far they had shown no indication of knowing this.

She was riding in a wagon with the family of a silver merchant from Althetas. Both her and Malstisos' horses had been tied to the rear. She passed the time by playing a card game with the merchant’s wife, Lilly, and their two children - Anna, who was six years old, and Beth, who had just turned eight.

They were among her favorite people in the caravan. Lilly was kind and cheerful, and in spite of a life spent traveling and raising two children, she was always well groomed. Maybell enjoyed spending time in their tent when they camped. Lilly kept it much like a home. She even took the time to display personal keepsakes.

“It helps me not to miss Althetas so much,” Lilly had explained. “And the children are reminded that there is a home waiting for them.”

Her husband, Gaylan, though not as cheerful as Lilly, was a good and decent man. Tall and thin, with narrow eyes and wind-burned skin, he was not particularly handsome, yet Maybell could see why Lilly, who was very fetching, loved him dearly. He was a man who would always do his best to make his family comfortable. Though reasonably well off, he was not exactly rich, but still he provided the best that money could buy when it came to comforts. They had goose down mattresses and cotton sheets to sleep on, though he admitted these were a burden to carry along, and their clothes were of the finest quality. When it was time for meals, Gaylan wouldn't touch a bite until Lilly had sat down to join him. Clearly, he loved her very much.

Before long, Malstisos returned and joined Maybell in the wagon. The children cheered with glee when they saw him. They loved the elf, and couldn't get enough of touching his ears. One of the favorite activities for all the children in the caravan had become listening to Malstisos telling stories at bedtime. In fact, on the nights when there were no stories, you could hear the wail of crying children throughout the camp.

“Will you join us, master elf?” asked Lilly. “I am afraid Anna keeps getting all the best cards.”

Malstisos smiled. “No. I'm afraid I cannot. We will be stopping in a matter of minutes, and Maybell and I must venture into town to resupply.”

“Nonsense,” said Lilly. “My husband is going into town. He can pick up whatever you need.”

“I’m afraid I must go myself,” said Malstisos. “I often don't know what I need until I see it.”

“Yes,” said Maybell. “And there is a matter I must attend to personally.”

Lilly frowned. “Very well. But you must join us tonight for supper.”

Maybell reached over and hugged the woman then the children in turn. “If we are back in time, we will.” She hated misleading them.

Soon the caravan halted and began to make camp. After setting up their tents, Maybell and Malstisos detached their horses from the wagon and headed in the direction of Farmington. They hadn't traveled even half a mile when they heard a voice calling out to them from behind.

“Wait” It was Grentos. Vadnaltis was just behind him. Both carried their long knives at their side and had bows slung across their backs.

“I was afraid we'd miss you,” said Grentos.

“I wasn't aware you intended to go to town,” said Malstisos, trying not to sound alarmed.

“We noticed you were leaving and thought we'd keep you company,” said Grentos.

“I thank you,” said Maybell. “But our day will be tedious and long. I would not want you to waste your time on such trivialities.”

“You are kind,” said Grentos. “But we don't mind.” He turned to Vadnaltis. “Do we?” Vadnaltis did not reply. His face was expressionless, his eyes fixed on the road ahead.

“You carry a bow, I see,” Malstisos remarked.

“Yes,” Grentos replied. “We thought we'd do a bit of hunting later. I'd ask you to join us, but as you have no bow... ”

“That's quite alright,” said Malstisos. “The game here is small and sparse, and I have no need for food or clothing. Besides, such a hunt requires great skill.”

Maybell noticed a sudden change in the elves’ walk and movements.

“I see,” muttered Grentos. “Then we were correct.”

“About what?” asked Maybell.

“We suspected you had found us out, Malstisos,” Grentos continued. “But we couldn't be certain. Seekers are not as adept at reading people as an elf such as you. Luckily, those dull humans believe whatever they are told.”

“What is your intent?” asked Malstisos. If he was afraid, it did not show.

“That has been a thing much debated between Vadnaltis and me,” Grentos replied. “I would not have you escape to the temples.” He glanced over at Maybell. “I can only assume that is what you were planning. Nor can I simply kill you. That would not sit well with Vadnaltis.”

“What's your solution?” asked Malstisos.

“You will face my challenge,” Grentos answered, sounding pleased with himself.

Malstisos reigned in his horse. “You cannot be serious.”

Grentos backed away a few steps. “I am. Do you accept?”

Malstisos slid from the saddle but made no move to draw his weapon. “You have no right to do this.”

“Don't I?” scoffed Grentos. “I think I have every right to call out a traitor.”

“What's going on here?” Maybell demanded. “What is this challenge?”

“If I were a seeker and had broken their code, or if I had refused judgment of the elders,” Malstisos explained, “Grentos would have the right to challenge me to single combat. But as neither is the case, he has decided to take matters into his own hands.”

Vadnaltis placed his hand on Grentos' shoulder. “He is right, brother. You cannot do this. Call him to face judgment instead. You have that right.”

“He will not honor it,” Grentos countered. “He's just like the rest of our kin who have taken up with the humans.”

“Perhaps,” said Vadnaltis. “But then he shows his dishonor, and can be put to death. As it is, you have no authority. The elders have not given any such edict, and our laws forbid it.”

“We have already been through this,” Grentos let out, his frustration clearly showing. “The elders have already ordered the death of a traitor without judgment. What is the difference?”

“They were wrong to do so,” said Vadnaltis. “And the difference is, we are from the steppes, and we hold to the laws that have guided our people for thousands of years. Would you behave as the rebels and throw away the laws because they are inconvenient?”

Grentos shook off Vadnaltis' hand and turned his back. “We've been over this. I will not be swayed.”

“And if Malstisos refuses the challenge?” he asked. “What then?”

“Then not only will he die,” Grentos replied darkly. “But his human pet will die with him. As it stands, I'm willing to let her go in peace.”

Sadness washed over Vadnaltis' face. “I will ask you, one more time, to reconsider.”

“I will not,” Grentos replied. He spun around to face Malstisos. “Do you accept or not?”

Malstisos opened his mouth to answer, but Vadnaltis stepped in front of him.

“I challenge you, brother,” said Vadnaltis. His eyes were full of tears. “Do you accept?”

“What is this?” Grentos cried. “You cannot do this.”

“I ask again,” he pressed. “Do you accept?”

“I...” Grentos stammered. “I...I do.”

The two elves stepped away from the horses and took opposite positions on the road. Maybell moved close to Malstisos and grabbed his arm. “What is going on?” she whispered.

Malstisos bowed his head. “A tragedy,” he said. “And an act of pure honor.”

The two elves put down their bows and quivers, and each drew their long knives. “Why?” asked Grentos. “Why do you do this?”

“Because I love you too much to see you live in dishonor,” Vadnaltis replied. “Should you strike me down, it is unlikely you will be strong enough to defeat Malstisos after, even if he is not a seeker. And as you well know, the challenge made cannot be withdrawn.”

“Then I hope I die by your hand, brother.”

Grentos charged.

Vadnaltis stepped aside, narrowly avoiding Grentos' initial onslaught. For several minutes, the battle then raged. Time and again they traded blows, each unable to gain an advantage over the other.

Eventually, it was Grentos who struck first as his blade cut deep into Vadnaltis' left thigh. Blood poured from the wound, soaking the elf's leather trousers. Any human would have collapsed in agony, but Vadnaltis showed no signs of weakening. He spun around and brought his blade across the right shoulder of Grentos. Grentos staggered forward but quickly regained his balance. Both elves stepped back for a moment, blood dripping from their blades.

Grentos felt the wound on his shoulder and smiled sorrowfully. Tears streamed down the face of Vadnaltis.

“Deep enough,” said Grentos looking at the blood on his hand. “You have killed me. I beg you - finish it.” He dropped his weapon and fell to his knees.

Vadnaltis slowly approached his comrade and stood over him. “I will join you soon enough, brother,” he said, placing his hand on top of Grentos' head and muttering a prayer. “I send you to the Creator.” With that, he plunged his knife through Grentos' heart. The elf gasped, then crumpled over onto his side.

Maybell was weeping uncontrollably. Her thoughts went to the death of Berathis.

Vadnaltis pulled his knife free and cleaned it on his shirt. “Malstisos of the Finsoulos Clan.” he said without looking up, “I call you to judgment for crimes against our people.”

Malstisos took a step forward but did not approach Vadnaltis. “I am bound to see this woman to safety,” he replied. “But upon the fulfillment of that duty, I will face judgment.”

“Then go in peace,” he said. “I would perform the rites alone.”

Malstisos bowed low and motioned for Maybell to mount her horse. They urged their steeds on in the direction of town in silence. Once they were a few hundred yards away, Malstisos began to weep. Maybell rode in silence, tears stinging her eyes also. They halted just before they got to town.

“I know you don't understand what just happened,” said Malstisos softly.

“I think I do,” Maybell replied. “At least part of it. What I don't understand is why Grentos allowed himself to be killed.”

“He was dead either way,” answered Malstisos. “The fight would have continued for some time, and Grentos was losing too much blood. Even if he were victorious, he would have been so weak that he could not have challenged me successfully. He chose to die by his brother’s hand, instead.”

“Seekers and their ways are beyond my understanding,” said Maybell. “I could never kill a sister - not even that devil Salmitaya.”

“Yes,” said Malstisos. “But they were more than just seekers. They were brothers.”

“You don't mean...” she gasped.

Malstisos nodded slowly. “I do. They were brothers by birth.”

“How do you know?” She reeled at the thought.

“He is performing the burial rites alone,” he replied. “That is only done under two circumstances. If there are no others there to help - or if it is blood kin, killed by your own hand.”

“Monstrous,” Maybell cried. “And you intend to let such people judge you?”

“They are my people!” he yelled, causing Maybell to recoil. He then took a breath and calmed himself. “I'm sorry. I shouldn't expect you to understand. Forgive me.”

“There is nothing to forgive,” she assured. “It's just...I can't...”

“I don't expect you to understand all of our ways,” Malstisos said. “But know that I am not afraid to face judgment. In fact, after today, I welcome it. I am tired of the division within my people. Perhaps this is the only way that we can heal.” He urged his horse forward.

They spent the rest of the day in utter silence. Maybell picked up a few supplies, but was in no mood to linger. The only thing she wanted to do was get back to her tent and sleep. On the trip home she could smell the funeral pyre burning somewhere in the forest and began to weep once again.

Vadnaltis did not return to the camp, not that Maybell or Malstisos expected him to. When asked, they said that the two elves had gone off hunting. When they didn't turn up the next day, a search party was sent out to look for them. However, after a time it became clear that they were gone. The camp divided their belongings, giving Malstisos a purse with coin matching the value of the gear and possessions. Malstisos promised to pass this on to them should he see them again.

But something had changed in him. Maybell could sense it, but did not know what it was. As the days passed, Malstisos became more and more withdrawn, sometimes disappearing for hours. When she tried to speak to him, he would just say that he was fine and only needed to think. But somehow, this didn't ring true. It was as if his spirit was broken. She prayed to the gods that she could help him to heal.

Chapter 20

Lee hurriedly packed their gear and helped Dina to prepare a quick meal of dried meat and fruit. Jacob refused to eat at the same table and took his meal into the living room. By the time Jansi returned, the party was ready to depart. The sun had been down for more than an hour, and only the faint lights from the windows of the nearby houses lit the streets. They said farewell to Jansi, mounted up, and made their way out of the city. The gloom of the streets pleased Lee. The darker the better. He had even planned their exit from Baltria to avoid sections that were lit by lamps.

They wound their way through the streets, Lee leading the way and keeping watch for signs that they were being followed. At first, there was nothing out of the ordinary. Then, just as they entered the main avenue leading to the city gates, they noticed a small group of five people wearing dark cloaks. They were carrying torches and standing to their right on the walkway. As they passed, the group fell in behind them.

“The faithful, I presume,” whispered Millet. “What should we do?” “Nothing,” Lee replied. “Do nothing until they make a move.”

As they continued, more began to emerge and follow. By the time the gates were in sight there were nearly thirty behind them.

“Be ready,” said Lee. “When I give the signal, we'll make a dash for the gate.”

A lone figure stepped in front of them, barring their path.

“Move aside,” Lee commanded.

“Peace, Lord Starfinder,” said the figure, in a distinctly feminine voice. She pushed back her hood, revealing a familiar face.

“Salmitaya,” Dina hissed. “I should have known you were behind this rabble.”

“You're wrong,” she replied. “I am just a servant - and a messenger.”

“Then deliver your message.” Lee gripped the hilt of his sword. “I have no patience for the likes of you.”

Salmitaya smiled, amused. “Very well. Reconsider your present course. Yanti knows you intend to refuse his offer. He also assumes you intend to attempt to free your wife. This will fail, and you and your family will die.” She took a step forward. “Yanti begs you to reconsider. You could live in peace and wealth. You need not sacrifice any more than you already have. He promises this, and more. You could even return to Hazrah as governor if you wish. You can go home and have the power to protect your people.”

“I already intend to protect my people, witch,” snarled Lee. “Perhaps I should begin by taking your head.” His sword sang as he pulled it from it sheath.

“That would be unwise,” said Salmitaya, pointing to the faithful grouped behind them.

Lee let out a hearty laugh. “You think that rabble frightens me?” He sprung from the saddle and turned to the mob. “Many of you know who I am. You know my reputation. So open your wretched ears and know this. I swear that should you attack me, or any of my friends, that I, Lee Starfinder, son of Saraf, God of the Sea, will kill every last one of you.” He took a long step toward the faithful. The mob stirred uneasily.

“I await your response,” called Salmitaya.

Lee spun around. “My response is this. Tell this Yanti creature that before this business is over, I will bathe my sword in his blood. If he wants to save his own life, he should run as fast as he can to Angrääl and return my wife to me at once. Then, he should pray to whatever he worships that I decide it is enough for me to spare him.”

Salmitaya bowed her head. “I will convey your message. He will be disappointed, I'm sure.” She snapped her fingers and the mob slowly dispersed. “Farewell Lee Starfinder. I'm afraid we will not meet again.” With that, she vanished into a nearby alley.

Lee tensed, awaiting an attack, but none came. Finally, he remounted his horse. “I guess they are choosing to strike later, rather than sooner.” He clicked his tongue to urge his horse forward.

They passed through the gates unhindered. Lee noticed the lack of city guards. So did Millet.

“The guards seem to have abandoned their posts,” Millet remarked.

“We just met the keepers of Baltria,” said Lee. “They've taken the city with a force more powerful than any army - fear.”

“Perhaps it's time we gave them a taste of their own medicine,” said Dina.

Lee turned and smiled maliciously. “I intend to.”

They headed north through the delta roads for several hours. Dozens of small bridges made good spots for an ambush, but they passed them all unmolested. From time to time they would see lights from torches several hundred yards ahead, but these always disappeared before they reached them.

“They seek to unnerve us,” said Millet.

“They only succeed in angering me.” Lee slowed his horse, allowing Jacob to catch up with him. “Are you alright?”

Jacob glanced over, unaffected by their situation. “I'm fine. Worry about yourself.”

Lee tightened his lips and spurred his horse forward to retake the lead position. Millet joined him.

“It will take time, My Lord,” said Millet. “He's had many years to form his opinions, but I know you can make him understand.”

“Thank you, my friend,” he responded. “I hope I live long enough to do so.”

“You've never failed before,” said Millet. “You will not fail now. You will put your family together again.”

“I have to tell you,” said Lee. “This Yanti person made a tempting offer. If I wasn't so certain that it was a lie, I might have taken him up on it.”

Millet nodded with understanding and dropped back to join the others. They rode until it was near dawn and Lee had found a decent place to rest and eat.

“We rest for three hours,” he said. He turned to Millet. “Tomorrow night, you'll take Jacob east. I'll take Dina with me as far as Sharpstone.”

“I really wish you would consult me about these things,” said Dina, scowling.

“I can't take you with me,” said Lee. “There is a good chance I'm marching to my death, and I won't be responsible for yours.”

“I know I can't go with you,” she said. “But I have no intention of being left in the middle of nowhere. I'm a cleric in the Order of Amon Dähl, and I have my own duties. I will go with you as far as Sharpstone, but from there I will return to the temple.”

Lee nodded. “You're right, of course. I apologize.”

Dina smiled, reached in her belt, and pulled out a small flask. “Here.” She tossed it to Lee.

Lee opened the flask and the air filled with the scent of plum brandy. “Ahhh!” He smiled, took a sip, and closed his eyes, savoring the sweet taste. He offered it to Millet who refused, and then called out to Jacob. As Jacob turned, Lee threw the flask to him. Without a word, Jacob took a sip and then threw it back.

“Manners, young man,” said Dina.

Jacob glared at her for a moment. “Thank you for sharing your flask - Dina.”

Lee kept watch as the others tried to catch a bit of sleep. Later, while they were preparing to leave, he walked up to Jacob and handed him a sealed letter.

“What's this?” the boy asked.

Lee pressed the letter into his hand. “Should anything happen to me, or should Millet somehow be unable to fulfill his promise to tell you everything, I have written it all down here. Please, just don't open it until after you've reached Dantary.”

Jacob paused, then stuffed the letter into his pocket. “I'll wait.”

They kept to the road north until reaching a fork. Here, they veered to the right, heading northeast. By mid-afternoon they neared the spot where they planned to split up. Up ahead, Lee spotted a figure standing in the road. He scanned the area for signs of an ambush, but could sense no one else nearby. When they were less than one hundred yards away, Millet sat up straight in his saddle.

“That's Yanti.”

Lee nodded. “I'll deal with him.”

Yanti was dressed in a black shirt and trousers; even his leather boots were black. His hair was tied back in a tight ponytail, and a long sword hung loosely at his side.

Lee halted his horse and slid from the saddle. “Yanti, I presume.” His tone was dark and vicious. “Unless you are here to tell me that you're on your way to retrieve my wife, you've signed your own death warrant.”

Yanti smiled, unconcerned. “Lord Starfinder. At last we meet. I've looked forward to this for quite some time.” He tapped the hilt of his sword with his index finger. “I am saddened that you have chosen to refuse my offer. Unwise.”

Lee slowly drew his weapon.

Yanti cocked his head. “I see you are in no mood for idle talk. Still, I would be remiss if I didn't give you one more chance to abandon this course of action.”

Lee turned to the others. “Should this go badly, ride hard. Follow Millet. He knows where to go.”

“What say you, Jacob,” called Yanti. “Will you follow Millet?”

“Leave my son alone,” Lee roared. “You...”

He stopped short as Jacob walked past, holding out the letter he had given to him.

“He gave me this,” his son said, handing Yanti the letter. “Probably no more than sentimental drivel, but there might be something useful in it.”

“What is this?” Lee demanded.

“I'm sorry,” said Yanti. “Jacob and I are old friends. He's been quite helpful to our cause. Without him, Hazrah would have been much more difficult to subdue.”

“Jacob! You can't do this?” Lee appealed. “Your mother...”

“Is weak,” said Jacob cutting him off. “If she had her way, Hazrah would still be under the yoke of the temples.” Hatred poured from his eyes. “You know, she never stopped believing that you would return one day. She probably still thinks you're going to save her. But she is as big a fool as you are.”

“As you can see,” said Yanti. “The things you fight for are in fact fighting against you. By now your dear wife has joined us, and as you see, your son has been with us all along.”

“She would never betray her people.” Lee’s face burned with fury. “And whatever it is you've done to my son to make him this way - for that, I swear you'll pay with your life.”

Yanti drew his weapon and took a step back. “Come then. Let us see if your reputation is deserved.”

Lee sprang forward, slashing through the air in a wide arc, attempting to end the fight in a single blow. But Yanti spun to his left with a speed Lee had never before encountered. If not for his training and physical power, his momentum would have sent him sprawling.

“Hasty, Starfinder,” taunted Yanti. “Mind the things you have learned.” But he made no move to counter.

Lee cursed himself for such an arrogant and foolhardy attack. Yanti was no ordinary opponent. He should have suspected as much.

This time Lee attacked with more caution and finesse. Short, powerful strokes rained down on Yanti as he attempted to throw him off balance, but to Lee's dismay, Yanti parried each blow easily. Lee became concerned by Yanti's lack of aggression. The man had not yet made a single move to attack, seeming to be content to fight off Lee's onslaught.

“You're trained well,” admitted Lee, taking a step back. “But if you think to tire me out, you'll find that will not happen.”

“No, no,” replied Yanti, still smiling. “I only wish to admire your skill. You have indeed been well educated in the art of the sword. It is a pity you won't allow my master to make you even more powerful - as he has done for me.”

With these final words, Yanti charged, bringing his sword hard down at Lee’s head. A deafening clang of metal on metal shot through the air, causing a flash of sparks to fly. Lee had only just been able to raise his own sword in time. A second blow from Yanti whizzed by his ear and he was forced back, nearly losing his footing.

Now Yanti began to toy with him, slashing and feigning. Lee tried to regain advantage, but Yanti kept forcing him further and further back. Finally, Lee dropped to one knee from the sheer force of yet another attack. He pushed with all of his strength and somehow managed to get back on his feet, but he knew now that Yanti could finish him at any time. He glanced over long enough to see Dina and Millet still on their horses, staring in horror.

“Ride, you fools,” he shouted. “Ride before it's too late.”

“It is already too late, Lord Starfinder,” said Yanti, pointing to Jacob, who had a bow drawn and pointed at Dina's head. “At that range he won't miss.”

“If you let them go, I will do what you ask,” said Lee bowing his head.

Yanti laughed softly. “Being that you are in no position to bargain, I cannot help but be amused. Still, you have shown courage. A quality my master values greatly - as do I. Still, I am not foolish enough to simply kill you and allow your companions to roam free.”

Lee tensed, ready for another assault. “Then we end this.”

“Indeed we do,” Yanti agreed.

In a flash Yanti raced forward. Lee attempted to side step and counter, but Yanti was too fast. His own blade had barely moved when he felt Yanti's blow striking home on the back of his skull. He fell to his knees with a grunt, and his sword flew from his hand. His head was swimming as he looked up to see Dina weeping and Millet in silent prayer. He marveled that he still lived. His head should have been split in two. Then he realized that Yanti had hit him with the hilt of his sword, and not the blade.

“You fought well.” Yanti's voice sounded far away. Then he felt his entire body jar as Yanti delivered one final blow.

His last thoughts before darkness took him were of his wife. He had failed her.

Chapter 21

Consciousness came slowly - and very painfully. The world around Lee was spinning violently. Then realization washed over him. Feeling anything at all meant that he was still alive. Yanti must have spared him. But why?

He opened his eyes and let the light filter in. The wound on the back of his head throbbed, but he knew he had to sit up. He had to find out if Millet and Dina still lived. Taking a deep breath, he struggled to his knees. As his vision cleared he could see that their horses had been tied to a fallen log and their gear neatly placed beside them. Millet and Dina were lying tied and blindfolded just off to the side of the road. Near to them, Jacob was bound and blindfolded in the same way, only judging from the bruises on his face, he had also been beaten and was unconscious.

“Millet - Dina,” called Lee. “Are you hurt?” He struggled to his feet and stumbled towards them.

“We are both fine, My Lord,” said Millet. “Yanti decided to leave us unharmed.” Lee was about to search for a knife in the gear, but then saw that his weapons had been placed beside Millet. He cut their bonds and helped them to their feet. Dina immediately noticed Jacob and ran over, seething with fury. She stood over him momentarily, then spat on the ground.

“If he wasn't your son,” said Dina. “I'd slit his throat here and now.”

“I wouldn't blame you,” admitted Lee, gingerly touching the back of his head. “But his fate is in my hands, and I alone must decide what to do with him.”

“Well, that can wait,” said Millet. “First I must treat your injuries.” Lee didn't protest, and allowed Millet to examine his wounds.

“Your skull must be made of stone to have taken such a blow,” Millet muttered. He retrieved some medicine and bandages from their gear and finished the dressings.

“What happened after I was knocked out?” asked Lee.

Millet's face twisted in anger, then relaxed as he regained his composure. “He told Jacob to bind and blindfold us. After that I heard Jacob arguing with him that he should kill us all and be done with it. But Yanti just laughed at him. Next thing I heard was a thump and what sounded like a body hitting the ground. I can only assume that was Jacob. After that, Yanti must have tied off our horses and searched through our gear. Before he left, he told us that you were still alive, and that once you woke up there would be a gift waiting for us. I suppose he was referring to Jacob.”

“How could your own son betray you like that?” asked Dina, still furious. “And his own mother...”

“I know,” snapped Lee.

He took a deep breath. “I know,” he repeated, this time more calmly. Millet placed his hand gently on Lee's shoulder. “What will you do?”

“I'll keep my word,” Lee replied. “I will save my wife.” His eyes fell on Jacob. “And he will go with me.”

“You can't be serious,” Millet protested.

Lee’s eyes remained fixed on his son. “I've never been more serious. Yanti knew what he was doing, leaving me alive.”

“What do you mean?” asked Dina.

Lee glanced sideways her. “He wants me to go north, and he wants me out of the fight. If I am captured attempting to rescue my wife, then they will try to turn me. If the Dark One was able to empower Yanti so much as to make short work of me, his own power must be unfathomable. If I went with him willingly, he would worry about treachery along the way. This way, I deliver myself into their hands. And he knew exactly what he was doing by leaving Jacob behind as well.”

“I still don't follow,” said Dina.

“By doing so,” Lee explained, “he leaves me with an impossible choice. If I decide to return to Gewey and continue aiding him, I will be forced to kill my own son. I cannot trust Jacob, therefore I cannot take him with me. Nor can I simply let him go.”

“Why not?” argued Dina. “He clearly wants you dead. Why not just leave him to return to his masters?”

Lee looked at Dina angrily. “He's my son. He is what he is because I abandoned him. I'll not simply leave him to his fate. No. If I can save him, I will. And if we are killed, we'll die together.”

“And I will go with you,” said Millet.

Lee smiled at the man with intense affection. “No, my friend. You must continue to do what I cannot. You must return to aid Gewey as best you can.”

Millet opened his mouth to protest, but Lee held up his hand, silencing him.

“You must do this,” pleaded Lee, his eyes welling with tears. “I have never given you a command, dear friend - not until now. I must break the oath I made to Gewey, so you must have more honor than I. You must keep the word of the house Nal’Thain, as you are bound to do. But you will not do so as my servant.”

He walked over to his pack and retrieved a sealed parchment. “From this moment on you shall be known as Millet Nal’Thain. I empower you with the rank and privileges of Lord and Patriarch of my family. I officially step down from all titles and pass them to you.” He held out the parchment.

Millet took a step back. “My Lord,” he cried. “You cannot do this. I am your servant, and shall remain so. I refuse this.”

Lee smiled and pressed the letter into Millet's hand. “You cannot refuse. As the Lord Nal’Thain, it is my right to choose my successor. You are the only man I can trust with the challenges that lie ahead. And I am sorry. I leave to you a broken house of a broken land, and it will be up to you to heal them and restore our honor. I likely ride to my death, and even should I survive, I cannot return to my former life. I beg you to do this service.”

By this time, Millet was weeping openly. “I cannot restore your honor. I could only ever maintain it. The honor of Nal’Thain is embodied in you. I will not fail you, My Lor...”

He took a step back and bowed. “Lee.”

Lee smiled, then bowed low in return. “I know you won't, My Lord.”

Jacob began to stir. “You must leave before he wakes,” Lee said. “I don't want him to see what direction you are heading in.”

“What about Yanti?” asked Dina. “Do you think he will follow us?”

“I doubt it,” Lee replied. “He doesn't consider you a threat. The only reason he left you alive was to confuse and hinder me, making my choices even more difficult. If he had plans for you, he would have taken you with him. No doubt he had the means to transport you north, or have you imprisoned here. Still, I suggest you ride hard until you can take rest within a temple.”

Jacob groaned.

“Now go,” Lee commanded. He embraced them both and helped to repack their mounts. Millet glanced back one last time before they spurred their horses to a run. “Good luck, old friend,” Lee whispered.

“Wh..what's happening?” Jacob moaned, struggling with his bonds.

Lee took a deep breath and knelt down beside his son. “What's happening is that you've been abandoned and left in the hands of your foe. Luckily for you, that foe is also your father.”

Jacob stiffened. “Yanti - that dog. I will kill him for this.”

“Shut your mouth, boy!” barked Lee. “You have much to answer for - both of us do. If you choose, I will give you a chance for redemption.”

“Just kill me and get it over with,” Jacob grumbled.

“Why do you think you deserve such a kindness? You have betrayed your mother, you have betrayed your father, and you have dishonored your family name.” He cut Jacob's bonds.

Jacob pulled down his blindfold and rubbed his wrists. “And what have you done, father? What crimes have you committed? How are you any better than me?”

“I have committed crimes I can scarcely describe. And for those crimes I suffer, and will continue to suffer.” Lee stood and offered his hand.

Jacob stared at Lee for a moment, sneering. “You should kill me now. If you don't, I will kill you.”

“And in whose name will you kill me?” Lee asked. “Will you kill me for the Dark Knight, the Reborn King of Angrääl? The one who has just left you behind now that your usefulness to him is over? Or perhaps you will kill me in the name of your mother? Or do you mean for her to die? Do you? Has the Dark One blackened your heart so much that you turn your back on the one who loves you the most?”

“Loves me?” he roared. “She loves you - not me. She never loved me!”

“Of course she does,” said Lee, withdrawing his hand. “I have never known her to love anything more than you, and if you don't see that, then you are as blind as you are foolish. You think she wept for me?” He paused. “She wept because she knew you had to grow up without a father. She wept because of my absence in your life. She wept because I had stolen something precious from the true love of her life. Did she love me? Yes. And I love her still. But you do not know the depths of your mother as I do. From the moment you came into this world, you became her very reason for living. It was I who was second in her heart, not you.”

He re-extended his hand. “Come with me to Angrääl and I'll prove it.”

Jacob hesitated for a moment, then allowed Lee to pull him to his feet. “I'll go with you,” said Jacob. “If only to take my revenge.”

“That's good enough for now,” said Lee. “If you can refrain from killing me, at least for the time being, I may even be able to show you a thing or two about the power that flows in your veins.”

“As I said,” he replied. “I'll go with you. I promise nothing else.”

“I suppose that will do,” said Lee. “Perhaps together we will both find retribution and redemption.”

They loaded the horses and began making their way north. Lee whistled a traditional Hazrian travel song. Jacob did not join in at first, but after a time he started to hum along.

Chapter 22

Gewey's heart pounded as he passed through the massive double doors. Kaylia followed close behind, and though she didn't show it, he knew she was nervous too.

Once inside, Gewey was amazed to see a room that looked much like a theater. On either side, rows of marble benches curved along the walls, forming a semi-circle that met at the back of a raised, stone platform. The ceiling was vaulted and covered with the familiar orbs that had been used to illuminate the other rooms in the house so brightly; it took Gewey's vision several moments to adjust to their brightness here. Already standing across the stage, tall and proud, a group of six elves faced him, arms crossed and hoods drawn. Theopolou quickly took his place on the platform beside the other elders. Gewey and Kaylia walked down the narrow center isle until they were only a few feet away.

“That's far enough, human,” said the elf just beside Theopolou. Her strong, feminine voice echoed throughout the room. She pulled back her hood revealing long, elegant features. Her skin was the same dark bronze as Kaylia's, but her hair was jet black and wrapped tightly with silver ribbons.

She glared down at the duo, not attempting to mask her disgust. “I am Lady Bellisia, Chief Elder of the clan Hastriatis. You know Lord Theopolou. To my left are Lord Chiron, Lord Endymion, Lord Syranis, Lady Leora, and Lord Aneili. We are here to determine whether you are to give testimony on behalf of Lord Theopolou, who has been called to judgment according to our laws.”

“That has already been decided,” corrected Theopolou. “Do not taint my house with deceit.”

Lady Bellisia glared angrily at Theopolou. “It was not my intention to deceive,” she said. “I merely misspoke.” She turned her attention back to Gewey. “I do admit that some of us were curious to see you.” She glanced at Kaylia. “The human who could ensnare one of our people in the bond.”

“I was not ensnared,” barked Kaylia.

“Silence, girl,” Bellisia commanded. “You have no right to speak.”

“That’s odd,” said Lord Chiron. “I thought this was an open forum. Or have the rights of an elf changed?”

“Just because you support Theopolou and this madness,” shot Bellisia, “do not think I will tolerate your insults, even within these walls.”

“I give no insult,” Chiron retorted. “But as you well know, Kaylia has been invited to these proceedings. She has the same right as an elder here - as does the human.”

“I mean no disrespect,” said Gewey, “but I am called Gewey Stedding. You may use my proper name.”

“Indeed,” said Bellisia. “So Gewey Stedding, Lord Theopolou has told us that you are quite remarkable - for a human. And he says you saved the life of one of his escorts.”

Gewey nodded. “We were attacked by Vrykol.”

Bellisia laughed. “Yes, I've heard. The ancient evil of the gods returned to plague the world. What is next? Shall the Elder Race return to reclaim the world?”

“Once again, you name me a liar,” said Theopolou. “You have all seen the head.”

“I do not call you a liar,” Bellisia replied. “I merely say that you have been deceived. The creature you showed may or may not be what you claim. Perhaps it is an abomination created by human hands in order to cause fear among us.”

“And how would they have done such a thing?” Theopolou asked. “Could they create a creature that is as fast as an elf, and will only die when you take its head?”

Bellisia paused. “We are not here to discuss the Vrykol.” Her gaze returned to Gewey. “And now that you are in our presence, I have a question. What are you?”

A chill crept into Gewey’s stomach. “I don't understand what you mean.”

“Do you not?” Bellisia pressed. “It's a simple question. We can all feel the flow that saturates your being. Humans cannot do this. So I ask again - what are you?”

“You do not have to answer,” said Theopolou, just as Gewey was opening his mouth to speak.

“Do you seek to deceive us, Lord Theopolou?” Bellisia asked. “Do you seek to bring danger among us?”

“The boy is no danger and you know it,” said Theopolou.

Bellisia crossed her arms. “Is that so? I think you are hiding something, and if he is not a danger, then there is nothing to prevent him from revealing his origins.” She looked at the other elders. “We all know that this Gewey Stedding is no ordinary human. How could he be? Perhaps he is a half-man, or perhaps something else. Whatever the case, do we not have the right to know?”

“You do not,” announced Gewey. “As I understand it, you are asking me to testify for Theopolou, and that is all. I see no reason to explain myself to you, or anyone else. If you no longer want me to testify, I will respectfully take my leave. I have urgent matters to attend to, and time is short. ”

Bellisia raised an eyebrow. “And you think you can just leave? You think we can allow you to wander the world, bonded to one of our own?”

“Do not threaten my guests,” boomed Theopolou. “I have given them both sanctuary.”

Bellisia smiled innocently. “I make no threat. And your offer only extends as far as your domain. Unless you intend to have them reside here forever.” She waived her hand dismissively. “In any case, the boy can keep his secrets - for now. But he must be guarded if he is to accompany us to the Chamber of the Maker.” She looked down at Gewey. “Do you agree to this?”

Gewey nodded.

Bellisia looked up and down the group of elders. “Are there any objections?” She smiled with satisfaction when there were none. “Good. Then we depart at once.” Theopolou turned and walked off the stage, pushing past Gewey and Kaylia, who followed close after him. The other elders lingered until they had left the chamber, their eyes following them out.

“She is up to no good,” Theopolou muttered.

“What do you mean?” asked Gewey.

“There was no reason for this meeting in the first place,” he explained. “The questions she asked were meaningless. You had already agreed to come, and a guard would have been put on you regardless. I thought she simply wanted to see you out of sheer curiosity, but now I suspect she may be hiding something.”

“Do you think she knows about Gewey?” whispered Kaylia.

“Perhaps,” Theopolou replied, his brow creased in thought. “If she does, there is only one way she could have come upon this knowledge, and that worries me.”

Thoughts of the Dark Knight exploded in Gewey's mind, and he remembered the dream he’d had the night he left Sharpstone. “What should we do?” he asked.

“There is nothing to do,” the old elf answered. “We must allow this to play out. If Bellisia and her allies plan to join with Angrääl, we must call them out in front of the others. I will send word ahead to the elders who chose not to attend here today. They will not ignore a summons to the Chamber of the Maker.”

“I thought all the elders were already here,” remarked Gewey.

“No,” said Theopolou. “The seven elders here, including myself, are chief's among our people, and can speak for our tribes in the absence of the others.”

“Will they have time to get there?” asked Kaylia.

“I hope so,” said Theopolou. “I should be able to get word to them quickly enough for most to arrive ahead of us, though those from the northern tribes will never be able to get there in time.” Theopolou walked them to the front door and left them just outside.

“I'm worried,” said Kaylia, as they made their way around to their rooms. “I have never seen my kind behave with such malice and deceit toward one another. Linis was right all along. The second split is inevitable.”

“Does that mean you will change your mind about facing judgment?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia smiled and touched his hand. “I don't know. At least, not yet.”

“Whatever happens, I'll be there beside you,” said Gewey, with grim determination.

“That reminds me,” said Kaylia. “I have decided we shall complete the ritual of bonding once we arrive at the Chamber of the Maker.” She glanced sideways at Gewey. “That is, if you are agreeable.”

“I...” he stuttered. “That is...” He stopped short and cleared his throat. “Of course, I am.”

“Good,” said Kaylia. “Linis will instruct you on the ceremony along the way. Also, you need instruction in our customs if you are to be mine. I will see to that personally.”

Gewey's heart raced with a mixture of excitement and apprehension. If the Sharpstone Village Mothers could see him now. They had tried to play matchmaker for him more times than he cared to remember.

Once in his room, Gewey packed his gear and changed into his own tan leather pants and thin wool shirt. As he strapped on his sword he heard a knock at the door. “Come in.”

The door opened and Akakios walked in with three other grim-looking elves. All were wearing hard leather armor, a long knife, and a bow and quiver across their backs.

Gewey bowed. “I take it you are my guards.”

“We are,” Akakios affirmed. “These three are from the personal escort of Lady Bellisia. They wish me to tell you that they have no desire to speak with you, and any questions should be directed to me.”

Gewey couldn't help but be amused and laughed softly. This brought angry stares from the three elves and a smile from Akakios.

“You are not permitted to carry your weapon,” said Akakios. “I will carry it for you, if you wish.”

“That's fine,” said Gewey, unbuckling his sword. “But take care not to touch anything but the scabbard or you will be burned.”

Akakios looked in wonder at the sword as Gewey handed it over. He couldn't help but test what Gewey had told him and touched the blade anyway. Immediately he withdrew his hand, wincing in pain.

“I have never heard of such a weapon,” marveled Akakios. “How did you come by it?”

“Perhaps I'll tell you along the way.” He couldn't help but get in a quip, designed to get under the other elves’ skin. “That is, if I have time. Linis is to instruct me in the bonding ceremony, and Kaylia is to teach me more about elf ways and customs.”

The three elves stirred uneasily, but said nothing. Gewey smiled with satisfaction. Akakios closed his eyes and shook his head with a groan.

Gewey grabbed his gear and allowed himself to be led from the room to the front of the house. At least thirty elves awaited him. Theopolou and the six other elders, along with their armed escorts, stood near the base of the statue. Kaylia and Linis stood a few feet away from them, talking quietly. Gewey began to approach Linis and Kaylia, but Akakios stopped him.

“You must remain with us until we make camp,” said Akakios, almost apologetically. “You are free to speak to whoever you wish then. But you are to stay silent as we travel.”

This irritated Gewey, but he could see no alternative other than to concede. It was then that Linis walked straight up to him and slapped him on the back. At first it seemed as if the guards would try to prevent him, but one glance from Linis made it very clear that he would not be hindered.

“They have no jurisdiction over me, Gewey,” said Linis. “I'll walk with you.” He noticed Gewey looking at Kaylia. “She'll walk with her uncle and his escort - for now.”

This satisfied Gewey. He could see that Linis had unnerved the elders, but they did nothing to stop him.

They set off through the front gate, the elders and escorts leading the way, followed by Gewey, Linis, and Gewey's guards. As they traveled, Gewey spent the rest of the day listening to Linis tell stories about his exploits and adventures.

For such a large group, they covered ground swiftly, not stopping to rest until it was time to make evening camp. By then they had covered nearly forty miles. Akakios and the other three elves set up their bedrolls a few feet away from Gewey and Linis. Kaylia stayed near Theopolou until they had settled in, but joined Gewey and Linis soon after, as they were retrieving some bread and dried fruit from their packs. Linis had already warned Gewey that they would not be building a fire for cooking along the way, explaining that the elders intended to travel swiftly and unnoticed. At first, the lack of a fire worried Gewey. He only had the provisions he’d arrived with, and some of these required cooking. But Linis assured him there would be enough dried meat and fruit to go around.

“Have you gone over the ceremony with Gewey?” Kaylia asked Linis.

“I will tomorrow,” he replied. “I do not think the others are comfortable with the idea, so I thought it best to wait a day or two.”

“You don't have to worry about that,” said Gewey with a mischievous grin. He told them about the remark he had made at Theopolou's house in front of his guards.

“You should not provoke them,” Linis warned. “Bellisia is one of Theopolou's main opponents, and they serve her.”

“It’s not like it's a secret that Kaylia and I are bonded,” Gewey argued. “Besides, they deserved it. I mean really. Akakios isn’t in favor of human-elf relations, but he still manages to act decently towards me. The others have refused to even address me properly.”

Linis couldn't help but smile. “It would have been amusing to see them squirm. But still, they could be dangerous, and now you are unarmed.”

“I may be unarmed,” said Gewey, “But I am far from defenseless.”

“A fact we don't want them to know,” added Kaylia. “Some of them probably suspect you of being a half-man, and that's bad enough. But at least it explains your ability to channel the powers of the earth. If you were forced to defend yourself and unleashed those powers upon them, we would be faced with a whole new set of problems.” She reached over and touched Gewey's arm, causing him to blush. “After we complete the bonding, then there will be nothing they can say or do.”

“Which brings a question,” said Linis. “Who shall preside over the ceremony?”

“Theopolou would do it, if I asked,” replied Kaylia. “but I fear it would jeopardize his position among the others. I was hoping you might do us the honor. As a seeker, it is within your right.”

Linis bowed his head. “I would be honored to do so. But I still think you should speak to your uncle about this. He has done nothing to oppose your union with Gewey, though I am certain he is not happy about it. In fact, if I am not mistaken, he has pressed you to follow through with it.”

“You are right, of course,” said Kaylia. “I will speak to him tomorrow.”

“Do you think Theopolou is really in danger?” asked Gewey.

“I do,” answered Linis. “But from who, I cannot say.”

“Bellisia seems to be the most likely candidate,” said Gewey. “She all but threatened to have me killed.”

Linis furled his brow and shook his head. “I would not be so quick to pass judgment on Lady Bellisia. Her hatred is limited to humans and well - the gods. She opposes Theopolou, but it is hard for me to imagine her conspiring with humans for any reason. Even if it meant regaining our kingdoms and lands.”

“Who then?” asked Kaylia. “Certainly not Lord Chiron. He has been as a brother to Theopolou since they were children. Lord Aneili is the only other elder who wanted Theopolou called to judgment, but it's hard to imagine him doing anything so dishonest. And the rest are Theopolou's allies.”

“Are they?” asked Linis, “I'm not so sure. You cannot be betrayed by your enemies, only your friends.”

“Are you sure there is a plot?” asked Gewey.

Linis shook his head. “You hit upon it, my friend. I suspect there is. I feel there is. But I do not know it. Everything I have predicted would happen, and needed to happen, has happened. Theopolou is exposed, and you are unprotected - at least, they believe that you are.” Linis leaned in and whispered. “My seekers are near should we be attacked, or should someone attempt to follow us.”

This comforted Gewey, and he could feel Kaylia's mood lift as well. “How long until we arrive?” he asked.

“Normally, it would take more than a week,” Linis replied with amusement. “But they seek to exhaust you by maintaining a pace no human could endure for very long. At this rate we will be there in five days, maybe less.”

Gewey smiled. “I'll try to look tired.”

“I will rejoin Theopolou,” said Kaylia. “I suggest you use this time to prepare for our ceremony.” She rose to her feet and walked off in the direction of the others.

“She's right,” said Linis. “You would not wish to anger your unorem on your first day of bonding.”

“Unorem?” asked Gewey.

Linis laughed. “Wife is how you would say it. But partner might be more accurate.”

Gewey blushed and whispered, “Unorem.” He looked up at Linis. “I hope I'm ready for this.”

“You're ready,” assured Linis. “And if you are not, then you soon will be. In fact, I envy you. It takes courage to enter into the bonding. To share that much of oneself is not a matter to be taken lightly, yet I cannot help but wonder what it would be like.”

“Do you have an...unorem?” asked Gewey.

“No,” Linis replied. “I loved once. But my life as a seeker kept me ever from her. In time she chose another.”

“And now,” he asked. “Is there anyone?”

Linis paused for a long moment. “There is someone I desire. And I believe she desires me. But I fear I will never have the chance to find out for certain.”

“Who is it?” Gewey pressed. “Tell me.”

Linis smiled dolefully. “It is not in our custom to ask such questions.”

“I'm sorry,” said Gewey. “But it's not like I would know her. The only elves I know are mostly here with us.”

“And what makes you think she is an elf?” asked Linis.

“You mean she's human?” exclaimed Gewey. Akakios and the other guards looked up for a second, but then returned to their meal.

“You must learn discretion,” Linis scolded. “I did not say she was human. I did not say anything.” He sighed. “I will tell you. But you must keep this knowledge to yourself.”

“I swear.” Gewey leaned forward.

“Celandine,” said Linis.

“Dina?” Gewey laughed as quietly as he could manage.

“Is it in your custom to make sport of a friend’s emotions?” he said.

Gewey calmed himself. “I'm sorry. Really. It's just unexpected. When did this happen?”

“I knew I felt something for her from the moment we met,” said Linis. “Though at the time I thought she was fully human, so those feelings were easy enough to dismiss. I would live for hundreds of years, and she would grow old and die. I would not court her only to watch her slip away. But when I touched her hand for the first time and felt the elf blood coursing through her veins, it quickly became clear to me that I could no longer simply ignore what was in my heart.”

“And you say she feels the same way?” asked Gewey.

Linis shrugged. “I can tell she feels something. But what exactly that is, I don't know. If we both live through this adventure, I intend to find out.”

Gewey slapped him on the shoulder. “We'll live through this. And when we do, I just know it will work out for you.”

“Perhaps,” he said. “But that is a question only the future can answer. For now, we must concern ourselves with more immediate issues.”

Linis spent the next few hours going over the ceremony with Gewey, having him repeat it back to him over and over. Once Linis was satisfied they had covered as much as they could, the two of them lay down to sleep for what little rest time remained.

Gewey could feel Kaylia through their bond and was tempted to reach out to her, but in the end decided not to risk causing trouble with the elders. He still wasn't sure about the extent of their abilities, and it would be wise not to stir things up until he really needed to.

Chapter 23

An hour before sunrise they were underway again. Linis spent the first few hours picking up where they had left off the night before. The bonding ceremony wasn't particularly complex, but he made it clear to Gewey that each part held great significance, and it was very important to get it exactly right.

“I have never seen the bonding performed,” he said. “And I don't really understand the bonding in the same way that Theopolou would. But as you are connected with Kaylia's spirit already, I don't think it will be difficult for you.”

“I hope not,” said Gewey.

Linis threw his arm around Gewey's neck. “Don't worry. Things will go as planned. Besides, you are about to become the envy of many an elf.”

They went over the ceremony a few more times, then let their conversation drift to lighter subjects. Gewey's guards kept their distance, but by midday Akakios joined in. He had heard of Linis and held him in high regard, despite the fact that he had been named a traitor.

They covered another forty miles before they stopped. Gewey noticed the elves occasionally glancing over at him to see if he were tiring yet. He knew it would be wise to feign fatigue, but his pride simply wouldn't allow this. Every time he caught one of their eyes he just smiled happily and whistled a bright tune. This brought fierce stares and chatter among the elders - all except Theopolou, of course.

Once camped, Kaylia joined them again. She looked burdened with worry. “What’s wrong?” asked Gewey.

“Theopolou,” she replied. “He doesn't seem well.”

“You mean he's ill?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia shook her head. “Not ill exactly. It’s more like he is slowly being drained of all energy.”

Linis smiled sympathetically. “Theopolou is very old, Kaylia. Perhaps this trip, and our quick pace, is too much for him.”

Kaylia shook her head. “I know, but it's more than that. It's as if his very spirit is being gradually taken away from him.”

“I might be able to help,” offered Gewey.

“How do you mean?” asked Linis.

“I could give him part of what I have,” Gewey said. Then he shook his head. “No. That's not what I mean. I can't really describe it, but I think I can put power from the earth inside him.”

Linis looked at Gewey in wonder for a moment. “How did you learn to do such a thing? Only the greatest of elf sages have ever been able to do this.”

“I don't know,” he admitted. “I don't even know that I can do it for sure. I just feel that I can. Ever since I journeyed to the spirit world for the first time I keep getting these...impressions. It's like I know I can do a thing, but I don't know what it is.” He rubbed his chin. “I don't understand it, but I still think I can help Theopolou - if he'll let me.”

“I'll ask him,” said Kaylia, rising to her feet. She paused and looked down at Gewey, smiling. “Thank you,” she said. With that, she walked off to speak to Theopolou.

A short time later she returned, accompanied by her uncle. The old elf sat next to Gewey, though he did not look directly at him. “Kaylia says you have the ability to transfer the flow from yourself to another,” he remarked.

“I think so,” said Gewey.

Theopolou turned to Kaylia, then to Gewey. “But you are not certain?”

“Not entirely,” Gewey admitted. “As I told Linis and Kaylia, after I woke up from being in the spirit world I felt as if I knew things - but without really knowing them. I know I can do this. And if you're ill, you really should let me try.”

Theopolou scrutinized Gewey for a long moment. “I'm neither ill nor tired as Kaylia might think, but something is wrong.” He stood up slowly. “I feel as if the energy of the earth is somehow being drained from me.”

“Drained how?” asked Linis.

“I don't know. I have never encountered this before. I have attempted to track down the source, but so far unsuccessfully.”

“Could it be one of the elders?” asked Gewey.

“I don't think so,” said Theopolou. “Of all the elders and other elves here, only Chiron, and perhaps Linis, have a stronger connection than I. Neither of them could do this.”

He looked straight at Gewey. “Actually, you are the only one here with such ability.”

“I swear...” Gewey began to protest, but Theopolou held up his hand.

“I did not mean to suggest that you had anything to do with this,” he said. “Just that you are the only one here I am aware of who has such power. Of course, it is possible that another has also somehow gained this ability. And then again, it may not be anyone. It just may be an anomaly.” Theopolou’s eyes grew sad. “Our people have lost so much knowledge. Even the wisest of us are mere children compared to our ancestors. They had such vast knowledge in matters of the flow, it is said they could trace it to its source.”

Linis joined Theopolou in his melancholy. “Yes. The seekers of old were said to have been able to outrun a deer, and hear the heartbeat of a rabbit from one hundred yards away.”

“I do not think it is wise for you to give me your flow,” said Theopolou. “But I would ask that Linis help me track down the culprit, if there is one.” Then, as if a wave had hit him, he staggered.

Gewey jumped up and placed his hand on Theopolou's shoulder. He could feel the elf tense at the unfamiliar contact, so he withdrew and took a step back. “Are you…”

Theopolou waved him off. “I'm fine.”

“No, you're not,” argued Kaylia. “You should let Gewey try to help you.”

Linis nodded in agreement. “I...”

Suddenly, he looked up to see Akakios standing a few feet away, eyes ablaze, his bow drawn and pointing at Gewey. Linis reached for his dagger, but it was too late. The arrow loosed.

Time stood still as it flew through the air and Kaylia tried desperately to throw herself into its path. But instead of piercing Gewey’s flesh, the shaft flew past him, missing his throat by a hair’s breadth and burying itself into the chest of an elf wielding a vicious looking dagger just a few feet further back. The attacker gasped and clutched at the arrow before falling to his knees. Kaylia and Linis were already running towards him, while Gewey threw his arms around Theopolou and pressed him towards the guards.

“Unhand me, boy,” boomed Theopolou.

Gewey ignored his protests. When he was in range of the guards he shoved Theopolou in their direction. “Protect him,” Gewey commanded. The elves obeyed without question, surrounding the elder.

Gewey ran to Akakios' pack and retrieved his sword. It sang as he pulled it free from its scabbard, and he could feel the warm throb of the earth rush through him. By this time, Kaylia and Linis had reached the assassin and were trying to remove the arrow.

“To arms,” yelled Gewey, alerting the others, who by this time knew something was wrong and had begun forming a protective circle around the elders.

Gewey ran to Kaylia and Linis. The wounded elf was struggling against them, trying to reach into his belt. Gewey dropped to the ground, and with all his strength, grabbed the elf's wrists and pinned them to the ground. The assassin’s eyes shot wide as he felt the power in Gewey's grasp. Realizing that he was far outmatched, the elf ceased resisting. Even so, Linis, Kaylia, and Gewey did not release their holds.

“Who are you?” roared Linis.

The wounded elf said nothing, instead simply turning his head away.

Gewey could hear the camp organizing a search of the nearby forest. He looked at the wounded elf carefully. Then he closed his eyes, allowing the power of the earth to flow like a relentless tide and reach every fiber of this being.

“Gewey,” whispered Kayla. “What are you doing?”

Gewey took a deep breath. “I am going to get some answers.” Releasing the elf’s wrists, he instead placed his hands on the captive’s chest.

The ground hummed for a moment as Gewey let the power flow from him, into and around the elf's body. “You can let him go,” he said to Linis and Kaylia. “He cannot move.”

Slowly the other two relaxed. They marveled at the sight they beheld. Gewey smiled as he also removed his hands. Still the wounded elf could not move.

“What have you done to him?” gasped Linis.

“Nothing,” Gewey replied. “I am just using the same power that you do. Only I'm using it to hold the elf down.”

“Amazing,” said Linis, half smiling.

Gewey nodded, then turned his attention back to his prisoner. “You will tell me what I need to know.” His voiced was grim and intimidating. “Who sent you?”

The elf glared with hatred and fear. “Curse you, and all of your kind,” he hissed. He shifted his gaze to Kaylia. “And you...”

“Careful,” Gewey warned, then let the power squeeze in tightly.

The elf gasped. “Traitor,” he managed to say.

Gewey could hear some of the other elves making their way quickly toward them. In a flash, Theopolou appeared with a knife in hand and slit the wounded assassin’s throat. Blood soaked the elf's shirt and spilled onto the ground. Gewey immediately released his hold on him, but it was too late. His eyes met Gewey's for one final moment before death overcame him. Pure hatred was the only thing Gewey could see. Then came the blank stare of oblivion. He heard a thud as the knife hit the ground beside the slain captive’s head.

Theopolou turned to the others who were still a few feet away. “He is dead. I have killed him.”

Chiron walked up to the body and examined it carefully. “He has no markings and his clothes could be from anywhere. The dagger is common as well. The stains and scrapes on his boots suggest that he has traveled through the mountains.” He turned to the others. “Does anyone recognize him?”

Each elf in turn examined the body, but none could place his face or guess at his origin. Even Linis could not find a clue. After it was clear that no one could solve the puzzle, the elders gathered in a small circle to decide their next move. They invited Linis to join them, but made it clear that Gewey and Kaylia were to remain with Akakios and the other three guards. Akakios looked as if he wanted to ask for Gewey's sword, but he did not.

The elders talked for about an hour before splitting up to tell their plan to the others. Linis approached Gewey, his eyes aflame.

“Fools,” spat Linis. “Bloody fools!”

“What is it?” asked Gewey.

“They want to press on even faster,” Linus replied in disgust. “And still they will not allow my seekers to join us.”

“You told them they are near?” asked Kaylia.

“I had no choice. Whoever that assassin was, he possessed the skills to slip past my people. If there are more like him out there, we won't be able to notice them if we travel too fast. But if the elders were to allow my seekers to come amongst us, we could move at speed and avoid a trap.” He checked his weapon. “I need to speak to my comrades. I'll return soon.” He dashed off into the woods and disappeared.

“Your weapon,” came Bellisia's voice from behind them.

Gewey turned to her as she approached, accompanied by two escorts with long knives drawn.

“If there is someone seeking to kill him,” said Theopolou. “He should be allowed to keep it.”

“You misunderstand,” she corrected. “I only wish to know where he acquired that sword.”

“It was a gift,” said Gewey.

“And such a gift it is,” she said. Her eyes locked with Gewey's. “I will not ask you to give it up, and I suspect that forcing it from you may prove to be more difficult than we would have originally suspected. Because of that, I think that you shall be dealt with first. Theopolou's judgment must wait.” She turned to Theopolou. “Once we arrive, be prepared to present your arguments in favor of this boy and inform him of his rights.”

“You cannot do this,” said Theopolou.

“I can and will,” Bellisia shot back. “Do you think me blind? Did you think he could use that much of the flow and it would escape my notice?” She stepped toward Gewey, looking him up and down. “Whatever you are, I will get to the truth of it. And if you are a danger to my people, we need to know. That gives me the right.” She spun on her heels and strode off.

“I am sorry, Gewey,” said Theopolou in a half whisper. “I fear this trip may go ill for you.”

“I don't understand,” said Gewey. “What just happened?”

“Bellisia is calling you to appear before the council to determine if you are a danger to our race. If they decide that you are, then they will kill you - and me, for bringing you among us.”

Gewey tightened his jaw and re-sheathed his sword. “They may find that more difficult than they think.”

“Then you will be forced to slaughter your allies,” said Theopolou. “We will fall and the Dark One will triumph.”

“If he allows himself to be killed, all is lost anyway,” said Kaylia.

Theopolou nodded. “The only hope is for you to convince them to spare you. You must show them that you are not a threat.”

“I need to do more than that,” said Gewey. “I need to convince them to join me. That's why I came to begin with.”

“True,” said Theopolou. “But I fear you will have little success. The only way is to gain the support of the majority of the elders. The others will fall in line to avoid a second split.”

“How should we proceed?” asked Kaylia.

“My way is usually one of caution,” replied Theopolou. “But now is a time for bold action.” He turned and took a few steps. “Face each other. Do it quickly.” He turned back around. Gewey and Kaylia stood motionless for a moment, then obeyed.

“Are you still sure you wish to be bonded?” the old elf asked. His voice was soft and melodic.

Kaylia didn't hesitate. “I am.”

Gewey was speechless but still managed a short nod.

“But won't this anger the others?” asked Kaylia. “How can Gewey convince them if they're too incensed to listen?”

“Anger will fade,” he explained. “You have chosen this...man. And he you. If you expect to touch the reason of the elders, you must make them face their fears and see what is possible. Talk is not enough. Though you may be right; this may be a mistake.”

“It is no mistake,” said Kaylia, smiling. “If Gewey faces death, I will face it with him. I would have the bond completed before our fate finds us and it is too late.” She turned to Theopolou. “Now is the time.”

“Then prepare yourselves,” said Theopolou. “I will gather the witnesses.”

They watched as Theopolou walked away into the fading light toward the elders. Gewey was shocked. “They will be our witnesses?” he laughed.

“They cannot refuse,” Kaylia explained. “The bonding ceremony is one of our most sacred rituals. It strikes at our core beliefs. They would not dare say no, regardless of who is being bonded.”

“What do I need to do?”

Kaylia suppressed a laugh. “If you still have the clothes Theopolou gave you, you should put them on. They are a bit more appropriate.” She reached out and squeezed his hand. “As for me, I should change as well.” With that, she danced off, leaving Gewey reeling with emotions that flowed between their connections.

If this is what it's like now, Gewey thought. What must it be like when it's completed? He shook his head vigorously in an effort to steady his nerves, and went to his pack to retrieve his elf clothing.

“Gewey,” called Akakios. He came trotting over holding a tiny flask in his hand. “There is a stream nearby where you can wash. I've sent the other three ahead to make sure it's safe.” He slapped Gewey on the back. “Come. Let’s get you ready.”

Gewey paused and extended his hand. “I didn't thank you for saving my life.”

Akakios looked thoughtful. “I'm not sure I did. Anyway, you might not have been the target.”

“What have they done with the body?” Gewey asked, noticing that it had been removed.

“Two of my kin have taken it to the forest to perform the funeral rites,” he replied. “Assassin or no, he was an elf, and should pass from this life as one.”

“Of course,” said Gewey.

“But enough of that,” said Akakios. “You need to get ready, and I will not face Theopolou for failing to have you back on time.” He threw his arm around Gewey, pulling him along.

Gewey allowed himself to be led into the surrounding dense forest. About half a mile in, he heard the light trickle of a stream. The three guards were waiting there; they did not smile.

Akakios halted. “You'll find the stream just a few feet through that brush.” He handed him the flask. “Essence of the star lily. It is a tradition among us to perfume ourselves during high rituals, and it does not get more lofty than this.”

Gewey opened the flask and the air filled with a sweetness he had never experienced. “Thank you,” he said gratefully before heading to the stream.

“Just see that you give it back,” Akakios called after him. “I need some for myself as well.”

Gewey washed and dressed. He wished he had a mirror. The stream moved too swiftly to see his reflection.

“Gewey,” called a voice a few yards away, just beyond the brush.

Gewey glanced over to see Linis striding toward him. A smile beamed across his face.

“How do I look?” asked Gewey.

Linis examined him carefully, then said: “Presentable - all things considered. How do you feel?”

Gewey took a deep breath. “A bit nervous, but excited too.” He took another breath. “Mostly nervous.”

“Just remember what I told you and you’ll do fine,” Linis reassured. “However, if you'd like, we can go over the ceremony once again.”

“Yes, I would like that,” admitted Gewey. “But tell me. Did you speak to your brethren?”

“I did,” he replied, with a brief flash of anger. “I am not pleased that they let someone through. It will not happen again.”

His smile then returned. “I can't wait to see the look on the elders’ faces.” He began to laugh. “Their own arrogance has forced them to witness their worst fear.”

“I'm sorry,” said Gewey. “But I don't think it's very funny.”

Linis forced back his laughter. “Forgive me, my friend. I forget myself. This is a joyous occasion, not to be tainted by the petty squabbles between me and the elders.”

As they returned to the camp, Gewey and Linis went over the ceremony one last time. Upon arrival, Gewey could see that the elders had gathered. All of their eyes were fixed upon him.

“This should be interesting,” muttered Gewey as he approached the group. The grim expressions on their faces told him that they were none too pleased.

“Gewey Stedding,” said Lord Chiron. “As you probably know, we are not in favor of this union.”

“I understa...” Gewey began, but Chiron held up a hand to silence him.

“Allow me to finish,” he continued. “We are not in favor, but there is nothing we can do to stop it. As you know, this is among our most sacred rites, and you and Kaylia are the first in more than one hundred years to be bonded in this way. Because of this, we would not have it done here in the middle of nowhere. We feel that to be a sacrilege.” All but Theopolou nodded in agreement. “We ask only that you delay the ceremony until we reach the Chamber of the Maker. It is a far more fitting site for such an event.” He took a small step forward. “Kaylia has already agreed, but only if you do as well. What say you?”

Gewey's eyes drifted to Theopolou, but his face was stone.

“It may be a wise choice,” Linis whispered in Gewey's ear.

Finally, Gewey squared his shoulders and said, “I do understand that this ritual is sacred to you. And if Kaylia is in agreement, then so am I. We can wait until we arrive.”

Chiron bowed. “I thank you.” The others bowed and dispersed.

“One more thing,” called Gewey. The elders turned. “We will complete the bonding before I face your judgment.”

“Agreed.” Chiron walked away.

Only Theopolou lingered.

“A wise decision,” said Theopolou, almost smiling. “This could go a long way to furthering your cause. The rite of bonding, performed in the Chamber of the Maker, is symbolic beyond your understanding.”

“Who suggested this?” asked Linis.

“Lord Chiron,” Theopolou replied. “He could be an important ally to you. He has been a friend to me for many of your lifetimes.”

“And the others?” asked Gewey. “How do they feel about it?”

“Their opinions are mixed,” Theopolou admitted. “Though they all agree that the rite should be performed in a more appropriate location, they still have a difficult time with the fact that a human is to be bonded to an elf. They may try to convince you not to do this, though they cannot stop you - or Kaylia.”

“They can try all they want,” said Gewey. “The choice has been made.”

“Do not underestimate their guile,” Theopolou warned. “They have far more experience in bending the will of others than you. Their arguments will be persuasive.”

Gewey nodded with understanding.

Bellisia approached. “Gewey Stedding. I would speak with you alone.” Theopolou and Linis bowed to her and walked away out of earshot.

“If you are here to talk me out of completing the bond with Kaylia...” Gewey began.

“I am here to warn you,” said Bellisia.

“Warn me?”

“I know that you intend to try and sway the elves to join you in your fight against Angrääl,” she said. “And you may accomplish your goal. But should you bond with Kaylia...”

“Stop right there,” said Gewey angrily. “My relationship with Kaylia has nothing to do with Angrääl, or my reasons for being here.”

“You think not?” she shot back. “Do you think the powers in the north are fools? What will they do once they discover that you are bonded to an elf woman?”

She paused. “They will kill her.”

Gewey opened his mouth to speak, but no words came.

“That's right,” Bellisia continued. “They will hunt Kaylia down and kill her. And they will do it to kill you.”

A cold chill filled Gewey's chest. “Why would you think they care about me?”

Bellisia sniffed. “You imagine we do not know that the King of Angrääl is searching for you? Every elf tribe knows your name. We have all been made aware that he seeks you, and have been made offers of friendship for your deliverance - or death.”

“Theopolou hasn't said anything about this,” said Gewey. “He would have told me.”

“Theopolou,” she scoffed. “You think Theopolou is your friend? He is no more a friend to you than I am. But at least I am not trying to make you think otherwise. Theopolou has no love for humans. He is motivated by his love for his niece. Make no mistake, if he had his way, he would break your bond to Kaylia and see you dead.”

“I don't believe you,” said Gewey. “It was his idea that we complete the bonding. Why would he do that if what you say is true?”

“His idea?” she laughed. “And who suggested that you wait until we get to the Chamber of the Maker? Theopolou's closest friend - Lord Chiron.”

“That doesn't prove a thing,” said Gewey. “You're just trying to confuse me.”

“No,” said Bellisia. “I am trying to clear your mind.”

She glanced over to Theopolou. Kaylia was at his side, talking quietly. “He will not allow you to complete the bond. He thinks there is a way to break it. He is wrong, of course. But his love for his niece blinds him.” She turned back to Gewey. “That your spirit was able to combine with Kaylia's has caused much doubt among the elders. Enough that you might be able to convince them to side with you against Angrääl. But you will not get the chance.”

“What do you mean?” asked Gewey. “I'm supposed to prove that I'm not a threat to your people.”

“Yes. And you intend to use that as an opportunity to plead your case. But I assure you, it will not happen. You will be dead before you utter your first word inside the Chamber.”

“Are you saying Theopolou plans to have me killed?” he cried.

Bellisia shrugged. “I am saying that Theopolou will do everything he can to stop you completing the bond. But have you forgotten the assassin? Someone sent him. Perhaps someone among us. Whether it was Theopolou, I cannot say, but he certainly has the motivation to do so.”

“And what are your motivations?” asked Gewey.

“I only want my people to be safe and free,” she replied. “You are a being of great power. That much is clear, even though I don't know what you truly are. If killing you protects my people, then I would not hesitate. But I do not think that would do any good. And I do not believe that Angrääl will leave us in peace. You may be the only way we can escape destruction.”

“Then why not join me?” asked Gewey.

Her eyes locked with Gewey's. “Because I am not willing to sacrifice our souls in order to survive. Whatever you are, your heart is human. To join you is to join them. That I cannot do.”

“What would you have me do?” asked Gewey. “You said it yourself. Angrääl will not leave you in peace. The Dark One will march over the land like a plague, and both our peoples will suffer. Our only hope is to cooperate, even if it's only for a short time.”

“That may be,” she admitted. “And you may be able to convince the others. But my mind is set. I have seen what the humans do. I will not be a part of it.” She took a small step back. “I have said what I came to say. Think on my words. Speak to Kaylia if you wish. But know that I have not lied to you.”

“What would you do if you were me?” he asked, just as she began to walk away.

Bellisia paused and glanced back. “I would run. I would take Kaylia and run.” With that she left.

Gewey stared at Theopolou and Kaylia for a time before heading over to them. His mind was confused. Only one thing was for sure. He had to speak to Kaylia. He had to know what they were walking into.

Chapter 24

Gewey approached Theopolou and Kaylia. Excusing himself from the old elf, he took Kaylia by the hand and led her far enough away so they would not be overheard. After Gewey told her what Bellisia had said, Kaylia sat thoughtfully for several minutes.

“Do you think she's telling the truth?” he asked.

“I think she believes so,” Kaylia replied. “But do I think Theopolou means to break our bond and assassinate you? I honestly don't know. I wish I could dismiss it, but it does fit. He was the one who killed the assassin, and it was his friend who suggested we wait until we reach the Chamber of the Maker. All the same, I have never known my uncle to be dishonest.”

“He deceived his own elves about what I am,” Gewey reminded her. “And he only told them after Kaphalos had revealed our bond to them.”

“True. And it was to his advantage to do so. But I don’t think the assassin would have told us anything, regardless of what we did to him. Theopolou would have known this as well. Anyway, we still are not certain that you were the real target. Remember, it was Akakios who shot the assassin, and Akakios serves my uncle. No - even if what Bellisia said is true, I don't think he had anything to do with that.”

“We could just ask him, I suppose,” Gewey suggested. “I don't like feeling as if I'm being manipulated, and whether it's Bellisia, Theopolou, or anyone else, I want it to stop.”

“Yes,” she agreed. “I feel that confrontation is best. I want to know his motives before we get there. And if Bellisia is trying to drive a wedge between us, then we should know that too.”

Kaylia and Gewey found Theopolou talking with three of his escorts.

“Can we speak?” asked Gewey.

Theopolou nodded and dismissed the elves. Kaylia recounted Gewey's words and waited for a response. At first, Theopolou was expressionless, then he began to laugh.

“Crafty,” said Theopolou. “Very crafty. And correct.”

“What?” cried Kaylia. “She was telling truth?”

“Of course she was,” said Theopolou. “At least from her perspective. I do not wish you to bond with Gewey. And yes, if there were a way, I would seek to break it. But Bellisia is wrong to suggest that I believe I can. The bond is unbreakable - even by the two of you. I certainly couldn't force it to break, and even if I could, it would likely kill you. As she said, I act out of love for you. That is my motivation.” He turned to Gewey. “She told you I was no friend to you, and she is correct. But I am an ally.”

“What do you think she was trying to do?” asked Gewey.

Theopolou smiled. “I think she was being honest. And I am glad for it. I had suspected her of many things until now.”

“In what way does this rest your mind, uncle?” asked Kaylia.

“Bellisia has been an opponent to me for quite some time,” he explained. “Even in better times she and I have rarely seen eye to eye. But her actions have usually been to protect our people - even when in opposition to me. That she would open her mind to a human, knowing that I would likely hear of it, tells me much. And her words have merit, though not in the way you might think.”

He placed his hands on Kaylia's shoulders. “I swear to you that I mean your suitor no harm. Though this is not a bond I would have chosen for you, I know I must accept it. Should you wish, I will perform the rites here and now if that will prove my intentions to you.”

Kaylia smiled warmly and hugged Theopolou. “I believe you.”

Theopolou turned to Gewey. “I am your ally. But you must be mine in return.” His eyes fell lovingly on Kaylia. “You must protect her.”

“I swear I will,” said Gewey. “But something Bellisia said still bothers me. She said that the Dark One will try to kill Kaylia to get to me.”

“She is right,” said Theopolou. “But they could do that already. Were either of you to die, it would rip the other apart, even without completing the bond. You would be useless shells, unable to fight. In fact, death would be kinder. But I think it is more likely that the Dark One would wish to capture Kaylia and use her to control you. Were that to happen, you could be made into a powerful weapon.”

Gewey nodded. “What will you do now?”

“I shall speak with Bellisia,” he replied. “Now that I feel I can trust her, I should like her council.”

Theopolou embraced Kaylia once more and walked away to find Bellisia. “Do you believe him?” asked Gewey.

“Yes,” she replied. “He is not plotting against us.”

The elders announced that they were to remain where they were for a few hours, then start out again before daybreak. Kaylia, Gewey, and Linis went off a few yards from the others while Theopolou spoke privately with Bellisia.

Chiron approached. Gewey and the others stood and bowed. Chiron bowed in return. He looked different than Theopolou. Though he was the same age, he seemed younger and less careworn of spirit. His hair still held its deep brown color, and he walked with a light spring in his step.

“You have courage, Gewey Stedding,” said Chiron, once he reached them. “To face the council of elders within the Chamber of the Maker, and do so after bonding with one of our own kind...” He laughed softly. “Truly remarkable.”

“Are you here to convince me not to go through with it?” asked Gewey.

“Not at all,” Chiron replied. “Besides, what can be done now? Your spirits are already joined. You have very little choice in the matter. That is, unless you intend to allow your souls to rend asunder.”

“You are a friend to my uncle,” said Kaylia.

“I am,” he replied. “For many years we have been as brothers.”

“Then I am a friend to you,” she said.

Chiron smiled. His eyes then fell on Gewey. “And what of you? Shall you be a friend to me as well?”

“If you would like,” Gewey replied. “I am eager to befriend the people of my future unorem.”

Chiron cocked his head. “I see you have been learning our customs. In that case, allow me to educate you further.” He took a seat on the grass. Gewey and the others did likewise. “Has anyone told you of the rite of pudnaris?”

Gewey shook his head.

Chiron glanced briefly at both Kaylia and Linis. “Then your friends have been neglectful of your education.”

“I...” began Linis. But one look from Chiron silenced him.

“Let me explain,” said Chiron. “Pudnaris is when a suitor is challenged for his right to join with his intended mate. This challenge can be made by anyone as long as they can give valid cause.”

“Who could have cause?” asked Kaylia. “I have accepted no other suitor.”

“True,” said Chiron. “But there are other arguments to be made to support the pudnaris besides a potential rival.”

“Like what?” asked Gewey.

“In this case, anything,” he replied.

“Why are you telling me this?” asked Gewey.

“I tell you because you have the right to know. Many will oppose this union. Perhaps enough to risk their lives to stop you.” He scrutinized Gewey for a moment. “We know that you control great power, and open battle with you is a risk. We also know of your fight with the Vrykol. If Theopolou is correct, and that is what they truly were, the fact that you defeated them tells us everything we need to know about your skill.” He pointed to Gewey's sword hanging at his side. “And to face that weapon in the hands of someone who can use the flow to gain strength, is to face death.”

“You know something about my sword?” asked Gewey.

“I know a little,” Chiron replied. “It was made during a time when elves first walked the earth and our knowledge was vast. The art of its construction has been lost in time, but the legends remain. Only small objects can be made now, and with limited uses. Whoever gave you that sword had no idea what they possessed, or they would have never given it away. It was said that such weapons could make someone powerful beyond measure.”

Gewey looked down at his sword, remembering the first time he had used it when fighting Salmitaya's soldiers. “Do you think someone will challenge me?”

“Who can say?” the elf replied. “I tell you this only to warn you.” He rose to his feet. “I will inform you if I hear of anything.” He spun about and strode off before Gewey could utter another word.

Gewey watched Chiron as he walked away. “I don't trust him,” he said quietly.

“He is Theopolou's friend,” said Kaylia. “And my uncle trusts him.”

“Gewey's right,” Linis interjected. “I get the same feeling. He seems all too willing to accept you. It may be nothing, but I feel something is amiss.” He rubbed his chin in thought. “Still, if Theopolou trusts him, I suppose we should as well.”

“Did you know about this pudnaris?” Gewey asked, looking to both Kaylia and Linis.

Kaylia nodded. “Yes, but I did not think it important. As an elf facing judgment, and with my well-known relationships with humans, I could not imagine why anyone would call for it. Not to mention that we are already bonded. That should be enough to deter any potential rivals.”

“True,” said Linis. “But if someone thought to use it to prevent your union with Gewey, things could get complicated.”

He looked at Gewey with a grave expression. “If it happens, you will be exposed. The amount of flow you will need to channel in order to defeat a determined elf will be immense. I remember when I saw you holding the power within you for the first time.”

“But you didn't guess what I was,” said Gewey.

“No,” said Linis. “But I knew beyond doubt that you were something different. And remember, I am not as versed in such matters as the elders. There will be many more of them at the Chamber when we arrive. You can bet that they will figure it out. The only reason they have not as of yet, is that the idea of a god in human form is beyond most of our understanding or imagination.”

Gewey thought for a minute. “I don't see anything I can do about it,” he said finally. “They'll know about me one way or another in time anyway.”

“You have a point,” Linis agreed. “But it would be better if they found out by watching you open the Book of Souls. If Theopolou has not deceived us, you may get the chance to do so.” He reached out and placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “Whatever happens, Kaylia and I will stand by you. Until then, we should keep our wits about us and look for signs of trouble.”

“You still suspect Theopolou?” asked Gewey.

“I suspect there are plans set in motion against us. That much is clear. I have not heard anything thus far that eases my suspicions.” Linis glanced over at Theopolou, then Bellisia. “Of course, our true enemy may yet to be revealed. Mistrust can be a powerful weapon.”

Gewey thumbed the hilt of his sword. “I want to trust Theopolou. My heart tells me to. I suppose we’ll know soon enough, won’t we?”

Linis nodded. “That we will.”

Kaylia was oddly silent, but her eyes never left her uncle.

The rest of the evening was uneventful. Gewey and Kaylia sat a few yards away from the others, talking, while Linis rejoined the elders to discuss their route. The two elves that had been sent into the forest to bury the assassin returned about an hour before it was time to depart. Their faces were somber when they rejoined their companions, and they clearly had no wish to speak.

Gewey gathered his gear and checked his sword. Akakios and the other three guards had already rejoined the others, leaving Linis as Gewey's sole companion.

“I guess there's no point in guarding me any longer,” Gewey remarked.

“I think they realize it is a useless gesture,” said Linis. “They are of more use protecting their masters than watching you.”

Chapter 25

The spirits of the party did not rise with the sun. The events of the previous day weighed heavily on their minds, and aside from their footfalls and the rustling of gear, not a sound could be heard to disturb the gloomy silence. Kaylia continued to stay by Theopolou's side, while Linis and Gewey remained to the rear. Gewey felt more at ease where eyes could not easily watch him. Though the pace had slowed a bit, they were still able to cover many miles before they made camp for the night. The evening mood was as dreary and quiet as it had been during the day, though it was decided that a few small fires could be lit.

Linis and Kaylia, along with Theopolou and Chiron, joined Gewey beside the fire he had built a few yards away from the main camp. Six guards surrounded them, although far enough away not to intrude. Even so, Gewey still felt uneasy as he noticed the contemptuous stares they threw at him whenever he met their eyes.

“I thought it would be best to display our unity to the others,” explained Chiron, as he took a seat by the fire.

“I appreciate it,” said Gewey. “I need all the help I can get.”

“Indeed,” said Theopolou. “The coming days will be difficult. Lord Chiron and I both agree that we must find a way for our people to survive the coming storm. Even if it means allying ourselves with the humans for a time.”

“Others will argue that it is the humans who march,” added Chiron. “The King of Angrääl was himself a member of Amon Dähl, and his armies are human, even if it is their own kind they march on.”

“The humans who follow him have been deceived,” said Linis. “They have no idea what is about to be unleashed upon the world. And the elves that think him the reincarnation of King Rätsterfel are just as blind, and twice as stupid.”

“I cannot argue,” Chiron admitted. “But you must take into account that many of our people are weary of what has become of us. They no longer want to live in the shadows, yet they cannot bear to live side by side with humans.”

“What do you think?” Gewey asked Chiron.

“In my opinion the elves should leave,” he replied. “There are legends of lands beyond the great Western Abyss. It is said that my people once dwelt there. Perhaps it is time we returned.”

“Those are just legends, as you say,” said Theopolou. “And we have sent ships across the Abyss before. None have ever returned.”

Chiron smiled and laughed softly. “I suppose this will be a discussion to be had once our people are no longer facing extinction. In the meantime, we have matters to resolve.”

He turned to Gewey. “You will face intense opposition when you are before the entire council of elders. Some, perhaps many, will wish to aid you, but few will be prepared to say so openly. It is important that you convince more than just Theopolou and me to speak in your favor. To do this, you must open the Book of Souls.” He eyed Gewey intensely. “Theopolou is confident that you can do this. Can you?”

Gewey thought for a long moment before admitting: “I don't know.”

“That’s not the answer I was hoping for,” said Chiron. “But it will have to do. If you are challenged for the right to bond with Kaylia, you must wait until after the bonding before speaking to the council. You have until sunrise of the next day to answer the challenge, so you must not act before then. If the Book is opened and you are proven to be the fulfillment of prophesy, then not only will you likely avoid further challenges, but almost certainly you will also gain the support you need.”

“What if we waited until after I’ve opened the Book to complete the bond?” suggested Gewey.

“Risky,” remarked Linis. “If you are not successful...”

“Then Gewey and I will still complete the rite,” Kaylia interjected.

“The fact is,” said Theopolou, “there is no way to tell what will happen until we arrive. I suspect that all of our plans will be useless. We will be entering an atmosphere alien to us all. Not since the Great War have so many elders been summoned.”

Chiron nodded in agreement.

A commotion sounded at the edge of the camp. Gewey and the others sprang to their feet and drew their weapons. One of the elves who had been guarding Gewey ran up to them.

“We have an intruder,” he told them.

“An intruder,” Linis exclaimed. “How did anyone get past the watch?”

The elf shook his head. “I don't know. He just appeared out of nowhere.”

“Is it an elf?” Theopolou asked.

“No,” the guard replied. “He looks human but...”

“But what?” Chiron pressed.

“I'm not sure what to make of him,” the elf stammered. “He doesn't smell like a human.”

“Take us to him,” ordered Theopolou.

The guard bowed sharply and led Theopolou and the others to the camp’s opposite edge. A group of elves were gathered in a circle with weapons drawn. They were surrounding a small cloaked figure leaning on a long, ash walking staff. Theopolou pushed his way between two elves and stood directly in front of the newcomer.

“Who are you?” Theopolou demanded. “What do you want?”

The figure did not look up. “I seek a child of heaven, I do. Oh, yes. Among the young ones, I find him.”

Gewey knew at once who it was. “Felsafell!” he cried out.

An audible gasp could be heard throughout the elves. Clearly they knew the name well.

Felsafell pushed back his hood, revealing his haggard features and crooked grin. “I see you remember old Felsafell - but of course, of course. You are not daft. Your mind is sharp, oh yes it is.” He took a few steps toward Gewey. The elves gave way.

“What are you doing here?” asked Gewey.

“I have come again to see the world,” he replied. “The spirits are gone and the wind has risen. Blown away my friends, it has. The darkness comes and the first born shall have one final adventure.”

“Bellisia stepped forward. “You claim to be Felsafell. How do we know this is who you really are?”

“Ah yes,” Felsafell laughed. “The child of discontent, who sought me out. Did not find me. Could not find me. Cannot find herself. Lost you became, and lost you are still. Indeed, indeed. With troubled past and uncertain future. She still seeks the thing she once lost.”

Bellisia glared at Felsafell but fell silent.

This time Theopolou stepped forward. “If you are Felsafell, we welcome you. Your wisdom has helped our people for many ages past. But please, explain to us why you are here.”

Felsafell's smile vanished. “The wisest of the fallen speaks. Fallen from grace you are, yet in you, the spark remains. But I fear it fades. Like me and my brothers and sisters, fading from memory. Sad, sad, sad. The end nears for us both. But perhaps you may be saved. Oh, yes, I have seen the many paths. The trails of joy and sorrow join together.”

“You speak in riddles,” said Theopolou. “If you know something, tell us.”

“Know?” Felsafell sighed. “I know many things. Yes, I do. But none to help you. Alone is the journey of the second born. To what end shall be your task to discover. I come to aid the heaven child. Nothing less and nothing more.”

Gewey walked up to Felsafell and bowed low. “I never had the chance to thank you for what you did for me. If it were not for you I'd still be trapped.”

“How did he help you?” asked Bellisia.

“The why's and what's will have their time,” Felsafell said. “I know much and will share what I can. I will indeed. Oh, yes.” He looked across the gathering. “I know you have questions. Always questions for old Felsafell. But be mindful of what you ask. You may learn what you should not know.”

“So you intend to accompany us?” asked Chiron.

“I do, I do” he replied. “If you will have me. To learn to speak in the world again. An adventure that I did not see. Thought I would fade. Fade away and join my kin. But they have been stolen. The first are all gone.”

“You may join us,” said Gewey.

“You speak without authority,” snapped Bellisia. “We must...”

“He joins me, or I don't go,” said Gewey.

Bellisia paused, then turned and walked away, muttering.

“An old man is tired,” said Felsafell. “Rest is what I need. At least for a while. Questions after. Questions waiting.”

“Come with me,” said Gewey, offering his hand.

Felsafell smiled cheerfully and allowed Gewey to lead him through the camp to where he had set up his bedroll.

“You can take my blanket,” said Gewey. “I'm not tired.”

“A kind child of heaven you are,” said Felsafell. He plopped down on the ground and wrapped himself in the blanket. In seconds, he was breathing deeply.

“I can't believe he is here,” remarked Kaylia. “I wonder what he wants.”

“Whatever it is, he sure has stirred up the elders,” said Gewey, amused.

Theopolou approached. “We would like to speak with you,” he said. It was clear he did not share Gewey's amusement.

Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis followed Theopolou to the far side of the camp where the elders, along with their escorts, had gathered. They eyed Gewey as they shuffled uneasily and whispered to each other.

“How is it you know of Felsafell?” Bellisia demanded.

Gewey considered for a moment whether or not to mention his experience in the spirit world, and decided not to. “I met him in the Spirit Hills, after escaping from an agent of the Dark One.”

“And how did you come upon him?” asked Lord Aneili.

Gewey recounted the story of his encounter, leaving out the details that would suggest his origin.

“You stayed in his home?” said Chiron. “Remarkable. Many of my people have sought out Felsafell. Some never to return. But even those who found him have never been afforded such a privilege.”

“We're still not certain that is the real Felsafell,” countered Bellisia.

“You seemed certain enough when he spoke to you a moment ago,” said Theopolou. “Gewey appears to believe him, and of all of us, he seems to have the most personal knowledge.”

“Suppose this is Felsafell,” said Lady Leora. “Is it wise to have him among us?”

Lord Endymion laughed. “Just what would you have us do, Leora? Kill him? He walked straight into our camp without being noticed. Do you think he gives us a choice?”

“I think we should hear what Gewey has to say.” Theopolou turned to Gewey. “You clearly want him with you, but is there anything you can tell us that might explain his being here?”

Bellisia leveled her gaze on Gewey. “Indeed, child of heaven. That is what he called you, is it not? What do you think are his motives?”

“I don’t know why he’s here,” said Gewey. “But I don't think he is here to harm us. That's not his way.”

“Tell that to my brother,” cried one of Chiron's escorts. “He vanished in the Spirit Hills seeking Felsafell's so-called wisdom, never to be seen again.”

“I don't think Felsafell did anything to your brother,” said Gewey. “He warned me when I was with him that the spirits would try and play with my mind. That they could make people lost and confused. If your bother disappeared, I would think the spirits are the villains, not Felsafell.”

“So you say,” scoffed Bellisia. “Apparently, he has much interest in you. But why now? Why has he appeared just as we are preparing to gather? Are you sure you cannot answer this riddle - child of heaven? Can you be certain that he means us no harm? Perhaps he just means you no harm.”

“I’m certain he is who he says he is,” replied Gewey, trying to ignore Bellisia’s repeated reference. “As for anything else, I was not alone when I met him, and Felsafell made no move to harm my companion. In fact, he did what he could to make sure the spirits left both us in peace.”

Bellisia scowled “That proves nothing. There is something you are not telling us. No one shows as much trust as you show Felsafell without good reason.”

“Perhaps Gewey is not as jaded as some,” said Chiron, in an obvious dig at Bellisia.

“We are talking in circles,” said Theopolou. “We either allow Felsafell to continue with us, or we ask him to depart.” He looked at Gewey. “You say that you will not go without him?”

Gewey nodded. “As long as he wants to come with me, I will have him.”

Theopolou turned to the others. “There you have it. As Gewey is called before you to give testimony, you must make your decision. Do you withdraw your invitation?”

The elders looked at each other, but none said a word.

“Very well,” Theopolou continued with satisfaction. “Felsafell will be welcome among us.” He turned to Gewey. “Watch over our new guest. I will be with you in a moment.”

Gewey bowed and walked back to where Felsafell was still fast asleep, Linis and Kaylia close behind.

“Sometimes I can't tell the difference between an elf and a human,” muttered Gewey.

“What do you mean?” asked Linis.

Gewey had not meant his words to be heard. “I'm sorry. I meant no offense. It’s just that since I've met the elders, I've seen nothing but petty squabbling and disagreements. The council back home in Sharpstone gets along better than they do.”

“You are not wrong to say so,” Linis agreed. “Once we were a noble people, with honor and understanding. Our forefathers would be disgusted with us now. It is as if a veil of mistrust has been brought down upon us, and we do not know how to lift it.”

“My father thought that the generation who fought in the war would have to leave this world before we are healed,” added Kaylia. “He believed that the bitterness it caused prevents us from regaining what we have lost.”

Linis nodded. “I think he may have been right. It is a new way of thinking we need. Our race must find how to exist in a new world.”

“Where does he fit in?” asked Gewey, motioning to the sleeping Felsafell. “What is he? He’s certainly not an elf. He looks human, but he isn't.”

“What am I?” said Felsafell, popping to his feet. “I am the oldest, I am. The most withered.”

“I'm sorry,” said Gewey. “We didn't mean to wake you.”

Felsafell smiled cheerfully, stretching his arms. “I wake myself. Sleep I did. Sleep well. Sleep soundly. Sleep plenty.”

“But you've only just lay down,” said Linis. “Even an elf needs more rest than that.”

“An elf I am not,” said Felsafell. “And the child of heaven is right. I am not human.”

“Then what are you?” asked Kaylia.

“I am the first,” he replied. “But not the last. No. I shall soon fade. But before I do I must rescue my kin. Rescue my past.”

“I don't understand,” said Gewey.

“All will be clear,” Felsafell assured. “Clear as glass. But not now. Now with enemies about, we must be swift and silent.”

“Enemies?” said Gewey

“Don't fret,” said Felsafell. “No swords or arrows will hinder us. A clear path we have. But enemies don't always carry swords. Be silent and still and all will be well.”

The party gathered and continued toward the Chamber of the Maker. Felsafell walked just behind Gewey and Kaylia, while Linis ventured a few yards ahead of everyone, scouting for signs of an ambush.

As the day progressed, elves gradually began to approach Felsafell, each requesting a private talk. Felsafell’s wisdom was legendary among the elves, and they did not want to miss a chance to benefit from it. True to his word, Felsafell was more than willing to speak to all comers. Some walked away smiling, others angry, and others in tears. Gewey wondered what he had told them, remembering the words the strange little man had for him while on his porch in the Spirit Hills, and how those words had upset him.

They stopped once for the midday meal. Gewey listened for signs of pursuit, but to his relief, all he could hear was the sound of the wind and various small animals. Even though he informed Linis of this, the elf still insisted on searching the area. And while Linis could remain invisible to all the others, Gewey enjoyed the fact that he alone was able to hear exactly where the seeker was.

“Your power grows,” said Felsafell, munching on a bit of bread. “No longer weak. No longer frail.”

“How do you know what I am?” asked Gewey.

“I am old, not blind.”

Gewey stared into Felsafell's watery, gray eyes. Something was there, deep inside. Something different. Something unfamiliar. “You're really not human, are you?” he said.

“Human?” he laughed. “No, no, no. I am too old for that. I am the first, yet I will not be the last.”

“You said that before,” said Gewey. “But what does it mean?”

“Me and kin wandered the hills and valleys, we did.” said Felsafell. “Happy and free. Before the elves and their ways. Before humans and their wars.”

Gewey raised an eyebrow. “So you're saying your people were here first? Where are they now, and why haven't I heard of them?”

“We are all gone.” A tinge of sorrow filled Felsafell’s voice. “All but me. Poor Felsafell. Gone before the humans gathered, were we. We saw the coming of elves. But too small the world became. Too prideful were we to remain. Deep in silence we escaped until only our voices were left.”

“So your people were here before the elves,” said Gewey. “But what about the gods?”

“Oh, how wonderful they were,” said Felsafell. “We loved them so. We love them still. But in time, we lost our way and our will. Spirits we became - companions to your mother and father.”

“Do you know who my real mother is?” asked Gewey. “I've guessed that my father is Gerath. But who is my mother?”

“I tell what I know,” he replied. “But I speak of only what I know. And this I do not. Perhaps the Book of Souls has what you seek.”

“You know about that?” said Gewey in a hushed tone.

“Oh, yes,” said Felsafell. “I was there. I saw the Book. I hear its cry. It longs to be opened. But beware. A bell that is sounded cannot be un-rung.”

“What's in it?” asked Gewey.

“Many things,” he replied. “Some I know, and others I do not. But now is not the time for telling these secrets. Soon enough. Yes - soon enough.”

Kaylia walked up and took a seat beside Gewey. “You have caused quite a stir,” she told Felsafell. “The entire party can't stop talking about you.”

The old man smiled. “I have not left home in the lives of many an elf. It is good to see the world. Better to know I'm remembered.”

“I've noticed your speech has changed a bit,” said Gewey.

Felsafell cocked his head “Has it? I guess living in the world does that. Oh yes. Practicing with the living makes it easy. Spirits have no need for speech, and elves rarely visit.”

“What about humans?” asked Kaylia. “Do they ever seek you out?”

“No, no,” he answered. “They know nothing of me. They think me a ghost. A rumor. But time for more talk will come later. Now we must march.”

The elves had already begun to gather their packs and gear, and soon they were on the move once again. The day was warm, with the sun shining bright in the sky. Traveling with Felsafell was enjoyable for Gewey. He never tired of the old hermit’s stories, though he understood very little at times, and had never heard of most people and places that were mentioned. Before he realized it, they had walked thirty miles and it was time to stop for the night.

The following days were much the same, though Gewey was becoming increasingly apprehensive as they neared their destination. The night before they were due to arrive, Theopolou asked Gewey to accompany him away from the others.

“Are you prepared?” asked Theopolou.

“I'm not sure,” Gewey admitted. “I really have no idea what I'm going to say to convince them.”

Theopolou looked at Gewey thoughtfully. “The appearance of Felsafell should help with that. Word will spread fast that he is with us. That you have such an ancient wisdom as your ally will go far to sway the doubters. The main thing you must remember is not to allow yourself to get angry. Your opponents will try to twist your words. If you show anger they will see it as a sign of weakness and you will lose support quickly.”

“I'll do my best.” Gewey sighed, trying to anticipate just what might be said to anger him. No firm ideas formed.

When he returned to camp, Gewey sought to temporarily forget concerns about the day ahead by listening to Felsafell sing songs in an ancient forgotten tongue. Though he couldn't understand the words, he imagined an epic battle between good and evil being waged across time. He wondered what the song was really about, but did not bother to ask. Once the song was done, Gewey shut his eyes and listened to the music of the forest until he felt the dawn approaching.

Linus kneeled beside him. “Today is the day.”

Gewey opened his eyes and smiled. “I'm ready.”

Chapter 26

It was mid-morning when Gewey noticed the terrain around him beginning to change. The woods became thicker - so dense in fact, that even when he used his powers to listen, the sound bounced straight back, startling him.

The party funneled into a narrow trail, causing their progress to slow. No sound could be heard at all, not even their footfalls. Gewey nestled himself between Felsafell and Linis as Felsafell began to whistle. The sound pierced the dead silence of the woods, making some of the elves uneasy.

“We're nearly there,” whispered Linis.

“Nearly there indeed,” said Felsafell. “There and back we go. Once more and again.”

Gewey couldn’t help but smile at Felsafell's words, though most times they made no sense to him.

After about an hour they came to a narrow stream spanned by an elegant, wooden bridge. Theopolou motioned for everyone to halt.

“We come in brotherhood and friendship,” he called out.

There was a long pause before a voice called back from the other side. “Then enter and be welcome.”

Theopolou and the other elders slowly led the party over the bridge. Here, the landscape soon opened up into a soft grassy meadow dotted with multicolored wildflowers. Tents lined the far end, and Gewey could see elves walking among them. Far beyond the tents, a white, vaulted roof peeked out. A group of three elf women dressed in tan leather shirts and trousers, each with a long knife at her side, approached from among the tents. Theopolou raised his hand in greeting, but the women made no reply. When they were a few feet away, Theopolou stopped and bowed.

“Matrons of the Creator,” said Theopolou, without looking up. “I offer you my friendship. As the eldest among my party, I claim the right to beg entry for all.”

The matrons examined the group, only pausing for a second when their eyes passed Gewey and Felsafell. They looked at each other and nodded.

“Be welcome,” said the woman in the middle. “But be warned. You bring two humans with you, and will be responsible for their well-being, and answerable for their actions.”

“I understand,” he replied, lifting his head. “We need to be shown to our quarters at once. There is much to do.”

“You, along with the other elders, have already been seen to,” said the matron on the left. “Your tents and provisions had been made ready and await you.”

Her gaze fell on Gewey and Felsafell. “However, we did not expect to accommodate humans.”

“They need no special consideration,” said Theopolou. “They will lodge with me and mine.”

“Very well,” said the matron on the right. “I assume you know your way.” With that, they turned and walked back in the direction of the tents.

Theopolou waved Gewey over. “Stay with me.” He turned to the others. “Farewell for now.”

The other elders and their escorts bowed in turn and headed off in different directions to their own tents. Theopolou led Gewey, Linis, Kaylia, Felsafell and his own escort to the left, toward the western edge of the encampment. Gewey glanced several times at the domed roof, hoping to get a better look, but to his disappointment the dome disappeared as they drew close to the campsite.  From the far end of the meadow, Gewey hadn’t been able to tell how many tents had been erected. But now they were passing amongst them, he was surprised to see that they numbered literally in the hundreds. Elves were everywhere. Most were dressed in plain leather or linen, but some were attired in fine silks and adorned with exquisite jewelry.

“I never thought to see this many of your people at the same time,” whispered Gewey to Linis.

“I'm shocked as well,” said Linis. “I thought to see less than half this many. It seems Theopolou's call has caused quite a stir.”

“All the more reason to be cautious,” Kaylia interjected over her shoulder.

They wound their way through the camp until they reached a large silver tent. It was twelve feet tall and at least forty feet across. Gewey figured it could easily house three times the number they had with them.

Theopolou pulled back the tent flap and disappeared inside. Kaylia, Felsafell, and Theopolou's escort followed close behind. Gewey and Linis entered last.

Gewey looked around, impressed. The interior resembled a house more than a tent. Just past the entrance was a large open area with a dozen plush chairs lining the walls. In the center was a round table, low set but big enough to accommodate twenty people; an assortment of cushions rested on the ground beneath this. The scent of mint filled the air, emanating from the roasted lamb that had been placed on the table. Along the ceiling hung light orbs set just dimly enough to give the room a warm feel. The floor was uncovered, but the soft grass was as lush and beautiful as any carpet. At the far left corner another tent flap led to the back areas.

“There are enough rooms for everyone,” said Theopolou, pointing to the rear flap. “They are all the same, so choose as you will. Hot water should be waiting for you, unless you prefer to eat before you wash.”

“No, thank you,” said Gewey. “I prefer to be clean when I eat, if I can.”

Theopolou nodded and led the group through to the back. A hall lined with several cloth-covered doorways stretched before him. Gewey chose the third room, and Linis the one just beyond. Kaylia and the others continued to follow Theopolou and disappeared around a corner. Felsafell whistled merrily and turned to wink at Gewey before heading after them.

Gewey’s room was rather sparse compared to the main dining and lounging area. A small bedroll had been placed in one corner, and opposite this, a washbasin with a cotton towel folded neatly beside it. One light globe hung from the ceiling, and a soft, thin, brown rug covered the floor.

Gewey washed and changed into a cotton shirt and pants, then strapped on his sword. He could still smell the mint lamb and his stomach growled loudly.

“Are you ready?” came Linis' voice from just outside his room.

Gewey threw back the door flap and smiled at the elf. “I'm starving.”

Linis noticed Gewey was wearing his sword. “You will want to take that off at the table,” he said. “It is considered rude to be armed at the table of your host, and for all intents and purposes this is still the home of Theopolou.”

Gewey removed his sword. “Should I leave it behind?”

“No,” Linis replied. “Keep it with you, but place it on the floor beside you.”

Gewey nodded before following Linis into the dining hall. Theopolou and a few of his escort were already seated. Gewey took a seat opposite them, while Linis sat on his left. Kaylia was not yet there.

Theopolou nodded at the lamb. “We serve ourselves here. Felsafell will not be joining us. He said he needs to rest.”

One of Theopolou's escorts passed them a bottle of wine. Gewey gratefully accepted it, then gave it to Linis.

“I'll wait until we're all here,” said Gewey, noticing that the other plates were still empty.

“We only await Kaylia,” said Theopolou. “The rest are running errands.”

“No need to wait any longer,” said Kaylia, entering the room.

She was dressed in a loose fitting, white cotton shirt, together with trousers and a pair of soft leather shoes. Her hair was tied into a long braid, and she carried a long knife in her left hand. After surveying the group, she took the seat on Gewey's right.

Theopolou cut off a portion of lamb, then passed it around to the others. One of the elves rose from the table to retrieve a basket filled with flat bread, and this was also handed around. To Gewey's relief, they dined in silence. It was all he could do to maintain his table manners. Not only was he famished, but the lamb was also exceedingly tender and juicy.

Once they were finished, two elves cleared the table and brought out a decanter of plum brandy. Gewey's mouth twisted as the sweet fragrance filled the room.

“I see you don't care for plum brandy,” Theopolou observed. “I have more wine if you would rather.”

“Brandy will be fine,” said Gewey. “I've never had elf brandy. I would try it before I decide.”

Theopolou smiled slightly while passing the bottle over. To Gewey’s relief, though the smell was similar, it was not as sweet as the brandy he had tasted in the past. In fact, it was quite pleasant. A smile crept over his face as he sipped it.

“Word of you and Felsafell will have begun to spread by now,” said Theopolou. “I have called for a gathering in the Chamber of the Maker this evening for the joining between you and Kaylia.” His eyes darkened. “Do not expect a warm reception.”

Gewey nodded. “Do you expect me to be challenged?”

“I hope not,” Theopolou replied. “It would complicate matters. On one hand, you could show your strength and resolve it. On the other hand, you may be prematurely exposed. That Felsafell is your friend and companion may give any would-be challengers pause - at least that is my hope.” His eyes fell on Linis. “I have debated as to the virtue of your presence. You are cast out and have refused to face judgment. Those who do not know this, soon will. Yet your name still carries weight and respect, even among your enemies. You shall also stay by Gewey's side.”

“I never intended to do anything else,” Linis stated. “And I will offer again to perform the bonding. That is, if you think it will go ill for you, should you do it.”

Theopolou's jaw tightened and his eyes narrowed. “I will not be denied my right, nor ignore my obligation as Kaylia's guardian and uncle. Though some may abandon me for what I am to do, I will not let politics cause me to act with dishonor.”

“I meant no offense,” said Linis. “I think only of your safety.”

“Then I will have Lord Theopolou bond us,” said Kaylia. “And no other.”

Theopolou couldn't help smiling. The old elf got to his feet, accompanied by his escort. “Then you should both prepare. I must make the arrangements.” He turned and left the tent.

“What do we do?” asked Gewey.

“If you are to be bonded in the Chamber of the Maker,” said Linis, “I think I will try to find you some appropriate attire.”

“Won't you be in danger if you go wandering around outside alone?” asked Gewey.

Linis flashed a smile. “I think not. There are few who can hope to attack me and live. Besides, with you and Felsafell around, I doubt I'm of much interest. At least, not yet.” Linis stood and fastened his long knife to his belt. “If I were you, I would take advantage of your time together alone.”

Gewey blushed as Linis departed. Kaylia forced back a laugh.

“Are you nervous?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia took Gewey's hand and kissed him lightly on the cheek. “No - not really. At least, not in the way a human might be.” She could see that Gewey did not understand. “I feel as if I am beginning a new chapter in a life that I know nothing about. This does not make me nervous. It makes me excited.” She scrutinized Gewey for a moment. “And you? How do you feel?”

Gewey thought for a moment. “I don't know. Not for sure. I do know this is what I want. I can feel that in my heart. It's just...”

He shook his head in frustration. “I wish I had the words. But I don't. In truth, I'm still just a simple farmer. I guess I feel small among the company I have been keeping. It's confusing.”

“Even with me?” she asked.

“Especially with you.” he admitted. “You are so far beyond anything my wildest dreams could have imagined. And I'm to be bonded with you. How am I worthy of this? How? Me, a hay farmer from Sharpstone married to an elf princess.”

Kaylia pulled Gewey to her and kissed him again, this time deep and hard. Gewey felt dizzy when she finally released him.

“For a farmer with no words you seem to speak them well,” she whispered. “You are worthy because I deem you worthy. Never forget that. And never forget that it is the company you keep that stands in awe of you.” She stroked his cheek and smiled sweetly. “One more thing - I'm not a princess.”

Gewey gazed deeply into her eyes. For the first time in days, he felt confident and at peace. He took Kaylia's hand and pulled it to his chest. “Thank you.”

Kaylia cocked her head. “For what?”

“For showing me what I must do.”

“And what is that?”

He squeezed her hand then kissed it. “Bond with you. Bond with you, then see to it that we are never in fear again.”

He jumped to his feet and pulled Kaylia up with him. “I guess you should get ready.” He embraced her for a long moment. “As for me - I'll count the minutes.”

Kaylia laughed softly. “It is tradition that I be attended by two elf maids.” She looked around the tent. “Sadly, I seem to lack them.”

As if on cue, two young elf girls dressed in blue satin dresses entered the tent. One carried a thick bundle bound with a thin twine. The other had a large leather bag thrown over her left shoulder. They stopped just inside the tent and bowed.

“We have been sent by Lord Chiron to attend Lady Kaylia,” said the elf holding the bundle.

Kaylia beamed. “A kind gesture. And well received.” She leaned over and kissed Gewey lightly on the cheek, then allowed the two maids to lead her away into the back of the tent.

Gewey took a seat back at the table and nibbled on a piece of bread while waiting for Linis to return. After half an hour, the tent flap opened. But instead of Linis, Akakios entered. He wore a grave expression.

“What's wrong?” asked Gewey.

“Word of your bonding has spread.” he replied. “Lord Theopolou was nearly assaulted.” Gewey jumped up. “How did it happen?”

Akakios peered outside for a moment. “An argument broke out regarding his presiding over the bonding ceremony. Linis stopped it just as knives were being drawn.” He looked around the tent. “Where is Kaylia?”

“She's getting ready,” Gewey answered. “Lord Chiron sent two maids to attend her.”

“That's good,” said Akakios. “The sooner this is over, the better. I have a feeling tensions will keep rising. Perhaps once the two of you are bonded there will be no further need for this nonsense.”

“I wish I could say I am sorry,” remarked Gewey. “But Theopolou knew this could happen. I think he knew it must. Change is always hard. I will not apologize for my bond with Kaylia. It's important. Not only for us, but for everyone.”

Akakios sighed heavily. “When I first met you, those words would have angered me. Now - I think I understand why this must be.”

He walked to the side of the tent and sat in one of the chairs. “I've heard the words of Felsafell. He speaks of us as a broken people. I think he is right to say so. When I hear of the grace and wisdom of my ancestors, I cannot help but long for us to regain what we once were. Not power. Not to be as we were before the Great War. But to be as we were in the times of our legends. I used to think that they were just stories. But now I feel they are more than that.”

He reached behind him and touched a glowing globe that hung from the wall. Sadness washed over his face. “Once we created such things as to rival the craft of the gods. Now...”

“Compared to the darkness and fear that exists in the human world, your people are still great and wise,” Gewey said.

Akakios raised a hand and shook his head. “No. We are not as humans think we are. Not as good, nor as cruel. We have hidden ourselves away for so long that we have become...something else.”

“I'm hoping to change that,” said Gewey. “Perhaps when all is done, the elves can learn how to become what they once were. Perhaps something even greater.” He took a seat next to Akakios. “I've only begun to learn about your legends, but what I've read tells about a people who led open and adventurous lives. I believe it is time for your people to live that way again.”

Akakios turned his head to Gewey and smiled. “Yes, I believe you're right. For too long we have stewed in our own hatred. It is indeed time for us to live in the world again.”

“Indeed,” said Lord Chiron. He was standing just inside the tent wearing a crimson robe tied at the waist by a black silk rope. His long knife peeked out as he moved toward them.

Both Gewey and Akakios stood and bowed.

“Forgive me, My Lord.” said Akakios. “The threat to my Lord Theopolou so close to the Chamber of the Maker caused me to despair.”

“You are right to be upset by such events,” said Chiron. “But we should look to happier matters.” He turned to Gewey. “I trust Kaylia is well attended?”

Gewey bowed again. “She is. I thank you for your kindness.”

Chiron waved his hand. “Not at all. I am honored to have taken part in such a momentous event.” His eyes strayed to the flap leading to the sleeping quarters. “And I shall further my participation by inviting you to join me in my tent until it is time for the ceremony. It would not do to have you here while your future unorem is getting dressed mere feet away.”

“I thank you again,” said Gewey. “But I am still waiting for Linis to return.”

“Akakios can remain here and tell him where you have gone,” said Chiron. “As I understand it, he is combing the encampment for more appropriate attire for you. I doubt he will be successful, and this I can provide.”

“Then lead the way,” said Gewey. He turned to Akakios. “You do not mind waiting?”

“Not at all. The tent should not be unattended in any case, especially with Kaylia and Felsafell both here.”

“Good point,” said Gewey.

Chiron led Gewey out of the tent and through the camp. Along the way Gewey couldn't help but notice the constant stares. Some were of amazement, others of contempt. The sun was now low in the sky and the smell of hundreds of cooking fires filled the air, lending a soft glow to the vast number of tents.

“I can’t imagine what this must look like at night,” muttered Gewey.

“It is quite a sight,” remarked Chiron. “So many have not been gathered here in quite some time.”

Gewey looked north to the domed roof of the Chamber of the Maker. Even before the fullness of night, the lights from a thousand illuminated globes caused it to shine like a shimmering jewel.

“How old is it?” asked Gewey.

“I don't know,” Chiron replied. “Older than history itself, it is said. It was ancient even in the time of my ancestors.”

Gewey marveled at the idea. “It looks as if it were newly built. At least, it does from here.”

Chiron nodded. “The stone never ages. Not that we can tell, at least. It looks just as it did when I was a boy, and never once has it needed repair. A monument to the ancient craft of our people. One long forgotten, I'm afraid.” He looked back over his shoulder. “Perhaps you can change that.”

Chiron's tent was nearly identical to Theopolou's in size, but instead of being silver it was emerald green. Two guards stood just outside the entrance. They bowed as Chiron and Gewey passed. The interior was also similarly set up to Theopolou's tent, apart from the table being oval shaped and colored green to match that of the tent. At least a dozen elves buzzed about. Some Gewey recognized from their journey, other faces were new.

“I presume you have eaten?” said Chiron.

“I have.”

Chiron smiled. “Then allow me to show you to where you'll prepare.”

He led Gewey to the back of the main hall and into the sleeping quarters area. Chiron showed Gewey into the first room along. Unlike his quarters in Theopolou's tent, this room was equipped with a soft bed, a dresser and wardrobe.

“You will find fitting attire here. I will send someone to attend to your grooming shortly.”

Gewey thanked Chiron and explored the contents of the wardrobe. He found a white silk shirt embroidered with the likeness of two eagles facing each other, together with a pair of matching trousers. The fabric was finer than any he had ever felt. A tan vest completed the ensemble.

An elf girl entered with a tray of grooming items. Gewey was thankful he had not yet begun to undress. His hair had grown long since the last time it had been cut in the home of Lord Ganflin - a fact that he hadn't noticed until that very moment. The girl motioned for him to sit and immediately went to work. Unlike the woman who had groomed him the last time, she spoke not a word, nor did she bother to allow him to gaze at his reflection, even though she carried a mirror on her tray.

Once she left, Gewey donned his attire and rummaged around in the wardrobe until he found a pair of black leather boots. They were a bit tight on his feet, but not so much as to prevent him from wearing them. The only thing missing was a belt, so he used the shirt he had just taken off to polish the belt he was already using.

“Are you dressed?” called Chiron from outside Gewey's room.

“Please, come in,” called Gewey.

Chiron entered, dressed in the same white robes he had worn at the home of Theopolou. Chiron scrutinized Gewey for a moment. “You look...acceptable. Though that belt of yours could use some attention.”

“I couldn't find another,” said Gewey. “But this one will do once I've cleaned it a bit more.”

“I could provide you with another if you wish.”

“Thank you, but no,” said Gewey. “This was given to me by the same man who gave me my sword. It may be dingy now, but it's a fine belt when polished. Besides, it fits my scabbard perfectly.”

Gewey had placed his sword on the bed. Chiron eyed the weapon and nodded in its direction. “Might I see it?” he asked.

Gewey picked it up and handed it over. “Certainly. But be careful not to touch the blade. It will burn you.”

“I see,” muttered Chiron as he slid the sword free, careful to touch only the leather that wrapped the hilt. A high-pitched ring filled the air, then faded away.

“A true wonder,” said Chiron. “That you possess this is a miracle. Such things were thought lost. There isn't an elf alive who wouldn't give up everything he or she owned to possess such a sword.”

“They couldn't wield it unless it was truly theirs,” said Gewey. “Once it is first drawn, the blade can only be touched by the one who drew it.”

Chiron re-sheathed and handed the sword back to Gewey, though his eyes never left it. “I see. You should take care never to lose it.”

Gewey suddenly felt uneasy. “I will.”

Chiron blinked and regained his focus. “If you are ready, I would have you join me in the main hall. It may be several hours until Theopolou has everything in order. We can relax there and wait. That is, unless you are tired and would rather sleep. I can certainly provide a bed.”

“I'm anything but tired,” Gewey replied with a grin. “In fact, I wish I could explore the camp.”

“That would not be a good idea, unfortunately.” Chiron chuckled. “You will have to make do with the simple conversation of an old elf.”

Gewey’s cheeks flushed. “I didn't mean...”

Chiron threw his head back in laughter. “I jest. I am not offended. I, too, would like to wander the camp. There are many friends I have not seen in some time. But I fear that my association with Theopolou has lost me many of them.”

“And your support of me, I wager,” Gewey added.

“True.”

Chiron rose to his feet. “Come. Let us relax and tell tales. It may be the last of simple pleasures we have for quite some time.”

Gewey nodded and followed Chiron into the main hall. The table was empty and only a couple of Chiron's guards were visible.

“Where did everybody go?” asked Gewey.

“Most are in the back preparing for the ceremony,” Chiron replied. “The rest are running errands for me.”

Gewey and Chiron took seats on opposite sides of the table. One of the guards brought them a bottle of wine.

“Careful with that,” warned Chiron. “We wouldn't want you too lightheaded.” Gewey stared at the bottle, then pushed it away.

Chiron smiled and ordered a pitcher of water.

They talked of Gewey’s home and upbringing until Linis arrived. It wasn’t until he saw Linis enter that he realized Chiron had not spoken a single word about himself.

“Forgive my absence,” said Linis. “But I've been busy assisting Theopolou. Akakios told me you were here, so I knew you were in good hands.”

“No worries,” said Gewey. “Lord Chiron has kept me quite occupied. Though I regret I must have rambled on. But it's been wonderful to take my mind off things for a bit.”

Chiron bowed his head slightly. “It was a pleasure. So seldom do I have such a chance to hear of the human world.” He turned to Linis. “All is ready?”

“It is,” said Linis. “Theopolou and the others are awaiting us in the Chamber of the Maker. Even Felsafell is there.”

“And Kaylia?” asked Gewey.

Linis laughed heartily. “Don't worry. She will be there as well.”

“Then let us go,” said Chiron.

Gewey’s stomach began to quiver. Suddenly he felt faint. Linis rushed up and put his arm around him.

“He can face the Vrykol,” Linis teased. “But an elf woman makes him weak in the knees.”

Gewey blushed and tried to regain his composure. “I'm fine.”

He took a deep breath. “Let's go.”

Chapter 27

As Gewey left the tent, he was awestruck. In the fullness of night the camp was an ocean of multicolored lights. The tents glowed brightly, their fabrics silhouetted by their inhabitants moving about inside. Although not as bright as the light of day, he could see just as clearly. It was as if a shadow had been removed from his eyes, allowing him to see the cool, natural beauty of the night. He could feel eyes upon him as they walked toward the Chamber.

“Before we enter, you must receive permission from the keepers to enter,” said Chiron.

“The keepers?” said Gewey.

“Guards with a title,” mocked Linis. “Most are elves who didn't have the talent to become seekers.”

Chiron frowned at Linis. “They are more than that, and you know it. They stand watch over all that enters the Chamber of the Maker, and keep the peace within its borders.”

“They are arrogant fools,” grumbled Linis. “It took Theopolou twenty minutes just to convince them to allow him entry. Then it took more than an hour of debate to have them open the Chamber for the bonding.”

“It is well within their right to question petitioners,” said Chiron. “In fact, it is their duty. You should know this.”

“I know that they tried to deny us,” Linis replied. “And that is not within their right.”

“You dwell on things that do not matter, seeker. You should keep your focus on the matter at hand.”

Linis' jaw tightened. “You are right, of course.” But his tone still held a tinge of irritation.

“Do you think they'll try to stop me from getting in?” asked Gewey.

Chiron smiled. “No. That has been dealt with. You will only be following tradition by requesting entry.”

As the entire Chamber slowly came into view, Gewey very nearly gasped out loud. The dome was supported, not by columns, but by a series of immense crystal statues of elf women, their arms held aloft and their eyes turned skyward. The craft and skill needed to carve these was beyond his imagination. Light emanated from the base of each statue, spraying out a myriad of colors that washed over the surrounding area. The statue bases themselves were much like the glowing spheres used to light the houses and tents, but many times more intense. He could feel the power of the earth radiating from the entire structure. There were no walls beyond the statues, and Gewey could see that the interior was in fact a gigantic amphitheater.

The path that led to the main entrance was made from a smooth red stone that radiated the same energy as the building itself. Elves could be seen pouring in, and by the time they were fifty yards away he could hear a cacophony of voices from inside. When he reached the base of the Chamber, he stopped.

“What's wrong?” asked Linis, placing his hand on Gewey's shoulder.

Gewey took a deep breath. “Nothing. Nothing at all.”

“Intimidating sight, is it not?” remarked Chiron.

“Yes, it is,” said Gewey. “It's beautiful as well though. The craft is beyond anything I have ever imagined.”

“If only we could build like this today.” There was a tinge of sadness in Chiron’s voice.

“I think it was more than mere skill with crystal and stone,” said Gewey. “I sense the flow within everything here. I'm sure it was put here. It’s almost like the flow itself was made a part of the structure.”

“Our ancestors were said to have a powerful connection to the earth’s energy,” said Linis. “No doubt they used it in their craft.”

Gewey squared his shoulders and took a deep breath. “How do I look?”

“Ready,” said Linis. “You look ready, my friend.”

Two elves strode up; each one adorned in brightly polished leather armor and helmet, and armed with a curved sword attached to his belt.

“What business do you have at the Chamber of the Maker?” asked the elf on the left. Linis stepped forward. “You know well what we are doing here.”

The keeper ignored Linis and fixed his eyes on Gewey.

“I am here to complete my bond with Kaylia,” he said, his voice clear and strong.

There was a long pause, then both keepers nodded and moved aside. Gewey nodded sharply and marched forward. As he passed into the Chamber of the Maker he could feel the flow growing stronger and stronger until it threatened to penetrate him. He was barely able to keep it at bay.

The Chamber’s interior, though without decoration, was still impressive. The seats were carved from white, silver-veined marble that surrounded the entire hall. In the middle was a smooth floor made from the same crystal as the statues. It glowed with power from the flow, illuminating the entire building. Hundreds of elves filled the seats, talking and whispering, but they all fell silent as Gewey came into their view. Theopolou and Kaylia were already down below on the theater floor. Felsafell, still dressed in his ragged skins and holding his gnarled walking stick, stood quietly, several feet behind them, a quirky smile on his wrinkled face.

Gewey was taken aback at the sight of his future unorem. She was clothed in a silver gown that shimmered in the light of the Chamber. The cloth hung to her curves flawlessly, and though her back was to him, he knew she was smiling. Her hair fell loosely about her shoulders and was decorated with tiny, delicate white flowers. He could feel the bond between them growing stronger with each step he took. He no longer noticed the elves in the gallery.

“Your sword,” whispered Linis.

Gewey removed the blade and carefully handed it over. Linis stayed just behind him as he continued down.

Theopolou’s eyes were closed, his hands folded in front of him. As Gewey finally reached the stage, Theopolou opened his eyes. The old elf held a grave expression, denoting the seriousness of the ceremony.

As he stepped beside Kaylia, Gewey saw the slightest of smiles on her lips. Theopolou bowed slightly and held out his hand, palm down. Gewey and Kaylia slowly dropped to their knees. All voices were silent. All eyes were focused on them.

“We are here on this night to bear witness,” said Theopolou. His voice echoed throughout the Chamber. “The Creator has deemed that the two here before me be bonded in spirit. Their souls forever as one. Their lives, a single life. It has been many years since such a thing has taken place, so it is fitting that these most sacred vows be made here in the Chamber of the Maker for all the elders of our race to see.” He stepped forward and placed a hand on Gewey and Kaylia’s heads. “Is there anyone here that can find just cause to stand against their bond?”

This caused a stir among the crowd. Gewey's heart raced, but no one spoke. “This is good,” Theopolou continued. “Then...”

“I claim the right of pudnaris,” called a voice from the crowd.

Both Kaylia and Gewey turned. From amongst those gathered, a lone elf pushed his way through. He was dressed in plain tan leathers and wore a long knife on his belt. He was tall, nearly as tall as Gewey, though not as broad in the shoulders. His long, silver blond hair was tied back in a tight braid. His eyes were aflame with determination.

“Eftichis,” whispered Kaylia.

“By what right do you challenge?” Theopolou demanded.

Eftichis reached the floor and stood tall, just a few feet away from Gewey. Linis moved in between them.

“Still yourself, seeker,” said Eftichis. “I will do no violence yet.”

“Answer the question,” said Theopolou. “By what right do you challenge?”

“Kaylia was promised to me,” Eftichis replied in a loud, clear voice.

Kaylia sprang to her feet. “I was never promised to you, or to anyone else.”

“You dare to tell untruths in this sacred place?” Eftichis challenged. “Your father made this arrangement during the Great War as a symbol of unity between our families. You were yet to be born, but the promise still holds. Certainly you know this.”

“I know nothing of the sort,” Kaylia countered. “Were you to ever make this claim, I would have refused, and you know it. I am already bonded to Gewey, and I will not be forced to accept a promise made by my father before I was born - if indeed he ever made such a promise.”

“You doubt my honor?” Eftichis asked. “You doubt the word of my father?”

“You think to trick me into naming you a liar,” said Kaylia. “I will not. But if you wish to see the Maker, so be it.”

Eftichis laughed. “You think much of your human mate.”

Gewey rose to his feet and met Eftichis’ gaze. “You speak from ignorance, so I will ask you not to do this. I have no desire to spill your blood. But if you stand between us, I will.”

Gewey allowed the flow to wash over him. Audible gasps came from the gallery.

“I see,” said Eftichis. “It would seem there is more to you than meets the eye. Still, I will not be deterred. Do you accept?”

“He has until sunset tomorrow to answer,” Theopolou interjected.

“I don't need to wait,” snapped Gewey. “I accept. I am sorry. I had hoped I would never have to spill elf blood. But if you force me to, so be it.”

“We will see whose blood will spill, human.” Eftichis sneered. He turned to Theopolou. “And unless you dare to dispute my word, then you have no choice. The right is mine, and I claim it.”

He looked out over the gallery. “Does anyone here question the truth of my claim?”

A full minute passed and the Chamber remained silent. Eftichis smirked with satisfaction.

Theopolou bowed his head and sighed. “Then it is done. When the dawn breaks, you will return here. You may bring with you your weapon, your clothes, and nothing more. One elf of your choosing may stand with you, but he is not to interfere. Do you understand?” Both Gewey and Eftichis nodded.

“A shame, it is,” rang the voice of Felsafell. “To see blood of the young wasted. But blood there will be and nothing more.”

“I have heard you were here,” said Eftichis. “What wisdom do you bring us? Do you think to stop me?”

“No, oh no,” Felsafell replied. “I am no mover of elves or molder of fate.”

“Then why are you here?” called a voice from the crowd.

Felsafell surveyed the gallery, then his eyes fell on Gewey. “I am here to live in the world one last time. Oh, yes, once more before the end. To see a child of heaven walk the earth. To hear the wails of the elves and cries of men. To free my brothers from winter’s cold grasp.” He reached out and took Gewey and Kaylia by the hand. “Come with me. The dawn comes early, and there is much to say.”

The three made their way back out of the Chamber, followed closely by Theopolou and Linis. Once they had reached Theopolou's tent, Felsafell released them and took a seat at the table. Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis did likewise, while Theopolou gave orders to his escort. This done, he joined the rest of the group.

“Did you know this would happen?” Gewey asked Felsafell.

“A fortune teller I am not,” he replied. “Things I know, I do indeed. But the future. A mystery difficult to grasp.”

“I suspected someone may try to stop you,” said Theopolou. “But I never thought Eftichis would lie openly on the Chamber floor.”

“He was lying.” Gewey turned to Kaylia. “Wasn't he?”

Kaylia stared down at the table. “Perhaps. His father was close to mine. They fought together during the Great War. If he promised me to another, I was never told. But I suppose it is possible. Eftichis would have been a good match for me had my life taken another path.”

A pang of jealousy shot through Gewey, but Kaylia smiled and placed her hand on his.

“You will have to kill him,” said Linis. “There is no way to avoid it.”

“Perhaps,” said Felsafell. “Always choices. Always new roads to travel. Listen to me, child of heaven.” His eyes fixed on Gewey. “My time in this place is at an end. A new road I must travel. But this you must know. The cold of the north comes swifter than you can imagine. Not ready to face it are you, but you must. Hard choices you will make, and many deaths will you see. Your true mother will soon be revealed, and with this knowledge will come madness. Your bonded mate will save you if you allow it. But the cost may be more than you can bear.”

He rose to his feet. “One last thing. Do not falter. Do not retreat, and all will be overcome.” With that, he walked toward the back of the tent. “Until the morning I remain, I will. Then off to free my kin.” He pushed back the flap and disappeared down the hall.

“I really don't understand him,” said Gewey.

“You're telling me that he walked all this way, just to tell you that?” said Linis. “Now he's leaving?”

“Felsafell has his own reasons,” said Theopolou. “He comes and goes as he pleases and speaks in his own time. Besides, I think you have more urgent matters to attend to.”

Gewey nodded. “Is there anything I should know about Eftichis?”

“He's strong,” said Kaylia. “Had his father not been the leader of his people, he would have likely been a seeker. It is known that he has great skill with a weapon. You should be cautious.”

“Indeed,” said Theopolou. “Do not underestimate him, as he will underestimate you. Though your display in the Chamber will have given him pause, not to mention the others watching. The best thing you can do is get some rest and gather your strength. In the morning you will face him, and we shall see.”

“I wish there was another way,” Gewey grumbled. “Why must everything be life or death? I really don't want to kill him.”

“But kill him you must,” said Theopolou. “Otherwise Kaylia will be taken from you, and there will be nothing I can do to stop it.”

Gewey’s fist clenched until his knuckles turned white. “Then death it is.”

Kaylia put her arm gently around Gewey's shoulders. “This will only be the first of many, I fear. But I'll be with you until the end.”

“I'm afraid you are not allowed to attend the pudnaris,” said Theopolou. “You must remain here until it is over.”

Kaylia turned to Theopolou, her eyes burning with fury. “I will not wait here while Gewey faces death.”

“Yes, you will,” said Theopolou. “You have no choice.”

“Don't worry,” said Linis. “I'll be with him. I know he will prevail.”

Kaylia scowled. “The moment it is over, I expect you to send word.” She turned to Gewey. “And you - show no mercy. I will not have you killed. Forget everything else. Just win.”

Gewey smiled and said, “I will, I swear.” He kissed her lightly on the forehead. “I haven't come this far to die now.”

“Then you should rest while you can,” said Theopolou. He rose to his feet. “As should I.”

“How are you feeling now? Are you still being…drained?” asked Gewey.

“No. It ended once we neared the Chamber. Whatever the cause, it has no effect in this place. Do not be concerned. We have more pressing matters at hand.”

“Agreed,” said Linis. He looked at Gewey. “Come. I know it will be difficult, but you need to at least try to rest.”

Gewey gave a deep sigh and nodded. “I'll try.”

Linis led Gewey to his room, Kaylia immediately behind them.

“Don't worry,” Gewey said to her just before he entered. “I'll be fine.”

Kaylia smiled sweetly and put her hand on his cheek. “I know.”

Through their bond, she allowed him to share her emotions. Gewey's heart pounded as he felt the love come pouring through. He watched as Kaylia walked away, then went inside.

Linis smiled broadly.

“What?” said Gewey, suddenly embarrassed.

“Nothing,” Linis replied, still smiling. “You have come a long way since I first met you in that tavern. Even then I knew there was strength in you. But I think Kaylia has made you invincible. I pity Eftichis.”

“I'm trying not to think about it,” said Gewey. “I know what I have to do. But I still wish there was another way. I've killed before, but this time it's different.”

“Why?” asked Linis. “Because it's an elf?”

He shook his head. “Listen to me, Gewey. This will not be the last time you will face one of my kind. There is a split among my people. The idea of a second split once weighed heavily enough on our hearts to prevent it. But now it is inevitable. The world is changing, and the new ways are struggling with the old. I regret to say that means more blood will be spilled. We have already been attacked once by our own kin.”

Gewey remembered the assassin, and the hatred in his eyes.

“War is upon us,” Linis continued. “And this time the victor will shape the future for both races. Even the most reluctant elf knows this. When you face Eftichis in the morning, you are fighting for much more than just you and Kaylia. Your victory will see that your voice is heard by all elves. Many think humans weak and without honor. Tomorrow you will show them differently.”

“But I'm not human,” argued Gewey. “Not really.”

“That may be,” Linis countered. “But you were raised as one. You have their values, and you are what is best in men. The strength I speak of has nothing to do with a sword, though admittedly it helps. That you have the courage to face the elders and speak your mind shows the rest of my people true power. That you fight for the bond between you and Kaylia shows that you will not be deterred, and should be treated with respect.”

He placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “Tomorrow is about more than the pudnaris. By striking down those who would challenge your rights, you send a message that will echo throughout all the elf nations.”

Gewey's face twisted into a sour frown. “Thanks. Nothing like a bit of pressure just before a life and death struggle.”

Linis chuckled. “I think you can handle it. But sleep now. I will keep watch.”

“For what?” Gewey began to remove his clothes.

“Who knows?” Linis replied and dimmed the light.

Gewey lay down on his bed and closed his eyes. At first he tried to calm his mind and sleep, but soon realized that this was not going to happen. He decided to reach out to Kaylia, hoping that Theopolou wasn't able to block him, though he couldn't imagine any reason why he would. To his relief, he found her. As their spirits became one, his body relaxed and he became lost in the sheer emotion.

Is this what it will be like after we're completely joined? he asked.

It will be better, replied Kaylia. Much better.

Chapter 28

Yanti lounged inside his cabin aboard the Moon Shadow. It was sturdy, as river vessels go, though not as lavish as he would have liked. But the wine was good and the food passable. It had taken them quite some time to navigate the delta and enter the Goodbranch River; pushing against the wind and current with oars made for slow progress.

Fortunately, he was in no hurry. Plans were already in motion, and his direct intervention was no longer necessary, at least for now. There was a soft rap at the door. He took a sip of brandy and got to his feet.

“Enter.”

The door opened and Braydon, the first mate, stepped timidly inside. “Beg your pardon, My Lord.”

“What is it?” Yanti asked irritably. He did not care much for midday interruptions.

“A small craft has pulled alongside.” A bead of perspiration appeared on Braydon’s brow. “Says he has a message for you.”

Yanti furled his brow. “Did he give his name?”

“No, my lord,” Braydon replied. “But I don't like the looks of 'im - all covered in black, and all. He smells foul too. Like death. And his voice. He hisses more than speaks, he does.”

“Let him on board and bring him to me. And be quick.”

Braydon bowed awkwardly and hurried off.

A few minutes later the door swung open and there stood the figure of a man covered in a long black cloak. His face was hidden, but Yanti could hear a slow growl coming from beneath the hood. Braydon stood just behind, his face pale and fearful.

“You may go,” said Yanti to the first mate, who eagerly did as instructed. The door slammed shut and Yanti took a seat, crossing his legs in his usual aristocratic fashion. “To what do I owe the pleasure of a visit from the Vrykol? I assume our Lord knows you are here.”

“He knows,” the Vrykol hissed. “He knows much. He knows of your plans and is unhappy. They will not succeed.”

Yanti cracked a smile. “Unhappy you say - I see. Well, my pungent friend, we shall see how unhappy he is when I deliver the godling to him, as well as his elf mate.” He picked up his brandy and held it under his nose for a moment. “All is in order, I assure you. Oh, and he can look forward to having Lee Starfinder among the converted as well.”

“The Great Lord is not so optimistic,” said the Vrykol. “He foresees problems.”

“What kind of problems?” Yanti tried to conceal his concerns.

The Vrykol reached inside his robes and withdrew a sealed letter. Yanti took it, doing his best not to touch the Vrykol.

“By the by,” Yanti remarked. “A bit bold of you to be out in the open, don't you think?”

The Vrykol gurgled with grotesque laughter. “The Master has perfected us. Only a few mindless beasts still roam. Humans fear us and choose what they see or don't see.”

“Then I can look forward to more visits, I take it,” said Yanti.

“No,” replied the Vrykol. “I will stay with you - until the end.”

Yanti scowled. “Then I hope your kind can bathe.” He opened the letter, reading it carefully. “Wait here,” he said, getting to his feet.

Stuffing the letter inside his jacket, Yanti threw open the door and made his way on deck where he found the captain busy navigating the river. The sun was high in the sky and there was a winter chill in the air, despite the fact that they were still far south. His Master’s doing.

“Pull along the bank and retrieve my horse from the hold,” Yanti ordered as he strode up. “I'll be getting off here.”

Captain Tarn, a stout, broad-shouldered man, did not shift his eyes away from the river. Unlike the first mate, he was clearly not intimidated by Yanti. “Not here,” he said gruffly. “Too dangerous.”

“Here,” Yanti demanded. “Now.” Tarn ignored him.

Yanti turned and sought out the first mate. He found him in the galley eating a bowl of fish stew.

“Can you pilot this vessel?” asked Yanti.

“Aye,” Braydon replied. “As well as the skipper, I'd say.”

“Good,” said Yanti. “Come with me.”

Confused, the first mate pushed his bowl aside and chased after Yanti, who was already making his way back on deck. The moment the captain came into view, Yanti drew a small dagger. Before Braydon could utter any kind of protest, Yanti hurled the weapon. The captain's eye shot wide as the blade buried itself deep into his throat. He grabbed at the knife, falling to his knees and letting out a gurgling groan. Blood poured from his throat and mouth. Yanti walked slowly over and with one strong kick, sent the man crashing through the railing and into the river. Three sailors stepped forward, but backed away when Yanti drew his sword.

“You are promoted.” Yanti smiled as if nothing had happened. “Now land on the bank and retrieve my horse from the hold.”

Braydon gaped in stunned silence. Yanti snapped his fingers, bringing the first mate out of his stupor.

“Get to it,” Yanti ordered.

Braydon grabbed the wheel and carefully guided the boat to the western bank while one of the deck hands retrieved Yanti's horse from below.

Yanti returned to his cabin and gathered his belongings. The Vrykol stood patiently in the corner.

“I hope you don't mind walking,” Yanti said, feigning concern. “We have far to go.”

The Vrykol made no response and followed Yanti topside. The gangplank had been lowered, though it did not quite reach the shore.

“This is as close as we could get without running aground, My Lord,” Braydon explained, his voice filled with trepidation.

Yanti looked at the first mate for a long moment, then turned to stow his belongings onto his saddle. At the same time, the Vrykol leaped to the shore with unworldly strength, drawing gasps and murmurs of amazement from the crew.

“If I were you, I would forget you ever saw me - or my companion.” Yanti mounted his horse. He reached into the pouch on his belt and held up a silver coin. “Do we understand each other?”

“I...I understand,” replied Braydon, trembling.

Yanti tossed the first mate the coin and urged his horse down the gangplank. He cursed as water drenched his boots. For a moment he considered returning to kill the first mate, but dismissed the idea. Braydon had already ordered his men to pull up the plank and shove off.

“I know your kind are fast,” Yanti said to the waiting Vrykol. “You will need to be.” He spurred his horse west into a dead run, not bothering to see if the Vrykol was following. He knew the creature was not far behind.

He reached into his jacket and touched the letter. He would not allow his plans to fail - even if it meant that the godling had to die.

Chapter 29

“It is time,” said Linis.

Gewey opened his eyes slowly, allowing the connection with Kaylia to slip away. He felt rested and strong. The echo of Kaylia’s final thought rang through his mind. I'm with you always. He sat up, swung his legs over the side of the bed, and stretched.

“I've laid out your clothes.” Linis told him, nodding to the corner. “I've chosen soft leather for you. It will allow you to move freely, while giving you some protection.”

Gewey smiled. “Thank you.” He rose to his feet and dressed. As he attached his sword to his belt, Theopolou entered. Akakios followed just behind.

“I will be awaiting you in the Chamber,” said Theopolou. His eyes were somber, and for the first time Gewey noticed age on his face creeping in. “You should wait here for only a few minutes after I leave. I am told Eftichis is already there.”

Gewey's lips tightened. His connection with Kaylia had released the stress of the coming fight, but the mention of his opponent’s name brought it flooding back. “I'll be there. Is Felsafell with you?”

“No,” Theopolou replied. “He was already gone when I went to his room.” Before Gewey could reply, Theopolou and Akakios bowed and left.

Gewey took a deep breath and squared his shoulders.

“Remember why you fight,” said Linis. “And remember what you are. To face you is to face death.”

This stabbed at Gewey. He knew it was true. Since leaving his small village, death had become a part of his existence. He had killed many times. Now he was to once more be the bringer of death. He steeled his wits. So be it.

Linis studied Gewey for a moment. “Good. You have the same look in your eyes that Lee had, just before he fought Berathis.”

Gewey checked his sword and moved to the room’s exit. “I know what I must do.” With that, he pushed back the flap and made his way into the main hall.

Following Theopolou’s instructions, he waited there for only a few minutes before leaving. Once outside of the tent, the chill of the morning air washed over him. He filled his lungs and surveyed his surroundings. The camp was quiet. Only a few scattered elves roamed about. Gewey guessed that most were already waiting in the Chamber of the Maker to witness the pudnaris. The stillness made him shiver.

As he made his way to the Chamber, the few elves he encountered stared at him, not with hatred as he would have thought, but in wonder.

“Why are they looking at me like that?” Gewey asked.

“They marvel at your courage,” Linis replied. “I imagine most thought you would flee.”

“Perhaps I should,” Gewey joked. “Maybe I should just grab Kaylia and head east.”

“I wish that were possible, my friend. If it were, I might even come with you.”

“I doubt that very much,” said Gewey, with a short laugh.

The Chamber of the Maker was no less impressive by day. In fact, the light of the morning sun caused it to glow even brighter that last time he had seen it. As they approached, the rumble of the crowd grew more intense. Gewey dreaded the silence his arrival would cause. His heart pounded in anticipation. Just as he reached the entrance, he spotted Felsafell leaning lazily against the statue base. He was dressed in his customary skins, and carried his gnarled walking stick.

“I see you come,” said Felsafell. “I see you go.”

“Aren't you coming inside?” asked Gewey.

“I care not for fighting,” he replied. “No, indeed. When the young fights the younger, sadness only - sadness and pain. I wish not to see such things, oh, no.”

“Then you are leaving?” asked Linis.

“For now,” answered Felsafell. He took a few steps forward. “We'll meet soon enough. Again and again, I think.”

“You know more than you're saying,” said Gewey.

Felsafell grinned impishly. “I know much. I tell much. But do not tell all, as I do not know all. Find your road child of heaven. I'll meet you alongside.” As he walked past Gewey and Linis, he stopped and pressed a small key into Gewey's hand. It was gold, and bore no markings.

“What's this for?” Gewey asked.

“What is a key for, you ask.” Felsafell laughed. “You know this already. Oh, yes, you do. And now I say farewell.” He continued until he was out of sight. Gewey shoved the key into his pocket and looked at Linis, who only shrugged.

“I suppose it's just another one of his mysteries,” said Gewey. “If I live through this, maybe I'll solve it.”

The moment he and Linis entered, the Chamber fell silent. He peered down to the Chamber floor. There stood Theopolou, Eftichis, and another elf who Gewey assumed was Eftichis' second. Eftichis was dressed as he had been the night before, with a long knife hanging loosely from his belt.

As Gewey approached, his eyes met with his opponent’s. Their gazes locked for what seemed like an eternity. Gewey knew that soon those eyes would be dull and lifeless by his hand. He pushed the thought from his mind and turned his attention to Theopolou.

Theopolou addressed Eftichis. “I ask you one last time to withdraw from this challenge.”

Eftichis drew his weapon slowly and leveled his gaze. “I will not.” His voice was even more determined and commanding than the previous night. “This human, shall either flee, never to return, or die.”

Gewey drew his weapon, allowing it to take in the flow. The power within him rapidly grew until the very foundation of the Chamber trembled. The world around him seemed to grow smaller and insignificant. The elves before him, as well as those in the gallery, were as children to his eyes. The Chamber of the Maker itself was at his command. He had never before felt so much of the flow passing through him.

Then it occurred to him. The building itself had been created by channeling such power. Inside this structure, it was as if a river with the power of the earth had become a raging hurricane. He took another look at Eftichis. The elf was now clearly frightened, though he was trying hard to mask it.

“I ask you one last time,” Gewey's voice boomed, causing the others to wince. “Do not do this.”

“What are you?” screamed a voice from the crowd.

“Demon,” cried another.

“I am no demon,” Gewey said to the crowd. “You will find out soon enough what I am.” He turned back to Eftichis. “Do you still wish to fight me?” He tried to lessen his hold on the flow, but it was replaced with an aching sadness, along with a yearning for its return. Still, after a few moments, he managed to release it.

“Now more than ever.” The elf, though shaken, was grimly determined. “I would not have one of my kin bonded to such a creature, nor would I have my people follow you to their doom.” Gewey was taken aback.

“Oh, yes,” Eftichis continued. “I know why you are here. We all do. And I would spit my last breath in your face before standing by your side.” This brought cheers from several throughout the gallery.

“Give me your knife,” Gewey said to Linis, as he sheathed his sword.

Linis did as he was asked. “What are you doing?”

“Only what I have to,” Gewey whispered, then turned back to Eftichis. “Linis shall hold my blade and I shall fight with his.” He removed his sword and gave it to Linis. Linis opened his mouth to protest, but a quick glance from Gewey stopped him short.

“What is this?” Eftichis demanded. “You think to mock me?”

Gewey examined the knife, then looked up. “I am not mocking you. If I use that sword, you will die without a fight. I would not see you come to such an end. If I have to kill you, you will die with honor.”

Eftichis could only stare in amazement. “Are you certain?” asked Theopolou.

Gewey nodded and stepped forward. “Linis has trained me well, as has Kaylia, my future unorem. I will not have our union tainted by dishonor.”

Eftichis removed his long knife and took a dagger from his second to replace it. “Then we shall face each other as equals.”

Gewey smiled as he felt the flow entering his opponent. Though it was far less than he himself could channel, it was nearly as much as Linis, or even Theopolou, would be able to manage.

Theopolou, Linis, and Eftichis' second backed away to the edge of the platform.

“Are you ready?” Eftichis’ voice dripped with menace.

Gewey crouched low and allowed the power to rush through him. “I'm ready.” This time the flow was much less than before. And though he could feel the power held within the Chamber, he could no longer use it. He waited for Eftichis to lunge.

He didn't have to wait long. The elf rushed at Gewey with blinding speed, fast enough to rival even Lee, but instead of striking directly, the elf rolled left and slashed at Gewey's right thigh. Gewey was only just able to avoid the cut as he spun away.

Eftichis smiled with satisfaction. “You have been well trained, I see.” The dagger shifted in his grasp. “That is good.”

Again the elf charged, but this time he did not strike. Instead he whirled around and pushed Gewey's shoulder hard with his empty hand. Gewey nearly lost his balance and staggered back a couple of steps. Eftichis pressed his attack, attempting to drive his knife into Gewey's stomach and only just missing.

Gewey knew what he needed to do. He drew back, allowing his blade to hang loosely in his hand. Bring him close.

Once again Eftichis charged, but this time Gewey was ready. Eftichis feigned left, then thrust underneath Gewey's guard. Gewey caught the arm of his attacker and heaved upwards, sending the elf sprawling.

Gewey did not hesitate. He sprang after his opponent and slashed the hand that wielded the knife. To Gewey's surprise, the elf somehow managed to regain his footing and flip the dagger into his other hand. Blood gushed from the open wound onto the pristine floor.

“Well struck.” Eftichis grimaced in pain. “But this fight is far from over yet.”

In a flash, Eftichis was on Gewey again, twisting, and thrusting - driving him back. Gewey tried to counter, but the elf's skill was astounding. Even with the power flowing through him, he was only just able to avoid being slashed to ribbons. Finally, Gewey saw an opening. The elf dodged left, attempting to get behind him, but he stepped just a hair too far. Instead of bringing his blade down, Gewey’s left hand came across, his fist smashing hard into the temple of Eftichis. The elf staggered and fell to one knee. Gewey raced in, grabbing his opponent’s wrist and twisting hard. As Eftichis’ knife slid across the floor, Gewey pinned him firmly down.

“You must yield to me,” he demanded.

Eftichis' eyes were aflame with fury. “We do not yield, human! Finish it and be done.”

“You would have me end your life?” asked Gewey. He released the elf and got to his feet. “As you would end mine?” He turned his back.

Eftichis glanced at his dagger several feet away, but made no move to retrieve it. “I would. It is our way.”

Gewey spun around and tossed his dagger onto the floor directly in front of Eftichis. “Then kill me.”

Eftichis reached down and picked up Gewey's weapon. He stared at it for a long moment before rising slowly to his feet.

Gewey walked up to Eftichis and placed his hand on the elf's shoulder. Eftichis tried to back away, but Gewey held him fast.

“What are you doing?” the elf cried. “This is not...”

“Not what?” said Gewey. “You want me dead. You think my bond with Kaylia is wrong. So kill me.”

Their eyes met.

“Do it,” Gewey whispered. “Or yield.”

Eftichis pressed the knife to Gewey's chest. The gallery was silent. Then came the sound of metal against stone as the dagger fell to the floor. Eftichis dropped to his knees and bowed his head. “I yield.” He raised his head and looked to Theopolou. “I release my claim and yield to the mercy of my adversary.”

Theopolou stood silent for a moment, then stepped forward. “Gewey Stedding. The life and honor of this elf is yours. What shall you do with it?”

“Eftichis is master of his own life,” replied Gewey. His voice echoed throughout the Chamber. “As for his honor - in my eyes, it is without question.”

Theopolou bowed his head slowly. “Then the pudnaris is at an end.”

The twang of a bow sounded. Gewey, still awash in the flow, saw the arrow coming and twisted his body just as it reached him. He felt a sharp pain as it tore through his shirt and cut across his chest.

A voice cried out from the entrance. “We are attacked!”

Suddenly, the entrance was flooded with sword-wielding elves clad in black leather armor. The gallery erupted. Elves from the gallery drew their swords, trying to make their way into the fray, while the attackers cut down all who stood in their way.

“Gewey!” Linis tossed him his sword and drew his own long knife. Gewey turned to Theopolou. “Get behind me.”

Another arrow whizzed through the air, striking Eftichis' second in the chest. The elf fell, desperately grasping the shaft.

Gewey drew his sword, holding the scabbard in his left hand. The flow raged inside him. The sound of clashing steel rang throughout the Chamber as he lowered his eyes, drawing in more and more power. The building shook violently, throwing many of the combatants off their feet. Gewey's eyes snapped open and the world in front of him became chaos as the very air appeared to contract and then explode. Attackers and members of the gallery alike were thrown aside like paper dolls by the blast, leaving a clear path to the entrance.

“With me,” shouted Gewey as he started up.

Linis, Theopolou, and Eftichis filed in behind him. By the time they reached the top, several of the attackers had recovered and were moving in to cut them off. Gewey cleaved the first nearly in two. Linis took down the second. This gave the others pause, allowing their escape.

Bursting out of the Chamber, Gewey’s eyes scanned the campsite. Fires had erupted everywhere, and the screams of the dying sent a chill to the pit of his stomach. There was only one thought in his head. “Kaylia!” he screamed, taking off in the direction of Theopolou's tent.

The sights of battle were a blur as Gewey ran straight through the camp. One of the attackers tried to stand in his way, but Gewey cut him down without even pausing. Finally, he reached the tent. It was untouched.

“Kaylia!” he shouted again as he burst inside, ripping the flap to shreds. There was no answer. He rushed to her room, only to find she was not there. From room to room he rapidly searched, but there was no sign of her anywhere.

Linis and the others finally arrived. “Where's Kaylia?” the seeker exclaimed.

“She's gone!” cried Gewey, and started to leave the tent again. Theopolou stood in his way.

“Think, Gewey,” said the old elf. “The camp is too big and the battle still rages. You will not find her like that.”

“Out of my way,” Gewey commanded, his eyes dark with rage.

“Use your bond,” Theopolou continued. “Use it to find her.”

The sense of what Theopolou was saying suddenly got through to Gewey. Lowering his head, his chest trembling with each breath, he tried to calm his mind and reach out to her. At first there was nothing. Then, like a faint light, he found her. “She's alive,” he exclaimed, unable to contain his joy. “But I can't find where she is. It's like there’s a shroud around her.”

“It would take someone powerful to accomplish this,” said Theopolou. “I was only able to do such a thing in my own home.”

“How do we find her?” asked Linis.

Gewey's jaw tightened “I know how.” He walked to the entrance. “Wait here.”

Linis stepped forward, but Gewey’s eyes stopped him short. “Be careful,” was all he could say before Gewey disappeared from view.

“What is he doing?” asked Eftichis.

“Getting a prisoner,” Linis replied. “And woe be unto him, if he does not tell Gewey what he wants to know.”

“Should we not help the others?” said Eftichis. “The elders...”

“One of whom stands before you,” shot Linis. “The others are well protected. I doubt that whoever attacked us could pass their guards. Until we know what has happened, we protect Lord Theopolou.”

Minutes seemed like hours as the party waited for Gewey's return. As the sounds of battle filtered in, Eftichis grew more unsettled.

“I can wait no longer,” he roared. “Our kin are dying.”

Barely were the words out of his mouth when the body of a black-clad elf flew through the door and slid onto the table. Gewey entered just behind, his face and clothes covered in blood. The elf groaned and rolled onto his back.

Linis rushed over and held his blade to the elf's neck. He then glanced back to Eftichis. “Watch the door,” he ordered. Eftichis quickly obeyed.

“The attackers are moving away,” said Gewey. “I caught this one about to set fire to the tent.”

He knelt down over his captive. “Now you will tell me everything I want to know.” The elf glared defiantly.

A malicious smile crept over Gewey's face. He reached down and ripped open the elf's shirt. “I'll ask you one time...”

He placed the flat of his blade on the elf's chest. The sizzle of burning flesh immediately rose up.

The elf winced with pain, but his jaw tightened. “A curse on you,” he hissed.

Gewey turned the blade, allowing the edge to dig into the elf's flesh. “Not the words I wanted to hear. And you didn't wait for my question.”

He pressed the blade in harder. “Where is Kaylia?”

The elf moaned, but said nothing.

“Gewey,” warned Linis.

Gewey ignored him. He began to drag the blade across the elf's chest. “If you don't start to answer me, I'm going to cut you apart - piece by piece.”

“Gewey,” said Linis again, this time more forcefully. Gewey glared at him, but Linis was undeterred.

“Stop this,” said Linis. “This is not what you want on your heart.”

“I think I do,” snarled Gewey. “And I think that if he doesn't tell me what I want to know, I'll make good on my promise.” He pressed the blade even deeper.

The elf wailed, and the smell of burning flesh filled the tent.

“Allow Linis and I to do this,” said Theopolou. “If we fail, then you may do as you wish with him.”

“Please,” said Linis.

Gewey paused, glaring at his captive with hatred. Then, in one smooth motion, he released his hold and walked to the entrance.

“Make it fast,” he said, staring outside at the smoldering tents. The sound of fighting had faded, replaced by the cries of the wounded and the sobs of the survivors.

Linis dragged the captive to the back of the tent and bound his hands and feet. He and Theopolou leaned in close, speaking in soft whispers. After several minutes, Theopolou rose to his feet and walked over to Gewey.

“They have taken her north, toward the steppes,” said Theopolou. “Along with the Book of Souls.”

“So the northern tribes are responsible for this,” growled Eftichis in disgust.

“It would seem,” Theopolou affirmed.

“I leave now,” said Gewey. “They can't have gone far.”

“True,” Theopolou agreed. “But I don't think the northern tribes could have acted alone. They knew exactly when to strike.”

“Then we were betrayed,” said Linis.

“Yes,” said Theopolou. “That seems certain. But betrayed by whom?”

“Bellisia?” Linis offered.

“Possibly,” Theopolou replied. “Though not likely. I can think of no one who would do this.”

“I don't care who did it,” said Gewey. “The only thing I care about is getting Kaylia back.” He pushed his way past Theopolou and Linis, and stalked to his room. A few minutes later he returned wearing a set of brown travel leathers, his sword, and a small pack thrown across his back. He took a moment to stare at his captive, then walked to the entrance.

“Gewey,” said Theopolou. “I understand your urgency. You are bonded to her, but she is also my niece. Allow me one hour to gather more information. I fear you will fail if you simply march off without knowing what you face. If we were betrayed, you could be walking into a trap.” He placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “Just one hour.”

Linis walked over and placed his hand on Gewey’s other shoulder. “Give him one hour. Besides, I'll need to scout their trail to find out where they have taken her. That will take time.” He met Gewey's eyes. “I promise we will find her.”

Gewey muscles tensed and his body shuddered. He let out a terrifying scream. “One hour,” he roared. “That's all.”

Theopolou nodded. “Stay with him, Linis.” He turned to Eftichis. “Come with me.”

The two left the tent. Gewey watched as they vanished into the smoke and carnage. “One hour,” he muttered through his teeth.

Chapter 30

Gewey paced the tent, occasionally stopping to look outside for Theopolou's return.

“Try to be calm,” advised Linis. “You must have your wits about you if you want to save her.”

Gewey took a deep breath. He knew Linis was right. He must be able to think clearly. He reached out once again, attempting to touch Kaylia's mind, but the result was the same. No matter how hard he tried, he could only sense that she lived. Whatever was blocking him was indeed powerful. He prayed they would not harm her.

“Why would they take her, anyway?” asked Gewey. “Why single her out?”

“I can only imagine the purpose is to get to you,” Linis replied. “Strong leverage.”

“If they harm her...” The words stuck in Gewey’s throat.

“You cannot let such thoughts enter your mind,” said Linis. “They will cloud your judgment and cause you to make a mistake that could cost both of you your lives.” He handed Gewey a rag. “Clean your sword and recheck your gear. Make certain you have everything you need.”

Gewey nodded and obeyed. He soon realized that he had not packed any clothing for Kaylia. She might well need some. He searched her room, rummaging through her wardrobe until he found a set a travel clothes. He could smell her scent everywhere, and tears welled in his eyes. Swallowing hard, he focused his mind.

By the time he’d finished, Theopolou had returned. Chiron, Bellisia, Syranis, and Eftichis stood beside him.

“Where are the others?” asked Linis.

“Lord Aneili was slain,” said Theopolou. “Lord Endymion and Lady Leora were injured in the fray and are being tended to. The rest are gathering nearby.”

“Have you figured out who is responsible?” asked Gewey.

“Not yet,” answered Chiron. “But we will.”

“We should join the others,” said Eftichis.

“Indeed,” said Theopolou. “But first - what to do with our captive?”

“I would like the chance to question him,” said Chiron.

“As would I,” agreed Bellisia.

“As you wish,” said Theopolou. “But I doubt you will learn anything I have not. I do not think he has any answers that can help us. Those who planned this attack would not have allowed anyone to know too much.”

“All the same, I will try,” said Chiron.

As Bellisia, Syranis, and Chiron approached the captive elf, Bellisia noticed the wounds on his chest. Her eyes met Gewey's with disapproval, but he met her gaze unmoved.

Chiron knelt beside him. “What is your name?”

The elf looked broken and weary. “I have told you all that I am willing to say.” He turned his head and looked away. “Kill me and be done with it. Or better yet, give me to the human. I'm sure he would love to make sport of me.”

“You attacked your own kin,” said Bellisia. “And you took a captive, one bonded to this human. You are fortunate he is human and not an elf. An elf would have made more of you than sport.”

She moved closer. “An elf would have you screaming so loudly, it would wake your ancestors.” She drew even closer, forcing him to meet her eyes. Her voice dropped to a whisper “And if Kaylia dies, I will give you to him.”

Fear struck the elf, but he forced it down. “All I know is that you have a traitor among you.” He closed his eyes. “I will say nothing more.”

Bellisia stood up and turned to Theopolou. “Kill him,” she said, lowering her head. “But do it without pain.”

“No,” shouted Gewey. “His life is mine.”

“And just what will you do with it?” asked Bellisia. “Will you kill him? Do you wish to torture him further?”

Gewey was speechless.

“Then allow this elf to die,” said Bellisia. “Without pain.”

“Release him,” said Gewey.

The elders stared at Gewey, stunned.

“Release him?” exclaimed Syranis. “Don't be a fool.”

“Linis and Theopolou were right to stop me when I was torturing this elf,” said Gewey. “Though I did not see it.” He closed his eyes and steadied his nerves. “I will not kill him - I will not murder a helpless person. That will not be on my soul.”

Linis placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “Is this the best way? If we let him go, our enemies will gain knowledge.”

“Then keep him captive,” offered Gewey.

“How shall we do this?” asked Theopolou. “We have no prison. Our people are reeling from the attack. Where should we keep him?” He drew his knife. “Unless you intend to take him with you, there is nowhere for him.”

“It just feels wrong,” said Gewey.

“Did it feel wrong when you were cutting into his flesh?” Bellisia challenged. “If Linis and Theopolou had not stopped you, would you be so kind now? This elf attacked his own kin and abducted your bonded mate. His death is warranted.”

“You're right,” said Gewey. “If I had continued to hurt him, my heart would have changed. I see that now. And I'm grateful I didn't.” He met Bellisia's eyes. “How could I face Kaylia with a stain on my heart?”

“If you wish him to live,” said Bellisia, “you can only release him.” She looked down at their captive. “Would you like that? Would you simply wander off, and not warn your kin that Gewey is coming for them?”

The elf squirmed and shifted until he could meet Gewey's eyes. “If you wish to let me go, then you have nothing to fear from me. I will not interfere. I will go east. This I swear.” He lowered his eyes. “But they are right. You can only kill me. It is what I would do in your place.”

Gewey's eyes narrowed and he straightened his back. “You will wait until I am gone three days, then release him. If his word is good, then he will not follow. If he does - he had better pray that we do not meet again.”

“I do not agree with this,” said Theopolou. “But I will do as you ask. I will have what remains of my guard to watch him.” He called outside and two elves entered. He instructed them to guard the prisoner.

“We should meet with the others,” said Chiron.

They made their way through the smoldering ruins of the camp to the field near the bridge. Gewey could see more than a hundred elves gathered there in a loose circle.

Several yards away, a pavilion was being erected to house the wounded. From the crowd, Akakios came limping toward them carrying a bundle under his arm. His leg was bandaged and his left cheek bore a deep gash.

“My lord,” said Akakios. “It is good to see you unharmed.”

“Thank you,” said Theopolou. “I feared you were slain.”

“I nearly was,” he replied. “I have only just bandaged my leg. I was caught in the tempest Gewey unleashed when you made your escape.”

“I'm sorry,” said Gewey. “I didn't mean...”

Akakios held up his hand. “You saved the life of my lord and an elder of our people. A small price. Besides - I live.”

He smiled before continuing. “I do have some good news, My Lord. I was stopped by Felsafell just before I entered the Chamber of the Maker. You had already descended to the floor.” He handed Theopolou the bundle. “He gave me this and told me to place it back with you.”

As Theopolou unwrapped it, his eyes widened. “The Book of Souls,” he whispered. “This is good news.”

“But that means Felsafell must have known of the attack,” said Chiron. “And that he refused to warn us.”

“Perhaps,” Theopolou replied. “Perhaps not. I do not pretend to understand the motives of Felsafell. But the fact that he safeguarded the Book of Souls means we have not lost hope.” He turned to Gewey. “I must ask one more thing of you before you leave.” He handed Gewey the box containing the Book. “You must open it and read from its pages.”

Gewey ran his fingers over the smooth, polished wood. “Then we must do it now. I will not wait much longer.”

“Agreed,” said Theopolou. “Come.”

“I need to see what has become of my seekers,” said Linis. “I must know if they live. And I also need to find the trail of our attackers. I shall return soon, Gewey. Then we will depart.”

Gewey nodded, and Linis dashed off over the bridge.

Theopolou led the group to where the elves were gathered. All eyes turned to them as they drew near.

“He has brought this on us,” called a voice. “He must leave.” This was met by loud shouts of agreement.

“He will leave,” said Bellisia, her voice rising over the crowd. “He will pursue our attackers and free Kaylia. While you bicker and argue, he will take action.” The crowd became silent.

Theopolou nodded to Gewey. “I think it is time for you to speak.”

Gewey squared his shoulders and stepped forward. He was unsure what he was going to say. All he could think about was departing on his quest to save Kaylia, and how precious seconds were slipping away. He took a deep breath and began to speak.

“I am Gewey Stedding, and I am here to ask for your help. A dark force is rising in the land of Angrääl. A force that threatens to destroy both humans and elves alike. A force that turns brother against brother. A force that will not stop until it has conquered the whole world. I know that you have been promised your lands, and the freedom to rule them. Some of you may believe this promise, others may not. Some of you think you should join Angrääl, and some think you should stay out of it entirely. But I think today's attack should now prove to you that there is no way you can safely follow either choice.”

“We do not know that the King of Angrääl had anything to do with this,” said a tall, silk-clad elf.

“So you think it's a coincidence that your own kin attacked you while the north gathers for war?”

“I am saying that we do not know,” retorted the elf. “I am saying we have as much reason to suspect you of being involved as we do to accuse Angrääl.” This brought murmurs of agreement. “I am Marinos, lord and elder of the western isles. We too have been offered lands that we already hold, just as the human says. But what he does not say is that, for us, it is the human threat that spreads like a plague. They move ever closer to our lands and keeps. They disregard our borders and poison the spirits of even the most wise.”

His eyes fell on Theopolou. “Now you say that Angrääl is gathering for war. You tell us what we already know. You pretend to offer us a way out of danger, but in truth you only offer us destruction. If we join you, the Lord of Angrääl will sweep down upon us like a storm. There will be nothing of our people left to save.”

“I had nothing to do with this attack,” said Gewey. “Have you forgotten that they took Kaylia from me?”

“Exactly,” Marinos countered. “Why was she not killed? The field is littered with the dead. Why did they spare her? Perhaps that was what you intended. Perhaps she awaits you now.”

Gewey's anger swelled, but he managed to keep it at bay. “If that is so, then why didn't I kill Theopolou, or any of the other elders? Why did I help them to escape? Why am I still here?”

“Who can know the motives of a human,” said Marinos. “If that is what you are. We all saw you in the Chamber of the Maker. What human can control so much of the flow without destroying himself?” More murmurs of agreement sounded.

“I told you all that I would reveal who and what I am,” said Gewey. “I have told you who I am. I am Gewey Stedding and nothing more. As for what I am...”

He held up the box containing the Book of Souls. “I assume you know what this is.”

Marinos glared at Theopolou. “You recover what your family was sworn to protect, only to put it back into the hands of a human?”

Theopolou stood expressionless.

“You have heard that only one who possesses the power of heaven can open the Book of Souls,” said Gewey.

Marinos let out a mocking laugh. “So you propose to open the Book of Souls? You claim to possess the power that resides in heaven? Do you even understand the claim you are making?”

He turned to the crowd. “A god indeed! The one that the prophecies speak of. Here, amongst us.” His gaze returned to Gewey. “A half-man, most likely. You cannot open the Book with the diluted blood of a god in your veins.”

Gewey decided that things had gone far enough. It was time for actions, not words. Grabbing the lip of the box, he pulled.

At first, nothing happened. But then the lid moved a little. Gasps could be heard throughout the crowd as the box slowly opened. A strong wind blew across the field, and the only sound to be heard was the flapping of the nearby pavilion.

“You...” Marinos stammered. “How is this possible? What trickery is this?”

Gewey reached inside and pulled out the Book of Souls. The cover shimmered like gold and radiated a soft light. Intricate writing in a language that not even Theopolou could recognize was clearly visible on the spine and cover.

“Can you read it?” asked Theopolou.

Gewey studied the writing. At first, the symbols made no sense at all, but slowly he began to understand them.

“I can,” he declared.

“What does it say?” asked Chiron.

Gewey ran his hand over the cover. “It says: Within these pages is written the true history of Heaven, of Earth, of Man, of Life, and of Gods and Elves.” He looked out on the crowd and said. “Now you know what I am.”

“How is this possible?” asked Bellisia, in wonder.

“I don't know,” admitted Gewey. “In fact, I know almost nothing. All I do know is what I am, and what I must do.”

“Do you expect us to follow you?” asked Marinos. “If this is true, then it was your kind that caused our people to fall in the first place. By all rights we should kill you, here and now.”

“The gods had nothing to do with the split,” Theopolou said. “All of us who are old enough to have fought in the Great War know this. It is time this lie was exposed. It is time for us to become the people we once were.”

“So, you would have us follow this – this creature?” asked Marinos. “You would have our people mix their blood with that of humans?”

“I would have us become a better people,” Theopolou replied. “The idea of mixing with humans is as disturbing to me as is to you. But how much different are we really? We plot and scheme against one another. We kill our own kind. We lie to ourselves and deceive our children. In fact, is there even one of you who sees the virtue and grace of our ancestors in the people we are today?”

No one spoke.

“Gewey Stedding has shown me much,” Theopolou continued. “Though he is not a human, he was raised as one. He has defended our people, upheld our values, and kept his word. He has shown courage and determination. He has placed the lives of others ahead of his own. And he has bonded to my kin. I am not fool enough to believe that all humans are as he. But he does represent what is best in man. Perfect? No. But most certainly he is honorable, strong, and true. Something I have not seen in elves of late.”

He looked Gewey directly in the eyes. “I admit that when I started this journey, I had hoped for you to reveal yourself as false. The idea of one such as you leading my people into a new future repulsed me. My mind has been changed. I pledge my house and my family to your cause.”

“As do I,” said Chiron.

“And I,” said Eftichis.

“There is still the matter of the traitor,” said Bellisia. “Before I make any decision, I will know how we came to this pass.”

“The traitor is among us,” said Theopolou. “And I know who he is.”

“Who?” shouted several voices.

Theopolou let his eyes scan the gathering. They finally came to rest on Akakios. “The Book of Souls was never in the possession of Felsafell. It went missing just after we arrived.”

Akakios opened his mouth to protest, then lowered his eyes. “I did it to protect you, My Lord. Forgive me.”

The crowd erupted. Two elves seized Akakios and disarmed him.

“Traitor,” Eftichis roared, drawing his sword.

“Stay your blade, Eftichis,” Theopolou commanded. He turned back to Akakios.

“You pretended to befriend Gewey. You were instrumental in the slaying of dozens of your kin. You betrayed your lord, and dishonored your name.”

“I did what I did to help you keep your honor,” Akakios replied, angrily. “You would have us bow to this abomination. You would lead our people to their doom. Don't you see? I was protecting you from yourself.” Tears streamed down his face. “But I swear I never meant for so many to die.”

“For just one elf to die by your actions is unforgivable,” said Chiron furiously. “You have sealed your fate.”

“No,” said Theopolou. “Gewey has taught me a lesson this day. Akakios is in my service, and I will decide what is to be done with him.” He walked close to Akakios and leveled his eyes. “He is to be questioned. After that, release him with the other prisoner in three days’ time. He is exiled to the east. If he has any honor left, he will abide by this decision. If not, so be it.”

“Is that wise?” asked Chiron.

“Probably not,” Theopolou admitted. “But we must be better than those who oppose us. We must not succumb to vengeance or hatred. I will see elves return to grace, even if that means showing mercy to our enemies.” He stepped back and the two guards took Akakios away.

“What now?” asked Chiron.

Gewey handed the Book of Souls to Theopolou. The old elf gazed at it for a full minute before looking up again.

“I need to leave,” said Gewey. “I have to rescue Kaylia.”

“I understand,” said Theopolou. He put the Book back inside the box and closed it. “I will guard this for you until you return. In the meantime, we have much to discuss amongst ourselves.”

“I will come with you, Gewey Stedding,” said Eftichis.

“No,” said Theopolou. “You are needed here. Many are still not convinced that this is the way. I will need your help.”

“He's right,” said Gewey. “You must help Theopolou. Linis and I can track down the elves who have taken Kaylia.”

“But you will be outnumbered,” Eftichis argued. “At least let me send some of my guard with you.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey. “But I think Linis is all the help I'll need. If it comes down to a fight, I'd rather not risk more lives than I have to.”

As if on cue, Linis returned, his face grave. “There are no signs of my seekers.”

“Perhaps they were driven away,” said Eftichis.

“Perhaps,” said Linis. “Whatever the case, I have no time to look for them. I have found the attackers’ trail. They flee north at great speed. Some on horseback. We must leave now, or we will struggle to catch up.” He turned to Gewey. “Are you ready?”

Gewey checked his pack and sword. “I'm ready.”

“Good,” said Linis. “You can tell me later what has happened while I was gone. I'm sure it is worth hearing.”

“Indeed it is,” remarked Chiron.

Gewey placed his hands on Theopolou's shoulders. “I am in your debt, and I promise that Kaylia will be safe.”

“I have no doubt of that,” replied the old elf. “We will await your return.”

Without another word, Linis and Gewey raced off in pursuit of Kaylia.

Chapter 31

Linis took the lead as they raced across the bridge and back down the forest path. When they reached the end, Linis came to a halt.

“They went north through the woods from here,” he said. “Some on foot, some on horseback. We must hurry. If they are smart, they will split up soon.”

From the corner of his eye, Gewey noticed something resting on the ground. It was a tiny white flower - exactly the same type of flower that Kaylia had worn in her hair for the bonding ceremony.

“This was hers,” Gewey said.

“Then perhaps we are in luck,” said Linis, hopefully. “If this was indeed left by Kaylia, then it should make finding her easy. Of course, it’s possible that her captors may be using it to throw us off their trail. Can you tell if she is conscious?”

Gewey reached out to Kaylia, but with no better result than before. “No. I only know she lives. Still nothing more than that.” He brought the flower close and smelled the sweet fragrance. “But I feel that she dropped this for me to find.”

“Good,” said Linis. “Then our chances are greatly improved. Still, we must be careful.”

They continued for several hours, running as fast as they could without risking missing a sign. Gewey allowed the flow to rush through him, and soon it was Linis who lagged behind. Several times Gewey tried to hear their quarry, but to no avail. He had no idea of how far behind they were, and each step caused him greater anxiety. By mid-afternoon he was becoming frantic.

They paused to check the trail. “Why haven't we caught them yet?” demanded Gewey.

“I do not know.” Linis shook his head. “I have never seen such a large group move so swiftly.”

Gewey sensed something approach. Something foul. Linis sensed it a moment later.

“Vrykol,” Linis whispered.

They both drew their weapons and fixed their eyes on the forest ahead. As it approached, the air chilled and the woods became silent. From behind a thick pine the Vrykol then appeared, cloaked in a long black robe. It was taller and straighter than the ones they had faced outside the Temple of Valshara, though it moved with the same terrifying speed. It stopped short, fifty feet away, and drew a long sword. Its face was hidden in the shadow of its hood, and Gewey could hear the hiss of its breath.

“This one is mine,” thundered Gewey.

But he had barely taken another step forward when the Vrykol suddenly burst into flames. This was followed by a blinding flash of light that blasted him violently over onto his back. Then there was nothing but darkness.

When Gewey regained his senses he opened his eyes, but there was still only blackness.

Blind, he thought. He struggled to stand, but something was wrong. He couldn't feel his limbs. He shouted for Linis, and was relieved to hear the sound of his own voice. But there was no answer from the elf.

“Linis cannot hear you, boy,” came a voice from the darkness.

Gewey recognized it at once, although he had heard it only once before - the night his adventures had first began. “That's right,” said the voice. “I am here. You know me, don't you?”

“What do you want?” demanded Gewey. “Why have you brought me here? Wherever here is.”

The Dark Knight laughed softly. “Where you are is not important. As for why - I think you already know that.”

“Why can't I see you?” asked Gewey, his eyes straining to pierce the blackness.

“Do you want to see me?” he asked, amused.

“No,” replied Gewey. “I don't. We will see each other soon enough.”

“Indeed we will, little god. But until then, I would make you an offer.”

“I am not interested in anything you have to say,” said Gewey.

The Dark Knight's voice grew deep and menacing. “I have gone to a great deal of trouble in bringing you here,” he said. “I will not release you until I have said what I have to say. You will hear me.”

“You cannot hold me forever,” argued Gewey. “I am not the naïve boy you tried to trick the last time you spoke to me.”

“No?” he mocked. “If that fool of a half-man hadn't filled your head with lies and convinced you to flee, you might see things differently. You continue to challenge me, yet you still do not understand that I am not your enemy.”

This time it was Gewey's turn to laugh. “Is that so? How many people have you sent to kill me? How many more will come? You're a liar. You're nothing more than a deceiver with a sword. Release me now.”

“I have sent none to kill you,” he replied. “I have only wished for you to join me. Those I have sent could do you no lasting harm. If you used your mind, you would see that. You cannot stop me, regardless of what you have been told by anyone. And once my labors are completed, you will be the last of your kind. Though I do despise the gods, I do not see you as one of them. Don't you see what we could accomplish if you joined me?”

“Accomplish? You mean destroy, don't you? You think I don't see what you mean to do to the elves?”

“I mean the elves no harm. Why should I? They can go about hiding from the world until the stars fade for all I care. They do not concern me.”

“Again a lie,” said Gewey. “If they don't concern you, then why attack them?”

“I have not attacked the elves,” he said. “Though I hear they attack each other.”

Gewey thought on this for a moment. What if Angrääl really wasn't responsible for the attack? He would have drawn them into a war based on a lie. “You expect me to believe that?”

“I expect you to do what you know you must,” he replied. “And that will lead you to me.”

“That it will,” said Gewey. “But it will be on my terms, not yours.”

The Dark Knight let out a deep, thundering laugh. “That is where you are wrong. You will come to me now - before you are able to do more harm. The half-man and his son are on their way here as we speak. They think to rescue his wife. They will fail. And my Vrykol have taken your elf mate from her captors.” The air stirred. “As you can see, I have all that you hold dear in my hands. And though it would pain me, I will flay them alive if you continue to oppose me. You may be willing to sacrifice Starfinder, but I doubt you would be so willing to allow your dearest Kaylia to suffer.”

Fear struck Gewey's heart. “If you harm her…”

“You will do what?” he boomed. “Kill me? I think not. You will do as you are told, or the ones you love will suffer for your lack of wisdom.”

The darkness pressed in. Gewey thought back to that first night in Sharpstone. This time, Lee would not be coming.

“Gewey?” It was the voice of Linis.

The darkness faded as light from the waning day crept in. “Gewey?” Linis repeated.

Gewey groaned as he tried to sit up. “Stay still,” said Linis.

Gewey ignored him and forced himself upright. “There is no time. We must catch up with Kaylia.” He tried to reach out to her but couldn't focus his mind. “What happened?”

“The Vrykol just burst into flames,” Linis answered, shaking his head. “Then you fell. Other than that, I don't know.”

Gewey struggled to his feet. “How long was I out?”

“Less than a minute,” replied Linis. “There's nothing left of the Vrykol.” He pointed to a smoldering pile of ashes several yards away. “Tell me what you saw.”

Gewey gathered his wits and recounted what happened.

“If the elves are in league with the Vrykol, that would explain why they move with such speed,” said Linis.

“Unless the Dark One is telling the truth,” Gewey offered. “What if Angrääl had nothing to do with this?”

“I doubt that,” said Linis. “But even so, it changes nothing. Even if what you were told is true, his armies will still march across the land very soon, and I do not believe he will just leave us in peace.”

Gewey reached out again. This time he was able to touch Kaylia's mind - though only for a moment. “She still lives,” he said.

He checked his pack and sheathed his sword. “I'm ready. And I will get her back.” His eyes narrowed as he steadily drew in more and more of the flow until the ground directly beneath them began to shake.

Linis nodded in approval. “Then let our quarry despair.”

End Book Two

Special Thanks

George Panagos- Kitty Bullard (GMTA Publishing)- Gerald and Donna Anderson- Vincentine Williams- Hunter and Sarah Anderson- Hector and Athena Ramos (I didn't forget Deserae, Raquel, and Nataly aka. Stormageddon)- Alex, Cassy, Ariel (of course Mia and Malaki), and Kyle DiBastista- Richie and Katie Gnyp- Jacob, Elizabeth and Jennie Bunton- Tara Ramerez-Tom Riddell (one of the first people to give me a shot)- Lilly Jean- Laura Will- Lisanne Cooper-(for the amazing editing job). Jen Frith Couch- Miklos Bartha- Christopher Martyn Smith- The folks from my home town (too many to name but I love you all)- Helenic Classical Charter School- All my new fans in India, the U.K. and Germany (thanks for reading)- And all the fans and supporters who have made this possible...

You're the best!!!

Authors Brian D. Anderson and Jonathan Anderson

ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Brian D. Anderson was born in 1971, and grew up in the small town of Spanish Fort, AL. He attended Fairhope High, then later Springhill College where his love for fantasy grew into a lifelong obsession. His hobbies include chess, history, and spending time with his son.

Jonathan Anderson was born in March of 2003. His creative spirit became evident by the age of three when he told his first original story. In 2010 he came up with the concept for The Godling Chronicles. It grew into an exciting collaboration between father and son. Jonathan enjoys sports, chess, music, games, and of course, telling stories.

The Godling

Chronicles

Book Three

“The Shadow of Gods”

Written by Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

The Godling Chronicles (Book Three) The Shadow of Gods

By

Brian D. Anderson

Original concept by Jonathan Anderson

Copyright © Brian D. Anderson 2012

Names, characters and incidents depicted in this book are products of the author's imagination, or are used fictitiously. Any resemblance to actual events, locales, organizations, or persons, living or dead, is entirely coincidental and beyond the intent of the author or the publisher.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means whatsoever, including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval system, without written permission from the publisher and/or author.

Contents

Contents

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Dedication

For Helen and “K”. Their devotion to each other is a constant source of inspiration.

Prologue

Theopolou and Eftichis sat quietly by the small fire. Over the past three days the makeshift camp had become a divided scene. Theopolou had convinced more than half of the remaining elders to join together against the armies of Angrääl, but Bellisia still held fast to her convictions. Her influence was the only thing preventing Theopolou from turning the tide completely.

“She is a stubborn one,” mused Eftichis.

“She believes in what she says,” said Theopolou. He looked out over the camp. Noble elves were wandering around in tattered and ripped clothing. The stench of burned out tents and decay of the wounded made him want to retch. “And I must admit, her arguments are compelling. There have been times I have doubted my own resolve because of her words.”

Eftichis nodded in agreement. “She has passion, there is no doubt about that. But we have pledged our houses to Gewey, and I for one will honor that pledge.”

“As will I,” said Theopolou. “But I cannot deny that my heart has been swayed to the brink. I only hope that my words have had a similar impact on her.”

Eftichis nodded. “As do I. The others are sure to join our cause if she relents.”

Theopolou stood up and rubbed the back of his neck. “True. And we will need them if we are to have any hope of succeeding.”

“Perhaps you should simply try to focus their attention on the elves of the Steppes,” Eftichis offered. “It would end the debate. At least for now. We all know that they must be dealt with.”

Theopolou shook his head. “No. We must deal with all of the forces arrayed against us at the same time. I believe that one cannot be conquered without the other. They are intertwined.” He felt old and weary. “This may break our people. But we have no other choice.”

“But Gewey...” said Eftichis, an edge of desperation creeping into his voice. “He can help us remain whole, can he not?”

Theopolou sighed. “Gewey may be a god, but he is not the Creator. As powerful as he is - and will become still - he struggles as well. Gewey does not, and never will, have the power to restore our people. Can he save us from annihilation? Perhaps. But we cannot look to him for our salvation.”

“But he opened the Book of Souls,” Eftichis contended. “Surely...”

“And what of it?” asked Theopolou, cutting him off. “Did you hear what he said when he read the title?” His eyes gazed into the fire. “It is a true history. A true history.”

“Yes, and...” Eftichis began, but the sight of Theopolou's sadness halted him.

“I am the eldest of the elders,” said Theopolou in a half-whisper. “I lived through the Great War. But unlike the others, I am old enough to have seen what we were before. We were a broken people, even then. Arrogant and selfish. We were so convinced that humans were inferior.”

“But they are,” said Eftichis. “They are fragile and weak. They grovel in the mud and live in squalor. How could we not see them as a lesser people?”

“Yes,” Theopolou laughed sardonically. “But are we so much better? We have lost, while the humans continue to gain. They build, while we gaze at our former glories.” His hand shot out, pointing to the Chamber of the Maker silhouetted against the fading light. “Can we claim to be the same people who built this? Look at us. Are we so different than they?”

“Do you see hope for us?” Eftichis asked, sorrow in his eyes.

“I don't know,” Theopolou replied. “I hope so. But whatever hope we have will arise from us, not from Gewey. He may be the instrument of our survival, but in the end, we must determine our own fate. If we live through the coming storm it will be up to us.” He forced a smile. “However, I do have faith in our people. I believe there is still a spark of grace within us.”

Just then, Bellisia approached, dressed in a soft, cream linen robe. Her eyes showed fatigue, yet she managed to walk straight and tall with graceful strides. Eftichis and the others rose to their feet and bowed.

“You have been tending the wounded,” said Theopolou. “You should rest. Our debate can continue tomorrow.”

“I am in no mood for debate,” said Bellisia. “I am weary, as you have noticed. I only wish to join you by the fire.”

Theopolou offered her a place beside him, which she gratefully accepted.

“Have you eaten?” asked Eftichis.

“I am not hungry,” she replied. “Just tired. My heart breaks when I look at what our own kind has done.”

“I understand,” said Theopolou. “I hoped I would never see such a thing happen again. I have already seen far too much elf blood spilt in my life.”

“Do you really believe Angrääl is responsible?” she asked, closing her eyes while contemplating the truth. “Do you think his power is that great?”

“I cannot say for sure,” Theopolou admitted. “But I see no other way for this to have happened. Long have our brothers and sisters on the Steppes lived alongside Angrääl. If the Reborn King has the key to heaven, and I believe he does, then it is very possible he could have bent our kin to his will.”

“The elves of the Steppes are a strong people,” said Eftichis. “If they have indeed been corrupted, then what resistance can we hope to offer? Already we have been betrayed from within our own ranks.”

“I do not know what hope there is,” said Theopolou. “Only that there is hope. And the elves of the Steppes have been close to the influence of Angrääl from the moment the Reborn King seized power. We have been far removed by comparison. If things had been different, who knows what would have become of us.”

“I agree,” said Bellisia. “And they are still our kin, regardless of what they have done. I, for one, will not abandon the idea that they can be redeemed. So, if we are to follow the example that you have set before us Theopolou, forgiveness must be in our hearts.” Her eyes drifted over the camp. “Though I admit, it will be difficult. I have not seen so many elves slain since the Great War. I was only twenty-five during the First Split, but the memories are still fresh in my mind.”

“It is so for all of us who lived through it,” said Theopolou. “And we have passed that memory to our children - along with our hatred and fear. It is a cycle that must end.”

A sudden disturbance near to the healing pavilion drew everyone’s attention. Theopolou and all the others gathered around the fire immediately reached for their weapons. From the direction of the commotion, Marinos appeared. He came half running toward them.

“What is it?” asked Theopolou, as soon as Marinos was within earshot.

“Red sails,” he replied. His voice cracked. “Red sails on the horizon.”

Theopolou stiffened. “Are you certain?”

“There is no question,” he replied.

The others looked confused.

“Red sails? What does that mean?” asked Eftichis

Theopolou lowered his head and took a deep breath. “It means the elves are coming.”

Chapter 1

Kaylia drifted in and out of consciousness. She knew she had been bound and slung, face down, across the back of a horse. But each time her thoughts came into focus, an unseen force pressed against her and the world would go black again. Finally, she was able to resist long enough to hear voices. Elven voices.

“This does not sit well with me,” said a deep male voice. “It is one thing to bring traitors to justice. But I was not told that these creatures would be among us.”

“Nor was I,” replied another. “Though it is far too late to turn back. Once we are home, then we can consult the elders. Until that time we must endure their company.”

Kaylia felt a hand grab her hair and lift her head. Though she was not blindfolded, she dared not open her eyes.

“Is she awake?” asked the first voice.

“I can’t tell,” replied the second. “The beast has blocked all connection to the flow. I cannot sense anything.”

The first voice grumbled and cursed, but made no other response.

Hours passed before they came to a halt. Kaylia was still feigning unconsciousness when she felt the hair on the back of her neck stand up. Suddenly, the air carried the foul stench of death and she sensed the approach of....of something?

“She is not asleep,” came a rasping voice. “Are you elf?”

Kaylia felt her bonds being cut. As she slid down from the horse her legs nearly gave out, but strong arms in rough leathers steadied her. She jerked herself free for a moment while her eyes focused. It was well after nightfall, and a small campfire was being built in a clearing a few yards away. She could make out about twenty elves, but that was not what caught her attention. It was the thing standing in front of her: a Vrykol, tall and slender, adorned in a sleek, hooded black robe and carrying a long, vicious looking curved blade. It reeked of decay, and its foul breath wheezed and gurgled.

Kaylia glared at the creature. “So this is what our people have become? Murderers of their own kind, and slaves to the darkness of this world?” Her tone has proud and defiant.

“Mind your tongue,” warned the elf holding her. “We are the bringers of justice. It is you who have betrayed our people.”

Kaylia threw her head back in harsh laughter. “You travel with the Vrykol. You attack elves on sacred ground. How dare you name me traitor?”

“Enough of this,” screeched the Vrykol. The sound pierced the air, causing Kaylia to wince. “You are to remain silent unless spoken to.” He turned to the elf at her back. “As for you - your comrades grow restless. Calm them.” His black hands reached out and grasped Kaylia's arm in an iron grip. “I can manage this one.”

The elf grunted and strode off in the direction of the others.

“I will make you pay for what you have done to my people,” seethed Kaylia. “And I will make your master pay as well.”

Before she could measure the moment, the Vrykol's fist crashed into Kaylia’s jaw, sending her sprawling to the ground.

“I told you to be silent.” The Vrykol lowered his blade, pressing the tip against Kaylia's throat. “My master has insisted that you be kept alive. But he said nothing about your condition.”

Even though Kaylia’s face throbbed from the impact, she glared unflinchingly.

“That's better,” growled the Vrykol. “Remain still and silent.”

A few minutes had passed when the tall elf returned. He looked down at Kaylia, then back at the Vrykol.

“She was to be left unharmed,” he grumbled angrily. “That was the agreement. No elf is to be injured by your hands.” He looked back at the group of elves gathering around the crackling fire. “If you do not uphold your end of the bargain you will find yourself quickly surrounded by enemies.”

The Vrykol let out a vile laugh. “As you wish.” He removed the blade from Kaylia's throat. “But see to it that she is well tended. Should she escape, it will be you who pays the price.” With that, he spun around and disappeared into the darkness.

The tall elf held out his hand. “I am Freistal. Do not try to escape. The elves you see here are not the only ones I have with me. The forest is filled with my kin. I would hate to see you harmed before you can be brought to justice.”

Kaylia sneered and struggled to her feet. “We will see who is brought to justice.”

Freistal pulled her roughly to his side. “Perhaps you think your human mate will save you? Or perhaps Linis and his seekers? Let me assure you that they have been dealt with. And even if they have somehow survived, they will not be able save you.”

Kaylia forced a malicious laugh. “Let me assure you that Gewey and Linis would not fall to the likes of you or your rabble. And when they find you, you will wish you had never left your lands. If you think to look to the Vrykol for safety, you will find that they can be slain just as easily as you.”

Freistal shrugged. “Perhaps. But for now you will remain with us, and you will not escape. I will allow you to stay unbound. Do not make me regret it, or you certainly will.” He motioned for her to go to the fire. “We rest for only a short time. Unless you wish me to strap you back onto the horse, you should eat so that you will have the strength to travel.”

Kaylia rubbed her jaw, then made her way to the fire. Freistal followed close behind. Though he held no weapon, she was certain that if she made a wrong move, her body would be filled with arrows before she could take more than a few steps. As she approached the group by the fire, she could feel everyone’s eyes upon her. She stiffened her back while choosing an empty space a moderate distance away from the others. Freistal knelt beside her and handed her a flask of water and handful of jerky.

“I suggest you hold your tongue,” he whispered. “Things are a bit tense. And your comments will not be welcome.”

“I take it they are not pleased with your traveling companion,” she mocked. “I cannot say that I blame them.”

“That is putting it mildly,” Freistal replied. “But your presence is just as unwelcome to us. So mind that you give them no excuse to take their frustrations out on you.”

“So I am to be beaten if I speak?” Kaylia sneered. “You will behave as the Vrykol?”

“I would not have you harmed,” Freistal retorted. “We are not animals. Speak as you will, but be warned. There are those among us that have a deep hatred for your kin - and you in particular.”

“Why?” asked Kaylia. “Where does this hatred come from?”

Freistal looked at her sideways. “We know who your kin have allied themselves with. They would make us allies of the very people that destroyed us in the first place. And you...”

He paused. “You bond yourself to a human, seeking to doom us all. Your crimes are beyond forgiveness.” He rose to his feet and glared down at her. “I, for one, will not stand idly by while you and your people annihilate what is left of our kind.”

“How can you accuse me or my kin of betrayal?” shot back Kaylia. “You have been deceived by the evil that dwells in Angrääl.”

“Then you deny that elves and humans are allowed to befriend each other?” he said angrily. “You deny that your elders do nothing to stop it? You deny that you have bonded yourself to a human?”

She glared at him defiantly. “Who I choose to love is my own affair, not yours. And if you are so foolish as to think it shall be the end of our people, then your stupidity knows no bounds.”

He met her gaze. “Because of you and others like you, our people will disappear and become nothing more than a distant memory. A mere shadow of what we once were.”

“So that is why you have done this?” said Kaylia, loud enough for all to hear. “Because of half-truths and fear?”

“You deny it then?” Freistal asked. “You deny that your kin intend to join with the humans?”

“I do not deny that I have bonded myself to a human,” she replied defiantly. “And I do not deny that many of my kin have formed friendships with humans. But we are not destroying our people. We are saving them.” She stood to address the entire group, but Freistal caught her arm.

“Do not do this,” he warned. “You will not sway us. You will only anger them and put yourself in further danger.”

“It seems to me that I can be in no more danger than I am already,” said Kaylia, jerking her arm free. “And if you intend to take me back to your people on the Steppes, then you will not harm me until then.” She stood straight and proud. And though disheveled from being captured, her fierce gaze gave her a regal appearance.

“Let her speak,” came a voice from the crowd. “Her lies will do nothing but strengthen our resolve.”

“Very well,” sighed Freistal.

Kaylia squared her shoulders and took a step forward. “I know you think me a traitor. I know you believe that your actions are justified.” Her tone was imposing. “But ask yourself this - who is it that you serve? Is this the will of the elders? Or is this the will of the King in Angrääl? You are pawns in his game of conquest. Surely, at least some of you sense this.”

A few elves stirred, but none said anything as Kaylia continued.

“If this is not so, then why are you traveling with a Vrykol? Do you really believe that this creature will allow you to take me to your elders? It will never let that happen. I am to be used as leverage against the one being who can challenge the power of Angrääl.” Tears began to well in her eyes, but her voice remained steady. “You have killed your own kin based on a lie. You have led your brothers and sisters to their death in the process. How many of you died in your attack? Twenty? Thirty?”

Angry murmurs and tearful stares told her that it was far more.

“Fifty-seven,” whispered Freistal. “And your deceptions will not make us believe that they died for nothing. You accuse us of being weak. But we are the pawns of no one. Not the Reborn King - and not you. While you and your kin have made alliances with the humans and the gods, we have remained true to our traditions and ways. We have not diluted our blood with that of lesser beings, and we will never do so. The armies you gather against us will fall.”

“Armies?” Kaylia cried. “We have raised no armies. It is Angrääl that raises armies. It is this ‘Reborn King’ who threatens to march. Not us.”

“You lie!” shouted Freistal. “I have seen them. Your ships have been spotted many times by my own eyes. And your war council we attacked will no doubt hasten plans now that they know we are aware of their treachery.”

“You speak nonsense,” said Kaylia. “Your mind has been twisted by the power of the Dark One. Can you not see this? I did not accuse you of weakness before, but I do so now. You have been touched by the power he wields. The Sword of Truth has bent you to his will. But surely some of your own will remains?”

“I told you to keep her silent,” hissed the voice of the Vrykol as it appeared from behind the outlying brush. “Her words are poison. She seeks to deceive you.”

The Vrykol moved to grab Kaylia, but Freistal stepped between them.

“She is our responsibility now,” he said. “You need not concern yourself with her any longer.”

“Fool,” said the Vrykol. “If I were not here, her mate would have already found you and slaughtered you all like sheep.” It took a step forward. “She will remain with me until I am certain we are no longer being pursued.”

“You are not master here,” said Freistal. “And she remains with me. I have no fear of any human.”

Freistal and the Vrykol stood mere inches from each other, but neither made a move to draw a weapon. Though his features were hidden, Kaylia knew that the creature was scowling with fury.

“Very well,” relented the Vrykol after a very long moment. “She will remain with you - for now.” It spun around and vanished into the forest.

Freistal called two elves to him and commanded them to watch over Kaylia.

“Do not mistake my defense of you as a sign that your words have swayed me,” said Freistal. “But I will not see you brought to Angrääl, and I believe you are right about one thing. That creature out there has no intention of allowing you to be delivered to our elders.”

As soon as the party had finished their meal, they packed and set out again at an even more desperate pace than before. Kaylia repeatedly tried to reach out to Gewey, but found that her bond with him was somehow being blocked - by the Vrykol, she assumed. She could only hope for a chance to escape.

By midday Kaylia began to sense further unrest among her captors. The Vrykol made occasional appearances, each time its foul gaze lingering on her before disappearing once again into the forest. She could feel the tension rising with each encounter. Clearly the elves were finding the presence of such an evil creature increasingly difficult to bear. Several were becoming more vocal in their displeasure.

“Why tolerate this?” Kaylia asked Freistal, who was running just behind her. “Nothing good can come from such a being.”

“We are commanded to allow its presence,” grumbled Freistal. “And so long as it makes no move against us, we shall obey that command.” He shoved her roughly. “So keep moving and mind your tongue.”

Just then the Vrykol appeared a little ahead of the band, motioning for them to halt.

“What is it?” asked Freistal, clearly annoyed. “Why are we stopping?”

“The elf woman's mate is drawing near. She must come with me,” the Vrykol hissed. His black hand reached out to grab Kaylia.

Freistal jerked Kaylia behind him, at the same time drawing his long knife. The ringing of elven steel sliding free could be heard from all directions.

The Vrykol let loose a harsh rasping laugh. “You think to stop me?” It took a step forward, then let out a high, piercing cry. So harsh was the sound, the elves were forced to cover their ears. “Alone I could take her,” he said. “But did you really think my master would send only one servant to guard his prize? You are a pitiful fool.”

Just then, six more Vrykol stepped into view, each holding a long blade.

“You will not be taking her anywhere, demon,” Freistal roared.

Kaylia heard the snap of a bowstring and the whiz of an arrow. The Vrykol hardly had time to react as the arrow buried itself deep into its chest. But the creature merely stepped back, pulling the arrow free and tossing it carelessly to the ground. The air grew cold and still as the Vrykol turned to its comrades and gave a curt nod. With astounding swiftness, it then spun back around and charged at Kaylia. The elves erupted in response, some rushing at the other six Vrykol, others to aid Freistal.

Freistal slashed at the Vrykol's neck; the beast easily blocked the blow with his own blade and brought the hilt up, crashing into the elf's jaw. Freistal staggered back, barely able to keep his feet. Several more arrows pierced the Vrykol's flesh as it brought its blade down, attempting to hew the elf in twain. Freistal raised his knife just in time. Sparks flew as metal clashed on metal.

Kaylia knew this was her chance to flee. Rapidly, she looked at her surroundings. Six Vrykol had engaged the bulk of the company, and though the elves were fighting with ferocity, they were falling one by one to the wicked swords of their foes. Five other elves had joined Freistal in the fight and were driving the solitary Vrykol back, but their blades were useless. Clearly they did not know how to kill the creature. The arrows had ceased, and the elf archers filed in from the forest, blades drawn.

Without hesitation, Kaylia turned and ran. The last thing she saw of the battle was Freistal clutching desperately at the Vrykol's blade, which had run through his gullet only a moment before.

She felt anger and regret, but there was no time to dwell on it. She needed to get as far away as possible. The Vrykol had said Gewey was near, but she still couldn't feel where he was through their bond. She hoped that if she got far enough away, the Vrykol’s influence would wane and she would once again be able to feel Gewey’s reassuring presence to guide her. The trees were a blur as she ran faster and faster.

While she was still in full flight, a dark figure appeared a few yards ahead. Kaylia slid to a halt. A Vrykol loomed, sword drawn. Its cloak was shredded from the battle with the elves, but still she could not make out its form beneath the tattered rags. Instinctively, she reached for her knife, only to realize she was unarmed. She looked around for signs of other Vrykol, but there were none. Her legs tensed for a moment, then burst into action as she ran straight at the creature. Clearly surprised by this unexpected tactic, it sidestepped, slightly lowering its blade. Just as Kaylia was in reach, she ducked and slammed her fist into the Vrykol's knee.

It was like hitting iron. She felt pain shoot through her hand and up her arm, but her blow was enough to part the Vrykol's legs and force it to lean forward. Kaylia immediately thrust her body upward, burying her shoulder into the beast’s chest, sending it stumbling back.

Kaylia knew she had no hope of defeating the Vrykol without a blade, and trying to disarm it would mean certain death. It was far too strong; her only hope was to outrun the creature. But could she? She had seen how fast they could move. Even with several minutes head start, this one had managed to catch up with her. Fear gripped her chest, but she fought it back and ran as fast as she could, not even bothering to glance back. She had unbalanced it, but she knew that would only be for a few seconds at best. I must move faster, she told herself.

She had only run a few yards further when something hard struck the back of her head. She tried to keep on her feet, but could feel herself losing consciousness and tumbling hard to the ground. The world began to turn dark as she heard the footfalls of the Vrykol approaching and the hiss of its foul breath.

She wanted to cry out, but the light faded from her vision as the blow to her head overcame her.

Chapter 2

Linis halted, a confused look on his face.

“What is it?” asked Gewey.

Linis bent down, placing his palm just above the ground and closing his eyes. “Something follows our quarry,” he muttered. “Something unclean.”

“Vrykol,” growled Gewey.

“Yes,” agreed Linis. “It must be. Nothing else I can imagine would leave such a scent. It's like...death.”

“Then we have to catch up with Kaylia before they do,” said Gewey without hesitation.

Linis opened his eyes and looked straight at Gewey. “Don't worry, my friend. We will.”

They continued to race through the forest. Gewey kept a few paces behind Linis, all the while reaching out to Kaylia. He told himself that since he hadn’t lost her entirely, that meant they were still going in the right direction. It wasn't until it was fully night that Linis halted again.

“We must slow our pace,” he stated.

Gewey's jaw tightened. “If you can't keep going...”

“It is not that I am weary, my friend,” said Linis, cutting him off. “But if either the elves or the Vrykol are aware of our pursuit, they may decide to lay in wait. And though I am uncertain of the Vrykol's skill in stealth, I do know that it is unwise to believe the elves are without such ability.” He peered into the night. “I can spot a trap in the deepest darkness. But not if I move too quickly.”

“I can sense every living being for hundreds of yards,” argued Gewey. “There is no way they can hide from me.”

Linis thought for a moment. Gewey had been channeling the flow from the moment they left, and there was no doubt he could do as he claimed. “No,” he said finally. “Whatever is blocking your connection to Kaylia may also be able to hide itself from you. I would not risk it.”

Gewey was silent for several seconds, then nodded sharply.

Linis withdrew a flask from his pocket and drank deeply. “Jawas tea,” he said, handing it to Gewey.

Gewey took the flask and drained it. The tea filled his belly and relaxed his limbs. Even the flow felt as if it came with more ease. He drew his sword, taking in more power. Then, from a few hundred yards away, he sensed something. His muscles tensed as he reached out to find the source. He had done this several times before during the pursuit. Usually it had been a deer or a bear, and once, a fox. In fact, under different circumstances he would have marveled at being able to touch the mind of a wild animal.

But what Gewey sensed now possessed passion and life in a way no human or elf could understand. It lived for the moment, with no care for anything other than survival. And this time, the mind he had found touched him back. Dark and tortured, it was filled with hate and anger, yet also sorrow and desperation. He recoiled and drew back within himself. He knew he had just touched the mind of a Vrykol. And he knew it had sensed him as well.

“They're here,” whispered Gewey. “The Vrykol are here.”

It took Linis a moment, but then he felt it as well. “There are eight of them.” He drew his knife. “This will not be easy.”

Gewey filled his lungs and allowed the flow to saturate him. “Let me handle them. You stay back.”

“I will not,” Linis said, his face set. “You may be powerful, but we still do not know the extent of these creatures’ powers. It could well be that they are the reason you cannot feel your bond with Kaylia. If that is the case, they may be able to do more than we imagine.”

“Then what do you think we should do?” asked Gewey.

“They know we are here,” said Linis. “But they do not move against us just yet. Perhaps they want us to move against them.” He surveyed the area. “We should move past them and put ourselves between them and Kaylia. If I am correct, that will force them to move against us. I would rather them act according to our plan, than us to theirs.”

Gewey nodded, then followed closely behind as Linis led them in a wide arc around the Vrykol’s location. Gewey knew that their movements had been detected. In fact, Linis made certain of it, making just enough noise to draw the Vrykol’s attention.

“Now what?” asked Gewey.

Before Linis could answer, he sensed the Vrykol moving. But to his dismay, only two were coming in their direction. The other six were heading west in an apparent attempt to flank them. Gewey faced the direction of the two oncoming creatures while Linis peered into the forest, listening for the others. Just when the two Vrykol were in sight, they stopped and separated to left and right, forcing Linis to turn his attention away from the flanking maneuver.

“We must kill these first two before the others reach us,” shouted Linis. “If not, we will be overwhelmed.”

Gewey's heart raced. He could feel his sword, hot in his hand. The flow was like a flood raging through him. He turned to Linis with a malicious grin. “They will never have that chance.” He took a step forward, focusing on the single Vrykol moving to his left. With a tremendous boom, the earth exploded beneath the creature, sending it flying - limbs flailing. Its screams pierced the air as it slammed into a tall pine and then slid to the forest floor.

“Finish the beast, Linis,” Gewey said in a near whisper. “I'll deal with the other one.” He focused his mind on the second Vrykol. It had stopped a moment after he’d unleashed the flow on the first. Gewey stretched out again, but this time something stopped him. It felt the same as when trying and failing to reach out to Kaylia. A cold chill seized his chest.

Linis had sped off toward the fallen Vrykol. He saw it leaning against the tree, struggling to rise, its cruel sword still in hand. Linis knew he had only seconds before the beast recovered. He rushed headlong at it, swinging his long knife at the creature’s neck. The Vrykol tried to move away, but Linis was too fast. His blade severed its head clean. He glanced over to Gewey for a moment and saw him moving steadily towards the second Vrykol. He then listened out for sound of the others, but couldn't hear them – not anywhere.

Gewey knew now why he was unable to contact Kaylia. Somehow the beasts were able to block him. He tried again to explode the earth beneath the Vrykol, but with the same result.

The soft hiss of evil laughter seeped from within the hood of the Vrykol's cloak. “That only works once, boy.”

“It won't save you,” growled Gewey. The flow was still raging within. Maybe he could not use it to destroy this Vrykol directly, but so long as the flow remained with him, he knew that the monster would stand no chance.

“Perhaps not,” said the Vrykol, its voice was thin and raspy, though clearer than others Gewey had encountered. “But then again, I am not the one that needs to be saved.”

In a flash, the Vrykol charged, its sword held so low it was almost touching the ground. Gewey stood in a wide stance and steadied himself for the onslaught. His sword was fire in his hand as the Vrykol reached him, swinging its blade upward. Gewey easily dodged the blow and stepped to one side, ready to take the beast’s head. Then, from the corner of his eye, he saw a flash as the creature stabbed at his neck with the other hand. Its fingers were wrapped loosely around a small dagger. Gewey turned again, but the tip of the blade found flesh, cutting deeply.

A burning pain shot through his body. He stumbled back, slashing wildly, but the Vrykol moved away just out of reach.

“Arrogant fool,” the Vrykol taunted, twirling the dagger in its hand. “And you hope to challenge my master?”

Dizziness started to overcome Gewey - his vision was slowly becoming more and more blurred. Struggling to keep his focus on the Vrykol, he waited for it to charge again, but it remained still. He reached up and touched the wound on his neck. Blood poured down, soaking his shoulder. Though the cut was deep, it shouldn't have been bleeding this badly. 'Poison,' he thought, with disgust.

“So frail,” laughed the Vrykol. “So foolish.”

The Vrykol feinted left, then right, throwing Gewey off balance. He just managed to bring his sword up in time to deflect a blow that came in a wide arc. He could feel the flow draining from him as the beast pushed forward. Soon, he knew, he would be defenseless. He tried to counter, but his blurred vision was causing him to strike off target each time. A sudden wave of nausea swept through his body. Falling to one knee, Gewey glared up defiantly, jaw clenched tight.

“You see,” the Vrykol taunted. “You are not even a match for the servants of the Great Lord.” He kicked Gewey's sword from his hand.

Gewey leaned back on his knees and held his head high, readying himself for the final blow. He heard the whip of a blade approach. But the expected slash of steel never came. Instead, the Vrykol let out a mighty roar of anger, a small dagger protruding from his left shoulder. The beast spun to meet his attacker, but Linis was upon him before he could react. His long knife cleaved off the Vrykol's leg just below the hip. It toppled back and fell to the ground. Without missing a step, Linis swung again, this time decapitating his enemy. Thick black blood oozed from the wounds, hissing as it touched the soft forest turf.

Gewey smiled with satisfaction, even though the cut on his neck was now burning with an evil fury. He looked at the head of the slain creature - twisted and scorched, but clearly human. Its skin blackened, just like the others he’d encountered, but not nearly as badly. He thought about how the first Vrykol had looked and sounded. This one was most certainly an advancement on that. Definitely stronger. But why?

These thoughts vanished from his mind as another wave of nausea took him. He emptied his stomach with a groan. Linis was at his side in an instant.

“Poison,” Linis spat, examining the cut. “Red Spider Blossom from the look of it.” He smiled. “Nothing to worry about. It is meant to incapacitate, not kill.” He reached to his belt and removed his flask.

Gewey drank greedily, nearly draining it dry. The jawas tea was cool and instantly settled his stomach. His wound still throbbed, but the burning slowly subsided. He sighed with relief. “And the other Vrykol?”

“I don't know,” Linis admitted. “They seemed to have retreated. Why, I could not say, but I take it as good fortune. We will need to rest for at least a few hours. You cannot continue until the poison wears off.”

Gewey shook his head. “We rest only until I can regain my feet, and not a second more.” He tried to let the flow pass through him, but it was sluggish and weak.

Linis looked at him disapprovingly. He thought to object, but could see that Gewey would not be dissuaded. Sighing, he closed his eyes and placed his hands on the wound.

Gewey felt as if a blade of ice had shot through his neck. The sudden shock made him gasp out loud. But then, within a matter of seconds, the intense cold became a pleasant cool sensation. The cut on his neck ceased to throb and his head began to clear. Linis kept his hands on Gewey for several more minutes before finally removing them. He breathed heavily and opened his eyes.

“You should be ready to travel soon,” he said wearily.

“What did you do?” asked Gewey, touching his neck gingerly. The wound was nearly closed. It itched a bit, but the pain was completely gone.

Linis rubbed the bridge of his nose and lowered his head. “I have channeled my flow into you. You are healed, but I am drained.” He squeezed his eyes shut.

Gewey placed his hand on Linis' shoulder. “Will you be all right?”

Linis looked up and smiled weakly. He took the flask from Gewey and frowned as he found it empty. He reached in his belt and pulled out another. “I will be. Though I will not be able to travel as fast, or fight as well, for at least a day. But do not fear. I can move fast enough for our purpose, and I'm still more than a match for our prey. Just give me a little time to regain some strength.” He crossed his legs and bowed his head. “Go back to the path. I must focus. I will be along shortly.”

Gewey sat there for a moment, then struggled to his feet and retrieved his sword. Though still unsteady, his strength was returning and he slowly made his way back to the path. Nearly an hour had passed by the time Linis rejoined him. Gewey scrutinized the elf for a moment. If he was unable to continue, it didn't show. As for Gewey, much of his strength had already returned. He had been listening for signs of the other Vrykol, but just as Linis had said, they were gone.

“I think we should follow them,” said Linis. “I do not believe that this encounter was a coincidence. They will lead us to Kaylia.”

Gewey nodded sharply and focused. The trail the Vrykol had left was clear and easy to follow. “I'll lead,” he said.

Without another word, the two of them raced off after the Vrykol. Gewey could tell that Linis was struggling to keep pace, but he also knew they could ill afford to slow down. Too much time had already been lost. They continued for more than three hours without pause. For a while Gewey could still feel the fatigue left over from the poison, but it soon vanished as the flow continued to course through his body. From time to time he reached out for Kaylia, but her mind was still shrouded.

As the sun waned, they had still come no closer to catching the Vrykol or Kaylia. Then, just as desperation was returning, Gewey was flooded with her presence. So suddenly did this happen, it nearly caused him to lose his footing. He ground to a sudden halt.

Linis almost ran into him. “What is it?” he panted, the evidence of his diminished condition obvious in his voice.

Gewey held out his hand to silence the elf. He closed his eyes and concentrated with all his power. “She is near,” he whispered almost inaudibly. His eyes widened. “And she's in danger.” The sinews of his legs burst into life, propelling him forward with such speed that Linis had no chance of catching him.

The forest was a blur as Gewey ran headlong in Kaylia's direction. She was near, though heading away from him. But there was something else - a Vrykol was pursuing her. Its velocity was great, and he knew Kaylia would not be able to escape it.

He unsheathed his sword and power exploded within him. This caught the Vrykol's attention. It was only a few hundred yards away and standing between himself and Kaylia. The beast turned to Gewey for an instant, then back around. Gewey could feel the hatred spewing out of the creature. Hatred for everything. The creature raised its sword arm.

It was then that Gewey spotted Kaylia. He knew the Vrykol intended to heave its blade at her, and he knew that he was still too far away. He let out a scream, and with all his might thrust a burst of power directly at the Vrykol. He feared this one would block him in the same way the other had, but it didn't. The strength of the flow flattened the creature to the ground. But Gewey had not been fast enough. The blade had already flown from its hand. With one last burst, Gewey tried to change the sword’s direction, but instead he only succeeded in pushing it forward even faster.

“No!” His cry shook the ground as the sword struck its target.

Kaylia jerked forward and fell to the ground, the hilt of the blade nearly crushing her skull. Gewey leaped over the flattened body of the Vrykol and was at Kaylia's side without pause. She was face down, blood pouring from the wound on the back of her head. Immediately he tore the sleeve from his shirt and pressed it tightly over the wound, trying desperately to stop the bleeding.

“I will not lose you,” he cried. “Not now.”

He closed his eyes and let the flow rage through him. Slowly, he allowed it to pass into Kaylia, focusing his mind on her injury. At first he wasn't sure that anything was happening. Then he felt it. The wound was closing, and the flow of blood lessened to a trickle. Gewey could feel this draining him, making him weaker, but he didn't care. When the wound had closed completely he stopped and gently turned her over. It was then he heard Linis approaching. The elf paused beside the Vrykol and beheaded the mangled body.

“She lives?” asked Linis, out of breath.

Gewey nodded, cradling Kaylia in his arms. “She lives.” Tears were streaming down his face as he stroked her hair tenderly. “Thank the gods, she lives.”

Linis knelt beside them. He placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder and squeezed. “You did well, my friend.”

Nearly ten minutes passed before Kaylia stirred. Her eyes fluttered open as her hands slid up Gewey's chest and wrapped themselves around his neck. “I knew you would come,” she whispered. She pulled him close and embraced him tightly.

Gewey could feel the bond between them growing ever stronger, and allowed himself to be engulfed by their connection. He hadn't realized just how much a part of himself their bond had become until it had been weakened. And now it had returned, he was happy to bathe in the sensation.

Linis stood, his legs still a bit unsteady. “We cannot stay here.” He looked down at Kaylia. “Can you travel?”

Kaylia reluctantly released her hold on Gewey and sat up straight. “I am fine.” She noticed the seeker’s condition and frowned. “But you are clearly not well.”

Linis smiled. “I will be fine once I have had a chance to rest.” He peered into the forest for a moment. “For now I can sense no pursuit. But I would have us far from this place come sundown.”

Gewey listened for signs of anyone nearby. “I can't sense anything, either. But I think you're right. We should get as far from here as we can.” He looked over at the body of the beheaded Vrykol and his face darkened. He stood, helping Kaylia to her feet.

“No need to coddle me,” she scolded playfully. “From the look of you two, I am by far in the best condition.” Without another word she strode away north.

“I take it you will lead,” remarked Linis.

Kaylia glanced over her shoulder. “I know these lands very well. Maybe even as well as you, seeker. My captors wasted their time if they thought to confuse me.”

A wave of anger shot through her bond with Gewey when she mentioned her captivity. Gewey felt a sudden urge to hunt them all down and make them pay, but quickly pushed it from his thoughts. This was not the time.

Kaylia led them skillfully through the forest until the light of the day waned. By then they had traveled many miles. Linis managed to keep pace despite his growing fatigue.

“I will scout the area,” he said when they finally stopped to make camp.

“No,” said Kaylia, firmly. “You are too weak. I will see that the area is unwatched.” She turned to Gewey and took his empty flask from his belt. “There is a stream nearby, and possibly some herbs. In the meantime we will risk a small fire. Attend to it, if you please, Gewey.”

Linis tossed her his flask as well. “You may find jawas roots in these parts, or perhaps yellow silisia bulbs.”

Kaylia nodded and disappeared into the brush.

Linis offered to help with the fire, but Gewey wouldn't hear of it. “We need you strong again,” he said. “You must rest. I can build a fire without help.”

Linis smiled and sat down against a nearby tree. He allowed his eyes to fall shut and his mind to drift.

By the time Kaylia returned, Gewey had a small fire crackling cheerfully. Linis was still leaning against the tree, arms folded and eyes closed.

Kaylia handed Gewey his now filled flask and sat next to him by the fire. “I could not find jawas, but silisia was plentiful.”

She withdrew a handful of small yellow flowers from her belt and began tearing them into tiny pieces. The air filled with a sickly sweet odor that reminded Gewey of plum brandy, only stronger. Once she was finished, she opened Linis' flask and placed the shredded bulbs inside. Tearing a strip of cloth from her sleeve she tied the flask to a long twig and held it over the fire. “It’s not as good as jawas, but it will help.” She glanced over at Linis. Her expression was grave.

“What's wrong?” asked Gewey.

“Nothing,” she replied. “It is just odd to see someone such as Linis in this state.”

“He got that way healing me,” explained Gewey. He recounted the fight with the Vrykol.

“Then it is a wonder he was able to make it this far,” said Kaylia. “Healing of that sort is not easy, and the cost is great. She touched the back of her head where the sword had struck, then looked deep into Gewey's eyes. She leaned in and kissed him gently. “You are powerful to have healed me the way you did. Such a feat would have incapacitated even the strongest elf.”

Gewey flushed bright red. His heart was pounding and he could still feel the warmth of her lips, even though they were no longer on his. It took him a minute to speak. “I honestly don't know how I did it. Since we left the spirit world, it's like I understand the flow in my heart - but I still can't understand it in my mind.” His thoughts turned to how the Vrykol had been able to block his abilities. “There's too much I don't understand.” He waved it off and smiled. “I wasn't able to reach out to you when the elves held you captive. I think somehow the Vrykol was responsible, but....”

He shook his head and took hold of Kaylia's hands. “Tell me what happened?”

Kaylia told him about her time in captivity. When she was done, she dropped the flask next to the fire and kissed Gewey again, this time long and deep.

“What was that for?” he stammered.

Kaylia smiled. “Because I feared I would never again have the chance. And...”

She grabbed Gewey's collar roughly, and met his eyes. Her smile had vanished. “As we are bonded, it is my right.”

There was a long pause, then they both burst out laughing. Gewey felt as if a weight had been lifted from his heart. They spent the next hour huddled together in silence, staring into the fire. Their bond made words unnecessary. Kaylia finished the tea and left it to cool.

“It will be ready by daybreak,” she said. “Linis should drink most of it, but be certain you have at least a mouthful.” She lay down on the forest floor. “Strong as you are, I can tell that healing me has taken its toll on you.”

Gewey hadn't noticed until that moment how much his body ached. He lay next to Kaylia and allowed his mind to drift into hers. He felt closer to her than ever before.

A satisfied smile washed over his face as sleep finally took him.

Chapter 3

As Millet and Dina neared Sharpstone, Millet's spirits noticeably lifted. When they were only a mile from town they spurred their horses to a quick trot. Millet looked to and fro, taking in familiar sights and grinning happily. Martha Tredall, one of the village mothers and the wife of Hallis Tredall, the cooper, was the first person they encountered. Martha was a short, sturdy woman with short mouse-brown hair and a cheerful demeanor. She’d had many past dealings with Millet, and he’d built a good rapport with both her and her husband. Nonetheless, as soon as she saw the two riding up, her typical good-natured smile turned to a sour stare.

Millet took a quick glance at his dusty, stained shirt and trousers. Once tan, they were blotched with mud, making him look more like a farmer than a lord. Dina fared a bit better. She had chosen a dark brown blouse and matching pants, which hid the dirt from the long road far better.

“And just where have you been, Master Millet?” Martha asked when they were by her side. “Off making trouble with that Starfinder fellow, I imagine.” She looked back down the road they had come along. “I see he's not with you. So much the better. We have enough troubles here without the likes of him around.”

“Mind what you say, Martha Tredall,” said Millet. “Lee Starfinder has never given you reason to speak ill of him. He's given your husband more than his share of business.”

Martha lowered her eyes. “He has, true enough. But that doesn't excuse him for bringing trouble to our town, now does it?”

“What trouble?” asked Millet, steadying in his horse.

Martha looked up at Millet. Her eyes were filled with anger. “Those bloody faithful. They started arriving just after you and Lee made off with young Gewey Stedding.” She lowered her voice to a whisper. “Gewey's not coming back, is he?”

“Why do you ask?”

She stepped close. “Because they keep askin' about him - those faithful, I mean. They've asked everyone in town if they know where he is.”

Millet suddenly felt very exposed on the road. “And what do you tell them?”

Martha stood up straight and held her head high. “I don't tell them nothin'. I don't care how much gold they throw around. Besides, I don't know nothin' anyway. Last I heard he went north with Lee. Not that I believed a word of it, but that's what we were told by Lee's servants. From what I hear about those faithful, they're from up north themselves. I figure if Gewey went that way for real, they wouldn't be down here lookin’ for him.”

Millet thought for a moment. “How many of these faithful are there?”

Martha shrugged. “Not many. Ten or so maybe. But they got lots of gold. They make your master look like a beggar. And they use it, too. They've practically bought the town. There's not a shop or farm in Sharpstone that isn't caught up with them somehow or other.”

“Where do they stay?” asked Millet.

“They built themselves a big house just north of town. Not far from your master’s place.” She took a step back and glanced at Dina. “You and your friend might want to stay away. They ain't hurt no one yet, but they look like they could.”

Millet's eye narrowed. “No, my dear. I will not be staying away.” He looked down the road toward town. “And just so you know, Lee Starfinder is no longer master. I am.” He spurred his horse. Dina followed closely behind.

The way to the manor took them to the outskirts of town. The few people they passed on the way stopped and stared. Some dashed away. When they arrived at the entrance to one of the many roads that led to the house, Millet slowed his horse to a walk.

“I take it this is not the homecoming you were expecting,” said Dina.

Millet dropped his head and took a deep breath. “I wasn't certain what to expect. I thought Angrääl might be watching Sharpstone, being that it is Gewey's hometown. But I didn't expect them to set up a base here.”

“What are you going to do?”

Millet looked up. Anger burned in his eyes. “I'm going to kick them out of my town.”

As they approached the house, Millet caught sight of two servants busy tending the garden. He recognized them as Barty Inglewood and his son, Randson. Lee had hired them five years ago. Originally from Gath, they were as stout and dedicated workers as a person could hope to find. Their faces lit up when they saw Millet.

“I thought you'd left us for good,” called Barty. He set down his rake and removed his work gloves, shoving them into his pocket. His son only glanced up and nodded from where he was trimming the hedges, then went back to his work.

“As did I,” said Millet.

“Randson,” called Barty. “Help Millet and...”

“This is Dina,” said Millet. “A friend. This is Barty Inglewood and his son, Randson. They are by far the best gardeners for a hundred miles.”

“A friend of Millet's is my friend as well.” Barty bowed awkwardly. “And where is Lord Starfinder?”

Millet and Dina dismounted and began unpacking their gear. “Lee will not be coming.”

Barty rubbed his chin. “I see. I've never heard you call him Lee before, so I reckon you have news to tell.” He began gathering their things. “You'll be wanting to wash up. I'll get Lydia started on your rooms and a bath. Mealtime may have to wait for a couple of hours though. Most everyone is staying down at the Stedding farm now days.”

“Lee instructed for the farm to be cared for,” said Millet. “But I don't think he intended for his entire staff to move there.” He took a quick look around. “Who's left?”

“Me and my boy, of course. Lydia does most of the housework, and Trevor, the old cook Lee hired a couple of years ago is still here. But he doesn't move around so good anymore, so Lydia helps in the kitchen too.” He slung a pack over his shoulder. “No one wants to be around here for too long now all those newcomers are about. The rest of the staff comes about once a week to see to repairs and the like, but then they're off again. If Lord Starfinder didn't pay so good, they’d all be moved away by now.”

Mention of the newcomers brought tension to Millet's face.

“I see you've already heard about them,” said Barty. He started toward the house. “Well, don't you worry. They don't come calling here any more. Me and my boy ran them off.”

Millet kept silent as he and Dina followed Barty through the front door. The house was exactly as Millet remembered. The main hall was just beyond the door and furnished with heavy oak couches and chairs covered with soft suede upholstery. The walls were decorated with exotic tapestries that Lee had acquired during his many travels. A fire crackled in the hearth at the far right end, and two silver lamps glowed dimly against the wall behind the couches. Just next to the fireplace was a door leading to the dining hall and sitting room, while on the near corner was another one that led through to Lee's study and bedrooms. The hardwood floor was covered with a large, blood red rug woven with delicate silver patterns. Lee had purchased it in Dantory when he was not much more than a boy.

Millet moved to the wall to avoid stepping on the rug as he made his way to the near door. It would be a shame to muddy such a beautiful thing. “I will take the master suite,” he said.

Barty cocked an eyebrow but said nothing.

On reaching the master bedroom door, he asked Barty to show Dina to a guest room and stepped inside. Barty could see that Millet was now in charge, and obeyed at once. Millet took a long look around. The large bed was built from flame maple, polished and stained to a dark brown, while the green coverings on top were soft and thick. Millet had often envied Lee such a comfortable sleep. In the corner were two chairs and a small round table where Lee used to take his breakfast. A book of Baltrian poems rested on the table, still open on the last page he had been reading. A large wardrobe in the corner remained ajar from Lee's quick departure, and a bookcase against the wall still bore all the signs of his rummaging through it. Millet took a deep breath and began to unpack. It was his now. All of it. For good or ill, he was lord of the manor.

Randson brought a washbasin and hot water a few minutes later. After he had cleaned and changed, Millet strode back to the main hall. Dina was already waiting for him. She now wore a blue cotton dress and was sat in a chair thumbing through a small leather-bound book.

“Lee certainly liked books,” she said. “There must be fifty in my room alone.”

Millet smiled and took a seat across from her. “He did indeed.” He leaned back and rubbed his neck. “There is much about Lee Starfinder that lives in this house.” He began pointing out the tapestries and other various decorations, telling Dina where they came from and how Lee had acquired them. Dina smiled and listened patiently.

After a time, Lydia entered the room. Dressed in a dark brown skirt that reached all the way to the floor and a white cotton shirt, she was tall, lean, and despite her advancing years, looked as if she could labor alongside any man. Her once-black hair was now streaked with gray and wrapped in a tight bun.

Lydia looked disapprovingly at Millet. “What business do you have in Lord Starfinder's chambers?”

“Fetch Barty, Randson, and Trevor,” ordered Millet. “I have something to tell you all.”

“Trevor's cooking supper,” said Lydia.

Millet's faced hardened. “Then tell him to stop.”

Lydia glared at Millet for a moment, then stormed off toward the kitchen. A few minutes later she returned, followed by a thinly built old man wearing a tan shirt and trousers. He was covered from head to toe in flour. The old man beamed when he saw Millet.

“Good to see you, old friend,” said Trevor. He looked at Dina. “I see your taste in company has improved.”

Dina stood and introduced herself. Trevor bowed and started to take a seat on the couch.

“I'll not have you getting flour all over the furniture,” shouted Lydia.

“Calm down woman,” said Trevor. “I'll clean it.”

“You sit too,” Millet said to Lydia.

The front door opened and Barty and his son entered. Millet motioned for them to be seated as well.

Millet retrieved the parchment that Lee had given to him when they parted and handed it to Lydia. She and the others read it for several minutes before returning the document to Millet.

“I don't know who Lee Nal' Thain is,” said Lydia. “But if you think for one minute that…”

“You know full well who Lee Nal' Thain is,” Millet countered. “As do the rest of you.” He stood. “Lee has given me rights to his lands and titles. That includes this estate.”

Lydia huffed. “And what do you intend to do with these ‘rights’, might I ask?”

Millet thought he heard a slight quiver in the woman's voice.

“Before I reveal my intentions, tell me about the faithful.”

Lydia took a deep breath. “About a week after you and Lord Starfinder left Sharpstone, three oddly dressed men came to the door inquiring as to your whereabouts, and the whereabouts of master Stedding. They sounded like those folks from Baltria to me, but they wore black cloaks and kept their faces hidden with their hoods. I've never trusted people who won't show their faces. Anyway, I told them you had all left and didn't know where you had gone, or when you'd return. At the time I didn't think much on it. Lord Starfinder has had odd people call on him before, and he's always taken an interest in young Gewey. But when I went to market a few days later, I noticed they were still around and asking more questions.”

She shrugged. “Even so, what could I do? They weren't causing trouble, and no one seemed to mind them. All the same I told the staff to keep an eye on them.” She looked at Barty.

“Ah, yes,” said Barty. “When Lydia told me about these characters, I made sure I knew what they were up to. I even had my boy follow them a few times. Like Lydia said, at first they didn't do anything other than ask questions. And apart from causing rumors to fly, they didn't make trouble. In fact, the way they let their coins pass freely, people actually started to take a liking to them. Especially Mayor Freidly. He had them over at his house almost every night.”

Barty's lip curled in anger. “It wasn't long before they started comin' 'round here again though. And this time they were more forceful. They insisted that someone here knew where Lord Starfinder was, and demanded to know.” He puffed out his chest. “Well, my friend, no one bullies me. I snatched up my shovel and ran them off.”

“And you were a fool for it,” snapped Lydia. “You could have gotten yourself killed.”

Barty ignored her comment. “After that, they didn't come back. I'd see them watching people coming in and out, but that was as close as they came. I guess I scared 'em good enough.”

“And that’s the reason we don't know anything,” scolded Lydia. She then turned to Millet. “If you work for Lord Starfinder these days, you had just as well be an elf. No one says a word to us anymore.”

“They still talk to me,” said Trevor. “One of the advantages to being an old man.”

Millet smiled. “What do they say?”

“First, you should know what happened after Barty ran those fellows off.” Trevor leaned back in his seat and crossed his legs. “From what I heard, they went and reported him to the mayor. Not much that fat lout could do about it though. Barty didn't hit them, and they were on Lord Starfinder's property at the time. I guess they decided to find a better way to watch us. It was only a few days later when they bought the land just next to here. They must have spent a fortune, 'cause they had a house built in just over a week. That was about the time their friends started showing up.”

“We ran into Martha Tredall on our way here,” said Millet. “She told us a little about what's going on, and said that there's about ten of them.”

“Sounds about right,” said Trevor. “They said they were here to set up a trading business, but no one really believed them. Especially with all their talk about the Reborn King.”

This caused Millet and Dina to shift in their seats.

Trevor cocked his head. “I see you've heard about him. Well, that's no surprise if half of what they say is true.”

“And what is that?” asked Millet.

“Mostly that he's coming to free us from the gods,” said Trevor. “Bring back the old days like before the Great War. Things like that. I thought they were just some new cult. But whatever they are, and whoever this Reborn King is, they sure do have a lot of gold. Not long after the rest of these faithful got here, they paid to have the market rebuilt and started buying out anyone who'd sell. Even the folks who didn't sell took their gold on loan. Almost everyone in Sharpstone owes them something.”

“We can barely keep our cupboards stocked,” said Lydia. “No one wants to do business with us. They're either working for the faithful, or just too scared to cross them.”

“That's why most of the staff stays out at the Stedding farm,” said Barty. “They leave them alone out there, and they can get supplies. Master Stedding still produces more hay than anyone else in these parts, even if he's not around. People don't have much choice but to sell them what they need.” He leaned forward. “But you can bet they're watching everything that happens at that farm too. They ask as much about Master Stedding as they do Lord Starfinder.”

Millet bowed his head in thought. “Trevor, I want you to go into town after our meal. Say that I have returned to settle some business for Lord Starfinder.” He looked up and met Trevor's eyes. “Do not say anything else. Only that.” He turned to Barty. “I want you to secure the front door and windows, but leave the back open. Then take Trevor, Lydia, and your son to the Stedding farm. Stay there until I send for you.”

“I'll not be spirited away,” said Lydia, sternly. “If you're fool enough to do what I think you're going to do, then I'll...”

“You will do as I say,” snapped Millet. “I cannot do what I must do if I have to worry about your safety.”

“And what is it that you must do?” asked Dina.

“I intend to send the faithful a message,” Millet replied darkly.

“If that's the case,” said Barty, “then you'll need me and my boy.” He stood up straight and squared his broad shoulders. “Lydia and Trevor may not be much good in a fight, but I can still swing a sword if need be. I've shown my boy how to take care of himself too. You may be Lord of the Manor, but you ain't no Lee Starfinder. You're gonna need more than just you and a young woman if the faithful come callin'.”

Millet looked at the gardener and his son. Their jaws were tight and their eyes blazed with determination. He sighed. “Very well. But you must do exactly as I say.”

“The faithful may not even come here,” offered Dina.

“They'll come,” said Millet.

“But how can you be sure?” she asked.

“If these are the same lot we ran into in Baltria, then they're likely nobles or maybe merchants,” said Millet. “I know how they think. They'll want to dispose of us quickly and quietly, before we can get ready for them or flee. By now they will know who I am, and without Lee here as protection they will not fear me. They'll either try and take me prisoner and torture me for information, or just simply kill me.” He shrugged. “Whatever they do, it will not be in the open. They'll come at night.”

After the meal Trevor and Lydia cleaned the dishes before making their way into town. Once they had gone, Millet went over his plan with Dina and then helped Barty and Randson secure the front door and windows, as well as the stables. Dina busied herself with other preparations. Before long, the sun was sinking low in the sky and the chill air made the crackling fire a welcome sight.

“All is ready,” said Barty as he, Dina and Randson entered.

Millet was sitting in a leather chair by the fire, staring intently at the dancing flames. He glanced up and smiled. “Good.” He rose from his chair and looked at each of them for a moment. “If you want to go to the Stedding farm, now is the time.”

No one replied.

“Then I suppose it's time for bed.”

Chapter 4

The lanterns burned brightly in the front of Starfinder manor that night, as they did every night. The sound of restless horses in the nearby stables carried on the chill night air, masking the rustle of the approaching footfalls. Two cloaked figures, one tall and thin, the other shorter and almost portly, made their way around the edge of the yard and toward the back of the house.

“Are you certain he's inside?” whispered the short man.

The other brought his finger to the side of his nose and scanned the area. He pointed to the second window from the corner of the house. The short man nodded, then slowly pushed it open. The soft sound of the well-crafted window sliding upward caused both men to wince. They paused and waited to see if they had been heard, but to their relief, no one inside stirred.

The tall man peered inside. All was blackness at first. But then his eyes began to adjust and he could see that the window led to a small pantry. Shelves filled with cans and jars lined the walls; herbs and dried meats hung from small hooks on the ceiling. He looked back to his companion and nodded sharply. Carefully, he pulled himself inside and gently placed his moccasin-covered feet on the floor. The slight squeak of the wooden floor was like a thunderclap, but he ignored it and went on.

Creeping to the door at the far end, he cracked it open. There was no one in sight. He glanced behind him to make sure his companion was following, but to his dismay he was still alone. The tall man hissed, but there was no response.

“Devon,” he whispered angrily. “Get in here.” But Devon was silent. His lip curled with anger. He drew his knife and crept to the window. Devon was nowhere to be seen. Coward, he thought. I'll have his hide for this. Devon had been far from his first choice to go with him on this mission. He was fat, clumsy, and not very bright. But his father was rich, and had largely funded the efforts of the faithful in Sharpstone. However, rich or not, the faithful would not tolerate a coward.

He tiptoed back to the door. Going on alone was a risk, even if Starfinder wasn't in the house, but there was no backing out now. He knew what would happen to him if he failed. He pushed the door open wider and ever so slowly stepped silently into the kitchen. The room was still warm from an earlier meal, and the air still bore the scent of roast meat and bread. Beads of sweat quickly formed on his brow.

At the far end of the room was a door that he assumed led to the dining hall. From there he needed to make his way to the sleeping chambers at the other end of the house. One of Starfinder's less-than-loyal servants had given them a good description of the layout, and he had been over it several times. Still, there was always the chance that it was inaccurate. He shifted his knife into his left hand, dried his palm on his trousers, and took a slow, deep breath.

He heard movement behind him coming from the pantry. The coward had regained his nerve. He was almost at the kitchen door when it burst open. A dark figure stood in the doorway, the glint of steel shining through the darkness. He instinctively raised his knife. Then there was a thud and sharp pain to the back of his head. He fell to his knees, his knife falling from his grasp.

“I surrender!” he cried.

The figure in the doorway stepped forward, his face still obscured by darkness. “Again.”

Another blow came from behind. This one sent him into unconsciousness.

Chapter 5

Millet paced the floor in the main hall while Dina remained in a chair by the fire, calmly reading. Her honey-blond hair was pushed back, revealing her delicate features. Her lips were twisted into a tiny smile as she fingered through the pages of a Baltrian comedy.

Millet finally stopped pacing to look at the two bound and unconscious men in the corner. With the hoods of their black cloaks now thrown back, he could see them clearly. The tall one was dark-haired, with long features and narrow-set eyes. The other, short and plump, had the look of a true aristocrat. Soft pale skin, and well-oiled black hair. Millet wondered why they would send someone like this to kill him. Clearly they didn't think the task would be difficult. Barty was kneeling next to them, a short sword in hand. On the other side, his son was holding a thick herding club.

“Do you know them?” asked Millet.

Barty nodded. “The fat one is called Devon. The other fellow goes by Sherone. Both are from Baltria, I think. At least, that’s what they sound like when they talk, and Devon does most of that. He's a bit of a braggart.” He cupped Devon's chin in his hand. “Goes 'round telling tales of his adventures. Not that anyone believes a word of it, but he's free with his gold, so no one seems to mind.”

“Do you recognize them?” Dina asked Millet, without looking up from her book.

“No,” he replied. “But it has been many years since I associated with the nobles of Baltria. These two don't look to be old enough for me to have known them when Lee and I lived there.”

“What do you intend to do with them?” asked Barty.

Millet's eyes shot to Dina, who gave him a knowing look.

“I cannot ask you or your son to participate in what is about to happen,” said Millet.

Barty rose to his feet. His face flushed. “I see.” He turned to his son. “Go to the Stedding farm.”

Randson glared at his father defiantly, squaring his shoulders.

Barty heaved a sigh. “Not this time, boy.” He placed his hand on Randson's arm.

“I will not leave you,” said Randson. His voice was deep and powerful.

Dina looked up with raised eyebrows, realizing that this was the first time she had heard Randson speak.

Barty looked at Millet, and then back to his son. “If Lord Millet is going to do what I think he's going to do, then I will not have you a part of this.”

“And if you think I am blind to what these people are up to, then you also think me stupid,” said Randson. “They have practically enslaved Sharpstone. People are afraid to speak against the faithful out of fear they'll lose all they own. They curse the gods openly, and mock those who refuse to do the same.” His knuckles wrapped around the club turned white. “And now they come here to do murder. If Lord Millet decides they should die, then it's no less than they deserve. You taught me right from wrong, father. And we are in the right.”

Barty nodded slowly, pride glimmering in his eyes.

“Actually, I need him to do something for me,” said Millet. “And he would need to leave now.”

“If you think to send me away...” began Randson.

“I do indeed,” said Millet, cutting him off. “I need you to protect Dina.”

“Protect me from what?” asked Dina.

“I intend to start fighting Angrääl here,” explained Millet. “If I’m to do that, I'll need more than just the four of us.” He turned to Barty. “I assume there are still some people in town who want to stand up to the faithful?”

“A few,” said Barty. “But they're afraid of losing what they have. Practically the whole town is in debt to them. It's all legal, too. Signed by the mayor, then sent to Helenia. If anyone gets out of line, they threaten to go to the king.”

“Smart,” Millet muttered, rubbing his chin. “In the morning, go to those who you think you can still trust. Tell them that all their debts will be paid tomorrow. Then have them join me here.” He looked decisively at Dina. “I need you to go to Helenia to hire men at arms. By the morning, the faithful will likely send for more people. And unless I miss my guess, the next group that arrives in Sharpstone won't be nobles and merchants. We'll need muscle and steel to rid us of this lot.”

“I can do better than sell-swords and thugs,” said Dina. “If I am to go to Helenia, then I can bring back Knights of Amon Dähl.”

Millet's eyes widened. “Really? How many?”

“I can send word for them to come from the temples,” Dina told him. “How many, I don't know. But even if only a few were to answer the call, Angrääl would have to send a whole army to match them. And I wager they can be here faster than the faithful will be able to reinforce.”

“Then it will be up to us to keep them busy until these fellows get here,” said Barty. “You can count on me, and a few others at the Stedding farm as well.”

Just then, Devon stirred, groaning.

Millet looked at Barty grimly “For now, I need you and Randson to go outside and get a wagon ready. Don't come back in until I call for you.”

Barty hesitated, then nodded sharply. “Of course.”

After Barty and Randson had left, Millet knelt down in front of Devon, who was just starting to open his eyes. In Millet’s right hand was a small dagger. Dina stood just behind him, her face expressionless.

Devon turned his head and saw that Sherone was still unconscious. “What do you want with me?”

“First, I want you to see something,” said Millet. “Then I'll let you decide what I want with you.”

Before Devon could respond, Millet reached out and slit Sherone's throat. Blood spewed forth, pouring down the man's cloak. His eyes opened for a just moment as he gurgled for breath, then slowly closed.

“Gods protect me!” cried Devon. Tears streamed down his plump cheeks as his struggled against his bonds.

Millet laughed mockingly. “Gods? The faithful invoking the gods?” He wiped the bloody dagger on Sherone's cloak. “What would your master say if he heard that, I wonder?”

“I renounce the faithful,” said Devon between his sobs. “Please, spare me.”

Millet stood and turned his back to Devon. “Did you come here to spare me?”

“My father is rich,” cried Devon. “If you let me live, he’ll pay you whatever you want.”

“And who is your father?” asked Millet.

“Lord Devon Drevaldon the Second of Baltria.”

“I know your father,” said Millet. “At least, I know of him through Lee Starfinder. It doesn't surprise me that he has fallen in with Angrääl. But you should know that I am lord of this manor now. And as a Baltrian noble, you know well what it means to attack a lord in his own home.”

Devon began to shake uncontrollably. ”I swear I didn't know. I only came to...to...”

Millet spun around and held up his hand, silencing him. “You came to prove to the rest that you're good for more than just your father’s gold.” He knelt down. “Now you can prove your worth to me. Would you like that?”

“Yes!” Devon blurted out. “I swear to it!”

“I've asked no oath from you,” said Millet. “Nor would I believe any that you could give. So I will swear an oath to you.”

He leaned in. “You tell me everything you know, and flee this very night back to Baltria without a word to the rest of the faithful, and I swear that you will not die this night. Should I find out that you have lied, that you have spoken to your friends, or should the sun find you still in Sharpstone in the morning, regardless of what happens to me, you will die. Do not think you can find safety in Baltria. Or that your father can protect you. And should I die, your death will come more swiftly than you can imagine.”

He stood and turned to Dina. “Please explain to the son of Lord Devon Drevaldon the Second who you are, so that he knows what I say is true.”

Dina flashed a shocked glance at Millet, then nodded. “I am a member of the Order of Amon Dähl. Does that name hold any meaning for you?”

“I have heard of it,” said Devon. “The faithful speak of it often.”

“Then you should know that we have people in cities in every kingdom,” Her face was stone. “If you do not do as Lord Millet says, then I will send word to all members of my order that your death is of the greatest importance. There will be nowhere to hide. Do you understand?”

Devon nodded slowly.

“Then tell me everything you know about the plans of the faithful,” said Millet. “And if anyone in town has joined your cause. And I don't mean people who owe you money. I mean those who are really with you.”

For the next hour Devon told them what he knew. But as it turned out, it wasn't much they didn't already know. Angrääl didn't seem to hold the faithful in very high regard, relegating them to petty espionage and assassinations. They received most of their orders from agents traveling up and down the Goodbranch River, and sent reports of their progress back the same way. Their orders were to take control of Sharpstone and find any information they could on Lee Starfinder and Gewey Stedding. The king had been resisting their efforts to place an ambassador in his court, but had been more than willing to accept their gold. Devon said that if the king didn't relent soon, it was likely he would be killed. When exactly this would happen, he didn't know. But he knew they already had people set up in place in Helenia.

Once Millet was satisfied, he called for Barty and Randson. They paused at the sight of the bloody corpse of Sherone. Randson smiled and nodded approvingly.

“I see you let the fat one live,” said Barty.

Millet looked down at Devon. “Load his friend's body in the wagon.” He reached in his pocket and handed Barty a small bag of gold. “Take this, and Lord Devon, away from Sharpstone. Make certain he has a shovel to dig a grave, and give him the gold when he's done. It should be enough to take him wherever he wants to go.”

“And where is that?” asked Barty.

Millet leaned down and cut Devon's bonds. “That's up to him. But I daresay, he should reconsider a return to Baltria.” A sinister grin crept on his face. “Though his father may welcome him, I doubt the rest of the faithful will be as understanding of his failure.” He shrugged. “The choice is his. I care not.”

Barty and Randson lifted the body and carried it away. Devon followed close behind. When they had gone, Millet sat in a chair close to the fireplace and bowed his head in thought. Dina sat across from him and leaned forward.

“Are you all right?” she asked.

Millet looked up and smiled weakly. “I will be.” He looked over at where Sherone's blood still stained the floor. “During my travels with Lee, I've been forced to kill. But never like this. I've never before murdered a helpless man.”

Dina reached out and placed her hand on Millet's knee. “You did what had to be done.”

Millet nodded. “I know. But I didn't want this.” He looked around the room; the walls were decorated with a lifetime of adventures. “Any of it. I was never meant to be a lord.”

“I don't know,” said Dina. “It seems to me that you are a very good lord. To do things against your own character in order to protect those you love is a very noble thing. It's what a lord should be.”

Millet rose to feet and looked at Dina. His face was filled with contempt. Not for her, but for himself. “And I may never forgive myself for it,” he said softly. “Or Lee, either.” He took out the blade that had ended the life of Sherone and stared at it. “Once I poisoned a man who was conspiring to kill a sword-master Lee was studying under in Dantory. I watched him writhe and twist on the floor until the life left his body. This was a thousand times worse.”

“Do you regret your actions?” asked Dina.

“My heart does. But my mind tells me it was foolish to even let Devon live.” He put the knife away. “I'm an old man, Dina. I've traveled far, and seen many things. But until now I've always had the luxury of viewing from the outside.” He knelt down in front of the bloodstain on the floor. “Now, I'm in the midst of it. Now, it is me who needs to hear the voice of reason. I was that voice for Lee Starfinder. Who will be that voice for me?”

Dina stood beside him. “Let me be that voice.” She gently lifted him to his feet. “Though I doubt I am as wise as you.”

“Before I was made Lord of the Nal'Thain family, that was possibly true.” He turned to her and shook his head. “But now, I am as Lee once was. The responsibility rests with me, and that responsibility can drive away the person you are, in favor of the person you need to be.” He took a long, deep breath. “And I know this is only the beginning. More blood is to come.”

“True,” said Dina. “But for now we need to wash this blood away.” She headed to the kitchen. “Get some rest,” she called back. “I will attend to this and leave for Helenia in the morning.”

Millet didn't protest. He went to his bedroom and dressed for bed. As he lay in the dark he could still see the knife sliding across Sherone's throat. He could see his victim's eyes open in terror, then close forever. The vision filled him with anger and sorrow. Millet Gristall was no more. That man had died the moment Sherone gasped his final breath. Lord Millet Nal'Thain had been left in his stead. And that man was at war. With this troubled thought in his mind, he drifted off to sleep.

The next morning, a loud banging sounded on the manor’s front door. Millet donned a robe to answer it, but could hear Dina had gotten there first. Angry voices echoed through the house from outside. When he finally arrived at the door, Dina was in the center of the doorway, her hands planted firmly on her hips.

“Who is it?” asked Millet.

“Mayor Freidly,” came a voice from just outside. “I'm here with members of the faithful. We need to speak with you.”

“Show them in, Dina,” said Millet. “I need to dress, then I will join you.” He turned and headed back to the bedroom. His heart pounded in his chest. He wondered if Barty and Randson had returned. He dressed in a casual pair of white cotton trousers and shirt, and slipped on a pair of soft leather shoes. He knew he didn't exactly look like the richest man in Sharpstone, but it would have to do.

When he arrived in the main hall, Mayor Freidly was standing at the far end of the room. His short, round features and wide-set blue eyes were just as Millet remembered. However, he was wearing a red silk waistcoat and fine linen pants and shirt, which was unusual for the mayor, being a man of modest means. Three black-cloaked men stood beside him. Their hoods were pushed back, revealing their dark hair, pale skin, and angry expressions. Millet thought they had the look of Baltrian nobles.

“Mayor Freidly,” said Millet, bowing his head ever so slightly. “It's good to see you again. To what do I owe the pleasure of your visit?”

The mayor looked flushed and nervous. “It's good to see you too, Millet. Though I wish it was under better circumstances.”

“I don't understand,” said Millet, feigning ignorance. “What is the trouble?”

“You know what the trouble is!” roared the faithful farthest from the mayor.

The mayor held up his hand. “Please, Master Troungo. Let me handle this.” He turned back to Millet. “These men claim that two of their brethren disappeared last night.”

“I'm sorry to hear that,” said Millet. “Still, I fail to see why you’ve come to me. I’ve only just arrived back in Sharpstone, and have had little time to get to know the newcomers.” He looked at each of the faithful in turn. “Though, I must admit, their reputation has preceded them. But why would they think to find their friends here?”

“They claim that two of their order came to this house last night to welcome you home and never returned.”

“I'm afraid I can't help you,” said Millet. “I swear by the gods that no one other than myself, Dina and those that live here passed through my door last night.”

“Enough of this,” said the faithful nearest to the mayor. “You know they came here. And you know where they are.”

Millet smiled. “And to whom do I have the pleasure of speaking?”

The man glared daggers, but did not answer.

The mayor cleared his throat. “This is Toliver Hall, and the men with him are Henris Longshadow, and Alex Troungo.”

“Baltrian nobles, from the sound of them,” remarked Millet. “They are very far from home, and dressed...oddly...for nobles.”

“We are the faithful of the Reborn King,” said Toliver. “And I'll ask you again. Where are our people?”

“Yes, I know all about the faithful,” said Millet. His tone hardened. “And I already know what you've been up to here in Sharpstone. As I said, no one called on me last night.” He shrugged. “Perhaps they longed for home and returned to Baltria rather than come here. It would seem a sensible course. I hear that there are plenty of the faithful in Baltria. At least for now.”

Toliver's hand began to slip beneath his robe.

“Gentlemen,” said the mayor, stepping in front of Toliver. “Clearly, your companions are not here. We should leave.”

The front door opened and Barty and Randson entered. On seeing the three faithful, they quickly moved to Millet's side.

“Mayor Freidly, I'm sure you know Barty and his son Randson,” said Millet. “They were here last night, and can certainly attest to the fact that no one came to welcome me home.”

“Nope,” said Barty, his eyes drilling holes through the black-cloaked men. “We saw no one.”

Millet grinned at Barty. “Is all in order?”

“Indeed it is,” Barty replied.

“Then, if there is nothing further,” said Millet, stepping aside to let the men pass. “I have much to attend to.”

The mayor herded the faithful to the door, bowing as he passed.

“This isn't over,” muttered Toliver. He then turned on his heels and stormed out.

The door slammed shut.

“No, it isn't,” whispered Millet. “It’s a very long way indeed from being over.”

Chapter 6

About half an hour before Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis reached the Chamber of the Maker, the sun finally broke through the clouds. Brilliant rays of light pierced pine needles to dance across the forest floor. The sweet song of birds hidden in the treetops echoed, and the earthy scent of pine and moss carried on a gentle breeze. Kaylia insisted they slow their pace to a leisurely stroll. Holding Gewey's hand, she merrily hummed a tune that Linis recognized and soon joined in with, harmonizing in a deep baritone.

“Why the sudden cheer?” asked Gewey. He was loath to interrupt, but could no longer contain his curiosity.

Kaylia gave his hand a squeeze. “We may be at war, and darkness may swallow the world, but never forget to look around and enjoy the wonder of it.” She breathed in deeply. “And I suspect that once we reach the Chamber, these things will go unnoticed for quite some time.”

Gewey saw a squirrel darting in and out of view among the branches of a nearby pine. It made him think of the woods close to his farm in Sharpstone. As a young child, just before the Long Freeze, he had built a tree house and spent many afternoons up there, reading and having fun until the sun went down. A family of squirrels had built a nest in a nearby tree. He’d watched as the nest filled with babies, and laughed at how the mother would bristle every time he climbed up. Come autumn, the babies had grown enough to leave the nest. He remembered feeling sorry for the abandoned mother squirrel. Gewey smiled and shook his head at the silly things children do.

“That was a lovely vision,” said Kaylia.

Kaylia's words brought him back to the here and now. He still found it amazing how much of him she could see through their bond. For Gewey it was different. He felt emotions and impressions, but never visions. He wondered if that would change when their bond was completed.

“I was a boy,” said Gewey. “After the Long Freeze I went back. The tree house was crumbled and rotten, and the nest was empty.”

“All things change, my friend,” said Linis. “And sometimes, not for the better.”

Soon the trail widened and met with the main road leading to the Chamber. At the crossroads they saw three elves barring their way. Two were elf men wearing shimmering red tunics and breeches, long black coats that reached their thighs, and soft, black leather boots. At their sides hung long thin swords, the jewels on each hilt sparkling brightly in the sun. Their silver hair fell loosely over their shoulders and down their backs. Even from a distance Gewey could see their bright green elf eyes staring keenly at him.

The third was an elf woman. Half a head taller than the men, she was adorned in a blood red gown that fitted nicely around her curves. A white sash was tied about her waist, and along with a thin silver belt, a small dagger hung on each hip. Unlike the others, her hair was jet black and decorated with wisps of silver. These peeked out just enough to catch the sun and give her the illusion of possessing an aura.

“Do you know them?” asked Kaylia. Her hand released Gewey's and slid to her knife.

“No,” Linis replied. “But stay your hand. We would not want to make friends into foes from our own fears.”

Kaylia tightened her jaw and moved her hand to her side.

“Greetings,” called Linis, holding his hand high. The elves didn't move. “Who are you, and what is your business?”

The elf woman whispered into the ear of the elf on her left. He nodded slowly. She took a step forward and held up a delicate hand. “Greetings.” Her voice was gentle and calm, and though still several yards away, she sounded as if she were right in front of them. “Come and walk with us. It would seem fortune has made our paths as one.”

Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis paused for a second, then approached.

Linis bowed. “I am Linis. This is Kaylia and Gewey. Your speech and dress are unfamiliar. From where do you hail?”

The elf woman smiled brightly, and though she bowed to each in the group, her eyes never left Gewey. “I am Aaliyah,” she said. “My companions are Mohanisi and Nehrutu.” The elf men bowed in turn. Apart from Mohanisi being a shade slighter in build and maybe an inch taller, they were remarkably similar in appearance. “As for our home - that is a question best answered later.”

Kaylia stepped forward. That Aaliyah’s eyes still rested on Gewey had not escaped her notice. “I think it is a question to be answered now.”

“Fierce,” said Mohanisi. “Much as we expected.”

“Decorum my friend,” scolded Aaliyah, though not too harshly. “They know us not, and have been through much hardship and pain.”

“And what do you know of that?” asked Kaylia.

“More than I care to, I'm afraid,” Aaliyah replied. Her voice was filled with pity and sorrow. Gewey found himself wanting to weep at the sound, as if her words stirred something deep inside him. “My dear Kaylia,” she said taking a small step forward. “We are here to bring glad tidings. We have come to help you, after many lifetimes of waiting.”

“I don't understand,” said Linis. “Where have you come from?”

Aaliyah glanced at her companions, who nodded in turn. “We are from across the sea. We are of the first race of elves to traverse the Great Sureshi and settle these lands. And now we have returned. Though I fear we have returned too late.”

Linis' eyes widened in immediate disbelief. “Sureshi? I have not heard that word used since I was a boy. No one who has journeyed across the Great Abyss has ever returned, and yet you claim to be from there?”

“None of your folk who tried to reach our land would have survived,” said Nehrutu. “The Great Barrier has barred the way for thousands of years. It has only been nineteen summers since we have been able to get through ourselves. And yes, that is our home. Once, long ago, it was the home of all elves. But now...”

He paused, placing his hand on Aaliyah’s shoulder and nodding to her.

“Yes, quite right,” she said. “We should go. Your brothers and sisters await your return. I think they would want our tale told to all.” She met Gewey's eyes once again. “And I suspect they are especially anxious to see you again.”

“You seem to know something about me,” said Gewey. He was no longer afraid to reveal himself.

“Oh, indeed I do,” Aaliyah replied, with a hint of laughter. “There is not an elf among us that does not know of the coming of Shivis Mol. News of your arrival has caused great rejoicing. You are the herald of a new age and a new way.” She stepped forward and placed her ivory hand on Gewey's cheek. “I have dreamed of this day my entire life. As have all of my people.”

Gewey’s face felt hot at the touch of Aaliyah’s hand. He blushed and tried to look away, but her touch held him fast. A flash of rage then flowed through his bond with Kaylia, breaking the spell. He stepped back.

“I see you have bonded to Shivis Mol,” said Aaliyah. Her eyes scrutinized Kaylia for a moment. “And yet you have no connection to - what is it you call it? The flow. How unusual.” She smiled. “And how fortunate for you. To be coupled with such as he is a great honor, but requires great strength.”

“It is I who am honored,” said Gewey. He moved close to Kaylia and took hold of her hand.

Aaliyah laughed. It was like bells on the wind. “I am sure that is so. She is clearly a noble elf, if noble is the word I should use. I apologize, but certain concepts are difficult for us.”

“Being noble is a difficult concept?” remarked Kaylia, trying not to allow her anger to seep into her voice.

Nehrutu interjected. “Perhaps it is better to say we have no concept of...” He paused, searching for the right words. “We have no conflict among our people. At least, not in the way you would understand. The idea of not acting noble, in the sense you see it, is unknown to us.”

“But enough,” said Aaliyah. “There will be time for this when we arrive.” Nimble and swift as the wind, she spun around and walked down the road toward the Chamber of the Maker, Nehrutu and Mohanisi following close behind.

Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis, looked at each other, then did the same.

As they approached the field where the pavilion had been erected, Aaliyah and her companions dropped back next to Linis. The field was still abuzz with activity as hundreds of elves darted about.

“I believe you should make the introductions,” said Aaliyah. “Considering what has happened here, it may be better if your people are greeted by someone more familiar.”

Linis nodded in agreement.

Two guards barred their way when they reached the edge of the field. They eyed the strangers for a moment.

“They are not foes,” said Linis.

The guards grunted and stepped aside.

“A bit brutish,” remarked Mohanisi.

Linis pretended not to hear. All the same, he couldn't help but bristle at the insult. “They must be hard to survive these times. They fought bravely to protect their kin.”

“I meant no disrespect,” Mohanisi explained. “It is only that you are so different from what we know.”

Theopolou, Eftichis, and Bellisia approached from the pavilion. Kaylia ran ahead and embraced her uncle with joy. She held him tightly for nearly a full minute.

“I am so happy to see you are safe,” said Theopolou, smiling broadly. “Though I had no doubt Gewey would succeed in your rescue.” As the others approached, Theopolou bowed. “Thank you,” he said to Gewey and Linis. “I am in your debt.”

Gewey bowed in reply. “I wish I could say I freed her. But as it turned out, she managed that on her own.”

Theopolou smiled lovingly at Kaylia. “A tale I would love to hear.”

“As would I,” said Bellisia. “But first I would like know who you have brought among us.”

Linis introduced the elves and explained how they met, not failing to mention their claim.

“So, you say you are from beyond the Great Western Abyss,” said Theopolou. His tone bore no hint of surprise or trepidation. “That would explain the news we received. Reports of red sails on the horizon have caused quite a stir.”

Aaliyah stepped forward and took Theopolou's hand. The old elf stiffened and staggered back. In a flash, Linis and Eftichis had their knives drawn and were pulling Theopolou away. Mohanisi and Nehrutu made no move to stop them.

“No,” Theopolou cried out. “Stay your weapons. I am not harmed - only dazed.”

“What happened?” asked Linis, still holding Theopolou's arm.

“I beg your forgiveness,” said Aaliyah. “I thought it would be easier this way. As you are one of the more - how should I say this? Talented among you. That is to say, you can use the flow.”

“Yes,” said Theopolou. He steadied himself and straightened his shoulders. “But I suggest you refrain from doing that again. At least until you have addressed the others.”

“Theopolou....” began Bellisia.

“She is who she says she is,” said Theopolou. “She merely communicated it to me in a manner which I am not accustomed. It was just too much at once.”

“I would speak to your people,” said Aaliyah. “But first, your wounded should be attended.” Her companions nodded in agreement. “You could help as well,” she said to Gewey.

“Of course,” he said.

Linis stepped forward. “I will join you.” He could tell that Theopolou and the others had recently been using their powers to heal and were now exhausted, though they hid it well. “The elders should rest until we have done what can be done.”

“Of course,” said Aaliyah. “They have accomplished all they can.” She looked at Kaylia and smiled. “If you would tend to your elders while we do our work....”

“I will go with you as well,” said Kaylia.

“Theopolou and the others have greater need of you.” Aaliyah’s tone was not contentious, yet it held an air of authority that caused Kaylia to stop short.

“Stay,” said Theopolou. “You can tell me what happened after you were taken.”

Aaliyah didn't wait for a response. She turned gracefully and walked in the direction of the pavilion. Kaylia’s eyes followed her closely.

When Gewey and the elves entered the healing pavilion they saw scores of injured elves lying in row upon row of beds that had been taken from the tents. Even so, there still weren't enough beds for everyone in need of care, so the least injured had been placed on simple bedrolls. Those administering to them were busy distributing food and medicine, and at first hardly noticed the group’s presence. Gewey peered just beyond the pavilion and could see others tending to the dead. His heart ached.

“How could this happen?” muttered Mohanisi. His face flushed with anger. He spun and faced Linis. “How could this happen?” This time his voice boomed with rage. Everyone in the pavilion stopped and stared.

Aaliyah gently placed her hand on Mohanisi's shoulder. “Calm yourself, my friend. This is not his doing.”

Mohanisi's muscles tensed until he trembled, then he closed his eyes. Gasps filled the pavilion as the elf filled himself with the flow. More and more of it rushed into him until the surrounding air glowed with power. Only Gewey could hold so much - or so they thought. After a few seconds he released it and opened his eyes.

Mohanisi breathed deeply, then smiled apologetically at Linis. “Forgive my anger. Aaliyah is correct. This is not your doing. But I have not seen a sight such as this before. It took me aback for a moment.”

Linis bowed. “There is nothing to forgive. You are not wrong to feel anger. We have all allowed this to come to pass. I am as much at fault as any.” He could still feel the lingering power of the flow all around him, and everyone’s eyes continued to stare in amazement. “But, I must ask. How is it you can channel so much of the flow? Gewey is the only one I have ever seen use so much.”

“I doubt I have the power of Shivis Mol,” said Mohanisi.

“Your people have forgotten much,” Aaliyah interjected. “Once all elves could do as Mohanisi has done. Why you cannot still, I do not know.” She squared her shoulders. “But now is a time to heal, not talk. Talk can wait, but the dying cannot.”

They all nodded in agreement. Without another word Aaliyah, Mohanisi, and Nehrutu started off in different directions and immediately began tending the wounded with the power of the flow. Linis left the more severely injured to Gewey and the other elves, restricting himself to healing those who he could more readily help. Gewey went from bed to bed for what seemed like an eternity using every bit of his strength. By the time it was full dark he was barely able to stand. Linis was faring no better, nearly losing his feet several times. Aaliyah and her companions seemed far less affected.

“Are you well, Shivis Mol?” Aaliyah asked Gewey as he knelt at the bedside of an elf who had been run through. He only looked up when she touched his shoulder.

“Just tired,” said Gewey. “This takes a lot out of me.”

“I see.” Her tone sounded confused. “We have nearly done all that we can here. Mohanisi, Nehrutu, and I will finish this. You should rest. I am certain Kaylia will tend you well.” Her last remark sounded almost sarcastic.

Gewey shook his head and steadied himself. “I'm fine.” He placed his hands on the wounded elf, channeling the flow. The wounded elf gasped and his eyes opened wide. After a few minutes the wounds began to close and the elf relaxed.

Gewey staggered to his feet and stumbled to the next bed.

“That is enough,” said Aaliyah. “You cannot go on. There are only a few others remaining who we can help. I insist you rest.” Her words were commanding, and Gewey could feel himself wanting to obey as she continued. “If you become ill, then I will have to heal you. This will take from those who need more urgent care.” She smiled. “Do not be concerned. Soon I will teach you to heal without so much effort.”

Gewey's resolve gave way. “I'll go.”

Aaliyah took his arm and guided him from the pavilion to where Kaylia, Theopolou and the others were gathered.

“He needs rest,” stated Aaliyah flatly. “Tend to him.”

Before Kaylia could speak, Aaliyah released Gewey and turned back to the pavilion. He nearly collapsed the moment her hand let go. Kaylia was quickly at his side and guided him to a waiting bedroll. Eftichis brought him some bread and wine, which he gratefully accepted. Linis arrived a few minutes later and lay down next to him. He didn't speak a word and was asleep within seconds.

“You should sleep as well,” suggested Eftichis, who had seated himself a few feet away.

Gewey rubbed his neck and stretched his back until it made a sharp crack. “The others will be finished shortly. I want to be awake when they get here.” He yawned, in spite of himself. “If I sleep now, I won't be able to wake up.”

Small fires were being lit throughout the camp. The scent of spiced meat and wine wafted on the breeze.

At that moment, Aaliyah and the others appeared from the fading light. “We have healed as many as we could,” she told them.

“You have our gratitude,” said Bellisia, who had been seated beside Lord Chiron for several hours, talking quietly.

“Indeed,” agreed Chiron. “Many more would have died if not for you.”

“I only wish we could have done more,” remarked Aaliyah, sadly. “Many were beyond our power.”

“You should rest,” said Gewey. “You must be exhausted.”

“We are,” admitted Aaliyah. “More so than we have ever been. And I would have strength before I tell our tale.” She reached down and placed the back of her hand on Gewey's cheek. Kaylia’s anger flashed across their bond, startling Gewey.

“For one so ignorant of his own abilities, you did well,” said Aaliyah. Her voice was tender and musical, like the cradlesong for an infant prince. “Though I admit I was confused to see how little you know of yourself.” She glanced over to Kaylia, then fixed her eyes on Gewey's. “That will change. I will see to it.”

Kaylia moved close to Gewey, her face hot with jealousy.

Aaliyah smiled. “Fierce and protective. Though I must admit, I can understand why.” Her hair shimmered in the firelight. She stepped back and sat on a blanket a few feet away.  Mohanisi and Nehrutu rested next to her. “In the morning I shall address the elves.”

“I am afraid it will have to wait until after the funeral rites,” said Theopolou. “They begin with the sunrise.”

“Of course,” said Aaliyah. She lay down and pulled the blanket over her shoulders. It was mere moments before sleep took her.

Gewey looked about him. Small groups of elves were gathered around the fires, speaking in hushed whispers. No one had disturbed the newcomers while they were tending the wounded, but news of them had spread like wildfire. Gewey smiled. Only the arrival of these elves could have overshadowed the presence of a god in their midst. And for that, he was grateful. He finished his meal and lay on his back. The stars were peeking out from behind wisps of thin clouds high in the sky. He wished the night was clear. The nights of a new moon were the best time for star gazing. Kaylia lay next to him, her head turned toward Aaliyah.

“She is beautiful,” said Kaylia.

Gewey reached over and took her hand. “I didn't notice.”

“You do not need to spare my feelings,” she said in a half-whisper. “I am not doubting your feelings for me.”

Gewey turned his head and met Kaylia's eyes “Good. And I'm not sparing your feelings. I really didn't notice. I was too busy in the pavilion to notice such things.”

“And now that you are not in the pavilion?”

Gewey pushed himself up and leaned over to her. “And now that I'm not in the pavilion, you're still more beautiful.” He kissed her softly.

She smiled. “She wants you.” Pulling him to her, she kissed him back. “But she cannot have you. She called me fierce, but she has no idea of how fierce I can really be.” She stroked his cheek. “Now sleep.”

Gewey lay back down and closed his eyes. The tingle of Kaylia's touch still caressed his lips. As sleep took him he could feel his spirit drift. He had come to enjoy the sensation. Then he heard a call. Not in words, but a sweet summons, like soft music. Kaylia, he thought. A thin mist surrounded him. It was warm and soothing. He allowed it to penetrate him.

“I am here,” called a gentle feminine voice.

A figure approached through the mist. Gewey expected to see Kaylia, but as the figure neared, he realized it was not her.

It was Aaliyah.

Chapter 7

A bitter chill woke Gewey the next morning. Kaylia and Linis had already risen and were nearby helping the others prepare the morning meal. Bellisia, Chiron and Theopolou were gathered a few yards away, and were now donned in white robes; Gewey presumed these were for the funeral rites.

Aaliyah's face still burned in his memory, but he could not recall anything beyond the point when she had first appeared. He scanned the area for her and her friends, but they were nowhere to be seen.

Just next to him, lying atop his sword and scabbard, he noticed his pack. Someone must have retrieved his belongings from Theopolou's tent. He rummaged through his things until he found the clothes Theopolou had given to him, then went to look for some place private to change. He thought perhaps to seek out water for washing, but didn't want to miss the ceremony. Looking toward the burned remains of the camp, he could see dozens of funeral pyres that had been erected during the night. He dreaded the sad ceremony that was to come. Finding a hidden spot just beyond the pavilion, between two tents, Gewey changed into his elf clothing.

“You have an interesting mind.” It was Aaliyah.

Gewey flushed. “How long were you watching me?”

Aaliyah smiled. “Long enough.” She took a step forward.

Gewey may not have noticed her beauty before, but he certainly did now. She had changed into a white silk dress. Though much the same fashion as the one she had worn the previous day, this one flowed with her movements, wrapping itself playfully around her obvious curves as she moved. Her hair was tied in a loose braid, intertwined with thin white strands of shimmering cloth.

“I thought this may be a bit more appropriate,” she said. She held her shapely arms wide and spun around. “What would you say?”

He felt his face grow hot with embarrassment. “I...”

“Perhaps not.” With a wry smile, she took another step forward. “However, I brought nothing else other than a set of cotton trousers and tunic. The rest of my attire is on my ship.”

“How did you...?” he stammered. “I mean...last night.”

“Oh, that was nothing,” she replied, stepping closer. “I only wanted to see your mind for myself. A selfish thing, I admit. But I could not resist the chance to connect with Shivis Mol.”

“Kaylia. She....”

“Kaylia knows nothing of it,” said Aaliyah. “It was simple to occupy her thoughts. I encouraged her to dream of you. It was easy. She loves you deeply.”

The mention of Kaylia's love for him steadied his nerve. “And I love her.”

“Well, of course you do.” She sounded understanding in the way of a mother to a child. “But then you are quite young. And your bond with her makes your feelings infinitely stronger.” Slowly her face saddened. Gewey suddenly wanted to approach her. To comfort her. But he resisted. Aaliyah then added quietly: “I was bonded once. Long ago.”

Gewey's heart ached to see her pain. “What happened?”

She sighed deeply. “He died.”

“Then how do you still live?” he asked. “I thought that once bonded, your lives are as one.”

This shook her out of her melancholy and she laughed softly. “Perhaps that is true for the elves in this world. They have forgotten how to use their power. The bond between mates is strong, but not unbreakable. One need not lose themselves should the other die.” She glanced behind her, toward the pavilion. “A pity. The bond makes you stronger. We could have saved more of the wounded if they’d all had a mate's strength to share. But if the risk is death, I suppose it is to be expected that they do not bond.” She tilted her head and smiled. “Perhaps that is yet another thing we can teach them.”

Gewey saw Kaylia approaching in the distance. “I should go,” he said. Without waiting for Aaliyah’s response, he edged his way past her. She did not move to ease his passing, forcing their shoulders to touch.

As he neared Kaylia, he could clearly see that she was not pleased.

She placed her hands on her hips. “What did she want?”

“Nothing,” Gewey replied. “She asked if what she was wearing was appropriate for the funeral rites.”

Kaylia shot a stare at Aaliyah, who was still standing close to where he had left her. “Is that so?” She took Gewey's hand. “Come. We need to eat.”

Gewey allowed Kaylia to lead him back to their bedrolls. A bowl of steaming porridge and a cup of new wine had been placed on the ground for him. After he’d finished these, Kaylia, Linis and Theopolou walked with him to the funeral pyres, where the gathering was already well underway. The pyres had all been encircled by elves in just the same way as Gewey had seen Linis and his seekers do during the funeral of Berathis. Aaliyah, Nehrutu, and Mohanisi stood beside Kaylia on his right. Linis, Theopolou, and the remaining elders were to his left. Those wounded who were able to do so had also made their way from the pavilion, unwilling to remain in bed during the rites of their dead brethren.

The ceremony was long, lasting well into the afternoon. Elf after elf stood forward to say words about their fallen comrades. After all had spoken, the fires were lit - so many that the heat caused Gewey to break into a sweat. Finally, it was over and the crowd solemnly dispersed. Most eyes were still swollen with tears.

Gewey, Linis, and Kaylia returned to their bedrolls, while Theopolou instructed everyone to gather an hour before sundown to hear Aaliyah and her companions speak.

Gewey spent the next few hours in light conversation with Kaylia. He wondered what had become of Lee, Dina, Millet, and Maybell. He missed his friends, especially Lee. Linis, meanwhile, searched the area for signs of what had become of his seekers, but returned disappointed.

When the time came, they made their way across the field in front of the pavilion. Most of the elves had already assembled. Aaliyah, Nehrutu, and Mohanisi, were standing on a small platform with their backs to the pavilion. The beds of those who could be moved had been pulled close to the edge so they could hear.

Aaliyah had changed back into her red dress. She spotted Gewey as he approached and smiled. In spite of himself, he smiled back. Theopolou, Chiron, Bellisia, and the other elders had already positioned themselves just in front of the platform.

“I'd rather stay to the back,” said Gewey.

“You can't,” said Kaylia. “I have a feeling that whatever they say will concern you.”

Gewey opened his mouth to speak, but Kaylia took his hand and half dragged him through the crowd, urging him to stand next to Theopolou. Linis stood just behind him.

The moment he arrived, Aaliyah nodded to her companions and stepped forward. “Brothers and sisters.” Her voice echoed over the field with such tremendous volume that the gathering jumped. “By now you have heard of our arrival and from where we have come. Some may have doubt. Those who do not may question our motives. To this I can only say that I speak truth, and that there is no deception in my words.” She paused and looked over the crowd. Her eyes bore the look of sorrow and pity.

“Many lifetimes ago our people journeyed across the Great Sureshi, or what you now know as the Western Abyss, and settled in this land. We lived and prospered for generations, and for generations we came to see the land as our own. But it was not so. For this land belonged to another people. This land first belonged to the humans.”

Her words provoked a loud stirring amongst the elves.

Aaliyah held out her hand to still the crowd. “I know how many of you feel about the humans. And I know that many believe you have reason to hate them. But what you do not know is that it was we who first sinned against them. The humans were already here when we first arrived. But they were not as you know them today. Mere children they were. Savage children, nomadic hunters and gatherers. We brought to them our ways and our learning. We taught them to build, to farm, to live as a community. But in the end, we did these things for our own purposes. In the end we subjugated the humans. We turned them into little more than a slave race, born to serve our needs.”

She stepped down from the platform and stood in front of Gewey, staring deeply into his eyes. “Not until the gods showed us the error of our ways did we realize what we had done. But by then, it was too late.”

She broke her gaze to glance back at her friends, then returned to the gathering. “The gods created the Great Barrier and destroyed any hope of contacting our people beyond. Any who tried to cross, perished. For thousands of years we have kept watch, praying for the day we could return to you. Nineteen years ago the Great Barrier disappeared, and now we have come.”

She stepped back onto the platform. “My brothers and I have lived our lives with the knowledge of our people’s sins, and the price we have paid - the price you have paid. But now, we are here to help you regain what you have lost, and to undo the wrongs of our forefathers.” She closed her eyes and bowed her head. The only sound was a soft breeze stirring the tents and pavilion.

Theopolou was the first to speak. “You say that you have been able to come here for nearly twenty years. Why have you waited so long? Why have you not revealed yourselves before now?”

Aaliyah opened her eyes and sighed. “We could not know what had become of you. The humans had clearly taken control of this land. We sent scouts to gain information. What we found was that you had become different. You had changed from the people you once were. To us, you had become more like the humans. We were uncertain what to do.”

This caused angry shouts and curses.

“Then why now?” asked Bellisia.

“Because of him.” She pointed dramatically at Gewey. “When we discovered the coming of Shivis Mol, we knew we must act.” She said this as though it was an obvious truth. Her eyes fell on the wounded in the pavilion. “But it is clear we should have acted sooner.”

“How did you know about Gewey?” asked Theopolou. “We have only just discovered about him ourselves.”

“We were given a prophecy when the Great Barrier appeared,” Aaliyah replied. “It says that a god bound to earth will come to show us the way to the Creator. He will wash away our sins and reunite us with our people. We knew when the Barrier disappeared that it heralded his coming.”

“But how did you know it was me?” asked Gewey.

“Our people have connection with what you call the flow,” she replied. “Though the elves of this land have lost much of their power, we have not. You could never hide what you are from us.”

She held out her hand. Before Gewey realized what he was doing, he had taken hold of it and allowed her to pull him onto the platform. “We have learned much about our brethren since we first arrived.” She was speaking to the elves, but her eyes were on Gewey. “You despise the gods. You would turn away your one hope for salvation. But you do not understand what that would mean. You have an enemy rising against you. An enemy that will wipe you from the face of this land. An enemy that has corrupted the hearts of your brothers and sisters.”

She released Gewey and pointed to the wounded in the pavilion. “This is the result.” Her voice was hard and cold as steel. “You have made war with your own kind once before. This we know. And though it caused us great sorrow to think of such a thing, we hoped that you would have learned from your mistakes. We hoped you had not fallen so far that your spirit was lost.” The air around Aaliyah stirred as the flow rushed through her. “You asked why we reveal ourselves now. You wonder why we waited.” A flame burst to life above her head and shot skyward. The crowd backed away in shock. Gewey stood transfixed. “We waited because you are as different from us as the humans are from you. We feared your own sins would return. We feared you could not regain what you have lost.” She released the flow and the air stilled. Her features softened and a soft smile returned. “But the time for fear is past, and we waited too long.”

“What do you intend to do?” asked Theopolou.

“We intend to teach you,” she replied. “All of you. Even those who have lost their way. Those who have attacked this place have been warped and controlled by a force they could not resist. The one you know as the Reborn King has unleashed a power beyond your understanding. It is a power you cannot hope to overcome. Even with Shivis Mol at your side, you will need more.”

“We have the Book of Souls,” said Theopolou.

“I know,” she said. “But have you tried to use it?”

“Gewey has opened it,” said Chiron.

“We know of the Book of Souls,” said Aaliyah. “And such a thing will be needed in the days ahead. But you need weapons. Weapons that can match those brought to bear against you.”

“And where shall we acquire such weapons?” asked Theopolou.

Aaliyah looked at Gewey's sword, hanging from his belt. “There is a place. It is where the sword Shivis Mol now wields was forged.”

Theopolou raised an eyebrow. “And you know where this place is?”

“We know where to look,” she answered. “It is in the desert of the east; we have sensed its power.”

“It would take months to make such a journey,” said Bellisia. “We are already attacked. I fear we have no time.”

“My ship can take us there in less than two weeks.” She stated this firmly.

Murmurs of doubt spread through the crowd.

“Our fastest ships couldn't cross the distance in twice that,” said Bellisia.

Aaliyah laughed softly. “Our shipbuilders are quite skilled. And, as you will learn, the winds can be controlled.” She surveyed the crowd for a moment. “Nehrutu and Mohanisi shall remain here. I will find the location where the weapons are held.” Nehrutu and Mohanisi stepped forward. “They will help you as best they can to prepare.”

“How many are you?” asked Theopolou.

Nehrutu stepped forward. “We set sail with three ships, and are few in number. But we can help you prepare, and teach you things your people have forgotten. We will show you how the flow can be used in ways you have never imagined.”

“Can you send for more of your people?” asked Bellisia. “Will more not come?”

“It would take many months to make the crossing,” he replied. “More to gather and return. You would be destroyed long before then. I will send one ship back to our land, but do not expect help from my people. You are on your own - for the present.”

“Now I would speak to your elders,” said Aaliyah. “And Shivis Mol. We have much to discuss and little time.” She addressed the gathering. “You still have many questions, I know. Tonight, Nehrutu and Mohanisi will tell tales of our home, and answer those questions.”

She stepped down from the platform. Nehrutu and Mohanisi followed. The gathering of elves gave way as they walked toward their bedrolls. She paused to look back. “Shivis Mol, I would have you and the elders join me. I intend to leave with the dawn.” Linis and Kaylia stepped beside Gewey, but Aaliyah held out her hand. “Linis should stay with Nehrutu. Only Kaylia may join us.”

Gewey could see Linis tense. He placed his hand on the elf's shoulder. “It's fine. I'll tell you what they say.”

Linis' eyes never left Aaliyah’s retreating figure. “These elves have plans for you, Gewey. Be careful.”

“I am with him, Linis,” said Kaylia. “They can plan all they wish. But they must still account to me.”

This brought a smile to the elf. “I believe they think us savage and ignorant. But I would wager they have not given you full account.”

Kaylia flashed a fiendish grin and took Gewey's hand. “And that would be a mistake they would not soon forget.”

This brought a round of laughter. Kaylia and Gewey then headed off to speak with Aaliyah. As they neared they could see Theopolou and the other elders already standing in a circle with her. Gewey noticed Theopolou was holding the Book of Souls. Nehrutu and Mohanisi were nearby gathering together the other elves into two groups.

Aaliyah beamed as they joined the circle. She bowed. “Shivis Mol.” She turned to Theopolou. “I see you have brought the Book of Souls. Good.”

“Gewey has already opened it once,” Theopolou reminded her again.

“Could you read it?” she asked Gewey.

“I read the cover,” he replied. “But I didn't try to read the rest. There was no time.”

Aaliyah looked at Gewey thoughtfully. “Try it now.”

Gewey took the box and opened it. The book glowed and shimmered in the fading light. Handing the empty box back to Theopolou, he slowly opened the Book. The pages glittered with intricate gold writing. Just as when he had read the cover, at first the words meant nothing. Then, slowly, they changed in his mind. But this time, it was only a few that made sense. He stared intensely at the first page for several minutes. “I only understand some of it,” he said finally. “The rest means nothing to me.”

“I am not surprised,” said Aaliyah. “These pages were meant for a god. Although a god you are, you have not realized your full power yet. You use only power from the earth. There is so much more. And once you learn what I will teach you, then you will be able to read all from these pages.”

“I don't understand,” said Gewey. “I use what I can feel.”

“You only feel what is easy to feel,” said Aaliyah. “The powers of water, air and spirit are more elusive.”

Gewey recalled Lee saying that because his father was Saraf, God of the Seas, he could draw power from the water. “How do I learn?” he asked.

“Through me,” she replied. “I can teach you what you need to know. But there is a price.”

Kaylia stepped forward. “What price?”

She leveled her gaze on Kaylia. “He is to come with me to seek out the weapons in the desert.”

“Is that all?” asked Gewey.

“No,” she replied flatly. “You must allow me to show you why I am your best choice for a mate.”

Kaylia's hand flew to her knife. But before she could pull it free, Aaliyah waved her arm. Heat flashed through the air and Kaylia was thrown back, nearly losing her footing. Theopolou and Gewey jumped in front of her.

“Are you hurt?” asked Gewey.

Kaylia steadied herself, glaring at Aaliyah. “No. She did not hurt me.”

“Still your fury,” said Aaliyah. “Fierce though you may be, you cannot do me harm.”

Gewey looked over his shoulder at Aaliyah. “I am bonded to Kaylia - I love her. And if you do that again, you'll find out just how powerful I really am.” He let the flow swell inside him until the ground trembled.

Aaliyah lowered her eyes and stepped back. “Please, Shivis Mol. I meant no offense.”

Gewey allowed the power to ebb.

“I do not doubt your love for Kaylia,” said Aaliyah. “Nor hers for you. But I was chosen for a reason, and I will not be deterred. You are a living god, bound to this world. Destined to save it. Destined to save us. Should you not choose a mate who can meet such a challenge?” Her eyes met Kaylia's. “Have you not doubted that you are worthy? You are fierce and strong. Perhaps, in time you could be even stronger. But should Shivis Mol not have the deepest well to draw from? Are you that well? Or am I?”

Kaylia moved Gewey and Theopolou aside. “You speak of Gewey as if he were a tool - a mere object. You do not love him.”

“I speak of him as he is,” she replied. This time her tone matched Kaylia's ferocity. “A god. You say that I do not love him. And I do not. Not as you love him. But he is Shivis Mol. And we are not children. For him to bond with me would give him even greater strength. Strength he will need if we are to survive. You must look beyond your own selfish desires.”

“This is all irrelevant,” Theopolou interjected. “Kaylia and Gewey are already bonded. This cannot be undone.”

Aaliyah shook her head. “How little you know. Of course it can be undone. You may have lost the ability, but we have not.”

“I don't want it undone,” Gewey objected. His voice was cold and menacing. “And if you try....”

“I will do nothing without your consent,” said Aaliyah. She looked on Gewey and Kaylia for a long moment. “I offer you this bargain. Allow Shivis Mol to go with me - alone. I will present my case during our journey. If I am rejected, so be it. In return, I will instruct him, and help him to reach his true potential. I am the most powerful among my people. You will find no better teacher.”

“I will not be parted from Kaylia,” said Gewey. He pulled Kaylia close.

Aaliyah looked into Kaylia’s eyes. “If you are meant to be with him, then you have nothing to fear. Your bond shall remain intact unless Shivis Mol decides otherwise.”

“I refuse to....” started Gewey, but Kaylia pulled away.

“If it means saving our people, then you must,” she said. Her voice was tender and sad. “I fear losing you.” She gave Aaliyah a contemptuous glance. “But not to her. Go, and learn what you must to save us from the darkness that comes. I will be waiting.”

“You have made a wise decision,” said Aaliyah.

Theopolou placed his hands on Gewey and Kaylia. “If this is to be, then you shall complete the bond. You cannot know what perils lay ahead. I would see you as one before you are parted.”

Kaylia smiled and took Theopolou's hands. “Thank you.” She released him and looked at Gewey. “Assuming you are agreeable?”

Gewey nodded and bowed. “Of course, I am.” He scanned the area for Linis. “Would someone tell Linis to come here?”

Bellisia stepped forward. “I will find him.” She left and returned with Linis a short time later.

Linis grinned and squeezed Gewey's shoulder. “I am happy for you.” He glanced at Kaylia. “Both of you.”

“Kneel,” said Theopolou.

Without another word Kaylia and Gewey dropped to their knees. Theopolou place his hands on their heads and began to recite the ritual. Though Gewey couldn't understand the language, the sound of Theopolou's voice caused images to erupt in his head. Colors swirled and danced until he was dizzy. So much so that he needed to reach out to Kaylia to steady himself. The moment he touched her he could feel their bond growing stronger, taking root within his very soul. Minutes passed until he realized that Theopolou was no longer speaking. He looked across at Kaylia. Her face was aglow with joy. He could feel every fiber of her being. In that moment he knew just how deeply she cared. It was as if the bond they had shared before was a shadow of what it had now become.

“Normally, the ceremony is a bit more involved,” said Theopolou. “But every minute you have left together is precious.”

Gewey and Kaylia rose. Aaliyah was expressionless. The rest of the elders bowed and took a step back.

“When shall you depart?” Theopolou asked Aaliyah.

“At dawn,” she replied. “My ship is less than two days’ journey.”

Theopolou turned to Gewey. “Prepare whatever you intend to take with you, then return here.” He took Kaylia's hand. “In the meantime, come with me.”

Linis smiled. “I envy you, my friend.”

“One day, such joy will be yours, Linis,” said Gewey. “I just know it.”

Linis let out a hearty laugh and slapped Gewey on the back. “I hope so. But for now, this is your time.”

The pair of them went off to collect Gewey’s pack. He wanted to travel as light as possible, and as he sifted through his belongings he told Linis what Aaliyah had said, and the bargain he had made with her.

“I will go with you,” offered Linis.

“No,” said Gewey. “You're needed here. If the elves are going to gather for war, you must help.” He looked across the field to where Nehrutu was speaking to the other elves. “You must learn whatever they can teach you. That’s why I'm going. To learn what I must.”

“Be careful, Gewey,” warned Linis. “She is unlike any elf I have known. She may tempt you in ways you cannot imagine.”

Gewey smiled. “She can try. But as long as my heart belongs to Kaylia, she will fail.”

When Gewey had finished packing he returned to where the others were still gathered. Theopolou waited. His smile made him seem almost youthful. Kaylia stood just behind him. She had changed into a white silk dress, tied at the waist by a thin gold sash. Her hair fell loosely about her bare shoulders. Gewey’s heart raced at the sight of her familiar but breathtaking beauty.

Theopolou took them both by the hand, leading them across the field and past the pavilion. An area had been hastily cleared just out of sight of the camp, and a small tent newly erected there. Its purpose was obvious.

Kaylia kissed her uncle lightly on the cheek. He smiled the loving smile of a father before carefully placing her hand into Gewey's. He then simply walked away.

Kaylia looked deeply into Gewey's eyes and led him inside.

Chapter 8

After taking a riverboat up the Goodbranch River, Lee and Jacob had ridden at an easy pace for two weeks. They could not risk being seen, so waited until they were three days north of Sharpstone before returning to the road. While on board the riverboat Lee had heard news of the faithful occupying his beloved town. It had taken a lot of willpower to fight the urge to do something about it. But Millet would have to deal with them. It was now the duty of Lord Nal'Thain, not Lee Starfinder, to save Sharpstone. His tasks lay elsewhere.

Jacob had been relatively quiet during the journey. Lee tried many times to engage his son in conversation, but the boy had little to say. On a few occasions he attempted to teach Jacob sword techniques, and though he learned quickly, Lee could tell that his heart wasn't in it.

“We'll arrive in Klinton by sundown,” said Lee. The air was bitter cold, and Jacob was bundled in a small wool blanket. “We should change clothes before we get there.”

“Why?” asked Jacob.

“We must blend in with a less-than-savory crowd,” Lee explained. “If we're to gather information and not be discovered, we can't march in there as lords of Hazrah. There are towns near the foothills of the Razor Edge Mountains where news of Angrääl can likely be heard. The bandits and mercenaries make it their business to know the comings and goings of the land.”

Jacob sniffed. “So? We're still a week away from the foothills.”

“Yes,” said Lee. “But our deception should be believable. I'm hoping to find someone heading north. We can perhaps pose as sell-swords. Possibly hire on with a merchant. It will go a lot more smoothly if we arrive up north in character.”

“And what makes you think that these people will know anything about my mother?”

Lee shrugged. “They may not. But at least they'll know the best way to get into Angrääl unnoticed.”

About an hour before they reached Klinton they stopped and donned clothing Lee had acquired from the deckhands on board the riverboat. Simple brown wool shirts and pants, together with travel-worn boots, would fit in nicely.

“These clothes smell,” remarked Jacob with disgust.

Lee smiled. “All the better.”

Klinton was little more than a trading post. Miners and trappers used it to peddle their wares, so avoiding the long journey south. Though not as dangerous as the towns near to the Razor Edge Mountains, it still attracted a variety of highwaymen and bandits hoping to find merchants foolish enough to travel without an escort.

The street lamps were just being lit when they arrived, and the main avenue was still busy. The taverns would be empty for a while longer yet. Lee hoped to get lodging before the local riff-raff took to drink. He was familiar with this town, though he hadn't been here for many years. The last time he visited he had gotten himself into a tavern brawl in which Millet was nearly knifed. He chuckled under his breath at the thought of Millet scolding him after the fight. He missed his company, now more than ever.

Lee led the horses down the main avenue, then along a side street to one of two lodging houses. It was by far the most run down of the pair.

“We're staying here?” asked Jacob. His top lip curled in disgust.

“We'll be staying in far worse than this before it's over,” Lee replied. “Compared to where we're going, this is a palace.” He dismounted. “Stay with the horses until I get a room and arrange a stable.”

Lee entered the lodging house and stood just beyond the doorway. The main hall was sparsely furnished with a few chairs and a wooden bench. An old and blackened brick fireplace in the far left wall burned brightly. Even so, the room was chilly and unpleasant. A fat, balding man wearing a stained tunic was asleep in the corner, a mug of ale precariously balanced on his round belly. The lodge was otherwise empty.

Lee slammed the door shut, startling the innkeeper awake. The mug fell to the floor, shattering and splashing ale over the man's dingy trousers.

“Bloody hell!” cursed the innkeeper. He looked down at his spilled ale and grumbled. When he saw Lee standing there he frowned. “What do you want?”

“A room, fat man,” said Lee. “And be quick. And send someone to stable my horses.” He reached in his belt and pulled out two coppers.

This did nothing to change the innkeeper's demeanor. “Do I look like a groom to you?”

“No,” Lee replied. “Grooms are cleaner. Now get off your backside and have my horses tended.”

The innkeeper snorted, then heaved himself to his feet with a grunt. He walked over to Lee and snatched the coppers from his hand. “Grant!” he bellowed harshly, spittle flying from his mouth. A rustle came from behind the door just on the other side of the counter. A moment later, a bent old man emerged. Smiling a stupid, toothless grin, he moved with surprising speed.

“Yes, sir?” said Grant.

“Go stable the horses outside,” growled the innkeeper. “And don't take all night.”

Grant spun around and dashed out of the door. Lee followed. After unpacking their belongings, Lee tossed Grant a copper.

“Thank you, kind sir,” said Grant, almost groveling.

“Just see that they're well-tended,” said Lee.

“Of course, of course,” Grant replied. “You can count on me, sir.” He bowed low before leading the horses away.

“What a wretched creature,” said Jacob.

Lee looked at his son. “I would say pitiful, rather than wretched.”

The innkeeper showed them to their room and without a word, shuffled off, cursing under his breath. The room had four walls, three cots, and nothing more. A cold draft seeped in from the cracks in the rotten floor timbers, and the only window had been boarded up.

Lee grinned at his son. “I've stayed in far worse.” He placed his pack in the far corner. “We'll find a meal elsewhere. I doubt the good innkeeper here will provide one.”

Jacob tossed his pack next to Lee's. “I hope the food in this town is better than the lodging.”

“Don't count on it.” Lee led Jacob from the room and returned to the main hall. The innkeeper was now back in his chair with a new mug of ale in his hand. “If anyone touches our belongings, I'll hold you accountable.” Lee tapped the hilt of his sword.

The innkeeper scowled. “Your things will be fine.”

The nearest tavern they came across didn't even have a name, merely a sign that read: ‘Tavern.’

Lee surveyed the streets. The traffic was now thinning. He suspected that within an hour or two the lodges and taverns would be full – full, he hoped, with people who could be of use. Inside, the place with no name was equally unremarkable, and typical for a trading post tavern. Two long tables were positioned to his left, with several small ones surrounding them. To the right, beside a small bar, a fire burned in the hearth. The bartender, a thin waif of a man, was busy arranging rows of clay mugs. The scent of cooked meat filled the air. Lee knew this would be replaced by the stench of ale and unwashed bodies soon enough.

“I suppose you'll be wantin' to eat,” called the bartender, not bothering to look up.

Lee approached the bar and slid four coppers to the bartender. “I'll be wanting information as well.”

The bartender raised an eyebrow and quickly shoved the coppers into his pocket. “That'll be fine.” He looked up, his gaunt, unshaven face bore the lines and pits of too many winters. “And what information will you be wantin'?”

“I'll let you know,” Lee replied. “For now, just bring me and my friend some food.”

Without another word the bartender headed to the kitchen. Lee and Jacob took a seat at the table farthest from the door.

“Do you gamble?” asked Lee.

Jacob shrugged. “When the urge strikes.”

Lee nodded approvingly. “Good. There will be games, and I want you to join in.” He took two silver coins from his purse and gave them to Jacob.

“And what will you be doing?” asked Jacob.

“Watching,” Lee replied.

About halfway through their meal, people began arriving. Within two hours the tavern was full to bursting, and with just the sort Lee had been counting on. Mostly locals lined the long bench tables, but the outer tables were taken by a myriad of tough looking characters. As Lee had instructed, Jacob joined in a game of dice in the corner by the bar. By midnight the place was getting rough. Several fights had already broken out. In one, a knife had been pulled and a local man nearly gutted by what looked to be a sell-sword. Luckily, it had been stopped before it got too far out of hand.

Jacob was doing well at dice, and had nearly doubled his money. This, naturally, was not sitting well with the regulars, who were accustomed to fleecing newcomers. Lee knew he would need to keep a close eye on the boy. He made certain that a pitcher of ale stayed full and constantly on the table, though he only pretended to drink. He wanted all his wits about him. Jacob, however, was letting the ale flow freely.

Lee took notice of several merchants who were accompanied by stout swordsmen. One particularly fat merchant was allowing his coin to pass too easily, and his tongue wag far too loosely. Before long he was boasting about his adventures and wealth between long draughts of wine. The guard he had with him looked irritated, and more than a bit on edge. The bartender had told Lee that the merchant had dealings in the north, and always stopped here on his way to Angrääl.

“You accuse me?” Jacob's raised voice snapped Lee to attention.

Jacob and three locals had squared off in the corner, and Jacob's hand was resting on the hilt of his dagger. The locals had already grabbed up bottles; one was brandishing a small knife. Lee leaped to his feet and pushed his way through to the commotion. Lee made it just as Jacob was about to pull his dagger.

“What the hell is going on here?” roared Lee. His eyes looked accusingly at Jacob. “What did I tell you, boy? You'll send us both to the hangman's noose.” He stepped in front of Jacob and roughly snatched him by the collar. “Get to the table, whelp!” He pushed Jacob aside, nearly lifting him off his feet.

Jacob glared. “They....”

“I don't care!” Lee pointed to the table. Reluctantly, Jacob walked away.

“Your friend owes us money,” growled a short stocky man, a wine bottle in his hand.

Lee faced the man, his eyes dark and dangerous. “So you say.”

“W-well...” he stammered. He looked to his friends for support, but they had already recognized Lee as someone not to be trifled with. “Just keep him away from us.”

Lee looked the men over, then pushed his way past them. When he arrived back at the table, Jacob was cursing under his breath and draining a mug of ale.

“Did you learn anything?” asked Lee. He tone was not angry now.

Jacob refused to look up. “Never touch me again.”

“Calm yourself,” said Lee. “I only did that so we wouldn't have to fight those idiots. I have another fight in mind.” He nodded towards the fat merchant. “He's been drinking and boasting all night. It's only a matter of time before someone tries to shut his mouth.” He reached over and took Jacob's mug. “And if you're going to be of use, you need to stop this. Now, what did you learn from the locals?”

Jacob clenched his jaw, then gradually relaxed. “All I heard was that there's been a lot of people coming through from the north. Whether they're from Angrääl, they didn't say. They also mentioned that winter came early, but that’s nothing new. Other than that, they spent their time trying to switch dice on me.” He pulled his winnings from his pocket and jingled the coins in his hand. “They failed.”

Lee slapped him on the back. “Those dice skills may come in handy. If we can't find employment as sell-swords or bodyguards, we're going to run out of coins soon, and I'm rubbish at games.”

Jacob smiled in spite of himself.

“Shut your stupid mouth, braggart!” a voice bellowed over the noise of the crowd.

Lee got to his feet. “Watch my back. And try not to spill any blood - unless you have to.”

Across the room, two large men were confronting the fat merchant. Both wore swords, and were looming over the merchant. His guard was unsure what to do and stood a few feet behind, fingering his sword and shifting nervously.

Lee made his way across the room and positioned himself behind the men. Jacob was on his heels. One of the men had moved to the side and was eying the guard, who clearly had decided to do nothing.

“You say you fought off ten bandits?” growled the largest lout. He pressed his face into the merchant's. “Let's see how you handle me.”

The merchant, fueled by too much wine, didn't back down. “You sir, would be a waste of time and effort.” He glanced over his shoulder at his guard. “I'd rather just have my friend here deal with you.”

The man roared with laughter. “I think your friend, would rather not.” He looked at the guard. “I'll give you this one chance to leave.”  The guard paused, then turned on his heels and left the tavern.

The merchant turned pale. “Well, ummm.” He looked around the room. The tavern patrons were clearly enjoying the spectacle.

“What do you have to say now?” demanded the man.

Quickly, Lee stepped around him, placing himself between the aggressor and the merchant. “That's enough. Leave him be.” Jacob moved to Lee's left, facing the other man.

The first man sneered at Lee. “Who the hell are you?”

“I'm with....” He turned and looked enquiringly at the merchant.

“D-Darius,” the fat man stuttered.

“I'm with Darius,” Lee continued. He glanced sideways at the merchant. “I think it's time to call it a night. Don't you?”

“Indeed,” Darius eagerly agreed.

“Jasper,” Lee said to Jacob. “Escort Darius outside.”

Jacob nodded sharply and helped Darius to his feet. The merchant stumbled to the door and into the street, nearly falling on his face.

Lee backed away towards the door, his hand on the hilt of his sword. The two men followed. Once in the street, Lee called to Jacob. “Take him to our room. I'll be along shortly.” He smiled fiendishly as the two men came out of the tavern after him and drew their swords.

“Do you need...?” Jacob began.

“I need you to take care of our new employer,” said Lee. “Isn't that right, Darius?” The merchant nodded his head vigorously. Lee smiled. “Then these two brutes are mine.”

Jacob decided it best not to argue and led Darius away.

“I hope the fat man was worth your life,” said the first man.

Lee widened his stance, but did not draw his blade. “I'll not dirty my steel with the likes of you.” He waved them in. “Come and get me.”

The first man charged in like a mad bull, swinging his sword in a wild arc. The second tried to skewer him through the gut. Lee stepped aside, easily dodging both blades, and brought his fist down across the first thug’s jaw. Blood and teeth went flying as the man spun and tumbled to the ground, unmoving. Stunned the second man paused, staring at his comrade.

“You should run,” advised Lee.

This enraged the second thug. Reaching in his belt, he drew a small dagger and hurled it at Lee's throat. Lee moved aside, allowing the blade to disappear into the darkness. Still undeterred, the thug raised his sword and charged. Lee almost laughed at the man’s clumsy effort. He sidestepped and brought the back of his fist across the man's temple. He stumbled and fell to one knee, his sword falling to the ground and sliding a few feet away. Lee kicked him to the ground and brought his boot down on the man's neck.

“If you or your friend trouble Darius again, you won't walk away,” said Lee.

The thug's eyes were now wide with fear. He was only able to nod his head ever so slightly.

With a snort of derision, Lee released him. After taking a moment to view the crowd that had gathered from inside the tavern, he made his way to the lodge. There he found Darius and Jacob sitting quietly at a table.

Lee took a seat next to Jacob. “They won't be troubling you anymore.”

“That coward of a guard abandoned me,” muttered Darius. “I'll see him skinned alive.” He reached in his belt and pulled out a flask. The sweet scent of brandy filled the air as he opened it.

“He's long gone,” said Lee. “But it seems you are in need of protection. My friend and I would be happy to oblige - for the right price.”

“What?” He shook himself to his senses. “Oh yes, yes. Of course.” He swallowed a mouthful of brandy. “But you may not be so eager once you hear where I'm going.”

“And where is that?” asked Lee.

“I go to Whiterun Pass,” said Darius. “Just on the other side of the Angrääl border. Not too many want to go there. Especially with all the soldiers gathering.” He handed Lee the flask.

Lee took a long swallow and passed it to Jacob. “Then why are you going?”

“War is profitable,” said Darius flatly. “I have twenty wagons full of raw cotton, and the Reborn King pays triple what it's worth anywhere else.”

Hearing that name set Lee's heart pounding. “I see. Well, it sounds like just the kind of job Jasper and I are looking for.” He reached across the table and held out his hand. “I'm Barath, and this is my nephew, Jasper.”

Darius shook Lee's hand, then pulled two silver coins from his purse. He tossed Jacob and Lee a coin each before taking another drink. “Then it’s good to have you both with me. This is for what you did for me in the tavern. Normally, I pay eight coppers per week for escorts.” He paused to study Lee for a moment. “But I think you're worth nine.”

“I'd say we're worth twelve,” said Jacob.

Darius rubbed his chin. “Done.” He stood up. “Grab your gear. My camp is just a mile north, and a sight more comfortable than this place.”

Lee instructed the innkeeper to gather their horses while he and Jacob retrieved their belongings. Lee offered his horse to Darius, but the merchant refused.

“I've had far too much to drink to stay on a horse,” he said. “It will do me good to walk it off.” He patted his round belly. “Besides, I may break the poor beast’s back.”

This brought a hearty laugh. Once the horses were packed, they slowly made their way to the main avenue north through town. Lee kept a sharp lookout for any sign of the two thugs still being about, but to his relief they seemed to have decided that they’d had enough for one night. Lee didn't want to spill blood this early in their journey; such things drew too much attention. And even in a dilapidated camp like Klinton there was still a constable or sheriff. He certainly didn't need to get mixed up with the local law. Not that they would be in any danger of finding themselves in a hangman’s noose, but should men die in the streets, explanations would have to be made and coin spent.

The night was cold, but the brandy helped to fight off the chill. When they arrived at Darius' camp Lee could see twenty large wagons arranged in a wide circle, each one filled to bursting with cotton. In the center several small fires were burning, surrounded by sleeping men.

Darius grumbled. “Lazy dogs. They're supposed to be guarding the wagons.” He straightened his shirt and belt, then stiffened his back, standing as tall as his girth would allow. “That’s why I only brought one blasted guard.”

“How many swordsmen do you have?” asked Lee.

“Ten, not counting the two of you,” Darius replied. “Well, nine since I lost the cur who I had with me tonight.”

“Why so many?” asked Jacob.

“The roads south of Angrääl are dangerous,” Darius told him. “You may well see some action before we get there.”

Lee nodded. “And after?”

Darius chuckled. “No one raids within the borders of the Reborn King. Not unless they wish for death. I'll be glad when they finish whatever war they are getting ready for. At least the roads will be safe. I gotta give them credit - they know how to keep order.”

Lee could tell that Jacob wanted to say something, but flashed him a glance. Darius noticed.

“And what do you think about it?” the merchant asked. “I see you have an opinion.”

“I think...” Jacob paused. Lee's face was like stone. “I think as long as they let people go about their business, I don't care.”

Lee relaxed.

Once within the camp, Darius began kicking awake the men who had been left to guard the wagons, threatening to dock their pay. He pointed to a small tent at the far end of the camp. “I sleep there. After tonight I want you and Jasper to keep your fire and bedrolls nearby. For tonight, find yourselves a place with the others. We leave at dawn.”

Lee and Jacob found a spot in the center of the camp and laid out their bedrolls. The other men scarcely looked at them as they settled in.

“It’s going to get even colder soon,” remarked Lee as he stretched out.

“I'm a northman,” said Jacob. “I don't mind the cold.”

Lee smiled. His son had done well that night, and he allowed himself to feel proud. He prayed to the gods that the feeling would last.

Chapter 9

For the next several days, Lee and Jacob spent most of their time with Darius and learned much about him. Originally from The Silver Isles, a small group of islands just off the coast one hundred miles east of Baltria, he had inherited a cotton plantation on the mainland when his uncle had died twenty years ago. When sober, he wasn't nearly as much of a loud braggart, and Lee found him to be a man of quick wit and good humor.

On the first day, he invited Lee and Jacob to engage in a dice game with a few of the other men. Though Lee politely refused, Jacob took great joy in the distraction, as well as taking coin from Darius, who turned out to be a very unlucky gambler. After a few more games, Darius chose to sit and talk with Lee rather than lose more coin.

At night, after Darius went to bed, which was usually quite early due to an excess of drink, Lee tried to get to know the others among the caravan. The hired swords were mostly from the edge of the eastern desert. They were regarded as a fierce people of few words and quick temper. Fortunately for Lee, he had spent time in Dantory and knew how to approach them. Three of the guards intended to join the armies of Angrääl when they arrived.

“Better to be on the winning side,” said Fennio, a short, thin man, one night over a few cups of wine. He was by far the most experienced of the lot, and bore the scars to prove it. Unlike the long swords the others carried, he preferred a short sword and small mace. “And I hear they pay thirty coppers a week.”

“I'm not servin' in no army,” said Santino, one of the youngest of the group, though he had the look of a hardened veteran. “I don't care if they're payin' fifty coppers. If you ask me, they're payin' so good because you're marchin' off to get killed.”

“Ha!” scoffed Fennio. “You ain't seen how big the army is. A hundred-thousand if it's ten.”

“You ain't seen it neither,” said Santino. “So shut up.”

Fennio took a swallow of wine and wiped his mouth on his sleeve. “Yeah, but I heard about it plain enough. And they say that before long Angrääl is gonna march. You don't wanna be in their way when they do.”

He looked over to Lee, who was feigning disinterest. “What about you Barath? You have the look of a soldier about you. You gonna join up?”

Lee shrugged and forced a smile. “Perhaps. The pay sounds good. Much better than I thought. But up ‘til now me and Jasper had been thinking about heading east if war comes.”

Fennio snorted. “East? You won't find nothin' there but sand and ugly women. Why do you think we left in the first place?” The rest of the group burst out in harsh laughter.

“At least Angrääl isn't likely to go there,” said Lee.

“You're right about that,” agreed Fennio. They'll be busy with the elves, unless I miss my guess.”

Lee cocked his head. “The elves?”

“Yeah,” said Fennio. “I hear this Reborn King fella's gonna get rid of 'em once and for all.” He shrugged. “Good riddance if you ask me. But who knows? I hear some of 'em are fightin' for him too.”

“Either way,” Santino interjected. “I ain't fightin' an elf, and I ain't fightin' with 'em. I'd rather go home and marry me an ugly woman and have some even uglier children.” This brought more laughter. “Besides, if what those desert dwellers say is true, there's plenty of elves wandering the sand. 'Course most of those folk are daft.” He turned to Lee. “You let me know if you head east. I might come with you.”

Lee smiled and got to his feet. “I'll let you know. But I haven’t decided what I’m doing for sure yet.” He brushed off his trousers and went to find Darius and Jacob.

It was a week into their journey when they first started seeing soldiers from Angrääl. Mostly small groups of six to ten at a time. They didn't bother with the caravan, other than to warn them to be on their guard for bandits.

“Don't worry,” one soldier had said. “It won't be long before the roads are safe from here all the way to Baltria.”

Lee continued to train Jacob for at least one hour each day. He noticed that, since that night in Klinton, something had changed. His son now appeared to be more focused, and, in spite of current circumstances, happier too. He even seemed to be enjoying the training. To Lee’s delight, he was also improving dramatically.

On the morning of the eighth day, Lee packed their gear and loaded it onto the horses. Darius had taken to walking rather than riding, spending most of their days spinning tales of his adventures. Though Lee could tell the man embellished quite a bit (though not as much as when he had a belly full of wine) it was clear Darius was indeed well traveled. On several occasions Lee was asked to tell of his own exploits. At first he was resistant, afraid he might give something away that would reveal his true identity. But after being pressed by both Darius and Jacob, he eventually relented. Leaving out certain details, he told them about some of the many wondrous places he had seen.

Just before they stopped for the midday meal, Lee sensed something was wrong. He called for the caravan to halt and reached out with his senses. It was only seconds before he found what he was looking for.

“Gather your men,” he ordered.

“What's wrong?” asked Darius.

Lee closed his eyes and listened carefully. “Twenty men. Ten on either side of the road.” His eyes opened. “They're waiting for us ahead.”

Fear showed on Darius' face. “What should we do?”

“Let them wait,” Lee replied. “We’ll organize the men and set up positions. If they realize we know they're there, they may choose to withdraw.”

“We could sneak around and surprise them,” offered Jacob.

Lee shook his head. “We're outnumbered two to one. We only have nine trained men. The others aren't swordsmen. If we set them to attack, they'll just get themselves killed.” He examined the surrounding area. The trees and brush along the road were sparse and on relatively high ground. Ahead, where the bandits were waiting, the road dipped and was flanked on either side by a slight incline. “We can defend this position if we need to,” he stated before striding off to gather the men.

“I still think we could take them,” said Jacob, once Lee had returned. The guards were lined up behind him and checking their weapons.

“You got a lot to learn, young Jasper,” said Fennio. “The best way to win is to avoid fighting. We're hired guards, not an army. We ain't lookin' to get killed.”

“I thought you wanted to be a soldier,” teased Santino. “I'm with Jasper. We should take them by surprise. I don't like waitin' to be slaughtered.”

“We're not attacking!” barked Lee. “They'll know we're aware of them soon enough. And I doubt we could get behind them in broad daylight, anyway.” He drew his sword. “Believe me, if they decide to attack, they're in for a surprise.” His tone silenced any further argument. He turned to Darius. “You stay behind me at all times.” He then glanced at Jacob, who had moved beside him and also drawn his weapon. “And you, stay by my side.”

Jacob nodded sharply, his muscles tense with anticipation.

Lee positioned the men around the wagons, men at arms in front and the rest several feet behind. An hour passed and the bandits had not yet made a move, but Lee could still hear them. He looked at his son and furled his brow.  He had known all along that they would likely have to fight, but now that danger was a reality, he was afraid for Jacob's life. He remembered the dangers he’d faced with Gewey not so long ago. He loved Gewey as a son also, but he’d never been this concerned for him. Gewey was a god after all, and very hard to kill.

Then, down the road, he saw them. Twenty bandits filing up the slope at a slow walk, their weapons drawn. The man in front was tall, broad-shouldered, with head shaved to leave only an inch-wide strip of black hair down the center of his head. In his right hand he carried a large battleaxe - in his left, a small round shield. They halted about twenty yards away. The leader then took a few steps further forward.

“Whoever your commander is, he's a sharp one,” called the bandit. “But then, so am I.”

Darius stepped forward. “What do you want?”

The bandit laughed. “Something tells me you're not the one who spotted us, fat man.” He shrugged. “Well, I think you know what we want. The question is, are you willing to die for it?”

Darius held his head high. “Are you?” He looked at his guards, pausing when he met Lee's eyes and smiling. “Give way and find an easier target.”

The bandit addressed Darius' men. “Listen to me. This fat rich merchant will see you all to your graves. If you leave now, none of you will be harmed. Is his gold worth your life?”

Lee stepped forward. He focused his strength to make his voice louder. “If all these men run, I will stand. And by the gods, if I fall, you will fall with me.”

The bandit shifted uneasily. “I guess I know who the real leader is here.” He steadied his feet. “A man like you could go far. Why are you determined to die? Why not live and get rich?”

Lee tightened his grip on his sword. He glanced at Jacob, giving him a sinister smirk. “I don't need you to get rich. And your time is nearly up.”

“So be it,” said the bandit. He looked back at his men and raised his hand.

Only the nervous breathing of the men and the uneasy shifting of the pack animals disturbed the brief silence that followed. Darius moved to Lee's back, a short sword in his hand.

“Stay near me,” Lee whispered to Jacob. “And keep your back to the wagons.”

Then the bandit's hand dropped. The attackers charged, screaming wildly as they came. The guards braced themselves. Within seconds, the deafening clatter of steel on steel cut through the air. Lee hoped that the bandit leader would come at him first, but he did not, instead choosing to engage the guards to his left. Two bandits swung their rusty swords at Lee, but their blades found only empty air. Lee cut them both down with blinding speed.

Jacob was dodging blows from a tall, heavyset bandit wielding a thick broadsword. Fear struck Lee's heart as he saw Jacob being pushed back. He moved to take the bandit's head, but Jacob struck first, thrusting his sword through the man's gut and then ripping it free. He flashed a smile at Lee before stepping forward to greet another attacker.

Two more bandits came at Lee, but they were quickly dispatched. Jacob had taken the arm of another, and by now had placed himself in front of Darius.

“I'll protect Darius!” he shouted to Lee. “Kill the leader!”

Lee swelled with pride. He scanned the melee. The guards were holding their ground well, their experience in keeping the wagons at their backs forcing the bandits to take them on only one at a time. The leader was at the far end. He had killed two guards and was beating back a third. Lee pulled the dagger from his belt and hurled it. The blade flew past the leader’s neck, narrowly missing instead of burying itself in his throat. With a scowl, the bandit turned to see Lee charging in his direction. He took a few steps forward to meet him.

Lee killed two more attackers before finally reaching the leader. He could see the fear in the man’s eyes as he brought his blade down hard and swift. The bandit was only just able to raise his shield in time, but the force of Lee's blow threw him back. Lee stepped in again, this time bringing his sword upward in a tight arc. The tip dug into the bandit's left thigh, tearing its way through to the hip. The bandit grimaced and staggered, swinging his axe frantically. Lee moved deftly away, then slashed deep into the leader’s right shoulder. His axe fell to the dirt with a sharp thud. The man’s eyes were already closing against the pain as Lee moved in for the finish. One more powerful blow sent his head flying. The body managed to remain erect for a moment, blood squirting rhythmically from its neck, then it crumbled to the ground. It was the decisive moment. Seeing their leader fall, one by one the remaining bandits began to flee.

“Do not pursue them,” Lee shouted, rushing to his son's side. Jacob was breathing heavily from the fight. His shirt and trousers were drenched in blood. Spots of red also dotted his cheeks.

Darius was backed against the wagon, his hands trembling and his face a ghostly pale. When he saw Lee he forced a weak smile. “Well done indeed.” He nodded at Jacob. “Both of you.”

“We need to tend the wounded,” said Lee. “And see to the dead.”

Lee examined the aftermath of the battle. The guards had already begun to treat the wounds of their comrades. Each gave Lee a respectful nod as he passed. In all, three men had been lost, and three more were wounded. But they had managed to hold off the bandits well enough to protect the untrained workmen. Lee checked his pack and retrieved a healing salve he had brought, then set to help with the treating of the men. Two could still travel on their own, but one would need to ride in a wagon.

Darius had the men dig graves for the fallen guards, and ordered the bodies of the bandits placed in a row along the roadside. “They can serve as a warning,” he said, gazing upon the sight.

A short ceremony was held for the guards. Each of their comrades said a quiet prayer to Dantenos, God of the Dead, asking him to watch over their friends. After this, no one wanted to stay the night in the same place, so they marched another mile before setting up camp.

After building a fire and setting the bedrolls, most sat in silence, the horror of the battle still fresh in their minds. Lee checked the wounded, then joined Jacob and Darius at the edge of the encampment.

“Quite a day,” said Darius.

Lee nodded. “Indeed, it was.” He tore off a piece of bread that had been laid out for him. “There is a small town, Farice, a day’s ride from here. We should reach it before sundown tomorrow. The wounded should be left behind there. They will not heal if they continue.”

“I'm familiar with Farice,” said Darius. “I'll see the men are paid and tended.” He looked Lee in eye. “I've never seen anyone fight like you. You could have taken the entire raiding party alone, I suspect.” His eyes drifted to Jacob. “And I see you have the same spirit in you as well.”

Lee shrugged. “I was well trained. And Jasper is a natural.”

“Well trained, you say,” said Darius. His eyes bore suspicion. He stretched out on his bedroll, his hands folded behind his head. “You know, I have traveled this road six times since the Reborn King came to power. I've seen many soldiers, mercenaries, thugs, bandits, you name it. I've seen many fights, duels, and even one pitched battle when I was young. But I have never seen a man slay so many with such ease as you.”

Lee was silent.

Darius chuckled. “Don't worry. Whatever secrets you keep are yours. You and Jasper have saved my life twice. Not to mention keeping my fortune out of the hands of brigands. I'm not so wealthy that I can afford to lose an entire shipment. In any case, I am in your debt.” He rolled over to face Lee. “I have a feeling that you will not be in my employ long. You are a man who acts with purpose, and I think that purpose lays in Angrääl.”

Lee met Darius' gaze. “What are you trying to say?”

Darius smiled. “Nothing. I just want you to know that, when the time comes, I will help you as best I can.” He rolled back over and closed his eyes. “I owe you that much.”

Lee looked at his son, then back at Darius. “When the time comes, your help will be most welcome.”

Chapter 10

Gewey cracked open his eyes. Kaylia lay peacefully beside him, one arm draped across his chest and a tiny smile on her lips. The scent of porridge and bread blew in from outside the tent, causing his stomach to growl.

“They've left a meal for us,” said Kaylia, awake though her eyes were still closed.

Gewey reluctantly sat up and reached for his clothes. He dressed and went to the tent entrance. Just as Kaylia had said, two bowls of porridge and a loaf of bread, along with a cup of sweet wine had been placed immediately outside. Kaylia got dressed and they enjoyed their meal in silence. Their bond was all the conversation they needed.

They had barely taken the last bite when a voice called out to them. “Hello?” It was Linis.

“Come inside,” Kaylia responded.

Linis entered, his face grave.

“What's happened?” asked Gewey.

“We received word that Valshara has fallen.”

Gewey and Kaylia sprang to their feet.

“When?” asked Gewey. He reached down and grabbed his sword.

“Not long after we departed,” replied Linis. “The High Lady escaped, along with a few others. They have taken refuge in Althetas for now.” Linis pushed open the tent flap. “I am truly sorry, but you are needed. Theopolou and the others have gathered to decide what to do.”

Gewey took a deep breath and led Kaylia by the hand from the tent. The morning air was cool and moist, with dew still glistening on the grass-covered field. They joined the others not far from where he and Kaylia had completed their bond the night before. Theopolou and the elders were in deep conversation with Aaliyah and her comrades. Only Aaliyah noticed Gewey, Kaylia, and Linis approach. She nodded a greeting at Gewey.

“What's going on?” he asked.

Theopolou held a small piece of parchment in his hand. “Valshara is destroyed. Very few escaped. The High Lady is in Althetas and plans to petition the king to come to their aid.” He looked directly at Aaliyah. “I believe Gewey should delay his journey until we can decide on a course of action, but Aaliyah disagrees.”

“Any delay only puts you in greater danger,” said Aaliyah. “The presence of Shivis Mol will not help you. Besides, your course is clear. Gather as many as you can and strike back before your enemies can establish a foothold. Unless they have an army, you should be able to mount an attack and retake what you have lost. My people will give you all the help they can. They will expect only swords and arrows - we can bring much more than that to bear.” She turned to Gewey. “But we must not delay our departure.”

Gewey wanted desperately to stay. Every minute more he could have with Kaylia was precious.

“Aaliyah is right,” said Kaylia. Feeling Gewey's doubt, she squeezed his hand. “If what she says is true, we need what is hidden in the desert. And Gewey needs to learn to use his power.”

“It is probable they will not look to hold Valshara,” said Bellisia. “Not so far from reinforcements. More likely they are striking at Amon Dähl. And if they do try to hold it, we can take it back.” She spoke to Theopolou. “You know Valshara better than most. The battle plan shall be yours.”

“And if we find we are mistaken?” Theopolou furled his brow. “What then? Valshara can be well defended by only a few. If they brought enough force, they could hold it indefinitely.”

“You think in battle terms without taking all of your weapons into account,” said Nehrutu. He held out his palm. The air above it swirled and twisted, then burst into a small flame. The light and heat grew until it forced the gathering back. “We have abilities beyond your understanding.” The ball of flames shot skyward, then exploded with an ear-shattering blast. “They will not expect you to possess such weapons.”

This demonstration drew gazes of awe and murmurs of approval.

“Please, Shivis Mol,” said Aaliyah. We must depart. There is nothing for you to do here.”

Gewey looked at Kaylia. She nodded slowly, then kissed his cheek. Gewey nearly lost himself as the love flowed freely between their bond. He sighed heavily and forced himself to look away. “We leave as soon as you're ready.” He turned to Theopolou. “I'll return as soon as I can.”

Aaliyah was already prepared to depart, and told Gewey she would await him at the edge of the encampment. Gewey gathered his pack, Kaylia at his side.

“I'll miss you,” he said. Tears welled in his eyes.

Kaylia pulled him close and kissed him deeply. “Just be careful and return to me safe.” Choking back her own tears, she then reluctantly released her embrace and took hold of his hand. “It's time.” They made their way to Aaliyah.

Theopolou and Linis were also there. Linis smiled as they approached. He held a small silver flask.

“I made this last night,” he said, handing it to Gewey. “If you are to go to the desert, it may be useful. A single sip will keep you strong should you be unable to find water.”

“Thank you, my friend.” Gewey put the flask in his pack and gave Linis a fond embrace.

Theopolou bowed. “Farewell, Gewey Stedding. My hopes go with you.” He looked at Kaylia, then back to Gewey. “You are now a part of my house and my family. Return to us soon.”

Gewey bowed in return. “I will.” He kissed Kaylia one last time as tears streamed down both of their faces. He wiped his tears and turned to Aaliyah. “I'm ready.”

Aaliyah nodded and led Gewey to the trail. He dared not look back for fear his heart would break.

“Are we going alone?” he asked.

“We need no escort,” Aaliyah replied. “There is nothing so dangerous as to trouble us.”

“How long until we get there?”

“Two days. But if we press our pace and take no respite we can reach the shore by morning. My ship awaits us.” She slowed so as to walk beside Gewey. “I know it is hard to leave her. But it is for the best. And you may find you are glad that you did.”

Gewey was in no mood for flirting. “You told me you were once bonded.”

“I was,” she affirmed.

“When he died, did you think it was for the best?” He saw a pang of emotion shoot across her face. Immediately he regretted his words.

“At the time, I did not,” Her lips slowly relaxed and she smiled sweetly. “But now, I think it might have been.”

Gewey struggled not to return her smile. Instead, he reached out to Kaylia. Immense sorrow and worry is all he felt at first, then joy and relief as she reached back. Aaliyah quickened their pace.

By nightfall, Gewey was forced to use the flow more and more to keep up his strength. At times they almost ran. He could tell Aaliyah was using only her own natural endurance and marveled, though he said nothing about it.

By midnight the landscape had flattened and the trees thinned. Patches of grass were separated by large areas of gray sand and red clay. The tall pines were now being outnumbered by curved palms and thick brambles, and the musty scent of the forest was mixed with the salty breeze coming in off the Western Abyss.

“Do you need rest?” asked Aaliyah.

Gewey knew that if he released the flow, fatigue would certainly set in. “No, I'm fine,” he said.

Aaliyah reached into a pouch on her belt and pulled out a small orange berry. “Try this.” She handed it to Gewey.

Gewey examined it for a moment. It was smooth and shiny, and no larger than a cherry. “What is it?”

“We call them Rain Berries.” She pulled out another and popped it in her mouth. Sighing with satisfaction, she motioned for Gewey to eat.

Gewey held it to his nose. It smelled like a plum, only sweeter. He slowly bit down. Sweet juice exploded and a delicious flavor, unlike any other fruit or berry he had ever encountered, filled his mouth and caressed his tongue. “I've never tasted anything like it,” he said.

“They are my favorite,” Aaliyah told him. “And very hard to come by. I searched many days to find only a small handful.”

“I wish they grew here,” said Gewey.

“Perhaps one day you will help me to gather them in my homeland.”

Gewey noticed how the moonlight silhouetted the curves of her figure. She moved with a fluid grace that was unmatched by anyone he'd ever seen. She looked over just in time to catch his stare and gave him a sly grin. He felt himself flush with embarrassment.

An hour before sunrise he could hear the surf beating against the shore. Walking became increasingly difficult as the sand deepened and the dunes began to rise ahead. Not that this appeared to hinder Aaliyah. As they crested the last dune, the dim light of dawn broke at his back. The azure of the Western Abyss stretched out before them. Gewey stood transfixed.

“Have you never seen the sea?” asked Aaliyah.

“No,” Gewey replied. “I haven't. I only left my small village a short time ago. Even then, we were on the run most of the time.” He breathed in the sea air.

“You will see the world soon enough,” said Aaliyah. “But I must warn you. The first time on a ship at sea can be disquieting.”

Up until now Gewey had not thought much about spending two weeks aboard a seagoing vessel. He shrugged, not wanting to show his sudden apprehension. “I'll be fine.”

“Of course you will.” She led Gewey down the beach to a small boat that had been pulled ashore and tied to a large piece of driftwood. “My ship is just over the horizon.”

Gewey looked out at the water. The waves were at least three feet high and the sea beyond the breakers was rough. “Is it safe to go such a long way out in this?”

Aaliyah laughed as she untied the boat. “We won't be going that far. My ship is already heading toward us.”

“How...?” Gewey began.

“My crew knows I am here because I let them know,” she said, before he could complete his question. “It is much the same as when you reach out to Kaylia, only we can do so without the bonding. You will learn soon enough.”

Gewey grabbed the side of the boat and helped Aaliyah drag it to the water. It was surprisingly light, which made him even more nervous as he eyed the churning seas. As soon as they were in the water and on board, Gewey noticed something missing. Oars. Aaliyah had seated herself at the front and was sitting cross-legged, hands in her lap, palms up. The boat lurched forward. Spray soaked his clothes as the craft cut through the waves and into open water. He could feel the flow coursing through her.

In the distance he spotted red sails breaking above the horizon. “I see them,” he called out.

“Yes,” she replied. “We will be aboard soon.”

The ship came closer at an alarming rate. In only a few minutes it loomed above them. It was well over one hundred feet in length, and its two giant masts were nearly the length of the ship itself. Gewey had only seen drawings of seagoing vessels, but could still tell that this ship was much sleeker in design, and looked faster. The sails were swollen full, and at first Gewey was afraid the ship would ram them. But just as it came within twenty yards, the sails went limp and the vessel slowed dramatically.

Dozens of elves, all of them dressed in tan shirts and red trousers, could be seen looking down at them. One unfurled a rope ladder, as well as two thin ropes. Aaliyah attached the ropes to steel rings on each side of the boat and then led Gewey up the ladder. He could already feel queasiness in his stomach as he climbed. The ship rose and dipped methodically, causing him to nearly fall twice before he reached the top. Once on deck, he reached over and held the side railing to steady himself.

“You will grow accustomed to the movement soon,” Aaliyah promised. “For now, stare at the horizon. It will keep your stomach from turning sour.”

Gewey looked doubtful, but obeyed. He could hear the whispers of the elves behind him. The words Shivis Mol were repeated over and over. After a few minutes, his nausea subsided and he turned around. The sway of the ship tipped him slightly off balance. As he stumbled forward, a tall, thin elf with dust-brown hair and ice-blue eyes leaped forward to grab his arm.

“I'm fine,” said Gewey. “Thank you.”

The elf bowed. “It takes time to grow accustomed to the sea.” He smiled brightly. “But I suspect Shivis Mol will have little trouble.”

Gewey looked out over the deck. At least a dozen elves were busy about the ship. Aaliyah was standing several feet away speaking to one of the crew. To the aft end, the deck sloped upward, ending at a cabin that stood nearly ten feet tall. A narrow wooden door leading to the cabin interior was flanked on either side by ladders leading up to the poop deck. The main deck was smooth and glistened in the morning sun, yet despite its slick appearance, it gripped the soles of his boots. He examined the various ropes and pulleys hanging from the first mast, marveling at their sheer complexity. The riverboats he had seen were as toys by comparison.

Aaliyah motioned for him to join her. “If you wish, you can spend time among the crew. They will be pleased to show you how the ship works.”

“I would like that,” said Gewey. His stomach growled loudly.

Several elves began to gather around each mast.

“You should watch this,” said Aaliyah. “Then you can eat and rest.”

The elves closed their eyes and folded their hands in front of them. Gewey could sense the sudden swell of the flow growing around him. He felt the air begin to stir and build until the sails snapped full. The masts groaned and creaked as the ship lurched forward. The elves opened their eyes, and all but one broke the circle and returned to their work.

“He will maintain the wind until midday,” said Aaliyah. She pointed to the bow where another elf woman stood, eyes fixed on the horizon. “And she will guide us.”

Gewey could scarcely believe what he had seen. “You can teach me this?”

“Of course.” She reached out and took his hand. “That is why you are here, is it not? But come, there will be time for that later.”

“But how....”

She placed one delicate finger to his lips. “Later. I am strong, but I still need to eat.” She led Gewey across the deck and through the door of the cabin. The wooden interior was polished, clean and superbly varnished. Long tables had been placed to his right, and a narrow door could be seen just beyond these at the back of the cabin. The walls were bare – with the exception of a silver placard hanging above the far table. This displayed an expertly carved relief of a dolphin leaping playfully from a turbulent sea.

Aaliyah took Gewey's pack and motioned for him to sit. “I will take your belongings to your quarters.” She disappeared through the narrow door.

Gewey waited patiently. It wasn't long before Aaliyah returned carrying two bowls. Closely following her came a short, elderly elf woman bearing a bottle, two wooden cups, and two spoons. The scent of fresh fish filled the air. After placing everything on the table, the woman bowed and left.

Aaliyah took a seat across from Gewey. “I hope you enjoy our fare.”

In the bowl was a thick creamy stew dotted with red, green, and black spices. His mouth watered. “What is it?” He gathered up a spoonful and saw large chunks of fish mixed in with the thick broth.

“It is a stew made from cream, fish, and spices from my homeland.” She poured Gewey a cup of wine.

Gewey eyes grew wide at the first taste. It was almost sweet, yet the spice caused his tongue to tingle. The fish was tender and just salty enough to be a pleasant addition to the overall experience. He smiled and moaned with satisfaction.

“I am pleased you like it,” said Aaliyah.

They ate the rest of the meal in silence. When they were finished, she led him through the door at the back of the cabin and down a narrow corridor that split at the end. To their right was an open door leading into a small kitchen; they continued left, and on to a room at the end of the hallway. Inside was surprisingly luxurious. A thick, indigo rug, woven with swirling silver patterns around its borders covered the floor. A large oak desk littered with maps, charts, and several leather books lay directly ahead. On either side of this were single beds dressed with plush blue quilts and two small but soft looking round pillows. A large ash chest had been placed at the foot of each bed. The wall was decorated with paintings of various sea creatures – some Gewey was familiar with, while others looked like monsters out of legends. Glowing spheres hung from the ceiling in the corners.

Aaliyah sat on the bed to the right. She nodded toward the one opposite with Gewey’s pack already on it. “You sleep there.”

Gewey froze. “You mean you're staying in the same room?”

“Of course,” Aaliyah replied, clearly amused. “Space aboard ship is limited, and I will not have Shivis Mol sleep on deck.”

“I wouldn't mind.” He made no move toward the bed. Knowing her intentions made him feel uneasy, and he knew Kaylia certainly would not approve.

Her laugh rang out like music. “Calm yourself. I can have one of the crew stay with you if you wish.”

Gewey suddenly felt very much a child. Settling his wits, he said: “I wouldn't want to kick you out of your own room. I didn't mean to overreact.”

There was a knock at the door and two elf men entered carrying a small basin filled with water. Their eyes remained fixed on Gewey as they placed the basin gently on the floor and then left.

Aaliyah rose to her feet. “It is time for your first lesson,” She knelt in front of the basin. “The water is cold. You shall heat it.”

Gewey knelt beside her. “What do I do?”

“The same as you do with power from the earth. Only you must focus your spirit on the air that surrounds the basin.”

Gewey cocked his head. “The air? Not the water?”

Aaliyah shook her head. “No. You could heat it that way, but the effort would be much greater.” She reached over and took his hand. “You must learn to find the smooth path. Water will resist you, while the air is pliant.” She squeezed his hand tightly. “Open your mind to me. Allow me to guide you.”

Gewey breathed deep and closed his eyes. At once he saw Kaylia, her face anguished and lonely. His eyes snapped open.

Aaliyah released her grip and sprang to her feet. “This will not do.” Her voice was disapproving and sharp. “If you cannot govern your bond, I must assist you.” Grabbing Gewey by the shoulders, she pressed down hard.

“What are you doing,” he demanded. Then it felt as if he had been struck between the eyes. He fell back, reeling.

Aaliyah knelt beside him. “You are not hurt, Shivis Mol.”

Gewey opened his eyes. It took him a moment before he managed to sit up and regain his focus. Something was wrong. An overwhelming sadness filled his heart and tears began streaming down his cheeks. He closed his eyes, reaching out to his bond with Kaylia. It was gone! He glared accusingly at Aaliyah. “What have you done?” he roared, sorrow blending with sheer fury.

Aaliyah looked serene and almost satisfied. “Nothing that cannot be undone.”

Gewey leaped to his feet. His hand slid to his sword as the flow raged through him. “Then undo it!”

Aaliyah didn't appear intimidated in the slightest as she slowly stood up. “I will not. Not until your lessons are complete.” She turned to the door. “You are unable to control your bond with Kaylia. That will hinder our work, and we can ill afford that. The time I have to teach you is short, and I will not allow passion to cripple you.” Reaching for the door, she turned her profile to Gewey. “I will leave until you have calmed your storm.” With those words, she left the room.

Gewey let out a tortured scream. For more than an hour he raged, pacing back and forth. Again and again he tried to reach out to Kaylia, but could feel nothing at all. The sensation of pure emptiness had him weeping openly several times. Finally, he slumped down onto the bed, defeated.

The door opened and Aaliyah returned. She sat next to him, her face showing deep concern and sympathy. “When you have the strength, you can overcome what I have done. I have not broken your bond, merely pulled it from your grasp.” She placed her hand on Gewey's. “You must trust me.”

Gewey roughly pushed her hand away. “You had no right to do this.”

“Better for me to face your anger now, than to let you face your enemies unprepared.” She knelt back down beside the basin of water. “Come.”

Gewey stared with seething anger. He remained sitting on the bed for several minutes before finally kneeling beside her. “You had better keep your word. Once you've taught me - undo it.”

Aaliyah took his hand. This time he did not resist. “When I have taught you what you need to know, you will not need me to undo it.” Her mouth turned up to the tiniest of smiles. “When that happens, your foes will tremble before you.”

Gewey closed his eyes and let Aaliyah enter his mind. Despite his anger, the touch of her thoughts felt soothing and warm.

“Allow yourself to feel as I feel.” Her voice lifted away the loneliness.

Gewey let himself drift nearer and nearer, until he could no long separate where his mind ended, and hers began. He had only ever been this close to Kaylia before. Guilt and regret shot through his heart, but somehow Aaliyah pushed these emotions away, replacing them with a feeling of joy and contentment. He felt her spirit reach out to the air that surrounded the basin. At first it was confusing. It felt so different to when he was drawing power from the earth - so removed and strange that this couldn't possibly be part of the flow. But as Aaliyah began moving and molding it, he began to see how it melded to the actual fabric of the world. Suddenly everything was so simple. He wondered how he had never seen it before.

“Magic,” he whispered.

“Yes,” said Aaliyah. “In a way.”

The air above and around the basin swirled and compressed, faster and faster until heat sprang forth from its core. Increasingly hot, it danced and swayed, caressing the surface of the water and sides of the basin. Then, as suddenly as it began, it ended. The water steamed and rippled.

Gewey reached out and touched the basin, burning the tips of his fingers. He scarcely noticed the pain. “How didn't I see it before?”

Aaliyah squeezed his hand and helped him to his feet. “It may still elude you.”

Gewey closed his eyes and reached out for Aaliyah once again. This time she didn't allow him to join with her. “Why...?”

“You must try without my help.” she said.

Gewey realized in that moment that he longed to feel her spirit, and instantly felt ashamed. He felt as if he had betrayed Kaylia. “Of course,” he said.

Pushing his feelings aside, he tried to recreate what they had done together. But as Aaliyah had warned, he was not able to. After three straight attempts, he threw his hands up in frustration.

“Patience,” said Aaliyah. “It will come more easily with time.” She turned to the door. “I will leave you to bathe. Then we can rest.”

“But it's still morning.”

Her voice became soft and seductive. “I prefer the night. And I am weary from our journey.”

Gewey blushed under her gaze. The feeling of guilt and betrayal returned to snap back his reason. He was very tired. Now that he had released the flow and his anger had subsided he was becoming acutely aware of the dull fatigue now washing over his entire body.

After he had washed and changed into the elf clothing given to him by Theopolou, he settled into his bed. The waves rocked him ever so gently until he drifted close to sleep. He was only vaguely aware of Aaliyah's return. For a moment, just before sleep completely took him, he could feel her mind touching his. It was soft and comforting, much like a mother soothing a frightened child. He felt his lips turn to a smile. Then there was only the dark oblivion of a deep, restful sleep.

Chapter 11

Gewey awoke to the sound of Aaliyah humming softly. She was sitting at the desk reading a small blue book. He lay there listening for a time before sitting up. He felt refreshed and strong.

“You slept well, I trust?” she asked.

He yawned and stretched. “Yes. I was more tired than I thought.”

“You have had quite an eventful few days.” She closed the book and placed it in the desk drawer. “I am sorry to say that you will get little rest while on board. We have much to do.”

She waited outside for Gewey to change, then led him to the galley where two plates of eggs and bread awaited them. After breakfast, she took him out on deck. The cool sea air sent a chill down his spine, and as he looked out onto the Western Abyss he began to envy the sailors such a life. The dark, rolling waves and the endless expanse of the sea calmed him. The sun was just sinking over the horizon, setting the sky ablaze with swirls of orange, blue, and red. Surely the stories his father had told him of storms and sea monsters couldn't exist in such a marvelous place.

Aaliyah walked to the port railing and leaned her slender figure over the side. The wind wrapped her thin cotton dress around her curves. “Beautiful, is it not?”

Gewey blushed, thankful she could not see his unease. “It is,” he replied, joining her. “It's like nothing I've ever seen.”

“It is not always so peaceful,” she warned. “The sea is more perilous than you can imagine. Storms can rise without warning, and there are beasts that lurk within that are larger than this ship.”

Gewey laughed. “Sea monsters?”

“Some,” she replied. “Though not all are monsters. Some are gentle and wise.”

Gewey cocked his head. “Wise? How can a beast be wise?”

“There is much about the world you have yet to learn,” she said. “One is that not all ‘beasts’ are what they seem.” She took his hand. “Come. It is time to begin.”

The crew was busy about their work, but each one took a moment to greet them as they passed. Gewey had counted about thirty elves aboard, and assumed there were more below. Aaliyah led him to the bow where the navigator was concentrating on her duties.

“Is she using wind or water?” asked Gewey.

“Both,” said Aaliyah. She placed his hand on the navigator’s shoulder. “This is Faaliyasi. Join with her.”

Gewey obeyed, allowing his mind and spirit to drift outward toward the navigator. Her mind was different from those of Kaylia or Aaliyah. It was hard, cold, and as unyielding as steel. She let Gewey draw close, but only close enough for him to feel as she did. The flow was similar to what he’d experienced that morning, but a million times more complex. The forces intertwined in perfect harmony, dancing and twisting as one.

“Amazing,” he whispered. “How can you do this?”

Faaliyasi did not respond.

After several minutes Aaliyah pulled Gewey away. “She has trained for many years to learn this skill.”

“Can you do that?” Gewey asked.

“Yes, but not as well,” she admitted. “Our navigators begin learning their craft at childhood. What you saw was just a small thing. Should a storm arise, you will see her true power.”

Aaliyah had a small bowl of water brought on deck, and Gewey spent the rest of the evening trying in vain to touch the power of the air to heat it. He soon found Aaliyah to be as severe a taskmaster as Lee had been, though not as harsh in temperament. By morning he was exhausted and frustrated.

When they returned to their quarters he found that a basin of wash water had been left. The prospect of joining with Aaliyah excited him. He had not been alone inside himself since he’d first joined with Kaylia, and the loneliness now bothered him considerably. Had he not been so utterly engrossed in his training, he was certain it would be almost unbearable.

“You shall wash with cold water until you can learn to heat it yourself,” Aaliyah told him.

Gewey's heart sank, but he tried once again. And this time he felt it. Unlike the throbbing pulse of the earth, it was an irregular current of energy.

“Yes,” said Aaliyah softly. “The air is not a brute like the earth. It is a whimsical child. Let it dance through you.”

Gewey drew in the flow of the air for the first time. His fatigue washed away at once, and just like when he used the earth, his senses erupted with awareness. But unlike the earth, it was difficult to control. It scattered and twirled throughout his body as a tempest. It resisted him, threatening to tear him apart.

“Do not use force,” Aaliyah instructed. “Use your heart and your soul to have it obey your commands.”

“I don't understand,” he said. The flow continued to build, rushing through him. Finally, he could no longer contain it. Gewey let out a horrifying scream at the point of release. The air exploded, tossing both he and Aaliyah back, slamming them hard against the wall.

Gewey slid down onto the floor, gasping. Every bit of breath had been forced from his lungs. Only after several moments was he able to regain his senses and catch his breath. It was then that he saw Aaliyah slumped down next to the door. Springing to his feet, he rushed to her side.

“Are you all right?” he asked desperately. “Gods, I'm sorry. I'm so sorry.” He took her limp hand in his and reached out to her spirit. The moment he touched it, he felt the keen sense of loneliness vanish. Her spirit seemed to embrace him, pulling him to her.

Slowly her eyes fluttered open. “I am unhurt.” She managed a smile. “You are far stronger than I could have imagined.” She sat up straight. “But I should have known Shivis Mol would be.”

“I am sorry,” he repeated.

“Do not be sorry,” she said soothingly. “The fault was mine. I must be aware that I am not training an elf child, but a young godling.” Her hand gently touched his cheek. “And in this world you have only just come of age. I must remember that as well.”

Gewey stiffened. “I am a man.” he insisted. “Even before I came of age, I was my own master.”

She giggled, amused at his reaction. “A man need not assert that he is a man. Only a child would do so.” Aided by Gewey, she struggled to her feet and smoothed her dress.

Gewey gave no reply. Embarrassed by the truth in her words, he turned and retrieved his elf clothing from the chest. Aaliyah left the room to allow him to wash, returning just as he was climbing into his bed.

She dimmed all the lights and climbed into her own bed. “I am sorry if I upset you,” she said, pulling the blanket close. “But compared with me, your years in this world are few. There are many lessons for you still to learn.”

“I know,” said Gewey. “I just feel...” He sighed. “I suppose I don't like being reminded that I'm so much younger and inexperienced than everyone else around me.”

“Yes, you are young.” She closed her eyes and sighed. “But you are not without experience. And you are mature for your age. You should think no more on it. I will try to be more delicate with the matter.”

Gewey let the ship rock him to sleep. His dreams were fraught with images of battle, blood, and mayhem. They were so vivid that at first he feared the Dark Knight had found him again. But to his relief, he did not appear.

Over the next several nights Gewey and Aaliyah continued their lessons, but Aaliyah thought it better to do so on deck rather than risk damage to the ship. Though there were no further accidents, Gewey struggled for the first few days to control the flow. The more he failed, the more frustrated he became. But then, on the fourth night, it happened.

One of the navigators was on her way to her quarters. Her face was tense, her eyes narrow, and she appeared to be upset. Gewey stopped her.

“Are you all right?” he asked.

“I am fine, Shivis Mol,” she replied.

Her name was Drasalisia. Gewey had seen her nearly every evening on his way up to the deck. Usually, he was already involved in his lesson when she passed by, but this evening Aaliyah had allowed him a little bit of extra sleep. “It's just that you look upset,” he remarked.

Drasalisia's face relaxed a little. She managed a polite smile. “No, Shivis Mol, I am not upset. But when you channel power from the air and water it can leave you emotional. It takes effort to calm myself.”

“Emotional?” Gewey rubbed the back of his neck and tilted his head. There were three navigators on board. All women, and all seemed to him to be as stoic as priests of Dantenos, God of the Dead. “How do you mean?”

“The water is power and mystery,” she replied. “Difficult to understand, but easy to manipulate. The air is another matter. It is passion and fire. It burns and flows with a will of its own. When you control air, it demands that you use your own passion. Otherwise it will defy you.”

“You speak as if it were alive,” he remarked.

“Did you ever think it was not?” She huffed a laugh and walked away.

Gewey thought on her words for a time before sitting next to the waiting bowl of water. He closed his eyes and felt the flow of the air around him, drawing it near. He could feel it raging and bursting with power. Then it came to him. The passion. Love, hate, joy, sorrow, all pressing in together, trying to force their way out. It was alive. He drew it inside and let his own feelings surge into the storm. It was in that moment he understood why he couldn't control it before. In his attempt to control, he had withheld the part of himself needed for the air to join with him as one - his heart. All the lessons suddenly came together, and he knew exactly what to do. Within moments, the air around the bowl had heated.

“Perfect.” Aaliyah knelt beside him. “Soon it will become effortless. You will be able to create wonders.”

Gewey sighed with satisfaction. “It's alive. I can feel it.”

“Of course, it is,” she replied. “The world is a living thing formed by the Creator. The pulse of the earth is its heart and body. The air its breath. The water its blood.” She took his hand, pulling him to his feet. “And when you are ready, you will see its soul.”

“Its soul?” Gewey tried to imagine the world as an immense creature atop which all people resided. “I'll be able to see it?”

“Oh, yes,” said Aaliyah. “When you have control enough to master the physical powers of the earth, then you shall be ready to join with its spirit. For an elf, there is no greater power. Only a few of us have touched it.”

“Have you?” he asked.

“Yes,” she replied. “I am one who has achieved such power. Though I admit, only to a small degree. To journey through the unseen world, touching the minds of others wrapped within your own spirit is a gift we all possess. But to join with the true spirit of creation – that is unlike anything you can imagine. Once you can do this, you will be invincible.”

Gewey realized she was still holding his hand, and felt his heart race. He quickly withdrew. Aaliyah smiled and let out a soft, contented laugh. She looked into his eyes for a long moment and then stood over him.

“I know what you're trying to do,” he said in a half-whisper. “It won't work. I love Kaylia.”

“I have made no secret of my intent,” she replied. “But I am no trickster. Do not sully our time together with accusations.” She motioned for him to resume his lesson.

For the rest of the night Gewey practiced channeling the flow. By the end of the lesson Aaliyah had taught him how to create a tiny ball of flame above his hand and send it flying through the air.

From then on, time aboard passed quickly. By the beginning of the second week Gewey began rising early in order to study the ship and its workings. All the crew members were happy to teach him, and he found himself looking forward to this as much he did his lessons with Aaliyah. His new friends relished telling him stories from their homeland, and were eager to learn of his life too. Their cheer and good nature reminded him of Linis and his seekers. It was comforting to know that he did not need to convince them to be his allies. Though they did not say it directly, he felt as if they would do anything he asked of them.

But even though he had immersed his mind in his lessons, Kaylia was never far from his mind. The absence of her thoughts and emotions was an open wound that felt as if it would never heal. Several times every day he tried to reach her, but without success. Each time he attempted this Aaliyah appeared shortly afterwards to give him further instruction. Somehow she knew what he was doing. But worse, she also knew what he was feeling and was able to say just the right thing to send his heart pounding and cheeks blushing. Most of the time this was followed by heart-wrenching guilt. But she would occasionally catch him off-guard, and he would respond more in the manner of a suitor than a student. This, naturally, caused him even more guilt and torment.

By midway through the second week the cool evenings had become warm and muggy. Aaliyah told him that they were about a hundred miles from the shores of a large delta city. Gewey assumed this to be Baltria. She explained that, until they neared their destination in four days’ time, they would remain far from shore so as to avoid other ships. Gewey marveled that they had traveled so far in such a short time.

Aaliyah told him that he would begin lessons with water on their return journey. This reminded Gewey of why they had actually come. He had heard stories of the desert nomads: fierce and dangerous, they wandered aimlessly, preying on anyone foolish enough to stray too far from the oasis towns. Ravenous beasts supposedly roamed the sands as well. There were tales of wolves the size of a pony hunting at night, devouring entire caravans and leaving only the bones to bleach in the scorching sun. He’d even heard stories of great flying lizards that breathed fire, though these were the things usually told to children at night. His father had occasionally delighted him with desert tales, and the giant lizard stories had always been his favorite.

On the day of their arrival Gewey gathered his belongings and went on deck to wait for Aaliyah. He had decided to wear his elf clothes. They were cool, and might also keep the sun at bay. It was just before nightfall and the air was unusually mild. He had hoped some of the crew would be joining them – the idea of just he and Aaliyah alone braving the desert sands unsettled him – but she had explained that the crew’s place was aboard ship. However, should they need help, she could certainly call them.

The small boat they had used at the beginning of their sea crossing had already been lowered into the water. The water was calm with a pale green tint, unlike the deep, rich blues he had seen before. The crew took turns in bidding him farewell and good luck. He knew he would miss their good humor in the days to come, especially if what he had heard of the desert was true.

Gewey saw Aaliyah approaching from the main cabin. She was dressed in a pair of loose-fitting tan trousers and tunic, together with a pair of short leather boots.  On her belt were two long daggers. Her hair was tied in a tight braid that danced to and fro as she moved. One of the crew followed close behind, carrying her pack.

“Are you prepared?” she asked Gewey, taking her pack and slinging it across her shoulders.

He nodded. After they’d climbed down the ladder into the boat, Aaliyah channeled the flow as before, sending the craft speeding forward. It wasn't long before Gewey could make out the dunes just beyond the shoreline. Even from so far away he could see that they were massive, and tried not to think about how hard it would be to walk among them. Then they were at the beach edge. The waves lapped curiously against the small boat as the craft slid ashore. They gathered their packs and Gewey checked his sword. There was no driftwood about, so they pulled the boat to the base of the dunes.

“With luck, the tide will not rise this high,” said Aaliyah. “Otherwise we may be forced to swim back to the ship.”

“What do you...?” he began, but stopped when he spotted Aaliyah's mischievous grin. “You're funny.” He looked up at the dunes and sighed. “I assume you know where to go from here.”

“I know what direction to take,” she replied, “but not the exact whereabouts of our destination.”

Suddenly she stiffened and her hands shot to her daggers.

Gewey instinctively drew in the flow of the earth. At once he knew what had alarmed her. He could sense at least fifty humans on the other side of the dune. He could feel them creeping up the slope, and hear the sounds of their swords being drawn and arrows being notched. “Nomads,” he whispered. “My father told me stories about them.”

Aaliyah drew her daggers. “Whoever they are, they intend us harm.”

How she could tell that, Gewey had no idea, but he was not about to question her. He freed his sword and let the flow rage through him. He could feel it flowing through Aaliyah as well, but could not tell if she was drawing it from earth or air.

“Pay heed, and do not lose focus,” she commanded. This brought Gewey back to attention. “When they crest the dune, follow me.”

Gewey crouched ready to spring, his knuckles white around his sword. Then, from a hundred yards to their left he heard the snap and twang of bowstrings, followed by the thin whistle of arrows flying. He looked skyward, fearing that a shower of arrows was about to rain down on them. But they were not the targets. A dozen nomads screamed out in agony as the arrows struck home. Gewey reached out to find the source, but could sense nothing. Another volley zipped through the air, and more men fell.

“What should we do?” asked Gewey.

“We hope that whoever aids us is not doing so to keep the spoils for themselves,” she replied. “I cannot tell who or what they are.”

He shook his head. “Nor can I.”

The nomads were scattering like ants, some dragging the wounded, others in a full run down the dune, completely abandoning the attack. After a few minutes there was only the sound of the sea and the rustle of the wind.

Aaliyah tapped Gewey's shoulder. “Should we be attacked, drag the boat to the water.”

“What will you do?” he asked. He was not about to let her fight alone.

She held out her palm and a tiny ball of flame appeared above it. “I will be showing them that arrows are of little use.”

It was then a thin figure appeared atop a dune one hundred yards to their north. In its right hand it held up a bow, and in its left a quiver. Gewey could hardly believe his eyes.

“Elves,” he whispered. “Here in the desert.” For the first time Aaliyah looked surprised and uncertain. “You didn't know?” he asked.

“That there were elves here?” She shook her head slowly. “No, I did not. But I am grateful to see them. Unless I am wrong, that is not a gesture of aggression.” She raised her hand, returning the greeting. “Still, mind what you say. Do not tell them who I am. Or, more importantly, who you are. If they are like the other elves of this land, you being human may be enough on its own to anger them.”

The elf made his way deftly down the dune, slinging the quiver over his back as he descended. He was dressed in white trousers and shirt, and high boots made from a material Gewey had never seen. It was like leather in its thickness, but clung like cloth, and was just as pliable. At his side hung a long, curved saber attached to a thick tan belt. His cropped blond hair was shaved to the skin on either side of his head. His face was obscured by a thin piece of cloth wrapped just below the tip of his nose and also around his forehead, but Gewey could see that the skin around his eyes was pale white.

“Have you ever seen an elf like this?” asked Gewey.

It took a moment for her to answer. “You have more experience with elves than I. I only know those of my own land, and none are like this one.”

He strode up with amazing grace and speed, seemingly unaffected by the deep sand. “How lucky you are,” he called when a few yards away. “Had we not been aware that the Soufis were near, you would now be slaves - or worse.” He removed his face covering, revealing a broad smile. He looked young, though Gewey knew that when it came to elves, appearances could be deceiving. “I was not aware that elves from the west journeyed to the desert,” the newcomer told them. He laughed. “Or that they preferred the company of humans.”

Aaliyah stepped forward. “I am Aaliyah. This is Gewey.” It was the first time Gewey had heard her use his name. He cracked a smile. “If we have trespassed....”

The elf held up his hand. “One cannot trespass in the desert. They can only step unwisely, as you have done.” He turned his head and let out a high-pitched whistle. “But fortune smiles on you. Now you are our guests, rather than Soufis slaves.”

Twelve more elves appeared atop the dune.

“We thank you for your assistance,” Aaliyah said, bowing. “And are grateful for your hospitality. We have traveled far.”

“Though obviously not alone.” The elf glanced at their boat. “You did not come here in that. Will the rest not join us? We have never seen elves from the west, and would enjoy knowing them. We have heard of their hatred of humans - a tale clearly not true. We would be pleased to have as many of your comrades as care to come.”

“You don't hate humans?” asked Gewey.

He threw his head back in laughter. “Hate? We have few dealing with humans. Why would we hate them? They do not trouble us. Most beyond the heart of the desert do not even know we are here. The humans that choose desert life keep to their own ways, and we have respect for one another.” He glanced at the dead Soufis. “Well, there are some that we are not so fond of.” He placed his hand on his chest. “I am Pali. And I welcome you.” He spun around. “Come. The nights are cold and my belly is empty. Our camp is not far.” He paused. “That is unless you would rather brave the night alone.”

Without waiting for a reply, Pali strode off in the direction of his companions. Gewey and Aaliyah followed as best they could, but the deep soft sand hindered their steps. Soon they were many yards behind, but Pali didn't slow his pace. When they finally reached the dunes where Pali and his companions awaited them, Gewey was already dreading their trek. Days of wading through sand was not going to be easy.

The other elves were dressed in the same fashion as Pali, though the three females kept their hair in lengthy braids rather than short and shaved like the men. It struck Gewey that their skin was just as pale as Pali's. How this was possible in such a climate, he couldn't guess. Pali introduced them, and each elf greeted him and Aaliyah in turn. They all had the same cheerful expressions and seemed more than pleased to have them along.

“We can be at our camp in less than an hour,” said Pali. “We move fast across the sands, but we will slow our pace as you are clearly not accustomed to the terrain.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey.

Pali led them between the dunes, twisting and turning until Gewey was certain he would be lost without their guidance. By now the sun had nearly disappeared. The soft orange glow of twilight reflected on the yellow sand, making the world seem surreal and unnatural. The elves began singing loudly, and though Gewey didn't recognize the tune, the words and images were easy to understand. Mostly they were about traveling in the desert with friends, or living a life free from troubles. Aaliyah remained quiet and expressionless as walked close by Gewey's side.

Just as Pali had said, an hour later they rounded a large dune and Gewey spotted several palm trees in the distance. He could hear the sound of voices laughing and talking. They arrived not a moment too soon. The temperature was already beginning to plummet uncomfortably.

“Don't worry,” said Pali, noticing Gewey rubbing his hands together. “Soon a warm fire and a hot meal will cure your chill.”

As they approached the camp Gewey could see about twenty elves scattered about a small oasis. The scent of campfires mingled with the pleasing aroma of spiced meat. A cacophony of boisterous greetings rang out, followed by murmurs of curiosity as the camp noticed Gewey and Aaliyah.

“These are our new friends from the west,” Pali announced. “They will be joining us for as long as it pleases them to do so.”

He turned to Gewey and Aaliyah. “Feel free to explore what little there is to see here.” He pointed north to an area behind the fire furthest away from them. “There is a small spring just over there. I only ask that you use it sparingly. It's a slow spring, and takes several days to replenish itself.” He inhaled deeply. “I can tell you are accustomed to bathing. I'm sorry to say that water is too precious in the desert to be used in that way.”

Gewey sniffed the air. “You seem clean to me.”

Pali laughed. “I didn't mean to say that we don't clean ourselves. Of course we do. Just not by the same means. If you wish I can show you.”

“Perhaps later,” said Aaliyah. “For now, a meal and your company will be sufficient.”

“Our meal will be ready soon,” said Pali. “Until then, you may find a place by a fire.” He stopped a passing elf and whispered in his ear. “I will have wine brought to you right away. But now I must tell our Sand Master about the encounter with the Soufis.”

Aaliyah and Gewey found a vacant spot near one of the fires next to six elves. The much-needed warmth lifted Gewey’s spirits and he was quick to introduce himself. Aaliyah was not as forthcoming, at first choosing only to say her name and nothing more. It was clear to Gewey that something was troubling her. The elves, two women and four men, greeted them both warmly all the same.

“I'm Dreta,” said a short, thin, dark-haired woman. “How lucky we are that you chose this fire to warm yourself. We'll be the envy of the camp.”

The rest eagerly called out their names in turn - the other female introduced herself as Freda. Then came Hali, Ghenti, Deransil, and Freuli.

“How is it that your people came to live in the desert?” asked Gewey.

“Some legends say that we were exiled thousands of years ago for protecting humans from slavery,” said Dreta. “Others claim that we were put here by the gods as punishment for defying their will.” She shrugged. “But who knows what the truth really is. Our people belong to the sands now, and this is our home.”

“So you never go west?” asked Gewey.

“No,” said Dreta. “Why would we? As I said, this is our home and we love it dearly.”

Gewey couldn't imagine living in such a desolate place, let alone loving it. “But wouldn't life be so much easier away from the desert?” he asked.

The elves burst into laughter. “I doubt life is easy no matter where you live,” said Dreta. “But still, we live a good life. The sands have made us strong, and through that strength we have become one with the Creator. No. There is no other life for us.”

“And if you could learn the real reason why you are here?” asked Aaliyah. “What then?”

“What does it matter?” Dreta shook her head and grinned. “This is where we are, and this is where we'll stay. You would be hard pressed to find any among us who desires to leave.”

Aaliyah leaned forward. “And if someone did?”

“We do not hold our people captive,” Dreta replied. “If anyone wishes to leave, they are free to do so. It has always been our way.”

Just then Pali joined them carrying, two bottles of wine. “The Sand Master is in a foul mood now.” He passed a bottle to Gewey and opened the other himself. “She was hoping the Soufis would stop venturing this far south after what we did to them the last time.” He turned up the bottle and then passed it Dreta. “We must have killed fifty of them.”

“Why would they come then?” asked Gewey.

“For slaves,” he replied.

Aaliyah stiffened. “They take elves as slaves?”

“Of course not,” said Pali. “But there are several small human settlements, and a few nomadic tribes in this region. They raid these and take what they want.”

“And you protect the humans?” asked Aaliyah.

“We try,” Pali replied, casting his eyes downward. “But we cannot be everywhere at once. And the Soufis are clever.” He looked up and his smile returned. “But enough tragedy. I am curious; why have you journeyed so far?”

“We seek a very special place,” said Aaliyah. “A temple of sorts. I know it is in this area, but I’m not sure exactly where. It is urgent that we find it.”

Pali thought for a moment. “There is only one place in the southern desert I know of that would hold interest. But I advise you to abandon the idea. It is an unnatural place - evil lurks there.”

“What do you mean?” asked Gewey.

“It is a place where the shadows live.” He wrapped his arms. “We have not been there in many years. But those who went did not return.”

Aaliyah refused the bottle when Gewey offered it. “Can you tell us how to get there?”

“Yes,” said Pali. “But it is some distance from here, and you are not accustomed to the desert. I doubt you would make it alone.”

“We are stronger than you might think,” said Aaliyah.

Pali chuckled lightly and shook his head. “If you mean you can steal life from the earth, that will do you little good.”

Gewey could see that Pali's words bothered Aaliyah. “What do you mean  - steal?”

“Our people once drew such power to control and dominate,” he explained. “Now though, to us, using it is unthinkable. We believe the sands live, and we would never take life from them for our own selfish needs.”

Gewey understood Aaliyah’s apprehension. “So you consider it a crime?”

Pali laughed loudly. “A crime, no. We have few laws beyond murder. But it is...immoral.” He grabbed Gewey's shoulder and gave it a fond squeeze. “But don't worry. We do not judge the ways of others, so long as they do not hurt our people or our friends.”

“That is good,” said Aaliyah. She relaxed noticeably.

“You didn't think we would extend our hospitality only to do you harm, did you?” This brought another round of gay laughter. “You should spend more time among us. That is, if I can convince you not to complete your quest.”

“Sadly, it is a matter of great importance,” said Aaliyah. “We would not ignore your warnings if it were not so.”

Pali sighed heavily. “The Sand Master will not take you there.” He put his hands on his knees and pushed himself to his feet. “But I will. Though I can only take you to the edge of your destination, I will not have new friends brave the desert alone.” He took one more long drink from the bottle before adding quietly to himself: “And I thought the Sand Master was in a foul mood before.” With that he left.

Gewey watched him walk away. “What is a Sand Master?” he asked the others.

This time it was Ghenti, a broad shouldered elf with a hawk like nose and piercing gray eyes who spoke. “The Sand Masters are our guides in the desert. They know the sands better than anyone. Though we can all navigate our way, the Sand Master is able to find the easiest trail, nearest water, and nearest shade with barely a thought. When an elf turns eleven, the child is blindfolded, taken deep into the desert, and left alone. If the child finds its way home, training begins as a Sand Master.”

“What if the child doesn't make it?” asked Gewey, afraid to hear the answer.

Ghenti met Gewey's eyes. “Then the child dies.” His tone was harsh and low. He didn't look away for several seconds, then slowly his face broke into a smile. The others began to giggle and smirk. “We bring the child home, of course.”  He tossed Gewey the bottle, then addressed his comrades. “I do believe the boy thinks us savages.” His tone was teasing and light, as were the voices of agreement from the others.

Gewey felt foolish and embarrassed, but forced a smile.

Soon after this, the meal was ready. Aaliyah and Gewey ate and talked with their new friends for a few more hours. From time to time a fresh face appeared by the fireside, eager to meet the strangers from the west. The conversation kept away from serious matters, and though Aaliyah seemed more at ease than before, Gewey could tell that something still bothered her.

Just as they were about to settle down to sleep, a short, stout elf woman with deep brown hair and careworn eyes approached. Unlike the cheerful expressions held by the others, her demeanor was grim. She sat across from Gewey and Aaliyah, crossing her legs and studying them for several minutes before speaking.

“I am Weila, Sand Master,” she said finally. “Pali tells me that he is to lead you to the Black Oasis.”

“If that is the location of what we seek, then yes,” said Aaliyah, “though he did not call it that.”

“I assume he has warned you of the dangers?” she asked.

“He has.”

“Then you should also know what he does not,” she continued. “The Oasis was always a queer place, but in the past few years a new evil has arrived there.”

“I did not know....” said Pali.

“Of course, you didn't,” snapped Weila, cutting him off. “You only think you know everything.” Her stone gaze made Gewey uneasy. This was clearly a woman to be reckoned with. “You are strangers here.” Her eyes drifted to Aaliyah. “And though you are an elf, we are not the same. Certainly, you have sensed it. Your kind steals life from the Mother. We do not, and that leaves you blind to our presence.”

Aaliyah started to respond, but Weila held up her hand.

“You cannot deny that it has caused you concern,” she continued. “I can see it in your face. But our way has kept our people alive and strong for many generations. If you go to the Black Oasis you will do so alone, and the creatures that now haunt it will know you are coming.”

“If you cannot draw power from earth, air, and water, how can you know this?” asked Aaliyah.

Weila sneered. “You think us unaware of these powers simply because we do not use them? You are blind to us, not us to you.” She leaned forward. “You will face an enemy there with no fear and no remorse. It will not hesitate to destroy you.” Her eyes shot to Pali. “Or anyone with you. I will allow Pali to guide you, but you must swear to me one thing.”

“What is that?” asked Aaliyah.

“Once you come to the edge of the Oasis, you cannot allow Pali to continue.” Her face became strained. “Swear it! No matter how much he pleads.”

“I told you, mother....” Pali protested, but another glance again silenced him.

Aaliyah nodded with understanding. “I swear to you, he shall guide us only as far as the edge, and no farther. And though you may feel my use of the powers is wrong, I also swear that I will use them to keep him safe.”

“I do not fear for my son in the open desert,” she replied. “But I thank you.” She leaned back. “I know I must appear hard and inhospitable to you. But I assure you, I am not.”

“You have no need to explain,” said Aaliyah. “I too am responsible for the lives of others, and understand the need for caution when it comes to the safety of my people.”

Weila's countenance softened. “Then I shall let you rest. Tomorrow you will get proper clothing for your journey.”

Aaliyah and Gewey bowed as the Sand Master rose to her feet.

“That went better than I thought,” remarked Pali.

“You're lucky to have a mother who cares so much,” said Gewey. He thought of his own mother and her absence from his life. “Mine died when I was very young.”

“I am sorry to hear it.” Pali cocked his head. “You share much with our kind. I see that you are accustomed to the company of elves. That is good to hear. Most of what we have heard about the west are stories of hatred and war.”

“The stories are true,” said Gewey. “But things are changing.”

They sat up for a few more minutes, then bedded down for the night.

Chapter 12

Kaylia awoke screaming and crying uncontrollably. Linis and Theopolou were at her side within seconds.

“It's gone!” she cried. “It's gone!”

Theopolou pulled her close. “What's gone?”

It took her a moment to stifle her sobs. “My bond with Gewey. It's gone!”

Theopolou closed his eyes and breathed deeply. He placed his hands on her head. “It is not gone. It has been somehow blocked.”

At that moment Nehrutu approached. “Is everything all right?” His shimmering red pants and shirt, along with his effortless regal movements, made him easy to recognize. As graceful as the elves of this land were, they appeared awkward by comparison.

Kaylia tried to rise, but Theopolou held her fast. Her eyes burned. “Aaliyah is behind it! I know she is!”

“What has happened?” asked Nehrutu.

“I believe Aaliyah may have somehow blocked the bond between Kaylia and Gewey,” Theopolou explained. “At least, that is the only explanation I can imagine.”

Nehrutu leaned down and placed his hand on Kaylia's shoulder. His eyes closed for a full minute. “Yes, she has,” he confirmed.

“That witch,” Kaylia hissed.

“Can you undo what she has done?” asked Theopolou.

“I could - perhaps,” Nehrutu replied. “But I will not.”

“Why?” Kaylia screamed. “Why will you not help me?”

Nehrutu sighed. “Aaliyah has done this, and she has her reasons. It is not for me to interfere. Take comfort that she did not break your bond completely. She is certainly strong enough.”

“But why?” asked Linis. “What purpose does it serve her?”

Nehrutu thought for a moment. “The only reason would be to help Shivis Mol. If the bond hindered his training, she would not hesitate to block it. I would do the same.”

Kaylia's anger boiled over. Pulling away from Theopolou, she jumped to her feet and stood only inches away from Nehrutu. “And if you did, even the powers of the Creator would not save you. Nor would they save Aaliyah, if she were here.” Tears welled in her eyes as the pain of Gewey's absence grew.

Nehrutu's face was expressionless. He met her eyes unflinchingly. “Then it is both fortunate that I did not do this, and that she is not here to face your wrath.”

Linis gently took hold of Kaylia's arm. “There is nothing to be done. I am certain Gewey will find a way to undo this.”

Kaylia stepped back and walked away into the darkness. Over and over she tried reaching out, but to no avail. Finally, she collapsed on the ground and wept. The vast emptiness was more than she could bear. The bond with Gewey was a fundamental part of her. It was as if it had always been there, and until that moment, she thought it always would be. For nearly an hour she wept in the darkness. Then she heard footfalls approaching. Expecting to see Linis or Theopolou, she wiped her eyes and stood. But instead, she saw Nehrutu.

“I do not want to speak to you.” Her voice seethed with hatred.

“You may change your mind when you hear what I have to say,” said Nehrutu.

Kaylia folded her arms and turned away.

“You are aware of Aaliyah's intentions toward Shivis Mol,” he said.

“His name is Gewey,” she shot back.

“As you say.” He took a step closer. “We are not all in harmony with her intentions. Particularly me.”

Kaylia turned. “And why is that?”

“Before we became aware of...Gewey,” he replied, “I was Aaliyah’s betrothed. We were to be joined.”

This took Kaylia aback. “And now?”

“Aaliyah is determined,” he said, lowering his eyes. Kaylia could see the pain in his expression. “She truly believes that it is her duty to join with Gewey, and she will not relent. That he loves you is your greatest ally. But Aaliyah is clever and powerful. She will not make it easy for Gewey to refuse.”

“What can I do?” she asked desperately. “How can I stop her?”

“You must learn to use the powers that the Creator has provided.” He took her hands and looked into her eyes. “I can help you, but only if you let me. I do not want to lose Aaliyah, and I fear I will. But if you show yourself to her as an equal, she may very well step aside.”

“How can I do this?” Kaylia’s voice cracked. “I am no seeker, nor am I an elder.”

“You have the ability inside you,” he assured her. “If only you will allow me to show you how, you will discover your true gifts. Then perhaps we can both find peace and contentment.”

Kaylia nodded slowly. “I would be grateful for your help.” She pulled away and rubbed her arms from the chill night. “How is it she simply abandoned you?”

Nehrutu gave her a sad smile. “You should not judge her harshly. She is dedicated to the well-being of our people. She looks to the needs of others above her own desires. Everything she has done has been for the good of our people - though I often wish it was not so.”

Kaylia choked back her tears. “When shall we begin?”

“As soon as possible,” Nehrutu replied. “With your fire, we should accomplish much.”

They walked back to camp together. Kaylia felt more at ease, though the loss of the bond still wrenched at her heart.

Since Gewey and Aaliyah's departure, preparations to retake Valshara had begun. Mohanisi, through the power of the flow, was able to get word to his ship and send it back to his homeland. Kaylia and Linis both remarked on the huge advantages of such communication.

The elders immediately sent messengers out to muster the elves, and to bear news of the recent events at the Chamber of the Maker. Theopolou had one of his guards take a letter to Selena in Althetas, informing her of their intent. They reckoned it would be at least four weeks before they were ready to mount a viable assault, and decided to use that time to gather intelligence on the temple occupation.

The first night of Kaylia's training was more frustrating than anything she had ever experienced before. Nehrutu took her away from the camp and sat her on a soft patch of grass.

“The earth will be first,” he said. “It is the simplest to achieve. Once you master it, you will be able to do many things that were far out of your reach before.”

“I have seen Linis and Theopolou use such power,” she said. “I know....”

“You know nothing,” he said, cutting her off, though he did not raise his voice. “The elders and your seekers have no idea of how to harness this power. In my land, elf children can do more.” He leveled his gaze. “I am at odds with Mohanisi by my instructing you exclusively. Do not make me regret this by thinking that you know what you do not.”

“I am sorry,” said Kaylia. “I will listen to your instructions.”

“Good,” said Nehrutu. “Now close your eyes and reach out with your spirit as you do through your bond. Only this time, touch the world around you.”

Kaylia tried, but could feel nothing. For hours she concentrated, still with no results. Finally, Nehrutu stood and held out his hand.

“I am sorry,” said Kaylia. “I tried.”

Nehrutu smiled warmly. “You did well.” She took his hand and he pulled her up. “Most cannot sit so long without breaking their concentration. You are using a power you have forgotten. Should you not use your legs for a hundred years, would you walk the first day?” He offered her a flask of honeyed water, which she gratefully accepted. “You will get stronger very soon. This I promise.”

Over the next three days Kaylia's frustration grew even more, but still she did not give up. For hour upon hour she continued to reach out, hoping and striving to feel something - anything.

It was on the fourth day that it happened. It was nearly time to end the lesson when it came to her. It was almost intangible in the beginning, so slight and quiet that at first she doubted it was really there at all. Then it grew stronger. Gewey had once described it as a pulse, but to Kaylia it was a heartbeat. The heartbeat of the earth.

Her eyes popped open. “I felt it!”

Nehrutu smiled broadly. “That is good. And sooner than I expected.”

“It was wonderful.” She trembled with excitement. “It was as if I could feel the living earth all around me.” She closed her eyes, but Nehrutu placed his hand on her shoulder.

“That is enough for tonight,” he said.

“But....” she began to protest.

Nehrutu's stare silenced her. “Tomorrow will come soon enough,” he said. “And I am weary.”

The next three days were like nothing Kaylia could have imagined. Though she felt ready, Nehrutu warned her against actually drawing the flow inside.

“Only see it for now,” said Nehrutu. “Hear it sing its song. Let your own heart beat with the same rhythm. Once you can do that, then you will be ready to go further.”

By the end of the third week she was ready. Drawing in only small amounts at first, little by little she increased this. Before long, her entire body was saturated with power. For the first time, Kaylia felt that she now fully understood what Gewey experienced, and the intoxicating effect it had on him.

By now the field was rapidly filling with hundreds upon hundreds of elves, with many more yet to arrive. Bellows had been erected, and the sounds of the smith's hammer echoed all over the field. The smell of war filled the air. The pavilion had been taken down and the rubble cleared away. The field was covered with tents and piles of provisions. By the time they were ready to march, their force numbered twenty-five hundred. More than enough, Kaylia thought, to retake Valshara; and this was still barely a portion of what was to eventually come.

On the morning of their departure, Theopolou addressed the elves. He’d thought long on what to say. He had not spoken of war in five hundred years, and he knew that he must inspire.

“I have received word that the High Lady of Valshara has petitioned the King of Althetas to aid us,” Theopolou announced. His voice was clear and forceful. “And he has agreed to do this. The city guard will be awaiting our forces north of the temple.”

He looked out over the gathering. “This will be the first time in our history that we have fought alongside humans. But rest assured, until the Dark One in the north is defeated, it will not be the last. I know that many will resist this notion, but the time for old hatreds has passed. We fight for more than the possession of one human temple. We will show the powers that seek to divide and destroy us the peril they place themselves in when choosing to take what is not theirs. And we do not belong to Angrääl. We will not believe their lies. We will not be played for fools. And we will not allow them to annihilate our people.”

A chorus of enthusiastic cheers rose up. Theopolou waited for them to subside before continuing. “Though our brothers and sisters on the Steppes had been brought under the yoke of the Dark One, we will not suffer the same fate. So now we march.”

He stood silent for a moment. The gentle breeze bent the tall grass, and the smell of oil and leather permeated the air. Theopolou’s final two words then broke the silence, booming and echoing all over the field.

“To war!”

This time the roar of cheers and war cries was deafening. Theopolou’s heart raced. It had been five hundred years since he had spoken words of war, and though he’d hoped he would never have to do so again, the fire in his people’s eyes told him that it was time. Time to live in the world once more. Time to fight for the right to survive. And, if good was truly destined to overcome evil, time for victory. It would all begin here.

In less than an hour the elves had formed ranks. Unlike a human army, there were no wagons and horses. No banners fluttering in the breeze. No. An elf army was marching death, fast and efficient. Theopolou, Linis, and Kaylia stood at the head, with Nehrutu and Mohanisi close behind. The rest of the elders would march among their individual tribes.

Kaylia looked back on the field to where she and Gewey had spent their first night together truly bonded.

Nehrutu touched her shoulder. “Your love will return,” he whispered.

She grasped his hand lightly. “As will yours.”

Theopolou raised his hand high. “Forward!”

It was done. The elves now marched to meet their destiny.

Chapter 13

Gewey awoke to find Aaliyah sitting alongside and looking down at him with an expression of both curiosity and understanding. His dreams had been filled with visions of Kaylia, yet somehow he knew that Aaliyah could see his dreams. “Do you think about your unorem often?” he asked.

She smiled tenderly. “It was not he who occupied my thoughts. There was another, years later.”

“What happened?” He propped himself up on his elbows.

She thought for a moment before replying. “It was best that we did not complete the bonding.” She touched his cheek. “Sometimes, what is in your heart is not what is best.”

“I don't agree,” said Gewey. “My father taught me to follow my heart, and so far it has guided me well.”

“Ah,” Aaliyah replied. “But your years are still few - at least in this world. You are a leader of both human and elf. I think, in time, you will find that you must do what is best for those you care for rather than follow your own desires.”

“I do that now,” he asserted, ignoring the remark about his youth. “I think that if I follow my heart, I will do right by them.”

“You think that now,” she said, withdrawing her hand. “But you have yet to face the burdens of leadership. You have been the student, but the time will soon come when the whole world will look to you for hope and strength. When that day arrives, then you will understand.”

The camp was already abuzz with activity. Gewey could see that their hosts were making preparations to leave. A small group of them were digging a large hole just beyond the perimeter of the camp.

“I wonder what that's for?” remarked Gewey.

“We bury anything we leave behind,” said Pali as he strode up, a small pack slung across his back and a cloth bundle in his arms. “Here, these will be better for keeping you cool.” He tossed the bundle to Gewey.

Inside, Gewey found two sets of clothes identical to those that Pali wore. He gave one set to Aaliyah, then found a private spot to change. The cloth felt cool on his skin and was far softer than it appeared. It was much like the elf clothing given to him by Theopolou.

By the time he and Aaliyah had changed, the rest of the camp was already gathering. Pali and his mother stood side by side on the edge of the oasis speaking in hushed tones. Pali smiled when Gewey approached.

“Now you look civilized,” Pali remarked approvingly. A moment later, Aaliyah appeared. She looked very much like a desert elf. “If you are ready, we have much ground to cover before sundown.”

Weila embraced her son and bowed to Gewey and Aaliyah. “I pray you a safe journey. Listen to my son. He may not be a Sand Master, but he knows the desert. He will guide you well.”

“I thank you for your aid and hospitality,” said Aaliyah. “I hope we meet again.”

Weila smiled and turned away, moving slowly toward the other elves. Pali waved a farewell to them all, which was boisterously returned with cheers and shouts. Pali pointed Gewey and Aaliyah north, and within minutes they were around the dunes and out of sight.

“Where are the others going?” asked Gewey.

“They head east to join more of our people,” Pali replied. “Our business here is done.”

“And what was your business?” asked Aaliyah.

Pali unslung his pack and pulled out a thin, blue blanket. “This.” He handed it to Gewey. “We trade with the humans in this area for spices and wool.”

The blanket was as soft as silk and warm to the touch, as if heated near a fire. “What is it made of?” Gewey asked, handing it back.

“The plant is called Trulu.” He shoved it back into his pack. “It will keep you warm on the coldest night, though I still prefer a fire for comfort. Humans tend to be more sensitive to the cold. You will be happy I brought them come nightfall. With Soufis in the area, we cannot risk lighting a fire.”

For the rest of the day they wound their way between the high dunes, with Pali occasionally climbing to the top to take a look around. The sun was brutally hot, and Gewey's legs burned from trudging through the soft, deep sand. After only two hours he drew in the flow to give himself enough strength to continue. To his great relief, Aaliyah caused a cool breeze to follow them, making the heat more bearable. This caused Pali to take notice.

“My mother would be very displeased,” he remarked. “But I must admit, it is a useful skill.” He glanced at Gewey. “I was unaware that humans could also steal life from the earth. Perhaps the humans of the desert have forgotten such things.” Receiving no reply, and seeing Gewey's sudden unease, he shrugged. “It matters not.”

They stopped only once to rest and did not eat. By sundown, even with using the flow, Gewey could still feel the tightness in his legs. He almost dreaded the evening when he would release it and the pain would set in. Once darkness began to fall they found a high dune and climbed up onto it to make camp.

Pali distributed the blankets and some dried meat. “I know you may be accustomed to more frequent meals, but in the desert a full stomach will cause your gut to knot.” He smiled at Aaliyah. “Though, with such a soothing wind at our backs, perhaps tomorrow we will have a small midday meal.”

Just as Gewey feared, the moment he released the flow, the pain in his legs struck hard. He moaned with discomfort.

Pali laughed. “It will take some time to build your strength.”

Aaliyah leaned over and placed her hands on his aching legs. Gewey could feel the flow rushing in and the pain immediately subsided.

“Thank you,” he said. For once he did not feel shy at her touch. “My father told me stories as a child of terrible creatures that roam the desert. Some I can hardly believe.”

Pali tilted his head and grinned. “There are all manner of beasts on the sands. But most will leave you alone, as long as you do the same.”

“What about the giant lizards?” asked Gewey.

“Your father must have listened to an elf lore master to have heard such stories,” said Pali. “If they exist, they must be in the North West canyons where no human or elf roams. I have never seen such a creature here, and there are few places among the dunes I have not traveled.”

Gewey couldn't help but be disappointed. “What about wolves?”

Pali nodded. “They are very real. Though not as perilous as people believe them to be. They will not trouble you as long as you have a companion with you, and even an elf does not wander the desert alone. Not even a Sand Master.”

They stayed up and talked for another hour. Aaliyah kept quiet, preferring to listen. The wind brushed across the dune rhythmically, but Gewey found the blanket to be more than adequate for keeping out the cold. Soon he felt himself drift.

Even as his breathing grew deep and steady, he was woken again by a low grumble. He rose quickly to see Pali and Aaliyah already on their feet with weapons drawn. Reaching down, he freed his sword, at the same time filling himself with the flow.

“What is it?” Gewey whispered.

“Wolves,” Pali replied in a low tone.

“I thought you said they didn't bother people,” said Gewey. He closed his eyes and listened. At once he sensed them. Six beasts, all as large as ponies, were slowly circling the dune. The feral growls rose, causing the hairs on the back of his neck to stand up.

“They don't,” said Pali. “There's something wrong. I have never heard of them preying on anything but a lone traveler. And even that is rare.”

“Do not fear,” said Aaliyah. She drew in the power of the air. A small ball of flame burst to life above her head. “I have faced fierce beasts in my lands, yet I still live.”

“They go for the throat,” warned Pali. “Stay low.”

No sooner had he spoken than all six rushed up the hill at once. Their speed made a Vrykol seem slow by comparison, and their immense paws appeared to glide effortlessly across the sand. The flame above Aaliyah flew away from her and exploded, engulfing the leading wolf in white-hot fire. It let out a high-pitched cry and tumbled back down the dune. Gewey caused the sands beneath another creature to heave skyward, but to his dismay the wolf fell back only stunned. Another jumped at his throat, and he only just managed to duck away in time. The wolf slid to a halt and turned, its teeth gnashing. Gewey quickly glanced over his shoulder. One wolf lay dead at Pali's feet; he was keeping another at bay with his long scimitar.

A flash of light illuminated the dune and Gewey heard another wolf cry out. By then the wolf attacking him had recovered. It didn't go for his throat as the first one had, instead choosing to run straight at him with cruel teeth gleaming. Gewey brought his blade down in a narrow arc, splitting its skull completely in two. Even so, its body slammed into him, knocking him from his feet. The other wolf was on him the moment he fell, bringing its deadly jaws down hard at Gewey’s neck. He raised his sword and steel met fangs. He then pushed hard with the flow to send the wolf sprawling. It landed a few feet down the side of the dune, turned, stopped and glared back hatefully.

Gewey struggled to his feet. Aaliyah and Pali were already next to him. Pali's left shoulder hung loosely at his side, his shirt soaked with blood that ran down his arm and poured off the end of his fingertips. As it continued to stare, the beast’s black eyes suddenly glowed with an unnatural green light, then it slowly backed away and disappeared into the darkness.

Pali stumbled and collapsed. Gewey caught him, gently lowering him to the ground.

Aaliyah knelt down and ripped away Pali's shirt. Blood was still pumping from the vicious bite. The teeth had sunk deep, nearly tearing his shoulder away from its socket. She closed her eyes and directed her power at the wound.

Pali tried to push her away. “No,” he protested. “You cannot.”

Aaliyah did not yield. “I swore an oath to your mother that you would return unharmed. I intend to keep it.” She looked up at Gewey. “You must help me.”

Gewey placed his hands on top of Aaliyah's and their spirits combined. The flow rushed through him, and for the first time he drew both air and earth together as she guided his energy. Pali struggled at first, then gasped, arching his back. Gewey could feel the wound close as the flow surrounded it. He had healed before, but Aaliyah's skill astounded him. In less than a minute, the wound had closed.

“We must help him to recover the blood he has lost,” she whispered. She sent the power deep inside Pali's body. It expanded and pulsed, saturating him completely. Finally, she lifted her hands and smiled. “It is done.”

Gewey stared at her in awe. He understood now just how much he still had to learn.

Pali sat up, his face twisted in anger. “What you did is forbidden. You had no right....”

“I had every right,” snapped Aaliyah. “I made a promise to your mother. And even if I hadn’t, I would not allow another elf to suffer death when I had the power to prevent it.” She rose to her feet. “I need not justify myself to you. If you prefer death, seek it somewhere else. And if you must leave us, so be it.”

Pali glared for a long moment, then closed his eyes and lowered his head. “I will not leave you. I made a promise as well.” He looked up at Aaliyah and rose to his feet. “I will guide you. But we must leave this place before the scavengers catch the scent. They can be far deadlier than even the wolves.”

The slain creatures were scattered across the top and sides of the dune, but it was the unnatural glow of the retreating wolf's eyes that still burned most in Gewey’s mind as they moved on. Pali led them east for about an hour before bringing them atop another dune. Here, they all wrapped the blankets tightly around themselves and stared into the darkness. Gewey reached out with the flow and to his great relief heard nothing.

“I am sorry I was angry,” said Pali after a time. “You saved my life. But you must understand how we feel about such things.”

“I do understand,” said Aaliyah. “And had there been another way, I would not have gone against your wishes. But I will not return your dead body to your mother when I have the means to prevent it.”

Pali smiled and chuckled softly. “No. If I were you, I suppose I wouldn't want to do that either. And if you knew her better, then that feeling would become even stronger.”

“You said that you've never seen wolves attack like that,” stated Gewey.

“No I have not.” He looked sideways at Gewey. “Nor have I seen their eyes glow green light before. Something evil has entered the sands.” He pulled the blanket closer. “Perhaps the Creator had you save me to find out what it is - and destroy it.”

“Perhaps,” Aaliyah agreed. “Still, I will not have you go beyond the border of the Oasis. From there we go on without you.”

“I go where I please,” said Pali. “Besides, it seems to me that it is unwise to camp alone. If the wolves will attack the three of us, they would certainly attack a single elf.”

Aaliyah thought hard on this. “Perhaps you are right. But if what your mother says is true, the dangers within the Black Oasis may be far worse.”

“Whatever dangers are out there,” said Pali. “I would rather face them with friends at my side.” He smiled at Gewey. “Even if those friends are human. Though I must admit, you fight like no human I've ever seen. I am certainly grateful that the Soufis are not as fierce as you.”

“I was trained well,” said Gewey.

The rest of the night was quiet, though none of them slept. They continued on their way an hour before dawn. As they walked Gewey flooded himself with the flow, listening for any signs of danger.

“We will arrive at the Oasis by sundown,” said Pali. “I suggest we wait until tomorrow before entering. I would not want to brave the Black Oasis at night.”

“Agreed,” said Aaliyah.

By late afternoon, Gewey was becoming increasingly and inexplicably anxious. It was as if an aloof presence lurked just beyond his senses. From time to time he glanced over at Pali and Aaliyah. They seemed untroubled, although alert.

An hour before sundown the dunes began to flatten and Gewey noticed a jagged black stripe peaking over the horizon. It stretched for miles in either direction, and even in the waning sun heat radiated above it, causing the air to ripple and twist. Gewey tried to use the flow to see it more clearly, but light reflected off the surface, distorting his vision.

“We're here,” said Pali. “The Black Oasis.”

“Indeed,” remarked Aaliyah.

“It's enormous,” said Gewey.

“Yes, it is,” agreed Pali. “It is twice as deep as it is wide, and so thick with trees and brush, one can hardly move. A path exists, but we'll have to find it.”

“We should stop here.” Aaliyah eyed the Oasis warily. “This is as close as I want to be at night.”

“Then we rest here and look for the path in the morning,” said Pali.

That night Gewey's sleep was troubled by a dark presence. Several times he awoke, reaching for his blade. Aaliyah did not sleep at all. She sat hugging her knees close to her chest, peering into the blackness. Only Pali slept properly, drifting off almost as soon as he lay down.

Finally, deciding that restful sleep was out of his grasp, Gewey sat down next to Aaliyah. The presence remained. “Do you feel it?” he asked.

“Yes,” she replied. “Something resides there. Something ancient. Something with fury in its heart.”

Gewey glanced over at the sleeping figure of Pali. “How can he sleep so near this place?”

She pulled the blanket tight around her. “It could be that he cannot feel it. Or...”

“Or what?” he asked.

“Or perhaps whatever lives there chooses not to trouble him.”

She shuddered. “If that is so, then it knows we are here. Either way, I am pleased our guide will be rested. I feel we will need all of our wit and strength very soon.”

Chapter 14

Theopolou led the army at a pace that would have astounded any human warlord or general. They paused briefly only once a day to rest and take a quick meal. At night they made camp alongside the roads and trails, sleeping for only a few hours, then marching on again before the sun had even broken the horizon.

Kaylia and Nehrutu continued with their lessons, though only for an hour each day. Still, she progressed rapidly, and by the third day of the march was able to allow the flow to pass through her with ease. By the end of the first week she could move small amounts of earth, and use the power to heighten her senses far beyond that of even the most experienced seeker.

Scouts brought news of Valshara preparing for a siege, with sightings of at least a dozen Vrykol roaming the area surrounding the temple. A guard of twenty men blocked the path leading up to the gates, and bowmen patrolled the ramparts both day and night. Theopolou had hoped that they might be able to enter through the rear passageway, but the latest reports told him that this had now been completely blocked off.

The army turned north to avoid coming too close to Valshara before joining with the human forces. It added an extra day, but Theopolou felt it better to hide their numbers until the last moment. The terrain became rocky and jagged, causing them to twist and turn to avoid spots where they could be ambushed.

The day before they arrived, Theopolou called a council of the elders. Nehrutu and Mohanisi joined them, as did Linis and Kaylia. Theopolou had received word that the soldiers from Althetas awaited them twenty miles north of Valshara.

“This means they will be expecting an attack to come soon,” said Chiron. “A human army is loud and easily spotted.”

“It is likely they know we are coming as well,” said Theopolou. “It is not the battle that will take them by surprise. It is the weapons we bring.” He motioned to Nehrutu and Mohanisi, who stepped forward.

“We can break open the gates,” said Nehrutu. “But from the way they are described, it may take both of our efforts. The approach is narrow and exposed, so we will need to dispose of the enemy archers.”

“Our bowmen can give you the time you need,” said Bellisia.

“I assumed so,” Nehrutu continued. “But if the gates are held by these Vrykol, we may find ourselves faced with a different problem. If they can only be slain by removing their heads, then we will lose many elves before overcoming them. The narrow passage will make our superior numbers count for nothing.”

“Let us not forget our human allies,” Bellisia reminded. “Their city is close, and they may be well supplied with siege engines.”

“I have not forgotten,” said Theopolou. “But aside from petty border squabbles, they have not made war in five hundred years. The human armies of old were cunning and powerful, but I doubt a single soldier today has ever seen true battle.” His eyes grew dark and distant. “And many of us have.”

“Still,” Linis interjected, “they are our allies, so perhaps we should wait until we meet with them before making any final decisions. Otherwise they may take it as an insult.”

“Linis speaks wisely,” said Nehrutu. “Though it is clear that Mohanisi and I must breach the gates, you would be well served to include your new allies in your planning. And as Lady Bellisia has pointed out, they are near to their home. This may provide assets we cannot yet account for.”

“Then we wait,” said Theopolou. “We will join with the humans tomorrow.”

The knowledge that they would soon be joining with humans had caused palpable tension among the elf army ranks. Many were still unsure, not having been present at the Chamber of the Maker. They accepted the word of the elders, but this did little to calm their unease. Large numbers had never even seen a human before, although all had grown up with the hatred.

That evening they halted early and slept until dawn. Theopolou wanted his army rested when they arrived. By midday they could hear the sounds of blacksmiths’ hammers ringing out in the distance. The ground had now become level and far less rocky, with even a few trees struggling out of the barren soil. When the camp came into view, Theopolou and the other elders gathered in front and called for a halt.

Moments later, trumpets blew a loud fanfare. The sound of human commanders barking orders carried over the still air as the soldiers scurried to form ranks.

“I see elves among them,” remarked Linis. “That is a good sign.”

Theopolou only nodded.

The humans formed a long line of red shields and spears. A lone banner hung lifelessly, bearing the image of a great serpent coiled around a full moon. Having formed up, the humans now remained absolutely still. Soon all was silent. Some of the elves among them stirred uneasily, but did not approach. It was Theopolou who moved first, followed closely by Linis and Kaylia.

“The rest stay behind for the moment,” said Theopolou over his shoulder.

When they were about one hundred yards away, the line parted and four figures appeared. Three of these Theopolou recognized immediately: the first as Selena, High Lady of Valshara, and then Haldrontis and Stintos, his escorts who had been sent back to Valshara. The fourth was a tall, lean man with a salt and pepper beard, deep olive skin, and piercing blue eyes. His face was wrinkled and cracked with age, but his strides were still as long and sure as a young man in his prime. He wore simple leather armor with a long sword on his belt, but atop his brow rested a thin gold crown.

“I am pleased to see you are well,” said Theopolou to Haldrontis and Stintos.

“We have been well-tended,” said Haldrontis.

Theopolou nodded, “Then return to your comrades. They will be glad to see you.” They bowed and walked on toward the elves. He turned to Selena. “I am pleased to see you again too.”

Selena smiled warmly. “And I you.” She stepped aside to allow the man next her to step forward. “May I present King Lousis Maldiva, King and Protector of Althetas.”

“I am honored to meet you, Lord Theopolou,” said the king. His voice was course and gruff, though steady and commanding. “Lady Selena speaks highly of you.” He held out his hand.

Theopolou paused a moment, then accepted, shaking hands firmly. “The honor is mine, Your Highness. I extend to you the friendship of my house, and the houses of all my kin.”

The king smiled and gave Theopolou's hand one more solid shake. “My city has welcomed elves for some time now. We are glad to extend our hospitality to as many as care to take it.”

“Sadly, we are in need of far more,” said Theopolou. His somber expression wiped the smile from the king's face. “And I fear many lives may be lost before we see peace again.”

“As do I,” the king agreed. “But perhaps spilling our blood together will remedy old fears and hatreds. If that is the price we must pay, then I am willing to pay it.”

Theopolou nodded. “Then let us begin here. Together, we shall rid Valshara of this plague that had besieged it.”

“If what the High Lady tells me is true, then this is only the beginning.” The king turned and ordered his men to break ranks. “Come, let our forces be as one. Tonight we dine and celebrate our union. Tomorrow is for war.”

“I would speak to your generals and captains as soon as it can be arranged,” said Theopolou.

“They already await you,” the king replied. “The High Lady has been mapping out the temple for us. Of course, we wanted to wait until your arrival before forming a plan of attack.”

“I thank you.” Theopolou bowed slightly. “We have assets that may save many lives, Your Highness.”

He raised an eyebrow “That's good news. We have been fearful of the approach to the gates. We hope that you have a way to lessen our enemy’s advantage. I have five hundred swords and fifty horses. More could not be spared without leaving my city and territories defenseless.”  He held his arms wide. “But that can be discussed later. Your elves have traveled far. We don't have much in the way of comforts, but you are welcome to all that we do have.”

“It is gratefully accepted,” said Theopolou. He raised his hand high, and the elf army marched forward.

“It's good to see you again,” said Selena to Linis and Kaylia. She moved in and hugged them both. “I notice that Gewey is not with you.”

Kaylia paused, her eyes suddenly sad and distant at the mention of Gewey's name. “He will be joining us as soon as he is able.”

Selena nodded with understanding. “I'm sure he will.”

The elf army halted when only a few yards away. The campground the humans had chosen was easily large enough to accommodate them, but they remained still, uncertain what to do.

King Lousis stepped forward to address the elves. “You must feel welcome. We have brought food, water, and wine enough for you all. My soldiers have been instructed to provide you with whatever you may need.”

After a nod from Theopolou, his army slowly made its way into the camp and spread out. Unlike the elves, the humans had brought dozens of wagons filled to the brim with provisions of all types. Three bellows had been erected at the north end away from the main group, and a large tent, surrounded by several smaller ones had been placed in the camp center. Theopolou told the elders to gather here as soon as they could.

“If your elders require tents, it can be arranged,” said Lousis. He led the group toward the large tent.

“That will not be necessary,” said Theopolou.

The procession of Theopolou, Linis, Kaylia, Selena and King Lousis attracted more than a few stares as they made their way through. Theopolou was thankful that this first encounter was with humans who’d had previous dealings with elves. Also, that there were already elves among the king’s men. The situation could have been far worse.

The large tent was guarded by two stocky, tough-looking soldiers, and was spacious enough for ten people to enter comfortably. The guards snapped to attention at the sight of the king. Inside, a small round table placed dead center was almost completely covered by a roughly drawn map. In the corner was a small wooden cot, together with a chest. A brass lantern hung in each corner, and two others directly above the table. In the far left corner, six chairs were arranged in a semi-circle around another small table.

King Lousis instructed the guard to bring his commanders, then offered Theopolou and the others a seat. “I must say, this has happened at just the right time.” Lousis grabbed a bottle of wine from the chest and sat down with a grunt. “I fear that if we are left on our own, we shall come under the thumb of Angrääl.”

The mention of Angrääl caused Theopolou to sit up. “Have they troubled you before?”

“I wouldn't say that,” Lousis replied, after taking a long drink from the bottle. “In fact, they have made offers of friendship in the past. But I know an ultimatum when I hear one. They all but cut off our trade with Baltria when I refused to sign a trade agreement stating that we would only ship to cities allied to the Reborn King.” He sighed. “But that is not what troubles me the most. They have made such trade bargains with many other cities all along the coast. You must understand, though my title is king, I only rule my city and the lands that surround it for fifty miles.”

“And the other cities?” asked Theopolou.

“The same,” Lousis replied. “There are twelve kings and queens from the north port of Lamitia to the Tarvansia Peninsula. We govern our territories absolutely, with no interference from the others. This has been the way of things since the Great War.”

“And if something threatens you all?” asked Kaylia.

“Then a council of kings and queens is called,” said Lousis. “Before the war Althetas ruled the whole coast of the Western Abyss. After the war ended, the cities were in turmoil. Several leaders, mostly former governors of the territories, all wanted to seize control. But instead of descending into civil war, we eventually formed an alliance of city states.”

“A wise decision,” Theopolou remarked.

“It was,” Lousis agreed. “The war was over, and no one desired more blood, so the council was forged. It has kept the peace for five hundred years. But now...”

His jaw tightened. “Now a snake has slithered its way into our midst. Men and women I once trusted are under the influence of a foreign power. That is why, for now, Althetas stands alone. Even the kings and queens who I still name as friends, and in the past would have called for aid, fear reprisal. None are as rich as Althetas, and they can ill afford to lose trade with Baltria.”

“Why did you not sign the agreement?” asked Kaylia.

Lousis' back stiffened and his eyes narrowed. “Althetas trades with who it chooses. We do not bow to the will of some tyrant in the north who clearly seeks war and havoc. Our ports and markets have always been free. And while I live, they will remain so.”

“I commend your resolve,” said Theopolou. “I can only hope that your example will show others the right path.”

“Cities in the southern region are far more vulnerable than those north of Althetas,” said Lousis. “We use the roads as much as we do our ports. But I’m embarrassed to say, your people hold the lands to the east of the southern cities, so they are fearful of traveling by land.”

Theopolou nodded. “Rightly so. But those times are now in the past.”

Lousis grinned. “That is good to hear. It will go a long way toward uniting the twelve cities when the time comes.”

The tent flap opened and three armor-clad men entered, each bearing the crest of Althetas on their chest plate. The first was tall and lean, and though clean-shaven, had a weathered and worn look much like the king. The other two were considerably younger and far broader in the shoulders, though not quite as tall.

King Lousis stood. “Ah, good. This is Lord Maynard Windcomber, war master and commander of my forces. These are his captains, Lord Brasley Amnadon and Lord Jeffos Windermere.” The commander and his captains bowed low. Theopolou and the others stood and returned the gesture.

Moments later, Nehrutu, Mohanisi, and Chiron entered. After Theopolou had made the necessary introductions, they all gathered around the table.

“The remaining elders have chosen to stay with the army,” said Chiron, before Theopolou could ask. “Though the humans here have had experience with elves - alas, the opposite is not true. They want to be near to their people in case of any misunderstandings.”

Theopolou nodded. “That is probably for the best. We can go over the plans with them later.”

“To business then,” said Lousis.

Lord Maynard leaned over the map. “I'm sure you are aware of the danger in approaching the gates. The way is narrow and protected by bowmen. Unfortunately, this is the only way in.”

“We can fell the gates,” said Nehrutu. “But not without exposing ourselves. The narrow approach makes it impossible to match their bowmen in number, and as skilled as elf archers are, our enemy need only shoot into the thick of our ranks.”

“What about the rear entrance?” asked Linis. “We were told it has been blocked. Can it be cleared?”

“No,” Lord Maynard replied. “It has been completely collapsed. But we face yet further danger.” He pointed to the path leading to the gates. “We must defend the cliffs on either side of this path. Should the enemy control these, they can simply rain down death upon us. We'd be destroyed before we came close enough to even see the temple.”

“Do you know their strength?” asked Theopolou.

“We haven't been able to get close enough yet to know their numbers,” admitted Maynard. “They have already taken six of my scouting parties. Even so, if they have the number to protect the cliffs, then we'll need to take them first. That won’t be easy. The terrain is rough and uneven. A skilled captain could make it difficult for us to dislodge them.”

“And if they are not defending them, we waste our strength,” said Linis. “We should send elves to scout first. I will lead them. No offense to the skill of your men, of course.”

“There is no offense taken,” said Maynard. “I have been told of elf seekers. But make no mistake. The men I sent were not without talent, and most were intercepted and likely killed.” He placed his palms on the table and looked directly at Linis. “The elves that came with the High Lady told me of the Vrykol. I think it must be these creatures that watch the pass. If you go, you may not return.”

Linis flashed a sinister grin. “I have dealt with the Vrykol before. If I encounter them again, there will be less for us to deal with later.”

Maynard raised an eyebrow and smirked approvingly. “I like that. I like that, indeed.” He turned to Theopolou. “You say you can smash the gates from bow range, as well as take out their archers?”

“Yes,” said Theopolou. “Without a doubt.”

“How will you do this?” asked Lousis. “I saw no siege engines with your army, and we brought none. And even if we had, the difficult approach would make them useless.”

“My kinsmen and I have the means,” said Nehrutu. “We possess skills you may not be able to understand. But rest assured, it can be done.”

Lousis looked skeptical, scrutinizing the elf. “You back up this claim?” he asked Theopolou.

“I do,” Theopolou replied. “But still we are left with our archers being bunched up and exposed.”

“I think I can help,” said Maynard. “My men can protect them with shields until they are close enough to fire.”

Chiron shook his head. “If you do that then they will be first through the gates. Those behind must wait until they move forward. You will lose many men.”

Maynard laughed loudly. “Then our foes will die by the hands of humans rather the elves. We have not marched here to stay out of the fray.”

“Then I suggest your soldiers meet with our archers as soon as possible,” said Chiron.

Maynard glanced at his captains, who nodded in return. “My men will be at your disposal.”

Other details of the battle plan were simple. Once the gates were down, they would then section off each area of the temple until it was completely secured. With the exception of the initial force of humans, the rest of the attack party would be entirely made up of elves, with the remainder of the Althetas soldiers protecting the rear. At first Maynard protested, but eventually let go of his pride in favor of Theopolou's wisdom. If Vrykol were encountered, humans would be no match for them.

After the meeting, the group dispersed. Kaylia and Linis stayed with Theopolou and found a place among his kinsman, while Nehrutu and Mohanisi found a spot far removed from the rest. At the same time, Theopolou and Chiron met with the other elders to explain the battle strategy. As a result of this, each tribe sent their best archers to meet with Lord Maynard just north of the camp to drill.

By late afternoon, barrels of wine were being unloaded from the wagons and cooking fires burned everywhere. At first the elves kept to themselves, but soon the humans intruded and forced their hospitality upon them. The elders and commanders made certain they were close at hand in case trouble broke out, but the so called ‘rebel elves’ who, like Linis, had been living among humans for some time, joined them. This went a long way toward easing tensions, and by the time the sun was beneath the horizon, the camp was completely integrated. And though the comfort level was not yet exactly one of warm friendship, it wasn’t long before stories and songs began springing up from both human and elf.

Selena invited Kaylia to join her in her tent, pitched just beside the king's. When she arrived, Selena was sitting on a chair beside a small chest, atop which sat a cup of wine. She smiled and offered the chair beside her, then filled another cup and handed it to Kaylia.

“I could see your pain when I mentioned Gewey's name earlier,” said Selena. “I thought you may wish to talk.”

“There is nothing to say,” Kaylia replied. “Gewey is on an important mission, and I worry. That is all.”

Selena leaned forward and placed her hand tenderly on Kaylia's. “I'm no elf. But I am a woman, and can tell when another woman needs help. Please....”

Selena's words and genuine concern struck home, bringing tears to Kaylia's eyes. She took a deep breath and recounted the events leading up to the march.

“I see,” said Selena, in a half whisper. “And these elves from across the Abyss - you are certain they know what Gewey is?”

“Yes,” she replied, wiping her eyes. “Though I know Gewey loves me, I still fear that she will convince him that she is the better choice.” She lowered her eyes. “I should not despair, but the loss of our bond is driving me mad. If not for Nehrutu, I....”

“Gewey is your husband,” Selena interrupted, “to use the human term. He is not hers, and never will be. What I know of Gewey tells me that his heart is true. More importantly, that heart belongs to you. If you feel that learning these powers will benefit you, then by all means do so. But if you think you must compete for his love, please think again.”

She shook her head, laughing, then squeezed Kaylia’s hand fondly. “You are the one he chose. And you chose him. That is all you need to care about. And I assure you that when he returns, nothing will have changed between you.”

Kaylia smiled. “Thank you. Your words have lifted my spirits.”

The sounds of songs and laughter drifted in from the camp.

“Speaking of spirits,” Selena remarked, “it seems as if the very first elf-human alliance is going better than expected.”

“So it would seem,” Kaylia agreed. “Though I wonder about the wisdom of wine and song on the eve of battle.”

“I think it may bring the two peoples closer,” said Selena. “Better to have an aching head and good allies than suspicions and mistrust.”

Kaylia thought on this for a moment, then rose to her feet. “Perhaps we should join them.” She held out her hand and helped Selena to her feet.

The chilly night was warmed by dozens of fires. The smell of meat and wine filled the air, mingling perfectly with the songs and laughter. By the time the meal was served, Kaylia stood in amazement at the sight of two armies – elf and human – laughing as if the Great War had never happened. Her heart filled with hope. And though her thoughts were ever on Gewey, she knew somehow that all would be well.

Chapter 15

The orange sky that came with the dawn brought with it an eerie glow that washed across the sand. Gewey thought it beautiful in a way that must be appreciated firsthand. Kaylia was the only person who would ever be capable of understanding what it looked like through his eyes - he could never describe it properly in words. Just then his heart ached from the emptiness he felt without her voice inside him.

“Keep your thoughts here and now,” scolded Aaliyah.

Pali stirred and stretched. “I see neither of you slept.” He reached into his pack, retrieved some jerky and flatbread, and shared it with Gewey and Aaliyah.

Something caught Gewey's eye; a figure was approaching from the direction of the Black Oasis. As it neared he could see that it was a human woman. Her dark blond hair was tangled and matted, and her tattered clothes were covered with dust and grime. She stumbled through the sands as if near to exhaustion until she was only a few yards away. Gewey and the others stood, but did not approach her.

“Who are you?” the woman asked weakly. She didn't meet their eyes, instead staring submissively at the ground. Cuts and bruises on her face and arms told of abuse. “Why are you here?”

“A slave,” whispered Pali. In a louder voice, he then asked: “Who is your master?”

“Why are you here?” she repeated.

“You need not fear us,” said Aaliyah. “If you wish, we shall protect you.”

Pali nodded approvingly. “Come forward.”

She didn't move. “Please. Why are you here?”

Gewey could see the fear in the woman's eyes. He took a step forward, but she jumped back, wrapping her arms around herself.

“Slavers do this to them.” Pali's face burned with fury and disgust. “They destroy their will, and torture them until they are nothing resembling what they once were.” He looked hard at Aaliyah. “This is why we protect the humans.” He turned to the woman. “Look at her. She is so afraid, she refuses to accept our offer of help. She fears what will happen to her if she tries to escape. I've seen this before - far too many times.”

“Is this true?” Aaliyah asked the woman. “Will you not let us help you?”

Tears welled in the woman's eyes “Please. I must obey my master. He wants to know why you're here.” She anxiously gripped the sides of her long tan skirt. Her light blue blouse was caked with thick patches of dried blood and filth.

“Who is your master?” asked Gewey.

The woman shook her head nervously. “Please.”

“Tell your master that our business is our own, and none of his affair,” said Pali.

The woman bowed and scurried away.

“Poor wretch,” Pali muttered sadly. “It seems we are expected. What do you suggest?”

“We have little choice,” said Aaliyah. “We must continue. They may expect us, but I doubt they are prepared for us.”

They watched the slave return to the Oasis, making a note of the point where she entered. Once she had disappeared, they cautiously followed. Gewey reached out, but his senses were deflected. The look on Aaliyah's face told him that she was faring no better.

As they neared, the blackness of the Oasis changed; enormous deep green and thick gray vines were now visible. Slick, round leaves beaded with the dense humidity hung low, some touching the moss-covered ground. Vines and thorns twisted their way through the branches, wrapping themselves from tree to tree in a never-ending web. Tiny blue flowers dotted the vines and low branches, their colors so deep and rich that one had to strain to notice them as they blended with the leaves. Each flower was cradled by a nest of black berries no larger than the tip of a child’s finger. High above the canopy, flocks of jet black birds, the like of which Gewey had never seen before, darted and swirled, landing in the tree-tops for just a moment before taking flight again.

The air was full of clinging moisture. It was in stark contrast to the arid desert, and the scent of rotting foliage left a foul taste in Gewey’s mouth. They checked the point where they had seen the slave woman enter, but could see no trail or path. Pali slowly scanned the area, then with a satisfied smile, pushed his hand against a patch of brambles. It swung back as if on hinges. Gewey could make out a narrow trail that disappeared into the blackness.

“I will lead,” said Aaliyah.

Gewey could feel her drawing in the flow and reaching out. Soon, her face began twisting in frustration; moments later she drew both of her daggers. The trail was very narrow, making both Gewey's sword and Pali's scimitar all but useless at present. He pulled out his own small dagger and continued following Aaliyah into the dense gloom of the Black Oasis.

Though Aaliyah was only a few feet ahead, even with his heightened senses he could still barely see her. Thankfully, the trail for the time being was straight and even. The ground was covered in thick moss that felt nearly as deep and difficult to walk on as the desert sand. The impenetrable trees and vines compounded the darkness, making it impossible to see more than a few inches on either side. Even the humidity was getting worse. Already his clothes were soaked and his hair hung limp. The few sounds to be heard were the drops of dew and creaking of trees, plus the occasional rustle of some small animal scuttling through the undergrowth.

Aaliyah stopped short, her back stiff and straight. “Something lurks,” she whispered. The sound of her voice barely reached Gewey.

“What is it?” he asked.

“I do not know,” she replied. “But I can feel something watching us.”

Gewey looked around. He couldn't imagine from where someone might be able to spy on them. The foliage was far too thick for a man or even an elf to pass through. He closed his eyes, breathing deeply. Then, just like an itch in the small of his back where he couldn't reach, it was there – a presence - watching. It reminded him of when he was in the Spirit Hills with Dina.

“Some say, the Black Oasis is alive,” remarked Pali. “And though I do not possess your skills, I too feel something odd.”

They continued for another half mile. Both Gewey and Aaliyah's frustrations grew as their senses faded; neither could now sense anything beyond a few feet ahead, regardless of how much of the flow they allowed to pass through them. Then they smelled it – smoke. Foul smoke. Ahead they could see the trees thin and open into a small clearing. The closer they came, the more apparent it was that this was not a natural clearing. No, this had been carved out by hand. The perimeter smoldered, and in some spots small fires still burned. The moss on the ground had been trampled flat, while at the far side the ongoing trail had been sheered wider.  Gewey and Pali put away their daggers and drew their swords.

“Whoever was here has clearly fled,” said Pali.

“Yes,” agreed Aaliyah. “But why?”

“I don't know,” said Pali. “But I'd wager we'll find out.”

Gewey listened for signs of people, but as before, his senses reflected back on him. “Well, whoever they are, there's only one way they could have gone.”

“Don't be so sure,” said Pali. “If they can survive this place, they may well have learned its secrets.”

Aaliyah nodded in agreement before cautiously moving across the clearing. The smoke lingered just above the ground, reeking like rotting earth mingling with decaying flesh. Gewey nearly vomited. As they neared the ongoing trail he spotted a dark lump spread across it a few yards further along. At first he couldn’t tell what it was, but then a cold chill ran through him when the blood-spattered face of the slave girl came into view.

“Monsters,” he fumed.

“Indeed,” said Pali.

They dragged the body into the clearing and covered her with a blanket.

“We must continue,” said Aaliyah.

Gewey nodded and said a silent prayer for the poor creature.

The ground on the trail ahead had been stripped of all life, leaving only tightly packed black earth. The trees and vines on either side had been hacked away, making it wide enough for them to walk abreast.

Aaliyah slowed their pace to a near crawl, then after about twenty yards, stopped altogether. She knelt down and examined a cut vine on the side of the trail. The second she touched it she quickly withdrew her hand and shot to her feet.

“I think I understand,” she whispered. “And if I am correct, the mystery has deepened.”

“Correct about what?” asked Gewey.

“The Black Oasis is alive,” she replied darkly.

“How do you mean?” Gewey bent down and looked at the vine. It pulsed and throbbed like an open wound.

“I mean that the presence we sensed was not those who reside here,” she explained. “It was the Oasis itself.” Her face tensed. “And whatever has cut it away like this must be strong enough to resist its wrath. This place is powerful - and angry.” She turned to Pali. “You say that none who have ventured here have ever returned?”

“Not that I know of,” he affirmed. “But then I know of no elf who has ever dared the Black Oasis. At least, none that have in my lifetime.”

“If whoever is here is so strong, why did they flee?” asked Gewey.

“Perhaps they didn't,” said Pali.

Aaliyah nodded in agreement. “I think you are right. I think we are being allowed to go deeper inside.”

“Maybe we should go back to the clearing,” Gewey suggested.

“I do not think that would help,” said Aaliyah. “We can only go forward, or leave this place.”

“Assuming we would be allowed to leave,” muttered Pali.

They continued cautiously for another half mile. Ahead, a dense haze now obscured their vision. Gewey reached out with the flow in an attempt to move the fog aside, but with no effect. Aaliyah tried as well, with the same lack of success.

As they entered the mist, Gewey immediately felt a presence wrap its spirit around him, pressing in on his mind. He was only just able to repel it and stumbled, gasping from the effort. Aaliyah placed one hand on his shoulder and wiped the beads of sweat from his forehead.

He held out his hand to steady himself. “I'm fine.” He looked into Aaliyah's eyes. “Did it try to reach you as well?”

“No,” she replied softly. “What did it feel like?”

Gewey thought about the first time Lee had entered his mind. “It was as if someone wanted to force its way inside me. I was barely able to keep it out.”

Aaliyah furled her brow. “It is good you had the strength. Though it could be useful to know what is out there.”

“Should I allow it in?” asked Gewey. The idea worried him.

“No,” she replied. “The risk is too great. But let me know if it happens again.”

At the start, the denseness of the fog only allowed them to see two or three feet ahead, and the air around them felt several degrees colder. However, to Gewey's great relief, after a few hundred yards it began to thin, though the chill remained even after the fog had cleared completely. The light that crept in from the widening of the trail now allowed Gewey to see the true color of the Oasis. In contrast to the dark, foreboding green of the exterior, the leaves here were a rich vibrant mixture of green, pale blue, and delicate lines of bright yellow. The trunks were smooth and without blemish, as if polished by skilled hands. Even the vines and brambles were less sinister in appearance, flowing in an elegant weave of life and symmetry.

Further ahead they could now see a narrow black stone archway the height of two men. Symbols of the nine gods had been carved across the face and inlaid with pure gold. Just beyond the archway, the ground had been paved with smooth red marble, veined in green and blue and polished to a mirror shine. The moment they passed beneath the arch, the forest on either side melted away like wax in a fire. In its place was a series of white marble columns the same height as the archway, all of them connected to each other by small arches of blood-red volcanic glass. To the left and right of these columns the ground had been transformed to a meadow of soft turf scattered with tiny yellow and purple flowers. This colorful area extended for more than one hundred feet before the dense trees and vines once again reclaimed the terrain.

The sun beamed down, illuminating the glass arches and sending tiny rays of red light shooting out in every direction. At the end of the path stood a forty-foot pyramid of polished bronze. The sides were smooth as glass, and the top was crowned with a blue crystal. At its base, a shallow arched corridor of black marble led to a silver door with the nine gods etched in a circle at its center.

“What is this place?” gasped Pali.

“It is a temple built to house the tools of the gods,” explained Aaliyah. “I have read of its existence, but had never thought I would see it for myself.”

Gewey shifted uneasily. “We still haven't seen whoever is in here, and it looks as if this is as far as we can go. So where are they?”

“Perhaps they await us beyond the door,” suggested Pali.

“Then I suppose there's only one thing to do,” said Gewey. He strode down the path toward the door and turned the small silver knob. Aaliyah and Pali stood, weapons drawn, just behind him.

The door opened without a sound. Just inside, a narrow passage led to a stone staircase leading down into the earth. The walls were covered with bronze plates that gave off a faint light similar to the glowing globes of the elves. As Gewey moved on the glow became brighter, extending all the way down the walls of the staircase. They descended for about thirty feet to another long hall before being faced with a dull gray stone wall.

“A dead end?” asked Pali.

Aaliyah examined it carefully.  The stone was rough and uneven, in stark contrast to everything else there, and tiny quartz crystals were embedded throughout. She reached out and gently ran her index finger over the stone, then pressed her palm flat against it. She stood there silent and still for a full minute.

“There must be another way,” said Gewey.

“Did you see one?” asked Aaliyah, irritably.

Gewey reached over her shoulder and touched the wall. Instantly, there was a bright flash of white light. When it was gone, so was the wall. In its place was another silver door. All three of them stood in amazement.

Aaliyah reached for the door, but Gewey grabbed her wrist. “Don't.”

“What is it?” she asked.

Gewey put his back to the door. “It is meant for me only. I can’t say how I know this, I just do.” He placed his hand against the door, feeling the cold metal. The pulse of the flow was everywhere, calling to him. “Don't you feel it?”

Aaliyah touched his shoulder and let her spirit flow toward his. She could feel the power calling to Gewey. But it was different. It was not the abstract raw power she molded to her will. This had form and consciousness. His eyes shot wide as she snatched back her hand. “It knows you.”

“Yes,” Gewey affirmed. “I don't understand how, but it does. I can almost hear its thoughts.”

“Hear whose thoughts?” asked Pali.

“The temple,” Gewey replied. “It speaks to me. From here I must go alone. It won't allow you to enter.”

Aaliyah took Gewey's hand. “Are you certain?”

Gewey smiled and nodded. “Yes. Don't worry. I don't sense the anger of the Oasis. But I do know that I must go on alone.”

Aaliyah squeezed his hand and stepped back. “We will await you here.”

Gewey turned and placed his hand on the doorknob. But the moment his fingers touched the metal, everything was plunged into darkness. Then came a great rumbling sound, as if the very earth was being shattered all around him. Aaliyah, Pali, and the hallway all vanished. For a moment, he was struck by fear and panic as the rumbling grew into a roar and a powerful wind rose up. It swirled around in a tempest, lifting him skyward. He let out a scream as he struggled vainly against the force. Then, as quickly as the wind had come, it disappeared again. He was beginning to fall back down. Faster and faster he fell. Unable to see through the darkness below, all he could do was grit his teeth and brace himself for the terrible crushing impact that he felt sure was to come. But the impact never arrived. Instead, amazingly, his feet landed gently onto soft ground. Gewey knelt down, expecting to touch grass, but was shocked to find what felt like polished marble. He pressed down with his finger. The surface gave way, sinking in, then reforming once he withdrew.

“This can't be real,” he said. His words echoed repeatedly, then slowly faded away. “Am I alone?”

As if in response, a small ball of light appeared just in front of him. It grew brighter and brighter until he was forced to shield his eyes from the glare. Then it dimmed, and there stood the figure of a man. He was as tall as Gewey, and just as broad. His raven hair fell carelessly in loose curls just above his shoulders. He was dressed in a long, silver robe, open at the front revealing a loose-fitting white shirt and trousers beneath. His features were sharp and angular, with a perfect symmetry that was beautiful to behold. His flawless ivory skin bore no sign of age or blemishes, and glowed with a soft radiance. He smiled as he met Gewey's eyes.

“I knew you would come,” he said. His voice was deep and soothing.

“Who...who are you?” Gewey stammered.

“You know me as Gerath,” he replied.

“God of the Earth,” Gewey whispered.

“Yes,” he replied. “And no.”

Gerath stretched out his arms. “What you see before you is merely an image. A piece of my essence left behind in this world. Left behind for you.”

Gewey eyed him carefully. “Are you my father?”

Gerath laughed. “Indeed I am. At least I am your father in the way you would understand it. I played my part in your creation.”

“Then who is my mother?” he asked. The words of Felsafell echoed in his mind. This knowledge would drive him mad. Suddenly he was afraid to hear the answer.

“I'm sorry,” he replied. “But some answers I cannot give.”

Gewey became irritated. “Then why are you here?”

“I am here to help you,” Gerath turned around slowly and bowed his head. “Many mistakes have my kind made. And you must help us atone. You must redeem us.”

“How am I to do that?”

“By mending what we have broken.” He faced Gewey again. His face bore immeasurable sadness. “We had foreseen our imprisonment,” he continued. “And we built this place. We built it so that you could one day find it. What resides within this temple will aid you and those whom you love, should you choose to follow the path put before you. But I sense that your efforts will be hindered. Something evil now surrounds you. You must face it. You must drive it out.”

“What is out there?” Gewey asked.

His eyes grew dark. “Creatures of pure hate and malice. They were sent by the one who imprisoned us. But do not fear them. You are stronger - far stronger than they can understand. Stronger than all in creation, save one.” He stepped forward and placed his hand on Gewey's shoulder. “My son.” His voice was filled with compassion and sorrow. “Of all the gods, you were chosen to right our wrongs. You are untainted by our sins and bound to this world. Your connection to this place binds your spirit to the very heart of the earth. Use that connection to attain your true power, and none can stand against you.”

“How do I do that?” Gewey felt the touch of his father. Like love, it was a tangible thing he could see and taste. Only his bond with Kaylia could compare. “Can you teach me?”

“No one can teach you this.” He withdrew his hand, reached inside his robe, and pulled out a small silver chain with a medallion the size of a gold piece attached. On it was carved the symbol of Gerath. “In a few moments I will empty myself into this. From that moment on I will cease to be, yet my power will remain. Wear it, and my strength will pass to you.”

“What do you mean, ‘you will cease to be’?” he asked.

“The part of me I left behind - its will and its mind - will be gone.” He handed Gewey the medallion. A light flashed and a table appeared beside him. On the table rested a bow, a dagger, and a staff, all gleaming white. “Take these. They are the tools of Vismal, crafted by my own hands. Give them to those whom you love and trust and your power will aid them. But choose carefully, for once given they will serve only that master.” He smiled a sad smile. “I have little else to give you. Most of what I am has been trapped by the betrayer. What you see is a shadow. But the shadow of our kind carries great power. Use that power so that you may better understand what you must do.”

“Why not just tell me?” Gewey cried. “Why not show me?”

“I cannot,” he replied. “If I do so, all will have been for naught. You must discover your power on your own. I can only say that you have begun rightly. I sense mortal teachings within you. They can give you what we never could.” He staggered back. Gewey reached out to catch his arm, but his hand passed through Gerath as though a mist. “My time is short. The moment you stepped within these walls, I began to fade. My knowledge does not extend beyond the moment I was put here, and that slips away from me with each passing second.”

“But I have so many questions,” said Gewey. “Please, I must know more.”

Gerath's form began to ripple and fade. “Know that you have your father’s love, and that I await you even now.” He gave Gewey one final loving smile. “I have only one more thing to give - your name.”

“My name?” Gewey's mind raced.

“Yes,” Gerath replied. “It is the name given to you by a father whose worst crime was to sacrifice you to a world of peril and hardship in order to undo what he cannot.”

As he faded away completely, Gerath’s final four words hung in the air.

“Your name is Darshan.”

Gewey stood in stunned silence for several moments. “Darshan,” he whispered.

He approached the table and examined the weapons. The dagger was sheathed in an ivory scabbard etched with the symbol of Gerath. The hilt was wrapped in white leather and crowned with a single diamond. The bow, short and impossibly thin, looked sure to break if drawn, though Gewey was certain it would not. The staff was as long as he was tall, with three snakes carved to coil their way up its length. No sooner had Gewey gathered these weapons in his arms than the table faded away and he found himself alone in a large, empty room. A glow radiated from bronze plates on the walls and he could see the silver door at the far end. Carefully cradling the weapons and holding tight to the medallion, he walked to the door and pulled it open. There stood Pali and Aaliyah.

Aaliyah beamed and threw her arms around him, nearly causing him to drop everything. ”Thank the Creator. When you vanished, I feared the worst.”

“We may be facing the worst,” said Gewey. “If what I was told is true.”

“What are those?” asked Pali, pointing the weapons.

“Gifts,” Gewey replied. “Gifts from Gerath.” He recounted his experience, although he left out any mention that he was the son of Gerath. He could not be sure of how Pali would react to that.

“Darshan?” asked Aaliyah, when he finished. “You are called Darshan?”

Gewey nodded. “I know you call me Shivis Mol. But have you heard this name before?”

“It means, ‘The Bringer of Knowledge,’” Aaliyah replied. “Shivis Mol is more a title than a name, given to the one who will bring healing to the world.”

Gewey shrugged. “I don't know about that. Right now, I'm more concerned about getting out of here. Gerath said that an evil resides here - one that will try to stop us.”

Aaliyah nodded in agreement. “Yes. These matters can wait until we reach safety.”

“I have heard of the legend of Darshan,” Pali interjected with a curious stare. “But if that is who you are, then it can only mean that the gods walk among us.” He looked Gewey up and down. “Is that what you are?”

Aaliyah stepped forward, but Gewey caught her arm and pulled her back. “I will not try to deceive you. Yes, I am a god. But I am not as you may think. I eat, I sleep, and I can be hurt, just like any other man. My spirit is no different than yours.” He could feel Aaliyah's muscles tensing in his grasp.

“I ask that you do not reveal Darshan's presence,” she said.

“You mustn't worry,” said Pali, smiling broadly. “I will not betray you. And you need not fear my people. They bear the gods no hatred, though you may find it difficult to convince them that you speak the truth. I admit, had I not seen you vanish and then return bearing your gifts, I would have doubted it as well. Besides, if the legend is true - and it seems that it is - then this is joyous news. It is said that Darshan will cast out the evil that plagues the sands and bring everlasting prosperity to our people.” He slapped Gewey on the shoulder. “But there will be time later to tell you of our legends. I will be coming with you when you return west.”

“You cannot,” objected Gewey.

“Oh, but I must,” Pali countered. “If Darshan has come, then it means that the elves of the desert shall be reunited with our brethren in the west.” He eyed Aaliyah. “I must see it done.”

“I swore an oath to your mother,” said Aaliyah sternly.

“I may be her child, but I am not a youth to be coddled,” he challenged, meeting Aaliyah's gaze. “If you do not allow me to come with you, I shall make my own way west.”

Pali and Aaliyah stared hard at one another for a full minute.

“Look,” said Gewey, breaking the deadlock. “We can talk about it once we're out of here.” He took a blanket from his pack and wrapped the staff, strapping both it and the bow across his back. The dagger he fastened to his belt.

“Are you going to wear the medallion?” asked Aaliyah.

Gewey held it in his hand for several seconds, tracing his finger over the engraving. Slowly he draped the chain around his neck and took a deep breath.

“Well?” asked Pali.

Gewey reached down and lifted the medallion off his chest to examine it again. “Nothing.” He rubbed it with his thumb. “I feel nothing at all.”

“Perhaps you should draw power from the earth,” suggested Aaliyah.

Gewey did as she suggested, but still nothing changed. “I don't understand.”

A loud blast from a great horn rang out. Even when muffled by the walls of the temple, the sound was still strong enough to cause the corridor to tremble. Gewey drew his sword. The narrow hall would make it awkward, but he knew that the increased ability to use the flow would be needed. He looked down the hall, but no one came.

“They await us outside,” said Aaliyah, after a few minutes. “We are trapped.”

“Maybe they want to take us alive,” offered Pali. A wicked grin crept across his face as he looked at Gewey. “But then, we have Darshan with us. I wonder if they are prepared for that?”

“My enemies know about me,” said Gewey darkly. “If they choose to attack, they know who and what they face. And they know that I bleed just like you.”

Gewey led them down the corridor and up the stairs to the door. It was still shut. The horn blasted once more, making Gewey wince. “Stay here,” he commanded before stepping outside the temple.

It took a moment for his eyes to adjust to the intense glare of the sunlight. When his vision had cleared, he saw a familiar black-cloaked figure, long curved blade in hand, standing twenty paces ahead.

“Do the Vrykol fear death?” Gewey shouted. The flow raged through him.

The Vrykol took a step forward, then pushed back his hood. “We do not.”

Gewey gasped and his eyes widened. It was not the burned, twisted features he had seen before. Instead, it was the face of an elf. Its skin was lightly tanned, and his long black hair was tied in a tight braid. His face was narrow and angular, with closely set deep blue eyes that tried to stare straight through Gewey.

“You can't be…” said Gewey. “How?”

The Vrykol smiled, as though he had not a care in the world. “My master went to great trouble in my creation, young godling. I am the first of my kind, though not the last, I assure you. I am here to offer you your life.” He chuckled. “Though I already know what your answer will be.”

“Then be gone,” said Gewey. He strengthened his grip on his sword. “Allow us to pass.”

“I'm afraid that is out of the question,” he replied. “That is, unless you surrender what was inside the temple to me. Do this, and I shall let you and your companions go free.”

“If you attack us, I will have your head,” warned Gewey.

“Perhaps,” said the Vrykol. “You may be able to fight your way out of this place. I know you are powerful. But understand that I am not alone. Ten of my more brutish brothers and sisters are in the clearing, and fifty Soufis await you beyond the Oasis. Do you think your friends will be as fortunate as you? Are they gods as well? If so, then you should ignore my offer.” He paused to pull the hood back over his head. “I await your answer in the clearing.” He turned and disappeared down the path.

The door behind Gewey opened. Pali and Aaliyah stepped out.

“What was that abomination?” asked Pali, horrified.

“They're called Vrykol,” said Gewey, still staring down the marble path to the trees. “I'm not sure what they really are, but they're fast, strong, and hard to kill. You must take off their heads to stop them.”

“I have heard stories of the Vrykol,” said Pali. “They were the assassins of the gods. But I never thought them to be anything more than a myth.”

“This one is different from the others I've seen.” Gewey looked hard at Aaliyah. “We may have no choice but to give them what they want.”

“We will do no such thing,” Aaliyah protested. “We have journeyed too far to simply give this creature what we came for.”

“I agree,” said Pali. “If these weapons are as powerful as you were told, you cannot let them fall into the hands of evil.”

Gewey thought for a moment. “Gerath told me that I must give these things to those I love and trust. And once given they only serve that master. Why then force me to give them up? They would be useless.”

“They may not be aware of that fact.” Pali suggested. “It seems that they were unable to enter the temple on their own, which is likely why they allowed us to enter unmolested. They may not have knowledge of what was kept there. And perhaps it is not the weapons he desires.” He pointed to Gewey's medallion. “If that contains the essence of a god...”

“He's right,” said Aaliyah. “You cannot let that fall into their hands. We must fight.”

Gewey straighten his back and clenched his jaw tight. “Then you should know that Vrykol can block your ability to use the flow. At least, when used directly on them. But you can still affect things around them.” He withdrew the Vismal dagger from his belt and held it out to Aaliyah. “Take this.”

Aaliyah stared at it. Finally, she reached out and asked for confirmation. “Are you certain?”

Gewey nodded. She took it from his hand, but the moment her fingers touched the weapon she cried out and fell to her knees. Gewey reached down to help her.

“Are you all right?” he asked, cradling her forearms.

Aaliyah smiled. “Yes. More than all right. You have no idea what you have given to me.” She looked around wide-eyed, as if seeing color for the first time. “It is beautiful.” She rose lightly to her feet, holding the dagger to her breast. “Gerath was right. You must choose wisely to whom you give these.”

Gewey turned to Pali, but the elf shook his head, knowing what Gewey was planning to do.

“Keep the rest and give them to those who will use them.” Pali held his sword aloft. “I cannot steal life from the Creator, but with this, I can certainly take life from the wicked.”

Gewey smiled. “Then let us meet our foes. They await an answer.”

With Gewey leading the way they headed down the path, past the columns and into the wooded trail. The surge of power through both Gewey and Aaliyah was so great that the earth shook with each step and the air roared before them.  As they approached the clearing Gewey could see a line of black-cloaked figures wielding cruel jagged blades; they were standing just a few yards from the opening. He counted ten in total. Just as they entered the clearing he spotted another Vrykol a few yards behind the others. Though cloaked, he assumed it was the one that had spoken to them outside the temple.

Gewey lowered his eyes and took a breath. “I see you hide behind the others.”

“And I see your answer is what I expected,” he shouted back. “A pity. Your friends will pay for your lack of wisdom.” He spun around and held up his right hand. “Kill them,” he ordered. With that, he disappeared down the path.

The Vrykol charged. A ball of flame burst to life exploding at the feet of three, but they moved with tremendous speed, running straight through the flames. Gewey barely had time to react before two of the beasts were upon him. Four had rushed directly at Pali, and the others at Aaliyah. He knew he had to make quick work of these two or his friends would certainly be killed. He struck at the neck of the nearest foe, but it stopped just before it was in range of his sword. The other feinted and slashed, though only close enough to keep Gewey at bay.

He charged forward, but they only fell back, darting in and out to keep him off balance. He understood the tactic. They were planning to keep him busy until the others had defeated Pali and Aaliyah. Gewey glanced over to Pali. His sword was flashing in tight arcs as he danced and spun, avoiding blows. One Vrykol lay dead, but the others were pressing in, forcing his back to the trees and vines. Aaliyah was faring a little better. Two Vrykol were surrounded by flames, their black cloaks burning brightly. Another had already lost its head. The fourth was moving to her left, swinging wildly. Gewey tried to step right to help her, but the Vrykol cut him off, and the two that were on fire stepped in between, pressing Aaliyah back.

Gewey spun around and used the flow to up-heave the earth behind him. Pali had cut the arm from another creature, but was bleeding badly from his left leg. The two creatures at Gewey’s back had already recovered by the time he’d rushed over to aid Pali. Gewey drove his blade through the chest of one of his friend’s attackers, then pulling it free, took the head of another. Pali grinned and pushed forward.

Gewey was only just able to duck and roll as the Vrykol at his back thrust their swords in unison. While still on his knees he swung his sword and took both legs off of one, leaving it helpless on the ground. Pali was still fighting two. The one Gewey had skewered had moved in to Pali's right and its blade found his shoulder. Pali cried out, but he managed to move away and open up a wound across the chest of the beast to his left. He struck again and sent its head flying. Before he could turn to face the last, a blade shot through his chest. Pali gasped and staggered forward, the blade slipping out. Blood spewed forth as he dropped to his knees and Gewey could hear the soft hissing laugh of the Vrykol.

Gewey looked over just as Pali's body hit the ground. His heart filled with rage. He rolled, bringing his blade up between the legs of Pali’s killer, spitting it completely in two. As the halves separated and fell to earth, thick, black blood sprayed out like a fountain.

Gewey’s anger continued to rage, but he knew he couldn't allow this to cloud his mind. Aaliyah still faced three Vrykol, though two had slowed considerably as they burned. He leaped to his feet and took the heads off both flaming beasts with two quick strokes. Aaliyah ducked under the other’s guard, and in a flash its head rolled off its shoulders.

The final Vrykol paused. “This means nothing.” Its rasping voice grated at Gewey's ears, fueling his anger even more. “You will not leave the desert alive.” It charged.

Gewey snarled, and his sword took the creature’s head quickly and cleanly. The instant it fell, Gewey decapitated the legless Vrykol and then rushed to Pali's body. He rolled him over only to see dead eyes staring into nothingness. Gewey bowed his head and gently closed the elf’s eyelids.

“Are you hurt?” he asked as Aaliyah knelt beside him.

“Thanks to your gift, no.” She placed her hand on the back of his head. “You did your best to save him.”

“He should not have been here,” Gewey whispered. “We should never have brought him with us.”

“He came of his own free will,” said Aaliyah. “And he came as a gesture of friendship and kindness. We would not have made it here without him.”

Even in the moment they were pausing briefly to consider this thought, a loud crackling sound, as if from a thousand campfires, suddenly filled their ears. They jumped up to see the bodies of all the Vrykol now turning hard and gray. Thousands of tiny cracks formed on their corpses, splintering like glass and then turning to dust. The ground shook and rumbled. A second later, the earth around Pali's body exploded and hundreds of thin roots shot upward before wrapping themselves over him. Before Gewey could even move, in front of his horrified eyes, the roots had pulled the elf’s body right down into the earth. Gewey fell to the ground, digging furiously with his bare hands. Aaliyah stood back, staring in wonder at the spectacle. After a minute or two of fruitless work, Gewey pounded his fists in the dirt and screamed with rage.

“What is this? What is happening?” His anguished cries were met with silence. Slowly he rose to his feet.

Aaliyah gasped and grabbed his arm, pointing a few feet away. “Look.”

A soft ball of light hovered just above the ground, expanding until it took the form of a man. Its features were hazy and unrecognizable. Its feet didn't touch the earth, and its arms were held wide.

“Who are you?” Gewey demanded.

At first there was nothing. The specter was silent and still. Then nine more figures appeared just behind it.

“We are the first born.” The voice was distant and echoed as if within a great cavern. “We thank you for our freedom.”

“I don't understand,” said Gewey.

“The creatures which we were forced to become are now gone,” it said. “We are free. And here, we are safe.”

“You mean you are the Vrykol?” asked Aaliyah.

“Yes, we were,” it replied. “Our spirits were enslaved by the evil that holds the power of the gods. The spirits of the first born turned into abomination and darkness.”

“I think I understand,” said Gewey. “You are the spirits of Felsafell's people. That's what he meant at the Chamber when he said he had to free his kin.”

At the mention of Felsafell, their lights grew brighter. “Yes. He is the last of us that walks with the living. It is good to know he has not forgotten us.”

“What of Pali?” asked Aaliyah. “What of his spirit?”

“He is safe with us,” it replied. “This place is special. The gods created it and gave it life. Now that you have driven out the sickness that has poisoned it, it can begin to heal. Your friend will stay here with us until the path to heaven is no longer barred by the one who seeks to destroy you. Only when he falls will the spirits of the dead be led to paradise. Only through his destruction can the world once again be set to rights.”

The specter’s lights began to fade.

“Wait, please!” Gewey implored. But they faded completely.

Aaliyah took Gewey's hand. “They are gone, and we should leave as well. If what the Vrykol said is true, fifty Soufis await...”

Her words stopped abruptly, replaced with a loud cry of pain as a tiny black dart struck her in the shoulder. Pulling it free, she threw it to the ground.

On the far side of the clearing, Gewey caught sight of a black cloak vanishing down the trail, harsh laughter trailing behind it. He began to race after the creature, but had only covered a few yards when he heard Aaliyah’s loud moan. He turned just in time to see her fall to her knees, her hand grasping at her wound. He rushed back to her side.

“Poison?” he asked.

She nodded, wincing.

Gewey pulled her hand away and touched the wound. It had already closed and was no larger than a pinprick. He reached into her body with the flow, seeking to expel the poison, but was forced back.

“I don't understand,” said Gewey.

Aaliyah closed her eyes and breathed deep. For a full minute she knelt motionless. “Mandrista,” she said weakly, opening her eyes. “I have been poisoned with sap from the mandrista tree. I cannot be cured using the powers of the earth and spirit alone.”

“What can we do?” asked Gewey, desperation creeping into his voice.

“I must return to the ship,” she replied. “I have the means to extract it there.”

“Do we have time?” he asked, squeezing her hand tightly.

“The poison is slow.” She struggled to her feet. “Three days. We may make it if we hurry.”

Gewey's thoughts turned to the Soufis. He needed to deal with them quickly. “Wait here. I'll take care of the Soufis myself.”

“You cannot do this alone,” she protested. “I....”

“No,” he said, fiercely. “Pali has died, and I'll not watch you die too.” Fury burned in his eyes. “We'll see how brave the Soufis are when I blast them apart and then bury their bodies in their precious desert.”

Before she could argue, Gewey tore off across the clearing and down the path. He covered the distance in only a few minutes, his legs fueled by the flow of both air and earth. The brush that lay in front of the entrance had already been pushed aside, and he could make out the figures of men twenty yards away.  He slid to a halt a foot beyond the path, his blade tight in his hand. But he had no intention of cutting his way through fifty men.

The Soufis were lined up in two loose rows. They were wrapped in thick tan robes with white turbans covering their heads. The men in the front row held long curved blades, while those at the rear carried lengthy black bows. The Vrykol stood front and center, his hood thrown back revealing his elf features.

“Did your elf mistress enjoy my gift?” he asked, laughing.

“Laugh if you want,” said Gewey. His eyes narrowed and his legs parted. “But if I were you, I'd be running.”

The Vrykol smiled. “Excellent advice. But we'll meet again, Gewey Stedding. Or should I call you, Darshan?” With that he turned and disappeared behind the Soufis lines.

The moment he was out of sight, the Soufis bowmen notched their arrows and fired. Gewey raised his hand and a blast of wind halted the arrows in mid-flight, sending them falling harmlessly to the ground. The Soufis retreated a step, looking confused and murmuring with doubt and fear. Before they could decide on their next action, Gewey let loose a great ball of flame into the heart of their lines. Twenty men fell instantly, while several others rolled screaming in the sand trying to put themselves out. This was enough to send the rest scattering. But Gewey was in no mood to be merciful. He sent another flame streaking across the ground. The sand crackled and popped as the flames surrounded the remaining Soufis. He tightened the circle forcing them together. A few tried to run through the fire, but were roasted alive before they reached the other side.

“Die!” Gewey roared, and closed the circle.

Cries of pain and desperate pleas for mercy went unheard as the Soufis burned. The flames grew hotter and taller until they reached fifty feet in the air. The voices of the Soufis were silent. Only the roar of Gewey’s anger could be heard.

As he allowed the flames to subside, Gewey scanned the area for the Vrykol, but he was already gone. The burned stumps of the Soufis dotted the sands, and the sickly sweet smell of charred flesh filled the air. A great circle of pale green glass had replaced the desert sand. It glittered splendidly in the desert sun, its beauty in sharp contrast to the carnage that its creative force had wrought.

Gewey turned away and ran back to Aaliyah. By the time he reached the clearing she had already dressed her wound and sheathed her knife. Her face turned grim when she saw Gewey.

“They are gone?” she asked.

Gewey relaxed his muscles and nodded. “Yes. They’re all....gone.” He took her hand and led her from the clearing.

The image of the flames still remained fixed in his mind. As they approached the entrance to the Oasis, he hesitated. Gewey didn't want her to see what he had done. He almost held her back, but she moved past him and stepped out onto the sands. For a moment she stood silently surveying the carnage. Timidly, he followed her out.

“All gone, indeed,” she remarked.

“I was just....” Gewey paused. “I was just so angry.”

“The wrath of a god is truly not to be taken lightly.” She turned to him and smiled. Her face was awash with pity and understanding. “But you did what had to be done.”

“I know,” said Gewey. “This is not the first time I've killed. It’s just that I never imagined unleashing such power.” He held up the medallion around his neck and examined it. “Only the gods know what I can do when I learn to use this. I fear that it may be too much power for me to control.”

“I doubt it,” said Aaliyah. “The one you must vanquish wields more power than you can imagine. You will need this, and more.” She glanced a final time at the smoldering corpses. “We must go. My time grows short.”

With that they headed off in the direction of the shore, Gewey desperately hoping that they would make it in time to save Aaliyah's life. As they traveled he swore an oath to kill the Vrykol who had poisoned her.

And before he killed it, he would make a special point of teaching it to fear death.

Chapter 16

Frost covered the bleak landscape as Lee and Jacob rose from their tent, shivering and rubbing their arms. The bitter cold of the far north was not something even a Hazrian Lord could ignore. Fires already burned around the camp, and the scent of bacon wafted on the frigid air. Darius was already up: something most uncharacteristic for the fat merchant. He was kneeling down by a fire, cradling a cup of hot coffee in his gloved hands. Lee and Jacob joined him.

“Are you sure about this?” asked Darius. “It seems foolish to me.”

“I'm sure,” Lee replied. He grabbed the tin kettle suspended over the fire and poured himself a cup. “If what I hear is true, we will gain passage north if we join the army. All new recruits are sent to Kratis for training and deployment. And that's where we need to go.”

“I haven't asked you your true business,” said Darius. “And I won't. But you seek the palace of the Reborn King, it would seem.  If you do this, you will be caught, and you will die. You don't want to know the stories I've heard about what they do to spies.”

“I can imagine,” Lee said, soberly. The thought of his son suffering torture caused his stomach to knot. “Still, we must try.”

“Well, if I cannot dissuade you,” said Darius, “at least allow me to help you.” He reached into his coat and pulled out a piece of folded parchment. “It's a letter of endorsement stating that you have been in my service for the past five years. I am known in these parts, so it will pass scrutiny.”

Lee took it and smiled gratefully. “Yes. This will certainly help us.”

They ate, and then packed their gear. Fennio and three others were waiting for them by the road. Lee knew that he was taking a risk in traveling with these men. Should his and Jacob’s cover story be questioned, any of them could say that they had only recently joined the caravan. If that happened, the endorsement letter would become a liability instead of a help.

Darius was also at the roadside, holding a number of small purses. “All right, lads,” he said. “Don’t ever say I'm not a fair man.” He handed out the purses to the men. The jingle of coins sounded as they bounced them up and down. “Just don't go counting it yet. You've been paid already, so wait until I'm gone before complaining about how little extra is there.”

“Thank you for all your help,” said Lee. He shook the man’s hand firmly and smiled.

Darius laughed heartily. “And thank you for saving my life.” He waved his hand in a gesture of dismissal. “Now go. I have a business to run, and wine to drink.” He turned away and strode back to his tent.

The recruiting station was three miles away at the Whiterun Pass garrison, just south of the city itself. It took them only an hour to arrive, but the town could be seen from more than a mile away. Tall buildings of burgundy stone rose from behind thick granite walls. Lee was impressed. Cities and towns this far north were usually little more than trading posts. In fact, Hazrah was by far the largest city north of the Razor Edge Mountains, and that was small compared to Baltria or Althetas. Clearly, Angrääl had been hard at work.

The garrison was impressive as well. It resembled an ancient fortress, very similar to those shown in paintings Lee had hanging in his house back in Sharpstone. The twenty-foot high curtain walls were smooth and seamless, as if carved from a single block stretching out at least two hundred feet, left to right. In the center, an arched iron gatehouse door, covered in vicious spikes, was closed. At each corner of the walls, looming another twenty feet higher, were round towers with dozens of arrow slits for defending archers to fire through. Capping every tower was a domed turret manned by three watches. From what Lee could see, there were at least two dozen more archers and pike-men patrolling the length of the walls between each turret. Flapping in the strong north wind atop all four domes was the now familiar banner of Angrääl.

A long table had been set up just outside the gatehouse door. A soldier stood at each end, and a slightly built man in a red linen suit and thick wool coat was sat behind it taking information from four new recruits. Lee, Jacob and the others filed in behind them. Each recruit was told to wait a short distance away from the table after their information had been taken.

When it was Lee's turn, he handed the recruiter Darius’s letter. The man examined it for a moment, then sighed.

“More sell-swords,” he muttered. “Do you have any military experience?”

“No, sir,” Lee replied. “But my nephew and I are both good with a blade. We're from....”

“I don't care where you're from.” He glanced up and shook his head. “I'm sure you are both eager to join up, so we'll make this quick.”

After registering both Lee and Jacob under the names given in Darius’s letter, the recruiting officer wrote down what skills they listed. After he finished this, he had them sign a large parchment and instructed them to wait with the others. For hours they just sat there huddled together trying fight off the cold as dozens more men came to join. By late afternoon their numbers had swelled to nearly one hundred. No offer of food or drink had been made, so Lee and Jacob shared what little they had with Fennio and the rest of Darius' former guards, who had clearly not thought to bring anything for themselves.

An hour before sundown, the recruiter stood and announced that anyone else who wished to join must return tomorrow. With that, the two guards picked up the table and followed the man into the gatehouse.  The sun was nearly gone, and the air was starting to turn even colder. It wasn't long before many of the new recruits became restless. Disgruntled whispers could be heard.

“Enough of this bloody nonsense,” yelled a stocky, dark haired fellow clad in thick leather mail. “I did not come here to freeze and starve.” He began striding off in a southerly direction.

There was a whistle, followed by a thud as an arrow pierced the back of the man’s neck. He fell to his knees, grasping desperately at the arrow before crumpling to the ground and gurgling his last breaths.

“In case you were wondering, you are not permitted to leave.” A tall, lean man stepped from the gatehouse. He wore a shining metal breastplate with the broken scales of Angrääl etched in gold across it. His blond hair was cropped close, and even in the fading light his chiseled features and square jaw were evident. He was as broad as Lee in the shoulders, and carried himself with supreme confidence. A thick, heavy broadsword hung from his belt, while in his hands was a short, curved bow. He dropped the bow to the ground and walked toward the men. “I am Captain Faris Lanmore. From the moment you signed your names, you were in the service of the Reborn King of Angrääl. And as you can see, we do not tolerate desertion.”

He strolled casually in front of the men. When he reached Lee he paused. “You have a hard look about you.” His eyes went to Jacob for a moment. “Is this your son?”

“No, sir,” replied Lee. “He is my nephew.”

Captain Lanmore nodded, rubbing his chin. “Then that would make you....” He paused for a brief moment. “Barath. Yes, that’s the name you gave. I noticed you and your nephew as you approached. You claim to be a mere sell-sword, here to do some soldiering?”

“Yes, sir.” Lee tensed.

He pointed to Lee's sword. “That’s quite a weapon for a sell-sword. Let me see it.”

Lee unsheathed his blade and handed it to the captain.

“It’s well-balanced,” Lanmore remarked approvingly. “Superbly crafted. A true master’s sword.” He looked up at Lee and smiled. “Is that what you are? A sword master perhaps? By the way you walk, I doubt you're a mere sell-sword. I've been a soldier too long not to notice things like that.” He handed Lee back his weapon.

Lee returned his sword to his scabbard and squared his shoulders.

“And you know when to be silent as well,” remarked Lanmore. “Good. Very good. Well, whatever you run from, you need not fear it here. The Reborn King will give you a new life. Would you like that?”

“Yes, sir,” Lee replied.

“I thought as much.” He turned his attention to the rest of the men. “That goes for all of you. Whoever you were before, whatever wrongs you have committed, they are, as of this moment, forgiven. The Reborn King grants you pardon. Together, we shall forge a new world in his name. We shall sweep aside the liars and oppressors.” His sword sang as he pulled it from his scabbard and stepped back. “But be warned. If any one of you seeks to betray us, or fails in his duty, you will find the King’s justice to be harsh and final.” He turned to the gatehouse and whistled.

Ten men burst forth carrying sacks of food and blankets, which they distributed among the new recruits. Soon fires were lit and the scent of cooked meat permeated the air. Lee and Jacob sat with Fennio to eat.

“What do you think?” asked Fennio. “All sounds a bit crazy to me. Not to mention that Captain Lanmore fellow shooting that poor chap.”

“If he hadn't, we'd still be sitting here hungry and cold,” said Lee. “The point was to make an impression.”

“Exactly,” said a voice just behind Lee. It was Lanmore.

Lee and the others leaped to their feet and stood at attention.

“Come with me, Barath,” ordered Lanmore.

Captain Lanmore led Lee through the gatehouse door and into the fortress. The flagstone path led to the inner yard where a few scattered soldiers were patrolling the area. The keep at the far end was a single story structure with a gray slate roof. Barracks large enough to house two hundred men each were built just below the curtain walls on either side.

Halfway to the keep, Captain Lanmore halted and turned. “I've brought you here to see if my judgment has failed me.”

A man broader and taller than Lee, clad in black fur, leather boots and carrying a long, two-handed sword, stalked out of the barracks and made his way over to Lanmore’s side.  His head was shaved and scarred, and his dark eyes were fixed menacingly on Lee.

“This is Lars,” said Lanmore. “He is by far our strongest warrior, and one of the few we have here who is native to Angrääl. I want you to kill him - if you can.”

Without a word, Lee drew his sword and prepared for Lars to charge. He didn't have to wait long. The hulking Northman sprang forward with surprising agility and speed, but Lee easily moved aside and brought his blade across the man’s left arm, laying it open. The Northman roared with fury and swung his sword in a wide arc, but again, Lee stepped away. This time he sliced open his opponent’s right thigh. As Lars reached down, clutching at the wound, Lee smashed the hilt of his sword square between his opponent’s eyes. Lars staggered, and Lee struck him again, this time sending him onto his back.

“Why are you toying with him?” asked Captain Lanmore. “Has he offended you?”

Lars struggled to rise, sword still in hand, but Lee brought his boot hard down on his fingers. The great blade fell free and Lee kicked it away.

“Your order stands?” asked Lee, the tip of his sword hovering at Lars' throat.

Lanmore said nothing. Lee nodded with understanding, then rammed the blade clean through Lars' exposed neck, burying the tip in the flagstone below. The Northman gurgled, clutching at the wound. After a minute he moved no more. Lee cleaned his sword on his opponent’s furs.

“I'm glad I didn't test your skills with my own blade,” Lanmore remarked with a hint of amusement. “You are clearly one of the best trained swordsmen that has come through here in some time. But then, you don't hide it as well as you might think. In fact, I think you could have taken Lars the moment he came at you. Why didn't you?”

“I may have been able to kill him more quickly,” agreed Lee. “But I've learned to never underestimate an opponent. His first strike may have been a deception. As it was, he moved with great speed for one of his size. I saw no need to risk it.”

“Wise,” said Lanmore, smiling. He reached in his belt and pulled out a small red ribbon. He handed it to Lee. “You shall lead the recruits on the journey north. Do a good job and there may be more rewarding positions awaiting you.” He spun on his heels and walked away toward the keep.

Lee cursed under his breath and walked to the gatehouse. Four men were already collecting the body of Lars. When he reached Jacob, he pulled him away from earshot. His face gave away his feelings.

“What's wrong?” asked Jacob.

“I have failed to go unnoticed,” Lee replied. “Captain Lanmore is a very good judge of people. At least, from a soldiering standpoint. He saw my training in my movements. Now, I'm promoted.”

“How is that bad?” Jacob laughed. “Won't that make things easier?”

“Don't be a fool,” growled Lee. “As a simple soldier I could move about without drawing attention. As an officer, not only will I be noticed, but sooner or later I'll be discovered for who I am.” He thought for a moment. “If I am captured, they will figure out who you are as well. It may be better if you flee.”

“You know I won't,” shot Jacob.

“Yes.” Lee reached out and squeezed his shoulder. “I know. But if I'm found out, you must try to escape. You must abandon your attempt to rescue your mother and head to Sharpstone. Millet will aid you.” He met Jacob’s eyes. “Swear it.”

“But....” began Jacob.

“Swear it!” he repeated, this time much more forcefully.

Jacob bowed his head. “I swear. But only if rescue is impossible.”

Lee wanted to embrace his son at that moment, but resisted. He knew he must appear to others to be distant, and Lanmore may well be watching him. “I suppose that will suffice,” he said. They rejoined the others and bedded down for the night.

The sunrise brought trumpets from the fortress walls. Captain Lanmore and six soldiers emerged from the gatehouse. Lee attached the ribbon to his coat and strode up to meet them.

“Good morning, Captain,” he said.

Lanmore nodded curtly. “Get them ready, Barath. We march in ten minutes.”

Lee spun around and jogged back to the recruits. “Form ranks!” The force of his voice snapped everyone to attention. At first they just stood there, staring at him. “Now!” he barked. This was enough to get the men moving. In less than five minutes, all were packed and lined up along the road.

“You command men well,” said Lanmore approvingly. “Not for the first time, I'd wager.” He walked up and down the line. “We have an eight-day march to Kratis. We will do it in seven. Those who fall behind will be considered deserters. And I think you all know what happens to deserters.” He looked at Lee. “Move them out.”

Lee turned to the recruits and shouted out the command. “On my order! Move out!”

The line moved off with Lee in front, Captain Lanmore just behind him. The six soldiers positioned themselves three on each side of the recruits.

“Push the pace, Barath,” said Lanmore over Lee's shoulder. “I meant what I said about making it there in seven days.”

Lee did as he was told, speeding his pace to a near jog. By midday the recruits were panting and struggling with each step.

“Shall we halt for a meal, sir?” asked Lee.

“What do you think, Barath?” Lanmore replied. “Should we?”

“I do, sir,” Lee replied. “If you intend for these men to maintain speed, they must also maintain strength. Twenty minutes to eat and rest still puts us in Kratis a day and a half ahead. And I would recommend a ten-minute respite every four hours.”

“And why is that?”

Lee straightened his shoulders. “Because, sir, most of these men will not be able to keep this up for seven days without it; unless you intend to execute half of them before we arrive.”

“Perhaps I want to weed out the weak,” said Lanmore. “Or perhaps I simply don't care about how tired they get.” He chuckled softly. “But as is happens, I agree. The King's army would not be served if I killed off half of the men.”

Lee was relieved. “May I ask a question, sir?”

“You may,” said Lanmore.

“Do you usually escort new recruits to Kratis?”

“No,” said Lanmore, with a hint of irritation. “I've been summoned.”

Lee knew better than to ask why. He joined Jacob and Fennio for the short meal, then moved the men out again.

“You will no longer eat among the recruits,” said Lanmore. “You shall take your meals with us. If you wish, your nephew can join us as well.”

“He should eat with the men,” said Lee.

“Not wanting to show favor, I see. Or perhaps the two of you aren't close?”

“He is my sister’s son,” said Lee. “I am bound to protect him if I can. But no, we're not close.”

Lanmore shrugged. “It's for the best. Gives a lad a chance to make his own mark.”

On the first night Lee set his bedroll a few feet away from the soldiers. They had put up a small tent in which Captain Lanmore would bed down, but he chose to eat and talk with them for a short while before turning in. Away to one side, Lee could hear the recruits laughing and talking and wondered how Jacob was getting on. He shook his head, quietly laughing at himself. He was thinking as if Jacob were still a boy playing with other children. Fearing that their time together would soon end, he wished he could be with him now. Lee knew his chance for success was slim, and often on their journey he’d wished he could turn Jacob away in order to keep him safe. It no longer mattered that his son had betrayed him. Lee had brought that on himself. His thoughts turned to that day with the Oracle, causing his anger to swell. How he wished he had ignored her. He should never have deserted his family.

Once this is finished, my part is done, he swore to himself. The world can end in fire for all I care. He would take his family far from this conflict. Even if that meant living in the remote desert.

Over the next few days, Lee kept the men moving at a near unbearable pace. Even the hardened soldiers escorting them showed signs of fatigue. They passed dozens of companies of troops marching south.

“War comes,” said Lanmore offhandedly on one occasion as they were forced to make way for five full companies and their supply wagons. “Then we can march south and leave this icy land behind.”

“When will it begin?” asked Lee.

Lanmore shrugged. “Soon, I hope. I hear there are things to take care of in the west first. But those are matters for kings and diplomats.” He slapped Lee on the shoulder. “We're soldiers, you and I. Our job is to fight and die, yes?”

“Yes, sir,” said Lee. He couldn't help but respect Captain Lanmore. He was a true leader and soldier. Ruthless and harsh, yet educated in the ways of men. Everything he did was calculated. Even the slaying of Lars had a purpose behind it. By then, rumors had been leaked about the incident – most likely at the direction of Lanmore, Lee suspected - and the recruits gave him a wide berth, accepting his orders without question.

On the fifth day a light snow began to fall. The sky told Lee that it would soon be coming down in earnest. Normally, given how close they were to their destination, this wouldn’t be a cause for concern. But he knew that the recruits, with just a few exceptions, were ill prepared for such conditions. If a storm came, many would freeze to death. When Lee brought this to Lanmore's attention he just laughed.

“The King hasn't allowed a blizzard for years,” said Lanmore.

“Are you suggesting that he controls the weather?” asked Lee, feigning ignorance.

“When you meet him, you'll understand,” Lanmore replied. “He likes to meet all of his new officers, from the grandest general to the lowliest lieutenant.”

“That will be something,” said Lee. The thought of meeting the Dark Knight of Angrääl sent his heart racing. He hoped to be away with his wife and son long before that happened.

“You have no idea,” said Lanmore. Lee could hear unease in his voice. “To be in his presence is no small matter. You may have seen many battles, and slain many men, but nothing can prepare you for it. The Reborn King possesses the power of the gods.” He rubbed his hands together nervously. “I felt like a naked child. To tell you the truth, I can't even remember where I was or what he looked like - just a feeling of being totally overwhelmed.”

He cleared his throat and stiffened his back, as if catching himself in an awkward state. “In any event, you have some time to go yet before you're worthy of such an audience. Now, go tend to your duties.”

As Captain Lanmore had said, no storm came, though the temperature dropped to a point where even marching at a double quick pace did nothing to warm the men. On the last night of the march they were all huddled so closely around the fire that several were actually singed. The only ones seemingly unaffected were Lanmore and Lee. Lee had looked in on Jacob a few times, and it became clear that his son had decided to stay close to Fennio and the other men from Daruis' guard.

“You deal with the cold well, for a southerner,” remarked Lanmore as they took their meal.

“I am cold, sir,” said Lee. “But there's no point in complaining. Besides, I have to set an example to the men.”

“Quite right, Barath,” he replied. “Quite right, indeed. You'll do well here. And don't worry. We'll be south soon enough.” Lanmore alluded often to the coming war, but never once divulged anything useful. “Thanks to you we're far ahead of schedule. It's a break in protocol, but you will stay with the officers when we arrive tomorrow. I think you'll find it more pleasant than the recruit barracks.”

“Thank you, sir,” said Lee. He stared deep into the campfire, pleased. Perhaps the officers would have information on his wife. And it would separate him from Jacob. Should things go badly, Jacob would need time to escape.

“If you wish to speak to your nephew,” Lanmore added, “you should do so before we arrive. It's unlikely you'll see him again anytime soon. Officers and soldiers train separately.”

“I'll do that tonight,” Lee replied.

Lee went to seek out Jacob as soon as he’d finished his meal. He found him playing dice and passing around a small flask of brandy with several other recruits at the far end of the encampment. When they saw Lee, they all jumped to their feet and stood at attention.

“Jasper, come with me,” Lee commanded.

Jacob nodded and followed Lee away from the camp.

“Did you find out where Mother is?” asked Jacob.

Lee shook his head “Not yet. But I'll be staying in the officer’s barracks when we get to Kratis. I hope to find out more then.” He placed his hand on Jacob's shoulder. “If I'm discovered, I intend to bring all hell down upon Angrääl before I go. If that happens, you must run. Keep to the woods. Avoid towns until you are south of the Razor Edge Mountains, then make your way to the Goodbranch and take a riverboat to Sharpstone.” He handed Jacob six gold coins. “Hide these. It's enough to get you to Millet.” He saw a flash of defiance in Jacob's eyes. “There can be no debate. If things go wrong, it won't take them long to come after you. If I fail and they capture you, all is lost. You must survive.”

“I will do as you say,” said Jacob.

“I'm so very sorry,” said Lee, forcing back a tear. “But I'm about to hit you.”

Jacob stepped back. “What?”

“As we speak, Captain Lanmore watches. It must seem as if I don’t care about you. It will keep his attention on me.” Lee clenched his fist. “Are you ready?”

Jacob nodded.

Lee's fist connected with Jacob's jaw, sending him tumbling to the ground. He looked down at Jacob, using all his will power not to rush to his side. “You're on your own, boy,” he said, making sure his voice carried far enough for all to hear. He then marched back to his bedroll.

“Didn't go as well as you hoped?” Lanmore, spoke not from amusement but from curiosity.

“It went as expected,” said Lee. “As you said, they have to find their own way.” His heart was aching. He glanced over his shoulder to see Jacob stumbling back to camp, holding his jaw.

Lee bedded down, trying to slow his mind. The pain of punching Jacob mingled with fears of his son being captured, making sleep impossible. At dawn, he mustered the men and had them ready to leave in short order. Every time he came close to where Jacob stood, shame washed over him. But at least hitting him seemed to have the desired effect. Twice as many recruits now ate with him during the noon respite, and Lanmore made no further mention of him at all.

As the afternoon wore on, Lee noticed more and more buildings and houses lining the road, most of them crafted from the small gray stones common to the region. There were a few farms here and there, but the fields were barren at this time of year. Lee reckoned Angrääl imported most of its food supply up the Goodbranch from Baltria.

An hour before dusk, six massive black spires broke the horizon and the city of Kratis came into view. Lee saw all six very clearly, even though the city walls were still five miles away. He stood in awe of the sheer scope of the city. Construction of such magnitude should have taken decades at the very least, not to mention skills thought lost to the master builders long ago. Not even the ruins of the forgotten kingdoms of old boasted buildings of such great height.  The city of Kratis had indeed been the seat of power in Angrääl in the distant past, yet Lee had never imagined it as being much more than a place the size of Hazrah.

Captain Lanmore noticed Lee staring at the towers. “We’ll not be going that far. Not just yet.”

“I didn’t know buildings of such scale were still possible,” said Lee, unable to hide the fact that he was impressed.

“Kratis is being rebuilt,” said Lanmore. “In the time of King Rätsterfel it was the greatest city in the world. The Reborn King has discovered the secrets of the ancients, or so I’ve been told, and will see it returned to its former glory.”

“So it would seem,” said Lee.

The garrison came into view minutes later, and was nearly an exact copy of the one in Klinton, only four times the size. Lee guessed that it housed at least fifteen hundred men. Lanmore halted them at a narrow road leading east just before reaching the fort and ordered the soldiers to escort the recruits to their barracks. Lee was told these were a mile west of the main garrison. He knew this may present a problem if things went wrong, but there was little he could do about it.

“You will come with me,” said Lanmore. “I need to present you to Lord Pollus, the garrison commander. He's a bit of a pompous ass, but a competent leader. Keep quiet and only speak when spoken to.”

Lee followed Lanmore to the gatehouse. Two guards halted them.

“And you are?” asked the guard.

Lanmore stepped forward, bringing his face a mere inch from the guard’s. “You know very well who I am. Are we to do this again?”

“I’m sure I don’t know what you mean, sir,” he replied with disdain. “I simply didn’t recognize you at first.”

Both guards smirked, then stepped aside, allowing Lanmore entry. But when Lee tried to follow, his path was barred.

“He's with me,” said Lanmore. “Allow him to pass.”

“Not until I get word from Lord Pollus - Captain.” The guard stiffened his back. “Until then, he can wait here with us.”

Lanmore glared at the guard before stalking off into the fort. Lee waited silently. The guards didn't seem interested in conversation and completely ignored him. After ten minutes the captain returned. He shoved a piece of parchment firmly into the guard’s chest and motioned for Lee to follow.

“They can't stand it when a commoner advances through the ranks,” explained Lanmore as they passed through the gatehouse. “In their minds, only a lord should command.”

Lee cracked a smile. “In my experience, if only lords commanded, it would take a year to march an army ten miles.”

Lanmore threw his head back in laughter. “I wouldn't repeat that in the officers’ barracks. Especially round those bloody Baltrian fools. Most will run straight to Lord Pollus to try and curry favor. And frankly, he isn't known for his humor.”

“I'll keep that in mind.” Hearing that Baltrian lords would be near did not ease Lee's mind. He hoped that they would be too young to recognize him.

The main yard was filled with soldiers, about three hundred in total, drilling and marching. The barracks were as high as the curtain walls, with two catapults placed on each of the flat roofs. The keep was much larger than that in the other fort as well, standing two stories high and covered with arrow slits capable of raining down terror inside the parade yard should the walls be breached. The clash of metal, stomping of boots and shouting of orders combined to fill the air with a cacophony of noise. Lee marveled that the sound did not carry outside of the fort, or even through the gatehouse. The design must have held its own secrets. Even the catapults appeared sophisticated compared with others he'd seen. He saw only a single hand crank, and a long metal tube placed just above the arm. Lee guessed that this held the shot. If a single soldier could operate this weapon, instead of the usual four, it would be devastating. A lone platoon could wreak havoc.

The entrance to the keep was unguarded, but Lanmore still paused long enough to take a deep breath before flinging open the door. Lee followed him inside. The gray stone floor and walls were lined with weapon racks and maps. To his left were three rows of long tables, with a door at the far corner leading to the kitchens. To his right, where he expected there to be an officers’ lounging area, were instead dozens of desks and small tables. Cotton and linen clad bureaucrats sat busy at their duties, not even bothering to look up as Lee and Captain Lanmore passed by.

“Welcome to the heart of the kingdom,” joked Lanmore.

“This is where we take our meals?” asked Lee.

Lanmore shook his head, chuckling softly. “No. I'm afraid the keep is reserved for the commander and these fine fellows. We take our meals in the barracks.”

They entered a door directly ahead. Through this, a long hall ended in a flight of stairs leading to the second level. At the top, the hall split off into two directions, each with several doors along the walls.

“The bureaucrats stay in these rooms,” said Lanmore. “They’re quite comfortable compared to our quarters.”

“A soldier has no need of comfort,” said Lee.

They turned left for several yards, then right for a few more until reaching an elaborately carved mahogany door. Attached in the center of this was a polished silver carving of broken scales, the sigil of Angrääl. Only with great self-control did Lee manage to fight back the urge to smash it to pieces, and to keep the feelings of disgust from showing on his face Captain Lanmore knocked firmly before pushing the door open.

In the center of the room they entered was a round table on which rested various maps and charts, while at the far end was a large oak desk. A long rope hung from a small hole in the ceiling just behind the desk. To Lee’s right, a plush, tan suede couch and four matching chairs with small brass end tables were arranged in a semi-circle facing a hearth that burned brightly. Three polished brass lanterns hung from the ceiling center, and two more protruded from each wall at ten-foot intervals. Behind the desk hung a mural depicting a gleaming champion on horseback leading a charge against an elf army. Between the lanterns on the left stood an oak bookcase that held beautifully leather-bound tomes along with a crystal decanter and glasses.

A man sat behind the desk dressed in a fine white shirt and a red jacket. His salt and pepper hair was oiled and combed back in regal fashion. His tan skin gleamed in the bright light, offsetting his fragile build and narrow features.

“Ah, Captain Lanmore,” said the Commander. His voice was tinny and a bit feminine. “I see you have arrived ahead of schedule. And with a new officer.”

Lanmore bowed his head sharply. “Yes, Commander. The message said to come with all speed.”

“Indeed, it did,” said Lord Pollus. “And yet you chose to travel with the recruits rather than on horseback.” He rose to his feet. Though thin, he was quite tall – as tall as Lee – and walked with the effortless grace of a true noble. He sighed. “I suppose there is nothing to be done.” He finally took notice of Lee, looking him up and down. “And you are?”

“I am Barath, My Lord,” said Lee, bowing as Lanmore had done.

“Just Barath?” Pollus shook his head and frowned. “Yet another commoner.” He turned and went back to his deck. “I suppose if Captain Lanmore deems you worthy, you will do.” His eyes fell on the captain. “He is your responsibility and under your command. And please, if he doesn’t have a last name, tell him to choose one. People will think he’s one of those native Angrääl barbarians our gracious king has scattered among our ranks. Dreadful people.”

“You will be pleased to know that Barath fought one of those before we set out,” said Lanmore.

Pollus raised an eyebrow. “Is that so? And you survived. Impressive.”

“He did more than survive,” said Lanmore, puffing out his chest. “He defeated him as if fighting a child.”

“Impressive, indeed.” Lord Pollus opened his desk drawer, pulled out a piece of parchment, and scrawled something on it. After blowing the ink dry, he pushed it across the desk. “This is your commission - Barath. If for no other reason than ridding the world of an uncouth beast, I am happy to give it. I have left enough room for you to put in a proper name.”

Lee took the parchment and bowed again. “Thank you, My Lord.”

Lord Pollus reached behind him and pulled down on the rope. A moment later a thin, blond boy in a dark blue tunic and trousers scurried in.

“Show this man downstairs,” Pollus ordered. “He is to be given a commission under Captain Lanmore.” He dismissed the boy with a wave. “As for you, captain, I will speak with you now.”

Lanmore looked sideways at Lee. “I will join you as soon as I can.” He then turned to the boy. “If I am not down in time, show him to the barracks when he's done.”

Lee bowed one last time and followed the boy downstairs. He was taken to a desk where a scrawny wraith of a man was busy scribbling on one of the many pieces of parchment piled high on his desk. Lee held out his commission.

The man didn't look up, but opened the parchment and began writing notes. “What is your surname?”

“Drakis,” Lee replied. Drakis was the name of a fiend in a story he’d heard as a child. He almost smirked at the thought, but it was the only thing he could think of at the time.

“You have an odd sense of humor,” the man said off-handedly. “And before you ask, I know that tale as well. All men of the north do.”

Lee sat quietly as the man spent the next half hour writing, checking, and then double-checking each note. Finally, he handed Lee a small round wooden token with the number one painted on either side.

“Give this to the quartermaster,” He straightened the pile of papers on his desk. “He’ll issue you with what equipment you’ll need.”

Lee stood up and turned to the door. The blond boy was standing just behind him, waiting patiently. Halfway to the barracks, Captain Lanmore caught up with them.

“I'll take it from here, boy,” said Lanmore. Without a word the boy ran back to the keep. “Did you pick a name?”

“I'll be known as Barath Drakis,” Lee replied.

“A dire name to be sure,” he said, with obvious approval.

“Will it be possible to see my nephew?” asked Lee.

“I thought you weren't close,” said Lanmore. “In fact, if I recall, you nearly took his head off the last time you spoke.”

“I would not have it end as such between us,” Lee explained. “Though I have no great affection for him, he is my sister's child.”

Lanmore nodded. “I'll see what I can do. Until then, we need to get you settled in. We'll be here for three weeks.”

“A short time for training,” said Lee.

“Pollus likes you,” said Lanmore. “Mostly because you killed Lars. But I also assured him that you understand military discipline, and that I would personally train you.” He stopped and faced Lee. “Do not disappoint me, Barath Drakis.”

“I will not,” said Lee. A tinge of guilt struck him. He knew that he would indeed soon be betraying the captain’s trust. And even though he was the enemy, Lee was beginning to respect him.

“Good.” Lanmore slapped Lee on the back. “I enjoy having officers without the arrogance of nobility draped about their shoulders.”

The barracks was no more than a two-story warehouse with dozens and dozens of three-man bunks lining the walls and a series of long tables and benches in the center. A brazier, filled with hot coals, had been placed between the tables on either side of the entrance.  A crude flight of wooden spiral stairs stood dead center. Only a few dozen men were scattered about. Some were sleeping, others playing cards and dice at the tables, and a few reading over paperwork or going over maps. Most took notice as they entered, but none spoke.

“Officers of the Reborn King live the same as the common soldier,” said Lanmore as they entered. “We're lucky to have arrived when we did. The day watch is on duty now, so we'll not have to spend the next hour on introductions. The night watch are mostly commoners like us. They don't care much about who comes and goes.” He walked toward the stairs. “We'll be bunking on the second floor.”

The upper floor was much like the lower, except for several casks of ale neatly stacked along the far left wall. Lanmore removed his pack, throwing it on an empty bed and motioning for Lee to do the same. He then escorted him back outside and around the side of the keep to the quartermaster’s stores. In exchange for the wooden token, Lee was first of all handed a tunic embroidered with the sigil of Angrääl. Showing on the sleeves was one red star signifying his rank of lieutenant. Next, he was supplied with a set of studded leather armor. He was also offered a sword, but told the quartermaster that he would rather use his own weapon; the man looked down at it and nodded approvingly. A large, burlap bundle containing a commissioned man’s coat, boots and trousers contained the final items that would complete Lee’s transformation into an officer.

“Anything else, you have to buy for yourself,” said the quartermaster grumpily. “There are smiths and armorers in Kratis who can outfit you if you want something sturdier than plain leather. I’d also go there if you need your sword tended. I don’t trust the garrison smithy.”

Lee thanked the man and left.

It was nearly full dark by the time they returned to the barracks. The day watch was just beginning to file in, all of who took immediate notice of Lee and Lanmore. Hissing whispers of speculation could be heard throughout the room as servants busied themselves preparing the table for the evening meal.

“We needn't bother with this lot tonight unless you want to.” said Lanmore. “I intend to take my meal in the bunk, then get a good night’s sleep.”

Lee knew he should at least try to gather information, but felt it may be better to speak with Lanmore in a more relaxed setting. “I think I will do the same.”

Lanmore called over a servant and instructed him to have their meals brought up. The meal was a simple beef stew and salted bread, along with a cup of sweet wine. As simple as it was, Lee was grateful for the sustenance. After a servant retrieved their plates and cups, Lee stripped off his clothing and changed into a pair of heavy cotton pants and thick wool socks. He felt his muscles relax as he eased into his bunk. He had to fight the urge to fall asleep.

“May I asked you a question, sir?” Lee rolled over so he could see Lanmore.

“Ask,” he replied, yawning.

“How did you end up in the service of the Reborn King?”

Lanmore smiled and slid down beneath his blanket. “At one time, I was captain of the Kaltinor city guard. I was accused of theft and treason by the city temples and forced to flee or face execution.” He laughed softly “I journeyed north to Hazrah and caught word that Angrääl was seeking soldiers. I heard that a man could remake himself there, no matter what burdens his past carried. It sounded like a good idea at the time, so off I went. The funny thing is, as it turned out, it was Angrääl that controlled the temples in Kaltinor, and probably gave the order to have me accused in the first place.”

“If you know this, why not return?”

Lanmore closed his eyes “I have pledged my fealty to the Reborn King. I couldn't return now, even if I wished to. You'll understand when you're in his presence. When that happens, there's no turning back - ever.”

Having said that, he drifted off into a deep sleep.

***

Lee awoke abruptly a short time later and instinctively reached for his sword.

“Don't move!” yelled a harsh voice.

He looked up to see five soldiers, all of them pointing crossbows at him. He raised his hands.

“What is the meaning of this?” roared Captain Lanmore. “Answer me at once!”

From the stairs, Lord Pollus strode toward them, glaring at the captain. “It would seem, my dear captain, that you have brought a spy along with you.” His gaze fell on Lee. “Don't bother with denials - Lord Nal'Thain.”

Lanmore leaped from his bunk. “Barath?”

Lee's eyes never left Lord Pollus. “How did you find me out?”

Pollus laughed. “Your son, My Lord. How else?”

Chapter 17

Linis returned shortly before dawn, just as the armies were preparing to march. He and his scouts had found the cliffs unguarded, though they had seen Vrykol lurking there.

“The Vrykol fell back the moment we approached,” Linis told Theopolou.

Theopolou nodded and left to inform the king. Linis joined Kaylia and Selena, both of who had been ordered to join the rear guard. Kaylia was clearly unhappy about this.

“I don't like being treated like I'm some helpless child in need of protection,” she complained.

“We can't afford for you to be harmed,” Linis told her. “If you are killed or captured, what would happen to Gewey?”

“Besides,” Selena added, “you may not need protection, but I do. And I feel much better with you at my side.” She smiled. “And didn't you promise your husband that you would stay safe until his return?”

Kaylia mumbled angrily, but did not pursue the matter further.

Soon, the huge army set off. Marching at the head were Nehrutu, Mohanisi, the elf bowmen, and the human shield bearers. Theopolou, along with Chiron, led the vast mass of elf soldiers just behind this front line. The other elders were scattered among the elves, serving as captains. At the rear, led by King Lousis, the Althetans were just behind Kaylia, Selena, and Linis.

Selena was surrounded by what remained of the Valsharan guard, along with a few other knights who had arrived following the siege. Ertik had refused to let her out of his sight, and spent most of his time seeing to her every need.

“How are you faring?” The boisterous voice came from behind. It was King Lousis, sat astride a great black warhorse.

“We are well,” replied Selena. “And you?”

“I long for battle, High Lady.” He leaped from his horse with the vigor of a much younger man. “I hope that the elves don't win the day before I arrive.”

“I pray they do,” said Selena. “I would not see you in peril. Your people need you. As do all free people of the world. In these times, a stout heart and firm resolve is in short supply.”

“I think they need you far more than they need me, My Lady.” His friendly smile was a welcome respite from the nervous tension of men and elves preparing for war. “Your name will become a battle cry after today, and Valshara a symbol of hope for victory.”

“Indeed, I hope not, Your Highness,” said Selena. “I would not have men and women going to their deaths with my name on their lips. Though I fear it may be so.”

The entrance to the road leading to Valshara was half a day’s march away. Soon the men began singing songs of victory and glory, and though the elves did not join in, it seemed to lift their spirits nonetheless. Theopolou had earlier sent a small advance force to secure the road and paths leading to the cliffs, and reports now came back that the way was clear.

“Whatever they have planned, it is to wait until we are within the cliff walls,” said Linis. “They know we come, yet refuse to guard an easily defensible road. Our numbers would count for nothing in that narrow passage.”

“Are you worried?” asked Selena.

“I am,” he replied. “You should stay near me at all times.” He tapped Kaylia's shoulder. “You too. I will not explain to Gewey why I allowed you to be hurt.”

“He knows full well that I can look after myself,” Kaylia shot back. “If something happens to me, the fault will be mine.”

“That will not matter to him.” He looked up and saw the Stone of the Tower come into view. His face grew solemn. “Frankly, at this moment, I wish he were here with us.”

All nodded in agreement.

Word came back that the advance force had secured all access points to the cliffs, and that the road was abandoned. The Temple, however, was not. From the cliffs they spotted dozens of archers lining the battlements, and smoke billowing up from within.

Slowly, the huge army funneled into the narrow valley, guarded from above on each side by fifty elf archers.  It took a full hour before the Althetan soldiers at the rear began to creep forward.

The king rode up, sword in hand and clearly eager for battle. “I'd ask you to halt here and allow my men to pass,” he said.

Kaylia opened her mouth to protest, but Selena held out her arm and bowed to signal her compliance. She and the others made their way over to the cliff face, allowing the soldiers the room they needed. Nearly half of them had entered the passage when a low horn blast sounded in the distance. Not from the temple, but from the north, behind the human lines. A second blast rang out.

“What is that?” asked Selena.

Linis drew his weapon. “I believe we are flanked, High Lady.”

Orders were shouted by commanders as the Althetan army slowly turned. Another horn echoed against the cliffs, followed by a low rumble. Kaylia, Linis, and the Valsharan guard formed a protective line in front of the High Lady. The rumble grew to a roar as hundreds more frenzied voices joined in. The king rode up, fury in his eyes.

“We are out-maneuvered,” he yelled. “Linis. Inform Theopolou.”

Linis nodded and pushed his way through the soldiers into the narrow passage where more Althetans were still trying to turn and exit. Linis had to knock several to the ground in order to make passage. Once clear of the lines, he ran full speed to the elves, who were less than a quarter mile ahead. He grabbed the first elf he reached and ordered him to relate to Theopolou what had happened, then raced back to Selena and Kaylia. By the time he reached them he could hear that the battle had already begun.

The king was shouting orders and waving his sword wildly. He tried to spur his horse forward, but a dozen men surrounded him, and would not allow him to move. Selena was still against the cliff face clinging to Kaylia's sleeve.

“Are you all right?” asked Linis.

Selena nodded. “I'm....”

The hairs on the back of Linis' neck stood up. He spun around to see the sky streaked with incoming arrows. The guards quickly raised their small round shields and pushed back, hiding Selena and Kaylia. Kaylia squirmed and struggled, but Selena tightened her grip. Linis backed away. There was no room for him, and he carried no shield. The air was now filled with the high-pitched whining of arrows. Dozens of loud thuds and cracks sounded as they sank into the ground or smashed into shields. Linis darted to one side, only just in time to avoid being skewered. One guard fell screaming, the shaft of a black-feathered arrow protruding from his chest. Two other guards reached down and pulled the man to the rock face. Selena bent down and immediately began tending his wound, but her guarding knight dragged her back to her feet.

“How dare you!” she shouted.

“We will see to him,” said the knight. “You must stay behind us.” As she looked down, she realized it would be useless anyway. The guard was slumped over, eyes closed and with a trickle of blood coming from the corner of his mouth. The arrow had pierced his lung. There was no hope.

Linis could see that the Althetans were being forced back, though he was still unable to catch sight of the enemy. A tall soldier ran up, his breastplate covered in blood.

“High Lady,” said the soldier, trying to catch his breath. “The king commands that you retreat into the passage. We are outmatched, and I fear that our line may soon collapse.”

“How many are there?” asked Linis.

“Nearly a thousand,” he replied. “They came from nowhere. We were only just able to form ranks when they reached our lines. They fight like men possessed.”

“Hold fast,” said Linis. “I've sent word to Theopolou. Help is coming.”

No sooner had the words left his mouth when dozens of elves came pouring out of the passage, weapons drawn.

“What is your name, soldier?” asked Linis.

“Mitchis,” he replied.

“Come with me,” he ordered, then turned to Selena. “As soon as the elves clear the passage, you and Kaylia go inside.” Without waiting for an answer, he and Mitchis ran to meet the elf warriors.

Bellisia’s face was the first one Linis recognized. In each hand she wielded a thin, short-sword. When she saw Linis approaching she rushed to meet him.

“What has happened?” she asked urgently.

Linis nodded to Mitchis, who explained the attack.

“Our left flank is nearly gone. If it collapses, we are undone,” he said.

“Go tell them that help is on the way,” said Bellisia. She pointed the sword in her left hand to an elf carrying a longbow and bearing the symbol of her tribe on his leather armor. He nodded with understanding and shouted for the other archers to form a line. Bellisia reached in her belt, pulled out a small silver horn, and blew. The high-pitched sound pierced the air like the cry of an eagle.

“The humans need us to reinforce their left flank.” Her voice rose above the sound of the battle. “It is time to prove our worth.” She pulled three elves aside. “See that the king is unharmed. Get him to pull back to the wall if you can.” They bowed quickly and obeyed. Lousis was still atop his horse, urging his men forward while his personal guard continued with their struggle to keep him from riding to the front line.

Bellisia and Linis raced to catch up with the others. As Mitchis had said, the left flank was nearly demolished. Warriors in black mail with the symbol of broken scales in bright red across their chests were starting to push through. The bodies of the dead and dying littered the ground. The elves charged forward, cutting a path through the advance. In the face of this new onslaught the enemy panicked and quickly fell back. The Althetan soldiers began to pursue, but their commanders wisely called them back and reformed the lines.

Linis looked to his right. The elves had arrived just in time to prevent the enemy from crushing the Althetan center as well. They met the forces of Angrääl with sustained fury as the clang and clatter of steel sang its deadly song.

For nearly an hour the battle raged as more elf reinforcements arrived. On three separate occasions it looked as if the Althetan center would break, but somehow they managed to hold on long enough for more elf support to arrive and push the Angrääl soldiers back. Linis had slain at least a dozen men, and Bellisia just as many. Linis was impressed with her fighting skill, and smiled every time he caught sight of her.

By mid-morning the Angrääl forces were in full retreat, with the men of Althetas hard on their heels. Nearly half of the elf force had come out of the passage to aid in the battle. Hundreds had died. The king’s right leg was broken when his horse reared and threw him during the final surge forward, after which his personal guards were able to carry him to the cliffs and place him beside Selena and Kaylia.

Bellisia was cleaning her sword on the tunic of a dead enemy soldier when Linis approached.

“You fight well,” he remarked. “As well as any seeker.”

Bellisia smiled, looking prideful. “My father was a seeker. He trained me until I came of age and chose the life of a scholar and healer instead.” Her smile vanished as she cast her gaze over the battlefield. “A skill I believe we will need at this moment.”

Theopolou appeared from the passage with half a dozen elves. Linis waved his arm in greeting and went to meet him. Bellisia walked beside.

“What are your losses?” asked Theopolou.

“I cannot say,” replied Bellisia. “Substantial, I would think. The enemy was well prepared.”

Theopolou led them to where the king was being tended. Lousis smiled as they approached and sat up straight.

“Are you badly injured?” asked Theopolou.

“No.” The king looked at his leg with disgust. “But my fighting is done for now. How about you? Were your elves assaulted in the passage?”

Theopolou shook his head. “No. I believe the enemy were counting on breaking through our rear and attacking us that way.”

“If you hadn't sent your elves back to help, they would have,” said Lousis. “I mourn the loss of those who died in our defense.”

Theopolou bowed. “As I mourn the loss of your soldiers. They died bravely facing overwhelming numbers.”

“What will we do now?” asked Linis.

“We will do what we came here to do,” said Theopolou. Determination burned in his eyes. “Nehrutu and Mohanisi are with the archers and shield bearers, one thousand yards away from the gates. They await my return.” He turned to Linis and placed a hand on his shoulder. “You should know that the bodies of three of your seekers hang from the walls.”

Linis lowered his eyes and clenched his fists. “I will come with you.”

Theopolou nodded. “What are your plans, Your Highness?”

King Lousis shifted uncomfortably, digging a rock from beneath his thigh and tossing it aside. “The wagons are being emptied to carry the wounded back to the city. Those that can't be moved will be cared for here.” He looked out on the battlefield riddled with bodies. “I will have my men take care of the dead. Rest assured that the elves will be taken care of as well.”

“Are there captives?” asked Bellisia.

“A few,” the king replied. “I suppose I must see to them until this is over. I'm hoping that we can learn something useful from our prisoners.”

Selena approached; blood from treating the wounded covered her clothes. Kaylia was at her side.

“I will remain with the High Lady and Kaylia,” said Bellisia. “I believe my healing skills will be of greater use than my skills in battle.”

“Your help is most welcome,” said Selena.

“I will join you and Theopolou,” said Kaylia.

“No,” shot Linis. “My heart is full of vengeance. I am told that bodies of my kin hang from the walls of our enemy. I cannot promise to protect you as my fury may blind me. You will stay here.”

Kaylia could see from Linis’s expression that would not be moved. Reluctantly, she stepped back.

Theopolou bowed to King Lousis and Selena. “We must hurry.” He spun around and headed back to the passage. Linis and the guard followed close behind.

“It is done,” said Selena.

“What is that, High Lady?” asked Kaylia.

Selena lowered her eyes. “Human and elf have bled together. Whatever our destiny may be, we will now meet it together.”

She sighed. “I only wish that the cost of peace were not so high.”

Chapter 18

The wind whipped between the tall cliff walls, blowing the banners tight. Linis and Theopolou pushed their way through the ranks until they reached the vanguard where Nehrutu and Mohanisi awaited. Linis fixed his eyes on the tall, thick walls of Valshara. Just as Theopolou had said, three bodies swung in the breeze just left of the main gate. He boiled with fury as he recognized Sitrisa, Prustos, and Santisos. Their faces were swollen, bruised, and caked with dried blood and grime - their clothes tattered and stained.

“They will pay for this dishonor.” Linis drew his long knife and grabbed the blade tightly. His blood trickled down to the hilt. “I swear this.”

“You must wait until the gates are down and we vanquish the archers before you charge,” warned Nehrutu.

“My fury does not make me a fool,” Linis snapped.

“Of course not,” Nehrutu replied. “And you are not alone. The sight of my kin displayed with such malice and contempt fills me with rage as well.” His eyes fixed on the mutilated bodies. “I swear that you will have vengeance. They will understand wrath and fear after this day.”

“Then ready yourself to advance,” commanded Theopolou. The shield bearers lined up in front of the archers, with Nehrutu and Mohanisi just behind them, weapons drawn.

“Attack!”

Slowly the column inched forward. Trumpets blared from behind the wall. Men scrambled about behind the bowmen manning the battlements as orders were frantically shouted. Theopolou and Linis stood shoulder to shoulder watching as their forces came within range of the enemy arrows. The thwack of dozens of bowstrings rang out and streaks of death flew across the sky. The shields came up and the elves crouched behind them. But the arrows never found a mark. Both Nehrutu and Mohanisi stood absolutely still, their arms outstretched. A blast of wind gusted up, forcing the oncoming arrows back. The clatter of wood on stone punctuated what had happened, bringing murmurs of shock and approval throughout the elf ranks. Soon this was followed by loud cheering. The humans on the wall merely stood in silent amazement and fear.

“Why would they need the shields?” wondered Linis.

“I think it is for when Nehrutu and Mohanisi bring down the gates,” Theopolou answered. “It may be beyond their skill to do both things at once.”

The elves drew closer until finally they were in range. The archers stood and fired, and all but one of them found his mark. Men on the battlements slumped and disappeared. Others fell screaming from the wall. This success brought another round of cheers from the elves. The defenders returned fire, but again Nehrutu and Mohanisi sent their missiles back. After four more volleys from the elf archers, the wall was clear.

Nehrutu and Mohanisi remained where they were, their heads now facing down and arms folded. Then the earth began to shake violently. A moment later the gates to Valshara burst into flames. The heat could be felt all the way back to where Theopolou and Linis were standing. In retaliation, several arrows flew from over the wall, but they were completely random and undirected. Only a few came close enough to strike the shields. The ground continued to shake until finally the gates burst into flaming splinters. The elf archers then crept forward, all the time keeping their eyes fixed on the ramparts.

“Forward!” cried Theopolou.

At a quick march the army moved in behind the archers just as they reached the shattered gates. Smoldering pieces of wood littered the ground, but these were quickly stomped out by elf warriors. Smoke obscured their vision, making it impossible to see more than a few feet beyond the gate.

“To me!” roared Nehrutu, holding his sword high.

Black-cloaked figures appeared from out of the acrid, gray smoke. First, one, then another, until five stood in the entrance. Five more were standing just behind them. The elf archers fired in a volley. The arrows struck home but had no effect.

“Vrykol!” shouted Nehrutu. “You must take their heads!”

The archers dropped their bows and drew their long knives. The Vrykol were tall, menacing, and motionless. A thick ball of flame shot out from in front of Nehrutu and Mohanisi engulfing the beasts, but the flames died the moment they reached them. When the shield bearers were only a few feet away, the Vrykol stepped forward in unison. Their blades struck with tremendous force, shattering all but two shields and throwing the soldiers to the ground. The elves leaped over the fallen humans hacking and slashing furiously. Two Vrykol were laid open across their chests. Foul, black ooze poured from out of the wounds, but this did nothing to stop them.

The humans scrambled to their feet, but the elf line blocked their way, and they could only watch as the Vrykol cut the elves down, one by one. After the first wave of elves were slain, the Vrykol fell back to the gate to await another charge. Stumbling over the bodies of their fallen elf comrades, the Althetan soldiers attacked. It was a brave but futile gesture, and they were immediately cut to pieces.

Nehrutu and Mohanisi charged in together, followed by a dozen elf warriors. As they clashed with the Vrykol, a wave of air erupted, throwing the creatures back and slamming them into the other Vrykol standing at the rear. Nehrutu took three heads with unearthly speed, and Mohanisi two more. The Vrykol countered, killing three elf warriors and pushing them back past the threshold. A second blast of air then knocked two Vrykol off their feet. Nehrutu moved swiftly in to take another head. Ten elves were at his back moving to engage the rest. Soon the Vrykol were overwhelmed - hacked to pieces by vengeful blades.

Beyond the gates, the center of the courtyard was empty. At the rear, just in front of the temple, a six-foot high wooden wall had been erected. It spanned the entire breadth of the yard

Nehrutu held out his arms to halt the attack.  “I need archers, now!” he called.

The words were barely out of his mouth when arrows flew from behind the wall in a low arc. Nehrutu and Mohanisi tried to deflect them by creating another blast of air, but their actions were too late. Only a few missiles were sent back, and three elves were struck, including Mohanisi.

“No time to wait,” shouted Theopolou from behind. He forced his way past Nehrutu, followed by Linis and a long stream of screaming elves.

Nehrutu looked down at Mohanisi and saw a red-feathered arrow protruding from his belly. His anger boiled as he drew in the flow. Theopolou and the others were already halfway across the yard. He let loose all the power he could muster. A ten-foot section of the wooden wall heaved up and flew against the side of the temple, sending the men behind it scurrying back.

From both sides of the battlements, and atop the roof of the temple, more archers appeared, all eager and ready to rain down hell on the advancing elves.

Mohanisi struggled to his feet. Blood soaked his tunic and trousers. “Bring down the wall,” he told Nehrutu. “I will handle the archers.”

A tempest erupted directly above the heads of Theopolou, Linis and the other attackers. Dozens of arrows that were only a heartbeat away from causing mass death and injury were thrown clear. At the same time, Nehrutu destroyed another section of the wall just as the elves were about to engage the enemy. The defending archers above now abandoned their positions on the wall, dropping their bows and unsheathing their swords.

“That's enough,” Nehrutu said to Mohanisi. The tempest dissipated. He helped his friend to the wall and allowed him to gently slide down.

“I will be fine,” said Mohanisi. “Attend to the more seriously injured.” He looked up to see Linis and Theopolou already cutting a path through the human enemy.

Elves continued to pour in through the destroyed gate to join the fray. More soldiers came running out from the temple and down from the battlements to meet them.

“The temple will soon be ours,” said Nehrutu. “I will need your help, my friend.” He pulled the arrow from the wound. Mohanisi grimaced. “Be still.” He placed his hands on Mohanisi’s stomach. In moments the bleeding had stopped.

“You can complete this once the battle is done,” said Mohanisi, smiling. “You have done enough for now. Go aid Theopolou.”

Nehrutu squeezed Mohanisi's shoulder and leaped to his feet. “I shall return as soon as I am able.”

The battle continued to rage. By now the Angrääl soldiers had formed a shield wall around the main entrance to the temple and had managed to stop the elf advance. Several elves fell to spears thrust from over the rims of the shields. Nehrutu drew in the flow and released a blast of air, pushing the humans back. He could have easily destroyed the line, but dared not use more force with the elves so close at hand. Another blast pushed the soldiers further back, this time creating a small gap. It was all the opportunity Theopolou needed. He immediately ordered the elves in, and within seconds the line was scattered. The sounds of clashing swords mingled with the cries of the dying.

Nehrutu held back as the elves finished off the remaining soldiers. Dozens simply threw down their weapons and fell to their knees once it became clear that the fight was lost. By the time the courtyard was secure, hundreds of soldiers lay dead, along with several dozen elves.

Without wasting a second, Theopolou ordered the courtyard cleared and began gathering the wounded. Several elves wanted to enter the temple, but he told them to wait. Linis climbed the wall and retrieved the bodies of his fallen comrades.

“The interior is vast,” Theopolou said to Nehrutu as he helped carry a wounded elf. “There may be many more soldiers inside. And they will have had time to set traps and prepare a defense. It may take time to dislodge them.”

“The rear of the temple is blocked,” said Nehrutu. “There is no escape. Perhaps you should offer them their lives in exchange for surrender.” He glanced at the prisoners who had been herded against the north wall. “It would seem they have no intent to fight to the last man.”

Theopolou nodded. “And for that I am grateful. Too much blood has been spilled this day.”

“What will you do with them?” asked Nehrutu.

Theopolou shrugged. “It is for the High Lady of Valshara to decide their fate. It was Amon Dähl that was attacked, and her people who were slaughtered when the temple was taken.” He shook his head slowly. “I do not know if they will be shown any mercy.”

Nehrutu looked up to see Linis several yards away, kneeling over the bodies of his seekers. “I am not certain they should be.”

Theopolou tightened his jaw and walked over to where the prisoners were being held. He picked out one of the soldiers and had him brought to the main door of the temple.

“Tell any remaining inside that they are to throw down their arms and come out at once,” Theopolou ordered. “If they do not, then the Temple of Valshara will become their tomb.”

The soldier nodded and stepped inside the temple. More than an hour passed before he returned. By then Selena and Kaylia had joined Theopolou. Tears welled in Selena's eyes at the sight of so many dead.

“They will come out,” said the soldier. “But you must promise that they will be spared.”

“I promise to burn this place down around them if they don't come out at once,” said Selena, furiously. “You tell them that I will send their ashes back to Angrääl in a box.”

The soldier lowered his eyes, clearly afraid. “Yes, My Lady.” He turned and re-entered the temple.

A short while later the door swung open again. Soldiers began to file out, unarmed, with their hands on their heads.

“What will you do with them?” asked Kaylia.

“Until my anger subsides - nothing,” Selena replied. “I will not act until I am certain that my mind, and not my heart, speaks for me.”

They watched as the soldiers were led to the north wall. Once they were all out, a small group of elves entered to check that the temple was indeed empty. A few minutes later the door flew open and a woman was shoved through. An elf held a long blade at her back. Kaylia recognized her at once.

“Salmitaya,” she whispered, drawing her knife.

Salmitaya stood there, defiant and proud. She was dressed in a long black robe, with a silver cord tied at the waist. Her light brown hair was pulled back and interlaced with white and gold, bound together at the back by white silk.

“I knew I would fall to an elf blade,” said Salmitaya, glaring at Kaylia. “But I would not have it happen by your hand.”

Selena stepped in front of Kaylia. “You may yet save your wretched skin. I have heard your name before - Salmitaya. And I have known of your evil works longer than you think.” She grabbed Salmitaya's chin and forced her to look into her eyes. “I also know that you are high in the council of the Reborn King.”

Salmitaya jerked her head free of Selena's grasp. “You know nothing, fool.” She shut her eyes. “Kill me and be done with it.”

Selena scrutinized Salmitaya for a full minute. “I may. Or perhaps I should send you back to Angrääl.”

Salmitaya's eyes opened wide with fear.

“Yes. That's what I'll do.” Selena stepped back and smiled.

“Please,” cried Salmitaya. “You can't....”

“I can, and I will,” said Selena. Her tone was low and dangerous. “Or do you wish to remain here?”

“I wish you to kill me,” she replied.

“I say we give her what she wants,” said Kaylia, still holding her knife.

Linis approached. He snatched Salmitaya by the arm and shook her violently. “Who had the elves hung from the walls?”

Salmitaya said nothing.

“Answer him,” Selena commanded. “Or I swear I will send you back.”

“Yanti,” Salmitaya answered after a pause.

“Who is Yanti?” asked Selena. “Was it he who ordered the taking of Valshara?”

“You will find out soon enough.” Salmitaya shook her head. “But understand that I know nothing of value to you. I am disgraced in the eyes of my lord. If you intend to question me, you will get nothing, for I know nothing. If you set me free, I must continue to fight you. That is, if I’m allowed to live. So you have to kill me.”

“It appears you fear returning to your master more than you fear death,” said Selena. She looked up at the elf who had brought Salmitaya out. “Put her with the other prisoners for now. We have wounded to attend. I will decide her fate later.”

Linis glared at Salmitaya, then released her.

“Do you think she will tell us anything?” asked Theopolou, once Salmitaya had been led away.

“I don't think she knows anything,” Selena replied.

“Then why keep her alive?” asked Kaylia.

Selena bowed her head. “As I said, I will not decide anything until my anger lessens. Whoever Yanti is, it is clear he escaped before we arrived.”

“He may be among the prisoners,” offered Theopolou. “If not, they may know where he has gone. I will have them questioned.”

Selena nodded in agreement. “Thank you. Let me know what you discover.”

The rest of the day was spent tending to the wounded. Once Nehrutu had cared for Mohanisi, he and Kaylia began treating the most severe injuries. Mohanisi was too weak to assist so was taken inside the temple and given a bed. Selena ordered that the wounded from the first battle be brought in, and soon the entire courtyard was filled. King Lousis refused further treatment until all of the men and elves had been seen to first. By nightfall Nehrutu and Kaylia were exhausted, stumbling from person to person as if in a daze. Finally, Selena decided to intervene.

“You must rest,” Selena said to Kaylia. “We have other healers among us. You have already saved the most critically wounded.”

“I will rest when Nehrutu does the same,” said Kaylia.

“Then that time is now,” came the voice of Mohanisi from behind her. “I am now well enough to continue what you have started. I will take over until morning.” He strode off to relieve Nehrutu.

While a small group of elves led by Linis were gathering the bodies of their fallen kin and preparing them for the funeral rites, King Lousis ordered that his slain soldiers should be taken back to Althetas. The bodies of the enemy were to be burned and buried near the passage entrance, along with their weapons and armor.

With the exception of Salmitaya's clothing and a few extra books, Selena found that her chambers were pretty much as she had left them. She ordered the bed clothing to be burned and replaced, after which she had all of Salmitaya's belongings packed away. After washing and changing into a plain cotton dress and suede moccasins, she settled into her plush chair. Closing her eyes, she tried to push the visions of battle from her mind. She was still sitting like this when a light rap sounded at her door. King Lousis entered, along with a guard helping him to walk on his broken leg. He was followed inside by Theopolou, Linis and Nehrutu.

“It is good to see you back where you belong,” said Linis, smiling.

Selena rose from her chair. “As soon as possible, I want the injured in the courtyard brought inside the temple.”

“We are already clearing out the rooms,” said Theopolou. “I can have the beds ready within the hour. Though I am not certain what to do about the prisoners. We cannot keep them here indefinitely.”

“I will decide what is to be done with them in in the morning,” said Selena. “Keep them under guard until then.”

“And Salmitaya?” asked Linis.

“I will speak with her again shortly,” Selena replied. “She will be kept apart from the soldiers. We have a small holding area in the west wing.”

“I would like to be with you,” said Linis.

“No,” Selena replied. “I will speak to her alone.”

“Should you decide to spare the soldiers,” said Lousis, “I can have my men construct cages in a small compound outside Althetas.”

“I will keep that in mind,” said Selena. “How many did we lose in battle?”

“More than three hundred men and elves,” answered Lousis. “But our enemy lost three times as many. Angrääl will think twice before moving against us now.”

“This was nothing,” said Theopolou. “A skirmish, at best. When the Dark Knight sends his armies south, we must be ready. This defeat may only serve to anger him. And it may cause him to march sooner than he had originally planned.”

Lousis furled his brow. “Are you saying we should have held off our attack?”

“Not at all,” Theopolou replied. “This victory has solidified the bond between elf and human. And it will show potential allies that our defeat is anything but certain.”

“It will go a long way toward helping our cause when I assemble the kings and queens,” said Lousis. “That must be my first priority. I shall leave tomorrow.”

“Are you well enough to travel?” asked Selena.

Lousis held his head high and smiled broadly. “The king of Althetas will not be laid low by a broken leg, High Lady.”

Nehrutu leaned over with his hands outstretched to Lousis' injured leg. “With your permission.”

The king nodded. “If you are well enough.”

Nehrutu touched the leg, eyes closed. Lousis gasped, reached for Nehrutu's shoulder, and cried out in pain. The king’s guard rushed to his side, but by then it was over. Nehrutu straightened his back and heaved a sigh.

“It is done,” he said.

Lousis tenuously put his weight on to the injured leg. A low chuckle turned into a full-on belly laugh as he began stomping his feet hard. “If only my people possessed such power.”

Nehrutu smiled weakly. “Perhaps one day they will. I cannot say with certainty that such abilities are beyond your kind.”

Lousis slapped Nehrutu on the shoulder. “What a wondrous notion.” He turned to Selena. “I must beg your leave. Thanks to our elf ally, I can now see to my men as a king should. Unless you object, I will be leaving fifty soldiers here to give you aid. I will also send more men and materials to repair damage done during the battle.”

“Your help is well received, Your Highness” said Selena.

The king bowed low and left, his guard struggling to keep pace.

“A strong leader,” remarked Linis with an approving nod. “We could use many more like him.”

“Indeed,” Theopolou agreed. “And his haste is warranted. We must decide our next course of action.”

“I intend to join Millet and Dina in Sharpstone,” said Linis. “Angrääl will certainly move its armies down the Goodbranch River. If they secure that, they will have a supply line leading all the way to Baltria.”

“I agree,” said Theopolou. “But we must remember that elf and human are not united there. Your presence may be disruptive.”

“I can ask Lord Ganflin for assistance,” said Linis. “And Lord Broin as well. The sight of human lords alongside elves may ease fears.”

“Then you should depart with King Lousis,” said Theopolou.

“I will send what is left of the Knights of Amon Dähl with you,” Selena added. “Dina sent out a general request for aid, but in light of the attack, I doubt that many responded. I would not have her mounting a defense with nothing but sell-swords. I can send instructions ahead of your arrival by messenger flock.”

“That will be wise,” said Linis. “Even if Broin and Ganflin are able to help, it may still take time for them to assemble men and supplies. Millet and Dina should be made aware of the situation as soon as possible.”

“And what will you do?” Selena asked Theopolou.

“I must see to the situation with my kin from the Steppes,” he replied mournfully. “I cannot allow Angrääl to divide us further, and I am certain that once the elves have served the Reborn King’s purpose, they will be disposed of.”

“How do you intend to accomplish this?” asked Linis. “Will our people even accept them now that they have spilled elf blood?”

“I have spilled elf blood, Linis,” said Theopolou. “During the first split, I led thousands to their death against our own kind. I will not sentence our brothers and sisters to death for sins I have committed myself unless all hope of redemption is exhausted.”

“So you will go to the Steppes yourself?” Linis' face was dark with worry. “Then you should see if Mohanisi or Nehrutu will travel with you as well.”

“I cannot,” said Nehrutu. “I must await Aaliyah and Gewey. But I agree that one of us should go. I will speak to Mohanisi tonight.”

“And what shall you do, Kaylia?” asked Selena.

“I will wait here for Gewey,” she replied. “If you will allow it, High Lady.”

Selena smiled. “You are now a part of this temple, and can stay as long as you wish. And I could certainly use your help in the coming days. At least until Gewey's return.”

“With your approval, I would like to leave some of my own people here in addition to the king's,” said Theopolou. “The elders will be returning to their homes to organize a defense of their lands, and to help other elves understand our cause. There will still be much resistance to these new ideas. Though considering what has happened here today, I doubt that resistance will persist for long.”

Selena nodded. “Your people are welcome to stay, and their help is also welcome. But now I must rest. I have much to think about. Kaylia, would you find Ertik and have him bring Salmitaya here in two hours?”

“Yes, High Lady,” replied Kaylia.

The party bowed and left. Selena walked the floor of her chambers, looking closely at each and every object. She was loath to touch anything until it had been cleaned. The mere idea of the beasts who’d slaughtered her people pawing through her possessions made her skin crawl. She wasn't sure what to do about Salmitaya - or the enemy soldiers for that matter. The screams of her people echoing through the halls of Valshara were still fresh in her mind, and she knew this was not the time for rash choices. She must still her anger first.

As she slipped into her bed and closed her eyes, fatigue took over. Though feeling a bit guilty for resting while others were still laboring, she could feel that she was spent. She hoped a couple of hours rest would be sufficient to clear her mind and rejuvenate her body. The soft bed cradled her, pulling her into a deep slumber. And though much blood had been spilled, she couldn't help but feel happy to be back in her own bed and in the temple she loved.

“I shall restore this place,” was her final thought before consciousness faded.

Chapter 19

Selena was shaken out of her slumber. As her vision cleared she saw Ertik standing over her, his face awash with worry.

“I'm sorry, High Lady,” he said. “But you ordered the woman Salmitaya brought to you in two hours.”

Selena stretched and rubbed the back of her neck. She was not exactly rejuvenated, but felt more like herself than before. “Give me a moment to change, then bring her in.”

Ertik bowed and left.

Selena searched her wardrobe and found a long, blue linen dress with the symbols of the Nine Gods embroidered in white on the front. She doubted that Salmitaya would have chosen to wear such a thing, but still Selena wished she had brought other attire with her. She pulled her hair back, tied it in a loose ponytail, and looked at herself in the mirror. The lines of worry and age were carved deeper than ever before. She sighed, scolding herself for her vanity.

“Bring her,” she called out firmly. The door opened and in walked Salmitaya, hands bound in front of her, Ertik scowling behind.

“Cut her bonds.”

Ertik hesitated for just a moment before drawing his dagger and cutting the rope.

Selena sat in her chair and motioned for Salmitaya to sit across from her. “Please, leave us,” she told Ertik. Once he had reluctantly departed, she took a deep breath. The anger still boiled in her breast.

“What do you want from me?” Salmitaya demanded, as defiant as ever.

“I'm not sure,” Selena replied. “Perhaps nothing. Maybe just to look at the face that had my temple captured and its people slaughtered.”

Salmitaya sneered. “Then you will be disappointed - High Lady. When I arrived, Valshara was already taken.”

“Is that so?” She looked into Salmitaya's eyes. The woman masked her fear well. “If that is true, then why not plead for mercy? Why wish for death? You speak as if you would prefer it, rather than being returned to your master.”

“If you don’t kill me now, I shall die soon enough.” She shifted in her seat. “If you imprison me, then I will languish in squalor until Angrääl returns and destroys this place. Then die I surely will, and very slowly as punishment for my failure.”

“If you are so certain your master will kill you, why return? Why not flee?”

Salmitaya sneered. “You know nothing. Don't you think I've tried to run away? You imagine I would be under the lash of someone like Yanti if there were any other way? If it were possible, of course I would disappear. But I can't. And even if I could elude Yanti, I've been in the presence of the Reborn King. I've heard his true name. I am bound to serve him until I die. There is no other way.” Her lips trembled at the mention of her true master. “And when he comes - when he has you put in chains and brought before him, you will give yourself to him too.”

“I think you underestimate me,” said Selena.

Salmitaya laughed. “It is you who have underestimated him. Do you think this petty victory means anything? Do you think allying yourself with the elves will save you? Nothing you can do will stop what is coming. He possesses the power of the gods. By his will, he has imprisoned them. Such a man will not be defeated by the pitiful force you have gathered. And when the time comes, not even your godling will be able to save you. No. Soon, even Gewey Stedding will be his as well, along with everything and everyone else in this cursed world.”

“If you know what Gewey is, then you can't possibly think that your king can gain power over him,” Selena scoffed. “He is powerful, yes. But he is still just a man.”

“That may be, but the Reborn King has laid low the gods of this world in one fell stroke.” She cocked her head. “They are nine - he is one. Gewey will either serve or die. As for me, you waste your time speaking to me. I know nothing of value. And you gain nothing by keeping me alive.”

“That is for me to decide,” said Selena. “For now, I give you your life. But you need not fear. I will kill you myself before I allow Yanti, or your king, to take you.” Selena called for Ertik. “We will speak again very soon.”

Selena returned to bed. She knew what she must do next. She had known from the beginning. The captured soldiers could not be released. They must die. But such things could wait until morning. One night more without being the instrument of death was all she asked for - and she would have it.

The next morning the temple was a beehive of activity. Selena ran into Ertik on her way to the kitchen. He had already prepared her breakfast and was bringing it to her room.

“Thank you, but I'd rather eat in the dining hall,” she explained. “Could you find Theopolou and King Lousis and ask them to join me?”

Ertik bowed and ran down the hallway, the tray of food still in his hands. When Selena entered, the east dining hall was filled nearly to capacity. Elves and humans dined together, talking and laughing over their meals. Selena smiled at the sight. She had only walked a few steps when cheers broke out. Mugs began banging on tables. Loud, boisterous voices calling: “Hail the High Lady of Valshara - Hail Amon Dähl,” carried throughout the hall. Selena held up her hands to quiet the crowd.

“Please,” she said in a clear strong voice. “It is you who deserve all the praise. If not for you and your bravery, this holy place would still be under the control of Angrääl. Through your ability to set aside old hatreds and misgivings, you have found kinship and solidarity. It is I who applaud you.” This set off another round of loud cheers.

Selena smiled graciously and sat down. She had barely begun to eat her breakfast when King Lousis and Theopolou entered.

“How go things this morning?” she asked, after they were seated.

“Well,” Lousis replied. “The courtyard is now clear, apart from the prisoners. The elves have made preparation for funeral rites a few miles beyond the passage. Also, I have chosen the men to remain behind. Ertik has already taken it upon himself to organize them.”

“I have also chosen fifty of my people to remain,” added Theopolou. Once the funeral rites are complete, most of us will return to our lands to gather our full force. Lousis has asked me to delay my journey to the Steppes until after his council meets, and I have reluctantly agreed.”

Selena nodded, pleased. “That is good. I think your presence at the council may be of great help.” Her face turned grim. “And now I must tell you what is to be done with the prisoners.” She lowered her eyes and breathed deep. “They are each to be questioned – and then hanged.”

“High Lady,” said Lousis. “I know they have wronged you, but one does not simply execute prisoners of war.”

“You said you would abide by my decision in this matter,” she countered.

“I will but....” He stopped as Selena held up her hand.

“They are not prisoners of war,” she continued. “They did not march across a field and do battle. They did not sack the city of a nation with whom they were at war. No!” She rose to her feet. “They broke into my house, and slaughtered my family. They are brigands and thieves, nothing more. Should a murderer of the innocent be allowed to return to his home, stained with the blood of his victims? Would you allow it in your city, King Lousis?”

The entire hall was silent. The King stared at Selena for a moment before answering. “I would not.” He sighed. “But I fear this choice may haunt you.”

“It haunts me even now,” she replied. Her eyes turned to Theopolou, who was sitting quietly with his hands folded in front of him. “And what say you?”

“I agree,” he said, after a long pause. “They are not prisoners of war. And if you look upon them as criminals, they should be treated as such. But I think that is not why you do this.”

Selena stiffened. “I beg your pardon?”

“You need to show Angrääl that you are as ruthless and determined as they,” said Theopolou. “You know this to be a minor victory. Since this campaign began, I have thought it odd that the Dark Knight should show his hand so soon. There was no reason to take Valshara now. Not unless he was certain he could keep it. And if that was his plan, it was a blunder. You must see to it that he is understanding of this.”

He drew a deep breath before continuing. “You are correct in your actions, High Lady. And though I cannot say I would do likewise, I will not criticize your decision. You have chosen to keep the woman Salmitaya alive, and I think you do this to somehow ease your conscience. However, whatever you do, from this moment to the last, I do not feel it serves you to be in denial. You said you held off your decision until it could be made without anger, so to claim indignation now is false. And though your actions are harsh, they are justified.”

Selena sat back down. “You are correct, of course. And though I hear your words, my mind is not swayed. I stand by this decision.”

Theopolou nodded.

“I will order gallows built at once,” said Lousis. He leaned forward and cleared his throat.

“You have something else to say?” asked Selena.

Lousis nodded hesitantly. “We found the bodies of your people. They had been piled up and burned in one of the basement rooms. I have had my men gather the ashes and the few personal possessions that remained.”

Tears welled in Selena’s eyes. “Thank you…I…” She quickly wiped away the moisture. “I will see to the remains personally.”

“Very well,” said Louis. “Do you wish for me to arrange the executions?”

“No, Your Highness,” Selena replied. “It is my decision that sends them to their death. So it must be I who will see it done. I only ask that you leave me skilled interrogators.”

“I have seen to that, and they have already begun the questioning,” said the king. “But I have another question. I would wish you at the council when it convenes. Will you be able to come?”

Selena shook her head. “Sadly, no. There is too much for me to do here. Sister Celandine is in Sharpstone with Millet. They are gathering the few remaining knights of Amon Dähl there to establish a foothold along the Goodbranch River. Linis is to join them, and I must see to it they have all that is required. Also, I must make contact with the other temples throughout the land. We must know who is with us, and who has been compromised.” She looked at Theopolou. “Keeping Salmitaya alive serves more than to ease my conscience.” She leaned back and rubbed the bridge of her nose. “I will be sending out some of the people you leave with me into great peril. You should be aware of this.”

“My men are at your command,” said Lousis. “I would not leave them otherwise.”

“As are the elves who are remaining,” added Theopolou.

“Good,” she said, smiling. “So when do you depart?”

“I have already sent word to gather the kings and queens together,” Lousis replied. “I only have a few more things to attend to, then we will be away.”

“I would ask you one last favor,” said Selena. “Though I cannot attend, I would like Ertik to witness the council and represent me in all matters. Unless there is some protocol that will not allow this, of course.”

“Actually, I think that is wise,” said Lousis. “Your presence carries weight, and will be much missed. But as you cannot attend in person, your proxy should suffice. I will ensure that all there are aware he speaks on your behalf, and that he is afforded the due respect and courtesy.”

“Thank you.” Selena pushed her food away. “I have no appetite any longer. So, if there is nothing further?”

Theopolou and King Lousis excused themselves, leaving Selena to sit for a minute longer staring at her unfinished plate. She knew Ertik would resist the idea of leaving her side, and was not looking forward to informing him of his mission.

She spent the rest of the morning walking about the halls, seeing that everything was in order. Though with Ertik about, this was a fairly pointless exercise and only served to keep her distracted. He had been busier than she thought any man was capable of. When she eventually cornered him and told him he would be leaving with King Lousis, he very nearly broke down in tears, begging her not to send him away. It was only after she promised to have an elf guard with her at all times that he reluctantly accepted the situation.

Kaylia had also made it clear that she intended to remain close to her side, having chased away several Althetan soldiers awed to be stood in the presence of the High Lady of Valshara, leader of the legendary order of Amon Dähl. At first these admirers didn't trouble Selena, but soon questions about the Dark Knight and his time within the Order arose. These were subjects that she didn't care to discuss, and Kaylia had become adept at knowing when it was time to tell the soldiers to move on.

At midday, Selena and Kaylia sat quietly in the High Lady’s chamber. A light meal of fruit and bread had been brought in. As they ate, Selena could tell that Kaylia had something on her mind. But whatever it was, something was preventing her from speaking about it.

“Kaylia,” Selena began. Her voice was calm and reassuring. “You must not think me frail. If you wish to speak your mind, you must do so.”

Kaylia sat her plate on the small table beside her chair. “I do not think you frail. Nor am I afraid to speak. I simply do not wish to cause you more grieve so soon after all the tragedy and bloodshed that has passed.” She fixed her eyes on Selena’s. “I cannot help but wonder why you do not speak of the Dark Knight’s time in Amon Dähl. Surely, this knowledge could be valuable to our cause.”

Selena nodded. “It would, without doubt. But sadly, I know very little. When the Dark Knight first came to power he all but destroyed this order, including all records of who he really was. Those who might have known him cannot remember anything specific about him - even those who were among us at the time of the betrayal.” Her face was grave. “You must understand that the Sword of Truth wields a power beyond your imagination. My guess is that he used it to mask his true identity from the minds of those within the order who knew him.”

Selena sighed. “During my early days with the order I heard of a great knight with unparalleled strength and valor who aspired to be the protector of the Sword. But his efforts failed, and another was chosen in his place. Enraged, he abandoned his vows and sought out the Sword’s resting place.” She rose wearily to her feet. “That is the limit of my knowledge. The rest you already know.”

“Then why not tell people this?” asked Kaylia.

Selena sighed sadly. “You ask me to speak of what has brought Amon Dähl its greatest shame. For thousands of years we were guardians and protectors. Now…”

“I understand,” said Kaylia. “I will not ask you again.”

When it was time for the king and the others to depart, Selena and Kaylia, along with the majority of those who would be remaining behind in Valshara, gathered in the courtyard to see them off. Selena's eyes wandered repeatedly to the prisoners against the wall. She wanted not to hate them. She wanted to believe that her decision was the right one, and not simply made out of vengeance.

“Do not heed my earlier words,” said Theopolou. Clearly, he could see her self-doubt. “I spoke from the perspective of my longing for peace. This is war, and I would do as you are. You cannot afford to second-guess yourself in these times. You will act wisely. Have faith in that.”

King Lousis took Selena’s hands and kissed them fondly. “I will eagerly await our next meeting, High Lady.”

Selena blushed. “As do I, Your Highness.”

Once the farewells were said, she watched as the party departed. Cheers erupted from both humans and elves as they passed through the shattered gates. Ertik looked back at least four times before disappearing out of sight. Theopolou’s words still echoed in her mind.

She called to Lord Jeffos Windermere, the officer left behind in charge of the Althetan forces. “I want you to have your men take the prisoners to the temple basement. There you will find an empty wine cellar. It hasn’t been used in many years, and is large enough to house them for the time being.” Windermere threw his fist to his chest in salute, and marched away.

“I must not doubt,” she whispered softly.

Chapter 20

The reflection of the sun on the desert sands made navigation increasingly difficult as Gewey and Aaliyah made their way back to the shore. Each dune looked much the same as the last, and Aaliyah could no longer sense the direction of her ship. Though their pace started out fast and determined, signs of the poison working its way through her system began to show after only a few hours. Gewey did his best to keep the air around them cool with the flow, but each time Aaliyah stumbled or paused he found it difficult to concentrate. On more than one occasion a blast of hot air washed over them, making it nearly impossible to breathe. He couldn't imagine living in such a hellish place.

By mid-afternoon their pace had decreased to a slow walk. Beads of sweat formed on Aaliyah's brow; her skin was pale, and her breathing shallow and quick. Gewey took her arm, but she pushed him away.

“No need for that,” she said weakly. “It would seem the poison is stronger than I anticipated. I think I will rest for a moment.” She eased herself onto the sand. “If you would just keep the air cool, I think I will be all right in a few minutes.”

Gewey could tell she was lying. He tried yet again to heal her, but as before, his flow was thrown back. He clenched his fists with frustration. “There must be something I can do.”

“There is nothing, I'm afraid.” She reached into her pack, pulled out a blanket, and used it to cushion her head as she lay down. “I just need to rest.” She closed her eyes.

“You must fight it,” Gewey pleaded. “You must stay with me.”

She reached up and touched his cheek. “I have fought, and it would appear I have lost. But do not be sad. I am content to have lived to be a part of your story. I have seen our kin reunited, and for all of this I am thankful.”

“Don't talk like that,” said Gewey fiercely. “I will carry you if I must.”

“There is no time,” she said. “I will be gone in a few moments. I can feel it.”

“Please.” Gewey's voice cracked. “I can’t let you die.”

Aaliyah smiled sweetly. “This is beyond your power.” She closed her eyes. “Tell Nehrutu that I am sorry. Tell him I only did what I had to do. Tell him...I...”

Gewey lifted her head and cradled it in his arms, tears flowing freely down his face. Her body grew limp as life slipped away. Throwing his head back, he let out a primal scream. The sand all around them exploded and the earth trembled.

As the ground settled, Gewey closed his eyes and allowed his spirit to drift to her. The light inside Aaliyah was dimming, and the warmth of her spirit growing colder. He could not bear to see her fade away in such a manner. Without consciously willing it, he suddenly found that he was drifting skyward. From above, he could now see himself holding her limp body in his arms. It was the first time he had ever viewed his human form in such a way. The scene threatened to shatter his heart. He could see his own life force burning brightly, while hers flickered and finally vanished.

Then, as if from far away, he heard the sound of a child’s laughter. At first there was only one, but then another and another joined in, until he could hear dozens of mirthful infant voices all laughing at once. Not in a clamor of incoherent sound, but in the purest of harmony. Gentle at first, they grew louder and stronger until the sound surrounded him with magnificent wonder. In between each sweet voice, the tinkling of tiny bells increased the harmony. A wave of joy washed over Gewey, causing his heart to swell with unmeasured happiness. It was as though bliss were tangible - a treasure that one could possess.

He gazed back down at his body still holding Aaliyah's. He appeared the same, but her body was now surrounded by a million tiny points of light twinkling and swirling in rhythm with the laughter. The lights moved closer and closer together until they began to take form. At first it wasn't clear, then slowly he realized it was the figure of Aaliyah. She glowed and shimmered with the light of a thousand stars. Her face beamed at him as she drifted away from her body.

Gewey reached out. It was then he felt a burning on his breast. He looked down and could see only a specter of Gerath’s medallion still hanging around his neck. Heat upon heat burned into his spiritual flesh until he thought he could bear it no longer. He tried to scream, but no sound came from his lips. He could see Aaliyah above him, drifting further away. Her spirit was fading. He called to her. At the sound of his voice, she stopped.

In that instant, he understood.

He concentrated on nothing but the sounds of laughter. Within moments they started to take on a physical form, appearing as a shimmering mist that surrounded everything. It was everywhere. Gewey could not believe he had never seen this before. He knew this was the spirit of the flow. The very soul of the earth.

Reaching out to Aaliyah's spirit, he shepherded it carefully back into her body. He then drifted down into his own. As he did so, the laughter grew distant, and finally faded away altogether. He looked down at Aaliyah. Almost imperceptibly at first, her chest moved up and down as life returned. He reached into her with the flow, and this time there was no resistance. The poison was gone. He allowed his energy to run through her, slowly at first, then more and more until he could feel her strength returning.

“That is enough, Gewey.”

Her voice shocked him back into reality. She was smiling up at him, gently stroking his arm.

“How do you feel?” he asked, brushing her hair away from her face.

“Thanks to you, I feel alive,” she replied. “But weary, all the same. I should rest until morning I think.” She squeezed him tight, then nestled her head in the blanket. “You felt it, didn't you?” she whispered. “The spirit of the earth.”

“Yes,” said Gewey. “It was beautiful. Like nothing I could have ever imagined.”

“I wish I could have seen it.” She sighed, and promptly fell into a deep, restful sleep.

Gewey watched over her until the dawn broke, keeping the chill night air around them warm. When she awoke, the sun was just peeking over the horizon. She looked at him and scowled.

“You have not slept,” she scolded, though not convincingly.

Reaching into his pack, Gewey took out his flask and a piece of flatbread. He gave these to her. “I'm fine. I've lived with less sleep before. And after traveling a swifter pace.” He was remembering his journey from Valshara to the house of Theopolou.

“Still, what you did for me could not have been easy,” she countered.

“Actually, it was.” He tore off a piece of bread. “Though I'm not sure I could do it again.” He remembered the medallion and reached to his breast. It was gone. “The gift I received from Gerath showed me how.”

Aaliyah touched his chest where it had once hung. “Such a sacrifice.”

Gewey smiled. “Not really. I don't need it anymore. The power that was in the medallion now lives inside of me. I can feel it there.”

“That’s amazing. How does it feel?”

He shrugged. “It's hard to explain. It’s not much different from when I touch the spirit of another person, just many times more intense. It lacks the negative emotion and uncertainty of the mortal spirit. When your spirit left your body – in a way - I could kind of see you joining with it. Do you remember?”

“No,” she said sadly. “I truly wish I could. I remember fading, as if falling asleep. Then waking up in your arms. I knew you had found a way to save me.”

Her words brought a blush to Gewey’s cheeks. But barely had Aaliyah spoken them when she jumped to her feet, listening intensely. Gewey heard it too. Footfalls, barely audible in the sand even to Gewey's heightened senses, were just about to crest a nearby dune.

“An elf,” Aaliyah whispered.

“Better than the Soufis,” said Gewey, relieved.

Then, from over the top of the dune, Weila appeared.

“Perhaps not,” said Aaliyah.

As Weila descended the sandy slope, Gewey could see the intensity in her expression.

“Where is my son?” she demanded, before she was even half the way down.

Gewey opened his mouth to speak, but Aaliyah cut him off.

“He fell in the Dark Oasis,” she said, lowering her head.

Weila's hand slid toward the knife on her belt and hovered just above it. “He was not to enter that evil place. You swore an oath to me!”

Aaliyah told her about the wolves, and Pali’s reason for continuing on with them.

Weila spun around, clenching her fists. “Did he die well?”

“He died bravely, expelling the evil from the Black Oasis,” said Aaliyah in a reverent tone. “Because of his courage, your people need not fear entering that place ever again. It is there that his spirit rests, kept safe by the life force that dwells within.”

“And how do you know this?” she asked, her voice wavering. “Did you see it?”

Aaliyah told her of their battle with the Vrykol, and what their spirit had told them. “He is safe. This I swear.”

“You swear nothing,” she spat angrily. “You swore to protect my son, and yet his body is rotting in the jungle of the Black Oasis. Keep your oaths to yourself.”

“It's not her fault,” said Gewey. “It's mine. I was unable to protect him. I tried, but I couldn't reach him in time.”

She sneered at Gewey. “Arrogant human. What could you have done? A weak member of a weak race who...” Her words trailed off. She closed her tear-filled eyes. “I am sorry. I should not have said that. I did not mean it.”

“No need to apologize,” said Gewey. “I understand your pain. I have lost those close to me as well.”

“Unless you have lost a child of your own, you cannot ever understand.” Her tears fell freely onto the sand. “I do not know how to bear such pain.” She rocked back and forth, weeping.

“You could journey to the Black Oasis,” said Aaliyah gently, once Weila’s sobs had lessened. “You can see for yourself where his spirit resides. Now that the evil is gone, it is safe.”

Weila wiped her eyes. “I may, in time. But for now I must ignore my pain and do what I came here to do. You are to accompany me to see the Amal Molidova. She has sent me to retrieve you.”

“I am sorry,” said Aaliyah. “But we are in need of haste. Our people await us.”

“You will not leave the desert unless she allows it,” said Weila coldly. “Your presence is not an option. The Soufis are gathering in vast numbers, and she will see what role you have played in all of this.”

“We have nothing to do with it,” Gewey protested.

“Perhaps,” said Weila. “That will be for Lyrial to decide. Do not try to run. You will be cut down before you reach the shore.” She motioned for them to follow. “And don't think your powers will save you. I know what you did to the Soufis, Aaliyah. Their burned corpses are a testament to what you are capable of.”

Gewey started to correct her, but a stern glance from Aaliyah silenced him.

“We will comply,” said Aaliyah. “How far must we travel?”

“It is an eight-day journey,” Weila replied. “But we will get there much faster.”

“How?” asked Gewey. The idea of more than two weeks’ delay did not sit well.

“You shall see.” Without another word, Weila headed west. Gewey and Aaliyah looked at each other, then followed her.

The heat of the day was nearly unbearable, but Aaliyah thought it best not to use the power of the flow to cool the air. Weila was in pain at the loss of Pali, and she certainly didn't want to make matters worse by offending the woman’s beliefs.

By midday they had nearly exhausted their water, though Weila had not even opened her flask, and her pace was steadily increasing. A few hours later they saw a small rock formation at the base of a large dune. As they neared it they could make out an opening just big enough for a single person to pass through.

“We are here,” said Weila. Just inside the opening was a steep staircase leading into the dark depths of the earth. “Mind your feet. These stairs are treacherous.”

Gewey had to duck to enter the opening, and quickly found his feet hanging awkwardly over the edge of each step. Within seconds, the light from the entrance was gone; total darkness surrounded them. The air was stale and dusty, and the corridor was barely wide enough for Gewey to squeeze through. They descended for several hundred yards before the stairs finally ended, bringing them into a narrow hallway. This twisted and turned for nearly half a mile. Eventually, Gewey could see a soft light ahead.

As they drew closer, he realized that the light was coming from the walls of a rough, rounded, natural enclosure around twenty feet in both height and diameter. At either end of this, a tunnel disappeared into the distance. Thousands of tiny blue crystals were embedded into the rock, each giving off a faint light to illuminate the cavern. The floor was smooth and polished, clearly made so by the hands of skilled craftsmen, although right through the middle of this smooth surface was a trail of gritty sand that spanned the cavern and disappeared into the entrance of both tunnels. The closer Gewey looked, the more this sand appeared to move and ripple.

“That is how we will travel,” said Weila. She moved to the far right end of the cavern where a number of curved disks, roughly four-feet in diameter, were leaning against the wall. She grabbed three and gave one each to Gewey and Aaliyah.

“I don't understand,” said Gewey.

Weila reached in her belt, pulled out a copper and tossed it on top of the sandy trail. At once it came to life, flowing like a swift river into the tunnel. “This is the Blood of the Desert. We will ride it to the Waters of Shajir.”

Gewey and Aaliyah stared in wonder as the sand settled. Gewey bent down to feel it, but Weila quickly snatched him back.

“Do not touch it,” she warned sternly. “It will pull you in and drag you down into the depths of the earth.” She placed her disk on the floor just beside the sand. “This is a slithas. We will ride atop them.” She motioned for them to place their disks beside hers.

Gewey closed his eyes. He could feel the flow raging all around him. He was tempted to let it in, but resisted. “This place, did your people build it?” he asked.

“It was here when we arrived,” Weila replied. She took some leather strips from her belt and lashed the slithas together through tiny holes along the edge. There are many such as this scattered throughout the desert, though only a few are safe to use.”

“And the ones that aren't?” asked Gewey.

Weila pushed the slithas into the Blood of the Desert. Again it came to life. “They lead to a great vortex in the center of the desert. If you go there, you will not return.” She put one foot atop the lead slithas. “Now be ready.”

Gewey took the center, and Aaliyah the rear. Weila nodded sharply and they all jumped aboard. They barely had time to sit before the sands grabbed the slithas, flinging them forward. Such was the force, the staff and bow strapped to Gewey's pack jammed into his kidney, sending a shockwave of pain through his body.

Almost immediately they were through the tunnel and the glow of the crystals was replaced by darkness. After Gewey's eyes had adjusted, he turned to Aaliyah. She was sitting, legs crossed and eyes closed.

“Have you ever heard of a place like this?” he asked.

“No.” She folded her arms and sighed. “But it is truly wonderful. I can feel the power of the earth here like in no other place I have ever been. Even the jungles of my home seem dead and dreary by comparison.”

“This is where the power that you steal comes from,” said Weila, with a tinge of disgust. “The desert is filled with such wonders. If my heart were not so heavy, I would tell you about them.” She covered her face with her hands and shuddered. A moment later she heaved a sigh and wiped her eyes. “I know that it was not your fault that my son perished, Aaliyah. You made the only choice you could. If the wolves attacked, then it was due to dark forces. They are not evil creatures by nature. I would not have had Pali left alone in the desert.”

“I thank you for your understanding,” said Aaliyah. “And I hope you will journey to the Black Oasis. I believe seeing what has become of it will help to heal your heart.”

“Perhaps. But for now I must mourn.” She noticed the bow and staff Gewey carried. “You did not have those when we first met. Is that what you were after?”

“It was,” Aaliyah affirmed. “The Oasis guarded these things. They were what drew the evil there. It wished to possess them.”

“Is that why the Black Oasis is now safe?” she asked. “Because it no longer has anything to protect?”

“Yes,” Aaliyah replied. “At least in part.”

“Then Pali died for a worthy cause.” More tears fell from Weila’s eyes.

“Your son died fighting at our side,” said Gewey. “He could have stayed within the temple, but chose to face the evil that had invaded your land. To me, that alone is worthy of pride.”

“You are wise for one so young,” said Weila. A smile crept upon her lips. “To die fighting alongside one’s friend is worthy. But to face evil when it is easier to hide - that is even more so.” She touched Gewey's arm. “Your words are a comfort to me, when I thought none could be found.”

Hours passed as the slithas sped along, twisting and winding through the bowels of the desert. The disks appeared to guide themselves, with no actions required from Weila. Gewey had never spent so much time beneath the surface, and soon he’d lost all track of time and direction.

As they continued, he noticed the air changing from time to time. It would grow warm and dry, then later cool and moist. Gewey tried to imagine what lay above them that would cause this. Occasionally, they passed through a section of tunnel with the glowing blue crystals dotting the walls. It was then that he could feel the flow really intensify.

There is so much I don't know, he thought. So many mysteries.

As if reading his thoughts, Aaliyah said: “I could spend a lifetime learning about this place.”

“You could spend many lifetimes and never learn all the wonders of the desert,” remarked Weila.

Finally, Gewey looked ahead and saw the glow of another cavern rapidly approaching. Weila crouched on her slithas; Gewey and Aaliyah did the same.

“We are traveling faster than you may realize,” said Weila. “You will have only one chance to get off. If you miss it, you will end up in the vortex. Just jump when I do and you will live.”

Unnerved by the idea of being swallowed by a vortex of sand, Gewey allowed the flow to enter. The world slowed and his heartbeat calmed. When they reached the cavern Weila jumped. Gewey and Aaliyah followed just in time. Even with the power of the flow raging through him, he still very nearly lost his footing as his boots struck rock.

Much to Gewey’s relief, the passageway leading to the surface was a gentle, upward slope. Hours of sitting had caused his legs to cramp and twinge. But what the passage lacked in depth, it more than made up for in length. He guessed that they walked for at least a mile before reaching the surface. As they emerged, he could see the stars of the night sky shining in the heavens.

The landscape had changed from endless dunes to flat, tightly packed sand, with patches of coarse, brown grass and thorny bushes scattered about. On the horizon, the silhouette of jagged mountains blackened the sky. Gewey had seen his father’s map of the desert when he was a child. He would bring it out when he told him stories of the fire lizards.

He gasped out loud in amazement. “We’re at the other end of the desert. How...?” During their passage, it didn't seem as if they had traveled anything like long enough, or fast enough, to have come this far.

Weila cracked a smile. “I told you. The desert is full of wonders.”

She led them east along a well-trodden trail. Only a few miles ahead they could see a bright blue light, the same hue as the crystals in the caverns, cutting away the darkness.

“When we arrive, you must be silent until I speak with Lyrial,” said Weila. “She will take the death of Pali no better than I.”

“Why is that?” asked Gewey.

Her face was hard and dark. “In human terms, she was his wife.”

A cold chill shot down Gewey's spine. “I see.”

“What is she exactly?” asked Aaliyah. “What authority does she possess?”

“She is the Amal Molidova,” Weila replied reverently. “She is the spiritual leader of my people. In times when a single voice must guide us, we have chosen for it to be hers.”

“And the sand masters?” asked Gewey. He had assumed they were the leaders of the desert elves.

Weila held her head high. “We concern ourselves with matters of the desert. Our task is the well-being of our people as they journey through the dunes. Once our folk are safely home, our responsibility ends. War and turmoil are rare, so we do not often need a single voice to guide us. But things have changed. The Soufis are forming an army. This has never happened until you arrived.”

Gewey felt Aaliyah's unease. Since he had returned her spirit to her body, he could increasingly share what she was feeling. It was similar to the bond he had with Kaylia, only more subtle.

The light ahead quickly grew brighter and brighter until the surrounding area was awash with blue illumination. Gewey could feel the flow growing ever more powerful with each step. The light seemed to be rising from the ground, and soon an immense, fifty-foot high statue came into view. At first he was unable to make out what it depicted because of the light dancing playfully across its surface. But as they drew closer, the image cleared. It was of an elf woman in a flowing gown, face upturned and holding aloft a silver urn. The urn was tilted forward, allowing a constant stream of shining blue liquid to spill out.

When they were only a few yards away the ground changed from sand to polished white marble. Gewey realized that this was part of a massive round platform. In its center was a pool more than one hundred yards in diameter, filled with the blue liquid that poured from the statue. The white marble reflected the light from the water, giving off an eerie yet calming glow that made Gewey think of being within a dream. The flow was so strong that it very nearly entered him before he could stop it.

“Wait here,” Weila ordered. She walked around the edge of the pool and disappeared behind the statue.

Gewey and Aaliyah waited in silence, gazing into the water. Nearly an hour passed before Weila returned carrying a small tan reed basket. Beside her walked a tall, thin elf woman with golden hair falling loosely about her shoulders and all the way down to the back of her knees. Her alabaster skin was made more pronounced by her penetrating, dark green eyes. She wore a blue satin robe that was tied at the waist by a silver cloth and embroidered with hundreds of tiny, intricate silver swirls that interlaced to form one large pattern. Her ageless features were thin and delicate, yet bore the seriousness of authority. Her bare feet made no sound as they touched the cold marble. Just before she reached them, Gewey could smell a salty sweet fragrance that reminded him of the wild flowers after a spring rain.

“I am Lyrial.” Her voice was feminine and soft, yet commanding. “Weila has brought news that Pali fell in the Black Oasis, fighting at your side.”

Gewey wasn't sure if he was to speak, so he just nodded.

Aaliyah stepped forward and bowed. “I am....”

“I know who you are,” she interrupted. “And you know who I am. You are here so I can determine if your arrival has anything to do with the recent gathering of a Soufis army. Once I have found the truth of the matter, then we will discuss Pali.”

“I can assure you, we do not have anything to do with the Soufis,” said Aaliyah.

Lyrial’s expression gave nothing away. “We shall see. But I am not a discourteous host. You shall eat and rest. Then we will talk. Weila will see to your needs.” Turning, she made her way back to the statue and sat cross-legged beside it.

Weila opened the basket and pulled out two thin blankets, a loaf of bread, some dried fruit, and a bottle of wine. “You will have a few hours before she will speak with you. I suggest you rest until then. I will return shortly before sunrise.” She turned to leave, then paused. “Don't worry about the cold. The Waters of Shajir will keep you warm enough.”

Once Weila was gone, Gewey and Aaliyah laid out their blankets and ate their meal. The bread was plain and tough, but the fruit sweeter than expected. The wine wasn't as good as some he’d had in the past, but it went down well enough.

“What should we do?” asked Gewey, leaning back on his elbows.

“What can we do?” Aaliyah lay down and closed her eyes. “If we run, we will either be killed or forced to kill those who are not our enemy. We will rest while we can, and then speak to Lyrial. Hopefully, we will be able to convince her that we have nothing to do with the Soufis.”

“I may be forced to tell them what I am, you know.”

Aaliyah opened her eyes and looked at Gewey. “That is for you to decide.”

Gewey lay down and allowed himself to drift off to sleep. Aaliyah was right. What else could they do but rest and see what the dawn brought?

Chapter 21

Gewey and Aaliyah were woken by Weila. She offered them both a cup of clear, sweet-smelling juice, which they gratefully accepted. However, its fragrance did not prepare Gewey for the sour taste that followed. His face twisted and he nearly spat it out.

Weila laughed. “It is from the fruit of the ganhi bush. It is sour, but very good for you.”

“Is Lyrial ready to see us?” asked Aaliyah.

Weila nodded and pointed to the far end of the pool near to the statue. “Go to her. I will wait here.”

“You're not coming?” asked Gewey.

“As I said, this is a matter for the Amal Molidova, not a sand master,” she explained. “Do not worry. We have spoken of Pali, and she does not hold you to blame any more than I.”

Gewey and Aaliyah finished their juice, then made their way around the pool to where Lyrial sat waiting. Two flat round cushions had been placed in front of her. She motioned for them to sit. She wore a pair of loose-fitting, cream, linen trousers and matching blouse. Her platinum blond hair was now in a tight braid that fell all the way down her back and wound around her waist, ending up in her lap. As she looked at them, her bright green eyes twinkled in the blue light rising from the water. Her face had the same timeless quality Gewey had come to know in elves, yet he knew she must be quite old.

Lyrial's eyes darted back and forth from Gewey to Aaliyah. “I do not think you are in league with the Soufis. So do not fear.”

“That is good,” said Aaliyah. “And know that we come in friendship.”

Lyrial raised an eyebrow. “Is that so? It is hard to imagine that those who exiled my people so long ago have suddenly had a change of heart. No. I believe that if you desire friendship, it is out of necessity. Whatever the troubles are in the west, I think you have brought them with you.”

“First, I would say that it was not my people who exiled you,” said Aaliyah, her tone forceful and steady. “My people are from across what you know as the Western Abyss. But do not think that is a reflection on the other elves of this land. I do not believe they even remember you exist. Certainly those living today had no part in your exile.”

Lyrial shook her head and let out a huff. “It would stand to reason that their arrogance and folly would shorten their memories.”

“Your kin do not seem to share your attitude,” said Aaliyah. “Those we spoke with seemed pleased that the elves of the west would come.”

“It is for them to live and die, free in the sands,” she shot back. “It is for me to protect that freedom. Their hearts are not as burdened as mine. They do not read the ancient lore.” She paused and sighed. “Still, I am not unwilling to welcome others if my people truly wish it. And stories of the elves from across the Abyss have been told long before we came here. But if your people have returned after all this time, then perhaps it is you who have brought war.”

“I can only tell you we have not,” Aaliyah retorted. “We have been unable to return until now.”

Lyrial sighed. “Very well then. Tell me your tale.”

Aaliyah told her story, beginning with their arrival, and ending when they left for the desert. All she left out was Gewey's identity as a god. “I know that Weila told you why we came, and that we had intended to leave your desert in peace,” she concluded.

“She told me what you allowed her to know,” Lyrial replied. “But you have not revealed all. What is it you fear me to learn, I wonder?”

Aaliyah stiffened. “I have told you all that you need to understand - that we are guiltless regarding the Soufis. Anything else is our affair.”

Lyrial placed her finger to her chin and met Aaliyah’s gaze. “Is that so? You may not have caused the Soufis to gather yourself, but I’ll wager that whatever it is you fight most surely can be held responsible. Soufis are wretched slavers that plague the sands. They may be cunning and fierce, but they would never gather in such great numbers on their own. They raid and flee.”

“I will say nothing more on the matter,” said Aaliyah.

Lyrial and Aaliyah stared into each other’s eyes, neither one blinking.

“What she hasn't revealed is me,” Gewey interjected. “I am what she will not tell you of.”

Aaliyah stiffened, then folded her hands.

Lyrial was unable to prevent herself from laughing. “You? And what could she possibly reveal about you?”

“We came here to retrieve what was guarded within the Black Oasis,” he said. “They were gifts. Gifts left for me by my father -Gerath.”

Lyrial burst out laughing again. “You think a half-man is something new to us? You think us ignorant fools?”

“I am not a half-man,” Gewey asserted. “And it was not Aaliyah who burned the Soufis. I did.”

“I see.” Lyrial stood. “So you claim to be a god, and not a half-man? That would be something indeed - if it were true. Of course, such an outrageous claim can be settled easily enough.”

She held out her hand. Gewey took it and she led him to the edge of the Waters of Shajir. “Do not move,” she instructed. In a flash she drew a dagger from her sleeve and cut the back of his hand.

Gewey winced, more out of surprise than anything else, as his blood trickled into the shimmering liquid. The effect was instant. The second the blood touched the surface of the water, the ground began to rumble. Beneath the waters, a billowing red cloud boiled up, rapidly covering the entire pool. Suddenly, a thunderous boom knocked them both off their feet. Fire erupted from the urn atop the great statue, shooting hundreds of feet into the air. The flames fanned out then fell quickly back down again before disappearing in a blinding flash just a few feet above the ground.

Gradually the earth stopped shaking and the blood red water transformed back into its original blue color. Lyrial remained where she was, eyes wide and mouth agape. Gewey got up and offered her his hand. She gazed at him in awe. Only after a long moment did she allow him to help her to her feet and lead her back to where they had left Aaliyah. Lyrial still looked stunned, unable to speak.

Just then, Weila ran over. “What happened?”

Lyrial finally found her voice. She motioned for them all to sit. “It seems that this concerns all elves, Weila. You should stay.” She leaned forward and stared into Gewey eyes. “How is this possible? Can the end times be here at last?”

“I don't know anything about that,” said Gewey. “But if you will allow me, I'll tell you my story as well.”

Lyrial nodded. “Of course. Yes, please.”

Gewey recounted the events of his life, beginning with the death of his father. Several times he had to stop and backtrack as he remembered details. Lyrial and Weila took a special interest when he told of his bonding with Kaylia, asking him three times to repeat the details of this.

More than two hours passed before he’d finished. By then, the light of the morning sun had painted the sky red and purple. Gewey got to his feet, rubbed his neck and stretched his arms.

“Then it has come to pass,” Lyrial whispered to herself. “Your name - Darshan. We have heard this before. It is the name of the one who will herald the end times. It is said that your coming precedes the reunion of the elves, and the upheaval of the world. The waging of a great war that will remake creation and reveal a new destiny for the elves.”

“I have no desire to involve your people in any war,” said Gewey. “I came here only for the gifts of Gerath. Now that I have them, I intend to leave you in peace.”

Lyrial shook her head and smiled benignly, as a mother speaking to an ignorant child. “The Soufis have gathered for war. The one you call the Dark Knight is clearly behind this. He either intends to make war on us, or to march them from the desert and make war on you. Either way, we cannot allow it. If the Soufis attack us, then it will be their doom, but if they leave the sands...”

Her jaw tightened. “I will not allow the filth of the desert to visit their horrors on the rest of the world. And if this Dark Knight would call on such people to fight for him, he has revealed to us his true nature.”

“What will you do?” asked Aaliyah.

“We have already begun to gather our forces,” said Lyrial. “And our scouts are watching every move the Soufis make.”

“Then you should take care to watch for the Vrykol,” said Gewey. “They are powerful and deadly. It was a Vrykol that killed Pali, and nearly killed Aaliyah. If they are with the Soufis, you must be careful. They can only die if you remove their heads.”

“I will inform my people of this,” said Weila grimly.

“If the Soufis attempt to leave the desert, we will stop them,” stated Lyrial. “Once they are dealt with, we will go west for the first time in many generations.” She got to her feet and looked at the statue, her arms across her chest. “And though this may be our end, we will not be idle while evil floods the world.”

“How many are you?” asked Aaliyah.

Lyrial turned back to face Gewey, her chest swelling with pride. “We can raise an army of twenty-thousand in a short time. Twice that, if needed. But it would take longer.”

“And how many are the Soufis?” he asked.

“They have three times our number at least.” Lyrial smiled viciously. “But they could have ten times that, and still they could not hope to defeat us. It is long past time we dealt with them once and for all. The atrocities they have visited on the people of this land will finally be avenged.”

“I would hear more of your people,” said Aaliyah. “Your desert is filled with wonders I have never dreamed of. The scholars of my land could spend generations studying the Blood of the Desert alone. And this.” She pointed to the statue. “Who built it?”

Lyrial sat and crossed her legs. “It was here long before we arrived. The legends say it was built by the gods. And as far as our tales go, it will be a pleasure to tell you of the desert. For all my people's merits, they care little for my stories.”

“That's not true,” Weila protested jokingly. “I have listened to you ramble on for six-hundred years and never complained.”

Both Aaliyah and Gewey's eyes grew wide wide.

“How old are you?” asked Aaliyah.

Lyrial smiled. “I am seven-hundred and four. But Weila is far older.” She could see the confusion in their expressions. “This surprises you?”

“Indeed,” said Aaliyah. “I am nearly three hundred. The elders of my land rarely see six. How is it that you live so long?”

Lyrial thought for a moment. “Perhaps it is that we do not steal life from the earth. Perhaps that power shortens your life.”

Aaliyah looked closely at both Lyrial and Weila. “That may be. Or perhaps it is the desert itself that extends your life.”

Lyrial nodded. “That could also be. It is said that the power of the Creator first gave life to the world here. And that it was here that the gods were born. It is quite possible that our legends are more than just stories.”

“If it is the desert that extends your life,” said Aliyah, “then I fear what will happen if you try to leave it.”

Lyrial pondered this for a moment then said: “I cannot allow this to concern me. My people will not be trapped by our own mortality. We will know soon enough if what you suggest is true.”

“But....” began Gewey. Lyrial held up her hand, silencing him.

“There is nothing to discuss,” she asserted. “Our course is set. I will not dwell on it. Now, if you still would like to hear stories of my people?”

“Of course,” said Gewey.

For the next few hours, Lyrial told them of how her people were exiled for protesting over the enslavement of humans, and how they came to live in the desert. She spun tales of adventure, tragedy and joy. She told them of their fight with the Soufis, and their protection of the humans from slavery. Weila looked bored and began dozing.

“Your people have lived a noble life,” Aaliyah remarked once Lyrial had finished. “That you were exiled for objecting to the subjugation of humans connects with our own history.”

“A story you can tell me another time,” said Lyrial, rising to her feet. “I will not delay your mission any longer.” Weila handed her a small silver flask. Lyrial walked to the pool and filled it. “Take this,” she said, handing the flask to Gewey. “The Waters of Shajir are powerful. Their healing properties are unmatched. A single drop will heal the deepest wound.”

“Thank you,” said Gewey, bowing low. “It will serve as a reminder of your kindness.”

Lyrial bowed in return. “Once we have defeated the Soufis, I will march my people to the western edge of the desert. There we will await word from you. For now, Weila will take you to the shore.” She smiled at Aaliyah. “I look forward to our next meeting. Please tell our kin that were are overjoyed to reunite with them.”

Aaliyah nodded. “I will. And I know they will feel the same. Your friendship will be of great value in the days to come.”

Lyrial took one final lingering look at Gewey before smiling and walking away. Gewey’s eyes followed her as she departed.

“Come, Darshan,” said Weila. “If we hurry, I can have you back to the shore by nightfall tomorrow.”

“I wish we had more time,” said Gewey.

“I agree,” said Aaliyah. “We should send an envoy here as soon as possible.”

“But what if you're right?” Gewey couldn't help but think about what might happen if the desert elves were to leave their home. “What if it is the desert that lets them live for so long?”

Weila stopped in her tracks. “My people will not sacrifice their honor for a long life. Do not think on it any further.”

“How long do you live?” asked Gewey.

“Our elders see nine hundred years or more,” she replied. “But think on this. I listened to your story. You have lived more in your short life than any elf that walks the sands. I would give all of my years to live a life of substance, however short it may be. If we step off the sand and perish, it would still be better than to have hidden ourselves away in fear and dishonor.”

Weila led them for ten miles before reaching a rock formation similar the one they had seen on their journey to the Waters of Shajir. Once again they descended deep underground.

This time their trip riding a slithas on the Blood of the Desert seemed to pass by much more quickly. Weila regaled them with tales of her homeland with ceaseless energy.

Finally, she turned to Aaliyah. “I noticed that during your recount of events you spoke very little of your own home. Surely there is much to tell.”

“There is,” she replied. “More than could be told in the time we have.”

“Then tell me of your village,” said Weila.

Aaliyah laughed. “Well, my village is actually a city of more than one-hundred thousand elves.”

Gewey cocked his head. “Then that's something I'd like to hear about too.”

“Very well,” she said, laughing softly. “My city is called Parylon. It is on the shores of what you know as the Western Abyss, though on the other end and many leagues away.” Her voice became distant. “To put is simply, Parylon is beautiful. Tall silver spires that glimmer majestically in the sunlight, dwarfing the redwood forest that border it to the east. Between the spires are lavish homes and stunning gardens. Halls of learning and meditation are built from the finest marble, and adorned with sculptures and reliefs lovingly carved by the greatest artisans the world has ever seen. One could spend a hundred years wandering the city and never see them all.

“The streets are paved with polished green slate that reflects the light of the noonday sun, making the whole city look as if it were an extension to the Creator's grace. In winter, when the sea churns and foams, the spires cast a green shadow, transforming the coast into an emerald field of waves and sand.

“Each afternoon the city fills with music and laughter. We boast six schools where the finest musicians study, teach, and compose. Each afternoon, the students take to the streets so that the world can listen to what they have learned. In the evening, the masters give concerts in the city square. As a young girl I would wait for hours and hours for the song masters to arrive, and listen until my mother would find me and take me home.

“At night, a million lights shine more brilliantly than the stars in the heavens. During the spring, the moss of the listorlia grows on rooftops in never-ending intricate swirling patterns. In the light of the full moon it glows softly and releases its snow white spores into the air, covering the streets in a blanket of sweet smelling wonder.”

She paused and sighed sadly. “I do miss it.”

“How could anyone leave such a place?” asked Weila. “Why would your people have come here to begin with, when such magic exists in their homeland?”

Aaliyah smiled. “I look at your desert home and see far more magic. For all our accomplishments, we have nothing like the Blood of the Desert, or the Waters of Shajir. And our life is not without peril. I tell you of the best we have to offer. These are the things I love, yet not all there is. Beyond our borders lives a brutish race of foul creatures. We call them the Morzhash. Though only the Creator knows what they call themselves.”

“What are they?” asked Gewey.

“We do not know for certain,” she replied. “They are twice the size of any human, stronger than any elf, and covered in thick black hair. Their faces are twisted and flat, with a swine like nose and narrow red eyes.”

“Are they intelligent?” asked Weila.

“They are cunning to be sure,” said Aaliyah. “And deadly, though it seems they possess nothing more sophisticated than clubs and spears. They do not work metal, and live in makeshift huts as they hunt and scavenge the forests and jungles. Occasionally we find what remains of a camp, but have never yet found any permanent settlements. As far as we know, they live a nomadic life.”

“It wouldn't seem like they could trouble your people too much,” said Gewey.

“For thousands of years they have been little more than a nuisance,” she replied. “They raid a village, or attack a traveler. We have captured a few, but have never been able to decipher their crude language. In fact, until the time of my grandmother, we had no idea they even had a language.”

Gewey tried to picture the creatures in his mind. “You say they raid your villages. Why?”

Aaliyah shrugged. “There is no apparent reason. They take nothing. They simply kill and destroy.”

“Why not hunt them down?” asked Weila.

“We have tried,” she replied. “For all their size and girth, they move through the forest with amazing speed. And they disappear long before we can track them.”

“Still, it seems like a minor problem,” said Gewey.

“Until the past few years, it has been,” she said. “But lately their raids have become more brazen. They have begun to invade deeper into our land than ever before.”

“You think it is because of what's happening here?” asked Gewey.

“It may be linked somehow,” Aaliyah replied. “The Morzhash would certainly make formidable allies should the Dark Knight find a way to control them.”

The thought of these massive savage beasts fighting on the side of the Dark Knight sent chills down Gewey’s spine. The Vrykol were bad enough, but should these creatures reach their shores, they could cause fear and panic across the land. “We must hope the two things are not related,” he said.

Weila laughed, shocking Gewey out of his morbid thoughts. “Beasts or no beasts, I intend to see your city, Aaliyah. And may the Creator help any pig-nosed oaf that tries to stop me.”

Aaliyah smiled. “I would not worry. My city is one of three, and by far the oldest. The lands around us would burn to cinders before we let it fall. Though we did not come in great numbers to these shores, should the Dark Knight think to extend his grasp to my home, he will find that only the humans of this land could raise a larger army.”

“Your words give me hope,” said Weila. “I must admit, the elves of the desert have been alone for too long. Your arrival, Darshan, has brought us the hope of kinship.” She folded her hands and bowed her head. “Yes, I think that perhaps your arrival has saved us. A people cannot live without moving forward. We have become too set in our ways.”

Gewey reached out and touched her shoulder. “Darshan is a name given to me by a god. And yes, I am his son. But my father was a human. He raised me, and taught me to be the man I am. He named me for his father - Gewey.”

Weila’s face twisted as she tried not to laugh. “Gewey is a silly name for a savior.”

“Gewey is a human name,” he countered.  “And it will be the human in me that fights the Dark Knight. I will either defeat him, or be destroyed myself. And should I win that battle - if I somehow find a way - nothing will change. Your people will still be in the desert.” His gaze shot to Aaliyah. His passion swelled. “Your people will still be across the sea. The world will still be the world. Humans, elves, and even the Morzhash. Nothing will change. Once there is victory - what then? What will you do with the world you are given?” The flow was raging through him as his voice roared. He closed his eyes, but his frustration and anger grew. He reached out desperately. Aaliyah was there. His spirit had flown straight to her.

“Calm your storm,” she whispered. “I am here.”

Gewey shot an accusing glance. “You....I....” His eyes fell. “I don’t know why I said that. I suddenly felt angry. I am sorry.”

A tear spilled down Aaliyah's cheek. “There is no need to apologize. I could feel your passion. Your true nature is beginning to assert itself.”

“What do you mean?” he asked.

“You are what your nature has made you,” she explained. “Your human side is only one part of you. The gods are the most powerful beings ever created. And their feelings are equally powerful.”

“This is true,” agreed Weila. “Even in our stories, the anger, love, hate, and desires of the gods are far beyond those of mortals.”

“Are you saying I am becoming more…more god?” The idea frightened him.

“Perhaps,” Aaliyah replied. “I cannot say for certain. But I feel that you are changing.”

“How do you mean, you feel it?” asked Gewey.

“When you saved me, it created a bond between us,” said Aaliyah, smiling sweetly. She touched his cheek. “I knew it at once. I am surprised you did not.”

“But...but...” Gewey stammered. “What of Nehrutu? And what of Kaylia?”

“What we share is different,” she explained. “When you touched the essence of my spirit, I became a part of you.” She could see Gewey’s discomfort. “Do not fret. As far as I can tell it has not interfered with your connection to Kaylia. And as far as Nehrutu is concerned, that time between us has passed.” The mention of Nehrutu brought sadness to her voice.

This did little to ease Gewey’s mind. “Please release your hold on my bond with her,” he said.

“You could do this on your own, I suspect.” She sighed and nodded. “But very well. I will do as you ask.”

Suddenly, Gewey could feel the barrier being lifted. Instinctively, he reached out for Kaylia. She was there. Joy and rapture rushed through him as they became one. The longing was over. He was with her.

Aaliyah was barely able to shake him out of his communion before they arrived at their destination. Weila led them back to the surface. As they emerged, the sun was just going down and Gewey could taste the salty sea air. Three hours later they were back to where they had left their small boat tied up on the beach. Gewey and Aaliyah said a heartfelt farewell to Weila, then made their way back to the ship. The crew cheered wildly as they climbed on deck.

“Tales will have to wait until tomorrow,” announced Aaliyah. “We are both weary from travel.”

That night Gewey washed and slid into bed, still excited that he could contact Kaylia once again.

“I envy her good fortune,” said Aaliyah as she lay down and pulled the blanket tightly around her.

Gewey looked over. “I am the fortunate one. And not only because of Kaylia.”

Chapter 22

Kaylia ran through the halls of Valshara, nearly knocking over several people as she raced past. On reaching the healing chamber she threw open the door. Nehrutu was treating a wounded soldier who had been hurt building the gallows.

“You look happy,” he remarked. “Has something happened?”

“Aaliyah has released her hold on Gewey,” she replied, speaking and laughing at the same time.

“That is good,” said Nehrutu. “Were they successful?”

“They were,” she replied. “They are returning as we speak. Better still, Aaliyah has given up her quest for Gewey's heart.”

Nehrutu nodded. “Then you have won. You should be pleased.”

“I am.” She knelt beside Nehrutu. “But this also means you can be with Aaliyah again.”

“Perhaps,” he replied skeptically. “First, I would first like to know what happened to sway her. She does not give up easily. That she abandoned her aspirations for Gewey does not necessarily mean she wishes to return to me.”

The door opened and Selena entered. Her face was dark with worry. “I have received a message from the one called Yanti.”

“What does it say?” asked Kaylia.

“He is demanding the release of his soldiers,” she replied. “He says that he rightfully occupied Valshara by order of King Halmara. Halmara claims that Valshara rests within the borders of his kingdom, and not those of King Lousis.”

“Do you think there is any truth to this?” asked Nehrutu.

“I don't know,” she replied. “But if there is, King Lousis may be in danger. We must warn him. The council will be meeting any day now.”

“Yanti may be trying to draw you out into the open,” Nehrutu suggested. “If you leave these walls you will be vulnerable.”

“I agree.” She furled her brow. “I have already sent a messenger. But if what Salmitaya says is true, Yanti is powerful. If he defeated my son, he will certainly be able to stop a messenger from getting through easily enough.”

“There is nothing to do but wait and see,” said Nehrutu.

The door flew open and Matrus, one of Selena's personal guards entered. He looked pale and anxious. “High Lady. There is someone requesting your presence at the gate. He says his name is Yanti.”

Selena's eyes widened in surprise. “I want archers on the wall at once,” she ordered. “Tell them to not let him out of their sight.”

“A bold move,” Nehrutu mused. “Or he does not fear us. Will you speak to him?”

Selena thought for a moment. “I will.”

“But High Lady....” objected Matrus.

“Don't worry,” said Selena, smiling. “If this Yanti fellow makes a move to harm me, it will be his last. No, I think if assassination was his goal, he would not simply walk up to the gates.”

“Still,” Nehrutu said, “you should keep your distance. I will accompany you.”

“As will I,” added Kaylia, thumbing her knife.

“Now go,” Selena said to Matrus. “I want archers on the wall in five minutes.”

Matrus turned quickly and sped off.

Selena allowed sufficient time for the archers to get into position before making her way to the front gate. Yanti stood a few yards away from the entrance. He was dressed in an elegant red shirt, black trousers, and a black satin jacket with polished gold buttons. A red leather belt held a beautifully crafted gold hilted rapier. His brown curly hair was oiled and pushed back in true noble fashion. He flashed a broad smile and bowed low as they approached.

“Thank you for seeing me, High Lady,” he said.

“What is it you want, Yanti?” asked Selena, trying to contain her anger.

“As my message said,” he replied, “I want my men. Oh, and Salmitaya as well, if you please.” He spoke her name as if it were an afterthought.

“Your men are to be hanged,” said Selena. “And you will never see Salmitaya again.”

Yanti laughed and wagged his finger. “There is no reason to hang my men. They are not criminals. And as for dear, sweet Salmitaya - what possible use would you have for her? She has no information useful to you.”

“Your men are criminals,” she shot back. “They broke into my home and slaughtered my people. That was the act of thugs, not soldiers. And they will be treated as such.”

“They acted on orders given by the lord of this land, my love,” said Yanti. “Your temple's very existence is in clear violation of the laws of King Halmara and the city of Skalhalis. I simply carried out the will of a trusted ally. Your quarrel is with him. Not me; not my men; and certainly not poor Salmitaya. If you release them to me then we can all put this unpleasant business behind us.”

“You waste your breath,” barked Selena. “And my time. You think you can come here after what you have done and dictate to me what I must do?”

Yanti sighed and shook his head. “I think you would want to prevent further bloodshed, my love. I shudder to think what King Halmara will do when he learns what has happened here. Especially if you were to execute my men.” He glanced up at the archers on the wall. “And please, do not think to harm me. Should that happen, the consequences to King Lousis would be most severe.” His smiled widened. “And you should know that your message to the king was not received, though I assure you that your messenger is unharmed - for now.”

Selena face turned red with fury. “If you harm him....”

Yanti held up his hand. “Fear not, my love. I am not an animal. I only take life when I must. After all, I did choose to leave your beloved son alive, did I not? I’m sure Salmitaya has told you of our little scuffle.”

It was all Selena could do not to order the archers to fill Yanti with arrows. “You should be most glad that you did. Or I swear your false king would hear your screams all the way in Angrääl.”

“I admire your passion,” said Yanti. “It is a shame you have chosen to be an enemy of the Reborn King. Your fall will cause me great sadness.”

“We shall see who falls,” she said, clenching her jaw. “If there is nothing more to say you should leave now, before I decide to do something rash.”

“I will leave when the matter of my men is settled,” said Yanti. “Release them by sundown and I will send word to Althetas to allow King Lousis to live. Do it not, and he will surely die.” He bowed again. “I will await your favorable reply.” He turned and strode off.

“Do you think he is telling the truth?” asked Kaylia. “Do you think he really has the means to assassinate the king?”

Selena watched as Yanti disappeared around a bend. “I don't know. But I’m not sure I can afford to take that risk.”

“And what of Salmitaya?” asked Nehrutu.

“No matter what happens, she will remain here,” Selena replied firmly. “I gave my word that she would not be returned to that brute, and I will keep it.”

Her next words seemed to stick in her throat. She knew what must be done, though it stabbed at her heart. “Prepare the prisoners for release,” she said. “But see to it they leave with nothing more than their underclothes. Pile their possessions in the center of the yard and burn them.”

Selena went to her quarters and sent for Salmitaya. A few minutes passed before a guard arrived with Salmitaya in shackles.

“You can remove those,” Selena ordered.

Salmitaya sat across from Selena, her face expressionless, hands folded in her lap.

Selena told her about Yanti. “I promised you I would not allow you to be taken, and I will keep my word. But I need to know....”

“You need to know if he has someone near King Lousis,” Salmitaya cut in. “I would think he does. In fact, I'm certain of it. And if he says he is allied with King Halmara, I would think that is true as well. Yanti lies, but he mixes lies with truth. I also know that if you do not do as he requests, he will make good on his threats.”

“I will release his men,” said Selena sternly. “But I will not turn you over.”

Salmitaya shook head and chuckled softly. “If you do not, he will make good his threat. Lousis will die.”

“He may do that regardless,” Selena countered.

“No,” said Salmitaya, “He will hold to his agreement. At least until his men are away. By then you may be able to warn the king.”

“Why would Yanti care about a few hundred soldiers?” she asked.

“Who knows?” Salmitaya bowed her head. “But it is not out of a sense of responsibility to them, that much is certain. Whatever the reason, he is not one to bluff. If he says he will kill Lousis, you can count on it.”

Selena stood up and poured two cups of wine. Offering one to Salmitaya, she stared thoughtfully into the woman's eyes.

Salmitaya held the glass under her nose, savoring the sweet scent. She closed her eyes as the wine passed over her tongue. “I remember when I was a novice,” she said softly. “I would sneak away to the tavern to drink wine and listen to the musicians with my friends. We were always so afraid we’d get caught, but that just made it even more fun.” Her body now felt totally relaxed. She could almost hear the songs and laughter of her fellow novices. “Things were so much simpler then,” she added, her voice now a mere whisper. Her eyes were growing heavier and heavier. The wine glass slipped from her fingers, but the sound of it breaking as it struck the floor seemed distant. So very far away. Yes, that's what she wanted. To be far away.

Selena called the guard. “Have her body wrapped in linen and given to the captives when they are released.” She leaned down and pushed the hair away from Salmitaya's face.

“I'm sorry,” she said.

Chapter 23

For six days, the kings and queens of the twelve city states had been arriving. Only King Halmara was still absent. The presence of elves had caused more than a few nervous stares, especially as King Lousis made a point of greeting each new arrival with Theopolou and Ertik at his side. Co-existence with elves was common in most of the twelve cities, but only in certain areas - and never as welcome guests in the house of the king. But even the elves didn't cause so much of a stir as Ertik’s presence. As a representative from the High Lady of Valshara, speculation ran wild as to his reason for attending.

Theopolou spent his time exploring the king’s library and reading about the history of the twelve cities. Mohanisi spent most of his time with Linis, who was busy preparing to journey to Sharpstone. From time to time Theopolou would be approached by the kings and queens and asked about the goings on of the elves. Word had already spread about the battle in Valshara. Most could scarcely believe that human and elf had fought side by side. Theopolou politely answered their questions.

By the seventh day it was decided to proceed without King Halmara. That evening there would be a banquet, and in the morning the council would meet.

A few hours before the banquet, Theopolou returned to his quarters. The flood of questions had steadily increased until the very thought of another conversation caused him to cringe. As he settled into a plush chair and opened a book, there was a soft rap at the door.

He sighed and closed the book. “Come.”

It was Linis. “I want to speak to you before I leave for Sharpstone. Mohanisi is still exploring the city and says he will not be joining you for the banquet.”

“Your company is welcome,” said Theopolou, smiling. “I wish my presence at the banquet was also not required, for I would gladly join Mohanisi.” He raised an eyebrow. “Have you spoken to Lord Ganflin?”

“I have,” he replied, taking a seat beside Theopolou. “He is providing me with two dozen men and ten thousand in gold coin to aid Millet and Dina. He has already sent word to Lord Broin, and I hope to get his help as well.”

Theopolou nodded approvingly. “That is good. You should have enough to raise a sizable force.”

“I hope to send for elves soon,” said Linis. “But I think it best to prepare the people of Sharpstone first. Most people along the Goodbranch have never seen an elf, and have only stories of the Great War to form their opinions.”

“I am certain you can ease their fears,” said Theopolou. “Let me know when the time comes, and I will send as many as can be spared.” He could see Linis’ expression darken. “What is it?”

Linis sat.  “I have heard some disturbing news. The human woman, Maybell, has just arrived in the Temple of Ayliazarah here in Althetas. She was a priestess in Kaltinor and traveled with Gewey and Lee when I first met them. I am told she was accompanied by Malstisos.”

“I know of him,” said Theopolou. “His father and I fought together in the Great War.”

“He has left Althetas to go north to the Steppes.” Linis paused. “To face judgment.”

“For what purpose?” he asked, taken aback.

“I do not have enough information to say for certain,” said Linis. “But I think you should speak to Maybell.”

“I will send for her after the council meets.” Theopolou stood. “And you should not delay any longer, my friend.”

Linis got to his feet and sighed. “It seems I am ever traveling. But you are right. Every moment is precious. Farewell, Theopolou. May the Creator bless you.”

“And you,” he replied, smiling.

Once Linis left, Theopolou sat back down and tried to clear his mind. He felt age gathering upon him as he thumbed through the pages of his book. His journey to the Steppes weighed heavily on his mind, and the fact that Malstisos had gone there to face his judgment could well complicate matters. He put the book down and slipped into bed. A bit of sleep would do him good.

A few hours later he rose and dressed for the banquet. The king’s manor was vast, with a dining hall large enough to seat more than two hundred guests. Originally built just after the Great War, the building stood three stories high and was constructed from the hard black stone quarried in the lands just south of the Steppes. Though the décor was not elaborate, it suited the personality of Althetas and its people. Tapestries of great warships and valiant warriors hung on the walls of the larger rooms alongside huge paintings. There were also sculptures of various lords and heroes. The furniture was diverse, as one would expect from a port city; examples of styles from all over the world could be seen in every room. Theopolou even spotted a few tables and chairs of elf make. He had seen paintings of the original building, and knew that it was much smaller than what presently stood. He’d been told that each new king had added a little bit more to the manor during his reign.

The grounds were well tended and included dozens of small flower gardens. These were filled mostly with local flora, but here and there a flower from a distant land could be seen. A tall, wrought iron gate provided an imposing entrance, while matching railings with a manicured hedge running just inside of this surrounded the entire manor and grounds.

Theopolou contemplated the idea of skipping the banquet. Every moment he spent in idle conversation with the nobility of the Western Abyss made him anxious to depart for the Steppes. He wandered for a time, admiring the tapestries and sculptures, and though these were not as fine as those in his own home, he was nonetheless impressed at the talent of human hands.

He sighed. Attend he must.

When he finally arrived in the banquet hall, the polished oak double doors were open wide and the room was already filled to capacity. Six long tables had been placed end to end and ran very nearly the full one hundred foot length of the room. To his left, a harpist played softly; the music carried over the voices, filling the hall. Three crystal chandeliers hung from the tall ceiling, while dozens of silver lanterns lined the walls. At the opposite end of the room a raised platform held another table that spanned the hall’s width. There, King Lousis, Ertik, and the other nobles were seated. He saw a few elves that had taken seats at the far right table, along with Lord Brasley Amnadon. Theopolou had only taken a few steps when a trumpet rang out.

“Lord Theopolou, Your Highness,” cried a herald stationed beside the door.

The room became silent as all eyes fell on him. He paused for a moment, then made his way to the king’s table where an empty seat at the monarch’s right side awaited him. Everyone rose and bowed. Theopolou returned the gesture before taking his seat.

“Our kitchen has been preparing a few elf dishes just for you and your people,” said Lousis cheerfully. “Though from what I've heard, The Frog's Wishbone may far outshine what I have to offer. Lord Ganflin prides himself on his elf cuisine.”

“Yes,” said Theopolou. “Linis has mentioned it. If ever I have the time I would like very much to explore your city.”

Just then a servant approached and whispered in the king’s ear.

“It would seem that King Halmara has arrived,” announced Lousis, a look of concern on his face. “Along with a representative from Angrääl.”

“Will you receive this representative?” asked Theopolou.

“If he travels with King Halmara then I have little choice,” Lousis replied angrily. “To deny him entrance would be seen as an insult. Skalhalis is an important port, and nearly as large as Althetas. And King Halmara carries much influence within the council.”

“Prepare them a seat,” Lousis ordered the servant. “And show them in. Then have quarters prepared.”

The servant scurried off.

“So it would seem Angrääl is making no secret of their intent,” said Theopolou.

“It could be worse than you think,” said Lousis. “Valshara is within King Halmara’s borders. If he took part in the siege, then this council meeting may well be a useless gesture. The cities to the south will certainly side with Skalhalis, leaving the coast split in two. Then we will be caught between the elves of the Steppes and Skalhalis.”

“I hope to sway the elves there from their present course once my business here is concluded,” said Theopolou. “If I am successful, then the situation will not be as dire.”

“And if you fail...” Lousis' words faded as two figures stepped inside the hall.

The first was dressed in a fine blue silk shirt, open at the neck with silver ruffles, matching trousers, and polished black leather boots. A golden scabbard hung from a black belt. The hilt of the sword was interlaced with gold and ivory and crowned with a blue sapphire. His short, sandy blond hair was oiled and combed back neatly. Though clearly a man of some years, his tan skin and stout build gave him a somewhat youthful appearance.

At his side was a short, thin man dressed in a plain, black cotton robe tied in at the waist with a slender white rope. Theopolou guessed him to be in his early thirties, yet his jet-black hair was already thinning. Though not strong in stature, his piercing blue eyes were striking, even from across the room. This, together with his confident strides gave him a commanding presence. He followed close behind as they approached the table.

King Lousis stood up and bowed. “King Halmara. I welcome you.”

Halmara smiled. “Thank you, my old friend. I have missed your company.” He stepped aside and motioned toward his companion. “I present Lord Sialo Magrifal, Ambassador of Angrääl and servant of the Reborn King.”

“You dress oddly for a lord,” remarked Lousis. “Do you not?”

“If my attire offends your highness, I will change,” said Sialo, bowing low.

“Not at all,” Lousis replied. “Please, be welcome. A place has been set for you both. My home is at your disposal.”

They bowed and took their seats at the far left end of the table.

“I think I will be glad to have you in the council tomorrow,” said Lousis quietly to his right. “Your support will be crucial.”

“Naturally, I will help if I can,” Theopolou replied. “Though my experience of dealing with humans is quite limited, I am still well-versed in the nuances of diplomacy.”

Lousis lifted his cup. “A skill I will need in abundance. As for me, I have never enjoyed the subterfuge and misdirection of the nobles. My father was the politician. I am far too plain spoken for my own good.”

Theopolou laughed quietly. “I regard that as an admirable trait. I may speak the language of politics, but I prefer the simple truth.”

Lousis chuckled. “I doubt we'll hear much of that tomorrow.”

After another hour had passed, Theopolou excused himself from the banquet. He could feel the eyes of Sialo Magrifal following him as he walked out of the hall. Two elves immediately jumped up and accompanied him to his room, insisting that they guard his door. At first he’d protested, but seeing their determination, eventually relented. They wished for this business to be done. With every day that passed, the Dark Knight's grip on his kin would strengthen.

The darkness closed in as Theopolou allowed himself to drift into a dreamless slumber. His final thoughts were of Sialo Magrifal.

He knew beyond doubt that the man’s arrival was a bad omen.

Chapter 24

Theopolou was wakened at dawn by Mohanisi arriving at his door.

“What did you think of the city?” asked Theopolou.

“Humans have come a long way,” he said approvingly. “Their skills at building are more advanced than I would have guessed. In fact, many of the temples are quite stunning.”

“And the people?” he asked.

“Not what I expected.” He took a seat. “Though some are clearly not accepting of us, in large they are very hospitable and kind, particularly Lord Ganflin. Have you met him?”

Theopolou shook his head. “Not yet. Though I am sure I will soon enough.”

“I heard from the others that a representative of Angrääl has arrived,” said Mohanisi. “How do you think this will affect the council?”

“Not well. We may be fighting on two fronts if my mission to the Steppes fails. King Lousis believes the cities south of Skalhalis will rally to King Halmara’s banner. And it is quite possible that he was involved in the siege of Valshara.”

There was a knock at the door and a young servant boy entered.

“King Lousis summons you to the council, Lord Theopolou,” said the boy timidly.

“Very well,” said Theopolou. “Wait for me outside.”

He rose to his feet. “Go to the Temple of Ayliazarah,” he told Mohanisi. “There you will find a woman named Maybell. I need you to bring her here. Tell her you are a friend of Linis and she will come.”

Mohanisi nodded. “I will do as you request. I wish you fortune today.”

Mohanisi left and Theopolou got dressed. The servant boy then led him through the labyrinth of corridors to the east end of the manor where they came to a broad oak door guarded by two soldiers. The soldiers snapped to attention as Theopolou opened the door and entered the room. He glanced around. The council chamber was a fifty-foot square hall. The walls on both left and right were covered with carved reliefs of various ships and sea creatures. At the far end stood a dozen pedestals with marble busts, each bearing a gold crown. The center of the room was dominated by a round table with fifteen chairs evenly spaced around it. The kings and queens had already arrived. Ertik was seated at the left hand side of King Lousis and Theopolou's chair stood empty at his right.

“Ah, Lord Theopolou,” called Lousis. “Now we can begin.”

Theopolou took his seat and looked out over the table.

Lousis stood. “My lords and ladies, this is Lord Theopolou. As many of you know, he is here to represent the elf nations. You have been introduced to Ertik, representing the Order of Amon Dähl.” He raised his arm in a grand sweeping motion. “These are the rulers of the western kingdoms. Starting to my right, King Stanis of Calderia, King Tredford of Yuledan, Queen Lilian of Farthing, King Brääl of Maiden Shore, Queen Fasheil of  Lamitia, King Halmara of Skalhalis, Lord Sialo Magrifal, ambassador of Angrääl, King Victis of  Tarvansia, Prince Loniel of Sieren Bay, King Jeris of Wisterton, Queen Illirial of the Saraf's Jewel , and King Tranton of Red Cliff. On behalf of all the kings and queens of the twelve cities, we bid you welcome.” He took his seat. “I think you all know by now why I have called this council.”

“I hope it’s to explain why your soldiers have invaded my land and taken possession of what is rightfully mine,” said King Halmara.

Ertik stiffened and turned red with anger. But a glance from Lousis kept him silent.

“Surely, you do not refer to the liberation of Valshara?” Lousis countered. “We merely came to the aid of a friend in need. A friend who had been set upon by the forces of Angrääl. Forces who marched on your borders long before my men arrived.”

“Then perhaps this has all been big a mistake,” Sialo Magrifal interjected. “We were asked by our dear friend and ally, King Halmara, to expel those residing illegally in Valshara. According to King Halmara they were in clear violation of his law.”

This was more than Ertik could stand. He shot up out of his seat. “You lie! Our temple has stood for thousands of years unmolested. You murdered my people out of revenge. Revenge your master could not exact after he was expelled from Amon Dähl for his betrayal.”

Lousis grabbed Ertik's arm and pulled him back into his seat.

“This is who the High Lady sends to speak on her behalf?” mocked Sialo. “You should learn to govern your passion when in the presence of your betters.”

“Ertik may have spoken out of turn,” said Lousis. “But he speaks the truth. And I would remind Lord Sialo that no question has been posed to him, yet he chose to speak - in the presence of his betters.” This brought a round of soft laughter.

Sialo showed no signs of anger. He merely nodded and folded his hands.

“The fact remains that I was well within my rights to take Valshara,” said Halmara. “It should not matter that I enlisted the aid of Angrääl to do so.”

Queen Fasheil spoke. “You believe it none of our affair that a foreign force is allowed to enter our domain?”

Halmara curled his lip. “And what of the elf army that slaughtered the Angrääl soldiers when King Lousis marched his men into my land? Is that not a foreign force?”

King Stanis of Calderia, King Tredford of Yuledan, Queen Illirial of the Saraf's Jewel, and King Victis of Tarvansia all nodded in agreement.

“The elves have as much right to be here as we,” said Lousis. “They have been here far longer, and have lived among us in peace. The presence of Angrääl is of great concern to them as well.”

King Stanis spoke. “Is your memory so short? There are elves still living today who fought our people in the Great War. You may be liberal in your thinking, King Lousis, but for those of us in the south, we cannot ignore that elves have been a constant threat to our way of life. They have never been able to forgive humans for their defeat - and I doubt they ever will.”

“What say you to this, Lord Theopolou?” asked Queen Fasheil.

Theopolou looked over the council. “King Stanis is correct. In fact, I fought in the Great War.” This brought gasps and whispers. “Until recently, I was opposed to a human-elf alliance, as were most of our elders. But that has changed. We face a threat that none of us can overcome alone. We must leave behind mistrust and hatred in order to survive.”

“And what threat is that?” asked Halmara, contempt plain in his voice. “The only threat I see here is you.”

“You know well the threat I speak of,” Theopolou replied calmly. “That you have aligned yourself with the power you believe will be victorious will not save you in the end. Should the elves fall and the armies of Angrääl sweep across this land, do you think your people will remain free?”

“If I may?” said Sialo. Lousis nodded his consent. “The Reborn King has no intention of making war on this or any other land. He only seeks to strengthen friendships and create prosperity for all. Lord Theopolou speaks of unity, yet his own people from the Steppes assault him. He would have you believe that his people will protect you from the wrath of a kingdom that has done nothing to offend you. We have not invaded your land, nor will we ever. It is the elves that seek protection. And what is worse, they seek protection from their own kind. It is they who would need you.”

Theopolou smiled. “Very well put. I can see why your master sent you. And I must admit, you are not entirely wrong. We do need an alliance with humans to survive. Our numbers are few compared to the vast armies in the north. But if your king has no intention of making war, then why raise a force so immense as to rival the armies of the Great War? Such an army can have only one purpose. Conquest.”

“You exaggerate, My Lord,” said Sialo, smiling back. “We have been beset with requests for aid from all corners of the world. We only raised the forces necessary to accommodate our ally’s needs.”

“I see,” said Theopolou. “Then you should be willing to allow the kings and queens of this land to send envoys to Angrääl to seek the truth of the matter - am I correct? Certainly, they would report that tens of thousands of soldiers are not massing for war, and that their neighboring kingdoms are not under the yoke of Angrääl. In fact, I could send an elf envoy along with them. It would certainly ease the minds of my people. If they departed right away they could be there and back before spring. Of course, you would remain here to ensure complete objectivity.”

Sialo glared at Theopolou.

“What say you, Lord Sialo?” asked Lousis, clearly amused at the man's anger. “You could remain as my guest until then.”

“I, naturally, would have no objection,” Sialo replied, regaining his composure. “But you would have to allow me to send word of their coming.”

“I think not,” said Lousis. “That may cause doubt about their findings.”

“I must insist,” Sialo retorted. “I would not want there to be any misunderstandings.”

“You could write a letter of safe passage,” offered Lousis. “Certainly, that should clear up any potential misunderstandings that might occur.”

Sialo shifted uneasily in his seat.

“Enough of this distraction,” roared King Halmara. His voice echoed through the hall. “I came here to resolve the matter of the invasion of my land, not listen to my guest have his honor insulted.”

“Indeed,” Lousis agreed. “Though I do not see where anyone has given insult. The fact is that foreign forces invaded and killed those within your rightful borders.”

Halmara leaned forward menacingly. “And as I said, they were acting on my behest.”

Lousis cocked his head and furled his brow. “I'm confused. What crime did these people commit to warrant their slaughter?” He leaned back. “Surely, if some crime was committed, they should be brought to justice, not put to the sword without trial.”

This brought murmurs of agreement, even from the southern rulers.

“You say that Valshara existed in violation of your laws,” Lousis continued. “I know your laws well, Your Highness. They were written at the same council as ours here in Althetas, along with all the other kingdoms. Since when is a temple considered an outlaw state? When is a temple looked upon in the same manner as a brigand or bandit?”

“Valshara hid their existence from us,” argued Halmara. “They have never sworn allegiance to my rule. Moreover, they support a military branch of their order. You expect me to sit idly by while this so-called temple builds its own army beneath my very nose?”

Lousis nodded in the direction of Ertik, who by now had managed to calm himself.

“The Order of Amon Dähl has never had an army,” Ertik began. “Any who would say differently knows nothing. For thousands of years we have been the guardians of heaven and the keepers of history. Our knights have fought to protect all that is sacred, and have served the gods since the ancient kingdoms were young. All this is well known to the Reborn King. He betrayed our order and seized the Sword of Truth, which we had protected for generations.”

He stood up and looked over the council. “You need not go to Angrääl to see the Dark Knight's treachery. Temples throughout the land have been desecrated, their priests and priestesses murdered. In Baltria, the king has become little more than a puppet. In Hazrah, there are entire battalions garrisoned and ready to march. Do you really think that the people of Hazrah need so many for protection?

“Most of you will have heard tales about my order. But can any one of you say that you have heard stories of our armed conquests? Of course not! We have remained hidden for so long simply because of what we guarded. The Sword of Truth has the power to unravel the entire world should it fall into the wrong hands. Well, that terrible thing has now happened. The master Lord Sialo serves possesses a power beyond any of your imaginings. Do you think he has no intention of using it?” With a final contemptuous glare at Sialo, Ertik sat back down.

There was a long pause before Sialo got to his feet, his eyes never leaving Ertik's. With a loud sneer, he pushed back his chair and stormed from the hall. King Halmara quickly stood and followed.

In the wake of their departure, the hall remained absolutely silent for more than a minute. Finally, King Lousis stood and addressed the council. “I believe we should adjourn for an hour.”

The council rose and filed out. Only Theopolou, Ertik and Lousis remained. A servant brought them cups of wine.

“I hope that what I said made a difference,” said Ertik. His hands trembled as he held his cup.

Lousis slapped Ertik on the shoulder. “I think it did.  If we can sway enough of the southern rulers to our side, the rest will abandon King Halmara.” He drained his cup. “If our fortune holds, we may yet turn the tide in our favor.”

“What will happen if we cannot?” asked Theopolou.

Lousis shook his head and sighed. “In all probability, civil war. Halmara will rally the southern cities, and we will be forced to respond in kind.”

“That would be a tragedy,” said Theopolou. “Let us hope we can avoid it.”

Barely had he finished speaking when a sudden, violent change came over Lousis. The king’s eyes narrowed and he clutched at his throat. A moment later he slid from his chair, head thrown back, gasping for air.

Theopolou rushed to his side. He looked back to tell the servant to get help, but the boy was already gone. “The king is poisoned,” he said. “ The wine!”

Ertik looked at his cup and flung it to the ground.

“Are you all right?” Theopolou asked.

Ertik could only nod.

Theopolou swept the table clear. “Help me get him up, then go find Mohanisi. If he is not in the manor, he may be at the Temple of Ayliazarah.”

They lifted Lousis up onto the table. Theopolou placed his hands on the king’s chest and closed his eyes. Ertik bolted from the room, yelling for the guards. Theopolou could feel Lousis' life gradually draining away as he used the flow to slow the poison coursing through his veins. Whatever the assassin had used, it was powerful. All he could do was strive to keep the king alive long enough for Mohanisi to take over.

Six guards burst in, swords drawn.

“Find the servant who was just in here,” Theopolou commanded. “And let no one leave the manor. Two of you stay and guard the door.”

The guards obeyed at once.

Lousis slipped further away as Theopolou continued with his struggle. “Stay with me,” he whispered. “You are still needed.”

Chapter 25

Together with a dozen guards, both elf and human, Theopolou and Ertik waited anxiously just outside King Lousis' chambers. The other kings and queens had by now all been secured in their quarters and the manor sealed. The king was on the very brink of death by the time Mohanisi arrived; Theopolou could only pray that he wasn’t too late.

One of Lousis' personal guards approached, fury in his eyes. “The servant has been found dead in his quarters, but King Halmara and Lord Sialo are no longer in the manor. It seems they have fled the city. I'm sending men to pursue them.”

“No,” said Theopolou. “There is no need. They will see justice soon enough.”

“But My Lord,” protested the guard, “the king is poisoned and the culprits are within our reach.”

“I doubt that very much,” said Theopolou. “Someone like Sialo will have planned his escape well.” He placed his hand on the guard’s shoulder. “If you wish to serve your king, send more men to the city gates and scout the surrounding area.”

The guard heaved a sigh of frustration. “It will be done, My Lord.”

The door to the king’s chambers opened and Mohanisi stepped out. “The king will live,” he announced. “Though it may be a few days before he is fully recovered. He was moments from death, and even my skill has limits.”

This news brought cries of relief from the guards.

“Say nothing to anyone,” ordered Theopolou. “Tell the council I wish to speak to them. I will await them in the council chambers in one hour.”

“Not to offend, My Lord,” said an older guard. “But the council may not honor your request. They are a prideful bunch, and not all of them care much for elves.”

Theopolou smiled. “If they refuse, then threaten to drag them to the chamber by the scruff of their necks.” He could see the look of fear in the guard’s eyes. Clearly the idea of threatening royalty disturbed him. “The king nearly died, and it is very possible that one of the other kings and queens had a hand in it. I swear you will not be punished if you are forced to become insistent.”

The guard smiled devilishly, then marched down the hall.

“Do you really think one of them had something to do with this?” asked Ertik.

“No,” Theopolou replied. “But I am well aware that the allies of King Halmara fear such an accusation. I cannot undo what has been done to the king. But I can use it to our advantage.”

“How do you propose to do that?” asked Mohanisi.

“With your assistance,” Theopolou replied. “We must show them our strength. And most of all, we must help them to unite.”

One hour later, the council filed into the chamber. Mohanisi stood behind Theopolou as they watched the kings and queens take their seats. Many wore looks of both anger and concern.

King Victis of Tarvansia spoke first. “What right have you to summon us?”

“You ask me this after what has happened?” said Theopolou, not hiding an accusing tone.

“What are you suggesting?”  King Victis' nostrils flared.

“I suggest nothing,” Theopolou replied. “Only that King Lousis is poisoned, and someone is responsible.”

“It's obvious who is responsible,” said Victis. “King Halmara is the only one absent.”

“That is true, Theopolou agreed. “But it begs the question - did he act alone?”

“You think to call us here to accuse us?” Victis shouted. “How dare you! You are not a ruler of these lands. What right does an elf have to be so bold?”

Prince Loniel spoke. “King Victis, perhaps you should ask if King Lousis still lives. That is the first question I would have asked, and what weighs most heavily on my heart.”

“And if he does not?” asked Theopolou. “Will you march under the banner of King Halmara?”

Prince Loniel leveled his gaze. “My father has long been a friend to King Lousis. Were it not for his ill health, he would be here himself, and his first question would be about the well-being of his dear friend. But to answer your question. If King Lousis dies, we may have no choice. We are not blind to the strength of Angrääl, nor are we the fools you may think us to be. Without Althetas, how can we resist such an enemy?”

He took a deep breath before pressing on. “King Lousis has no heir. His passing will throw the city into chaos. If the Reborn King would have our lands, would not that be the time to take them? Who will stand against him? What resistance could we offer? We have no standing armies. Will the elves save us, as you claim? With how many swords will you do this? Ten thousand?” He laughed sarcastically. “By the words of your own ally, we would need a hundred times that.”

“There is more to war than swords,” said Theopolou. “And victory is claimed by those who have the will to take it. If Angrääl marches on this land, it will not find simpering cowards, but a free people fighting to protect the things that they love. If the King of Althetas has died, will you simply hand over your freedom? The king has been poisoned. Do you really think those who poisoned him will not take what is yours by force?”

He motioned for Mohanisi to step forward. “But you are right that we must possess the weapons to combat such a foe. And I tell you that we possess strength the armies of Angrääl has yet to account for.”

Mohanisi held his palms out flat. A ball of flame appeared a few inches above them, gradually growing in size as the heat became more and more intense. The spectacle immediately caused panic. The members of the council leaped from their seats and bolted for the door. The flame shot out from Mohanisi's hand, barring their way.

“You have nothing to fear,” said Theopolou. “Please be calm.”

Mohanisi allowed the flame to die.

The council returned to their seats. They all stared fearfully and Mohanisi.

Prince Loniel was the only one who seemed undaunted by the display. “And will this one elf defeat these vast armies?” he asked.

Theopolou smiled. He liked the young prince. “No. Not alone. But know you are not without great power on your side.”

Queen Illirial spoke. “I too have been a friend to King Lousis. And I certainly do not wish to be under the thumb of King Halmara. But if Lousis dies, the most powerful of all the twelve city states is still left without a monarch. The Althetan people will not accept any of us here to rule in his place, and they certainly won't follow an elf ruler.”

“Then you must form an alliance now,” said Theopolou. “Your unity will galvanize the people of Althetas. Should the king die, there are worthy lords who could take up the mantle. You could lend your strength to this city. You could give hope to those who would otherwise despair.”

“And what role will the elves play in all this?” asked Loniel.

“We defend our homes, our lives, and our children,” Theopolou replied. “We have lived among you for more generations than can be counted. And though we have been separated by fear and hatred, we intend for that to end. Already elf and man have spilled blood together. We have fought side by side and faced death as brothers. Understand that I was against this before your grandmothers were children. If I can change, then so can you. Elf and human live in this world together, so we will rise or fall together. You ask what our role will be. Our role is to create a new world - together.” He rose to his feet. “Those of you who will join me in this cause, stand with me now. Those who will not...”

He paused and held his hand to the door. “Your presence is no longer required.”

One by one the kings and queens stood up.

“Then I leave you to your plans,” said Theopolou.

“Will you not stay?” asked Queen Illirial.

“I cannot,” he replied. “But until our elders arrive, Ertik speaks for my people.”

Ertik looked at Theopolou, shocked. “My Lord…”

Theopolou turned to faced him and took his hands. “You have my confidence, Ertik. If I am to stand by what I say, I must trust in my own words. You are to be the voice of the elves whilst I am away.” He smiled warmly. “If you need aid, there are elves here who can assist you until Lord Chiron or one of the others arrive.”

Ertik stared, stunned. Finally, he bowed his head and returned to his chair.

“Before you leave,” said Queen Illirial, “I wonder, did you intend to tell us that King Lousis still lives?” Her face slowly twisted into a smile.

“As you were able to discover this on your own,” replied Theopolou, “that would now appear to be unnecessary.”

Theopolou bowed and left, Mohanisi just behind him.

“I noticed you did not mention Shivis Mol,” said Mohanisi.

“That is not for me,” said Theopolou, “and I think it would have done more harm than good. These people fear for their lands and family. It is enough that a vast army intends to wreak havoc. Should I tell them that their very souls are at stake as well?”

Mohanisi nodded with understanding. “The woman, Maybell, is here.”

“Good,” said Theopolou. “Gather the men. We leave as soon as I have spoken to her.”

Mohanisi led him through the manor to where Maybell waited, sitting on the edge of a bed. She had dimmed the lanterns and allowed the dark to surround her.

“You are Maybell?” Theopolou's voice was deep and soothing.

“Yes,” she replied weakly. “And you want to hear my story. You want to know what happened to Malstisos.”

“I do,” he replied, sitting down next to her. “My name is Theopolou. I am....”

“I know who you are,” she cut in. “And I know why you're here. But I don't know if what I can tell you will be of any help.”

“Whatever it is, I need to know,” said Theopolou

“You know, when I watched two brothers - real brothers mind you - fight to the death, I thought I had seen enough to break my heart in two.” The light from the crack in the door silhouetted Theopolou. “But when I saw someone as noble and kind as Malstisos slowly becoming dark and diseased...” A tear fell down her cheek. “I can't explain what happened.”

“Do your best,” said Theopolou.

Maybell recounted the events up to and including the duel between Grentos and Vadnaltis. “Once that happened, Malstisos withdrew,” she continued. “His mind and spirit grew darker with each day. At first I thought he was agonizing over what had happened, but soon it was clear to me there was more to it than that. He began muttering to himself, almost like he was arguing with some inner demon. I tried talking to him, but he either ignored me or became angry.”

“Do you think he went mad?” asked Theopolou.

“I did at first,” she replied. “But then strange things started to happen. Wherever we went I could see dark figures lurking about. Then Malstisos began disappearing for hours at a time. I thought he was only scouting or hunting until one night when we were camping just outside a small farm village. That’s when I saw him hiding behind a clump of bushes while talking to a black-cloaked figure. When I asked him about this he became angry - shouting and flailing his arms he was. I swear, I thought he was going to hurt me.”

Theopolou rubbed his chin thoughtfully. “This cloaked figure. Could you hear what it was saying?”

“No,” she replied. “I could only hear whispers. But after that I didn't question where he went.”

“Did he say or do anything else that would explain what was happening to him?”

She shook her head. “By the time we reached Althetas he had stopped talking to me altogether. But whatever is happening, I pray you can help him.” She covered her face and wept. “He was so good and kind.”

Theopolou placed his hand gently on her head. “If I can help him, I will. That he kept his word and delivered you safely means there may still be hope.”

“I'm sorry.” She choked back her sobs. “I wish I could tell you more.”

“You have told me enough.” He stood up. “If you wish, I can have you escorted to Valshara. Kaylia is there.”

“I would like that. Thank you.” Maybell stood and walked with Theopolou to the door. “May the gods keep you.”

Theopolou smiled and left.

Mohanisi was waiting outside. “Was she helpful?”

“I do not know,” he admitted. “What she said was strange. From what I know of him, Malstisos was strong-willed and noble. I cannot imagine what may have affected him in such a manner. But I intend to find out. Ready yourself to depart and meet me in my quarters in one hour.”

Alone, Theopolou pondered on what Maybell had said. Perhaps whatever corrupted the mind of Malstisos had affected the elves of the Steppes as well. If that were true, he would have to find a way to overcome it.

If he could not, this may very well be his final journey.

Chapter 26

For over three hours the council had been debating on what to do about King Halmara. Most of the southern rulers, with the exception of King Tredford, thought it would be best to negotiate rather than go to war. The others argued that the attempted assassination of King Lousis left them with no other choice. Ertik was to the point of utter frustration when the door flew open and King Lousis entered, assisted on either arm by a guard. His face was pale as he struggled to take each step, but the fire in his eyes said he was determined.

There was a moment of silence, then the hall erupted in applause and cheers. As Lousis took his seat he held up his hand to quiet the council.

“By the gods, we are grateful that you live, Your Highness,” said Prince Loniel.

This prompted another round of cheers.

“I'm grateful as well, Prince Loniel,” he replied, his voice matching the fire in his eyes. “I am told King Halmara and the snake Lord Sialo have fled. Also, that you have seen the wisdom of alliance against Angrääl. Though I wish it hadn't taken an attempt on my life to accomplish this.”

King Victis spoke. “We are all overjoyed that you have survived. And clearly Angrääl cannot be trusted. But many of us feel that King Halmara might have been deceived into doing you harm - if indeed it was even King Halmara at all. Is it possible that Sialo was acting alone? We would know the truth before we consider war against one of our own.”

“The truth is that he has fled,” said Lousis sternly. “The truth is that he allowed the murder of all the men and women in Valshara. That is enough for me to go to war. Those who do not have the stomach for it – well then, you have chosen your side.”

Queen Illirial spoke. “But Your Highness, surely you would rather not see us at war with each other? Would not a peaceful resolution with King Halmara be preferable?”

“While you contemplate peaceful solutions, Angrääl may be already moving against us,” Lousis countered. “I understand that the southern cities are dependent on trade with Skalhalis as well as Baltria, and the idea of losing that trade worries you. But King Halmara is not fit to rule. And either by his action, or inaction, he has made his intentions known. I will not allow him to sit on the throne after what he has done. He has brought shame to his house, and his kingdom.” Lousis struggled to his feet. “Those who are willing, you should begin to muster your armies.”

“What do you intend to do?” asked Prince Loniel.

“I intend to defeat King Halmara,” He sat back down. “Then I will do the same to this so-called Reborn King.” He looked to Ertik. “I am informed that you speak for both Valshara, and the elves.”

“This is true,” Ertik replied. “Lord Theopolou gave me that honor. He heads north with Mohanisi to speak to the elves of the Steppes.”

“Then I will need you to send word to Valshara,” said Lousis. “We will need all the help that Theopolou’s people can give.”

“I will go there myself as soon as possible,” said Ertik. “You will have whatever support you require.”

Lousis looked over the council carefully. “I will return to my chambers now. In one hour, those who are with me may join me there. Those who are not - you are free to leave my home.”

King Stanis spoke. “And should we not join you, will you make war on us as well?”

Lousis smiled. “I will not. Unless you provide support to King Halmara, you will remain unmolested by me. But know this. When Angrääl comes - and they certainly will - you stand alone.” He struggled to his feet and the guards rushed to his side. “You have one hour to discuss it. Ertik, as your mind is already set, I would have you join me now.”

Ertik followed as the king carefully made his way from the chamber. They could hear the room erupt as the door slammed shut behind them.

“What do you think they will do?” asked Ertik.

“Most will not suffer Halmara to sit on the throne,” he replied. “They would eventually come to that conclusion anyway without my help. Of course, it would take them many weeks to do so. And if Halmara is bold enough to make an attempt on my life, then he obviously feels there is nothing the rest of them can do about it, and that he has the strength to keep them in line. It may also mean he is ready for war.”

“You think Angrääl has already sent an army?” asked Ertik.

The king shrugged. “I don't know. But if they haven't, they will soon enough. We must be ready.”

They wound their way back to the king’s bedchambers. Ertik was surprised to see how humbly the man lived. The walls were covered with paintings of past rulers of Althetas, each with an engraved gold placard fastened below stating their name and years they had ruled. The large mahogany bed was well made and comfortable, but simple in its design. A small, round glass-topped table and four chairs sat beside a picture window overlooking a well-tended garden. At the opposite end, a tall sturdy bookcase housed dozens of leather-bound tomes. A door on either side of the bed hung ajar, one revealing a shower, the other a closet filled with the king’s clothing.

Lousis dismissed the guards and walked carefully over to the table. He eased into a chair. Ertik took the seat opposite him.

“The southern rulers are not as bad as they seem,” said Lousis. “They fear for their people should trade cease. None would admit to it, but the Reborn King has already forced many of them to trade exclusively with Angrääl. His stranglehold on Baltria has forced them into it.”

“If that is the case, then what will you do?” asked Ertik.

“First, I will deal with Halmara. Then I will see to Baltria.”

“You intend to make war with Baltria?” asked Ertik.

“I hope not,” he replied. “But it may very well come to that. This war may begin here, but it will soon spread to all nations. We must find other allies. Baltria may not be as lost as we think. My understanding is that Angrääl has influenced the nobles and merchants there. If we can break that hold, then war will not be necessary. Of course, if Baltria is already under military control, then we will be forced to liberate it.”

“Do you have enough men?” asked Ertik.

“Alas, no,” admitted Lousis. “Even with all twelve kingdoms united we would be hard-pressed. The elves will be of great help, but we will need even more.”

“Then let us hope there are more rulers such as you who are not afraid to stand against the Reborn King.”

Lousis smiled. “Make no mistake, I am afraid. But I fear even more what would happen to my people should we fail.”

There was a knock at the door and Prince Loniel entered.

“I hope Your Highness doesn't mind,” said the Prince. “I grew tired of listening to the nobles bicker. My mind was set the moment you were poisoned.”

Lousis offered him a seat, which he gratefully accepted.

“How are things faring?” asked Lousis.

“As one might expect,” he replied with a shrug. “They speak of peaceful resolutions and are in fear of war. But I think most are more afraid of standing alone. And in light of recent events, they are now also in fear of what Angrääl may do to them.”

“So you think they will side with Althetas?” asked Ertik.

“I do,” Loniel replied. “At least, they will give what support they can. Most cities do not have the wealth of Althetas, and could raise no more than a few thousand soldiers at best.”

“It will be enough,” said Lousis. “It will have to be.”

A short time later the other kings and queens began entering in ones and twos. With only a few minutes to go until the stated hour was up, only King Victis had not yet arrived.

“It will be a blow to lose the Tarvansia Peninsula,” remarked Loniel.

“Being that it has the most direct route to Baltria, it will make things far more difficult,” agreed Lousis.

Just then the door opened and an unhappy looking King Victis entered. “I am loathed to use force against King Halmara,” he stated. “But as the will of the council is against me...”

Queen Illirial spoke. “King Lousis. As you know, none of our kingdoms possess the wealth of Althetas, and this shall cut off our trade with Baltria. What can you do to ensure our people don't starve?”

“If I must, I will empty my treasury,” Lousis replied, allowing his gaze to meet each one of them in turn. “There are already lords and ladies in my city who are struggling against this growing threat. We will enlist their help as well. Once we deal with Halmara, then we will address Baltria.”

“So you will expand this war to include Baltria?” asked Victis, scowling.

“Naturally, I will try other means first,” said Lousis. “But we cannot allow a port of that size to be under Angrääl’s control.” He waved a dismissive hand. “However, that is a matter to be discussed once we have settled with Halmara. In the meantime, we must discover what is happening in Skalhalis. I will ask Ertik to send elf scouts there to see if they have armed for war.”

“I will do so at once,” said Ertik. “And I would suggest that you send more men to Valshara. One hundred can hold off a siege for a long time, but not indefinitely.”

“I agree,” said Lousis. “I intend to make Valshara our staging point.” He got to his feet. “I know that some of you do not have many soldiers to offer. That being so, all cities south of Althetas should retain whatever numbers are required to keep order in their own lands, and send the rest to Tarvansia. If Angrääl moves forces from Baltria, that is where they will strike first. The rest will join my forces in Valshara. Agreed?”

Gradually, all nodded in agreement.

For the next several hours they mapped out plans for troops and supplies. It was late in the afternoon before they decided to adjourn for the day. Lousis asked Victis to remain in his chambers once the others had left.

“Thank you, my friend,” said Lousis. “I know how difficult it was for you to make this decision.”

“King Halmara is my cousin,” Victis replied. “But in the end, there is no denying that you are right. He is not fit to rule. I have worried about the future of my land for some time, and I am not blind to what Angrääl has done. I can see what will become of us. But I still do not think we can prevail.”

“Then why did you join us?” asked Lousis.

Victis held his head high. “Because I am King of Tarvansia. My people will remain free for as long as I draw breath.” He moved to the door. “But I am tired, and I believe we have several more days of planning ahead of us.” Just as he was on the point of leaving, he paused. “I thank you for excluding me from the campaign against my cousin.”

Lousis smiled as the door closed. He changed into his night robe and slipped into bed. His body ached and his head was swimming. The battle of Valshara entered his thoughts. The sights and sounds of the dead and dying were still fresh in his memory. This would get worse. Much worse. He looked up at the portrait of his father, King Hersal, hanging on the wall close by. Hersal had ruled for fifty-two years. In all those years there had been only one border dispute and a few bands of marauding raiders that needed to be run out of the kingdom.

“What I would give to trade places,” he muttered before allowing himself drift off to sleep.

Chapter 27

For six days Lee had been chained, hands above his head, to a cold stone wall. At least, that’s how long he thought it had been. Not a morsel of food or drop of water had been offered during that time, and even with the strength of Saraf running through his veins, he was now beginning to weaken. Occasionally he would hear someone enter the small cell he was held in, but a blindfold had been kept over his eyes throughout, so he could not tell who it might be. He did his best to concentrate on what was going on nearby, but the only sounds he heard were of various rodents scurrying about and the stomping of hard boots on stone floors.

His mind wandered to thoughts of Jacob. He refused to believe that he had been betrayed, though his captors had clearly wanted him to believe so. He would not fall prey to doubt and despair. In all probability his life would end soon, and he would need more than innuendo for his last moments to be filled with anger.

The door opened, and this time the footfalls were light and graceful, not the clumsy, plodding of a soldier. The scent of lilacs filled the air.

“So they have sent a woman to attend me,” said Lee. His mouth was so dry that every word was painful. “You can tell your master that his efforts to break me will fail. It is just as well that he kill me now and be done with it.”

He felt a cup touching his dry, cracked lips. The water poured down his throat. He moaned with relief in spite of himself.

“So what is it you intend to do?” he asked contemptuously. “Keep me alive so you can watch me suffer?” There was no response. “You fear to speak? It's just as well. Your words would only be lies.”

“I don't know what to say.” The voice was a soft whisper.

“Then say nothing,” he shot back. “Better next time they send a mute fool.”

There was a long silence, then he felt a cool rag gently cleaning the grime from his face.

He shook his head violently. “Do not touch me. Not unless it is a blade you carry.”

“Are you so anxious to die?” she asked.

The voice was familiar. Another trick, he told himself.

“Yes, my love.” She spoke as if she could read his thoughts. “It is me.” She lifted the cup to his lips again, but Lee turned his head away.

“Then remove my blindfold,” he commanded.

“I am forbidden,” she replied. “It was the only way they would allow me to see you.”

“I know you are lying. Penelope would not act with such cruelty.”

“I will remove your blindfold,” she offered. “But know that if I do, I will be taken from here at once and not be allowed to return. Yes, you will have learned I speak the truth, but we will not see each other again - ever.”

Lee's heart ached. “Then leave me blind. But know I will tell you nothing the Dark Knight may want to know.”

“That is best,” she said. “There is much that has happened of which you are unaware.”

“And Jacob,” he asked. “What has happened to him?”

“He has escaped,” she replied. “He did not betray you, Lee. He was recognized by a recruit from Hazrah.”

“That is good to hear,” he replied. He felt a great weight lifting from his heart. “But if the Dark Knight intends to break me, why tell me this?”

She continued to clean his face. “The Reborn King does not need to leave you in despair to break you, my love. You will understand this once you are in his presence.”

“He may find it more difficult than he imagines.”

“He is aware of your strength,” she said. “That is why he has waited. He wishes you intact. Should he force his will upon you, your spirit could shatter.”

“And how is it that you know all this,” asked Lee.

“I have been in the presence of the Reborn King,” she replied sadly. “I have witnessed his power. No one can resist him. Not even you, my love.”

“Did you come here to warn me, or prepare me,” he asked angrily. “Penelope would never say these things.”

“I only tell you the truth,” she replied. “I wish things were different. I am Penelope Nal'Thain, but no longer the woman you knew. The King has changed me.”

“Then help me,” said Lee. “I will undo what he has done.”

“If only that were possible,” Her voice was filled with sorrow and longing. “But I am lost. Even if I helped you to escape, I would betray you eventually. I wouldn't be able to help myself. You can't know what it means to be under the King’s power.”

He could hear her weeping softly. “Please. I can help you. I swear it. I can break the hold he has over you.”

“I must go.” She lifted the cup to his lips once more. “I will try to return tomorrow. Soon you will be brought before the King.” Lee heard the door creak open. “I would speak to you again before you become his.”

The door slammed shut. A tear fell down his cheek. He didn't want to believe that this woman was really Penelope, but he knew in his heart it was. Rage and frustration swelled in his chest. He jerked the chains around his wrists with all his might, but even with his immense strength they were far too thick to break.

He knew he must escape - somehow. He would find a way to free Penelope and take her away from this wretched place. His thoughts turned to Jacob. He had escaped. But would he run? He doubted it. Jacob had too much of his father in him, which meant he would most likely end up being killed or captured. There had to be a way of escaping before it was too late. If what Penelope had told him was true, and the Dark Knight really did have the power to break him, then soon he may be powerless to do anything at all. How he wished he could have seen her, if only for a moment.

He thought back to the last time they were together. Her eyes had been filled with tears, but her voice was hot with anger. She’d cursed him for leaving his family.

The door opened again. His heart jumped, but the sound of boots told him that it was not Penelope returning. The disappointment over this had only just formed when a fist slammed into his abdomen, causing him to gasp out loud.

“You know what you cost me, Starfinder?” It was Captain Lanmore. “Because of your deception, I have lost everything.”

“And you expect me to feel guilt?” Lee scoffed. “You are the servant of my enemy, and the enemy of all free people.” A fist crashed into his jaw. The taste of blood filled his mouth, but he spat it out defiantly. “I'm surprised they even allowed you to live after realizing your stupidity and incompetence.”

Lanmore moved close to whisper in Lee's ear. “I should kill you now. But perhaps I'll kill your son instead while you watch. Yes. He's stupid enough to think he can rescue you. When he's caught, I'll skin him alive.”

Lee laughed. “Those are the words I would expect from a coward. You are truly bold when faced with a man in chains. Were I free, you would run like the scared dog that you are.”

“You think me a fool?” He grabbed Lee's face and squeezed. “I am not ignorant to what you are, Lee Nal'Thain, Starfinder, or whatever you call yourself - son of Saraf. Do you imagine my King sends us to war ill-informed? I know what you are capable of. So if you think to goad me into releasing you, then you waste your breath.”

“Then I suggest you finish your business and leave,” said Lee.

“I'm finished,” said Lanmore. “And soon, you will be, too.”

The door slammed hard. Lee couldn't help but feel pity for the captain. A commoner in a world of nobles, clawing his way through the ranks, was admirable. He had felt a genuine kinship with the man. But he was the enemy, nonetheless. Lee had not really imagined he could anger Lanmore sufficiently to release him. But it had been worth a try. Still, there must be another way.

He slid down the wall, allowing the chain to support him. He needed to rest. He needed to stay strong. When the moment arrived, he would be ready. He fell asleep, his determination as strong as ever.

The sound of a creaking door shocked him out of his slumber. It was the light footfalls of Penelope, but mixed with the clinking of metal, and scraping of leather. He felt thin, delicate fingers pulling the blindfold from his eyes. At first he squinted painfully at the light from the torches, but as his eyes focused, he saw her.

Her long, straight, raven hair fell around her shoulders and down her back, framing her sweet features. Her ivory skin and deep blue eyes were staring lovingly at him. She smiled a warm, sad smile as she stepped back. Even in the blue nightgown she wore, she looked graceful. Age had not touched her. She was every inch the woman he remembered.

“It is you,” he cried, tears forming.

In her right hand she held a large iron key. A moment later she had unshackled him. Lee nearly collapsed. Struggling to steady himself, he threw his arms around his wife and embraced her tightly.

“I am here, my love,” she whispered. She pulled back slightly and met his eyes.

Lee was now weeping openly. He kissed Penelope long and deep, crushing her to his chest. “I prayed for this. Come. We will find Jacob and I will get you away from here.”

She pointed to a guard’s uniform and sword piled next to the door. “Quickly. Change into this.”

Lee beamed and quickly donned the uniform. “Are you ready?” he asked.

Penelope smiled a sad smile before kissing Lee once again. “I cannot go with you.”

“What do you mean?” he exclaimed. “Of course you can. They will not stop us. If I have to, I will cut my way through every soldier in Angrääl.”

Penelope suddenly grasped her stomach and doubled over. Lee rushed to her side, supporting her as she slid to the floor.

“What is wrong?” His voice was desperate.

“I am saving you the only way I can,” she said weakly. “I told you. I belong to the King now. He has enslaved my spirit. I could only resist him for a short time. But it will be long enough...”

She winced in pain as she reached inside her robe to pull out a small, empty vial.

Lee recognized the faint odor of venil root immediately. “Please, no!” he sobbed. “Not this way!”

“It was the only way I would not betray you,” she explained, smiling. “I could not bear for you to fall under the same curse that now possesses me. The Reborn King is more powerful than you can imagine. He must be stopped. His plans go far beyond the coming war. He wants to watch the world burn. And once he has conquered all, he will destroy the earth - and heaven along with it. Nothing will remain.”

She tried to push Lee away, but he held her fast. “Now go,” she pleaded. “Jacob has been spotted three miles south of the garrison. Find him before they do. Please...save our son.” Her eyes closed and with one final gasp, she went limp.

His tears continued to fall freely as he pulled her body close. How long he held her like this, he couldn’t say. Then, like an echo in his mind, her last words came back to him.

Save our son.

He laid her gently on the floor and kissed her lips. “Goodbye, my love,” he said softly. After one final tender look, he wiped his eyes dry. Dark sadness began to boil over into blinding rage.

He opened the door to his cell; two guards lay dead just outside, one wearing nothing but his underclothes. He dragged the bodies inside and closed the door. Lee thought about the layout of the garrison, hoping that the uniform disguise would be enough to allow him to pass through unnoticed. That was why Penelope had cleaned his face, he thought. She must have known all along what she intended to do. The memory stabbed at him. No. He must push aside despair for now. He recalled how he had been brought there. They had not blindfolded him until after he was put in chains. Their mistake.

He made his way through the stone corridors of the keep until he reached the main hall leading to the front entrance. His muscles tensed as two guards walked by, but to his relief they didn't even bother to look at him. The bureaucrats had left their desks for the evening, so the path to the door was open.

Hoping it was now dark, he opened the door and stepped into the yard. Torches burned around the perimeter and along the slate path leading to the gatehouse. The frigid night air swept under his clothes. He shivered for a split second, then walked at a steady pace toward the gate. Two guards were stationed there, but they scarcely seemed to notice his passing.

The road south was empty. He looked north to Kratis. The city glowed brightly against the background of the dark night sky, its towers looming ominously. The thought of the Dark Knight being so close redoubled his rage. But this was not the right time for such thoughts. Forcing this anger down, he headed south. Once out of sight from the garrison he left the road, darting in and out from behind trees and brushes, stopping every few yards to listen for signs of Jacob. Just as Penelope had said, after three miles, he heard him.

Lee crept silently until he was only a few yards away from a felled tree. Jacob was crouched behind it ready to spring.

“Jacob,” whispered Lee. “Come out.”

Jacob stayed perfectly still. Lee called out again. This time he cautiously climbed over the tree and walked to where his father waited. Lee embraced his son.

“How did you escape?” asked Jacob.

The pain of Penelope's death cut deep once again. “We must flee.”

“But what about mother?” he pressed.

Before Lee could respond, he heard several men approaching from the road. He spun around, but heard more men coming from the other direction.

“Don't try to run,” called out the voice of Captain Lanmore. “There is no escape.”

Lee and Jacob drew their swords.

“Come closer if you long for death,” responded Lee.

The men halted their approach.

“There is no need for this,” Lanmore told him from a few yards away. “My master wishes you returned to him unharmed. You, and your son.”

“If I return to your master, it will be to end his life,” roared Lee.

Lanmore laughed. “Even your dear wife knew that was impossible. Why do you think she helped you to escape?”

Jacob shot Lee an accusing glance.

“And for that she paid with her life,” Lee replied, hatred spewing from his lips. “My wife lies dead because of your master’s evil. If you imagine, even for one second, that I will simply return with you, then you’re a far bigger fool than I thought.”

“Do you really think the Reborn King would allow such a noble lady to die?” Lanmore asked. “She could not escape his grasp so easily. No, Lord Nal'Thain. Your wife still lives.”

“You lie!” he shouted. “I saw her die. I held her in my arms.”

“I'm sure you did. But the King is powerful. Those whom he wishes to live will do so.” Taking a step forward, Lanmore sheathed his sword. “He knew she would help you to escape, and he knew she would try to take her own life to ensure that she could not betray you. Ask yourself this. How did you escape so easily? How did you manage to walk straight through the front gate? He knew you would try to find your son. Should we have tried to capture him, he would have resisted. And the King does not want his blood. Return with me now and you can be with your family again.”

“When I run, you follow,” Lee whispered to Jacob.

“But mother....” he protested.

“Your mother is dead,” Lee snapped. “And you will not follow her.”

Lee burst into a dead run heading southeast, Jacob hard on his heels. Both of them shot past the soldiers before they had time to fully react. They gave chase, but Lee and Jacob were much too fast for them.

Soon they had disappeared completely into the darkness.

* * * *

The soldiers returned to Captain Lanmore, scraped, bruised, and out of breath. After ordering them back to the garrison, he remained where he was, staring into the shadows of the forest. He could feel a presence just behind him. Its raw power nearly sent him falling to his knees, but he did not dare to turn around.

“Such a pity.” said a voice. It was close to a whisper, yet it carried a power that gave the sound an almost physical form.

“Forgive me, Master,” he said. Fear pierced his heart. “They escaped. My men weren't fast enough.”

“If I had wanted them captured, I would have sent the Vrykol,” the voice said. It sounded amused. “But it matters not. I have already foreseen the fate of Lee Starfinder.”

The presence vanished. Lanmore fell to the ground and wept.

Chapter 28

Gewey stared over the bow of the ship. Aaliyah had continued with his training, but as they drew closer to their destination he noticed that she would frequently lose focus. After a week she had taken to sleeping on deck. Gewey offered to give her their room to herself, but she told him that she preferred to sleep under the stars and enjoy the scent of ocean air.

He tried on several occasions to speak with her, hoping to lift her spirits, but she withdrew even further. After the ship rounded the Tarvansia Peninsula, Aaliyah informed him that he would be spending his remaining time on board studying with Drasalisia, the navigator. He tried to object, but Aaliyah would not be swayed, and seemed most relieved when the navigator reluctantly agreed.

From the onset of the lessons it was clear that Drasalisia intended to be a strict taskmaster. On the very first day he joined her at the bow of the ship, she simply looked at him sideways and handed him a small cup of water. She then had him sit cross-legged on the deck a few feet behind her.

“You can join me when you learn control,” she said. She held out her hand. Almost immediately a small droplet of water floated up from the cup and hovered in mid-air a few inches above it. The drop then floated down onto the cup’s edge, where it rolled around a few times before sliding back inside.

She stood up and stared down at Gewey for a moment. “When you can do this, you are ready to continue,” she said. Then, with a huff, she returned to the bow.

Gewey closed his eyes and allowed the flow of the air to surround the tiny cup, but with no success whatsoever. Time after time, the cup simply spilled over. On every occasion he returned with more water the navigator shot him a disapproving glance. After three hours, he leaped to his feet and let out a frustrated scream.

“What good is this?” he shouted. “How does this help me?”

The navigator strode over and picked up the cup. “Hold this in your palm.”

Without enthusiasm, he obeyed. He watched as another tiny droplet of water floated out and drifted toward the navigator.

“Not everything requires brute force,” she said quietly.

Without warning, the droplet flew forward at blinding speed, striking the cup in his hand and shattering it into a hundred pieces. Water and fragments fell to the deck. Gewey stared in amazement.

“Such a thing could be quite useful, wouldn't you say?” Drasalisia remarked. As she returned to her duties she glanced over her shoulder. “You will need another cup, I think.”

Excited by what he had seen, Gewey very nearly broke into a run. For six straight hours he continued to try, but was still unsuccessful. The sun was setting and the navigator had just been relieved from duty when she walked over and sat next to him.

“Show me what you are doing,” she said in her typical, emotionless way. She took hold of Gewey’s hand and brought her spirit close to his.

Gewey tried once again, and once again failed. He forced the water over the side. The moment it touched the deck he felt the navigator seize the flow and return it into the cup.

“You must understand the way this power works,” she explained. “Earth, air and water are not different. At least, not in essence. They are all pieces of the same world. But you try to dig and lift the water with air, as a shovel to earth. Or you throw it, as a bale of hay into a wagon.” She reached out and touched the flow of the water, surrounding a tiny drop and pressing it in. “You transition it from one to the other. It is as the left hand touching the right.” The air stirred almost imperceptibly, blending with the droplet. In unison, they rose, the droplet carried on a tiny cushion of air. “Do you see?” The droplet sank gently back into the cup.

“I understand.” His words were a gasp.

“Good,” she said, now with a hint of satisfaction. “Return tomorrow and try again. You have done enough for today.”

In spite of his desire to continue, he knew it was useless to argue. He spent the evening with the crew, learning about the ship and listening to their tales. Aaliyah joined him for dinner, but apart from this brief interlude she remained alone in their cabin until going up on deck to sleep.

This time however, Gewey was determined to find out what was on her mind. He brought his blanket and pillow and lay down next to her.

“I know you think you can help me,” said Aaliyah. “But there is really nothing you can do.”

“If I can't help, would you at least tell me what is troubling you?”

She sighed and closed her eyes. “I am trying to still my heart. Soon I must see Nehrutu again.”

Gewey raised an eyebrow and smiled. “I would think you'd be happy about that.”

“I am uncertain how I feel,” she replied. “There is no doubt I will be pleased to see him, but I am unsure as to what to say. Through your communication with Kaylia, he will be aware of your decision - and my failure.”

Gewey chuckled. “That should make him happy.”

She looked over at Gewey. “If Kaylia left you in pursuit of another, would you be happy when she returned?”

“If it meant we would be together, I might,” he replied. “But you left Nehrutu out of a sense of duty, not because you stopped loving him. I’m sure he understands that.”

“He does. But I cannot help but wonder how I would feel if the situation were reversed. Would I be so willing to return to the one who spurned me?” She smiled. “I am acting as a child. But matters of the heart make children of us all. Even the most wise.”

“Have you reached out with your spirit?” he asked. “I'm sure it will ease your mind if you do.”

“I have more knowledge than you, Gewey,” she replied. “But I am not as strong. I cannot span such great distances.”

“I could help,” he offered.

In spite of herself, Aaliyah could not hold back a laugh. “I am afraid such a meeting would be too personal. But I thank you, regardless.” She closed her eyes. “Now, if you intend to stay under the stars with me, you must allow me to rest.”

Gewey squeezed her hand and rolled over. The sound of the ocean swells lapping against the ship’s hull was sweet music, singing him to sleep. As he drifted, he thought of Kaylia. He considered reaching out to her, but the motion of the ship pulled him down too fast. Within seconds, his breathing was deep and steady.

The morning brought the sound of gulls and the spirited voices of the crew hard at work. Aaliyah was already busy with the running of the ship, and now appeared to be in much better spirits. After breakfast Gewey returned to the navigator carrying his cup of water. Taking his place on the deck, he continued the exercise. This time, after only two attempts, he did it. A small droplet of water floated from the cup. Gewey was elated. He moved it around, making it rise, fall, and travel in tight circles. He allowed the flow to swell and concentrate within him. He removed another droplet, then another, until there were ten in all. He formed them into a ring and pushed them above the navigator’s head. Then, one by one, allowed them to drop.

The navigator turned slowly, her expression unmoved. “That is enough for today.”

Gewey tried to suppress a laugh. “Don't you have a sense of humor?”

She turned back around, saying nothing. Gewey frowned and headed toward the cabin. After only a few steps toward the door a large ball of water splashed down over his head, soaking him to the skin. The elves on deck burst into laughter. Gewey looked back at the navigator, who was still facing forward.

“There is nothing wrong with my sense of humor,” she said.

Gewey couldn't help but smile. He used the flow to dry his clothes, then went in search of Aaliyah. He found her in her quarters, poring over a large map that covered the entire desk. He told her what the navigator had taught him - and what she had done in response to his joke.

“She must like you,” she noted.

“You'd never know it by the way she looks at me,” Gewey replied.

“I've known Drasalisia for seventy years, and never once seen her be playful.” Aaliyah leaned back in her chair and grinned. “We should arrive just north of the city of Skalhalis in two days’ time. From there we will cut across country and arrive in Valshara the following day.”

Just then a bell sounded repeatedly from on deck. Aaliyah jumped up and flew from the cabin, Gewey following close behind. As they made their way up, he could feel the ship slowing.

“What is it?” asked Aaliyah, while making her way to the bow.

“A fleet of ships just beyond the horizon,” said the navigator. “At least fifty.”

“Can we avoid them?”

“We can,” she replied. “But you may wish to go ashore further north. From their course, it looks as if they are heading for Skalhalis.”

Aaliyah thought for a moment. “No. I want you to plot a course that has us arriving under the cover of darkness. Once Gewey and I are away, take the ship as far off shore as possible, while still close enough to be contacted.”

“There is more.” The navigator’s countenance betrayed her worry. She took Aaliyah's hand and together they closed their eyes. After a few minutes she let go and lowered her head as if fatigued. “Is that what attacked you in the desert?”

“It was,” replied Aaliyah. She turned to Gewey. “It would seem Angrääl has sent more forces. Vrykol are aboard ships bound for Skalhalis. They will arrive just as we get to Valshara. You must warn Kaylia.”

Gewey nodded sharply and ran to his quarters. Sitting in front of the desk, he reached out for Kaylia, but her thoughts were presently turned to matters of the flow. Nehrutu must be giving her another lesson, he thought. He pressed his spirit in even harder. This time he managed to reach her. He explained what Aaliyah had told him, but the moment he’d finished, she broke contact.

Aaliyah entered a moment later. “Did you succeed?”

The shock of Kaylia pulling away so suddenly had made him feel dizzy. “Yes. I'm sure of it,” he said.

Aaliyah walked over to the desk and stared down at the map. “We will come very close to the ships when we land, and we still may be seen from the shore if an army is mustering for war.”

“Then they will not live to tell of our passing,” said Gewey. A small fire was building in his heart. The rage returned. It felt good. He smiled fiendishly and looked sideways at Aaliyah. “I guess the war has truly begun.”

She placed her hand on his shoulder. “It would seem so.”

He spent the rest of the day with the crew, trying to calm himself and keep his mind as far away as possible from war. By now he had learned quite a lot about the workings of the ship, and offered to lend a hand wherever he could. This was well received by the crew, who in short order were teaching him elven seafarer’s songs and telling old tales passed down aboard ships for thousands of years. Most were about sea monsters and adventure, but a few dealt with the gods. Gewey tried to pretend not to be interested in these, but couldn't help wondering how much truth was hidden within the fiction. After seeing what secrets the desert held, he thought that the sea stories might hold more truth than anyone ever imagined.

In spite of all his efforts, his mind still kept wandering to the coming battle. The force that had marched on Valshara would certainly not be enough to defeat fifty ships filled with soldiers. And he had no idea of how many men might have already landed before these new arrivals. There could be a hundred-thousand troops ready to sweep across the land for all he knew. If that were so, then the war would be over almost before it had begun.

By nightfall, he was dreading what dreams might come. He knew Kaylia would be making preparations, and that meant he would most likely be unable to contact her. Aaliyah could tell he was troubled and stayed in her quarters with him.

“Should you need me, I am here,” she said as they both slipped into bed.

“Thank you,” he replied. He rolled over and closed his eyes. “I'll be fine.”

“Do not fear the strength your feelings bring,” she said. “They are a part of you. It was that strength that saved my life.”

He sat up and pushed his back to the wall. “I know. And when it happens, I don’t mind. But afterwards - it’s as if I lose who I am. I feel that it’s changing me.”

“It is changing you,” she replied. “I told you that before. But that should not upset you. You are just becoming what you were always meant to be.”

“And tell me, what is that exactly?” he asked, his concern clear. “I mean, I feel it most when I’m angry. What if that’s how I eventually become - an angry, vengeful god? Will the world be any better off once the Dark Knight is gone if I remain?”

Aaliyah scowled. “You will not become evil, if that is what you’re suggesting. Powerful - yes. Dangerous - absolutely. But dangerous to whom is the question? I think not to those who you love and protect.”

“I hope not.” Gewey slid back down and wrapped himself in his blanket. ”Each time I feel it stronger than the last. The name Darshan is becoming more and more natural to me. I’m just afraid I’ll lose the part of me that is Gewey.”

“You will not,” she said, her tone reassuring. “I swear it.”

His dreams that night were troubled, filled with visions of hopeless despair and suffering. Human and elf huddled together, bleeding and crying. The whole world was trapped in an inferno of chaos and death. And he was stood alone in the midst of it all, powerless, unable to change anything. The morning was the only thing that brought him welcome relief.

They were due to arrive at sunset, so Gewey spent the morning gathering supplies and checking his gear. He then rested in the cabin until the early afternoon. He wanted to be as strong as possible when they landed, so only left the cabin twice to take his meals. When he finally went up on deck he took his pack, the bow, and staff along with him. These he stowed near to the landing craft.

Aaliyah was already there and ready to depart.

“I see you are excited to get underway,” she remarked.

He shrugged and leaned over the port railing to look at the setting sun. The cloudless azure sky was beginning to reveal the night stars as daylight slowly faded.  There would be no moon tonight. He was grateful for that.

As he waited to depart, the crew came one by one to bid him farewell. As night fell and the ship slowed to a halt, the navigator joined him.

“You will return once your task is done,” said Drasalisia. “I still have much to teach you.”

Gewey thought he almost saw her smile, but couldn't be certain. “I would like that,” he said. He watched her for a second as she walked away. Then, as his gaze returned to the sea, he felt something strike the top of his head. The next instant, water was pouring all down his back. He spun around just in time to see the navigator entering the cabin.

Aaliyah approached, pack in hand. She smiled. “Of all the wonders I have seen, that was the most amazing. Were you an elf, you would certainly be doomed to be her apprentice.”

Gewey laughed, at the same time running fingers through his saturated hair. “So, it's time to go?”

Aaliyah nodded, then led him to the boat. The crew lowered it into the water and they climbed down. As they moved away Gewey looked back to see the crew gathered all along the starboard rail, waving. He waved back, as did Aaliyah.

He drew his sword and let the flow of the air rage through him. Soon he could make out the shoreline. The sea was calm, with small waves lapping against the sand. The moment the boat touched shore they dragged it into some nearby brush and covered it with branches. He reached out to see if anyone was about. Approximately three hundred yards due east, where the beach turned to a thin forest, twenty men were moving north.

“I sense them, too,” whispered Aaliyah. “And twenty more a quarter mile south of their position.”

“If they stay bunched together like that, we should be able to slip between them,” said Gewey. “Kaylia taught me to move in the shadows unseen.”

“A useful skill,” she replied. “Let us hope it serves us tonight.”

They crept forward until they were only a hundred yards from the patrol. He could see their armor reflecting in the light of the torches they carried. One soldier turned toward them, revealing the broken scales insignia of Angrääl across his chest plate.

They paused, crouching behind a clump of sand tails as the patrol slowly moved away. Just as Gewey and Aaliyah entered the tree line, they sensed an all-too-familiar foulness coming toward them from the east.

“Vrykol,” Gewey hissed. “Only one though.”

“But it's enough to raise the alarm,” said Aaliyah. “If that happens, use the earth. Fire will draw even more down upon us. We should try to avoid that if possible.”

Gewey allowed the flow of the earth to replace the air. It felt odd, yet invigorating. The earth was so much more physical and raw. “If it hears us, I'll knock him over. Soon as I do, we'll rush it. Hopefully it won't have time to call out.”

They moved south, then east. At first it looked like the Vrykol wouldn't sniff them out. Then, just as they were parallel to it, the creature halted and began walking swiftly toward them. As it came into view, Gewey could see that it held a curved blade in one hand, and a small, bone horn in the other. Gewey was just about to fling a fallen log at the beast when it stopped and raised the horn to lips hidden beneath the black hood. The sound rang out and the beast backed away.

“I guess they are becoming more cunning,” observed Gewey.  He remembered the elven Vrykol from the Black Oasis and the anger raged. He grinned maliciously at Aaliyah before charging forward. Aaliyah drew her dagger and followed.

The Vrykol waited for them. But, instead of a sword, the twang of a bowstring sounded. The arrow whizzed through the air, seeking Gewey's heart. At the very last instant he managed to twist and dive sideways. Only his incredible speed saved him from being skewered.

Aaliyah ran straight ahead, slashing at the Vrykol's neck. The creature was barely able to drop the bow and draw its sword in time. The sound of metal on metal rang out. Aaliyah pressed the attack, forcing the beast back.

Gewey scurried to his feet and charged in. The Vrykol slashed hard at Aaliyah, and then reached inside its cloak. Just as Gewey was close to striking distance the creature threw something to the ground just in front of him. The earth burst into flames, bringing Gewey sliding to a halt. He heard soldiers approaching from either side.  Quickly, he threw the earth beneath the fire upward and to his left, then leaped over the small crater now left in the ground. Aaliyah was being pushed back as the Vrykol attacked furiously. Gewey slashed at its leg, cutting deep and sending it stumbling backwards. Aaliyah slashed at its neck, but it lifted its sword to deflect the blade. In a flash, it then brought its fist crashing into Aaliyah's jaw. She fell heavily.

The Vrykol turned to Gewey, thrusting its blade at his gullet. Gewey twisted and countered, opening the Vrykol's chest. It fell back stabbing wildly.

Just then the first patrol of soldiers arrived. Aaliyah recovered her feet in time to bring her knife across the leading soldier’s neck. She spun around, gutting another. A blast of wind forced the center of the patrol backwards as she set about attacking their left side, cutting down two men with a single stroke.

Gewey pressed the Vrykol hard. The flow swelling inside him was made even stronger by his sword. With all his strength he swung the blade at the beast’s neck. The Vrykol tried to block the blow, but its blade shattered under the massive impact. Still following through with the same devastating sweep, Gewey’s sword sent the creature’s head rolling from its shoulders. Rapidly he then turned to see Aaliyah blasting the soldiers back with bolts of air as she carved her way through their ranks.

He could hear more soldiers approaching from the south. The flames from the Vrykol attack were beginning to spread to the dry leaves and twigs lining the forest floor. Hiding was no longer an option. He created a wall of flame, splitting the soldiers ranks and pushing them back. Only two men now remained on the far side of the flames to face Aaliyah. Fear quickly overcame them. Dropping their weapons, they fled.

Gewey had already surrounded the others with flames. He tightened the ring, as he had done to the Soufis. The soldiers began to scream and cry.

“Kill them or let them go,” yelled Aaliyah.

The wall of fire was still creeping slowly in, squeezing the men ever closer together. With a rush of self-awareness, Gewey realized that his spirit had become full of hatred and anger. He wanted them dead. He wanted to watch them burn. It took a huge effort of willpower for him to allow the flames to die. He shouted out to the panic stricken men.

“Run, if you want to live!”

The soldiers needed no second telling. Dropping their swords, they ran as fast as they could. But by now, the second group of soldiers were coming into view. As Gewey turned to face them, a column of fire burst to life directly above his head, jagging back and forth menacingly at the new arrivals, daring them to take even a single step closer. It was enough. Shouts of terror filled the air as the second patrol also chose the far safer option of fleeing rather than fighting.

“Your powers are growing,” said Aaliyah. “You could have easily bested ten times as many.”

Gewey glanced down at the dead Vrykol. Not powerful enough, he thought. Not yet.

The pair of them ran off into the night at a full run. The flow raged, but it felt different. More intense. He smiled as he sped his way through the forest.

The name Darshan echoed loud in his mind.

Chapter 29

King Halmara paced in front of the jeweled throne of his forefathers, glancing angrily at the door every time he turned. The rarely used throne room was cold and empty. For generations the well-being of his kingdom had been administered from the king’s office and the council chambers. This room was for receiving honored guests, and nothing more. The walls bore the banners of the twelve kingdoms, with the eagle and fish symbol of Skalhalis hanging proudly above the throne. His family had ruled for more than a thousand years. Now folly could end everything. Lord Sialo was sat in a plush chair to the right side of the throne, watching the King carefully.

“You should relax, Your Highness,” said Sialo. “Things are going according to plan.”

Halmara stopped and turned on Sialo. “Is that so? In what way was the poisoning of King Lousis part of the plan?”

“I told you before, I had nothing to do with that,” said Sialo. “It was Yanti who gave the order.”

“Then Yanti is a fool,” he roared. “And when I see him....”

The door flew open. Yanti strode confidently in. “You will do what?” He laughed. “My good king, nothing has been done that wasn't according to my design.”

Halmara snarled. “Your idiocy has ensured that the other kingdoms will surely align against me. They probably gather as we speak.”

Yanti stopped. His eyes grew dark and threatening. “Mind your tongue, Highness, or you may find your long reign becomes a fleeting moment. I have enough soldiers to crush Althetas. They cannot muster enough of a force in time to stop us.”

“I will not be intimidated by you,” Halmara said. But his voice wavered.

“I do not try to intimidate,” said Yanti. “I only want you to know your situation. You are a vassal of Angrääl, and will bend to the will of the Reborn King. And his will is what I tell you it is.” He leveled his eyes. “Are we clear about this, Your Highness?”

Halmara felt as if his breath had been taken away. He slumped down onto his throne, defeated. “I still think it was a mistake to poison King Lousis.”

“I'm truly sorry, but that had to be done,” Yanti explained. “After poisoning my poor dear Salmitaya, it was imperative.”

A messenger burst through the door and bowed low. “I bring news, Your Highness.” He handed the king a rolled up piece of parchment. The boy bowed again and hurried away.

Halmara unrolled the parchment and read it carefully. “It would seem your attempt on King Lousis' life has failed.”

Yanti smiled and waved his hand carelessly. “It matters not. Once the army is assembled and ready, then we will see to him.” He turned to Sialo. “How go the preparations?”

“On schedule,” he replied. “Will you be staying?”

“Of course,” said Yanti. “I have learned not to leave these events unattended. Now, if you will pardon me, I desire a wash and a fresh set of clothing. Please tell me this place is civilized enough to possess a shower.”

The king didn't bother to respond. He instead rose, led Yanti to the door, and instructed the guard to show him to his chambers.

“You should be careful, Your Highness,” warned Sialo. “The Reborn King puts a great deal of faith in Yanti's judgment. You should maintain a pleasant relationship with him.”

King Halmara returned to his throne. He rubbed his finger along the cushioned chair arms and wondered how much longer he would be allowed to sit here.

King Lousis had been right. But it was too late now.

Chapter 30

Kaylia wandered the halls anxiously. Ever since Gewey had told her of the ships bound for Skalhalis, Valshara had been in a panic. Elf and human soldiers had been arriving for over a week, but so far there were only fifteen thousand in total, not nearly as many as they needed. The rest would not arrive for several more weeks.

Selena was distraught when she heard of the attempt on King Lousis' life. She knew it was because of Salmitaya. That the king survived was the only thing that kept her from flying into a rage.

Riders and fauna birds came three times every day bearing news from the elf and human nations. The elf elders had succeeded in galvanizing their people and they were ready to fight, but many of these were far away. Assembling their armies would take up much valuable time.

Nehrutu ordered his ship to patrol the coast, but stay far out of sight, and to only observe and report. Should enemy ships attempt to invade the Althetan harbor they would face skilled navigators more than capable of running their ships aground.

Maybell had been escorted to Valshara two days prior. She was no longer the unyielding yet witty woman Kaylia remembered, and after hearing what had become of Malstisos, Kaylia could understand why. The thought of such a noble elf falling prey to evil made her want to weep. Selena had taken Maybell under her charge and kept her close. Kaylia hoped that in time it would help Maybell become her old self again.

Ertik was also recently arrived. When he told her that Theopolou had left him behind in Althetas to speak for the elves, Kaylia had burst out laughing. Only a short time ago he’d been totally opposed to any kind of contact with humans, and yet now he was actually allowing a human to speak on behalf of his people. Kaylia wished she could have seen her uncle one last time before he went north. She feared that he may never return.

While trying to find things to occupy herself with, Kaylia heard cheers coming from the courtyard. She hurried to see what all the fuss was about. Just as she neared the front entrance the door flew open and standing there - dusty, hair tangled, and smiling widely - was Gewey. Aaliyah was just behind him. Kaylia was still trying to recover from the overwhelming joy and surprise of his appearance when Gewey dropped his pack and ran to her. He lifted her up, crushing her to his chest. Her heart surged with happiness. It was a moment she never wanted to end.

Gewey looked into her eyes. “I missed you so much.” He kissed her with desperate intensity, as if he were trying to make up for their time apart in a single moment.

When their lips parted she was temporarily unable to speak. Instead, she grabbed his head roughly and pulled him back close, kissing him again.

Eventually she released her hold and smiled at him. “I have a surprise for you,” she said, holding out her palm. A tiny ball of flame came to life. It hovered there for a second before she closed her hand, snuffing it out.

“Nehrutu has been a good teacher,” said Gewey, unable to take his eyes off her. “Speaking of Nehrutu, where is he?”

“I am here, Shivis Mol.” Nehrutu was standing in the doorway just behind Aaliyah.

Aaliyah spun around. “It is...good to see you.”

Nehrutu smiled. “It is good to see you as well.” He stepped closer. “We have much to teach these people, Aaliyah. But there are also things I have learned from them.” He grabbed Aaliyah and pulled her close. For a moment he gazed into her eyes, then kissed her with tender intimacy.

Gewey smiled, suppressing the urge to laugh.

Aaliyah looked to Gewey and Kaylia, then back to Nehrutu. “Then we shall face the world as they do. Together as one.” She pulled away from Nehrutu and walked up to Kaylia. “Please forgive me. I only acted out of a sense of duty. But Darshan has shown me that I was mistaken. You are his true mate, and I will never doubt that again.”

Kaylia took her hands. “There is nothing to forgive. You were trying to protect your people. I might have done the same.”

She then cocked her head to one side as the realization struck her. “Darshan?”

“I will tell you all about it,” said Gewey. “There is much for us to talk about. But right now I need to bathe and change.”

Selena approached from the far end of the hall. “It is good to see the two of you safe. And not a moment too soon.” She hugged Gewey before turning to Nehrutu. “Please have Ertik gather everyone together in the receiving hall in two hours.” She glanced at Gewey and Kaylia, smiling. “No, make that four hours. You will forgive me, but I have things to attend to. I am excited to hear your tale.” She bounded off.

“That is as happy as I have seen her in some time,” remarked Kaylia. “But all this for later. For now, come...”

She led Gewey to her chambers.

The room was simple, yet comfortable. A large oak bed was pushed against the wall in the far left corner, with a small desk positioned opposite. Just beside the door stood a polished maple wardrobe, together with a small round dressing table and mirror. One unique aspect Gewey noticed was that, instead of the usual lanterns seen elsewhere in Valshara, here, there were elf orbs hanging from the ceiling in each corner of the room.

Keeping hold of the bow given to him by Gerath, Gewey set the rest of his gear next the wardrobe and took a seat on the bed. He laid the precious bow beside him.

“The wash water will take some time,” Kaylia said. “You can tell me more about your journey until it comes.”

Gewey grinned happily. Ever since Aaliyah had lifted the block on their bond, he had been so elated that he’d scarcely told her anything of his journey during their contacts. Now, he picked up the bow and carefully handed it to her.

The moment she touched it, amazement showed on her face. She stood up, staring at the weapon in awe. “This is what you found in the desert?” she asked.

“Yes,” he replied. “Along with some other things. And now that I've given it to you, only you can use it.”

“I know,” she whispered. “I can feel it.”

“I wanted to give the staff to Theopolou,” said Gewey. “Where is he?”

“Perhaps you can save your tale for when the others have gathered,” she suggested. “Much has happened since you’ve been away.” She recounted the events of the past few weeks. She had just finished telling him about the poisoning of King Lousis when two servants arrived carrying a brass basin filled with hot water.

Smiling and giggling impishly at them, the servants left. Kaylia stood and offered Gewey her hand. He took it and allowed her to help him to his feet.

“Enough talk for now.” Her voice was soft and seductive. “I have missed my husband.”

Gewey’s heart raced as Kaylia dimmed the lights. No one would disturb them for some time. He now felt as he had done on their first night together. He stripped off his travel worn clothes and tossed them into the corner. Dust flew as they landed on the flagstone floor.

Gewey smiled. “I'm filthy.”

Kaylia retrieved a washrag from the wardrobe. “Not for long, my love.”

Chapter 31

As they lay in bed, Gewey felt utterly content, his mind far away from the obstacles he had already overcome and the troubles he had yet to face. Kaylia smiled sweetly as she lay with her arm draped over his chest.

“I never want to leave this room,” said Gewey.

As if the fates had been challenged, there was a knock at the door. “The High Lady sends word that it is nearly time,” came a shy voice.

Gewey groaned, then called out loud enough for whoever was on the other side to hear. “Very well.”

Climbing out of bed, he rummaged around inside his pack for the elf clothes Theopolou had given to him. He held them up and frowned. They were wrinkled and stained. In fact, all his clothes were in the same condition.

“I have clothes here for you,” said Kaylia. “I would not have you looking like a vagabond.” She went to the wardrobe and pulled out a black silk shirt and matching trousers.

Gewey held up the shirt and cocked his head. “I'll miss the comfort of my elf clothes,” he remarked.

Kaylia laughed. “I'm sure we can find you some more. But this must suffice for now.” She took out a pair of leather boots and a silver belt. “Do not worry. You will be covered with dirt again soon enough.” She grabbed his arm and had him sit on a chair in front of the dressing table mirror.

He looked at himself in horror. His beard had grown to nearly an inch long and his hair was a tangled mess. “I can't believe you can bear to look at me.”

“Don't worry,” she said, kissing his neck. “I will see to it that you are presentable. Get dressed. I will return shortly.”

She donned a cotton robe together with a pair of silk slippers and left the room. A few minutes later she returned with a young girl dressed in a plain, green tunic and skirt.

“Go with her,” said Kaylia. “She will see to your grooming.” Her last word came out with a light titter.

Gewey gave himself one final look in the mirror and sighed. “Not exactly inspiring, am I?”

“We'll change that, My Lord,” said the girl, with a perky bounce.

She led him to an unused chamber and set to work. Soon he was shaved and groomed. Just as the girl was finishing, a guard came in to tell him that Kaylia awaited him in the receiving hall.

The guard escorted Gewey to the hall. Just outside the doors he saw Chiron speaking quietly to Bellisia.

Chiron beamed as Gewey approached. “Ah, now you are a welcome sight.”

Gewey bowed to them both. “When did you arrive?”

“Just now,” he replied. “Mine and Bellisia's lands are closer than the others. The remaining elf nations will be here within the month.”

“Is it true that Angrääl has taken the city of Skalhalis?” asked Bellisia.

“It would appear so,” Gewey replied. “It looks like time has run out. War is come.”

“I hear that dear Theopolou left Ertik of Valshara to speak for the elves in Althetas,” said Chiron. “How times are changing.”

“For the better, I pray,” added Bellisia. “The idea of elf and human living together is still unsettling to many of my people. But they are coming to accept it as inevitable, as I have.”

“There is much you will hear that will surprise you, Lady Bellisia,” said Gewey. “Aaliyah and I made many discoveries in the eastern desert.”

“What could possibly be discovered in such a barren waste?” she asked, looking doubtful.

“I am sure Gewey will tell us everything once we are inside,” said Chiron. He reached out and opened the door. “Shall we?”

Inside the receiving hall, a large oval table had been placed in the very center of the room. Most of the chairs were already filled with finely dressed men and women, some with obvious military insignia on their attire. Of the elves present, Gewey recognized several from the Chamber of the Maker. Aaliyah and Nehrutu were sat together near the far end. Aaliyah had changed into a deep blue dress with emerald embroidery, and her black hair was now decorated with tiny white flowers.

At the very far end sat Selena, dressed in the ceremonial robes of Amon Dähl. Ertik was to her left, and Maybell to her right. Maybell smiled when she saw Gewey; he waved and smiled in return. Kaylia was at the other end, next to an empty chair directly opposite Selena.

The room went silent as Gewey made his way to his seat. Kaylia touched his hand gently. Chiron and Bellisia found a seat near to Ertik. Chiron whispered something into Ertik’s ear that brought a pleased look to his face.

Selena stood and addressed the room. “We all know why we are here. War has come sooner than expected. Angrääl has landed ships in the city of Skalhalis, and will surely march on the attack any day now. We must decide how to act. I know that most of our force is still gathering, but we have already gathered soldiers from Queen Lilian of Farthing and Prince Loniel of Sieren Bay, along with ten thousand elf warriors. King Lousis will have more men here by morning.” She sat back down.

A tall, grizzled-looking man with silver hair and rough features got to his feet. “I am General Keise Halman of Farthing. Do we know the numbers we will face, or shall we march blindly into battle?”

“We are trying to find out how many Angrääl has sent,” Selena replied. “But as of this moment we do not know their exact number.”

Prince Loniel spoke. “I think it is more important to know if they march on Valshara, or do they look to Althetas.”

“We do not know for certain,” said Selena.

“What, if anything, do we know?” asked General Halman.

Gewey stood. “We know that if we don't move quickly, this war will be over before it even begins.” His large frame loomed tall and commanding over the gathering. “On my way back from the eastern desert we spotted fifty ships bound for Skalhalis. Angrääl is moving to end this war here and now. It doesn't matter what we do not know. What we do know is that we must attack now or all is lost.”

General Halman sneered. “From the looks of you, boy, I wouldn't think you know much at all of battle and strategy. Perhaps you should join the rank and file, and leave the planning to the soldiers among us.”

Kaylia very nearly leaped up from her chair, but Gewey held her in place with quick glance.

“And what experience do you have, General Halman?” asked Chiron. “Border disputes? Roving bandits? Before you embarrass yourself any further, perhaps Gewey should take a moment to tell us of what he found in the desert. Those of us who know him would most certainly like to hear of this. And those in this hall who do not yet know him - well, they may benefit as well.”

Gewey nodded, and went on to recount in detail his adventures in the eastern desert. As he finished, some of the generals and captains in attendance snickered and laughed. Only the elves nodded their heads with understanding.

“And what proof do you have of these outlandish claims?” asked General Halman, looking amused. “I mean, if you can kill fifty men, and are truly a god, then surely you can offer up some sort of proof.”

“Gewey is what he says he is,” said Bellisia. “And I do not doubt his tale. He need not prove himself to you.”

“Clearly this boy has made fools of you all,” said Halman. “Can't you see that? What does a god need with armies? Could he not vanquish our foes with a wave of his hand?”

Without another word, Gewey waved not one hand, but both. Flames shot out from each, racing in opposite directions all around the walls of the hall until meeting just behind the general’s head and exploding with a thunderous boom. Halman lurched forward, crying out in fear and scurrying onto the table.

Gewey met the general’s eyes. We do not have time for debate and bickering. So tell me, General Halman, is there anything more I can do to ease you mind?”

General Halman crawled down from the table and took his seat. His hands trembled as he shook his head.

“We will crush Angrääl regardless of how many soldiers they have sent,” stated Gewey. His voice boomed and echoed off the walls of the chamber. “I will lay waste to the forces of the Dark Knight. I shall march with you to Skalhalis and burn them to cinders. And now we have new allies in the east to aid us.”

Anger and hatred swelled inside him. His power grew. Kaylia reached out and touched his mind. He could feel her concern. He looked down at her and whispered: “I'm fine.”

“And what would you have us do?” asked Prince Loniel.

“Gather your soldiers,” said Gewey. “In two days we march on Skalhalis. And when we arrive, Angrääl will know firsthand what it means to face a god.” The ground shook for a moment, then subsided. The flow of the spirit raged through him, bursting forth and spreading everywhere at once. He could see it touching the entire gathering. It passed into each one, washing over them like a torrent.

Everyone at the table jumped to their feet. The name Darshan was spoken. First by a few, then more and more, until all but Kaylia and Selena, were shouting out his name. Throughout this commotion, the two women continued to look warily at him.

Gewey spun around and left the room, Kaylia following close behind. She stopped him a few feet outside the door and took his face in her hands. “What happened there? I have never felt such rage in you before.”

“I am changing,” Gewey replied. “Becoming more powerful. I have run so far. I have lived in fear for so long. It is time for that to stop. In two days, I will show the Dark Knight the true meaning of fear.”

She looked deep into his eyes. “Am I speaking to Gewey or Darshan?”

Gewey took hold of her hands and pressed them to his heart. He kissed her gently and watched as a single tear spilled down her cheek.

“Now - I am both,” he told her.

End Book Three

Acknowledgements

Jonathan and Eleni Anderson, George Panagos, Vincentine Williams, Gerald and Donna Anderson, Hunter and Sarah Anderson, Bobby and Bobbie Anderson, the Ramos family, the DiBatista family, the Gnyp family, Jen Frith-Couch, Alex Harris, Jaocb and Elizabeth Bunton, Jenny Bunton, HCCS teachers and staff in Brooklyn and everyone who has supported me. I love you all!

About the Authors

Brian D. Anderson was born in 1971, and grew up in the small town of Spanish Fort, AL. He attended Fairhope High, then later Springhill College where his love for fantasy grew into a lifelong obsession. His hobbies include chess, history, and spending time with his son.

Jonathan Anderson was born in March of 2003. His creative spirit became evident by the age of three when he told his first original story. In 2010 he came up with the concept for The Godling Chronicles. It grew into an exciting collaboration between father and son. Jonathan enjoys sports, chess, music, games, and of course, telling stories.

Table of Contents

Contents

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 32

Chapter 33

Prologue

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31

Chapter 1

Chapter 2

Chapter 3

Chapter 4

Chapter 5

Chapter 6

Chapter 7

Chapter 8

Chapter 9

Chapter 10

Chapter 11

Chapter 12

Chapter 13

Chapter 14

Chapter 15

Chapter 16

Chapter 17

Chapter 18

Chapter 19

Chapter 20

Chapter 21

Chapter 22

Chapter 23

Chapter 24

Chapter 25

Chapter 26

Chapter 27

Chapter 28

Chapter 29

Chapter 30

Chapter 31